根本法门品巴利
1. Mūlapariyāyavaggo
《根本法门经》的注释巴利
1. Mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
1 至于“如是我闻”等这一部分,就是序分。其中,“evaṃ(如此)”是不变词,“me(我)”等是名词。在“Ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati(住在伍咖达城)”这一句里,“vi”是前缀,“harati”是动词。按照这样的方法,首先应当了解词的分析。巴利
1. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādikaṃ nidānaṃ. Tattha evanti nipātapadaṃ. Metiādīni nāmapadāni. Ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharatīti ettha vīti upasaggapadaṃ, haratīti ākhyātapadanti iminā tāva nayena padavibhāgo veditabbo.
从含义上说,“evaṃ”这个词本身就有很多不同的用法,包括譬喻、教导、随喜、呵责、领受话语、方式、指示、限定等。比如在“如此生者,应作众多善”(《法句经》53)等句中,它是用于譬喻。在“你应如此前进,你应如此后退”(《增支部》4.122)等句中,是用于教导。在“世尊,正是如此!善逝,正是如此!”(《增支部》3.66)等句中,是用于随喜。在“这个贱民女,竟如此这般地处处称赞那剃头沙门”(《相应部》1.187)等句中,是用于呵责。在“‘是的,尊者!’诸比丘如此回应世尊”(《中部》1.1)等句中,是用于领受话语。在“尊者!我如是了知世尊所开示之法”(《中部》1.398)等句中,是用于方式。在“来,年轻人,你前往沙门阿难那里,到了之后以我的话问候沙门阿难:少病、少恼、身轻、有气力、安住轻利。并这样说:‘善生童子都提耶之子向尊者阿难问讯少病、少恼、身轻、有气力、安住轻利。’并这样说:‘若尊者阿难出于慈悯,能光临善生童子都提耶之子的住处,那实在太好了’”(《长部》1.445)等句中,是用于指示。在“卡拉玛们!你们怎么看?这些法是善还是不善?”“不善,尊者。”……等句中,是用于限定。在这里,应当知道它可用于方式、指示和限定。巴利
Atthato pana evaṃ-saddo tāva upamūpadesasampahaṃsanagarahaṇavacanasampaṭiggahākāranidassanāvadhāraṇādianekatthappabhedo. Tathāhesa – ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccena kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu’’nti evamādīsu (dha. pa. 53) upamāyaṃ āgato. ‘‘Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabba’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.122) upadese. ‘‘Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) sampahaṃsane. ‘‘Evamevaṃ panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.187) garahaṇe. ‘‘Evaṃ bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) vacanasampaṭiggahe. ‘‘Evaṃ byākho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.398) ākāre. ‘‘Ehi tvaṃ, māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama, upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṃ, ānandaṃ, appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ puccha – ‘subho māṇavo todeyyaputto, bhavantaṃ ānandaṃ, appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ pucchatī’ti, evañca vadehi sādhu kira bhavaṃ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṃ, tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṃ upādāyā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.445) nidassane. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, kālāmā, ime dhammā kusalā vā akusalā vāti? Akusalā, bhante. Sāvajjā vā anavajjā vāti? Sāvajjā, bhante. Viññugarahitā vā viññuppasatthā vāti? Viññugarahitā, bhante. Samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotīti? Samattā, bhante, samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ no ettha hotī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) avadhāraṇe. Svāyamidha ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇesu daṭṭhabbo.
在这里,它是从“方式”这个意义出发,用“evaṃ(如此)”这个词来说明这个意思:世尊的教法,对各种理路都很精通,由无数不同的意乐所生起,义理和文句都圆满具足,有种种神变,对法义的宣说与体证极为深奥,能随顺一切众生各自的语言而传到他们耳边——谁有能力以一切方式完全了知它呢?只有先以全部心力生起想听闻的愿望,才说“如是我闻”,我也曾以某一种方式听闻过。巴利
Tattha ākāraṭṭhena evaṃsaddena etamatthaṃ dīpeti – nānānayanipuṇaṃ anekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ atthabyañjanasampannaṃ vividhapāṭihāriyaṃ dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhagambhīraṃ sabbasattānaṃ sakasakabhāsānurūpato sotapathamāgacchantaṃ tassa bhagavato vacanaṃ sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātuṃ, sabbathāmena pana sotukāmataṃ janetvāpi evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi ekenākārena sutanti.
以“指示”的作用,为了表明“我不是自生自悟的,此也不是由我亲自证得的”,从而解脱自己,所以说“如是我闻,我也曾这样听闻”,现在就用这句话来指示接下来要说的整部经。巴利
Nidassanaṭṭhena ‘‘nāhaṃ sayambhū, na mayā idaṃ sacchikata’’nti attānaṃ parimocento evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi evaṃ sutanti idāni vattabbaṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ nidasseti.
世尊这样称赞过:“比丘们,在我的弟子比丘当中,多闻第一的,就是阿难;具足正行第一的、具念第一的、坚定第一的、侍者第一的,也是阿难。”(《增支部》1.219-223)法将也这样称赞过:“具寿阿难是义理善巧、法善巧、文句善巧、语词善巧、前后连贯善巧。”(《增支部》5.169)为了显示自己的忆持能力与这些称赞相符,从而让众生心生想听的愿望,于是以“决定”的含义说:如是我闻,而且那内容无论在义理上还是文句上都不增不减,正应这样看待,不应看成别的样子。巴利
Avadhāraṇaṭṭhena ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahussutānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando, gatimantānaṃ, satimantānaṃ, dhitimantānaṃ, upaṭṭhākānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.219-223) evaṃ bhagavatā, ‘‘āyasmā ānando atthakusalo dhammakusalo byañjanakusalo niruttikusalo pubbāparakusalo’’ti (a. ni. 5.169) evaṃ dhammasenāpatinā ca pasatthabhāvānurūpaṃ attano dhāraṇabalaṃ dassento sattānaṃ sotukamyataṃ janeti ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ, tañca kho atthato vā byañjanato vā anūnamanadhikaṃ, evameva na aññathā daṭṭhabba’’nti.
“me”这个音声出现在三种意思里。比如在“以偈颂吟唱的食物,不该由我吃”这类句子里,意思是“由我”。在“善哉,尊者世尊,请为我简要说法”这类句子里,意思是“为我”。在“比丘们,你们要成为我的法继承人”这类句子里,意思是“我的”。但在这里,“由我听闻”和“我的听闻”这两种意思都讲得通。巴利
Me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hissa ‘‘gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyya’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 81) mayāti attho. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante bhagavā, saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.88) mayhanti attho. ‘‘Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) mamāti attho. Idha pana ‘‘mayā suta’’nti ca ‘‘mama suta’’nti ca atthadvaye yujjati.
“所闻”这个词,加上前缀或不加前缀,有多种不同的含义:行走、闻名、沾染、积集、修习、耳识所识、依耳门随转而了知,等等。比如在“随军队而行”这类说法里,意思是“行走”;在“见闻法者”这类说法里,意思是“闻名于法”;在“有漏对漏”这类说法里,意思是“沾染对沾染”;在“你们积集了广大福德”这类说法里,意思是“积集”;在“那些乐于禅那的智者”这类说法里,意思是“修习禅那”;在“所见、所闻、所觉”这类说法里,意思是“耳识所识”;在“持闻者、积闻者”这类说法里,意思是“依耳门随转而了知并持守”。而在这里,它的意思是通过耳门随转而“领受”或“领受之事”。因为“me”这个词如果表示“由我”,就应理解为:“这样,由我听闻——即由我依耳门随转而领受。”如果表示“我的”,就应理解为:“这样,我的听闻——即我依耳门随转的领受。”巴利
Sutanti ayaṃ suta-saddo saupasaggo ca anupasaggo ca gamana-vissuta-kilinna-upacitānuyoga-sotaviññeyya-sotadvārānusāraviññātādianekatthappabhedo. Tathā hissa ‘‘senāya pasuto’’tiādīsu gacchantoti attho. ‘‘Sutadhammassa passato’’tiādīsu (udā. 11) vissutadhammassāti attho, ‘‘avassutā avassutassāti’’ādīsu (pāci. 657) kilinnā kilinnassāti attho. ‘‘Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappaka’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 7.12) upacitanti attho. ‘‘Ye jhānapasutā dhīrā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 181) jhānānuyuttāti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.241) sotaviññeyyanti attho. ‘‘Sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) sotadvārānusāraviññātadharoti attho. Idha panassa sotadvārānusārena ‘‘upadhārita’’nti vā ‘‘upadhāraṇa’’nti vāti attho. Me-saddassa hi mayāti atthe sati ‘‘evaṃ mayā sutaṃ sotadvārānusārena upadhārita’’nti yujjati. Mamāti atthe sati ‘‘evaṃ mama sutaṃ sotadvārānusārena upadhāraṇa’’nti yujjati.
在这三个词中,“evam(如是)”是为了显示耳识等识的作用;“me(我)”是为了显示具有这种识的人;“sutam(闻)”是从否定“没有听闻”这一点上,显示对法没有减少、没有增加、没有颠倒地执取。同样,“evam”是显示依耳门随转而生的识流,以种种方式在所缘中活动的情形;“me”是显示自己;“sutam”是显示法。这里的关键意思是:“藉由以种种方式在所缘中转起的识流,我未做其他事,而是做了此事,即此法已闻。”巴利
Evametesu tīsu padesu evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassanaṃ. Meti vuttaviññāṇasamaṅgipuggalanidassanaṃ. Sutanti assavanabhāvappaṭikkhepato anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanaṃ. Tathā evanti tassā sotadvārānusārena pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattibhāvappakāsanaṃ. Meti attappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti dhammappakāsanaṃ. Ayañhettha saṅkhepo ‘‘nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā mayā na aññaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ pana kataṃ, ayaṃ dhammo suto’’ti.
“如是”这个词,是用来显示应当说明的内容。“我”这个词,是用来显示人。“闻”这个词,是用来显示人的作用。这里要表达的意思是:我将要解说的这部经,是我这样听闻的。巴利
Tathā evanti niddisitabbappakāsanaṃ. Meti puggalappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti puggalakiccappakāsanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yaṃ suttaṃ niddisissāmi, taṃ mayā evaṃ sutanti.
同样地,“如是”是指:当某个心相续以种种方式生起活动时,就产生了对种种含义和言辞的抓取,这是对种种方式的说明。因为“如是”是方式的安立,“我”是作者的说明,“听闻”是对象的说明。到此为止,就是以种种方式生起活动的心相续,使具备该心相续的作者,对对象完成了抓取和确定。巴利
Tathā evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso. Evanti hi ayaṃ ākārapaññatti, meti kattuniddeso, sutanti visayaniddeso. Ettāvatā nānākārappavattena cittasantānena taṃsamaṅgino kattuvisaye gahaṇasanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ hoti.
或者也可以这样理解:“evam”(如是)是对个人作用的说明;“sutam”(所闻)是对识的作用的说明;“me”(我)是对兼具这两种作用的个人的说明。这里的要点是:由具备听闻作用之识的我(个人),依识而获得听闻作用之名称,故称所闻。巴利
Atha vā evanti puggalakiccaniddeso. Sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso. Meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – mayā savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅginā puggalena viññāṇavasena laddhasavanakiccavohārena sutanti.
在这里,“如是”和“我”这两种说法,从真实、究竟的意义来看,都是不存在的假名施设。为什么呢?因为在究竟意义上,这里根本没有什么真实存在的东西,可以用“如是”或“我”来指称。而“闻”则是存在的施设。因为这里通过耳朵所获取的那个内容,在究竟意义上是真实存在的。巴利
Tattha evanti ca meti ca saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññatti. Kiñhettha taṃ paramatthato atthi, yaṃ evanti vā meti vā niddesaṃ labhetha? Sutanti vijjamānapaññatti. Yañhi tamettha sotena upaladdhaṃ, taṃ paramatthato vijjamānanti.
“如是”和“我”这两个说法,是依据这样那样的情况而说的,所以叫依止施设。“闻”是依据所见等而说的,所以叫类比施设。在这里,用“如是”这个词表示不迷乱,因为迷乱的人没办法通达种种行相。用“闻”这个词表示对所听到的不忘失,因为如果一个人把听到的忘了,过一段时间他就不会承认“我听过”。这样,由于不迷乱而成就慧,由于不忘失而成就念。其中,以慧为先导的念有能力确定音节,以念为先导的慧有能力通达义理;靠这两者兼备的能力,就能守护具足义理与音节的法藏,因此成就法藏师的身份。巴利
Tathā evanti ca meti ca taṃ taṃ upādāya vattabbato upādāpaññatti. Sutanti diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato upanidhāpaññatti. Ettha ca evanti vacanena asammohaṃ dīpeti. Na hi sammūḷho nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hoti. Sutanti vacanena sutassa asammosaṃ dīpeti. Yassa hi sutaṃ sammuṭṭhaṃ hoti , na so kālantarena mayā sutanti paṭijānāti. Iccassa asammohena paññāsiddhi, asammosena pana satisiddhi. Tattha paññā pubbaṅgamāya satiyā byañjanāvadhāraṇasamatthatā, satipubbaṅgamāya paññāya atthapaṭivedhasamatthatā, tadubhayasamatthatāyogena atthabyañjanasampannassa dhammakosassa anupālanasamatthato dhammabhaṇḍāgārikattasiddhi.
另一种解释方式:用“如是”这个词来说明如理作意,因为不如理作意的人就无法通达种种行相。用“闻”这个词来说明心不散乱,因为心散乱的人就没办法听闻。确实,一个心散乱的人,即使别人把所有圆满的话都对他说了,他还是会说:“我没听到,你再说一遍。”在这里,通过如理作意,能成就自己正确的愿向以及过去所积的福德,因为心没有正确安立的人,或者过去没有积福德的人,就不会有如理作意。通过不散乱,则能成就听闻正法和亲近善士。因为心散乱的人听不进去,不亲近善士的人也没有听闻的机会。巴利
Aparo nayo – evanti vacanena yoniso manasikāraṃ dīpeti, ayoniso manasikaroto hi nānappakārapaṭivedhābhāvato. Sutanti vacanena avikkhepaṃ dīpeti, vikkhittacittassa savanābhāvato. Tathā hi vikkhittacitto puggalo sabbasampattiyā vuccamānopi ‘‘na mayā sutaṃ, puna bhaṇathā’’ti bhaṇati. Yoniso manasikārena cettha attasammāpaṇidhiṃ pubbe ca katapuññataṃ sādheti, sammā apaṇihitattassa pubbe akatapuññassa vā tadabhāvato. Avikkhepena pana saddhammassavanaṃ sappurisūpanissayañca sādheti. Na hi vikkhittacitto sotuṃ sakkoti, na ca sappurise anupassayamānassa savanaṃ atthīti.
另一种解释:因为当某个心相续以种种方式生起时,能够把握种种义理和文句,这就叫作对种种方式的说明,所以才说“如此”。而这种善巧的方式,并不会出现在没有正确发愿的人身上,也不会出现在过去没有积集福德的人身上。因此,他用“如此”这句话,以这种善巧的方式,显示自己成就了后二轮;用“闻”这个词,通过听闻的关系,显示自己成就了前二轮。因为住在不合适的地方、又没有善知识依止的人,是不可能有机会听闻的。这样一来,由后二轮的成就,他的意乐清净就成立了;由前二轮的成就,他的加行清净就成立了。由于意乐清净,他成就了证悟的善巧;由于加行清净,他成就了教法的善巧。所以,一个加行和意乐都清净、具足教法与证悟的人,他说的话就像日出前的曙光,又像善业生起时的如理作意,足以成为世尊教法的前导。于是,他在适当的地方安立因缘,说出了“如是我闻”等话。巴利
Aparo nayo – yasmā evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddesoti vuttaṃ. So ca evaṃ bhaddako ākāro na sammā appaṇihitattano pubbe akatapuññassa vā hoti, tasmā evanti iminā bhaddakena ākārena pacchimacakkadvayasampattiṃ attano dīpeti, sutanti savanayogena purimacakkadvayasampattiṃ. Na hi appatirūpadese vasato sappurisūpanissayavirahitassa vā savanaṃ atthi. Iccassa pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyā āsayasuddhi siddhā hoti. Purimacakkadvayasiddhiyā payogasuddhi. Tāya ca āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhi, payogasuddhiyā āgamabyattisiddhi. Iti payogāsayasuddhassa āgamādhigamasampannassa vacanaṃ aruṇuggaṃ viya sūriyassa udayato yonisomanasikāro viya ca kusalakammassa arahati bhagavato vacanassa pubbaṅgamaṃ bhavitunti ṭhāne nidānaṃ ṭhapento evaṃ me sutantiādimāha.
另一种解释方式:用“如是”这句话,显示他能通达种种方式,从而表明他自己已经具足义无碍解和辩无碍解的成就。用“所闻”这句话,显示他能通达所闻的不同类别,从而表明他已经具足法无碍解和词无碍解的成就。当他说出“如是”这句显示如理作意的话时,是在表明:“这些法,我已经用意识反复观察,并以见解彻底通达。”当他说出“所闻”这句显示听闻加行的话时,是在表明:“很多法,我已经听闻、受持,并用语言反复温习。”通过这两方面,显示义理与文辞都圆满,从而让人对听闻生起恭敬心。因为,如果一个人对义理和文辞都圆满的法不恭敬地听闻,就会被排除在巨大的利益之外。所以,先让人生起恭敬心,然后应当殷重地听闻正法。巴利
Aparo nayo – evanti iminā nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakena vacanena attano atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ dīpeti. Sutanti iminā sotabbabhedapaṭivedhadīpakena dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ . Evanti ca idaṃ yonisomanasikāradīpakaṃ vacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘ete mayā dhammā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā’’ti dīpeti. Sutanti idaṃ savanayogadīpakaṃ vacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘bahū mayā dhammā sutā dhātā vacasā paricitā’’ti dīpeti. Tadubhayenapi atthabyañjanapāripūriṃ dīpento savane ādaraṃ janeti. Atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇañhi dhammaṃ ādarena assuṇanto mahatā hitā paribāhiro hotīti ādaraṃ janetvā sakkaccaṃ dhammo sotabboti.
阿难尊者用“如是我闻”这整句话,表明他不把如来所宣说的法当成自己的东西,这样就超越了非善人的境地;他承认自己是声闻弟子,这样就进入了善人的境地。同样,他让心从非正法中脱离出来,把心安立在正法上。他表明“这只是我所听闻的,正是那位世尊所说的话”,由此使自己免除过失,指出导师,确立胜者的教说,安立法的传承。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ me suta’’nti iminā pana sakalena vacanena āyasmā ānando tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammaṃ attano adahanto asappurisabhūmiṃ atikkamati, sāvakattaṃ paṭijānanto sappurisabhūmiṃ okkamati. Tathā asaddhammā cittaṃ vuṭṭhāpeti, saddhamme cittaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti. ‘‘Kevalaṃ sutamevetaṃ mayā tasseva pana bhagavato vacana’’nti dīpento attānaṃ parimoceti, satthāraṃ apadisati, jinavacanaṃ appeti, dhammanettiṃ patiṭṭhāpeti.
而且,他不承认“如是我闻”这句话是自己编出来的,而是为了阐明前面那句话:“这是我在那位世尊面前亲耳领受的——那位世尊具足四无畏、充满自信,持有十力,安住于牛王之境,发出狮子吼,是一切众生中最殊胜者,是法主、法王、法的增上者、法灯、法皈依处,是善妙转法轮者,是正等正觉者。这是他的话语。因此,对其中之义、法、句、字,都不应生起任何疑惑或犹豫。”——他就这样灭除一切天与人对这法的无信,令他们生起信心。因此,接下来这样说:巴利
Apica ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti attanā uppāditabhāvaṃ appaṭijānanto purimavacanaṃ vivaranto ‘‘sammukhā paṭiggahitamidaṃ mayā tassa bhagavato catuvesārajjavisāradassa dasabaladharassa āsabhaṭṭhānaṭṭhāyino sīhanādanādino sabbasattuttamassa dhammissarassa dhammarājassa dhammādhipatino dhammadīpassa dhammasaraṇassa saddhammavaracakkavattino sammāsambuddhassa vacanaṃ, na ettha atthe vā dhamme vā pade vā byañjane vā kaṅkhā vā vimati vā kattabbā’’ti sabbadevamanussānaṃ imasmiṃ dhamme assaddhiyaṃ vināseti, saddhāsampadaṃ uppādetīti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
他摧毁无信,在教法中增长信心;
如是我闻,乔达摩的弟子这样说。巴利
‘‘Vināsayati assaddhaṃ, saddhaṃ vaḍḍheti sāsane; Evaṃ me sutamiccevaṃ, vadaṃ gotamasāvako’’ti.
“一”是对数量的界定说明。“时”是对时间范围的界定说明。“一时”则是一种不确定的表述。在这里,“时”这个词——巴利
Ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso. Samayanti paricchinnaniddeso. Ekaṃ samayanti aniyamitaparidīpanaṃ. Tattha samayasaddo –
在集会、刹那、时段、群体、原因和见这些意思上;
在获得、断除和通达这三层意思上,也能看到它的用法。巴利
Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetudiṭṭhisu; Paṭilābhe pahāne ca, paṭivedhe ca dissati.
同样地,在“或许我们明天也能依着时机和因缘前去”这类语句中(《长部》1.447),samaya 是“集会”的意思。在“比丘们,只有一个刹那、一个时机适合修梵行”这类语句中(《增支部》8.29),是“刹那”的意思。在“暑热之时、酷热之时”这类语句中(《波逸提》358),是“时节”的意思。在“大集会在森林中”这类语句中,是“聚集”的意思。在“跋陀利,你也没有把握住这个因缘:世尊住在舍卫城,世尊也会知道我——‘名叫跋陀利的比丘,在导师的教法中,于修学上并不圆满’;跋陀利,你也没有把握住这个因缘”这类语句中(《中部》2.135),是“原因”的意思。在“那时,游方者优伽诃马那——沙门文荼之子,住在末利夫人园中的丁杜卡讲堂,宣说各种议论”这类语句中(《中部》2.260),是“见解”的意思。巴利
Tathā hissa ‘‘appeva nāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 1.447) samavāyo attho. ‘‘Ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) khaṇo. ‘‘Uṇhasamayo pariḷāhasamayo’’tiādīsu (pāci. 358) kālo. ‘‘Mahāsamayo pavanasmi’’ntiādīsu samūho. ‘‘Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi, bhagavā kho sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, bhagavāpi maṃ jānissati, ‘bhaddāli, nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya na paripūrakārī’ti, ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.135) hetu . ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.260) diṭṭhi.
在当下这一生中能得到的利益,以及在未来世中能得到的利益;
智者因为通达了这些意义,就被称为智者。巴利
‘‘Diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko; Atthābhisamayā dhīro, paṇḍitoti pavuccatī’’ti. –
在“等”处(《相应部》1.129),是“获得”的意思。在“由正现观慢而作苦之边际”等处(《中部》1.24),是“断除”的意思。在“苦的逼迫义、有为义、热恼义、变易义、现观义”等处(《无碍解道》3.1),是“通达”的意思。而在这里,它是“时节”的意思。因此,在年、季、月、半月、夜、日、上午、正午、傍晚、初夜、中夜、后夜、须臾等这些构成时间差别的各种时中,用“一时”来表明。巴利
Ādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.129) paṭilābho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.24) pahānaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho abhisamayaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 3.1) paṭivedho. Idha panassa kālo attho. Tena saṃvacchara-utu-māsaḍḍhamāsa-ratti-diva-pubbaṇha-majjhanhika-sāyanha- paṭhamamajjhimapacchimayāma-muhuttādīsu kālappabhedabhūtesu samayesu ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti.
在这里,虽然在这些年等时期中,无论哪一年、哪一季、哪一月、哪一半月、哪一夜分或哪一日分所说的任何经,长老都以智慧完全了知、完全确认。但是,如果这样说:“如是我闻:在某年、某季、某月、某半月、某夜分、某日分”,就不容易记住,也不容易诵习或教人诵习,而且要说很多话。所以,他用“一时”这一个词就把那个意思总括起来说了。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi etesu saṃvaccharādīsu samayesu yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ yamhi yamhi saṃvacchare utumhi māse pakkhe rattibhāge divasabhāge vā vuttaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ therassa suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitaṃ paññāya. Yasmā pana ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ asukasaṃvacchare asukautumhi asukamāse asukapakkhe asukarattibhāge asukadivasabhāge vā’’ti evaṃ vutte na sakkā sukhena dhāretuṃ vā uddisituṃ vā uddisāpetuṃ vā, bahu ca vattabbaṃ hoti, tasmā ekeneva padena tamatthaṃ samodhānetvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
或者,还有这些时候:入胎时、出生时、生起厌离时、出家时、修苦行时、降伏魔罗时、现等觉时、现法乐住时、说法时、般涅槃时等等。这些都是世尊在天界与人间极为明显、种种不同时段的时候。在这些时候当中,它指的是被称为“说法时”的那一个“一时”。而在智慧与悲悯所行的时候当中,有黎明时分;在自利与利他所行的时候当中,有利他行的时候;在聚集大众所应做的两件事当中,有法谈的时候;在说法与修持的时候当中,有说法的时候;在这些时候当中,针对其中某一个,而说“一时”。巴利
Ye vā ime gabbhokkantisamayo jātisamayo saṃvegasamayo abhinikkhamanasamayo dukkarakārikasamayo māravijayasamayo abhisambodhisamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo desanāsamayo parinibbānasamayoti evamādayo bhagavato devamanussesu ativiya suppakāsā anekakālappabhedā eva samayā, tesu samayesu desanāsamayasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti. Yo cāyaṃ ñāṇakaruṇākiccasamayesu aruṇākiccasamayo, attahitaparahitapaṭipattisamayesu parahitapaṭipattisamayo, sannipatitānaṃ karaṇīyadvayasamayesu dhammikathāsamayo, desanāpaṭipattisamayesu desanāsamayo, tesupi samayesu aññataraṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
那么,为什么这里不像阿毗达摩里那样用处格来说“于欲界时”,也不像其他经文里那样用处格说“诸比丘,于某时,比丘远离诸欲”,也不像律藏里那样用具格说“那时,佛陀世尊”,而是改用对格来说“一时”呢?因为在这两种场合,含义的成立方式不同。在阿毗达摩和其他经文里,“时”可以表示依据,也可以表示以状态标示状态。作为依据的“时”,既有时节的意思,也有集合的意思;在那里,所说的触等诸法,是通过被称为“刹那和合因”的“时”这个状态,来标示它们自身的状态。为了阐明这层含义,那些地方就采用了处格的表述。巴利
Kasmā panettha yathā abhidhamme ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara’’nti ca ito aññesu suttapadesu ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī’’ti ca bhummavacanena niddeso kato, vinaye ca ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’ti karaṇavacanena, tathā akatvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti upayogavacananiddeso katoti. Tattha tathā idha ca aññathā atthasambhavato. Tattha hi abhidhamme ito aññesu suttapadesu ca adhikaraṇattho bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho ca sambhavati. Adhikaraṇañhi kālattho ca samūhattho ca samayo, tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassa ca samayassa bhāvena tesaṃ bhāvo lakkhīyati, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha bhummavacananiddeso kato.
在律藏里,因的意义和工具的意义都能成立。也就是说,制立学处的那一时机,连舍利弗等人也难以了知;世尊正是以那个时机作为因、作为工具,一边制立学处,一边顾念着制戒的因由,而各处游化安住。因此,为了说明这层含义,那里就用具格来表述。巴利
Vinaye ca hetuattho karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Yo hi so sikkhāpadapaññattisamayo sāriputtādīhipi dubbiññeyyo, tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtena ca sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsi, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha karaṇavacanena niddeso kato.
在这里,对于其他同类情况,则成立“完全联结”的意义。因为世尊无论宣说这部经还是其他任何经典,在那个时候都确实一直以悲心而住。因此,为了说明这个意思,这里就采用了对格的表述。巴利
Idha pana aññasmiñca evaṃjātike accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati. Yañhi samayaṃ bhagavā imaṃ aññaṃ vā suttantaṃ desesi, accantameva taṃ samayaṃ karuṇāvihārena vihāsi, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ idha upayogavacananiddeso katoti.
因此才这样说:巴利
Tenetaṃ vuccati –
观待这个那个义,以及处格和具格。
时在别处被说,此处则以对格出现。巴利
‘‘Taṃ taṃ atthamapekkhitvā, bhummena karaṇena ca; Aññatra samayo vutto, upayogena so idhā’’ti.
古德们则这样解释:说“tasmiṃ samaye”(于彼时),或说“tena samayena”(以彼时),或说“ekaṃ samayaṃ”(一时),这只是说法上的差别,意思在任何地方都是处格。所以,即使说“ekaṃ samayaṃ”(一时),也应理解为“ekasmiṃ samaye”(在某一时)的意思。巴利
Porāṇā pana vaṇṇayanti – ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye’’ti vā – ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti vā – ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vā abhilāpamattabhedo esa, sabbattha bhummameva atthoti. Tasmā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vuttepi ‘‘ekasmiṃ samaye’’ti attho veditabbo.
世尊就是导师。因为在世间,人们把导师称为“世尊”。而这位导师由于具足一切最殊胜的功德,是一切众生所敬重的导师,因此应当知道他就是“世尊”。古人也曾这样说:巴利
Bhagavāti garu. Garuñhi loke ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vadanti. Ayañca sabbaguṇavisiṭṭhatāya sabbasattānaṃ garu, tasmā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti veditabbo. Porāṇehipi vuttaṃ –
“世尊”这个词是最殊胜的,“世尊”这个词是最无上的;
他具备对尊长恭敬的品德,因此被称为世尊。巴利
‘‘Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttamaṃ; Garugāravayutto so, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti.
具足福运,具足破灭,相应结合,并以诸福而善分别;
受用过食物,已弃行去,所以在诸有中被称为世尊。巴利
‘‘Bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto, bhagehi ca vibhattavā; Bhattavā vantagamano, bhavesu bhagavā tato’’ti. –
通过这个偈颂,那个词“vasena”的含义应详细理解。而这个含义,在《清净道论》的“佛随念”部分里已经讲过了。巴利
Imissā gāthāya vasenassa padassa vitthārato attho veditabbo. So ca visuddhimagge buddhānussatiniddese vuttoyeva.
到这里,通过“如是我闻”这句话,开示了如实听闻的法,从而让世尊的法身呈现在眼前。借此安慰那些因为见不到导师而沮丧的人:“这教法并没有离开导师,这位就是你们的导师。”巴利
Ettāvatā cettha evaṃ me sutanti vacanena yathāsutaṃ dhammaṃ dassento bhagavato dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karoti. Tena – ‘‘nayidaṃ atikkantasatthukaṃ pāvacanaṃ, ayaṃ vo satthā’’ti satthu adassanena ukkaṇṭhitaṃ janaṃ samassāseti.
用“一时,世尊”这句话,是在说明当时世尊已经不在,从而成立色身的般涅槃。借此警醒那些因生命而骄慢的人:“宣说这样圣法的、具足十力、身如金刚聚合的世尊,也已经般涅槃了,还有什么别的能让人对生命生起期待呢?”由此让他们对正法生起精进之心。巴利
Ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavāti vacanena tasmiṃ samaye bhagavato avijjamānabhāvaṃ dassento rūpakāyaparinibbānaṃ sādheti. Tena ‘‘evaṃvidhassa nāma ariyadhammassa desako dasabaladharo vajirasaṅghātasamānakāyo, sopi bhagavā parinibbuto, kena aññena jīvite āsā janetabbā’’ti jīvitamadamattaṃ janaṃ saṃvejeti, saddhamme cassa ussāhaṃ janeti.
说“如是”这句话,是在指出教法方面的圆满。说“我闻”,是在指出弟子方面的圆满。说“一时”,是在指出时间方面的圆满。说“世尊”,是在指出说法者方面的圆满。巴利
Evanti ca bhaṇanto desanāsampattiṃ niddisati. Me sutanti sāvakasampattiṃ. Ekaṃ samayanti kālasampattiṃ. Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ.
在“住在伍咖达城”这句话里,“乌迦”的意思是灯。那座城之所以叫“伍咖达”,是因为在“吉祥日、良辰、善宿,不要错过”的那个夜晚,人们点着灯站着,就这样建起了城,所以叫“伍咖达”。意思是说,点起并举着火炬等灯来建成的,所以叫“在伍咖达城”。这里的格是表示附近。所谓“住”,笼统地说,是在威仪住、天住、梵住、圣住等各种住中,具备其中某一种住。但在这里,是指行、站、坐、卧这些威仪当中,与某一种威仪相应。因此,世尊无论是站着、走着、坐着还是躺着,都应理解为“住”。因为世尊以另一种威仪切断一种威仪的障碍后,让身体不间断地延续、运转下去,所以称为“住”。巴利
Ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharatīti ettha ukkāti dīpikā, tañca nagaraṃ ‘‘maṅgaladivaso sukhaṇo sunakkhattaṃ mā atikkamī’’ti rattimpi ukkāsu ṭhitāsu māpitattā ukkaṭṭhāti vuccati. Daṇḍadīpikāsu jāletvā dhārīyamānāsu māpitattāti vuttaṃ hoti, tassaṃ ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Viharatīti avisesena iriyāpathadibbabrahmaariyavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgiparidīpanametaṃ. Idha pana ṭhānagamananisinnasayanappabhedesu riyāpathesu aññatarairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ. Tena ṭhitopi gacchantopi nisinnopi sayānopi bhagavā viharaticceva veditabbo. So hi bhagavā ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavatteti, tasmā viharatīti vuccati.
在“幸运林”这个词里,“幸运”是因为它本身幸运,也就是具足美好的繁荣和可爱的特质,这样说就是在表达这个意思。“林”有恳请的意思,因为它以自身的圆满令众生生起敬爱,在自己身上生起爱著,这就是其含义。或者,“林”有遮蔽的意思,因为种种花香弥漫、令人陶醉,杜鹃等鸟类的鸣叫,以及被微风轻摇的树枝、树梢、嫩叶与树叶,这一切仿佛在向一切众生请求:“来吧,请享用我吧!”这就是其含义。幸运即是林,故称“幸运林”,在此幸运林中。因为这片林子的繁荣美好,人们带着食物和饮料等,整天就在那里举行节庆集会,享受欲乐,并且在这里希求各种美好的愿望,比如“愿我们得个儿子,愿我们得个女儿”,而他们的愿望真的都能实现。这样一来,这片林子因为具足美好的繁荣和可爱的特质,所以就是“幸运”的。另外,也因为被大众所喜爱,所以也是“幸运”的。所谓林,有种植的和自然生的两种。其中,竹林、祇陀林等是种植的;安达林、大林、安阇那林等是自然生的。这里也应当知道是自然生的。巴利
Subhagavaneti ettha subhagattā subhagaṃ, sundarasirikattā sundarakāmattā cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa hi vanassa sirisampattiyā manussā annapānādīni ādāya divasaṃ tattheva chaṇasamajjaussave karontā bhogasukhaṃ anubhonti, sundarasundare cettha kāme patthenti ‘‘puttaṃ labhāma, dhītaraṃ labhāmā’’ti, tesaṃ taṃ tatheva hoti, evaṃ taṃ sundarasirikattā sundarakāmattā ca subhagaṃ. Apica bahujanakantatāyapi subhagaṃ. Vanayatīti vanaṃ, attasampadāya sattānaṃ bhattiṃ kāreti, attani sinehaṃ uppādetīti attho. Vanute iti vā vanaṃ, nānāvidhakusuma-gandhasammodamattakokilādivihaṅgamābhirutehi mandamālutacalitarukkhasākhāviṭapapallavapalāsehi ca ‘‘etha maṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti sabbapāṇino yācati viyāti attho. Subhagañca taṃ vanañcāti subhagavanaṃ. Tasmiṃ subhagavane. Vanañca nāma ropimaṃ, sayaṃjātanti duvidhaṃ. Tattha veḷuvanajetavanādīni ropimāni. Andhavanamahāvanaañjanavanādīni sayaṃ jātāni. Idampi sayaṃjātanti veditabbaṃ.
在“沙罗王树下”这一句里,沙罗树也可以单称为沙罗。就像经文里说的:“比丘们,譬如在村庄或城镇不远处有一大片沙罗林,而且被蓖麻覆盖着。”(《中部》1.225)还有“在双沙罗树之间”(《长部》2.195)。沙罗树也指林中最高大的树。就像偈颂里说的:巴利
Sālarājamūleti ettha sālarukkhopi sāloti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre mahantaṃ sālavanaṃ, tañcassa eḷaṇḍehi sañchanna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.225) ‘‘antarena yamakasālāna’’nti ca (dī. ni. 2.195) vanappatijeṭṭhakarukkhopi. Yathāha –
就在你自己的国土里,大王,就在你自己的园林中;
笔直挺拔的大沙罗树,泛着悦目的蓝光。巴利
‘‘Taveva deva vijite, tavevuyyānabhūmiyā; Ujuvaṃsā mahāsālā, nīlobhāsā manoramā’’ti. (jā. 2.19.4);
任何一棵树都可以叫“沙罗树”。就像经文里说的:“比丘们,那时那颗摩卢瓦种子掉在某棵沙罗树根边。”(《中部》1.469)但在这里,指的是森林中最尊贵的那棵树。“王”这个字,正是用来表明它那最尊贵的地位。就像经文里说的:“婆罗门,对于那棵安住稳固、如法的榕树王……”(《增支部》6.54)这个复合词有两种拆解方式:一是“沙罗树中的王”,叫沙罗王;二是“那棵沙罗树,因为最尊贵所以是王”,也叫沙罗王。“根”的意思是附近。因为“根”这个词,在“把根拔出来,哪怕只有须芒草茎那么一点”(《增支部》4.195)这类地方,指的是真正的根;在“贪是不善根”(《长部》3.305)这类地方,指的是不共的因;在“直到正午时分影子移动、无风处树叶落下,到那里为止就是树下”这类地方,指的是附近。而在这里,指的是附近。所以这里的含义应当理解为:在沙罗王的附近。巴利
Yo koci rukkhopi. Yathāha ‘‘atha kho taṃ, bhikkhave, māluvabījaṃ aññatarasmiṃ sālamūle nipateyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.469). Idha pana vanappatijeṭṭhakarukkho adhippeto. Rājasaddo panassa tameva jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ sādheti. Yathāha ‘‘suppatiṭṭhitassa kho brāhmaṇa dhammika nigrodharājassā’’ti (a. ni. 6.54). Tattha dvedhā samāso, sālānaṃ rājātipi sālarājā, sālo ca so jeṭṭhakaṭṭhena rājā ca itipi sālarājā. Mūlanti samīpaṃ. Ayañhi mūlasaddo, ‘‘mūlāni uddhareyya, antamaso usiranāḷimattānipī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.195) mūlamūle dissati. ‘‘Lobho akusalamūla’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.305) asādhāraṇahetumhi. ‘‘Yāva majjhanhike kāle chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni patanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūla’’ntiādīsu samīpe. Idha pana samīpe adhippeto, tasmā sālarājassa samīpeti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
这里也许有人会说:如果世尊住在伍咖达城,就不该说“在幸运林沙喇王树下”;如果住在那里,就不该说“在伍咖达城”,因为世尊不可能同时住在两个地方。但不能这样看。巴利
Tattha siyā – yadi tāva bhagavā ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati, ‘‘subhagavane sālarājamūle’’ti na vattabbaṃ, atha tattha viharati, ‘‘ukkaṭṭhāya’’nti na vattabbaṃ, na hi sakkā ubhayattha ekaṃ samayaṃ viharitunti. Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
我们不是已经说过“这里用的是表示邻近的处格”吗?所以,就像在恒河、耶牟那河等附近吃草的牛群,会被说成“在恒河吃草、在耶牟那河吃草”,这里也是一样。位于伍咖达城附近的幸运林沙喇王树下,在那里安住者,就被称为“在伍咖达城、在幸运林、在沙喇王树下安住”。这里说“伍咖达城”,是为了指出乞食的村庄;其余的话,则是为了指出适合出家人居住的地方。巴利
Nanu avocumha ‘‘samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacana’’nti. Tasmā yathā gaṅgāyamunādīnaṃ samīpe goyūthāni carantāni ‘‘gaṅgāya caranti, yamunāya carantī’’ti vuccanti, evamidhāpi yadidaṃ ukkaṭṭhāya samīpe subhagavanaṃ sālarājamūlaṃ, tattha viharanto vuccati ‘‘ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati subhagavane sālarājamūle’’ti. Gocaragāmanidassanatthañhissa ukkaṭṭhāvacanaṃ, pabbajitānurūpanivāsaṭṭhānanidassanatthaṃ sesavacanaṃ.
在这里,阿难尊者通过最高的称颂,说明世尊对在家众的摄受护持;通过提到幸运林等,说明对出家众的摄受护持。同样,前者表明接受资具,从而避免自我折磨的苦行;后者表明舍弃对场所的欲贪,从而显示远离沉溺欲乐的善巧方法。前者表明致力于说法,后者表明倾心于远离。前者表明以悲悯走近众生,后者表明以智慧远离。前者表明致力于成办众生的利益与安乐,后者表明在成办他人利益安乐时心无染着。前者以如法不舍弃安乐的相,表明安住于轻安;后者以专修超越人法的相,表明安住。前者表明对人间多有饶益,后者表明对诸天多有饶益。前者表明生于世间、在世间成长,后者表明不被世间所染。前者依据“诸比丘,有一人出现于世间,是为众多人的利益、为众多人的安乐、为悲悯世间、为诸天与人的义利、利益、安乐而出现。是哪一人?就是如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者”这一说法,表明世尊实现了降生世间的目的;后者表明世尊安住于与出生地相应的住所。因为世尊最初出生在蓝毗尼林,第二次在菩提道场——无论世间还是出世间的诞生,都发生在林中,所以这里也显示他安住在林中。应当以这样的方式理解此处的义理。巴利
Tattha ukkaṭṭhākittanena āyasmā ānando bhagavato gahaṭṭhānuggahakaraṇaṃ dasseti, subhagavanādikittanena pabbajitānuggahakaraṇaṃ. Tathā purimena paccayaggahaṇato attakilamathānuyogavivajjanaṃ, pacchimena vatthukāmappahānato kāmasukhallikānuyogavivajjanupāyadassanaṃ. Purimena ca dhammadesanābhiyogaṃ, pacchimena vivekādhimuttiṃ. Purimena karuṇāya upagamanaṃ, pacchimena paññāya apagamanaṃ. Purimena sattānaṃ hitasukhanipphādanādhimuttataṃ, pacchimena parahitasukhakaraṇe nirupalepanaṃ. Purimena dhammikasukhāpariccāganimittaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ, pacchimena uttarimanussadhammānuyoganimittaṃ . Purimena manussānaṃ upakārabahulataṃ, pacchimena devānaṃ. Purimena loke jātassa loke saṃvaḍḍhabhāvaṃ, pacchimena lokena anupalittataṃ. Purimena ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṃ. Katamo ekapuggalo, tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti (a. ni. 1.170) vacanato yadatthaṃ bhagavā uppanno, tadatthaparinipphādanaṃ, pacchimena yattha uppanno, tadanurūpavihāraṃ. Bhagavā hi paṭhamaṃ lumbinivane, dutiyaṃ bodhimaṇḍeti lokiyalokuttarāya uppattiyā vaneyeva uppanno, tenassa vaneyeva vihāraṃ dassetīti evamādinā nayenettha atthayojanā veditabbā.
“在那里”是为了指明地点和时间。因为世尊在哪个时间安住,就是在那个时间;在哪棵沙罗王树下安住,就是在那个沙罗王树下。或者说,它是指明值得说法的地点和时间。因为世尊不会在不适当的地点或不适当的时间说法。像“婆醯,现在还不是时候”(《优陀那》10)这样的经文,就是这里的例证。“kho”只是用来补足音节的虚词。所谓“世尊”,是显示世间的敬重。“比丘们”是指适合听法的人。另外在这里,应该按照“乞食者叫比丘,因为随顺乞食之行,所以叫比丘”(《波罗夷》45)这样的方式来理解词义。“呼唤”的意思是称呼、说话、唤醒,在这里就是这个意思。但在别的语境里,也用于告知。比如“诸比丘,我告诉你们,我向你们宣告。”也用于召请。比如“来,比丘,你以我的话去叫舍利弗来。”(《增支部》9.11)巴利
Tatrāti desakālaparidīpanaṃ. Tañhi yaṃ samayaṃ viharati, tatra samaye. Yasmiñca sālarājamūle viharati, tatra sālarājamūleti dīpeti. Bhāsitabbayutte vā desakāle dīpeti. Na hi bhagavā ayutte dese kāle vā dhammaṃ bhāsati. ‘‘Akālo kho tāva bāhiyā’’ti (udā. 10) ādicettha sādhakaṃ. Khoti padapūraṇamatte avadhāraṇe ādikālatthe vā nipāto. Bhagavāti lokagarudīpanaṃ. Bhikkhūti kathāsavanayuttapuggalavacanaṃ. Apicettha, ‘‘bhikkhakoti bhikkhu, bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhū’’tiādinā (pārā. 45) nayena vacanattho veditabbo. Āmantesīti ālapi abhāsi sambodhesīti ayamettha attho. Aññatra pana ñāpanepi hoti. Yathāha ‘‘āmantayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave’’ti. Pakkosanepi. Yathāha ‘‘ehi tvaṃ bhikkhu mama vacanena sāriputtaṃ āmantehī’’ti (a. ni. 9.11).
“比丘们”这个称呼,是在表明一种呼唤的方式。之所以这样说,是因为他们确实具备了乞食等品行和功德。按照语言学者们的看法,比丘既可以指具备乞食品行功德的人,也可以指具备乞食法性功德的人,还可以指善于乞食的功德者。世尊用这个表明他们具备乞食等功德的称呼,是在指出他们所过的生活,是低劣之人和殊胜之人都会依靠的,借此调伏他们掉举和沮丧的心态。而“比丘们”这个称呼,是以悲心流露、柔和的目光为先导说出来的,让那些比丘面向自己;也正是这个表明想要说法的称呼,让他们生起想听的意愿;同时,借着呼唤的作用,促使他们好好听闻并用心作意。因为佛陀教法的成就,就取决于好好听闻和用心作意。巴利
Bhikkhavoti āmantanākāradīpanaṃ. Tañca bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogasiddhattā vuttaṃ. Bhikkhanasīlatāguṇayuttopi hi bhikkhu bhikkhanadhammatāguṇayuttopi. Bhikkhane sādhukāritāguṇayuttopīti saddavidū maññanti. Tena ca nesaṃ bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogasiddhena vacanena hīnādhikajanasevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento uddhatadīnabhāvaniggahaṃ karoti. Bhikkhavoti iminā ca karuṇāvipphārasommahadayanayananipātapubbaṅgamena vacanena te attano mukhābhimukhe karoti. Teneva ca kathetukamyatādīpakena vacanena nesaṃ sotukamyataṃ janeti. Teneva ca sambodhanaṭṭhena sādhukaṃ savanamanasikārepi ne niyojeti. Sādhukasavanamanasikārāyattā hi sāsanasampatti.
如果有人问:既然还有其他天人和人也在场,为什么世尊只呼唤比丘们呢?因为比丘们在僧众中是年长者、是最胜者、是亲近者、是常随侍者。世尊的说法,本来是对一切大众共同而说的。但在大众之中,比丘们是年长者,因为他们最先出家受戒;是最胜者,因为他们以出家生活为起点,随学导师的行为,并且是全部教法的领受者;是亲近者,因为当大家坐在那里时,他们离导师最近;是常随侍者,因为他们经常在导师身边。而且,他们是堪能领受说法的容器,因为他们能按照教导去修行。特别是,这番说法是针对某些比丘而说的,所以世尊只呼唤他们。巴利
Aparesupi devamanussesu vijjamānesu kasmā bhikkhūyeva āmantesīti ce. Jeṭṭhaseṭṭhāsannasadāsannihitabhāvato. Sabbaparisasādhāraṇā hi bhagavato dhammadesanā. Parisāya ca jeṭṭhā bhikkhū, paṭhamuppannattā. Seṭṭhā, anagāriyabhāvaṃ ādiṃ katvā satthucariyānuvidhāyakattā sakalasāsanapaṭiggāhakattā ca. Āsannā, tattha nisinnesu satthusantikattā. Sadāsannihitā, satthusantikāvacarattāti. Apica te dhammadesanāya bhājanaṃ, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattisabbhāvato. Visesato ca ekacce bhikkhūyeva sandhāya ayaṃ desanātipi te eva āmantesi.
这里可能会有人问:世尊说法的时候,为什么先招呼比丘们,而不是直接说法呢?这是为了唤起他们的注意。因为比丘们坐在那里,有的在想别的事情,有的心散乱,有的在观察法,有的在作意业处。如果不先招呼他们就说法,他们可能分辨不清:“这个开示是以什么为起因、以什么为条件、因为什么因缘而说的”,也可能理解错了,或者干脆没接受。所以,为了唤起他们的注意,世尊先招呼,然后才说法。巴利
Tattha siyā – kimatthaṃ pana bhagavā dhammaṃ desento paṭhamaṃ bhikkhū āmantesi, na dhammameva desetīti. Satijananatthaṃ. Bhikkhū hi aññaṃ cintentāpi vikkhittacittāpi dhammaṃ paccavekkhantāpi kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontāpi nisinnā honti, te anāmantetvā dhamme desiyamāne – ‘‘ayaṃ desanā kinnidānā kiṃpaccayā katamāya aṭṭhuppattiyā desitā’’ti sallakkhetuṃ asakkontā duggahitaṃ vā gaṇheyyuṃ, na vā gaṇheyyuṃ. Tena nesaṃ satijananatthaṃ bhagavā paṭhamaṃ āmantetvā pacchā dhammaṃ deseti.
“尊者”是表示恭敬的说法,也可以是对导师的应答之词。这里,世尊说“诸比丘”时,是在呼唤那些比丘;比丘们说“尊者”时,是在回应世尊。同样,世尊呼唤“诸比丘”,他们就回应“尊者”。世尊说“诸比丘”是让他们应答,他们说“尊者”是给出应答。“那些比丘”,就是世尊所呼唤的人。“他们回应世尊”,意思是他们回应了世尊的呼唤,面对世尊而聆听、接受、领纳。“世尊这样说”,是说世尊现在宣说了应当说出的整部经。巴利
Bhadanteti gāravavacanametaṃ, satthuno paṭivacanadānaṃ vā, apicettha bhikkhavoti vadamāno bhagavā te bhikkhū ālapati. Bhadanteti vadamānā te bhagavantaṃ paccālapanti. Tathā bhikkhavoti bhagavā ābhāsati. Bhadanteti te paccābhāsanti. Bhikkhavoti paṭivacanaṃ dāpeti, bhadanteti paṭivacanaṃ denti. Te bhikkhūti ye bhagavā āmantesi. Bhagavato paccassosunti bhagavato āmantanaṃ paṭiassosuṃ, abhimukhā hutvā suṇiṃsu sampaṭicchiṃsu paṭiggahesunti attho. Bhagavā etadavocāti bhagavā etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ avoca.
到这里为止,阿难尊者所说的序分,是为了让人容易进入这部经典——这部经典义理和文句都圆满,能显示佛陀教法智慧的深奥。就像为了让人容易进入一座莲池,池中开满红莲和青莲,池水清净、甘美,池边渡口铺着洁净的石板,建有宝阶,散落着像珍珠一样的白沙,地面洁白,四周有整齐的墙壁和精美的栏杆;又像为了让人容易登上那座高耸如抵星宿的殊妙宫殿,而设的阶梯,阶梯以象牙制成,平滑柔软,缠着金色藤蔓,众宝的光辉交相辉映,明亮庄严;又像为了让人容易进入一座大宅,宅中家人往来,金镯、脚环碰触的声音与言语、笑声、甜美的话音交织在一起,宅邸具足广大自在与财富的庄严,而它的大门宽阔坚固,门柱由金、银、宝石、珍珠、珊瑚等流溢的光芒所照耀。这部经典的序分也是如此,具备说法的时间、地点、说法者、所说事、与会大众和说法因缘,庄严圆满,是为了让人容易趣入这部经典。它的义理注释到此完成。巴利
Ettāvatā ca yaṃ āyasmatā ānandena kamalakuvalayujjalavimalasādurasasalilāya pokkharaṇiyā sukhāvataraṇatthaṃ nimmalasilātalaracanavilāsasobhitaratanasopānaṃ vippakiṇṇamuttātalasadisavālikākiṇṇapaṇḍarabhūmibhāgaṃ titthaṃ viya suvibhattabhittivicitravedikāparikkhittassa nakkhattapathaṃ phusitukāmatāya viya, vijambhitasamussayassa pāsādavarassa sukhārohaṇatthaṃ dantamaya-saṇhamuduphalaka-kañcanalatāvinaddha- maṇigaṇappabhāsamudayujjalasobhaṃ sopānaṃ viya, suvaṇṇavalayānūpurādisaṅghaṭṭanasaddasammissitakathitahasitamadhurassaragehajanavicaritassa uḷāraissariyavibhavasobhitassa mahāgharassa sukhappavesanatthaṃ suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimuttāpavāḷādijutivissaravijjotita-suppatiṭṭhitavisāladvārabāhaṃ mahādvāraṃ viya ca atthabyañjanasampannassa buddhānaṃ desanāñāṇagambhīrabhāvasaṃsūcakassa imassa suttassa sukhāvagāhaṇatthaṃ kāladesadesakavatthuparisāpadesapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ, tassa atthavaṇṇanā samattā.
经的安立释巴利
Suttanikkhepavaṇṇanā
现在,到了解释世尊以“我为你们宣说一切法的根本分类”等语所提出的这部经的时候了。不过,这部经的解释,要先考察经文安立的方式才能说得清楚,所以我们先来考察经文的安立。经文安立有四种:出于自己的意愿、出于他人的意愿、随问而说、因八种成就。巴利
Idāni ‘‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo’’tiādinā nayena bhagavatā nikkhittassa suttassa vaṇṇanāya okāso anuppatto. Sā panesā suttavaṇṇanā yasmā suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hoti, tasmā suttanikkhepaṃ tāva vicārayissāma. Cattāro hi suttanikkhepā attajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo pucchāvasiko aṭṭhuppattikoti.
其中,那些世尊没有受人请求、纯粹出于自己的意愿而说的经。比如《希望经》《衣经》《大念处经》《大六处分别经》《圣种经》,以及《正勤经》的摄颂、《神足、根、力、觉支、道支经》的摄颂等。这些就是“由自意”的安立。巴利
Tattha yāni suttāni bhagavā parehi anajjhiṭṭho kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva kathesi. Seyyathidaṃ, ākaṅkheyyasuttaṃ, vatthasuttaṃ, mahāsatipaṭṭhānasuttaṃ, mahāsaḷāyatanavibhaṅgasuttaṃ, ariyavaṃsasuttaṃ, sammappadhānasuttantahārako, iddhipādaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgasuttantahārakoti evamādīni. Tesaṃ attajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
那些则是这样说的:世尊观察到别人的意乐、堪忍、心态、志向以及能否觉悟,然后随顺对方的心意而说的经典。比如《小罗睺罗教诫经》《大罗睺罗教诫经》《转法轮经》《界分别经》等。世尊当时想:“罗睺罗那些能让解脱成熟的法已经成熟了,我现在应当进一步教导罗睺罗,让他灭尽诸漏。”(《相应部》4.121)他就是像这样观察之后才说的。这些经典的出处,就叫作“由他意”。巴利
Yāni pana ‘‘paripakkā kho rāhulassa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā, yaṃnūnāhaṃ rāhulaṃ uttari āsavānaṃ khaye vineyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.121) evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ khantiṃ manaṃ abhinīhāraṃ bujjhanabhāvañca avekkhitvā parajjhāsayavasena kathitāni. Seyyathidaṃ, cūḷarāhulovādasuttaṃ, mahārāhulovādasuttaṃ, dhammacakkappavattanaṃ, dhātuvibhaṅgasuttanti evamādīni. Tesaṃ parajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
接着讲“由请问”这一类:有些人会来到世尊面前发问,比如四众弟子、四种姓的人,还有龙、金翅鸟、乾闼婆、阿修罗、夜叉、四大王天、三十三天等天人,乃至大梵天。他们问:“尊者,人们说的‘觉支、觉支’是指什么?”“尊者,人们说的‘盖、盖’是指什么?”“尊者,这些就是五取蕴吗?”“对人来说,什么才是最上的财富?”(《经集》183)等等,用各种方式提问。世尊被这样问之后,就为他们讲了《觉支相应》等经;另外还有《天相应》《魔相应》《梵相应》《帝释问》《小吠陀罗》《大吠陀罗》《沙门果》《旷野》《针毛夜叉》《粗毛夜叉》等经。这些经典以问答为出发点来编排,就叫作“由请问”。巴利
Bhagavantaṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā catasso parisā cattāro vaṇṇā nāgā supaṇṇā gandhabbā asurā yakkhā mahārājāno tāvatiṃsādayo devā mahābrahmāti evamādayo ‘‘bojjhaṅgā bojjhaṅgā’’ti, bhante, vuccanti. ‘‘Nīvaraṇā nīvaraṇā’’ti, bhante, vuccanti. Ime nu kho, bhante, pañcupādānakkhandhā. ‘‘Kiṃ sūdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’ntiādinā (su. ni. 183) nayena pañhaṃ pucchanti. Evaṃ puṭṭhena bhagavatā yāni kathitāni bojjhaṅgasaṃyuttādīni. Yāni vā panaññānipi devatāsaṃyutta-mārasaṃyutta-brahmasaṃyutta-sakkapañha-cūḷavedalla-mahāvedalla-sāmaññaphala- āḷavaka-sūciloma-kharalomasuttādīni, tesaṃ pucchāvasiko nikkhepo.
还有那些是依已经发生的事而说的经典,比如《法嗣经》《小狮子吼经》《月喻经》《子肉喻经》《木堆喻经》《火堆喻经》《泡沫喻经》《波利质多罗树喻经》等等。这些经典以发生的事为出处,就叫作“依事说”。巴利
Yāni panetāni uppannaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca kathitāni. Seyyathidaṃ, dhammadāyādaṃ cūḷasīhanādaṃ candūpamaṃ puttamaṃsūpamaṃ dārukkhandhūpamaṃ aggikkhandhūpamaṃ pheṇapiṇḍūpamaṃ pāricchattakūpamanti evamādīni. Tesaṃ aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo.
在这四种安立方式当中,这部经属于“缘事安立”。因为世尊是依着某一具体因缘才说出这部经的。是依着什么样的因缘呢?是依着由学习教理而生起的慢心。
据说有五百位婆罗门,精通三部吠陀,后来听闻了世尊说法,看到欲乐的过患和出离的功德,就在世尊身边出家。没过多久,他们学完了全部佛语,于是依着对教理的学习生起了慢心,心想:“世尊不管讲什么,我们很快就能弄懂。世尊说法,无非就是三种性、四种词、七种格,离开这些他也没说什么别的。他这么一说,我们根本没有什么难解的句子。”他们对世尊失去了恭敬,从那以后,不再经常去亲近世尊,也不常去听法。
世尊知道他们心里的想法,知道“这些人如果不破除这个慢心的障碍,就不可能证得道或果”。于是,善于说法的世尊就以他们依着所学教理而生起的慢心作为因缘,为了摧破他们的慢心,开始宣说这部《一切法根本法门》。巴利
Evamimesu catūsu nikkhepesu imassa suttassa aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo. Aṭṭhuppattiyañhi idaṃ bhagavatā nikkhittaṃ. Katarāya aṭṭhuppattiyā? Pariyattiṃ nissāya uppanne māne. Pañcasatā kira brāhmaṇā tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū aparabhāge bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ sutvā kāmesu ādīnavaṃ nekkhamme ca ānisaṃsaṃ sampassamānā bhagavato santike pabbajitvā nacirasseva sabbaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā pariyattiṃ nissāya mānaṃ uppādesuṃ ‘‘yaṃ yaṃ bhagavā katheti, taṃ taṃ mayaṃ khippameva jānāma, bhagavā hi tīṇi liṅgāni cattāri padāni satta vibhattiyo muñcitvā na kiñci katheti, evaṃ kathite ca amhākaṃ gaṇṭhipadaṃ nāma natthī’’ti. Te bhagavati agāravā hutvā tato paṭṭhāya bhagavato upaṭṭhānampi dhammassavanampi abhiṇhaṃ na gacchanti. Bhagavā tesaṃ taṃ cittacāraṃ ñatvā ‘‘abhabbā ime imaṃ mānakhilaṃ anupahacca maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā sacchikātu’’nti tesaṃ sutapariyattiṃ nissāya uppannaṃ mānaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā desanākusalo bhagavā mānabhañjanatthaṃ sabbadhammamūlapariyāyanti desanaṃ ārabhi.
在这里,“一切法根本教说”就是指一切法的根本解说。“一切”是指没有剩余、全部。因为“一切”这个词就是表示无余的。它和什么相关联,就显示出那个范围内的全部事物毫无遗漏。比如“一切色无常,一切受无常”“属于一切有身所摄的诸法”等。而“法”这个词,则出现在教理、真理、定、慧、本性、自性、空、福德、犯戒、所应知等多种场合。比如“比丘在这里学习法,也就是经、应颂……”(《增支部》5.73)中的“法”,是指教理;“见法者、知法者”(《长部》1.299)中的“法”,是指真理;“那些世尊是如是法者”等处,是指定。巴利
Tattha sabbadhammamūlapariyāyanti sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ mūlapariyāyaṃ. Sabbesanti anavasesānaṃ. Anavasesavācako hi ayaṃ sabba-saddo. So yena yena sambandhaṃ gacchati, tassa tassa anavasesataṃ dīpeti. Yathā, ‘‘sabbaṃ rūpaṃ aniccaṃ sabbā vedanā aniccā sabbasakkāyapariyāpannesu dhammesū’’ti. Dhamma-saddo panāyaṃ pariyatti-sacca-samādhi-paññā-pakati-sabhāvasuññatā-puññāpatti-ñeyyādīsu dissati. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇāti suttaṃ geyya’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) hi dhammasaddo pariyattiyaṃ vattati. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammo viditadhammo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.299) saccesu. ‘‘Evaṃ dhammā te bhagavanto’’tiādīsu samādhimhi.
猴王,谁具备这四种法,就像你一样;
真实、法、坚忍和布施——这样的人能超越所见。巴利
‘‘Yassete caturo dhammā, vānarinda yathā tava; Saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, diṭṭhaṃ so ativattatī’’ti. –
在《本生经》1.1.57等处,(法一词指)慧。巴利
Ādīsu (jā. 1.1.57) paññāya.
在“生法、老法,还有死法”这类句子里,法指本性。在“善法”这类句子里,法指自性。在“然而,就在那时,有诸法”这类句子里,法指空性。在“善行之法带来安乐”这类句子里,法指福德。在“二不定法”这类句子里,法指犯戒。在“一切法以一切方式来到世尊佛陀的智门之前”这类句子里,法指所应知。但在这里,法指自性。这里的词义是:它们持守自己的特征,所以叫做法。根这个词已经详细解释过了。但在这里,它应当理解为不共因。巴利
‘‘Jātidhammā jarādhammā, atho maraṇadhammino’’tiādīsu pakatiyaṃ. ‘‘Kusalā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1.tikamātikā) sabhāve. ‘‘Tasmiṃ kho pana samaye dhammā hontī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 121) suññatāyaṃ. ‘‘Dhammo suciṇṇo sukhamāvahātī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.10.102) puññe. ‘‘Dve aniyatā dhammā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 443) āpattiyaṃ. ‘‘Sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthaṃ āgacchantī’’tiādīsu ñeyye. Idha panāyaṃ sabhāve vattati. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentīti dhammā. Mūla-saddo vitthārito eva. Idha panāyaṃ asādhāraṇahetumhi daṭṭhabbo.
“pariyāya”这个词,在“把它记住为‘蜜丸说示’”(《中部》1.205)这类句子里,是用于教说。在“婆罗门,确实有一种说示,依照这种说示,如理地说我的人会说沙门乔达摩是无业论者”(《波罗夷》3)这类句子里,是用于原因。在“阿难,今天轮到谁去教诫诸比库尼?”(《中部》3.398)这类句子里,是用于机会。而在这里,它既用于原因,也用于教说。所以,“一切法根本说示”这个说法,应当理解为:一切法的不共因,也就是被称为因的那个东西;或者理解为:关于一切法的因的教说。又因为这部经的含义需要进一步领会,所以不应把四地的自性法当作“一切法”。这里的意趣是:只有包含在身见范围内的三地之法,才应当被毫无遗漏地了知。巴利
Pariyāyasaddo ‘‘madhupiṇḍikapariyāyoti naṃ dhārehī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.205) desanāyaṃ vattati. ‘‘Atthi khvesa brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo, yena maṃ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya akiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo’’tiādīsu (pārā. 3) kāraṇe. ‘‘Kassa nu kho, ānanda, ajja pariyāyo bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.398) vāre. Idha pana kāraṇepi desanāyampi vattati. Tasmā ‘‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti ettha sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ asādhāraṇahetusaññitaṃ kāraṇanti vā sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ kāraṇadesananti vā evaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo. Neyyatthattā cassa suttassa, na catubhūmakāpi sabhāvadhammā sabbadhammāti veditabbā. Sakkāyapariyāpannā pana tebhūmakā dhammāva anavasesato veditabbā, ayamettha adhippāyoti.
vo这个词,可以在自指、宾格、工具格、与格、属格以及补足音节这几种用法中出现。比如在“阿那律,你们是否和合、欢喜相处?”(《中部》1.326)这类句子里,它是自指;在“去吧,比丘们!我遣散你们”(《中部》2.157)这类句子里,它是宾格;在“你们不应住在我附近”(《中部》2.157)这类句子里,它是工具格;在“比丘们!我将为你们开示林野经”(《中部》1.190)这类句子里,它是与格;在“舍利弗,你们所有人的善说”(《中部》1.345)这类句子里,它是属格;在“凡是那些你们清净身业的圣者”(《中部》1.35)这类句子里,它只是补足音节。而在这里,应当把它看作与格。巴利
Voti ayaṃ vo-saddo paccattaupayogakaraṇasampadānasāmivacanapadapūraṇesu dissati. ‘‘Kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.326) hi paccatte dissati. ‘‘Gacchatha, bhikkhave, paṇāmemi vo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) upayoge. ‘‘Na vo mama santike vatthabba’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) karaṇe. ‘‘Vanapatthapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.190) sampadāne. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsita’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.345) sāmivacane. ‘‘Ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.35) padapūraṇamatte. Idha panāyaṃ sampadāne daṭṭhabbo.
“比丘们”这个称呼,是应诺之后,再次当面呼唤在场比丘们。“我将开示”,是承诺要说法。这里要表达的是:比丘们,我要为你们开示一切法的根本原因;或者按第二种方式说,我要为你们开示关于因的教说。“你们要听”,意思是:我正在宣说的那个义理、那个因、那个教说,你们要听。“要好好作意”:这里的“好好”和“善哉”是同一个意思。而“善哉”这个词,出现在祈请、接受、随喜赞叹、美好、坚定等场合。比如在“尊者,愿世尊为我简要说法”这类句子里,是祈请;在“那位比丘欢喜、随喜世尊所说之后,说‘善哉,尊者’”这类句子里,是接受;在“善哉,善哉,舍利弗”这类句子里,是随喜赞叹。巴利
Bhikkhaveti patissavena abhimukhībhūtānaṃ punālapanaṃ. Desessāmīti desanāpaṭijānanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti, bhikkhave, sabbadhammānaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ tumhākaṃ desessāmi, dutiyena nayena kāraṇadesanaṃ tumhākaṃ desessāmīti. Taṃ suṇāthāti tamatthaṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ taṃ desanaṃ mayā vuccamānaṃ suṇātha. Sādhukaṃ manasi karothāti ettha pana sādhukaṃ sādhūti ekatthametaṃ. Ayañca sādhu saddo āyācanasampaṭicchanasampahaṃsanasundaradaḷhīkammādīsu dissati. ‘‘Sādhu me bhante bhagavā, saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.95) hi āyācane dissati. ‘‘Sādhu, bhanteti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.86) sampaṭicchane. ‘‘Sādhu, sādhu sāriputtā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.349) sampahaṃsane.
乐于正法的国王真好,有智慧的人真好;
不欺骗朋友是好事,不作恶是快乐。巴利
‘‘Sādhu dhammarucī rājā, sādhu paññāṇavā naro; Sādhu mittānamaddubbho, pāpassākaraṇaṃ sukha’’nti.
在《本生经》(2.18.101)等处的“sādhu”是“美好”的意思。而在“那么,婆罗门,请好好听”(《增支部》5.192)这类句子中,同一个“sādhuka”既可以表示加强语气,也可以表示命令。这里也一样,这个词应当理解为同时具有加强语气和命令两种含义。它也可以用在“美好”的意思上。从加强语气来说,就是“请听闻这坚固的法,好好地执持、掌握”;从命令来说,就是“请依照我的命令来听”;从美好来说,就是“请听闻这善妙、殊胜的法”——经文的意思就是这样显示出来的。巴利
Ādīsu (jā. 2.18.101) sundare. ‘‘Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, sādhukaṃ suṇāhī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.192) sādhukasaddoyeva daḷhīkamme, āṇattiyantipi vuccati. Idhāpi ayaṃ ettheva daḷhīkamme ca āṇattiyañca attho veditabbo. Sundaratthepi vattati. Daḷhīkaraṇatthena hi daḷhamimaṃ dhammaṃ suṇātha suggahitaṃ gaṇhantā. Āṇattiatthena mama āṇattiyā suṇātha. Sundaratthena sundaramimaṃ bhaddakaṃ dhammaṃ suṇāthāti evaṃ dīpitaṃ hoti.
“请作意”意思是转向、注意,也就是:心不散乱地倾听,把心放上去。“请聆听那(法)”这一句,是为了防止耳根散乱。“请好好作意”则是通过加强作意的指令,来防止意根散乱。在这里,前一句是防止执取文句上的颠倒,后一句是防止执取义理上的颠倒。前一句把人引向听闻法,后一句把人引向对所闻法的忆持、审察等。前一句也表明:这个法文句完备,所以应当听闻;后一句表明:这个法有义理,所以应当作意。或者,把“善”这个字同时连到前后两句上:因为这个法在教说上甚深、在法义上甚深,所以“请好好聆听”;因为它在义理上甚深、在证悟上甚深,所以“请好好作意”——应当这样理解它们的关联。巴利
Manasikarothāti āvajjetha, samannāharathāti attho, avikkhittacittā hutvā nisāmetha citte karothāti adhippāyo. Idānettha taṃ suṇāthāti sotindriyavikkhepavāraṇametaṃ. Sādhukaṃ manasi karothāti manasikāre daḷhīkammaniyojanena manindriyavikkhepavāraṇaṃ. Purimañcettha byañjanavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ, pacchimaṃ atthavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ. Purimena ca dhammassavane niyojeti, pacchimena sutānaṃ dhammānaṃ dhāraṇūpaparikkhādīsu. Purimena ca sabyañjano ayaṃ dhammo, tasmā savanīyoti dīpeti. Pacchimena sāttho, tasmā manasi kātabboti. Sādhukapadaṃ vā ubhayapadehi yojetvā yasmā ayaṃ dhammo dhammagambhīro desanāgambhīro ca, tasmā suṇātha sādhukaṃ, yasmā atthagambhīro paṭivedhagambhīro ca, tasmā sādhukaṃ manasi karothāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
“我将说”就是“我将开示”。在“请听那”这里,所承诺的开示,我不是只简略地开示,而是也要详细地宣说——这就是“我将说”所表达的意思。因为这些话正是表示简略说和详细说的词。正如鹏耆舍长老所说:巴利
Bhāsissāmīti desessāmi. ‘‘Taṃ suṇāthā’’ti ettha paṭiññātaṃ desanaṃ na saṃkhittatova desessāmi, apica kho vitthāratopi naṃ bhāsissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti, saṅkhepavitthāravācakāni hi etāni padāni. Yathāha vaṅgīsatthero –
他既简要地开示,也详细地宣说。
他的声音像沙鹆鸟一样,宣说出了无碍辩才。巴利
‘‘Saṃkhittenapi deseti, vitthārenapi bhāsati; Sāḷikāyiva nigghoso, paṭibhānaṃ udīrayī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.214);
世尊这样说之后,那些比丘生起踊跃之心,回应说:“是的,尊者。”他们就这样回应世尊,领受了导师的话。这里说的就是他们接受了、领受了。接着,世尊对他们说了这样的话,也就是从“诸比丘,现在应当在这里说”开始,整部经都说了出来。其中,“这里”是一个表示地点指向的虚词。这个词有时是就世间来说的,比如“如来出现于这里世间”(《长部》1.190);有时是指教法,比如“诸比丘,就在这里,有沙门;这里,有第二沙门”(《增支部》4.241);有时是指场所,比如——巴利
Evaṃ vutte ussāhajātā hutvā evaṃ bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ satthu vacanaṃ sampaṭicchiṃsu, paṭiggahesunti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha nesaṃ bhagavā etadavoca etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ idha bhikkhavotiādikaṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ avoca. Tattha idhāti desāpadese nipāto. Svāyaṃ katthaci lokaṃ upādāya vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.190). Katthaci sāsanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (a. ni. 4.241). Katthaci okāsaṃ. Yathāha –
我就安住在这里,已经转生为天神。
而且我又重新获得了生命,贤友,你要这样知道。巴利
‘‘Idheva tiṭṭhamānassa, devabhūtassa me sato; Punarāyu ca me laddho, evaṃ jānāhi mārisā’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.369);
在某些地方,它只是用来补足句子而已。就像经里说的:“比丘们,在这里,我已经吃完了,吃饱了,不再吃了。”但在这里,应该理解为是就“世间”来说的。巴利
Katthaci padapūraṇamattameva. Yathāha ‘‘idhāhaṃ – bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’ti (ma. ni. 1.30). Idha pana lokaṃ upādāya vuttoti veditabbo.
2 比丘们——这是为了按照先前所承诺的那样宣说法,又一次呼唤比丘们。把这两方面合起来,就是说“比丘们,在这个世间”。至于“未闻的凡夫”,这里应当理解为:因为既没有教法的了知,也没有证得的了知。“未闻”就是这个意思。如果一个人对蕴、界、处、谛、缘起、念处等法,没有通过学习、提问来加以抉择,因而没有能遮止妄执的教法;对于应当通过修行证得的法,他还没有证得,因而没有证得。正是由于缺少教法的了知和证得的了知,所以称为“未闻”。这个……巴利
2.Bhikkhaveti yathāpaṭiññātaṃ desanaṃ desetuṃ puna bhikkhū ālapati. Ubhayenāpi, bhikkhave, imasmiṃ loketi vuttaṃ hoti. Assutavā puthujjanoti ettha pana āgamādhigamābhāvā ñeyyo assutavā iti. Yassa hi khandhadhātuāyatanasaccapaccayākārasatipaṭṭhānādīsu uggahaparipucchāvinicchayarahitattā maññanāpaṭisedhako neva āgamo, paṭipattiyā adhigantabbassa anadhigatattā neva adhigamo atthi. So āgamādhigamābhāvā ñeyyo assutavā iti. Svāyaṃ –
凡夫之所以叫凡夫,是因为各种产生众多(烦恼)等原因。
或因被含摄于凡夫众中,或此人为凡夫。巴利
Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano; Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano iti.
他之所以是凡夫,是因为种种不同烦恼等的产生等原因。正如经中所说:产生种种烦恼,所以叫凡夫;有种种未断的身见,所以叫凡夫;仰望种种导师的面孔,所以叫凡夫;未从一切趣中脱出,所以叫凡夫;造作种种不同的行,所以叫凡夫;被种种瀑流冲走,所以叫凡夫;被种种热恼所冷却,所以叫凡夫;被种种燃烧所烧,所以叫凡夫;对五种欲乐染着、贪求、耽着、迷醉、执取、黏着、系缚,所以叫凡夫;被五盖覆盖、遮蔽、笼罩、封闭、隐藏、掩蔽,所以叫凡夫。(《大义释》51)或者,因为被包含在那些无法计数、背离圣法、行持卑劣法的众生当中,所以叫凡夫。又或者,这个人是与那些具足戒、多闻等功德的圣者们完全分离、各别存在的众多人群,所以叫凡夫。这样,用“无闻的凡夫”这两个词,就已经……巴利
So hi puthūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesādīnaṃ jananādīhi kāraṇehi puthujjano. Yathāha – puthu kilese janentīti puthujjanā, puthu avihatasakkāyadiṭṭhikāti puthujjanā, puthu satthārānaṃ mukhamullokikāti puthujjanā, puthu sabbagatīhi avuṭṭhitāti puthujjanā, puthu nānābhisaṅkhāre abhisaṅkharontīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāoghehi vuyhantīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāsantāpehi santappantīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāpariḷāhehi paridayhantīti puthujjanā, puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattā giddhā gadhitā mucchitā ajjhosannā laggā lagitā palibuddhāti puthujjanā, puthu pañcahi nīvaraṇehi āvuṭā nivutā ovutā pihitā paṭicchannā paṭikujjitāti puthujjanāti (mahāni. 51). Puthūnaṃ vā gaṇanapathamatītānaṃ ariyadhammaparammukhānaṃ nīcadhammasamācārānaṃ janānaṃ antogadhattāpi puthujjanā. Puthu vā ayaṃ, visuṃyeva saṅkhaṃ gato, visaṃsaṭṭho sīlasutādiguṇayuttehi ariyehi janotipi puthujjano. Evametehi ‘‘assutavā puthujjano’’ti dvīhipi padehi yete –
佛陀,这位太阳族裔,宣说了两种凡夫。
一种是盲凡夫,一种是善凡夫。巴利
Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjanoti. –
已经说了两种凡夫。要知道,在这两种当中,所说的就是盲凡夫。在“不见诸圣者”等话里,“圣者”是指:因为远离了烦恼,所以叫圣者;因为不走向恶趣,而行于善道,并且连同天神在内的世间都应当供养他们,所以佛陀、独觉佛和佛陀的弟子们都称为圣者;或者这里“圣者”就只是指佛陀。就像经里说的:“比丘们,在连同天神的世间……如来称为圣者。”这里说的“善士”,则应当知道是指独觉佛和如来的弟子。因为他们具备出世间的功德,是贤善的人,所以叫善士。或者也可以说,这些人全都用这两种称呼来说。因为佛陀既是圣者也是善士,独觉佛和佛陀的弟子也一样。就像所说的:巴利
Dve puthujjanā vuttā. Tesu andhaputhujjano vutto hotīti veditabbo. Ariyānaṃ adassāvītiādīsu ariyāti ārakattā kilesehi, anaye nairiyanato, aye iriyanato, sadevakena ca lokena araṇīyato buddhā ca paccekabuddhā ca buddhasāvakā ca vuccanti, buddhā eva vā idha ariyā. Yathāha ‘‘sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… tathāgato ariyoti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1098). Sappurisāti ettha pana paccekabuddhā tathāgatasāvakā ca ‘‘sappurisā’’ti veditabbā. Te hi lokuttaraguṇayogena sobhanā purisāti sappurisā. Sabbeva vā ete dvedhāpi vuttā. Buddhāpi hi ariyā ca sappurisā ca, paccekabuddhā buddhasāvakāpi. Yathāha –
凡是真正知恩、懂得报恩的智者,
他既有善友,也有坚定的忠诚。
对受苦的人,他认真去做该做的事,
人们就说这样的人是善士。巴利
‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro, Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hoti; Dukhitassa sakkacca karoti kiccaṃ, Tathāvidhaṃ sappurisaṃ vadantī’’ti. (jā. 2.17.78);
具备善友与坚定忠诚,仅凭这一点就可称为佛弟子;而独觉佛和佛陀则是以知恩等功德来说的。现在,如果有人有不见圣者的习性,在见圣者方面也不善行,就应当知道这个人就是不见圣者。不见圣者有两种:以眼不见和以智不见,这里指的是以智不见。因为用肉眼或天眼看见圣者,即使看见了也等于没看见。那些眼只能抓取颜色表象,并不能以圣者的本质为对象。狗和豺狼之类也能用眼睛看到圣者,但它们并不因此就是见圣者的人。巴利
Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotīti ettāvatā hi buddhasāvako vutto, kataññutādīhi paccekabuddhā buddhāti. Idāni yo tesaṃ ariyānaṃ adassanasīlo, na ca dassane sādhukārī, so ariyānaṃ adassāvīti veditabbo. So ca cakkhunā adassāvī ñāṇena adassāvīti duvidho, tesu ñāṇena adassāvī idha adhippeto. Maṃsacakkhunā hi dibbacakkhunā vā ariyā diṭṭhāpi adiṭṭhāva honti. Tesaṃ cakkhūnaṃ vaṇṇamattaggahaṇato, na ariyabhāvagocarato. Soṇasiṅgālādayopi ca cakkhunā ariye passanti. Na ca te ariyānaṃ dassāvino.
关于这件事,有一个故事:据说质多山住的漏尽长老有一位年纪很大才出家的侍者。有一天,他跟着长老一起去托钵,接过长老的钵和袈裟,跟在后面走回来,问长老说:“尊者,所谓的圣者,到底是什么样的呢?”长老回答说:“在这里,有些人虽然年纪很大,拿着圣者的钵和袈裟,也履行种种义务,跟随在旁,却根本不认识圣者。贤友,圣者就是这样难以辨认啊。”长老这样说了,他还是没能明白。所以,用眼睛看见并不算真正的看见;用智慧看见,才是真正的看见。正如经中所说:“婆迦梨,你看见这具腐臭的身体有什么用呢?婆迦梨,看见法的人,就是看见我。”(《相应部》3.87)因此,即使能用眼睛看见,如果没有以智慧看见诸圣者所见的无常等相,没有证得诸圣者所证悟的法,由于没有看见成为圣者的诸法以及圣者的状态,就应当知道这个人被称为“不见圣者”。巴利
Tatridaṃ vatthu – cittalapabbatavāsino kira khīṇāsavattherassa upaṭṭhāko vuḍḍhapabbajito ekadivasaṃ therena saddhiṃ piṇḍāya caritvā therassa pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā piṭṭhito āgacchanto theraṃ pucchi ‘‘ariyā nāma, bhante, kīdisā’’ti. Thero āha ‘‘idhekacco mahallako ariyānaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vattapaṭipattiṃ katvā sahacarantopi neva ariye jānāti, evaṃ dujjānā, āvuso, ariyā’’ti. Evaṃ vuttepi so neva aññāsi. Tasmā na cakkhunā dassanaṃ dassanaṃ, ñāṇena dassanameva dassanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘kiṃ te, vakkali, iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena, yo kho, vakkali , dhammaṃ passati, so maṃ passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.87). Tasmā cakkhunā passantopi ñāṇena ariyehi diṭṭhaṃ aniccādilakkhaṇaṃ apassanto ariyādhigatañca dhammaṃ anadhigacchanto ariyakaradhammānaṃ ariyabhāvassa ca adiṭṭhattā ‘‘ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti veditabbo.
对圣法不通晓,是指对念处等种种圣法不精通。而在圣法中未调伏——这里,巴利
Ariyadhammassa akovidoti satipaṭṭhānādibhede ariyadhamme akusalo. Ariyadhamme avinītoti ettha pana –
律有两种,其中每一种各有五种。
由于他不具备这一点,所以被称为“未调伏者”。巴利
Duvidho vinayo nāma, ekamekettha pañcadhā; Abhāvato tassa ayaṃ, ‘‘avinīto’’ti vuccati.
这个律确实有两种:防护律和断除律。在这两种律当中,每一种律又分成五种。防护律有五种:戒防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护。断除律也有五种:彼分断、镇伏断、正断、止息断、出离断。巴利
Ayañhi saṃvaravinayo pahānavinayoti duvidho vinayo. Ettha ca duvidhepi vinaye ekameko vinayo pañcadhā bhijjati. Saṃvaravinayopi hi sīlasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti pañcavidho. Pahānavinayopi tadaṅgapahānaṃ vikkhambhanapahānaṃ samucchedapahānaṃ paṭippassaddhipahānaṃ nissaraṇapahānanti pañcavidho.
在这里,以此巴帝摩卡防护而具足、圆满具足,这就是戒防护。守护眼根,在眼根上做到防护,这就是念防护。巴利
Tattha ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto’’ti (vibha. 511) ayaṃ sīlasaṃvaro. ‘‘Rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.213; ma. ni. 1.295; saṃ. ni. 4.239; a. ni. 3.16) ayaṃ satisaṃvaro.
“阿耆多,”世尊说,“世间那些流,
正念能挡住它们。
我说,这就是对诸流的守护。
这些被智慧关闭了。巴利
‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ, (ajitāti bhagavā) Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, Paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti. (su. ni. 1041);
这是智的防护。“能忍受寒冷和炎热”,这是忍耐的防护。“不随顺已生起的欲寻”,这是精进的防护。而这一切防护,因为各自防护、调伏应当防护和调伏的身恶行等,所以从防护的作用来说称为“防护”,从调伏的作用来说称为“律”。应当知道,这防护律首先分为五种。巴利
Ayaṃ ñāṇasaṃvaro. ‘‘Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) ayaṃ khantisaṃvaro. ‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) ayaṃ vīriyasaṃvaro. Sabbopi cāyaṃ saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ vinetabbānañca kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇato ‘‘saṃvaro’’, vinayanato ‘‘vinayo’’ti vuccati. Evaṃ tāva saṃvaravinayo pañcadhā bhijjatīti veditabbo.
同样地,在名色分别等观智中,由于这些观智与各自所要对治的烦恼处于对立状态,就像灯光与黑暗相对一样,每一种观智都能断除相应的过患。具体来说:以名色分别断除有身见;以缘摄受断除无因见和非等因见;以缘摄受的后续部分——度疑清净,断除疑惑不决的状态;以思惟名色聚集断除“我、我所”的执取;以道非道智见清净断除在非道上生起的道想;以观见生起断除断见;以观见灭去断除常见;以观见怖畏断除在可怖畏处的无怖想;以观见过患断除味想;以厌离随观断除喜乐想;以欲解脱智断除不欲解脱;以舍智断除不舍;以随顺智断除与法住及涅槃相违的状态;以种姓智断除执取诸行之相。这就叫做“彼分断”。巴利
Tathā yaṃ nāmarūpaparicchedādīsu vipassanāñāṇesu paṭipakkhabhāvato dīpālokeneva tamassa, tena tena vipassanāñāṇena tassa tassa anatthassa pahānaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, nāmarūpavavatthānena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā, paccayapariggahena ahetuvisamahetudiṭṭhīnaṃ, tasseva aparabhāgena kaṅkhāvitaraṇena kathaṃkathībhāvassa, kalāpasammasanena ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti gāhassa, maggāmaggavavatthānena amagge maggasaññāya, udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā, vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā, bhayadassanena sabhaye abhayasaññāya, ādīnavadassanena assādasaññāya, nibbidānupassanāya abhiratisaññāya, muccitukamyatāñāṇena amuccitukamyatāya, upekkhāñāṇena anupekkhāya, anulomena dhammaṭṭhitiyaṃ nibbāne ca paṭilomabhāvassa, gotrabhunā saṅkhāranimittaggāhassa pahānaṃ, etaṃ tadaṅgapahānaṃnāma.
通过近行定和安止定之别,以定遮止修习的生起,就像用罐子打散水面上的浮藻一样,断除那些盖障等法,这叫作镇伏断。巴利
Yaṃ pana upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattibhāvanivāraṇato ghaṭappahāreneva udakapiṭṭhe sevālassa tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇādidhammānaṃ pahānaṃ, etaṃ vikkhambhanapahānaṃ nāma.
通过修习四种圣道,对于各个道位的修行者来说,在他们各自的心相续中,按照《法集论》第277节等所说的“为了断除邪见……”这样的方式,使属于集谛那一类的烦恼群彻底不再生起,从而将其断除,这叫做“正断断”。而在证果的那一刹那,烦恼得到止息,这叫做“止息断”。由于已经出离一切有为法、断除一切有为法而证得的涅槃,这叫做“出离断”。所有这些断,因为以舍弃为义而称为断,以调伏为义而称为律,所以合称为“断律”。或者,因为各个修行者各自断除烦恼而成就各自的律,所以也称为“断律”。应当知道,断律这样也分为五种。巴利
Yaṃ catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato attano attano santāne ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 277) nayena vuttassa samudayapakkhikassa kilesagaṇassa accantaṃ appavattibhāvena pahānaṃ, idaṃ samucchedapahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddhattaṃ kilesānaṃ, etaṃ paṭippassaddhipahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭattā pahīnasabbasaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ etaṃ nissaraṇapahānaṃ nāma. Sabbampi cetaṃ pahānaṃ yasmā cāgaṭṭhena pahānaṃ, vinayanaṭṭhena vinayo, tasmā ‘‘pahānavinayo’’ti vuccati. Taṃtaṃpahānavato vā tassa tassa vinayassa sambhavatopetaṃ ‘‘pahānavinayo’’ti vuccati. Evaṃ pahānavinayopi pañcadhā bhijjatīti veditabbo.
这样,这个律从概要来说有两种,从细分来说有十种。因为对这位无闻凡夫来说,由于他毁坏了防护,应断的烦恼又没有断除,所以他不具备这个律;由于不具备,就说这个律是“未调御”。同样的道理也适用于“不见善士”“不熟知善士法”“在善士法中未调御”这些说法。这些说法在意义上其实没有差别。正如经中所说:“那些圣者就是那些善士,那些善士就是那些圣者。那圣者之法就是那善士之法,那善士之法就是那圣者之法。那些圣者之律就是那些善士之律,那些善士之律就是那些圣者之律。无论说圣者还是善士,说圣者法还是善士法,说圣者律还是善士律,这些都是同一个意思,同一含义,相同、相等、同类,所指的就是同一回事。”巴利
Evamayaṃ saṅkhepato duvidho, bhedato ca dasavidho vinayo bhinnasaṃvarattā pahātabbassa ca appahīnattā yasmā etassa assutavato puthujjanassa natthi, tasmā abhāvato tassa ayaṃ avinītoti vuccatīti. Esa nayo sappurisānaṃ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinītoti etthapi. Ninnānākaraṇañhi etaṃ atthato. Yathāha ‘‘yeva te ariyā, teva te sappurisā. Yeva te sappurisā, teva te ariyā. Yo eva so ariyānaṃ dhammo, so eva so sappurisānaṃ dhammo. Yo eva so sappurisānaṃ dhammo, so eva so ariyānaṃ dhammo. Yeva te ariyavinayā, teva te sappurisavinayā. Yeva te sappurisavinayā, teva te ariyavinayā. Ariyeti vā sappuriseti vā, ariyadhammeti vā sappurisadhammeti vā, ariyavinayeti vā sappurisavinayeti vā esese eke ekatthe same samabhāge tajjāte taññevā’’ti.
为什么世尊说“比丘们,我要为你们开示一切法的根本门”,说了之后却不直接开示,反而这样指出凡夫:“比丘们,在这里,没有听闻过的凡夫,不曾见过圣者……”呢?这是为了通过以人为所依的说法方式,把其中的含义讲清楚。因为世尊的说法方式有四种:以法为所依而说法,以法为所依而涉及人说法,以人为所依而涉及人说法,以人为所依而说法。也就是从法和人这两个角度,分成这四种说法。巴利
‘‘Kasmā pana bhagavā sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’ti vatvā taṃ adesetvāva ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti evaṃ puthujjanaṃ niddisīti? Puggalādhiṭṭhānāya dhammadesanāya tamatthaṃ āvikātuṃ. Bhagavato hi dhammādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā, dhammādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā, puggalādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā, puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanāti dhammapuggalavaseneva tāva catubbidhā desanā.
在这里,应当知道有四种说法方式:以法为所依的法说、以法为所依的人说、以人为所依的人说、以人为所依的法说。
其中,像“比丘们,有三种受。哪三种?乐受、苦受、不苦不乐受。比丘们,这就是三种受”这样的,应当知道是以法为所依的法说。
像“六界、这个人、六触处、十八意行、四安住处”这样的,应当知道是以法为所依的人说。
像“比丘们,世间存在三种人。哪三种?盲人、独眼人、双眼人。比丘们,什么样的人是盲人”这样的,应当知道是以人为所依的人说。
像“比丘们,什么是恶趣怖畏?比丘们,在这里,有一个人这样思量:‘身恶行在来世确实会有恶劣的果报’……乃至……使自己保持清净。比丘们,这就叫恶趣怖畏”这样的,应当知道是以人为所依的法说。巴利
Tattha, ‘‘tisso imā, bhikkhave, vedanā. Katamā tisso? Sukhā vedanā dukkhā vedanā adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Imā kho, bhikkhave, tisso vedanā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.250) evarūpī dhammādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā veditabbā. ‘‘Cha dhātuyo ayaṃ putiso cha phassāyatano aṭṭhārasa manopavicāro caturādhiṭṭhāno’’ti (ma. ni. 3.343) evarūpī dhammādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā. ‘‘Tayome, bhikkhave, puggalā santo saṃvijjamānā lokasmiṃ. Katame tayo? Andho ekacakkhu dvicakkhu. Katamo ca, bhikkhave, puggalo andho’’ti? (A. ni. 3.29) evarūpī puggalādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā. ‘‘Katamañca, bhikkhave, duggatibhayaṃ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco iti paṭisañcikkhati, kāyaduccaritassa kho pāpako vipāko abhisamparāyaṃ…pe… suddhamattānaṃ pariharati. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, duggatibhaya’’nti (a. ni. 4.121) evarūpī puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā.
在这里,因为凡夫是所依尚未遍知的人,而此经所要说明的一切法的根本——虚妄分别,正是以未遍知为根源,所以先指出凡夫,再通过以人为所依的说法来阐明这个含义。因此应当知道,世尊这样指出凡夫:“比丘们,在此,无闻凡夫不见诸圣者……”巴利
Svāyaṃ idha yasmā puthujjano apariññātavatthuko, apariññāmūlikā ca idhādhippetānaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ mūlabhūtā maññanā hoti, tasmā puthujjanaṃ dassetvā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya tamatthaṃ āvikātuṃ, ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti evaṃ puthujjanaṃ niddisīti veditabbo.
地节的解说巴利
Pathavīvāravaṇṇanā
像这样指出凡夫之后,现在为了说明他在大地等事物上,由一切有身之法所产生的“认为”,就说了“地是地”等话。其中,地有四种:相地、有成分地、所缘地、假名地。在“贤友,什么是内地界?即内、自身的硬、粗糙性”等经文中说的,是相地。在“若掘地或令掘”等经文中说的,是有成分地。而发等二十种身分,以及铁、铜等外部事物,因为它们和显色等成分聚在一起而成为地,所以叫有成分地。在“某人认知地遍”等经文中出现的,是所缘地,也叫相地。得到地遍禅那的人投生天界,依其转生而获得“地天神”的名称,应当知道这是假名地。这里,这四种地都可以得到。在这四种地当中,这个凡夫从任何一种地来认知它:他以“这是地”的想来认知,以地的部分来认知,执取世间的言说,依靠想颠倒而认知它为“地”。这样,他完全不离开地的部分,而以“有情”“有情的”等方式去认知。为什么他会这样认知呢?不该这么问,因为凡夫就像疯狂者一样,他会以任何方式执取任何事物。而这里的原因,只是没有见过圣者等差别。或者,就像世尊随后所说的那样:“因为对它未遍知”,世尊自己已经说出了原因。巴利
Evaṃ puthujjanaṃ niddisitvā idāni tassa pathavīādīsu vatthūsu sabbasakkāyadhammajanitaṃ maññanaṃ dassento, pathaviṃ pathavitotiādimāha. Tattha lakkhaṇapathavī sasambhārapathavī ārammaṇapathavī sammutipathavīti catubbidhā pathavī. Tāsu ‘‘katamā ca, āvuso, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu? Yaṃ ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ kakkhaḷaṃ kharigata’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 173) vuttā lakkhaṇapathavī. ‘‘Pathaviṃ khaṇeyya vā khaṇāpeyya vā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 85) vuttā sasambhārapathavī. Ye ca kesādayo vīsati koṭṭhāsā, ayolohādayo ca bāhirā. Sā hi vaṇṇādīhi sambhārehi saddhiṃ pathavīti sasambhārapathavī. ‘‘Pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānātī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.360) āgatā pana ārammaṇapathavī, nimittapathavītipi vuccati. Pathavīkasiṇajjhānalābhī devaloke nibbatto āgamanavasena pathavīdevatāti nāmaṃ labhati. Ayaṃ sammutipathavīti veditabbā. Sā sabbāpi idha labbhati. Tāsu yaṃkañci pathaviṃ ayaṃ puthujjano pathavito sañjānāti, pathavīti sañjānāti, pathavībhāgena sañjānāti, lokavohāraṃ gahetvā saññāvipallāsena sañjānāti pathavīti. Evaṃ pathavībhāgaṃ amuñcantoyeva vā etaṃ ‘‘sattoti vā sattassā’’ti vā ādinā nayena sañjānāti. Kasmā evaṃ sañjānātīti na vattabbaṃ. Ummattako viya hi puthujjano. So yaṃkiñci yena kenaci ākārena gaṇhāti. Ariyānaṃ adassāvitādibhedameva vā ettha kāraṇaṃ. Yaṃ vā parato ‘‘apariññātaṃ tassā’’ti vadantena bhagavatāva vuttaṃ.
他以颠倒的想,把地认知为地之后,因为“想确实是戏论的因”这句话,后来就以强有力的渴爱、慢、见这三种戏论——在这里用“认为”这个名称来表达——去认为、构想、分别,以种种方式颠倒地执取。因此说“认为地”。为了粗略地显示他这样认为时的那些认为,就以“这头发、这体毛”等方式,说明了分为二十种的内地。而《分别论》中说:“其中,什么是外地界?就是外部的硬、粗糙、坚硬、坚硬的状态,在外非所执受的。比如:铁、铜、锡、铅、银、珍珠、宝石、琉璃、螺、石、珊瑚、白银、黄金、红宝石、玛瑙、草、木、砂砾、陶片、大地、岩石、山。”这样说明了外地。对于内所缘三聚中的相地,也拿来在这里一并作意义论究。巴利
Pathaviṃ pathavito saññatvāti so taṃ pathaviṃ evaṃ viparītasaññāya sañjānitvā, ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’ti (su. ni. 880) vacanato aparabhāge thāmapattehi taṇhāmānadiṭṭhipapañcehi idha maññanānāmena vuttehi maññati kappeti vikappeti, nānappakārato aññathā gaṇhāti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pathaviṃ maññatī’’ti. Evaṃ maññato cassa tā maññanā oḷārikanayena dassetuṃ ‘‘yā ayaṃ kesā lomā’’tiādinā nayena vīsatibhedā ajjhattikā pathavī vuttā. Yā cāyaṃ vibhaṅge ‘‘tattha katamā bāhirā pathavīdhātu? Yaṃ bāhiraṃ kakkhaḷaṃ kharigataṃ kakkhaḷattaṃ kakkhaḷabhāvo bahiddhā anupādinnaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, ayo lohaṃ tipu sīsaṃ sajjhaṃ muttā maṇi veḷuriyaṃ saṅkho silā pavāḷaṃ rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ lohitaṅko masāragallaṃ tiṇaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ sakkharā kaṭhalaṃ bhūmi pāsāṇo pabbato’’ti (vibha. 173) evaṃ bāhirā pathavī vuttā. Yā ca ajjhattārammaṇattike nimittapathavī, taṃ gahetvā ayamatthayojanā vuccati.
认为地:他以三种认为来认为——认为我是地,认为地是我的,认为他人是地,认为地是他人的;或者,他以渴爱的认为来认为内地,以慢的认为来认为,以见的认为来认为。怎么认为呢?这个人对头发等生起欲贪,对头发感到味著、欢喜、欢迎,执取而安住;对毛、爪、齿、皮,或者对任何其他可染著的事物也是如此。这样,他以渴爱的认为来认为内地。愿我未来有这样的头发,愿有这样的毛……以这样的方式,他对这些生起欢喜。或者,我依靠这样的戒……乃至……依靠这样的梵行,将来会成为拥有如此润泽、柔软、细滑、青黑头发的人,以这样的方式,他为获得尚未得到的而把心投向那里。这样,他也是以渴爱的认为来认为内地。巴利
Pathaviṃ maññatīti tīhi maññanāhi ahaṃ pathavīti maññati, mama pathavīti maññati, paro pathavīti maññati, parassa pathavīti maññati, atha vā ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati, mānamaññanāya maññati, diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi kesādīsu chandarāgaṃ janeti kese assādeti abhinandati abhivadati ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Lome, nakhe, dante, tacaṃ, aññataraṃ vā pana rajjanīyavatthuṃ. Evaṃ ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Iti me kesā siyuṃ anāgatamaddhānaṃ. Iti lomātiādinā vā pana nayena tattha nandiṃ samannāneti. ‘‘Imināhaṃ sīlena vā…pe… brahmacariyena vā evaṃ siniddhamudusukhumanīlakeso bhavissāmī’’tiādinā vā pana nayena appaṭiladdhānaṃ paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahati. Evampi ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati.
同样,他依靠自己头发等的圆满或缺失而生起慢:“我胜过别人”“我和别人一样”“我比别人差”。这样,他以慢的执取来执取内在的地界。或者,按照“命就是身”这一说法,他把头发执取为“命”。对毛等也是如此。这样,他以见的执取来执取内在的地界。巴利
Tathā attano kesādīnaṃ sampattiṃ vā vipattiṃ vā nissāya mānaṃ janeti, ‘‘seyyohamasmīti vā sadisohamasmīti vā hīnohamasmīti vā’’ti. Evaṃ ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīra’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187) āgatanayena pana kesaṃ ‘‘jīvo’’ti abhinivisati. Esa nayo lomādīsu. Evaṃ ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati.
或者反过来,他以此运作方式之相反方法,把头发等不同种类的地界执取为“这是我的,这是我,这是我的我”——正如经中说“贤友,内在的地界和外在的地界都只是地界,这不是我的”(《中部》1.302)。如此,他也是以见的执取来执取内在的地界。以上便是他以三种执取来执取内在的地界。巴利
Atha vā ‘‘yā ceva kho panāvuso, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu, yā ca bāhirā pathavīdhātu, pathavīdhāturevesā , taṃ netaṃ mamā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.302) imissā pavattiyā paccanīkanayena kesādibhedaṃ pathaviṃ etaṃ mama esohamasmi eso me attāti abhinivisati. Evampi ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati. Evaṃ tāva ajjhattikaṃ pathaviṃ tīhi maññanāhi maññati.
就像对内地界一样,对外地界也是如此。怎么样的呢?这个人对铁、铜等生起欲贪,对铁、铜等感到味著、欢喜、欢迎,牢牢地执著不舍。他以“我的铁”“我的铜”等方式,把铁等当作是我的,守护它、保护它。这样,他以渴爱的妄执来执取外地界。或者,他在这里生起欢喜,认为“愿我未来能拥有这样的铁、铜等”;或者想:“我依靠这样的戒、这样的禁戒、这样的苦行、这样的梵行,将来就会成为一个拥有如此完备的铁、铜等资具的人”,为了得到还没得到的东西,他把心投向那里。这样,他也是以渴爱的妄执来执取外地界。巴利
Yathā ca ajjhattikaṃ evaṃ bāhirampi. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Ayañhi ayalohādīsu chandarāgaṃ janeti. Ayalohādīni assādeti abhinandati abhivadati ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati. Mama ayo mama lohantiādinā nayena ayādīni mamāyati rakkhati gopayati, evaṃ bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Iti me ayalohādayo siyuṃ anāgatamaddhānanti vā panettha nandiṃ samannāneti, imināhaṃ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā evaṃ sampannaayalohādiupakaraṇo bhavissāmī’’ti appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahati. Evampi bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati.
同样,他依靠自己的铁、铜等物的丰足或匮乏而生起慢心:“我凭这个更优胜”“我凭这个同等”“我凭这个更低劣”(《分别论》832)。就这样,他以慢的妄计来执取外部的地界。可是,当他生起“有生命”的想法时,就坚持认为这是“命者”。对铜等物也是同样的道理。就这样,他以见的妄计来执取外部的地界。巴利
Tathā attano ayalohādīnaṃ sampattiṃ vā vipattiṃ vā nissāya mānaṃ janeti ‘‘imināhaṃ seyyosmīti vā, sadisosmīti vā hīnosmīti vā’’ti (vibha. 832) evaṃ bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. Aye jīvasaññī hutvā pana ayaṃ ‘‘jīvo’’ti abhinivisati. Esa nayo lohādīsu. Evaṃ bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati.
或者,有人把地遍执取为“我”。就像《无碍解道》里说的:“在这里,有人把地遍看作是我。地遍就是我,我就是地遍,他把地遍和我看作是不二的。”(《无碍解道》1.131)他就按照《无碍解道》所说的方式,把取相的地遍执取为“我”。这样,他以见的执取来执取外在的地。同样,他也以三种执取来执取外在的地。到这里,在“执取地”这句话中,应当知道有三种执取。接下来,我只作简要的说明。巴利
Atha vā ‘‘idhekacco pathavīkasiṇaṃ attato samanupassati. Yaṃ pathavīkasiṇaṃ, so ahaṃ. Yo ahaṃ, taṃ pathavīkasiṇanti pathavīkasiṇañca attañca advayaṃ samanupassatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.131) paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttanayeneva nimittapathaviṃ ‘‘attā’’ti abhinivisati. Evaṃ bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati. Evampi bāhiraṃ pathaviṃ tīhi maññanāhi maññati. Evaṃ tāva ‘‘pathaviṃ maññatī’’ti ettha tissopi maññanā veditabbā. Ito paraṃ saṅkhepeneva kathayissāma.
在这里,“于地”这个词是依格表达。因此,这里的含义是:他执取“我于地”,执取“我的某物、我的系缚于地”,执取“他人于地”,执取“他人的某物、他人的系缚于地”。巴利
Pathaviyāmaññatīti ettha pathaviyāti bhummavacanametaṃ. Tasmā ahaṃ pathaviyāti maññati, mayhaṃ kiñcanaṃ palibodho pathaviyāti maññati, paro pathaviyāti maññati, parassa kiñcanaṃ palibodho pathaviyāti maññatīti ayamettha attho.
或者,这里所说的“他如何在色中观见我?在此,有人把受……想……行……识观为我,他这样想:这是我的我,我的我在这色中,这样就是在色中观见我”(《无碍解道》1.131),这个义理已经说过了。按照同样的方式,把受等法执取为我之后,在内外各地之中,把任何一种地设想为它的处所,然后认为“我的这个我就在这块地中”,这就是对地产生认为,这是他的见的认为。然而,当他对于那个我生起贪爱,并以那个我为依据生起慢时,也应该知道有爱和慢的认为。可是,当他以同样的方式认为“他的那个我在地”时,就只有见的认为才说得通。其他的认为,其他人也主张如此。巴利
Atha vā yvāyaṃ ‘‘kathaṃ rūpasmiṃ attānaṃ samanupassati? Idhekacco vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassati, tassa evaṃ hoti, ayaṃ kho me attā, so kho pana me attā imasmiṃ rūpeti evaṃ rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ samanupassatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.131) etassa atthanayo vutto, eteneva nayena vedanādidhamme attato gahetvā tato ajjhattikabāhirāsu pathavīsu yaṃkiñci pathaviṃ tassokāsabhāvena parikappetvā so kho pana me ayaṃ attā imissā pathaviyāti maññanto pathaviyā maññati, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa attani sinehaṃ tabbatthukañca mānaṃ uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Yadā pana teneva nayena so kho panassa attā pathaviyāti maññati, tadā diṭṭhimaññanā eva yujjati. Itarāyopi pana icchanti.
“从地认为”这句话里,“从地”是分离格。因此,当一个人认为:自己或他人连同所属物品,按前面说的各种类别,是从地生出来的,或者是从地出去的,或者认为“我是异于地的另一个我”,这样就是在“从地认为”,应当知道这是他的“见的认为”。而就在他以“见的认为”所构想的那件事上,由于会生起贪爱和慢,也应当知道有“爱和慢的认为”。另有一种说法:修习了小的地遍之后,取一个与此不同的无量我,认为“在地之外也有我的我”,这样就是在“从地认为”。巴利
Pathavito maññatīti ettha pana pathavitoti nissakkavacanaṃ. Tasmā saupakaraṇassa attano vā parassa vā yathāvuttappabhedato pathavito uppattiṃ vā niggamanaṃ vā pathavito vā añño attāti maññamāno pathavito maññatīti veditabbo, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Apare āhu pathavīkasiṇaṃ parittaṃ bhāvetvā tato aññaṃ appamāṇaṃ attānaṃ gahetvā pathavito bahiddhāpi me attāti maññamāno pathavito maññatīti.
在“认为地是我的”这一句里,应当知道:这里其实只找到一种由渴爱而生的认为,也就是纯粹以渴爱的方式把大地执为“我的”,依这种方式生起。而这种认为,应当套用到前面所说的各种内外之地上,比如“我的头发、我的体毛、我的铁、我的铜”。巴利
Pathaviṃ meti maññatīti ettha pana kevalañhi mahāpathaviṃ taṇhāvasena mamāyatīti iminā nayena pavattā ekā taṇhāmaññanā eva labbhatīti veditabbā. Sā cāyaṃ mama kesā, mama lomā, mama ayo, mama lohanti evaṃ yathāvuttappabhedāya sabbāyapi ajjhattikabāhirāya pathaviyā yojetabbāti.
“他欢喜地”的意思是:对如前所说的那种地,以贪爱等而欢喜、乐著、执取。这样说,就是在表达这个意思。有人问:既然“认为地”这一句已经把这个意思说清楚了,为什么还要说这一句呢?古来的注师们对此没有细加分析。但依我自己的看法,这是为了展现教法的善巧丰赡,或者是为了显示过患。因为世尊对法界善巧通达,具足种种方便和教法上的善巧丰赡。所以,先以“认为”的方式显示烦恼的生起,现在再以“欢喜”的方式显示,这就是从教法善巧丰赡的角度说的。又或者,一个人认为地、于地认为、从地认为、认为“地是我的”,由于他不能断除对地的贪爱或邪见,所以必定会欢喜地。而欢喜地就是欢喜苦,苦就是过患——这是从显示过患的角度说的。世尊也这样说过:“诸比丘,若欢喜地界,就是欢喜苦;若欢喜苦,我说此人还没有从苦中解脱。”巴利
Pathaviṃabhinandatīti vuttappakārameva pathaviṃ taṇhādīhi abhinandati, assādeti, parāmasati cāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pathaviṃ maññatī’’ti eteneva etasmiṃ atthe siddhe kasmā etaṃ vuttanti ce. Avicāritametaṃ porāṇehi. Ayaṃ pana attano mati, desanāvilāsato vā ādīnavadassanato vā. Yassā hi dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā nānānayavicitradesanāvilāsasampanno, ayaṃ sā bhagavatā suppaṭividdhā. Tasmā pubbe maññanāvasena kilesuppattiṃ dassetvā idāni abhinandanāvasena dassento desanāvilāsato vā idamāha . Yo vā pathaviṃ maññati, pathaviyā maññati, pathavito maññati, pathaviṃ meti maññati, so yasmā na sakkoti pathavīnissitaṃ taṇhaṃ vā diṭṭhiṃ vā pahātuṃ, tasmā pathaviṃ abhinandatiyeva. Yo ca pathaviṃ abhinandati, dukkhaṃ so abhinandati, dukkhañca ādīnavoti ādīnavadassanatopi idamāha. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, pathavīdhātuṃ abhinandati, dukkhaṃ so abhinandati, yo dukkhaṃ abhinandati, aparimutto so dukkhasmāti vadāmī’’ti.
像这样,先讲了以地为基础而产生的认为和欢喜,现在为了说明他为什么认为、为什么欢喜,就说出这个原因:“那是因何缘故?我说他未遍知。”它的意思是:那个凡夫为什么认为地?以什么原因认为、欢喜?回答是“我说他未遍知”,也就是说,那个所缘他还没有遍知。因为那个所缘他还没有遍知,所以这样说。凡是遍知地的人,都是以三种遍知来遍知的:知遍知、度遍知、断遍知。巴利
Evaṃ pathavīvatthukaṃ maññanaṃ abhinandanañca vatvā idāni yena kāraṇena so maññati, abhinandati ca, taṃ kāraṇaṃ āvikaronto āha taṃ kissa hetu, apariññātaṃ tassāti vadāmīti. Tassattho, so puthujjano taṃ pathaviṃ kissa hetu maññati, kena kāraṇena maññati, abhinandatīti ce. Apariññātaṃ tassāti vadāmīti, yasmā taṃ vatthu tassa apariññātaṃ, tasmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo hi pathaviṃ parijānāti, so tīhi pariññāhi parijānāti ñātapariññāya tīraṇapariññāya pahānapariññāyāti.
在这里,什么是知遍知?他遍知地界:“这是内地界,这是外地界,这是它的特相,这些是它的味、现起、足处。”这就是知遍知。什么是审察遍知?这样了知之后,以无常、苦、病等四十二种行相审察地界,这就是审察遍知。什么是断遍知?这样审察之后,以最上道舍断对地界的欲贪,这就是断遍知。巴利
Tattha katamā ñātapariññā. Pathavīdhātuṃ parijānāti, ayaṃ pathavīdhātu ajjhattikā, ayaṃ bāhirā, idamassā lakkhaṇaṃ, imāni rasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānīti, ayaṃ ñātapariññā. Katamā tīraṇapariññā? Evaṃ ñātaṃ katvā pathavīdhātuṃ tīreti aniccato dukkhato rogatoti dvācattālīsāya ākārehi, ayaṃ tīraṇapariññā. Katamā pahānapariññā? Evaṃ tīrayitvā aggamaggena pathavīdhātuyā chandarāgaṃ pajahati, ayaṃ pahānapariññā.
或者,名色分别智就是知遍知;从聚的观照等开始,一直到随顺智为止,是审察遍知;圣道上的智则是断遍知。凡是遍知地的人,就是通过这三种遍知来遍知。凡夫没有这三种遍知,因为还没有遍知的缘故,就执取地,也欢喜地。所以世尊说:诸比丘,在这里,无闻凡夫……执取地、于地中执取、从地执取、执取地是我的,并且欢喜地。这是什么原因呢?我说,是因为他还没有遍知地。巴利
Nāmarūpavavatthānaṃ vā ñātapariññā. Kalāpasammasanādianulomapariyosānā tīraṇapariññā. Ariyamagge ñāṇaṃ pahānapariññāti. Yo pathaviṃ parijānāti, so imāhi tīhi pariññāhi parijānāti, assa ca puthujjanassa tā pariññāyo natthi, tasmā apariññātattā pathaviṃ maññati ca abhinandati cāti. Tenāha bhagavā – idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano…pe… pathaviṃ maññati, pathaviyā maññati, pathavito maññati, pathaviṃ meti maññati, pathaviṃ abhinandati. Taṃ kissa hetu? Apariññātaṃ tassāti vadāmī’’ti.
关于“水从水”这个词,这里的水也有四种:按特相、按组成条件、按所缘、按假名。其中,在“什么是内水界?即内在的、自身的、属于水的、水性的、湿润的、湿性的、色的结缚、内在的、已执取的”等(《分别论》174)中所说的是特相水。在“修习水遍的人,在水中取相”等中所说的是有组成条件的水。其余一切都和地界部分所说的一样。只是在结合方式上,应当了知:按“胆汁、痰”等方式所说的十二种内水界;以及按“什么是外水界?即外在的、属于水的、水性的、湿润的、湿性的、色的结缚、外在的、未执取的。例如:根汁、干汁、皮汁、叶汁、花汁、果汁、乳、酪、酥、生酥、油、蜜、糖,以及地上的水或空中的水”(《分别论》174)所说的外水界;还有在内所缘三法中的相水。巴利
Āpaṃāpatoti etthāpi lakkhaṇasasambhārārammaṇasammutivasena catubbidho āpo. Tesu ‘‘tattha, katamā ajjhattikā āpodhātu. Yaṃ ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ āpo āpogataṃ, sineho sinehagataṃ bandhanattaṃ rūpassa ajjhattaṃ upādinna’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 174) vutto lakkhaṇaāpo. ‘‘Āpokasiṇaṃ uggaṇhanto āpasmiṃ nimittaṃ gaṇhātī’’tiādīsu vutto sasambhārāpo. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ pathaviyaṃ vuttasadisameva. Kevalaṃ yojanānaye pana ‘‘pittaṃ semha’’ntiādinā nayena vuttā dvādasabhedā ajjhattikā āpodhātu, ‘‘tattha, katamā bāhirā āpodhātu? Yaṃ bāhiraṃ āpo āpogataṃ, sineho sinehagataṃ bandhanattaṃ rūpassa bahiddhā anupādinnaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, mūlaraso khandharaso tacaraso pattaraso puppharaso phalaraso khīraṃ dadhi sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇitaṃ bhummāni vā udakāni antalikkhāni vā’’ti (vibha. 174) evaṃ vuttā ca bāhirā āpodhātu veditabbā, yo ca ajjhattārammaṇattike nimittaāpo.
关于“火”这一项,在火的部分也应依照同样的方式详细说明。不过在搭配方式上,这里应当知道内火界有四种,如经中所说:“由此而温暖,由此而衰老,由此而烧灼,由此而使所食、所饮、所嚼、所尝的得以完全消化。”(《分别论》175)外火界则如经中所说:“其中,什么是外火界?即外在的火、属于火的、热、属于热的、温、属于温的,外在的、不被执取的。例如:柴火、秸秆火、草火、牛粪火、谷壳火、垃圾火、闪电火、火的热、太阳的热、柴堆的热、草堆的热、谷物堆的热、物品堆的热。”(《分别论》175)应当知道,这就是所说的外火界。巴利
Tejaṃ tejatoti imasmiṃ tejovārepi vuttanayeneva vitthāro veditabbo. Yojanānaye panettha ‘‘yena ca santappati, yena ca jīrīyati, yena ca pariḍayhati, yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ sammā pariṇāmaṃ gacchatī’’ti (vibha. 175) evaṃ vuttā catuppabhedā ajjhattikā tejodhātu. ‘‘Tattha katamā bāhirā tejodhātu? Yaṃ bāhiraṃ tejo tejogataṃ usmā usmāgataṃ usumaṃ usumagataṃ bahiddhā anupādinnaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, kaṭṭhaggi palālaggi tiṇaggi gomayaggi thusaggi saṅkāraggi indaggi aggisantāpo sūriyasantāpo kaṭṭhasannicayasantāpo tiṇasannicayasantāpo dhaññasannicayasantāpo bhaṇḍasannicayasantāpo’’ti (vibha. 175) evaṃ vuttā ca bāhirā tejodhātu veditabbā.
关于“风”中的“风”,在结合风界的方式中,也应当了知内风界,即所说的:“向上的风、向下的风、腹内的风、肠内的风、随行于肢节各处的风、刀风、剃刀风、青莲花风、入息、出息。”而外风界则如《分别论》所说:“其中,什么是外风界?即外在的风、属于风的、色的僵挺性,在外的不被执取。具体来说:东风、西风、北风、南风、有尘风、无尘风、冷风、热风、小风、大风、黑风、毘蓝婆风、翼风、金翅鸟风、扇风、扇拂风。”应当了知,这就是所说的外风界。其余则与前面所说相同。至此,这个——巴利
Vāyaṃ vāyatoti imassa vāyavārassāpi yojanānaye pana ‘‘uddhaṅgamā vātā adhogamā vātā kucchisayā vātā koṭṭhāsayā vātā aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātā satthakavātā khurakavātā uppalakavātā assāso passāso’’ti evaṃ vuttā ajjhattikā vāyodhātu. ‘‘Tattha katamā bāhirā vāyodhātu? Yaṃ bāhiraṃ vāyo vāyogataṃ thambhitattaṃ rūpassa bahiddhā anupādinnaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, puratthimā vātā pacchimā vātā uttarā vātā dakkhiṇā vātā sarajā vātā arajā vātā sītā vātā uṇhā vātā parittā vātā adhimattā vātā kāḷavātā verambhavātā pakkhavātā supaṇṇavātā tālavaṇṭavātā vidhūpanavātā’’ti (vibha. 176) evaṃ vuttā ca bāhirā vāyodhātu veditabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti. Ettāvatā ca yvāyaṃ –
当一法被宣说时,凡是与它同相的法,
这些都得到了解说,所以称为“相论”。巴利
‘‘Vuttamhi ekadhamme, ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā tena; Vuttā bhavanti sabbe, iti vutto lakkhaṇo hāro’’ti. –
《导论》里已经讲了叫“相”的理趣。按照这个理趣,四大种一旦被执取,所造色也就同样被执取了,因为它没有离开色的特相。而大种和所造色就是色蕴。所以,当说“无闻凡夫执取地、执取水、执取火、执取风”时,从义理上说,也就是在说“他把色看作我”。当说“他在地中、在水中、在火中、在风中执取”时,也就是在说“他在色中看我”。当说“他从地、从水、从火、从风执取”时,因为“色之外另有我”已经成立,也就是在说“他看我有色”或“他看色在我中”。应当知道,这四种就是以色为依托的有身见的执取。其中,一种是断见,三种是常见,所以正好成为两种见——这也是应当知道的义理差别。巴利
Evaṃ nettiyaṃ lakkhaṇo nāma hāro vutto, tassa vasena yasmā catūsu bhūtesu gahitesu upādārūpampi gahitameva bhavati, rūpalakkhaṇaṃ anatītattā. Yañca bhūtopādārūpaṃ so rūpakkhandho. Tasmā ‘‘assutavā puthujjano pathaviṃ āpaṃ tejaṃ vāyaṃ maññatī’’ti vadantena atthato rūpaṃ attato samanupassatītipi vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pathaviyā āpasmiṃ tejasmiṃ vāyasmiṃ maññatī’’ti vadantena rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ samanupassatīti vuttampi hoti. ‘‘Pathavito āpato tejato vāyato maññatī’’ti vadantena rūpato añño attāti siddhattā rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ attani vā rūpaṃ samanupassatītipi vuttaṃ hoti. Evametā catasso rūpavatthukā sakkāyadiṭṭhimaññanā veditabbā. Tattha ekā ucchedadiṭṭhi, tisso sassatadiṭṭhiyoti dveva diṭṭhiyo hontīti ayampi atthaviseso veditabbo.
大种节等之解说巴利
Bhūtavārādivaṇṇanā
3 像这样,先通过色这一入口,说明了以行为依托的“认为”,现在,因为凡夫对那些被施设、依于诸行的众生也生起“认为”,所以为了指出那些众生,就说了“于已生者知为已生”等话。在这里,bhūta这个词出现在五蕴、非人、界、存在者、漏尽者、众生、树木等语境中。比如在“诸比丘,你们观察‘这是已生的’”等经文中,它出现在五蕴上;在“凡已聚集于此的已生者们”中,它指非人;在“诸比丘,四大种是原因”中,它指界;在“于存在有波逸提”等戒条中,它指存在的;在“那个已吃时食的已生者”中,它指漏尽者;在“世间一切已生者终将舍弃身躯”中,它指众生;在“破坏草木”中,它指树木等。但在这里,这个词指的是众生,不过并不是不加区分地指一切众生。因为这里所说的“已生者”,是指四大王天以下的众生。巴利
3. Evaṃ rūpamukhena saṅkhāravatthukaṃ maññanaṃ vatvā idāni ye saṅkhāre upādāya sattā paññapīyanti, tesu saṅkhāresu sattesupi yasmā puthujjano maññanaṃ karoti, tasmā te satte niddisanto bhūte bhūtato sañjānātītiādimāha. Tatthāyaṃ bhūtasaddo pañcakkhandhaamanussadhātuvijjamānakhīṇāsavasattarukkhādīsu dissati. ‘‘Bhūtamidanti, bhikkhave, samanupassathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.401) hi ayaṃ pañcakkhandhesu dissati. ‘‘Yānīdha bhūtāni samāgatānī’’ti (su. ni. 224) ettha amanussesu. ‘‘Cattāro kho, bhikkhu, mahābhūtā hetū’’ti (ma. ni. 3.86) ettha dhātūsu. ‘‘Bhūtasmiṃ pācittiya’’ntiādīsu (pāci. 69) vijjamāne. ‘‘Yo ca kālaghaso bhūto’’ti (jā. 1.10.190) ettha khīṇāsave. ‘‘Sabbeva nikkhipissanti bhūtā loke samussaya’’nti (dī. ni. 2.220) ettha sattesu. ‘‘Bhūtagāmapātabyatāyā’’ti (pāci. 90) ettha rukkhādīsu. Idha panāyaṃ sattesu vattati, no ca kho avisesena. Cātumahārājikānaṃ hi heṭṭhā sattā idha bhūtāti adhippetā.
这里,“于众生起众生想”等句,和前面所说的一样。但在“认为众生”等句中,则应结合三种“认为”来理解。怎么结合呢?
这个人依照“他见到居士或居士子,具备、拥有五种欲乐”这样的说法,把众生执取为可爱、快乐的,于是生起贪染;见到时贪染,听到时也贪染,闻到、尝到、触到、知道时也都贪染。像这样,他通过“渴爱式的认为”来认为众生。
或者,他依照“但愿我能投生到与刹帝利大富豪们同处”等说法,为了得到尚未得到的东西而发愿。像这样,也是通过“渴爱式的认为”来认为众生。
再者,他依据自己和他人的成就与衰败,或者认为自己更胜;在众生当中,认为某个众生低劣,或者认为自己低劣;认为某个众生殊胜,或者认为自己与某个众生相似,或者认为某个众生与自己相似。正如经文所说:“在此,有一类人,或者依出身……或者依某种理由,先前认为自己与他人相似,后来认为自己更胜、他人更低劣。凡是这样的慢……这称为慢过慢。”像这样,他通过“慢式的认为”来认为众生。巴利
Tattha bhūte bhūtato sañjānātītiādi vuttanayameva. Bhūte maññatītiādīsu pana tissopi maññanā yojetabbā. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi ‘‘so passati gahapatiṃ vā gahapatiputtaṃ vā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitaṃ samaṅgibhūta’’nti (a. ni. 7.50) vuttanayena bhūte subhā sukhitāti gahetvā rajjati, disvāpi ne rajjati, sutvāpi, ghāyitvāpi, sāyitvāpi, phusitvāpi, ñatvāpi. Evaṃ bhūte taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Aho vatāhaṃ khattiyamahāsālānaṃ vā sahabyataṃ upapajjeyya’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 3.337) vā pana nayena appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahati, evampi bhūte taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Attano pana bhūtānañca sampattivipattiṃ nissāya attānaṃ vā seyyaṃ dahati. Bhūtesu ca yaṃkiñci bhūtaṃ hīnaṃ attānaṃ vā hīnaṃ, yaṃkiñci bhūtaṃ seyyaṃ . Attānaṃ vā bhūtena, bhūtaṃ vā attanā sadisaṃ dahati. Yathāha ‘‘idhekacco jātiyā vā…pe… aññataraññatarena vatthunā pubbakālaṃ parehi sadisaṃ attānaṃ dahati. Aparakālaṃ attānaṃ seyyaṃ dahati. Pare hīne dahati, yo evarūpo māno …pe… ayaṃ vuccati mānātimāno’’ti (vibha. 876-880). Evaṃ bhūte mānamaññanāya maññati.
对于众生,如果有人这样想:“它们是常的、坚固的、永恒的、不变易的”,或者认为:“一切众生、一切生命、一切生类、一切命者都没有自在、没有力量、没有精进,被命运、遭遇、本性所转变,在六种出生中感受苦乐”,他这样思量,就是通过“见的思量”来思量。像这样,对于众生,通过三种思量来思量。巴利
Bhūte pana ‘‘niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā’’ti vā ‘‘sabbe sattā sabbe pāṇā sabbe bhūtā sabbe jīvā avasā abalā avīriyā niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatā chasvevābhijātīsu sukhadukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.168) vā maññamāno diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati. Evaṃ bhūte tīhi maññanāhi maññati.
众生是怎样被“认为”的?他在各种众生当中,期望自己投生到那里,或者期望投生到快乐的地方。这就是通过渴爱的“认为”来对众生起认为。或者,他因为期望投生到众生当中,就行布施、持戒、做布萨。这样也是通过渴爱的“认为”来对众生起认为。但如果他把众生整体地抓取过来,然后在其中把某些众生看成更优胜,把某些看成相等或更低劣,这就是通过慢的“认为”来对众生起认为。同样地,他把某些众生认为常的、坚固的,把某些认为无常的、不坚固的,或者认为“我也是众生当中的一员”,这就是通过见的“认为”来对众生起认为。巴利
Kathaṃ bhūtesu maññati? Tesu tesu bhūtesu attano upapattiṃ vā sukhuppattiṃ vā ākaṅkhati. Evaṃ tāva taṇhāmaññanāya bhūtesu maññati. Bhūtesu vā upapattiṃ ākaṅkhamāno dānaṃ deti, sīlaṃ samādiyati, uposathakammaṃ karoti. Evampi bhūtesu taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Bhūte pana samūhaggāhena gahetvā tattha ekacce bhūte seyyato dahati, ekacce sadisato vā hīnato vāti. Evaṃ bhūtesu mānamaññanāya maññati. Tathā ekacce bhūte niccā dhuvāti maññati. Ekacce aniccā adhuvāti, ahampi bhūtesu aññatarosmīti vā maññati. Evaṃ bhūtesu diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati.
“从众生认为”这里应当这样理解:如果有人把自己或别人连同用具,认为是从任何一处、从众生而生的,这就是“从众生认为”,这是他的“见之认为”。而就在这个“见之认为”所执取的对象上,由于他也生起了爱着和傲慢,所以也应了知这里有“渴爱之认为”和“慢之认为”。关于“认为‘众生是我的’”,这里只找得到一种“渴爱之认为”。应当了知,这种认为是以“我的儿子、我的女儿、我的山羊和绵羊、鸡和猪、象牛马母马”等方式,把事物执取为“我所有的”而运转的。关于“欣喜众生”,说法和前面一样。关于“由于未被遍知故”,这里应当理解为:依着诸行而施设的“众生”这个概念,因诸行未被遍知,所以众生未被遍知。句子的连接方式也应按前面所说的来理解。巴利
Bhūtato maññatīti ettha pana saupakaraṇassa attano vā parassa vā yato kutoci bhūtato uppattiṃ maññamāno bhūtato maññatīti veditabbo, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Bhūte meti maññatīti ettha pana ekā taṇhāmaññanāva labbhati. Sā cāyaṃ ‘‘mama puttā, mama dhītā, mama ajeḷakā, kukkuṭasūkarā, hatthigavassavaḷavā’’ti evamādinā nayena mamāyato pavattatīti veditabbā. Bhūte abhinandatīti etaṃ vuttanayameva. Apariññātaṃ tassāti ettha pana ye saṅkhāre upādāya bhūtānaṃ paññatti, tesaṃ apariññātattā bhūtā apariññātā hontīti veditabbā. Yojanā pana vuttanayeneva kātabbā.
像这样,先按“行”和“众生”两方面简要说明了“认为”的对象,现在再按地的差别等分类,详细地把它显示出来,于是说“诸天、天”等。其中,“天”是指他们以五种欲乐,或者以自己的神通力,游戏、放光,所以叫“天”,意思是游戏和光明。天有三种:假名天、再生天、清净天。所谓“假名天”,就是国王、王后、王子。所谓“再生天”,就是从四大王天开始往上的诸天。所谓“清净天”,就是阿罗汉、诸漏尽者。但这里应当理解为再生天,不过并不是不加区分地指一切再生天。这里所说的“天”,是指除了他化自在天世界的魔及其眷属之外,其余六欲界天。这些解释都应当按照“众生品”中已说的方法来理解。巴利
Evaṃ saṅkhepato saṅkhāravasena ca sattavasena ca maññanāvatthuṃ dassetvā idāni bhūmivisesādinā bhedena vitthāratopi taṃ dassento deve devatotiādimāha. Tattha dibbanti pañcahi kāmaguṇehi attano vā iddhiyāti devā, kīḷanti jotenti cāti attho. Te tividhā sammutidevā upapattidevā visuddhidevāti. Sammutidevā nāma rājāno deviyo rājakumārā. Upapattidevā nāma cātumahārājike deve upādāya tatuttaridevā. Visuddhidevā nāma arahanto khīṇāsavā. Idha pana upapattidevā daṭṭhabbā, no ca kho avisesena. Paranimmitavasavattidevaloke māraṃ saparisaṃ ṭhapetvā sesā cha kāmāvacarā idha devāti adhippetā. Tattha sabbā atthavaṇṇanā bhūtavāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
说到“生主”,这里要明白,魔就是生主。但有些人说:“这是对各位天界统领者——比如大天王等——的称呼。”这种说法在《大注疏》里已被否定,认为不合理,因为那些天已经被“天”这个词涵盖进去了。而这里所说的“生主”,指的正是魔,因为他是有情众生之主宰。他住在哪里?住在他化自在天。据说在那里,自在天王治理着王国,而魔住在某个区域,在自己的眷属中行使支配权,就像王国边境上一位叛逆的王子那样住着。这里提到魔,也应该理解为同时提到了魔的眷属。这里的关联方式是:当人看到或听说生主容貌端好、长寿、享乐丰厚,因而心生贪染时,他就是以渴爱来执取“生主”。或者,他以“但愿我能投生到生主的同伴中去”这样的方式,为了获得尚未得到的东西而发愿,这也是以渴爱来执取“生主”。而已经获得生主身份的人,生起“我是众生之主、是主宰”的慢心,这就是以慢来执取“生主”。如果认为“生主是常的、恒存的”,或者认为“他会断灭、会毁灭”,或者认为“他无力、无能、没有精进,被命运、结合、本性所支配,只是在六种生类中感受苦乐”,那就是以邪见来执取“生主”。应当这样理解。巴利
Pajāpatinti ettha pana māro pajāpatīti veditabbo. Keci pana ‘‘tesaṃ tesaṃ devānaṃ adhipatīnaṃ mahārājādīnametaṃ adhivacana’’nti vadanti. Taṃ devaggahaṇeneva tesaṃ gahitattā ayuttanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, māroyeva pana sattasaṅkhātāya pajāya adhipatibhāvena idha pajāpatīti adhippeto. So kuhiṃ vasati? Paranimmitavasavattidevaloke . Tatra hi vasavattirājā rajjaṃ kāreti. Māro ekasmiṃ padese attano parisāya issariyaṃ pavattento rajjapaccante dāmarikarājaputto viya vasatīti vadanti. Māraggahaṇeneva cettha māraparisāyapi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yojanānayo cettha pajāpatiṃ vaṇṇavantaṃ dīghāyukaṃ sukhabahulaṃ disvā vā sutvā vā rajjanto taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Aho vatāhaṃ pajāpatino sahabyataṃ upapajjeyya’’ntiādinā vā pana nayena appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahantopi pajāpatiṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Pajāpatibhāvaṃ pana patto samāno ahamasmi pajānamissaro adhipatīti mānaṃ janento pajāpatiṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Pajāpati nicco dhuvo’’ti vā ‘‘ucchijjissati vinassissatī’’ti vā ‘‘avaso abalo avīriyo niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇato chasvevābhijātīsu sukhadukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti vā maññamāno pana pajāpatiṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatīti veditabbo.
关于“在生主中”,这里只适合用邪见想来解释。它的生起方式应当这样理解:有人这样认为:“在生主那里存在的一切法,全都是常的、恒存的、永住的、不变易的。”或者这样认为:“在生主那里没有罪恶,在他那里找不到恶业。”巴利
Pajāpatisminti ettha pana ekā diṭṭhimaññanāva yujjati. Tassā evaṃ pavatti veditabbā. Idhekacco ‘‘pajāpatismiṃ ye ca dhammā saṃvijjanti, sabbe te niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā’’ti maññati. Atha vā ‘‘pajāpatismiṃ natthi pāpaṃ, na tasmiṃ pāpakāni kammāni upalabbhantī’’ti maññati.
关于“从生主[执取]”,这里可以有三类想。怎么讲呢?比如有人这样认为:自己或他人带着各种用具,是从生主那里出生,或者从生主那里出来的——这是他的邪见想。而就在这个被邪见想所认定的对象上,由于他对它生起贪爱和慢心,所以也应该知道还有渴爱想和慢想。至于“生主是我的”这一句,这里只有一种渴爱想。应当知道,这是以“生主是我的导师、我的主人”等方式,把生主执取为“我的”而生起的。其余部分按前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Pajāpatitoti ettha tissopi maññanā labbhanti. Kathaṃ? Idhekacco saupakaraṇassa attano vā parassa vā pajāpatito uppattiṃ vā niggamanaṃ vā maññati, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Pajāpatiṃ meti ettha pana ekā taṇhāmaññanāva labbhati. Sā cāyaṃ ‘‘pajāpati mama satthā mama sāmī’’tiādinā nayena mamāyato pavattatīti veditabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
梵天、梵天:在这里,通过种种殊胜功德而得以增长,所以称为梵天。另外,梵天也用来称呼大梵天、如来、婆罗门、父母和最胜者。因为在“一千梵天、二千梵天”等说法中,大梵天被称为梵天;而在“比丘们,梵天确实是如来的同义词”这里,指的是如来。巴利
Brahmaṃ brahmatoti ettha brūhito tehi tehi guṇavisesehīti brahmā. Apica brahmāti mahābrahmāpi vuccati, tathāgatopi brāhmaṇopi mātāpitaropi seṭṭhampi. ‘‘Sahasso brahmā dvisahasso brahmā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.165-166) hi mahābrahmā brahmāti vuccati. ‘‘Brahmāti kho, bhikkhave , tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti ettha tathāgato.
破除黑暗的佛陀,拥有遍及一切的眼力,
已到达世间尽头、超越了一切存在。
没有烦恼漏、已经断除一切苦的人,
哦,梵天,名叫真实者是我所侍奉的。巴利
‘‘Tamonudo buddho samantacakkhu, Lokantagū sabbabhavātivatto; Anāsavo sabbadukkhappahīno, Saccavhayo brahme upāsito me’’ti. (cūḷani. 104) –
在这里,婆罗门。巴利
Ettha brāhmaṇo.
‘‘Brahmāti mātāpitaro, pubbācariyāti vuccare’’ti. (itivu. 106; jā. 2.20.181) –
在这里,“梵天”是指父母。而在“他转动梵轮”这句里,“梵天”指的是最殊胜者。但在当前语境中,“梵天”指的是最初化生、寿命长达一劫的梵天。由于提到了他,也应当理解为已经包含了梵辅天和梵众天。至于这里的义理注释,则应按照生主那部分所说的方式来理解。巴利
Ettha mātāpitaro. ‘‘Brahmacakkaṃ pavattetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.148; a. ni. 5.11) ettha seṭṭhaṃ. Idha pana paṭhamābhinibbatto kappāyuko brahmā adhippeto. Taggahaṇeneva ca brahmapurohitabrahmapārisajjāpi gahitāti veditabbā. Atthavaṇṇanā panettha pajāpativāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
在光音天这一节里,就像火炬的火焰一样,光明从他们的身体中一段一段地断裂、散落、流溢开来,所以叫光音天。举出光音天,也就把整个第二禅地都包括进来了。应当知道,少光天、无量光天、光音天这些天众,全都住在同一层天。巴利
Ābhassaravāre daṇḍadīpikāya acci viya etesaṃ sarīrato ābhā chijjitvā chijjitvā patantī viya sarati visaratīti ābhassarā. Tesaṃ gahaṇena sabbāpi dutiyajjhānabhūmi gahitā, ekatalavāsino eva cete sabbepi parittābhā appamāṇābhā ābhassarāti veditabbā.
在遍净天这一节中,由于清净之光遍满、散布,以清净的身体光明之色,如同一整块放在金匣中炽燃的金块那样庄严辉煌,所以称为遍净天。举出遍净天,也就总摄了整个第三禅那地。应当知道,所有少净天、无量净天、遍净天,都是同住在一层天中的。巴利
Subhakiṇhavāre subhena okiṇṇā vikiṇṇā subhena sarīrappabhāvaṇṇena ekagghanā suvaṇṇamañjūsāya ṭhapitasampajjalitakañcanapiṇḍasassirikāti subhakiṇhā. Tesaṃ gahaṇena sabbāpi tatiyajjhānabhūmi gahitā. Ekatalavāsino eva cete sabbepi parittasubhā appamāṇasubhā subhakiṇhāti veditabbā.
在广果天这一节里,“广果”的意思是果报广大。第四禅那地的梵天,就被称为广果天。至于这三节(光音天、遍净天、广果天)的义理解释,应当依照“已生”部分所说的方式来理解。巴利
Vehapphalavāre, vipulā phalāti vehapphalā. Catutthajjhānabhūmi brahmāno vuccanti. Atthanayayojanā pana imesu tīsupi vāresu bhūtavāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
在“征服者”这一节中,“征服者”就是abhibhū,意思是“已征服”。他征服了什么?征服了四种无色蕴。这是“无想有”的另一种叫法。无想有情天人与广果天处在同一层天、同一个地方,他们以投生时的行住坐卧姿态,一直到寿命结束都保持不变,就像心所造出的色法一样。这里,所有这些无想有情都被“征服者”这个词涵盖。有些人则用“所谓征服者就是一千梵天”这样的方式,在各处解释那些作主宰的梵天。但是,因为一提到“梵天”就已经把他们包括进去了,所以应该知道那种解释是不合理的。这里的释义方式是:听闻“征服者容貌庄严、寿命长久”之后,对它生起欲贪,以渴爱的妄计去认定“这就是征服者”;或者以“啊,愿我能投生到征服者的同伴中”这样的方式,为了获得尚未获得的而发愿,这也是以渴爱的妄计去认定“这就是征服者”;如果把自己看得低劣、把征服者看得殊胜,那就是以我慢的妄计去认定“这就是征服者”;如果以“征服者是恒常的、不变的”这样的方式去执取,就应该知道,这是以邪见的妄计去认定“这就是征服者”。其余内容,和“生主”那一节所说的一样。巴利
Abhibhūvāre abhibhavīti abhibhū. Kiṃ abhibhavi? Cattāro khandhe arūpino. Asaññabhavassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Asaññasattā devā vehapphalehi saddhiṃ ekatalāyeva ekasmiṃ okāse yena iriyāpathena nibbattā, teneva yāvatāyukaṃ tiṭṭhanti cittakammarūpasadisā hutvā. Te idha sabbepi abhibhūvacanena gahitā. Keci abhibhū nāma sahasso brahmāti evamādinā nayena tattha tattha adhipatibrahmānaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Brahmaggahaṇeneva pana tassa gahitattā ayuttametanti veditabbaṃ. Yojanānayo cettha abhibhū vaṇṇavā dīghāyukoti sutvā tattha chandarāgaṃ uppādento abhibhuṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Aho vatāhaṃ abhibhuno sahabyataṃ upapajjeyya’’ntiādinā pana nayena appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahantopi abhibhuṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Attānaṃ hīnato abhibhuṃ seyyato dahanto pana abhibhuṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Abhibhū nicco dhuvo’’tiādinā nayena parāmasanto abhibhuṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatīti veditabbo. Sesaṃ pajāpativāre vuttanayameva.
空无边处等部分的解说巴利
Ākāsānañcāyatanavārādivaṇṇanā
4 世尊这样依次展示天界时,又通过“胜者”这句话指出了无想有情界。现在,因为这里讲的是轮回,而净居天是站在还灭这一边的,那些天人确实都是不来者和漏尽者。或者说,那些天人有几千劫的寿命,只在佛陀出世时才出现。可是佛陀在无数劫中也不出世,那时候那个地方就是空的。就像国王安营扎寨的地方一样,净居天是诸佛的住处。正因为这个原因,他们也不被算在识住和众生住里面。但这些想法在任何时候都存在。所以,为了显示那些始终存在的处所,世尊越过净居天,说了“空无边处”等。其中,“空无边处”是指属于那个地方的四种蕴——善、异熟、唯作。而且,因为这是关于界分别的讨论,应该把它们只看作已经投生到那里的人。同样的道理也适用于识无边处等。这四个部分中的义释,应该按照“胜者”那一节里说过的方式来理解。其中的慢和妄想,也适合按照“生主”那一节里说过的方式来理解。巴利
4. Evaṃ bhagavā paṭipāṭiyā devaloke dassentopi abhibhūvacanena asaññabhavaṃ dassetvā idāni yasmā ayaṃ vaṭṭakathā, suddhāvāsā ca vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitā, anāgāmikhīṇāsavā eva hi te devā. Yasmā vā katipayakappasahassāyukā te devā, buddhuppādakāleyeva honti. Buddhā pana asaṅkheyepi kappe na uppajjanti, tadā suññāpi sā bhūmi hoti. Rañño khandhāvāraṭṭhānaṃ viya hi buddhānaṃ suddhāvāsabhavo. Te teneva ca kāraṇena viññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsavasenapi na gahitā, sabbakālikā pana imā maññanā. Tasmā tāsaṃ sadāvijjamānabhūmiṃ dassento suddhāvāse atikkamitvā, ākāsānañcāyatanantiādimāha. Tattha ākāsānañcāyatananti tabbhūmikā cattāro kusalavipākakiriyā khandhā. Te ca tatrūpapannāyeva daṭṭhabbā bhavaparicchedakathā ayanti katvā. Esa nayo viññāṇañcāyatanādīsu. Atthayojanā pana catūsupi etesu vāresu abhibhūvāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Mānamaññanā cettha pajāpativāre vuttanayenāpi yujjati.
已见、已闻等部分的注释巴利
Diṭṭhasutavārādivaṇṇanā
5 像这样,先按地界差别等分类,详细展示了妄想的对象;现在,为了把一切妄想的对象——也就是属于有身、三地法的分类——用“所见”等四种方式归纳起来展示,所以说了“所见,以所见”等话。巴利
5. Evaṃ bhūmivisesādinā bhedena vitthāratopi maññanāvatthuṃ dassetvā idāni sabbamaññanāvatthubhūtaṃ sakkāyapariyāpannaṃ tebhūmakadhammabhedaṃ diṭṭhādīhi catūhi saṅgaṇhitvā dassento, diṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhatotiādimāha.
在这里,“所见”是指用肉眼看到的,也是指用天眼看到的。这是色处的同义词。其中,“对所见加以认为”是指以三种认为的方式对所见加以认为。是哪三种呢?当人把色处看作好看的、看作快乐的,就在那里生起欲贪,对它贪著、欢喜。世尊也这样说过:“比丘们,众生对女色贪染、迷恋、执著、昏醉、紧抓不放,他们长久地忧愁,因为随顺女色的支配。”(《增支部》5.55)像这样,就是以渴爱的方式对所见加以认为。或者心里想:“愿我将来也有这样的色”,对此生起欢喜;或者渴望色上的圆满而行布施等(详细展开也是如此)。这样也是以渴爱的方式对所见加以认为。又依着自己和别人的色的圆满或衰败而生起慢心,想“我比这更殊胜”,或“我和这差不多”,或“我比这更低劣”,这样就是以慢的方式对所见加以认为。又把色处认为常、恒、永住,认为是我、是我所有的,认为是吉祥、是不吉祥,这样就是以见解的方式对所见加以认为。就这样,以三种方式对所见加以认为。那么,怎样是“在所见之中认为”呢?以观察“色中有我”的方式去认为,就是在所见之中认为。或者像对财富、对谷物那样。同样,在色上生起贪等而认为,也是在所见之中认为。这是他的见解式的认为。然而,就在他以见解的方式所认为的那个对象上,由于生起贪爱和慢心,也应当知道有渴爱式的认为和慢式的认为。这样就是在所见之中认为。其余部分应当依照“地遍”那段所说的方法来理解。巴利
Tattha diṭṭhanti maṃsacakkhunāpi diṭṭhaṃ, dibbacakkhunāpi diṭṭhaṃ. Rūpāyatanassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tattha diṭṭhaṃ maññatīti diṭṭhaṃ tīhi maññanāhi maññati. Kathaṃ? Rūpāyatanaṃ subhasaññāya sukhasaññāya ca passanto tattha chandarāgaṃ janeti, taṃ assādeti abhinandati. Vuttampi hetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘itthirūpe, bhikkhave, sattā rattā giddhā gadhitā mucchitā ajjhosannā, te dīgharattaṃ socanti itthirūpavasānugā’’ti (a. ni. 5.55). Evaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Iti me rūpaṃ siyā anāgatamaddhānanti vā panettha nandiṃ samannāneti, rūpasampadaṃ vā pana ākaṅkhamāno dānaṃ detī’’ti vitthāro. Evampi diṭṭhaṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Attano pana parassa ca rūpasampattiṃ vipattiṃ nissāya mānaṃ janeti. ‘‘Imināhaṃ seyyosmī’’ti vā ‘‘sadisosmī’’ti vā ‘‘hīnosmī’’ti vāti evaṃ diṭṭhaṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. Rūpāyatanaṃ pana niccaṃ dhuvaṃ sassatanti maññati, attānaṃ attaniyanti maññati, maṅgalaṃ amaṅgalanti maññati, evaṃ diṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññati. Evaṃ diṭṭhaṃ tīhi maññanāhi maññati. Kathaṃ diṭṭhasmiṃ maññati? Rūpasmiṃ attānaṃ samanupassananayena maññanto diṭṭhasmiṃ maññati. Yathā vā dhane dhaññe. Evaṃ rūpasmiṃ rāgādayoti maññantopi diṭṭhasmiṃ maññati. Ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiññeva panassa diṭṭhimaññanāya maññite vatthusmiṃ sinehaṃ mānañca uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Evaṃ diṭṭhasmiṃ maññati. Sesaṃ pathavīvāre vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
所谓“所闻”,是指用肉耳听到的,也是指用天耳听到的。这是声处的同义词。巴利
Sutanti maṃsasotenapi sutaṃ, dibbasotenapi sutaṃ, saddāyatanassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
“所觉”:是指通过触和思(了知)而执取到的;意思是“接触并到达”。这是说,当诸根与诸所缘彼此结合时,就被识知了。这是香处、味处、触处的同义词。巴利
Mutanti mutvā munitvā ca gahitaṃ, āhacca upagantvāti attho, indriyānaṃ ārammaṇānañca aññamaññasaṃsilese viññātanti vuttaṃ hoti, gandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
“已识知”是指由意识所识知的,这是其余七处的同义词,或者是法所缘的同义词。不过在这里,只取属于有身的部分。详细的解释应当依照“已见”那一节所说的方法来理解。巴利
Viññātanti manasā viññātaṃ, sesānaṃ sattannaṃ āyatanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ dhammārammaṇassa vā. Idha pana sakkāyapariyāpannameva labbhati. Vitthāro panettha diṭṭhavāre vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
单一性等章节的解说巴利
Ekattavārādivaṇṇanā
6 就这样,先用见等四种把一切有身分别讲完之后,现在再按入定者和未入定者两种方式,把同一内容分成两方面来说明,于是说出“单一性”“差异性”等话。巴利
6. Evaṃ sabbaṃ sakkāyabhedaṃ diṭṭhādīhi catūhi dassetvā idāni tameva samāpannakavārena ca asamāpannakavārena ca dvidhā dassento ekattaṃ nānattantiādimāha.
用“单一性”这个词,是在显示已入定的那一类情况;用“差异性”这个词,是在显示未入定的那一类情况。它们的意思是这样的:成为一体,就是“单一性”;成为种种不同的状态,就是“差异性”。至于这里怎么把它们搭配起来理解,则应当把已入定这一类按四蕴来区分,把未入定这一类按五蕴来区分,再依照教法的方式,比如“把色看作我”等等,以及依照注疏中在“地品”等地方所说的方式,随其相应而审察、了知。不过,有些人说“单一性”是指单一性的道理,“差异性”是指差异性的道理。还有些人则抱着这样的见解:“有一个具有单一想之我,无病,死后”,“有一个具有差异想之我”等等。这些都不是这里所要表达的意思,所以全都不合理。巴利
Ekattanti iminā hi samāpannakavāraṃ dasseti. Nānattanti iminā asamāpannakavāraṃ. Tesaṃ ayaṃ vacanattho ekabhāvo ekattaṃ. Nānābhāvo nānattanti. Yojanā panettha samāpannakavāraṃ catūhi khandhehi, asamāpannakavārañca pañcahi khandhehi bhinditvā ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā sāsananayena pathavīvārādīsu vuttena ca aṭṭhakathānayena yathānurūpaṃ vīmaṃsitvā veditabbā. Keci pana ekattanti ekattanayaṃ vadanti nānattanti nānattanayaṃ. Apare ‘‘ekattasaññī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā, nānattasaññī attā hotī’’ti evaṃ diṭṭhābhinivesaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ idha nādhippetattā ayuttameva hoti.
像这样把整个有身从两个方面展示之后,现在再把同一个有身归纳成一个方面来展示,于是说了“一切,一切”等话。这里的连接方式应当这样理解:乐于一切的人,是以渴爱的方式去认为一切;以“这些众生是我所造”这类方式,认为自己造作的一切,是以慢的方式去认为一切;以“一切是过去所造业之因,一切是自在天所造之因,一切无因无缘,一切存在,一切不存在”这类方式去认为的人,应当知道他是以邪见的方式去认为一切。那么,怎样在一切中认为呢?这里有人持这样的见解:“我有一个大我。”他构想一切世间众生居住的地方就是那个大我的处所,于是认为:“我的这个我,就在一切之中。”这是他的邪见认为。而他对这个我生起贪爱,并因此生起慢心,也应当知道这是渴爱认为和慢认为。其余内容,应当依照大地品中所说的方法来理解。巴利
Evaṃ sabbaṃ sakkāyaṃ dvidhā dassetvā idāni tameva ekadhā sampiṇḍetvā dassento sabbaṃ sabbatotiādimāha. Yojanānayo panettha sabbaṃ assādento sabbaṃ taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Mayā ete sattā nimmitā’’tiādinā nayena attanā nimmitaṃ maññanto sabbaṃ mānamaññanāya maññati. ‘‘Sabbaṃ pubbekatakammahetu, sabbaṃ issaranimmānahetu, sabbaṃ ahetuapaccayā, sabbaṃ atthi, sabbaṃ natthī’’tiādinā nayena maññanto sabbaṃ diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatīti veditabbo. Kathaṃ sabbasmiṃ maññati? Idhekacco evaṃdiṭṭhiko hoti ‘‘mahā me attā’’ti. So sabbalokasannivāsaṃ tassokāsabhāvena parikappetvā so kho pana me ayaṃ attā sabbasminti maññati, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa attani sinehaṃ tabbatthukañca mānaṃ uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Sesaṃ pathavīvāre vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
像这样,先把整个有身用同一种方式显示出来,现在又用另一种方法把它归结为一种来显示,于是说“涅槃,涅槃”。在这里,“涅槃”应当理解为:依照“贤者啊,当这个我具备五种欲乐、拥有五种欲乐、享受五种欲乐时,贤者啊,到这一步,这个我就达到了最上的现法涅槃”这类说法,以五种方式出现的“最上现法涅槃”。在那里,如果贪著涅槃的滋味,就是以渴爱的执取来执取涅槃;如果因为那个涅槃而生起慢心,想着“我证得了涅槃”,就是以慢的执取来执取涅槃;如果那明明不是涅槃,却把它当成涅槃,当成常恒等等来执取,就应当知道,这是以邪见的执取来执取涅槃。巴利
Evaṃ sabbaṃ sakkāyaṃ ekadhā dassetvā idāni aparenapi nayena taṃ ekadhā dassento nibbānaṃ nibbānatoti āha. Tattha nibbānanti ‘‘yato kho, bho, ayaṃ attā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgibhūto paricāreti. Ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṃ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ patto hotī’’tiādinā nayena pañcadhā āgataṃ paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha nibbānaṃ assādento taṇhāmaññanāya maññati. Tena nibbānena ‘‘ahamasmi nibbānaṃ patto’’ti mānaṃ janento mānamaññanāya maññati. Anibbānaṃyeva samānaṃ taṃ nibbānato niccādito ca gaṇhanto diṭṭhimaññanāya maññatīti veditabbo.
不过,如果有人执取一个不同于涅槃的我,心里想着“这个我就是在这个涅槃里”,那他就是在对涅槃起执取,这是他的见执取。而当他对自己这个我生起贪爱,并生起以这个我为依据的慢心时,也应该知道这就是渴爱与慢的执取。同样的道理也适用于从涅槃出发的执取。因为在那种情况下,他也是执取一个不同于涅槃的我,心里想着“这是涅槃,这是我,而我这个我是不同于这个涅槃的”,这样就是从涅槃出发起执取,这是他的见执取。而当他对自己这个我生起贪爱,并生起以这个我为依据的慢心时,也应该知道这就是渴爱与慢的执取。但如果他想着“啊,我的涅槃真是快乐”,那就应该知道,他是在执取“涅槃是我的”。其余部分和前面说过的相同。这里有一首摄颂:巴利
Nibbānato pana aññaṃ attānaṃ gahetvā so kho pana me ayaṃ attā imasmiṃ nibbāneti maññanto nibbānasmiṃ maññati, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa attani sinehaṃ tabbatthukañca mānaṃ uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. Esa nayo nibbānato maññanāyapi. Tatrapi hi nibbānato aññaṃ attānaṃ gahetvā ‘‘idaṃ nibbānaṃ, ayaṃ attā, so kho pana me ayaṃ attā ito nibbānato añño’’ti maññanto nibbānato maññati, ayamassa diṭṭhimaññanā. Tasmiṃyeva panassa attani sinehaṃ tabbatthukañca mānaṃ uppādayato taṇhāmānamaññanāpi veditabbā. ‘‘Aho sukhaṃ mama nibbāna’’nti maññanto pana nibbānaṃ meti maññatīti veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ayaṃ panettha anugīti –
这个有身是何等,对不如实了知它者,它即如是。
凡夫在五取蕴这个有身上,会生起一切妄想。
这个身体是可厌的、会坏灭的,是苦的,不受人掌控;
愚人从对立面抓取它,抓取观念。
把五取蕴看成是清净的、快乐的,
就像飞蛾之于火焰一样,渴爱的妄想计度也是如此。
他决意持守“恒常”想,看见那人的福报。
就像在粪便中(生起)粪便等(想),是以慢心而有的思量。
无智慧的人看它时,就认为“这是我、这是我的、这是我的所有”。
如在镜中被缚,由邪见而生起妄念。
而这名为计度者,其实就是微细的魔缚。
它虽然松垮,却很难挣脱,凡夫就是被它绑住的。
就算拼命挣扎,也逃不出“有身”的掌控。
就像被拴在竖起的坚固柱子上的狗。
他被有身之染污所染,被生与老所染;
他被疾病等种种痛苦不断地狠狠折磨。
诸位贤善,我告诉你们:要观察这个有身。
从不合意、不清净、会坏灭、没有实我这四个角度。
觉者这样观察,就看清了它的真实本性。
舍弃了一切妄想之后,就从一切苦中解脱出来。巴利
Yādiso esa sakkāyo, tathā naṃ avijānato; Puthujjanassa sakkāye, jāyanti sabbamaññanā. Jeguccho bhiduro cāyaṃ, dukkho apariṇāyako; Taṃ paccanīkato bālo, gaṇhaṃ gaṇhāti maññanaṃ. Subhato sukhato ceva, sakkāyaṃ anupassato; Salabhasseva aggimhi, hoti taṇhāya maññanā. Niccasaññaṃ adhiṭṭhāya, sampattiṃ tassa passato; Gūthādī viya gūthasmiṃ, hoti mānena maññanā. Attā attaniyo meti, passato naṃ abuddhino; Ādāse viya bondhissa, diṭṭhiyā hoti maññanā. Maññanāti ca nāmetaṃ, sukhumaṃ mārabandhanaṃ; Sithilaṃ duppamuñcañca, yena baddho puthujjano. Bahuṃ vipphandamānopi, sakkāyaṃ nātivattati; Samussitaṃ daḷhatthambhaṃ, sāva gaddulabandhano. Sa’so sakkāyamalīno, jātiyā ca jarāya ca; Rogādīhi ca dukkhehi, niccaṃ haññati bāḷhaso. Taṃ vo vadāmi bhaddante, sakkāyaṃ anupassatha; Asātato asubhato, bhedato ca anattato. Eso sabhāvo hetassa, passaṃ evamimaṃ budho; Pahāya maññanā sabbā, sabbadukkhā pamuccatīti.
有学品第二理路的解释巴利
Sekkhavāradutiyanayavaṇṇanā
7 世尊这样在地等事物上,先说明了凡夫以整个有身之法为根本的活动方式,现在要说明有学在同样那些事物上的活动方式,于是说“诸比丘,若有比丘是有学……”等等。其中,“yo”是提示主题的词,“so”是具体说明的词。“pi”这个字表示统合,就像在“这也是法,是不定”等语句中那样。这是按所缘的同类来统合人,而不是按人本身的同类来统合,因为前面那些人是见坏失的,这里是具足正见的,他们之间没有同类性。但所缘对前面那些人和对这些人是一样的。所以说“按所缘的同类来统合人,而不是按人本身的同类”。“yopi so”这整个说法,应当理解为是在指出现在要说的有学。“诸比丘,比丘”这一句,则按前面已说过的方式理解。巴利
7. Evaṃ bhagavā pathavīādīsu vatthūsu sabbasakkāyadhammamūlabhūtaṃ puthujjanassa pavattiṃ dassetvā idāni tesveva vatthūsu sekkhassa pavattiṃ dassento yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sekkhotiādimāha. Tattha yoti uddesavacanaṃ. Soti niddesavacanaṃ. Pikāro sampiṇḍanattho ayampi dhammo aniyatotiādīsu viya. Tena ca ārammaṇasabhāgena puggalaṃ sampiṇḍeti, no puggalasabhāgena, heṭṭhato hi puggalā diṭṭhivipannā, idha diṭṭhisampannā, na tesaṃ sabhāgatā atthi. Ārammaṇaṃ pana heṭṭhā puggalānampi tadeva, imesampi tadevāti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ārammaṇasabhāgena puggalaṃ sampiṇḍeti no puggalasabhāgenā’’ti. Yopi soti iminā pana sakalena vacanena idāni vattabbaṃ sekkhaṃ dassetīti veditabbo. Bhikkhave, bhikkhūti idaṃ vuttanayameva.
“有学”是以什么含义而称为有学?因为获得了有学之法,所以是有学。这确实是世尊所说的:“尊者,到底怎样才是有学呢?比丘们,在这里,一位比丘具备有学的正见……乃至……具备有学的正定。比丘们,到这种程度,就是有学。”(《相应部》5.13)另外,因为他在学习,所以也是有学。这确实是世尊所说的:“比丘,正因为他在学习,所以称为有学。他学习什么?他学习增上戒,也学习增上心,也学习增上慧。比丘,正因为他在学习,所以称为有学。”(《增支部》3.86)巴利
Sekkhoti kenaṭṭhena sekkho? Sekkhadhammappaṭilābhato sekkho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, sekkho hotīti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sekkhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato hoti…pe… sekkhena sammāsamādhinā samannāgato hoti. Ettāvatā kho bhikkhu, sekkho hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.13). Apica sikkhatītipi sekkho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘sikkhatīti kho bhikkhu tasmā sekkhoti vuccati. Kiñca sikkhati? Adhisīlampi sikkhati, adhicittampi sikkhati, adhipaññampi sikkhati, sikkhatīti kho bhikkhu tasmā sekkhoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.86).
即使是善凡夫,只要他沿着随顺之道修行并圆满实践,具足戒行,守护根门,饮食知量,勤修初夜后夜的警寤,持续投入于菩提分法的修习,心里想着“今天或明天我要证得某个沙门果”,他也被称为“正在学习”,所以是“有学”。不过,在这个含义上,只有已经通达证悟的人才是这里所说的“有学”,凡夫不算。巴利
Yopi kalyāṇaputhujjano anulomapaṭipadāya paripūrakārī sīlasampanno indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto pubbarattāpararattaṃ bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanānuyogamanuyutto viharati – ‘‘ajja vā sve vā aññataraṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ adhigamissāmī’’ti, sopi vuccati sikkhatīti sekkhoti. Imasmiṃ panatthe paṭivedhappattova sekkho adhippeto, no puthujjano.
“未达心”就是心尚未达到,所以叫“未达心者”。这里“心”既可以指贪,也可以指心,还可以指阿罗汉果。在“行于虚空的罗网,那个以心而行”这句里,“心”指的是贪。在“心、意、心”这句里,“心”指的是心。在“未达心的有学,闻名于人者应死去”这句里,“心”指的是阿罗汉果。这里要表达的也是阿罗汉果。因此,这句话的意思就是:尚未证得阿罗汉果。巴利
Appattaṃ mānasaṃ etenāti appattamānaso. Mānasanti rāgopi cittampi arahattampi. ‘‘Antalikkhacaro pāso, yvāyaṃ carati mānaso’’ti (mahāva. 33; saṃ. ni. 1.151) ettha hi rāgo mānasaṃ. ‘‘Cittaṃ mano mānasa’’nti (dha. sa. 65) ettha cittaṃ. ‘‘Appattamānaso sekkho, kālaṃ kayirā janesutā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.159) ettha arahattaṃ. Idhāpi arahattameva adhippetaṃ. Tena appattārahattoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“无上”就是最殊胜的意思,也就是无与伦比。“轭安稳”是指从四种轭中解脱出来、得到安稳,不再被束缚,这里指的就是阿罗汉果。“希求”有两种:一种是渴爱的希求,一种是善法欲的希求。在“对于希求者,确实有种种渴求;对于已筹划者,则有动摇”(《经集》908)这句里,说的是渴爱的希求。巴利
Anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ, asadisanti attho. Catūhi yogehi khemaṃ ananuyuttanti yogakkhemaṃ, arahattameva adhippetaṃ. Patthayamānoti dve patthanā taṇhāpatthanā ca, chandapatthanā ca. ‘‘Patthayamānassa hi pajappitāni, pavedhitaṃ vāpi pakappitesū’’ti (su. ni. 908) ettha taṇhāpatthanā.
魔罗的洪流已被切断,已被粉碎,已被分解;
比丘们,你们要满怀欢喜,已经到达安稳之地。巴利
‘‘Chinnaṃ pāpimato sotaṃ, viddhastaṃ vinaḷīkataṃ; Pāmojjabahulā hotha, khemaṃ pattattha bhikkhavo’’ti. (ma. ni. 1.352) –
这里所说的“想要做”,就是对善法的欲求与希愿。这里指的正是这种欲求。因此,“希求者”应当理解为:他渴望那轭安稳,想要达到、想要证得,心倾注于它、朝向它、倾向于它。“住”是指用另一种姿势断开前一种姿势带来的苦,让身体持续而不衰败。或者,也可以按照“以信胜解‘一切行无常’而住”这类教导方式来理解这里的含义。“胜知地是地”:就是依地的地性而胜知地,不像凡夫那样以完全颠倒的想去了知;而且是以殊胜的智慧了知。也就是说,他确定这就是地性,并如此胜知它为无常、为苦、为无我。说了这些,就是在说:这样胜知之后,不妄想地。“妄想”就是妄想。然而,对有学既不能说他是“妄想者”,也不能说他是“不妄想者”。要知道,这里是为了表达这个意思才这样下这个词的。那么,这里的意思到底是什么呢?应当说:凡夫因为一切妄想都未断除,所以说是“妄想”;漏已尽者因为已断除,所以“不妄想”。但有学已断除了见解上的妄想,其余的妄想也变得薄弱,因此他既不能像凡夫那样说是“妄想者”,也不能像漏已尽者那样说是“不妄想者”。巴利
Ettha kattukamyatā kusalacchandapatthanā. Ayameva idhādhippetā. Tena patthayamānoti taṃ yogakkhemaṃ pattukāmo adhigantukāmo tanninno tappoṇo tappabbhāroti veditabbo. Viharatīti aññaṃ iriyāpathadukkhaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ kāyaṃ harati. Atha vā ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti adhimuccanto saddhāya viharatī’’tiādināpi niddesanayenettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Pathaviṃ pathavito abhijānātīti pathaviṃ pathavībhāvena abhijānāti, na puthujjano viya sabbākāraviparītāya saññāya sañjānāti. Apica kho abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena jānāti, evaṃ pathavīti etaṃ pathavībhāvaṃ adhimuccanto eva naṃ aniccātipi dukkhātipi anattātipi evaṃ abhijānātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Evañca naṃ abhiññatvā pathaviṃ mā maññīti vuttaṃ hoti. Maññatīti maññi. Ayaṃ pana maññī ca na maññī ca na vattabboti. Etasmiñhi atthe idaṃ padaṃ nipātetvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ko panettha adhippāyoti. Vuccate, puthujjano tāva sabbamaññanānaṃ appahīnattā maññatīti vutto. Khīṇāsavo pahīnattā na maññatīti. Sekkhassa pana diṭṭhimaññanā pahīnā, itarā pana tanubhāvaṃ gatā, tena so maññatītipi na vattabbo puthujjano viya, na maññatītipi na vattabbo khīṇāsavo viyāti.
对于那个有学来说,这个产生妄想的对象应当被三种遍知所遍知——因为他已经进入决定正性,又最终以正觉为归宿;而不像凡夫那样还有未被遍知、未曾了知的情况,也不像漏尽者那样已经遍知。其余各处都按照前面说过的方式理解。巴利
Pariññeyyaṃ tassāti tassa sekkhassa taṃ maññanāvatthu okkantaniyāmattā sambodhiparāyaṇattā ca tīhi pariññāhi pariññeyyaṃ, apariññeyyañca apariññātañca na hoti puthujjanassa viya, nopi pariññātaṃ khīṇāsavassa viya. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttanayameva.
漏尽者品第三等理趣的解释巴利
Khīṇāsavavāratatiyādinayavaṇṇanā
8 像这样,先说明了有学在土地等所缘上的生起方式之后,现在要说明漏尽者的生起方式,于是说“诸比丘,又有那样的比丘是阿罗汉”等等。其中,“又有那样的”里的“pi”这个词表示集合、总括。由此表明,在这里也能成立两者的共通性。为什么呢?因为有学因为是圣者,所以和漏尽者有共通之处,因此能成立补特伽罗层面的共通;而所缘层面的共通,则正如前面所说的那样。“阿罗汉”的意思是:烦恼已远离、烦恼已远去、烦恼已断除。世尊也这样说过:“诸比丘,比丘怎样才是阿罗汉呢?那些恶的、不善的、有杂染的、导致再生的、令人恐惧的、带来苦果的、将来会生老病死的法,都已远离他。诸比丘,这样的比丘就是阿罗汉。”(《中部》1.434)“漏尽者”:有四种漏——欲漏……乃至……无明漏。这四种漏在阿罗汉身上已经灭尽、已经断除、已经彻底断绝、已经止息,不可能再生起,已被智慧之火焚烧,因此称为漏尽者。巴利
8. Evaṃ pathavīādīsu vatthūsu sekkhassa pavattiṃ dassetvā idāni khīṇāsavassa pavattiṃ dassento yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahantiādimāha. Tattha yopīti pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tena idha ubhayasabhāgatāpi labbhatīti dasseti. Sekkho hi khīṇāsavena ariyapuggalattā sabhāgo, tena puggalasabhāgatā labbhati, ārammaṇasabhāgatā pana vuttanayā eva. Arahanti ārakakileso, dūrakileso pahīnakilesoti attho. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘kathañca , bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṃ hoti? Ārakāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā saṃkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇiyā. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahaṃ hotī’’ti. (Ma. ni. 1.434) khīṇāsavoti cattāro āsavā kāmāsavo…pe… avijjāsavo, ime cattāro āsavā arahato khīṇā pahīnā samucchinnā paṭippassaddhā, abhabbuppattikā ñāṇagginā daḍḍhā, tena vuccati khīṇāsavoti.
已住完成:在依止共住、圣道共住以及十种圣者住处中,他已经住、遍住、度过、遍度过,所以是已住完成,也就是已修习梵行。应作已作:从凡夫善士以上,七有学依四种道而作应作之事;而漏尽者一切应作都已作、已圆满,对他来说,为了证得苦灭再没有更进一步的应作之事,所以是应作已作。关于这一点也有这样的偈颂:巴利
Vusitavāti garusaṃvāsepi ariyamaggasaṃvāsepi dasasu ariyavāsesupi vasi parivasi vuttho parivuttho, so vutthavāso ciṇṇacaraṇoti vusitavā katakaraṇīyoti puthujjanakalyāṇakaṃ upādāya satta sekkhā catūhi maggehi karaṇīyaṃ karonti nāma, khīṇāsavassa sabbakaraṇīyāni katāni pariyositāni, natthi tassa uttari karaṇīyaṃ dukkhakkhayādhigamāyāti katakaraṇīyo. Vuttampi hetaṃ –
对于那位已正确解脱、内心寂静的比丘,
对于已作之事,不存在再积聚,也没有什么是应当再造作的。巴利
‘‘Tassa sammā vimuttassa, santacittassa bhikkhuno; Katassa paṭicayo natthi, karaṇīyaṃ na vijjatī’’ti. (theragā. 642);
已放下重担:有三种重担,就是蕴的重担、烦恼的重担、行(造作)的重担。他的这三种重担已经放下、卸下、搁置、丢弃,所以称为“已放下重担”。已证得自义:已经证得了自义,也就是所说的“自己的利益”。这里把 ka 变成了 da;“自义”应当理解为阿拉汉果。因为它以摄持自身之义、不舍自身之义、以及自身究竟之义,所以称为“自己的利益”。巴利
Ohitabhāroti tayo bhārā khandhabhāro kilesabhāro abhisaṅkhārabhāroti, tassime tayo bhārā ohitā oropitā nikkhittā pātitā, tena vuccati ohitabhāroti. Anuppattasadatthoti anuppatto sadatthaṃ, sakatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kakārassāyaṃ dakāro kato, sadatthoti ca arahattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tañhi attupanibandhanaṭṭhena attānaṃ avijahanaṭṭhena attano paramatthaṭṭhena ca attano attho sakatthoti vuccati.
“已灭尽有结”:“有结”就是十种结——欲贪结、嗔结、慢结、见结、疑结、戒禁取结、有贪结、嫉妒结、悭吝结、无明结。这些结把众生绑在种种“有”里,把他们系缚、缠住,或者让一种“有”和另一种“有”连在一起,所以叫“有结”。阿罗汉的这些有结已经彻底灭尽、断除,被智慧之火完全烧掉了,因此说他“已灭尽有结”。
“以正智解脱”:这里的“正智”就是正确地、如实地了知。这话说的是什么呢?就是正确地、如实地了知——蕴的蕴义、处的处义、界的界义、苦的逼迫义、集的生起义、灭的寂静义、道的照见义,以及“一切行皆无常”等等这些差别,通过如实了知、判断、衡量、辨明,把它们弄得清清楚楚。巴利
Parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojanoti bhavasaṃyojanānīti dasa saṃyojanāni kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭighamānadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsabhavarāgaissāmacchariyasaṃyojanaṃ avijjāsaṃyojanaṃ. Imāni hi satte bhavesu saṃyojenti upanibandhanti, bhavaṃ vā bhavena saṃyojenti, tasmā ‘‘bhavasaṃyojanānī’’ti vuccanti. Imāni bhavasaṃyojanāni arahato parikkhīṇāni pahīnāni ñāṇagginā daḍḍhāni, tena vuccati ‘‘parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojano’’ti. Sammadaññā vimuttoti ettha sammadaññāti sammā aññāya. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – khandhānaṃ khandhaṭṭhaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanaṭṭhaṃ, dhātūnaṃ dhātuṭṭhaṃ, dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭhaṃ, samudayassa pabhavaṭṭhaṃ, nirodhassa santaṭṭhaṃ, maggassa dassanaṭṭhaṃ, sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti evamādiṃ vā bhedaṃ sammā yathābhūtaṃ aññāya jānitvā tīrayitvā tulayitvā vibhāvetvā vibhūtaṃ katvāti.
已解脱:解脱有两种,就是心的解脱和涅槃。阿罗汉因为心已经从一切烦恼中解脱,所以依心的解脱而解脱;因为已经决意于涅槃,所以也依涅槃而解脱。因此说他是“以正智而解脱”。他的那个已被遍知:那位阿罗汉的执取对象,已经被三种遍知所遍知。因此,他不再对那个对象生起执取,或者说不再生起那种执取,其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Vimuttoti dve vimuttiyo cittassa ca vimutti nibbānañca. Arahā sabbakilesehi vimuttacittattā cittavimuttiyāpi vimutto. Nibbānaṃ adhimuttattā nibbānepi vimutto. Tena vuccati ‘‘sammadaññā vimutto’’ti. Pariññātaṃ tassāti tassa arahato taṃ maññanāvatthu tīhi pariññāhi pariññātaṃ. Tasmā so taṃ vatthuṃ na maññati, taṃ vā maññanaṃ na maññatīti vuttaṃ hoti, sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
在涅槃这一章里,则说了“由贪的灭尽……”等三个部分。这些也应在地遍等部分中详细展开。而且,这个“已遍知”部分在涅槃章中也应详细展开。展开时,应把“他的已遍知”与所有句子结合起来,再接上“由贪的灭尽,因离贪”等。其余部分也是同样的道理。不过,开示在一处所说的,就等于在一切处所说的,所以这里简略说。巴利
Nibbānavāre pana khayā rāgassātiādayo tayo vārā vuttā. Te pathavīvārādīsupi vitthāretabbā. Ayañca pariññātavāro nibbānavārepi vitthāretabbo. Vitthārentena ca pariññātaṃ tassāti sabbapadehi yojetvā puna khayā rāgassa vītarāgattāti yojetabbaṃ. Esa nayo itaresu. Desanā pana ekattha vuttaṃ sabbattha vuttameva hotīti saṃkhittā.
由贪的灭尽而离贪这句话里,外道虽然对诸欲离贪,但不是因为贪已灭尽才离贪;而阿罗汉才是因为贪已灭尽而离贪,所以说由贪的灭尽而离贪。对嗔和痴也是同样的道理。就像即使说了我说他已遍知,意思是因为已经遍知,所以他不再妄想那个对象或那种妄想;这里也应当这样理解:因为离贪,所以他不再妄想那个对象或那种妄想。巴利
Khayā rāgassa vītarāgattāti ettha ca yasmā bāhirako kāmesu vītarāgo, na khayā rāgassa vītarāgo. Arahā pana khayā yeva, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘khayā rāgassa vītarāgattā’’ti. Esa nayo dosamohesupi. Yathā ca ‘‘pariññātaṃ tassāti vadāmī’’ti vuttepi pariññātattā so taṃ vatthuṃ taṃ vā maññanaṃ na maññatīti attho hoti, evamidhāpi vītarāgattā so taṃ vatthuṃ taṃ vā maññanaṃ na maññatīti daṭṭhabbo.
在这里,“他的已遍知”这一部分,是为了说明道修习已经圆满才说的;其余几部分,则应当理解为是为了说明果证得已经圆满。或者说,阿罗汉不执取,有两个原因:因为对所依处已经遍知,以及因为不善根已经被断除。因此,通过“已遍知”这一部分,说明他对所依处的遍知;通过其余部分,说明不善根的断除。在这里,后三部分中应当知道这样的差别:在这三部分中,看见贪的过患而安住于随观苦的人,通过无愿解脱而解脱,由于贪的灭尽而离贪;看见嗔的过患而安住于随观无常的人,通过无相解脱而解脱,由于嗔的灭尽而离嗔;看见痴的过患而安住于随观无我的人,通过空解脱而解脱,由于痴的灭尽而离痴。巴利
Ettha ca pariññātaṃ tassāti ayaṃ vāro maggabhāvanāpāripūridassanatthaṃ vutto. Itare pana phalasacchikiriyāpāripūridassanatthanti veditabbā. Dvīhi vā kāraṇehi arahā na maññati vatthussa ca pariññātattā akusalamūlānañca samucchinnattā. Tenassa pariññātavārena vatthuno vatthupariññaṃ dīpeti, itarehi akusalamūlasamucchedanti. Tattha pacchimesu tīsu vāresu ayaṃ viseso veditabbo, tīsu hi vāresu rāge ādīnavaṃ disvā dukkhānupassī viharanto appaṇihitavimokkhena vimutto khayā rāgassa vītarāgo hoti. Dose ādīnavaṃ disvā aniccānupassī viharanto animittavimokkhena vimutto khayā dosassa vītadoso hoti. Mohe ādīnavaṃ disvā anattānupassī viharanto suññatavimokkhena vimutto khayā mohassa vītamoho hotīti.
如果这样,那么“一个人并不能由三种解脱而解脱,这不应当说两次”这种说法就不成立。为什么呢?因为这是不确定的说法。经文只是不确定地说:“比丘们,凡是那位应供的比丘……”但并没有说“他是以无愿解脱而解脱”或“是以另一种解脱而解脱”。因此,凡是与应供者相应的,这一切都应当说。巴利
Evaṃ sante na eko tīhi vimokkhehi vimuccatīti dve vārā na vattabbā siyunti ce, taṃ na. Kasmā? Aniyamitattā. Aniyamena hi vuttaṃ ‘‘yopi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araha’’nti. Na pana vuttaṃ appaṇihitavimokkhena vā vimutto, itarena vāti, tasmā yaṃ arahato yujjati, taṃ sabbaṃ vattabbamevāti.
或者,笼统地说,任何一位阿罗汉,即使在贪等灭尽相同的情况下,因为已经彻底了知变易苦,所以贪灭尽,因此被称为离贪;因为已经彻底了知苦苦,所以嗔灭尽,因此被称为离嗔;因为已经彻底了知行苦,所以痴灭尽,因此被称为离痴。又或者,因为已经彻底了知可爱所缘,所以贪灭尽,因此是离贪;因为已经彻底了知不可爱所缘,所以嗔灭尽,因此是离嗔;因为已经彻底了知中性所缘,所以痴灭尽,因此是离痴。又或者,因为乐受中的贪随眠已被彻底断除,所以贪灭尽,因此是离贪;因为其余受中的嗔随眠和痴随眠已被彻底断除,所以是离嗔和离痴。因此,为了显示这个差别,经文才说“由贪灭尽而离贪……乃至……由痴灭尽而离痴”。巴利
Avisesena vā yo koci arahā samānepi rāgādikkhaye vipariṇāmadukkhassa pariññātattā khayā rāgassa vītarāgoti vuccati, dukkhadukkhassa pariññātattā khayā dosassa vītadosoti. Saṅkhāradukkhassa pariññātattā khayā mohassa vītamohoti. Iṭṭhārammaṇassa vā pariññātattā khayā rāgassa vītarāgo. Aniṭṭhārammaṇassa pariññātattā khayā dosassa vītadoso. Majjhattārammaṇassa pariññātattā khayā mohassa vītamoho. Sukhāya vā vedanāya rāgānusayassa samucchinnattā khayā rāgassa vītarāgo, itarāsu paṭighamohānusayānaṃ samucchinnattā vītadoso vītamoho cāti. Tasmā taṃ visesaṃ dassento āha ‘‘khayā rāgassa vītarāgattā…pe… vītamohattā’’ti.
以漏尽者为依据的第三、第四、第五、第六种说法的解说到此结束。巴利
Khīṇāsavavasena tatiyacatutthapañcamachaṭṭhanayakathā niṭṭhitā.
《如来品》第七种论法的注释巴利
Tathāgatavārasattamanayavaṇṇanā
12 12. 像这样,通过地等事物说明了漏尽者的活动方式之后,现在为了说明自己的活动方式,如来也说“比丘们……”等话。其中,世尊以八种理由被称为“如来”:如此而来,所以是如来;如此而去,所以是如来;来到真实相状,所以是如来;如实正觉真实之法,所以是如来;有如实之见,所以是如来;有如实之说,所以是如来;有如实之行,所以是如来;以征服一切为义,所以是如来。巴利
12. Evaṃ pathavīādīsu vatthūsu khīṇāsavassa pavattiṃ dassetvā idāni attano pavattiṃ dassento tathāgatopi, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha tathāgatoti aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgatoti vuccati – tathā āgatoti tathāgato, tathā gatoti tathāgato, tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato, tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato, tathadassitāya tathāgato, tathāvāditāya tathāgato, tathākāritāya tathāgato, abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgatoti.
世尊为什么是“如此而来”的如来呢?就像过去那些正自觉者,为了利益一切世间而精勤努力,以这样的方式而来;就像毗婆尸佛以这样的方式而来,尸弃佛以这样的方式而来,毗舍婆佛以这样的方式而来,拘留孙佛以这样的方式而来,拘那含佛以这样的方式而来,迦叶佛以这样的方式而来。这话说的是什么意思呢?就是说:那些世尊是以什么样的愿行而来的,我们的世尊也是以同样的愿行而来的。巴利
Kathaṃ bhagavā tathā āgatoti tathāgato? Yathā sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannā purimakā sammāsambuddhā āgatā, yathā vipassī bhagavā āgato, yathā sikhī bhagavā, yathā vessabhū bhagavā, yathā kakusandho bhagavā, yathā koṇāgamano bhagavā, yathā kassapo bhagavā āgatoti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yena abhinīhārena ete bhagavanto āgatā, teneva amhākampi bhagavā āgato.
或者,就像毗婆尸世尊……中略……像咖沙巴世尊那样,圆满布施波罗蜜,圆满戒、出离、智慧、精进、忍耐、真实、决意、慈、舍波罗蜜,圆满这十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十究竟波罗蜜,也就是圆满三十种波罗蜜;又舍弃五种大舍弃,即舍弃肢体、舍弃眼睛、舍弃财富、舍弃王国、舍弃妻子儿女;圆满了前际瑜伽、前际行、法开示、亲族利行等,到达智慧行的顶点而来。同样,我们的世尊也是这样而来。巴利
Atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā dānapāramiṃ pūretvā, sīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccaadhiṭṭhānamettāupekkhāpāramiṃ pūretvā, imā dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti, samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā, aṅgapariccāgaṃ nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāganti ime pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajitvā pubbayogapubbacariyadhammakkhānañātatthacariyādayo pūretvā, buddhicariyāya koṭiṃ patvā āgato, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato.
就像毗婆尸世尊……中略……像咖沙巴世尊那样,修习并充分开展四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八支圣道之后而来;我们的世尊也是这样而来的,所以称为如来。巴利
Yathā ca vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne sammappadhāne iddhipāde pañcindriyāni pañca balāni satta bojjhaṅge ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvetvā brūhetvā āgato, tathā amhākaṃ bhagavāpi āgatoti tathāgato.
就像世间上的毗婆尸等诸佛一样,
已经证得一切知性的牟尼们,来到了这里;
同样,这位释迦牟尼也来到了这里,
因此,具眼者被称为如来。巴利
Yatheva lokamhi vipassiādayo, Sabbaññubhāvaṃ munayo idhāgatā; Tathā ayaṃ sakyamunīpi āgato, Tathāgato vuccati tena cakkhumāti.
就这样,以这种方式到达,所以叫如来。巴利
Evaṃ tathā āgatoti tathāgato.
为什么叫如来?因为他是这样到达的。就像毗婆尸世尊一出生就那样到达……乃至咖沙巴世尊一出生就那样到达。那他又是怎么到达的呢?他一出生,就以平展的双脚站在大地上,面朝北方,以七步的步幅走去。正如经中所说:阿难,菩萨一出生,就以平展的双脚站在大地上,面朝北方,以七步的步幅走去,白伞盖被人举着跟随,他环视一切方向,说出狮子吼:“我是世间的至尊,我是世间的最长,我是世间的最胜。这是最后一生,从此不再有后有。”(《中部》3.207)巴利
Kathaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato. Yathā sampatijāto vipassī bhagavā gato…pe… kassapo bhagavā gato. Kathañca so gatoti, so hi sampatijātova samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gato. Yathāha – sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati setamhi chatte anudhārīyamāne, sabbā ca disā anuviloketi, āsabhiñca vācaṃ bhāsati ‘‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’’ti (ma. ni. 3.207).
他这样的行走是真实不虚的,因为它是众多殊胜成就的前兆。他刚一出生就以平齐的双脚站稳,这是他获得四神足的预兆。面朝北方,是超越一切世间的预兆。走出七步,是获得七觉支宝的预兆。就像“金柄拂尘飘动”(《经集》693)那里所说的,挥动拂尘,是摧伏一切外道的预兆。持白伞盖,是获得阿罗汉解脱之最胜清净白伞盖的预兆。环视一切方向,是获得无所不知、无有障碍之智的预兆。说出狮子吼,是转动不退转的殊胜法轮的预兆。这位世尊也是这样行走的。他这样的行走是真实不虚的,因为它是那些殊胜成就的前兆。所以古德们说:巴利
Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Yañhi so sampatijātova samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahi, idamassa caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. Uttarābhimukhabhāvo pana sabbalokuttarabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ. Sattapadavītihāro sattabojjhaṅgaratanapaṭilābhassa. ‘‘Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā’’ti (su. ni. 693) ettha vutto cāmarukkhepo sabbatitthiyanimmathanassa. Setacchattadhāraṇaṃ arahattavimuttivaravimalasetacchattapaṭilābhassa. Sabbadisānuvilokanaṃ sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassa. Āsabhīvācābhāsanaṃ appaṭivattiyavaradhammacakkappavattanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Tathā ayaṃ bhagavāpi gato. Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ tesaññeva visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Tenāhu porāṇā –
就像刚出生的牛王
他以平稳的双足触踏大地;
乔达摩迈出了七步。
男人们跟着举白色伞盖。
乔达摩走了七步,
他环顾四周,四面八方都看了一遍。
他发出了具足八支的言语。
就像狮子站在山顶上。巴利
‘‘Muhuttajātova gavampatī yathā, Samehi pādehi phusī vasundharaṃ; So vikkamī satta padāni gotamo, Setañca chattaṃ anudhārayuṃ marū. Gantvāna so satta padāni gotamo, Disā vilokesi samā samantato; Aṭṭhaṅgupetaṃ giramabbhudīrayī, Sīho yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’ti. –
就这样,因为已经这样到达,所以叫如来。巴利
Evaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato.
或者,就像毗婆尸世尊……中略……就像咖沙巴世尊那样,这位世尊也同样以出离舍弃了欲贪,以无嗔舍弃了嗔恚,以光明想舍弃了昏沉睡眠,以不散乱舍弃了掉举恶作,以法决定舍弃了疑;他以智慧破除了无明,以喜悦消除了不满;以初禅打开了诸盖之门,以第二禅平息了寻与伺之烟,以第三禅远离了喜,以第四禅舍弃了乐与苦;通过空无边处定,超越了色想、有对想和种种想;通过识无边处定,超越了空无边处想;通过无所有处定,超越了识无边处想;通过非想非非想处定,超越了无所有处想,如此到达。巴利
Atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā, ayampi bhagavā tatheva nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ pahāya gato. Abyāpādena byāpādaṃ, ālokasaññāya thinamiddhaṃ, avikkhepena uddhaccakukkuccaṃ, dhammavavatthānena vicikicchaṃ pahāya, ñāṇena avijjaṃ padāletvā, pāmojjena aratiṃ vinodetvā, paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇakavāṭaṃ ugghāṭetvā, dutiyajjhānena vitakkavicāradhūmaṃ vūpasametvā, tatiyajjhānena pītiṃ virājetvā, catutthajjhānena sukhadukkhaṃ pahāya, ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā rūpasaññāpaṭighasaññānānattasaññāyo samatikkamitvā, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṃ, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṃ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṃ samatikkamitvā gato.
以无常随观断除常想,以苦随观断除乐想,以无我随观断除我想,以厌离随观断除欢喜,以离欲随观断除贪染,以灭随观断除集起,以舍离随观断除执取,以尽随观断除密集想,以衰灭随观断除造作,以变易随观断除恒常想,以无相随观断除相,以无愿随观断除愿求,以空随观断除执著,以增上慧法随观断除执取实质的执著,以如实智见断除迷惑的执著,以过患随观断除爱著的执著,以省察随观断除不省察,以回转随观断除结缚的执著;以入流道粉碎与见相应的烦恼,以一来道舍弃粗重烦恼,以不来道根除微细烦恼,以阿拉汉道彻底断尽一切烦恼而到达。也正因为这样到达,所以称为如来。巴利
Aniccānupassanāya niccasaññaṃ pahāya, dukkhānupassanāya sukhasaññaṃ, anattānupassanāya attasaññaṃ, nibbidānupassanāya nandiṃ, virāgānupassanāya rāgaṃ, nirodhānupassanāya samudayaṃ, paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānaṃ, khayānupassanāya ghanasaññaṃ, vayānupassanāya āyūhanaṃ, vipariṇāmānupassanāya dhuvasaññaṃ, animittānupassanāya nimittaṃ, appaṇihitānupassanāya paṇidhiṃ, suññatānupassanāya abhinivesaṃ, adhipaññādhammavipassanāya sārādānābhinivesaṃ, yathābhūtañāṇadassanena sammohābhinivesaṃ, ādīnavānupassanāya ālayābhinivesaṃ, paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya appaṭisaṅkhaṃ, vivaṭṭānupassanāya saṃyogābhinivesaṃ, sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhekaṭṭhe kilese bhañjitvā, sakadāgāmimaggena oḷārike kilese pahāya, anāgāmimaggena aṇusahagate kilese samugghāṭetvā, arahattamaggena sabbakilese samucchinditvā gato. Evampi tathā gatoti tathāgato.
怎样才是“通达了真如之相而成为如来”呢?地界的坚硬性就是真如,是不虚妄的。水界的流动相、火界的温热相、风界的支撑相、空界的不接触相、识界的了别相,也都是真如,是不虚妄的。巴利
Kathaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato. Pathavīdhātuyā kakkhaḷattalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ. Āpodhātuyā paggharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Tejodhātuyā uṇhattalakkhaṇaṃ. Vāyodhātuyā vitthambhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Ākāsadhātuyā asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ . Viññāṇadhātuyā vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
色的特征是变坏,受的特征是感受,想的特征是认知,行的特征是造作,识的特征是了知。巴利
Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ. Saññāya sañjānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
寻的特征是把心投向目标。伺的特征是反复观察目标。喜的特征是充满扩散。乐的特征是舒服愉悦。心一境性的特征是不散乱。触的特征是接触。巴利
Vitakkassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vicārassa anumajjanalakkhaṇaṃ. Pītiyā pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Sukhassa sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Cittekaggatāya avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信根的特相是胜解。精进根的特相是策励。念根的特相是现起。定根的特相是不散乱。慧根的特相是了知。巴利
Saddhindriyassa adhimokkhalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyindriyassa paggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Satindriyassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhindriyassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Paññindriyassa pajānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信力以面对无信时不可动摇为特征。精进力以面对懈怠时不可动摇为特征。念力以面对失念时不可动摇为特征。定力以面对掉举时不可动摇为特征。慧力以面对无明时不可动摇为特征。巴利
Saddhābalassa assaddhiye akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyabalassa kosajje. Satibalassa muṭṭhasacce. Samādhibalassa uddhacce. Paññābalassa avijjāya akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ.
念觉支的特征是现前安住。择法觉支的特征是简择。精进觉支的特征是策励。喜觉支的特征是遍满。轻安觉支的特征是止息。定觉支的特征是不散乱。舍觉支的特征是省察。巴利
Satisambojjhaṅgassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pavicayalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa paggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Pītisambojjhaṅgassa pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa upasamalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhisambojjhaṅgassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇaṃ.
正见的特征是看见。正思惟的特征是投向。正语的特征是摄持。正业的特征是发起。正命的特征是清净。正精进的特征是策励。正念的特征是安住。正定的特征是不散乱。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsaṅkappassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāvācāya pariggāhalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammākammantassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāājīvassa vodānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāvāyāmassa paggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsatiyā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsamādhissa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ.
无明的特征是无知。行的特征是思。识的特征是了别。名的特征是称谓。色的特征是成色。六处的特征是处所。触的特征是接触。受的特征是感受。渴爱的特征是因。取的特征是执取。有的特征是积聚。生的特征是产生。老的特征是衰败。死的特征是死。巴利
Avijjāya aññāṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇaṃ. Viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Nāmassa namanalakkhaṇaṃ. Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ. Saḷāyatanassa āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ. Taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇaṃ. Upādānassa gahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Bhavassa āyūhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Jātiyā nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ. Jarāya jīraṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Maraṇassa cutilakkhaṇaṃ.
诸界的特相是空。诸处的特相是处。诸念处的特相是现起。诸正勤的特相是精勤。诸神足的特相是成就。诸根的特相是增上。诸力的特相是不动摇。诸觉支的特相是出离。道的特相是因。巴利
Dhātūnaṃ suññatālakkhaṇaṃ. Āyatanānaṃ āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānānaṃ upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammappadhānānaṃ padahanalakkhaṇaṃ. Iddhipādānaṃ ijjhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Indriyānaṃ adhipatilakkhaṇaṃ. Balānaṃ akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ. Bojjhaṅgānaṃ niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ. Maggassa hetulakkhaṇaṃ.
诸谛的特相是真实。止的特相是不散乱。观的特相是随观。止与观的特相是同一味。双运的特相是不超越。巴利
Saccānaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ. Samathassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Vipassanāya anupassanālakkhaṇaṃ. Samathavipassanānaṃ ekarasalakkhaṇaṃ. Yuganandhānaṃ anativattanalakkhaṇaṃ.
戒清净的特征是防护。心清净的特征是不散乱。见清净的特征是照见。巴利
Sīlavisuddhiyā saṃvaralakkhaṇaṃ. Cittavisuddhiyā avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Diṭṭhivisuddhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ.
灭尽智的特征是彻底断除。无生智的特征是寂静安稳。欲的特征是根本。作意的特征是想法的生起。触的特征是结合。受的特征是汇聚。定的特征是居于首位。念的特征是主导。慧的特征是更进一步。解脱的特征是精华所在。以不死为归宿的涅槃,其特征是最终归宿,是真实不虚的。如此,具备真实特征的人,以智慧之道而来,没有偏离地证得,并非未证得,所以称为如来;正因为以这真实特征而来,所以称为如来。巴利
Khayeñāṇassa samucchedalakkhaṇaṃ. Anuppāde ñāṇassa passaddhilakkhaṇaṃ. Chandassa mūlalakkhaṇaṃ. Manasikārassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa samodhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya samosaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhissa pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ. Satiyā ādhipateyyalakkhaṇaṃ. Paññāya tatuttarilakkhaṇaṃ. Vimuttiyā sāralakkhaṇaṃ. Amatogadhassa nibbānassa pariyosānalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ. Evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ ñāṇagatiyā āgato avirajjhitvā patto anuppattoti tathāgato, evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato.
怎样才是“如实彻证了真实法,所以叫如来”?所谓真实法,就是四圣谛。就像经里说的:“比丘们,有这四种法是真实的、不虚假的、不会变成别的样子。哪四种?‘这是苦’,比丘们,这是真实的、不虚假的、不会变成别的样子。”经文在这里详细展开。世尊已经彻证了这些法,所以因为彻证了这些真实法,就称为如来。这里“来”(gata)这个字,就是“已经彻证”的意思。另外,老死以生为缘而生起、集起的道理,是真实的、不虚假的、不会变成别的样子;……乃至……诸行以无明为缘而生起、集起的道理,是真实的、不虚假的、不会变成别的样子。同样,无明作为诸行之缘的道理,是真实的、不虚假的、不会变成别的样子;诸行作为识之缘的道理……乃至……生作为老死之缘的道理,都是真实的、不虚假的、不会变成别的样子。这一切世尊都已彻证,所以也因为彻证了这些真实法,就称为如来。这样,因为如实彻证了真实法,所以是如来。巴利
Kathaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato? Tathadhammā nāma cattāri ariyasaccāni. Yathāha ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāni avitathāni anaññathāni. Katamāni cattāri, idaṃ dukkhanti, bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1050) vitthāro. Tāni ca bhagavā abhisambuddho, tasmā tathānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Abhisambuddhattho hi ettha gatasaddo. Apica jarāmaraṇassa jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe… saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāpaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Tathā avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho. Saṅkhārānaṃ viññāṇassa paccayaṭṭho…pe… jātiyā jarāmaraṇassa paccayaṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Taṃ sabbaṃ bhagavā abhisambuddho, tasmāpi tathānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Evaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato.
如来为什么是“如实见者”呢?世尊在包括天神的世间……乃至包括天与人的世间,在无量世界中,对无量众生眼门所现起的色所缘,确实存在。他以一切方式了知它、看见它。当他这样了知、看见时,无论是以可意不可意等分别,还是以在见闻觉知中所呈现的概念分别,比如“那色是什么?那色处是什么?那色是依靠四大种而有的颜色、形貌,可见、有对、青、黄……”(《法集论》616)这样,以许多名称、十三种方式、五十二种方法去分析,它都只是如实如此,没有虚妄。对耳门等现起的声等,也应当这样理解。世尊也这样说过:“诸比丘,在包括天神的世间……乃至包括天与人的世间中,凡是被见、闻、觉、知、所得、所寻求、以心所随寻的,我都了知。……我都证知,那是如来所了知的,但如来不执取它。”(《增支部》4.24)这样,因为如实见,所以是如来。在这里,应当知道“如来”这个词,是从“如实见”这个意义而来的。巴利
Kathaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato? Bhagavā yaṃ sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchantaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ nāma atthi. Taṃ sabbākārato jānāti, passati. Evaṃ jānatā passatā ca tena taṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādivasena vā diṭṭhasutamutaviññātesu labbhamānakapadavasena vā ‘‘katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ, yaṃ rūpaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītaka’’nti (dha. sa. 616) ādinā nayena anekehi nāmehi terasahi vārehi dvepaññāsāya nayehi vibhajjamānaṃ tathameva hoti, vitathaṃ natthi. Esa nayo sotadvārādīsupi āpāthamāgacchantesu saddādīsu. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sadevamanussāya diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, tamahaṃ jānāmi, …tamahaṃ abhiññāsiṃ, taṃ tathāgatassa viditaṃ, taṃ tathāgato na upaṭṭhāsī’’ti (a. ni. 4.24). Evaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato. Tattha tathadassīatthe tathāgatoti padasambhavo veditabbo.
如来为什么被称为“如实说者”呢?世尊在菩提道场坐在不败的跏趺座上,降伏了三魔,证得无上正等正觉的那一夜,以及他在双娑罗树之间以无余涅槃界般涅槃的那一夜,在这两者之间四十五年那么长的时间里,无论是初觉时、中觉时还是后觉时,世尊所说的经、应颂……乃至方广,这一切在义理上和文句上都没有可指责之处,不缺少也不多余,一切方面都圆满,能摧碎贪欲之醉,能摧碎嗔恨与愚痴之醉,其中连毫毛尖那么小的过失都没有。这一切就像用同一枚印章盖印,用同一只量器量过,用同一杆秤称过一样,确实就是这样,真实不虚。因此说:“准陀,如来证得无上正等正觉的那一夜,以及他以无余涅槃界般涅槃的那一夜,在这中间他所说、所谈、所指明的一切,全都是真实的,没有别的样子。因此被称为如来。”(《增支部》4.23)这里“来”字就是“说”的意思。这样,因为如实而说,所以是如来。另外,“言说”就是话语的意思。他有真实不颠倒的话语,把d音变成t音,就成了“如来”,应当知道这个词是这样成立的。巴利
Kathaṃ tathāvāditāya tathāgato? Yaṃ rattiṃ bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe aparājitapallaṅke nisinno tiṇṇaṃ mārānaṃ matthakaṃ madditvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, yañca rattiṃ yamakasālānamantare anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi, etthantare pañcacattālīsavassaparimāṇe kāle paṭhamabodhiyāpi majjhimabodhiyāpi pacchimabodhiyāpi yaṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ…pe… vedallaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ atthato ca byañjanato ca anupavajjaṃ anūnamanadhikaṃ sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ rāgamadanimmadanaṃ dosamohamadanimmadanaṃ, natthi tattha vālaggamattampi pakkhalitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ ekamuddikāya lañchitaṃ viya, ekanāḷiyā mitaṃ viya, ekatulāya tulitaṃ viya ca tathameva hoti avitathaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘yañca, cunda, rattiṃ tathāgato anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, yaṃ etasmiṃ antare bhāsati lapati niddisati, sabbaṃ taṃ tatheva hoti no aññathā. Tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Gadaattho hi ettha gatasaddo. Evaṃ tathāvāditāya tathāgato. Apica āgadanaṃ āgado, vacananti attho. Tatho aviparīto āgado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti evametasmiṃ atthe padasiddhi veditabbā.
如来为什么是“如实行”呢?因为世尊的言语和身体行为是一致的,身体行为和言语也是一致的。所以,他怎么说就怎么做,怎么做就怎么说。对于这样状态的人,他的身体行为也像他的言语那样运作;他的言语也像他的身体行为那样运作,这就是“如来”的意思。因此世尊说:“比丘们,如来是如说即行、如行即说。正因为如说即行、如行即说,所以称为如来。”这样,就是因为“如实行”而称为如来。巴利
Kathaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato? Bhagavato hi vācāya kāyo anulometi, kāyassapi vācā. Tasmā yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī ca hoti. Evaṃbhūtassa cassa yathā vācā , kāyopi tathāgato pavattoti attho. Yathā ca kāyo, vācāpi tathā gatā pavattāti tathāgato. Tenāha ‘‘yathāvādī, bhikkhave, tathāgato tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Iti yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī, tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato.
如来为什么在“征服”这个意义上被称为如来?他把有顶天当作上方,把无间地狱当作下方,在横向无量无数的世界界域中,以戒、以定、以慧、以解脱、以解脱知见,征服一切众生。他无可比拟,也没有衡量的标准;他是不可比拟者、不可测量者、无上者、王中之王、天中之天、诸天中最胜的帝释天、诸梵天中最胜的梵天。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,在含天神的世间……乃至含天人的世间中,如来是征服者,不被任何者所征服,是彻底的自在者、支配者。所以称为如来。”巴利
Kathaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato? Upari bhavaggaṃ heṭṭhā aviciṃ pariyantaṃ katvā tiriyaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu sabbasatte abhibhavati, sīlenapi samādhināpi paññāyapi vimuttiyāpi vimuttiñāṇadassanenapi, na tassa tulā vā pamāṇaṃ vā atthi, atulo appameyyo anuttaro rājarājo devadevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā. Tenāha ‘‘sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… sadevamanussāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthu daso vasavattī. Tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti.
在这里,应当这样理解这个词的构成:就像“agado”(无病)就是“agado”(无病)一样。那这个“agado”又指什么呢?指的是说法庄严的时机和福德的积累。因为这位有大神力的医师,凭说法庄严的时机和福德的积累,就像用天界的神药对付毒蛇一样,征服了一切外道论者和包括天神的世间。所以,在征服一切世间这个意义上,他那真实不虚的说法庄严的时机和福德的积累就是“agado”。把da音变成ta音,就应当理解为“tathāgato”(如来)。这样,就是以征服的意义称为如来。巴利
Tatrevaṃ padasiddhi veditabbā, agado viya agado. Ko panesa? Desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññussayo ca. Tena hesa mahānubhāvo bhisakko dibbāgadena sappe viya sabbaparappavādino sadevakañca lokaṃ abhibhavati, iti sabbalokābhibhavane tatho aviparīto desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññassayo ca agado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti veditabbo. Evaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato.
另外,也可以这样理解“如来”:因为已经这样去了,所以叫如来;因为已经如实到达,所以叫如来。“去”的意思是已经彻底了知、已经超越、已经到达、已经实践。其中,以审察遍知如实去了、彻底了知整个世间,所以叫如来;以断遍知如实去了、已经超越世间的集起,所以叫如来;以证悟如实去了、已经证得世间的灭尽,所以叫如来;以修行如实去了、已经实践导向世间灭尽之道,所以叫如来。因此,世尊这样说:“比丘们,世间已被如来正觉,如来已从世间解脱。比丘们,世间的集起已被如来正觉,世间的集起已被如来断除。比丘们,世间的灭尽已被如来正觉,世间的灭尽已被如来证得。比丘们,导向世间灭尽之道已被如来正觉,导向世间灭尽之道已被如来修习。比丘们,包括天神在内的整个世界……这一切都已被如来正觉,因此称为如来。”(《增支部》4.23)也应该这样理解它的含义。不过,这只是说明如来之所以为如来的一个入门而已。因为只有如来自己,才能以一切方式赞叹如来的如来本性。巴利
Apica tathāya gatotipi tathāgato, tathaṃ gatotipi tathāgato. Gatoti avagato, atīto, patto, paṭipannoti attho. Tattha sakalaṃ lokaṃ tīraṇapariññāya tathāya gato avagatoti tathāgato. Lokasamudayaṃ pahānapariññāya tathāya gato atītoti tathāgato. Lokanirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāya tathāya gato pattoti tathāgato. Lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ tathaṃ gato paṭipannoti tathāgato. Tena yaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘loko, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasmā tathāgato visaṃyutto. Lokasamudayo, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasamudayo tathāgatassa pahīno. Lokanirodho, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokanirodho tathāgatassa sacchikato. Lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā tathāgatassa bhāvitā. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ, tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Tassa evampi attho veditabbo. Idampi ca tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvadīpane mukhamattameva. Sabbākārena pana tathāgatova tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvaṃ vaṇṇeyya.
在“阿拉汉、正自觉者”这两个词当中,先说“阿拉汉”:因为已远离(ārakattā)怨敌,因为已摧毁(hatattā)轮辐般的烦恼,因为堪受(arahattā)资具等的供养,因为在造作恶业时没有隐秘(rahābhāvā)——就是依据这些理由,应当知道他是阿拉汉。巴利
Arahaṃ sammāsambuddhoti padadvaye pana ārakattā arīnaṃ, arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti imehi tāva kāraṇehi arahanti veditabbo.
因为正确且完全靠自己觉悟了一切法,所以称为正自觉者。这里只是简要说明。若详细来说,这两个词已经在《清净之道》的“佛随念”解说中阐明。巴利
Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā pana sammāsambuddhoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ padadvayaṃ visuddhimagge buddhānussativaṇṇanāyaṃ pakāsitaṃ.
“遍知已达究竟者,即是如来”这句话,在这里还应当这样理解:那个作为虚妄分别之基础的对象,已被如来遍知。“遍知已达究竟”的意思是:遍知到了尽头、遍知到了终点、彻底无余地遍知。因为诸佛与声闻弟子虽然依各自的道而断除烦恼时,在断除烦恼这一点上没有差别,但在遍知上却有差别。声闻弟子只观照四界中的一部分就证得涅槃;而诸佛则不然,即使是极微的(有为)行法,也没有任何一法是他们的智慧所未曾见、未曾衡量、未曾抉择、未曾证悟的。巴利
Pariññātantaṃ tathāgatassāti ettha pana taṃ maññanāvatthu pariññātaṃ tathāgatassātipi attho veditabbo. Pariññātantaṃ nāma pariññātapāraṃ pariññātāvasānaṃ anavasesato pariññātanti vuttaṃ hoti. Buddhānañhi sāvakehi saddhiṃ kiñcāpi tena tena maggena kilesappahāne viseso natthi, pariññāya pana atthi. Sāvakā hi catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ ekadesameva sammasitvā nibbānaṃ pāpuṇanti. Buddhānaṃ pana aṇuppamāṇampi saṅkhāragataṃ ñāṇena adiṭṭhamatulitamatīritamasacchikataṃ natthi.
如来品第八种方法的注释巴利
Tathāgatavāraaṭṭhamanayavaṇṇanā
13 在“爱喜是苦的根源”等经文中,“爱喜”指过去的渴爱。“苦”指五取蕴。“根源”指其起因。“如是了知已”:就是像这样了知——过去生的爱喜是此苦的根源。“有”指从业有而来。“生”指异熟的五蕴,这些蕴因为是生起的,所以称为“生”;或者,这里是以“生”为代表来作开示。这一段也应当与“如是了知已”结合起来理解。这里的意思确实是:“也像这样了知:从业有而有再生有。”“已存在者”指有情。“老死”就是衰老与死亡。这里说的是:也像这样了知——由那再生有,已存在有情的诸蕴便有老与死。巴利
13.Nandīdukkhassa mūlantiādīsu ca nandīti purimataṇhā. Dukkhanti pañcakkhandhā. Mūlantiādi. Itividitvāti taṃ purimabhavanandiṃ ‘‘imassa dukkhassa mūla’’nti evaṃ jānitvā. Bhavāti kammabhavato. Jātīti vipākakkhandhā. Te hi yasmā jāyanti, tasmā ‘‘jātī’’ti vuttā. Jātisīsena vā ayaṃ desanā. Etampi ‘‘iti viditvā’’ti iminā yojetabbaṃ. Ayañhi ettha attho ‘‘kammabhavato upapattibhavo hotīti evañca jānitvā’’ti. Bhūtassāti sattassa. Jarāmaraṇanti jarā ca maraṇañca. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – tena upapattibhavena bhūtassa sattassa khandhānaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ hotīti evañca jānitvāti.
到这里为止,为了说明:那位坐在菩提树下不败座上,通过反复观照而证得一切知的智者,正是因为通达了缘起,种种虚妄分别才不再产生——世尊开示了这同一个缘起,也就是:四个概要、三个连接、三个时间、二十种行相。巴利
Ettāvatā yaṃ bodhirukkhamūle aparājitapallaṅke nisinno sammasitvā sabbaññutaṃ patto, tassa paṭiccasamuppādassa paṭivedhā maññanānaṃ abhāvakāraṇaṃ dassento catusaṅkhepaṃ tisandhiṃ tiyaddhaṃ vīsatākāraṃ tameva paṭiccasamuppādaṃ dasseti.
那么,为什么说到这个程度就能显示这一切都已经开示了呢?在这里,“喜贪”是第一个概要;从“苦”这个说法来看,苦是第二个概要;从“有、生”这个说法来看,有是第三个概要;生老死是第四个概要。应当知道,这样就有四个概要,“概要”就是部分的意思。而渴爱与苦之间是一个连接,苦与有之间是第二个连接,有与生之间是第三个连接。应当知道,这四个概要之间的三个连接,就像四根手指之间的三个缝隙一样。巴利
Kathaṃ pana ettāvatā esa sabbo dassito hotīti. Ettha hi nandīti ayaṃ eko saṅkhepo. Dukkhassāti vacanato dukkhaṃ dutiyo, bhavā jātīti vacanato bhavo tatiyo, jātijarāmaraṇaṃ catuttho. Evaṃ tāva cattāro saṅkhepā veditabbā, koṭṭhāsāti attho. Taṇhādukkhānaṃ pana antaraṃ eko sandhi, dukkhassa ca bhavassa ca antaraṃ dutiyo, bhavassa ca jātiyā ca antaraṃ tatiyo. Evaṃ catunnaṃ aṅgulīnaṃ antarasadisā catusaṅkhepantarā tayo sandhī veditabbā.
在这里,“喜贪”指过去时,“生老死”指未来时,“苦”和“有”指现在时——应当这样理解三个时间。不过,在过去的五种行相中,通过“喜贪”这个词,已经说到了渴爱这一项;依靠它,未说到的无明、行、取、有也以缘的特征被包含进来了。而通过“生老死”这个词,那些有生老死的蕴已经被说到了;因此,未来的识、名色、六处、触、受也被包含进来了。巴利
Tattha nandīti atīto addhā, jātijarāmaraṇaṃ anāgato, dukkhañca bhavo ca paccuppannoti evaṃ tayo addhā veditabbā. Atīte pana pañcasu ākāresu nandīvacanena taṇhā ekā āgatā, tāya anāgatāpi avijjāsaṅkhāraupādānabhavā paccayalakkhaṇena gahitāva honti. Jātijarāmaraṇavacanena pana yesaṃ khandhānaṃ tajjātijarāmaraṇaṃ, te vuttā yevāti katvā āyatiṃ viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanā gahitāva honti.
就这样,这二十种行相的特征应当在此了知:在过去世的业有中,愚痴是无明,造作是行,贪爱是渴爱,执取是取,思是业有——这五种法在过去世的业有中,是此处结生的缘。在此处,结生是识,入胎是名色,感受是处,接触是触,感受是受——这五种法在此处的再生有中,是过去所造之业的缘。在此处,由于诸处成熟,愚痴是无明,造作是行,贪爱是渴爱,执取是取,思是业有——这五种法在此处的业有中,是未来结生的缘。在未来,结生是识,入胎是名色,感受是处,接触是触,感受是受——这五种法在未来的再生有中,是此处所造之业的缘。应当如此了知这二十种行相的特征。这样,通过“知道喜是苦的根源,有则有生,已生则有老死”,应当知道:到这里就已经开示了一切缘起——它具备四种概要、三种连结、三个时期、二十种行相。巴利
Evamete ‘‘purimakammabhavasmiṃ moho avijjā, āyūhanā saṅkhārā, nikanti taṇhā, upagamanaṃ upādānaṃ, cetanā bhavo iti ime pañca dhammā purimakammabhavasmiṃ idha paṭisandhiyā paccayā. Idha paṭisandhi viññāṇaṃ, okkanti nāmarūpaṃ, pasādo āyatanaṃ, phuṭṭho phasso, vedayitaṃ vedanā iti ime pañca dhammā idhūpapattibhavasmiṃ purekatassa kammassa paccayā. Idha paripakkattā āyatanānaṃ moho avijjā, āyūhanā saṅkhārā, nikanti taṇhā, upagamanamupādānaṃ, cetanā bhavo iti ime pañca dhammā idha kammabhavasmiṃ āyatiṃ paṭisandhiyā paccayā. Āyatiṃ paṭisandhi viññāṇaṃ, okkanti nāmarūpaṃ, pasādo āyatanaṃ, phuṭṭho phasso , vedayitaṃ vedanā iti ime pañca dhammā āyatiṃ upapattibhavasmiṃ idha katassa kammassa paccayā’’ti evaṃ niddiṭṭhalakkhaṇā vīsati ākārā idha veditabbā. Evaṃ ‘‘nandī dukkhassa mūlanti iti viditvā bhavā jāti, bhūtassa jarāmaraṇa’’nti ettāvatā esa sabbopi catusaṅkhepo tisandhi tiyaddho vīsatākāro paṭiccasamuppādo dassito hotīti veditabbo.
现在,对于“因此,比丘们……我已证悟无上正等正觉,我这样说”这一句,先把其中还没解释过的词解释清楚,再把词句连起来,得出它的含义。“因此”(tasmā tiha)说的就是“因此”的意思,因为 ti 和 ha 都是不变词。“一切”(sabbaso)是指没有任何剩余。“诸渴爱”(taṇhānaṃ)就是指前面所说的以喜贪等方式表达的一切渴爱。“灭尽”(khayā)是通过出世间道彻底灭尽。离贪、灭、舍、弃遣这些词,都只是灭尽的同义说法。因为那些渴爱一旦灭尽,它们也就成为已离贪、已灭、已舍、已弃遣的了。或者,“灭尽”是四种道共同的作用,然后配合说:以第一道为离贪,以第二道为灭,以第三道为舍,以第四道为弃遣。也可以这样搭配:那些使人把地认知为地的渴爱,因它们的灭尽;那些使人对地起想的渴爱,因它们的离贪;那些使人对地本身起想的渴爱,因它们的灭;那些使人从地起想的渴爱,因它们的舍;那些使人想“地是我的”的渴爱,因它们的弃遣。或者:那些使人对地起想的渴爱,因它们的灭尽……乃至那些使人对地欢喜贪着的渴爱,因它们的弃遣。应当这样搭配,没有任何矛盾。巴利
Idāni tasmā tiha, bhikkhave…pe… abhisambuddhoti vadāmīti ettha apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ katvā padayojanāya atthanigamanaṃ karissāma. Tasmā tihāti tasmā icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Tikārahakārā hi nipātā. Sabbasoti anavasesavacanametaṃ. Taṇhānanti nandīti evaṃ vuttānaṃ sabbataṇhānaṃ. Khayāti lokuttaramaggena accantakkhayā. Virāgādīni khayavevacanāneva. Yā hi taṇhā khīṇā, virattāpi tā bhavanti niruddhāpi cattāpi paṭinissaṭṭhāpi. Khayāti vā catumaggakiccasādhāraṇametaṃ. Tato paṭhamamaggena virāgā, dutiyena nirodhā, tatiyena cāgā, catutthena paṭinissaggāti yojetabbaṃ. Yāhi vā taṇhāhi pathaviṃ pathavito sañjāneyya, tāsaṃ khayā. Yāhi pathaviṃ maññeyya, tāsaṃ virāgā. Yāhi pathaviyā maññeyya, tāsaṃ nirodhā. Yāhi pathavito maññeyya, tāsaṃ cāgā. Yāhi pathaviṃ meti maññeyya, tāsaṃ paṭinissaggā. Yāhi vā pathaviṃ maññeyya, tāsaṃ khayā…pe… yāhi pathaviṃ abhinandeyya, tāsaṃ paṭinissaggāti evamettha yojanā kātabbā, na kiñci virujjhati.
“无上”是指没有比它更高的,是一切中最殊胜的。“正等正觉”是指正确、亲自证得的觉悟。或者也可以说,是值得称赞的、美好的觉悟。“觉”这个词,可以指树,也可以指道,也可以指一切知智,也可以指涅槃。在“在菩提树下初次现等觉”这样的经文里,“觉”指的是树;在“在菩提和伽耶之间”这样的经文里,也是指树。在“四道中的智”这样的经文里,“觉”指的是道。在“证得殊胜广大智慧者的觉”这样的经文里,“觉”指的是一切知智。在“证得不死、无为的觉”这样的经文里,“觉”指的是涅槃。不过在这里,指的是世尊的阿罗汉道智。另一些论师则说,这是一切知智。巴利
Anuttaranti uttaravirahitaṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ. Sammāsambodhinti sammā sāmañca bodhiṃ. Atha vā pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhiṃ. Bodhīti rukkhopi maggopi sabbaññutañāṇampi nibbānampi. ‘‘Bodhirukkhamūle paṭhamābhisambuddho’’ti (mahāva. 1; udā. 1) ca ‘‘antarā ca bodhiṃ antarā ca gaya’’nti (mahāva. 11; ma. ni. 1.285) ca āgataṭṭhānehi rukkho bodhīti vuccati. ‘‘Catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. 121) āgataṭṭhāne maggo. ‘‘Pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūrimedhaso’’ti (dī. ni. 3.217) āgataṭṭhāne sabbaññutañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Patvāna bodhiṃ amataṃ asaṅkhata’’nti āgataṭṭhāne nibbānaṃ. Idha pana bhagavato arahattamaggañāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Apare sabbaññutañāṇantipi vadanti.
弟子们的阿罗汉道不是无上菩提。不是。为什么呢?因为它不能带来一切功德。对某些弟子来说,阿罗汉道只给他阿罗汉果;对某些人,则给三明;对某些人,给六神通;对某些人,给四无碍解;对某些人,给声闻波罗蜜智。独觉佛的道,也只给独觉菩提智。但佛陀的道,却能带来一切功德的圆满,就像灌顶礼能让国王获得对整个世间的统治权一样。所以,对其他任何人来说,都不能算是无上菩提。巴利
Sāvakānaṃ arahattamaggo anuttarā bodhi hoti na hotīti. Na hoti. Kasmā? Asabbaguṇadāyakattā. Tesañhi kassaci arahattamaggo arahattaphalameva deti, kassaci tisso vijjā, kassaci cha abhiññā, kassaci catasso paṭisambhidā, kassaci sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ. Paccekabuddhānampi paccekabodhiñāṇameva deti. Buddhānaṃ pana sabbaguṇasampattiṃ deti abhiseko viya rañño sabbalokissariyabhāvaṃ. Tasmā aññassa kassacipi anuttarā bodhi na hotīti.
“已正觉”的意思是:已经彻底了知、已经通达,也就是已经到达、已经证得。“我这样说”的意思是:我说、我告知、我开示、我施设、我建立、我开显、我分别、我阐明。这里的连接应当这样理解:如来,比丘们……不执取地……不喜贪地。那是什么原因呢?因为已经知道:“喜贪是苦的根,有则有生,已生者则有老死。”这里“已经知道”中的“iti”表示原因。因此,这句话的意思是:因为已经了知、已经通达这缘起。还有什么呢?因为这样了知这缘起之后,如来那被称为“喜贪”的一切渴爱都已断尽;而如来由于一切渴爱灭尽……证得了无上正等正觉。所以我说:不执取地……不喜贪地。也就是说,正因为已经这样正觉,所以不执取、不喜贪,我才这样说。巴利
Abhisambuddhoti abhiññāsi paṭivijjhi, patto adhigatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Iti vadāmīti iti vadāmi ācikkhāmi desemi paññapemi, paṭṭhapemi vivarāmi vibhajāmi uttānīkaromīti. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – tathāgatopi, bhikkhave…pe… pathaviṃ na maññati…pe… pathaviṃ nābhinandati. Taṃ kissa hetu, nandī dukkhassa mūlaṃ, bhavā jāti, bhūtassa jarāmaraṇanti iti viditvāti. Tattha iti viditvāti itikāro kāraṇattho. Tena imassa paṭiccasamuppādassa viditattā paṭividdhattāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiñca bhiyyo – yasmā ca evamimaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ viditvā tathāgatassa yā nandīti vuttataṇhā sabbappakārā, sā pahīnā, tāsañca tathāgato sabbaso taṇhānaṃ khayā…pe… anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho. Tasmā pathaviṃ na maññati…pe… pathaviṃ nābhinandatīti vadāmīti evaṃ abhisambuddhattā na maññati nābhinandatīti vadāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.
或者也可以这样说:因为通过“喜是苦的根源”这类方式了解了缘起之后,一切渴爱都已彻底灭尽,所以我说:比丘们,因此如来由于一切渴爱的灭尽……已经正觉。他因为这样正觉的缘故,不思量地……不欢喜。凡是经典中不说“因为”而说“因此”的地方,都应该把“因为”的意思带进去连接起来,这是教法的理则。这个道理适用于一切地方。巴利
Atha vā yasmā ‘‘nandī dukkhassa mūla’’ntiādinā nayena paṭiccasamuppādaṃ viditvā sabbaso taṇhā khayaṃ gatā, tasmā tiha, bhikkhave, tathāgato sabbaso taṇhānaṃ khayā…pe… abhisambuddhoti vadāmi. So evaṃ abhisambuddhattā pathaviṃ na maññati…pe… nābhinandatīti. Yattha yattha hi yasmāti avatvā tasmāti vuccati, tattha tattha yasmāti ānetvā yojetabbaṃ, ayaṃ sāsanayutti. Esa nayo sabbattha.
世尊这样说:从序分结束开始,一直到“已正觉”为止,我如是宣说——整部经是世尊为了展示他人智慧无法获得立足处、极其深奥的一切知智,用一个凡夫层次、一个有学层次、四个漏尽者层次、两个如来层次,共八个大层次来宣说;每一个层次又以地等二十四个中间层次加以严饰,以篇幅为两个诵分的经典宣说。巴利
Idamavoca bhagavāti idaṃ nidānāvasānato pabhuti yāva abhisambuddhoti vadāmīti sakalasuttantaṃ bhagavā paresaṃ paññāya alabbhaṇeyyapatiṭṭhaṃ paramagambhīraṃ sabbaññutañāṇaṃ dassento ekena puthujjanavārena ekena sekkhavārena catūhi khīṇāsavavārehi dvīhi tathāgatavārehīti aṭṭhahi mahāvārehi ekamekasmiñca vāre pathavīādīhi catuvīsatiyā antaravārehi paṭimaṇḍetvā dvebhāṇavāraparimāṇāya tantiyā avoca.
这部经虽然具备种种善巧开示的庄严,由世尊以像迦陵频伽鸟鸣一样悦耳、如同智者心之甘露灌顶的梵音来宣说,那些比丘却仍然不随喜世尊所说的话。那五百位比丘没有赞同世尊的这段教导。为什么呢?因为无知。据说他们并不了解这部经的义理,所以没有随喜。对他们来说,当时这部具备种种善巧开示庄严的经,就像用厚粗布把嘴封住后,摆在面前的美食一样。
世尊不是自己圆满了四阿僧祇劫又百千劫的波罗蜜,成就了一切知智,就是为了让别人也了知他所宣说的法吗?那他为什么用这些人听不懂的方式来说呢?关于这部经的安立探讨中已经说过:“为了摧破慢心,才开始宣说‘一切法的根本分类’。”所以这里不必再重复。他们听了这部为摧破慢心而说的经之后,心想:“同样这片大地,持邪见的人也知道,有学圣者也知道,阿罗汉也知道,如来也知道。这算是什么说法呢?”于是他们思索:“以前世尊说的任何法,我们都能很快明白,现在对这部根本分类经,却既不知道它的尽头,也看不到它的边际。哎呀!佛陀真是不可衡量、无可比拟!”他们就像被拔掉毒牙的蛇一样,变得调柔,放下了慢心,恭敬地前去亲近佛陀、听闻正法。巴利
Evaṃ vicitranayadesanāvilāsayuttaṃ panetaṃ suttaṃ karavikarudamañjunā kaṇṇasukhena paṇḍitajanahadayānaṃ amatābhisekasadisena brahmassarena bhāsamānassāpi. Na te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti te pañcasatā bhikkhū idaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ nānumodiṃsu. Kasmā? Aññāṇakena. Te kira imassa suttassa atthaṃ na jāniṃsu, tasmā nābhinandiṃsu. Tesañhi tasmiṃ samaye evaṃ vicitranayadesanāvilāsayuttampi etaṃ suttaṃ ghanaputhulena dussapaṭṭena mukhe bandhaṃ katvā purato ṭhapitamanuññabhojanaṃ viya ahosi. Nanu ca bhagavā attanā desitaṃ dhammaṃ pare ñāpetuṃ kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaṃ patto. So kasmā yathā te na jānanti, tathā desesīti. Vuttamidaṃ imassa suttassa nikkhepavicāraṇāyaṃ eva ‘‘mānabhañjanatthaṃ sabbadhammamūlapariyāyanti desanaṃ ārabhī’’ti, tasmā na yidha puna vattabbamatthi, evaṃ mānabhañjanatthaṃ desitañca panetaṃ suttaṃ sutvā te bhikkhū taṃyeva kira pathaviṃ diṭṭhigatikopi sañjānāti, sekkhopi arahāpi tathāgatopi sañjānāti. Kinnāmidaṃ kathaṃ nāmidanti cintentā pubbe mayaṃ bhagavatā kathitaṃ yaṃkiñci khippameva jānāma, idāni panimassa mūlapariyāyassa antaṃ vā koṭiṃ vā na jānāma na passāma, aho buddhā nāma appameyyā atulāti uddhaṭadāṭhā viya sappā nimmadā hutvā buddhupaṭṭhānañca dhammassavanañca sakkaccaṃ āgamaṃsu.
那时,比丘们聚集在法堂里,生起了这样的谈论:“真是稀有啊,诸佛的威德!那些出家的婆罗门,原本那样骄慢陶醉,却被世尊以《根本法门》的开示摧破了慢心,成为无慢心者。”他们的中间谈话已被打断。世尊就从香室出来,以与当时因缘相称的神变,在法堂中已敷设好的殊胜佛座上坐下,然后对比丘们说:“比丘们,你们现在聚在一起谈论什么?”比丘们就把这件事禀告了世尊。世尊这样说:“比丘们,不只是现在,过去我也曾这样摧破这些昂着头而行的人的慢心。”于是,为了说明这个因由,他引出了以下过去的故事。巴利
Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū dhammasabhāyaṃ sannisinnā imaṃ kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ ‘‘aho buddhānaṃ ānubhāvo, te nāma brāhmaṇapabbajitā tathā mānamadamattā bhagavatā mūlapariyāyadesanāya nihatamānā katā’’ti, ayañcarahi tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ antarākathā vippakatā. Atha bhagavā gandhakuṭiyā nikkhamitvā taṅkhaṇānurūpena pāṭihāriyena dhammasabhāyaṃ paññattavarabuddhāsane nisīditvā te bhikkhū āha – ‘‘kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā’’ti. Te tamatthaṃ bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, idāneva, pubbepi ahaṃ ime evaṃ mānapaggahitasire vicarante nihatamāne akāsi’’nti. Tato imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ atītaṃ ānesi –
比丘们,过去有一位在四方都很有名望的婆罗门,住在波罗奈。他精通三部吠陀,熟悉词汇表、仪轨、音韵分析,并以古传为第五,擅长词句解析和文法,对顺世论和大人相也无所不通。他教大约五百名年轻学子念诵咒语。这些学子很聪明,学得多又快,也能好好记住,学过的东西不会忘失。那位婆罗门老师毫无保留,就像往瓶里倒水一样,把全部技艺都教给了他们,然后对这些年轻人说:“这些技艺都是为了现世和来世的利益。”那些年轻人听了就想:“老师知道的,我们也知道了,我们现在也是老师了。”于是生起了慢心,从此对老师不再恭敬,也放弃了弟子应尽的本分。老师知道后,心想:“我要挫一挫他们的慢心。”有一天,那些年轻人来侍奉、礼拜后坐下,老师对他们说:“孩子们,我要问一个问题,你们能回答吗?”他们因为陶醉于自己所学的知识,立刻就说:“请问吧,老师!请问吧,老师!”巴利
Bhūtapubbaṃ , bhikkhave, aññataro disāpāmokkho brāhmaṇo bārāṇasiyaṃ paṭivasati tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū sanighaṇṭukeṭubhānaṃ sākkharappabhedānaṃ itihāsapañcamānaṃ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo, so pañcamattāni māṇavakasatāni mante vāceti. Paṇḍitā māṇavakā bahuñca gaṇhanti lahuñca, suṭṭhu ca upadhārenti, gahitañca tesaṃ na vinassati. Sopi brāhmaṇo ācariyamuṭṭhiṃ akatvā ghaṭe udakaṃ āsiñcanto viya sabbampi sippaṃ uggaṇhāpetvā te māṇavake etadavoca ‘‘ettakamidaṃ sippaṃ diṭṭhadhammasamparāyahita’’nti. Te māṇavakā – ‘‘yaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyo jānāti, mayampi taṃ jānāma, mayampi dāni ācariyā evā’’ti mānaṃ uppādetvā tato pabhuti ācariye agāravā nikkhittavattā vihariṃsu. Ācariyo ñatvā ‘‘karissāmi nesaṃ mānaniggaha’’nti cintesi. So ekadivasaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā vanditvā nisinne te māṇavake āha ‘‘tātā pañhaṃ pucchissāmi, kaccittha samatthā kathetu’’nti. Te ‘‘pucchatha ācariya, pucchatha ācariyā’’ti sahasāva āhaṃsu, yathā taṃ sutamadamattā. Ācariyo āha –
时间吞噬一切众生,连同它们自己。
谁吞掉了时间,谁就吞掉了那个吞食者。巴利
‘‘Kālo ghasati bhūtāni, sabbāneva sahattanā; Yo ca kālaghaso bhūto, sa bhūtapacaniṃ pacī’’ti. (jā. 1.10.190) –
孩子们,你们来回答这个问题吧。巴利
Vissajjetha tātā imaṃ pañhanti.
他们想了半天也弄不明白,就都不说话了。老师就说:“算了,孩子们,你们今天先回去吧,明天再说。”说完就让他们走了。他们即使十个人、二十个人聚在一起,还是看不出这个问题开头是什么、结尾是什么。回来以后,他们向老师报告说:“我们不明白这个问题是什么意思。”老师为了压一压他们,就说了下面这首偈颂——巴利
Te cintetvā ajānamānā tuṇhī ahesuṃ. Ācariyo āha ‘‘alaṃ tātā gacchathajja, sve katheyyāthā’’ti uyyojesi. Te dasapi vīsatipi sampiṇḍitā hutvā na tassa pañhassa ādiṃ, na antamaddasaṃsu. Āgantvā ācariyassa ārocesuṃ ‘‘na imassa pañhassa atthaṃ ājānāmā’’ti. Ācariyo tesaṃ niggahatthāya imaṃ gāthamabhāsi –
许多人的头,毛发浓密,而且巨大;
它们都套在脖子上,这里到底谁有耳朵呢?巴利
‘‘Bahūni narasīsāni, lomasāni brahāni ca; Gīvāsu paṭimukkāni, kocidevettha kaṇṇavā’’ti. (jā. 1.10.191) –
偈颂的含义是:人们能看到许多人的头,这些头全都长着头发,也全都很大,而且都正好安在脖子上,并不像棕榈果那样被手拿着。在这些特征上,它们之间没有任何差别。不过,这里有人自称“有耳者”,这是在指他自己。“有耳者”就是有智慧的人。可是耳孔其实谁都有。听了这话,那些年轻人感到羞愧难当,耷拉着肩膀,低着头,用手指在地上划来划去,沉默不语。巴利
Gāthāyattho – bahūni narānaṃ sīsāni dissanti, sabbāni ca tāni lomasāni sabbāni ca mahantāni gīvāyameva ca ṭhapitāni, na tālaphalaṃ viya hatthena gahitāni, natthi tesaṃ imehi dhammehi nānākaraṇaṃ. Ettha pana kocideva kaṇṇavāti attānaṃ sandhāyāha. Kaṇṇavāti paññavā. Kaṇṇacchiddaṃ pana na kassaci natthi, taṃ sutvā te māṇavakā maṅkubhūtā pattakkhandhā adhomukhā aṅguliyā bhūmiṃ vilikhantā tuṇhī ahesuṃ.
这时,老师看出他们毫无惭愧,就说:“孩子们,来学这个问题吧!”于是为他们解答了问题。“时”,指的是食前时段、食后时段等等。“有类”是“有情”的另一种说法。因为时间吞噬有情,并不是啃食他们的皮肉,而是耗尽他们的寿命、容貌和力量,摧折青春,毁坏健康,所以说是吞噬、吞食。它这样吞噬时,什么都不放过,把一切都吞掉。不仅吞噬有情,还吞噬自身。因为食前时段到不了食后时段,食后时段等也是如此。而“吞噬时者”,是漏尽者的另一种称呼。因为他已经耗尽并吞噬了未来的结生之时,所以称为“吞噬时者”。“他焚烧了令有情燃烧者”:那在恶趣中燃烧有情的渴爱,他用智火焚烧、烧尽,化为灰烬,因此称为“他焚烧了令有情燃烧者”。也有读作“pajani”的,意思是产生、令生。巴利
Atha nesaṃ ahirikabhāvaṃ passitvā ācariyo ‘‘uggaṇhatha tātā pañha’’nti pañhaṃ vissajjesi. Kāloti purebhattakālopi pacchābhattakālopīti evamādi. Bhūtānīti sattādhivacanametaṃ. Kālo hi bhūtānaṃ na cammamaṃsādīni khādati, apica kho nesaṃ āyuvaṇṇabalāni khepento yobbaññaṃ maddanto ārogyaṃ vināsento ghasati khādatīti vuccati. Sabbāneva sahattanāti evaṃ ghasanto ca na kiñci vajjeti, sabbāneva ghasati. Na kevalañca bhūtāniyeva, apica kho sahattanā attānampi ghasati. Purebhattakālo hi pacchābhattakālaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Esa nayo pacchābhattakālādīsu. Yo ca kālaghaso bhūtoti khīṇāsavassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. So hi āyatiṃ paṭisandhikālaṃ khepetvā khāditvā ṭhitattā ‘‘kālaghaso’’ti vuccati. Sa bhūtapacaniṃ pacīti so yāyaṃ taṇhā apāyesu bhūte pacati, taṃ ñāṇagginā paci dayhi bhasmamakāsi, tena ‘‘bhūtapacaniṃ pacī’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Pajani’’ntipi pāṭho. Janikaṃ nibbattikanti attho.
那时,这些年轻人就像在夜里借着千盏灯的光看清了平坦与崎岖一样,通过老师对问题的解答,清楚地看见了其中的含义。他们于是说:“从今以后,我们要一辈子留在老师身边侍奉。这些老师真是了不起啊!我们生起了‘博学多闻’的傲慢,却连一首四句偈的意思都不懂。”他们放下了傲慢,像以前一样对老师尽弟子的本分,最后投生到了天界。巴利
Atha te māṇavakā dīpasahassālokena viya rattiṃ samavisamaṃ ācariyassa vissajjanena pañhassa atthaṃ pākaṭaṃ disvā ‘‘idāni mayaṃ yāvajīvaṃ guruvāsaṃ vasissāma, mahantā ete ācariyā nāma, mayañhi bahussutamānaṃ uppādetvā catuppadikagāthāyapi atthaṃ na jānāmā’’ti nihatamānā pubbasadisameva ācariyassa vattappaṭipattiṃ katvā saggaparāyaṇā ahesuṃ.
比丘们,那时我就是那些年轻人的老师,而现在的这些比丘就是当年的那些年轻人。我过去也是这样,让这些昂着头、高举慢心到处行走的人降伏了慢心。巴利
Ahaṃ kho, bhikkhave, tena samayena tesaṃ ācariyo ahosiṃ, ime bhikkhū māṇavakā. Evaṃ pubbepāhaṃ ime evaṃ mānapaggahitasire vicarante nihatamāne akāsinti.
听了这个本生故事后,那些比丘心想:“我们过去也是被慢心害了。”于是他们更加彻底地降伏了慢心,转而专注于对自己有利益的业处。巴利
Imañca jātakaṃ sutvā te bhikkhū pubbepi mayaṃ māneneva upahatāti bhiyyosomattāya nihatamānā hutvā attano upakārakakammaṭṭhānaparāyaṇā ahesuṃ.
后来,世尊有一次在各地游化,走到毗舍离城,住在乔达摩塔庙里。他看出这五百位比丘的智慧已经成熟,就为他们讲了这部《乔达摩经》——巴利
Tato bhagavā ekaṃ samayaṃ janapadacārikaṃ caranto vesāliṃ patvā gotamake cetiye viharanto imesaṃ pañcasatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ñāṇaparipākaṃ viditvā imaṃ gotamakasuttaṃ kathesi –
比丘们,我是以证智来说法,不是没有证智;我是有根据、有因缘来说法……(中略)……比丘们,我是有教诫神变来说法,不是没有教诫神变。比丘们,我这样以证智来说法……(中略)……不是没有教诫神变。你们应当接受教诫,应当接受教示。而且,比丘们,你们有足够的理由感到满足、感到欢喜、感到欣悦:世尊是正自觉者,法是善说的,僧团是善修行的。世尊说了这些话。当这篇解说正在宣说的时候,一万个世界界都震动了。巴利
‘‘Abhiññāyāhaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desemi no anabhiññāya, sanidānāhaṃ…pe… sappāṭihāriyāhaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desemi no appāṭihāriyaṃ. Tassa mayhaṃ, bhikkhave, abhiññāya dhammaṃ desayato…pe… no appāṭihāriyaṃ. Karaṇīyo ovādo, karaṇīyā anusāsanī. Alañca pana vo, bhikkhave, tuṭṭhiyā alaṃ attamanatāya alaṃ somanassāya. Sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅghoti. Idamavoca bhagavā, imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasmiṃ bhaññamāne dasasahassilokadhātu akampitthā’’ti (a. ni. 3.126).
这五百位比丘听完这部经之后,就在同一个座位上,和无碍解一起证得了阿罗汉果。这场开示就在这里结束了。巴利
Idañca suttaṃ sutvā te pañcasatā bhikkhū tasmiṃyevāsane saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, evāyaṃ desanā etasmiṃ ṭhāne niṭṭhamagamāsīti.
2. 《一切漏经》的注释巴利
2. Sabbāsavasuttavaṇṇanā
14 14. 如是我闻……(中略)……在舍卫城——这是《一切漏经》。这里对经中尚未解释过的词句作注:“舍卫城”:是名为舍卫的仙人居住过的都城,就像迦甘提、摩甘提、憍赏弥这些名字一样,文字学者们是这样解释的。但注疏师们说:“无论人们要受用、享用什么东西,这里全都有,所以叫舍卫城。商队聚集时,有人问‘有什么货物’,回答‘什么都有’。”根据这种说法,所以叫舍卫城。巴利
14.Evaṃme sutaṃ…pe… sāvatthiyanti sabbāsavasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā – sāvatthīti savatthassa isino nivāsaṭṭhānabhūtā nagarī, yathā kākandī mākandī kosambīti evaṃ tāva akkharacintakā. Aṭṭhakathācariyā pana bhaṇanti ‘‘yaṃkiñci manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ sabbamettha atthīti sāvatthī. Satthasamāyoge ca kiṃ bhaṇḍamatthīti pucchite sabbamatthī’’ti vacanamupādāya sāvatthī.
一切生活用具总是聚集在舍卫城。
因此,正是把一切都聚合起来,这座城市才被称为舍卫城。
憍萨罗国那座都城,令人欢喜,好看,赏心悦目;
这座城从不缺十种声音,到处是饭食和饮料。
已经达到增长与广大,繁荣富足,令人心生欢喜。
就像天人们的阿拉迦曼达城一样,舍卫城是城市中最殊胜的。巴利
‘‘Sabbadā sabbūpakaraṇaṃ, sāvatthiyaṃ samohitaṃ; Tasmā sabbamupādāya, sāvatthīti pavuccati. Kosalānaṃ puraṃ rammaṃ, dassaneyyaṃ manoramaṃ; Dasahi saddehi avivittaṃ, annapānasamāyutaṃ. Vuddhiṃ vepullataṃ pattaṃ, iddhaṃ phītaṃ manoramaṃ; Aḷakamandāva devānaṃ, sāvatthipuramuttama’’nti.
在舍卫城里。关于“祇园”这个词:能战胜自己的敌人的人,就叫“祇多”;或者,因为是在国王战胜了自己的敌人时出生的,所以叫“祇多”;又或者,因为想求吉祥,就给他取了这样的名字,所以叫“祇多”。祇多的树林,就是“祇园”。因为这片树林是祇多王子种下、培育、守护的,而他就是这片树林的主人。因此称为“祇园”,也就是在祇园里。关于“给孤独的园地”:这位居士按父母取的名字,本来叫须达多。但他因为一切欲乐都很圆满,又远离了污垢和吝啬,具备悲悯等功德,所以常年给无依无靠的人施食,因此得到了“给孤独”这个称号。众生在这里特别欢喜,或者出家人在这里特别欢喜,所以叫“园地”。因为这里有花、果等美景,又具备不太远、不太近等五种住处的好处,人们从各处来到这里,欢喜、愉悦,没有厌倦地住下来,就是这个意思。或者,因为具备上述那样的好处,即使人们到了别处,也能把他们带回自己的范围内,让他们欢喜,所以叫“园地”。这片园地是给孤独居士从祇多王子手里买来的,花了十八俱胝金币铺满地面,又花了十八俱胝金币建造住处,再花十八俱胝金币完成寺院大典,这样总共舍弃了五十四俱胝金币,奉献给以佛陀为首的僧团。因此称为“给孤独的园地”。就是在给孤独的那片园地里。巴利
Tassaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ. Jetavaneti ettha attano paccatthikajanaṃ jinātīti jeto, raññā vā attano paccatthikajane jite jātoti jeto, maṅgalakamyatāya vā tassa evaṃnāmameva katanti jeto, jetassa vanaṃ jetavanaṃ. Tañhi jetena rājakumārena ropitaṃ saṃvaddhitaṃ paripālitaṃ, so ca tassa sāmī ahosi. Tasmā jetavananti vuccati, tasmiṃ jetavane. Anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmeti ettha sudatto nāma so gahapati mātāpitūhi katanāmavasena. Sabbakāmasamiddhitāya pana vigatamalamaccheratāya karuṇādiguṇasamaṅgitāya ca niccakālaṃ anāthānaṃ piṇḍamadāsi, tena anāthapiṇḍikoti saṅkhaṃ gato. Āramanti ettha pāṇino visesena vā pabbajitāti ārāmo, tassa pupphaphalādisobhāya nātidūranaccāsannatādipañcavidhasenāsanaṅgasampattiyā ca tato tato āgamma ramanti abhiramanti anukkaṇṭhitā hutvā nivasantīti attho. Vuttappakārāya vā sampattiyā tattha tattha gatepi attano abbhantaraṃyeva ānetvā rametīti ārāmo. So hi anāthapiṇḍikena gahapatinā jetassa rājakumārassa hatthato aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi koṭisantharena kīṇitvā aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi senāsanāni kārāpetvā aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi vihāramahaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā evaṃ catupaññāsahiraññakoṭipariccāgena buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa niyyādito. Tasmā ‘‘anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmo’’ti vuccati. Tasmiṃ anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
这里,“祇园”这个说法,是对先前那位主人的称扬;“给孤独的园地”这个说法,是对后来那位主人的称扬。为什么要称扬他们呢?是为了让那些想要功德的人跟着效仿。具体来说,在建造门楼殿堂那件事上,祇多王子舍弃了卖地所得的十八俱胝金币,还有价值无数俱胝金的树木;而给孤独长者舍弃的则是五十四俱胝金币。就这样,具寿阿难通过称扬他们两人,既说明那些想要功德的人是怎样修功德的,也带动其他想要功德的人去跟着效仿他们。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘jetavane’’ti vacanaṃ purimasāmiparikittanaṃ. ‘‘Anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme’’ti pacchimasāmiparikittanaṃ. Kimetesaṃ parikittane payojananti. Puññakāmānaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanaṃ. Tatra hi dvārakoṭṭhakapāsādamāpane bhūmivikkayaladdhā aṭṭhārasa hiraññakoṭiyo anekakoṭiagghanakā rukkhā ca jetassa pariccāgo, catupaññāsa koṭiyo anāthapiṇḍikassa. Iti tesaṃ parikittanena evaṃ puññakāmā puññāni karontīti dassento āyasmā ānando aññepi puññakāme tesaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjane niyojeti.
“比丘们,我要为你们讲说防护一切漏的法门。”——为什么世尊要讲这部经呢?是为了从清除那些比丘的垢秽入手,指示他们趣向漏尽的修行方法。
其中,“防护一切漏的法门”的意思是:防护一切漏的因由,也就是作为防护的那个因由。依靠这个因由,那些漏被防护、被遮止之后,就达到所谓“不再生起的灭尽”,被断除,不再生起——这就是“因由”的意思。
其中,“漏”是指:从眼……乃至……从意流漏、辗转。或者说,在法的层面上一直流到种姓地,在处的层面上一直流到有顶,所以叫“漏”,意思是:以这些法和这些处为范围而生起。因为这里的“ā”有“在内作为”的意思。
以久住之义来说,酒等东西也叫“漏”;或者说它们像漏一样,所以也是漏。因为在世间,久住的酒等就被称为“漏”。如果按久住之义来衡量漏,那么烦恼恰恰才真正配得上称为漏。正如经中所说:“比丘们,无明的起始边际不可知,在此以前无明并不存在。”如此等等。
或者,它们流出、漏出漫长的轮回之苦,所以叫“漏”。在这些解释中,前面的词源解释适用于将烦恼称为漏的情况,最后一种则不仅业与烦恼是漏,种种灾患也是漏。因为在经中,如《长部》说:“准陀,我不是只为防护现法中的漏而说法。”在这里,作为诤论之本的烦恼被称为漏。巴利
Sabbāsavasaṃvarapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhaveti kasmā idaṃ suttamabhāsi? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ upakkilesavisodhanaṃ ādiṃ katvā āsavakkhayāya paṭipattidassanatthaṃ. Tattha sabbāsavasaṃvarapariyāyanti sabbesaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarakāraṇaṃ saṃvarabhūtaṃ kāraṇaṃ, yena kāraṇena te saṃvaritā pidahitā hutvā anuppādanirodhasaṅkhātaṃ khayaṃ gacchanti pahīyanti nappavattanti, taṃ kāraṇanti attho. Tattha āsavantīti āsavā, cakkhutopi…pe… manatopi sandanti pavattantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammato yāva gotrabhuṃ okāsato yāva bhavaggaṃ savantīti vā āsavā, ete dhamme etañca okāsaṃ anto karitvā pavattantīti attho. Antokaraṇattho hi ayaṃ ākāro. Cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena madirādayo āsavā, āsavā viyātipi āsavā. Lokasmiñhi cirapārivāsikā madirādayo āsavāti vuccanti. Yadi ca cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena āsavā, eteyeva bhavitumarahanti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, ito pubbe avijjā nāhosī’’tiādi (a. ni. 10.61). Āyataṃ vā saṃsāradukkhaṃ savanti pasavantītipi āsavā. Purimāni cettha nibbacanāni yattha kilesā āsavāti āgacchanti, tattha yujjanti, pacchimaṃ kammepi. Na kevalañca kammakilesāyeva āsavā, apica kho nānappakārakā uppaddavāpi. Suttesu hi ‘‘nāhaṃ, cunda, diṭṭhadhammikānaṃyeva āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya dhammaṃ desemī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.182) ettha vivādamūlabhūtā kilesā āsavāti āgatā.
凭这个,他就能投生为天神,或者成为甘塔拔,或者变成会飞的鸟;
凭这个,我能投生为夜叉,也能投生为人身;
我的这些漏已经灭尽,已被摧毁,已彻底根除。巴利
‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo; Yakkhattaṃ yena gaccheyyaṃ, manussattañca abbaje; Te mayhaṃ āsavā khīṇā, viddhastā vinaḷīkatā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.36); –
在这里,三界的业以及其余的不善法,就是漏。在“为了防护现世的漏,为了抵挡后世的漏”(《律藏·波罗夷》39)这句话里,被他人毁谤、追悔、杀害、捆绑等行为,以及种种堕入恶趣之苦等灾祸,也都是漏。而这些漏,无论在哪里、以什么方式被说到,就应该按照那种方式去理解。巴利
Ettha tebhūmakañca kammaṃ avasesā ca akusalā dhammā. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyā’’ti (pārā. 39) ettha parūpavādavippaṭisāravadhabandhādayo ceva apāyadukkhabhūtā ca nānappakārā upaddavā. Te panete āsavā yattha yathā āgatā, tattha tathā veditabbā.
这些漏,在律藏里先以两种方式出现:“为了防护现世的漏,为了遮止后世的漏”。在《六处相应》里,以三种方式出现:“贤友,有三种漏:欲漏、有漏、无明漏”(《增支部》6.63)。在其他经和阿毗达摩里,这些漏加上见漏,就以四种方式出现。在决择说里,以五种方式出现:“诸比丘,有漏导向地狱,有漏导向畜生界,有漏导向饿鬼界,有漏导向人界,有漏导向天界”(《增支部》6.63)。在《六集》里,以“诸比丘,有漏应通过防护来断除”等这样的方式,以六种方式出现。但在这部经里,这些漏连同那些应通过见来断除的漏,一共以七种方式出现。以上便是“漏”这个词的语义解释和分类。巴利
Ete hi vinaye tāva ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyā’’ti dvedhā āgatā. Saḷāyatane ‘‘tayome āvuso āsavā, kāmāsavo bhavāsavo avijjāsavo’’ti (a. ni. 6.63) tidhā āgatā. Aññesu ca suttantesu abhidhamme ca teyeva diṭṭhāsavena saha catudhā āgatā. Nibbedhikapariyāye – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, āsavā nirayagāminiyā, atthi āsavā tiracchānayonigāminiyā, atthi āsavā pettivisayagāminiyā, atthi āsavā manussalokagāminiyā, atthi āsavā devalokagāminiyā’’ti (a. ni. 6.63) pañcadhā āgatā. Chakkanipāte – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, āsavā saṃvarā pahātabbā’’tiādinā nayena chadhā āgatā. Imasmiṃ pana sutte teyeva dassanāpahātabbehi saddhiṃ sattadhā āgatāti. Ayaṃ tāva āsavapade vacanattho ceva pabhedo ca.
在“防护”这个词上,“防护”的意思是它防护,也就是关闭、阻挡、不让它生起。比如“诸比丘,我允许白天独处时关好门再独处”,还有“我说防护诸流,以智慧将它们关闭”等句子里,都是以关闭、阻塞的意思来说“防护”的。这个防护有五种:戒防护、念防护、慧防护、忍防护、精进防护。其中,“具足此巴帝摩卡防护”说的是戒防护,因为这里把巴帝摩卡戒称为防护。“于眼根防护而住”等句子里说的是念防护,因为这里把念称为防护。“我说防护诸流,以智慧将它们关闭”说的是慧防护,因为这里用“将它们关闭”来说明智慧,是以阻塞的意思作为防护。而通过“他堪忍寒暑……不让生起的欲寻持续”等说法,忍防护和精进防护也在这里出现了。要知道,这五种防护都被“防护一切漏法门”这个总说所涵盖,所以都具有防护的性质。巴利
Saṃvarapade pana saṃvarayatīti saṃvaro, pidahati nivāreti pavattituṃ na detīti attho. Tathā hi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, divā paṭisallīyantena dvāraṃ saṃvaritvā paṭisallīyitu’’nti (pārā. 77), ‘‘sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃbraūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti (su. ni. 1041) ca ādīsu pidhānaṭṭhena saṃvaramāha. Svāyaṃ saṃvaro pañcavidho hoti sīlasaṃvaro satiñāṇa khanti vīriyasaṃvaroti. Tattha ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto’’ti (vibha. 511) ayaṃ sīlasaṃvaro. Pātimokkhasīlañhi ettha saṃvaroti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cakkhundriye saṃvaramāpajjatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.213) satisaṃvaro. Sati hettha saṃvaroti vuttā. ‘‘Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti ayaṃ ñāṇasaṃvaro. Ñāṇañhettha pidhīyareti iminā pidhānaṭṭhena saṃvaroti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Khamo hoti sītassa…pe…, uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.24-26) pana nayena idheva khantivīriyasaṃvarā āgatā. Tesañca ‘‘sabbāsavasaṃvarapariyāya’’nti iminā uddesena saṅgahitattā saṃvarabhāvo veditabbo.
另外,这五种防护在这部经里其实都已经出现了。其中,忍防护和精进防护前面已经讲过。而“他避开那不适合的坐处与不适合的去处”(《中部》1.25),这里指的是戒防护。“如理思惟,防护眼根,善加守护而住”(《中部》1.22),这是念防护。在一切处都如理思惟,就是慧防护。又以未执取而执取,也就是见的执取、受用的执取、修习的执取,这也是慧防护。所谓“法门”,就是通过它来了知法,所以叫法门,意思是说能令法生起或令法灭尽。到这里,“防护一切漏法门”这个标题中应当说明的内容,就已经讲完了。巴利
Apica pañcavidhopi ayaṃ saṃvaro idha āgatoyeva, tattha khantivīriyasaṃvarā tāva vuttāyeva. ‘‘So tañca anāsanaṃ tañca agocara’’nti (ma. ni. 1.25) ayaṃ panettha sīlasaṃvaro. ‘‘Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’ti (ma. ni. 1.22) ayaṃ satisaṃvaro. Sabbattha paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaro. Aggahitaggahaṇena pana dassanaṃ paṭisevanā bhāvanā ca ñāṇasaṃvaro. Pariyāyanti etena dhammāti pariyāyo, uppattiṃ nirodhaṃ vā gacchantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettāvatā ‘‘sabbāsavasaṃvarapariyāya’’nti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttaṃ hoti.
15 15. 现在,在“了知者……我”等句中,“了知者”就是指了知的人。“看见者”就是指看见的人。这两个词意思相同,只是表达方式不同。即便如此,“了知者”是依据智的特征来指称人,因为了知的特征就是智。“看见者”是依据智的作用来指称,因为看见的作用就是智。具足智的人,就像有眼睛的人用眼睛看色法一样,用智看见已经显现的诸法。此外,说“了知者”,是为了让如理作意生起;说“看见者”,是为了说明不如理作意不会那样生起——这就是这里的要点。不过,有些论师说了很多戏论,那些在这里的义理上并不成立。巴利
15. Idāni jānato ahantiādīsu jānatoti jānantassa. Passatoti passantassa. Dvepi padāni ekatthāni, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Evaṃ santepi jānatoti ñāṇalakkhaṇaṃ upādāya puggalaṃ niddisati, jānanalakkhaṇañhi ñāṇaṃ. Passatoti ñāṇappabhāvaṃ upādāya, passanappabhāvañhi ñāṇaṃ. Ñāṇasamaṅgī puggalo cakkhumā viya cakkhunā rūpāni ñāṇena vivaṭe dhamme passati. Apica yonisomanasikāraṃ uppādetuṃ jānato, ayonisomanasikāro yathā na uppajjati, evaṃ passatoti ayamettha sāro. Keci panācariyā bahū papañce bhaṇanti, te imasmiṃ atthe na yujjanti.
“诸漏的灭尽”,是指断除诸漏、诸漏彻底灭尽的生起、已灭尽的相状、归于无有的状态。因为在这部经里,以及在“由诸漏灭尽而有无漏的心解脱”等处的经文中,正是这个“漏尽”的含义。不过在别的地方,道、果和涅槃也被称为漏尽。正如——巴利
Āsavānaṃkhayanti āsavappahānaṃ āsavānaṃ accantakkhayasamuppādaṃ khīṇākāraṃ natthibhāvanti ayameva hi imasmiñca sutte, ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimutti’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.438) ca āsavakkhayattho. Aññattha pana maggaphalanibbānānipi āsavakkhayoti vuccanti. Tathā hi –
正在修学的有学人,沿着正直的道路随行。
在灭尽中,最初的智生起,从此之后,正智无间而生。巴利
‘‘Sekhassa sikkhamānassa, ujumaggānusārino; Khayasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tato aññā anantarā’’ti. (itivu. 62) –
在这些当中,道被称为漏尽。巴利
Ādīsu maggo āsavakkhayoti vutto,
在“诸漏灭尽,就成为沙门”这类句子中,指的是果。巴利
‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.438) phalaṃ.
总是盯着别人的过错,心里老是想着挑毛病;
他的诸漏不断增长,他离漏尽还很遥远。巴利
‘‘Paravajjānupassissa, niccaṃ ujjhānasaññino; Āsavā tassa vaḍḍhanti, ārā so āsavakkhayā’’ti. (dha. pa. 253) –
在这些情况下,涅槃被称为“漏尽”。巴利
Ādīsu nibbānaṃ ‘‘āsavakkhayo’’ti vuttaṃ.
“不是不知的人,不是不见的人”这句话的意思是:对于不知、不见的人,我不说(他已漏尽)。这样一来,那些主张即使不知不见、仅靠防护等就能清净的人,就被否定了。或者,前两个词说明了正确的方法,这个词则否定了错误的方法。简而言之,这里表明:智慧就是防护诸漏的同义语。巴利
No ajānato no apassatoti yo pana na jānāti na passati, tassa no vadāmīti attho. Etena ye ajānato apassatopi saṃvarādīhiyeva suddhiṃ vadanti, te paṭikkhittā honti. Purimena vā padadvayena upāyo vutto, iminā anupāyapaṭisedho. Saṅkhepena cettha ñāṇaṃ āsavasaṃvarapariyāyoti dassitaṃ hoti.
现在,为了说明“知道什么、见到什么,诸漏就会灭尽”,他提出问题:“比丘们,知道什么?”在这里,“知道”有很多种。确实,有些比丘天生手巧,会做伞;有些会做衣服之类的物品。当他立足于戒律所规定的事务去做这些工作时,那种“知道”不是道果的近因,不能这么说。可是,如果有人出家后却会行医之类的事,像这样知道,诸漏反而只会增长。因此,为了说明“知道什么、见到什么,诸漏就会灭尽”,他说道:“如理作意和不恰当作意。”巴利
Idāni yaṃ jānato āsavānaṃ khayo hoti, taṃ dassetukāmo kiñca, bhikkhave, jānatoti pucchaṃ ārabhi, tattha jānanā bahuvidhā. Dabbajātiko eva hi koci bhikkhu chattaṃ kātuṃ jānāti, koci cīvarādīnaṃ aññataraṃ, tassa īdisāni kammāni vattasīse ṭhatvā karontassa sā jānanā maggaphalānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ na hotīti na vattabbā. Yo pana sāsane pabbajitvā vejjakammādīni kātuṃ jānāti, tassevaṃ jānato āsavā vaḍḍhantiyeva, tasmā yaṃ jānato passato ca āsavānaṃ khayo hoti, tadeva dassento āha yoniso ca manasikāraṃ ayoniso ca manasikāranti.
在这里,如理作意指的是善巧作意、初作意。也就是面对无常等对象时,以“无常”等的方式,或以随顺真理的方式,让心转向、一再转向、专注、摄持、作意——这就叫作如理作意。巴利
Tattha yoniso manasikāro nāma upāyamanasikāro pathamanasikāro, aniccādīsu aniccanti ādinā eva nayena saccānulomikena vā cittassa āvaṭṭanā anvāvaṭṭanā ābhogo samannāhāro manasikāro, ayaṃ vuccati yoniso manasikāroti.
不恰当作意,就是没有方法的作意、偏离正道的作意。把无常的看成常的,把苦的看成乐的,把无我的看成我的,把不净的看成净的——这就是不恰当作意、偏离正道的作意。或者,以违背真理的方式,心的转向、再转向、倾向、专注、作意,这称为不恰当作意。如此,了知怎样让如理作意生起,并且观察不恰当作意怎样才不产生的人,他的诸漏就灭尽。巴利
Ayoniso manasikāroti anupāyamanasikāro uppathamanasikāro. Anicce niccanti dukkhe sukhanti anattani attāti asubhe subhanti ayoniso manasikāro uppathamanasikāro. Saccappaṭikulena vā cittassa āvaṭṭanā anvāvaṭṭanā ābhogo samannāhāro manasikāro, ayaṃ vuccati ayoniso manasikāroti. Evaṃ yoniso manasikāraṃ uppādetuṃ jānato, ayoniso manasikāro ca yathā na uppajjati, evaṃ passato āsavānaṃ khayo hoti.
现在,为了说明这个道理的合理性,世尊说:诸比丘,不恰当地……中略……被断除。这话说的是什么意思呢?因为对不恰当作意的人,诸漏会生起;对恰当作意的人,诸漏会被断除。因此应当知道:了知如何让如理作意生起,并且如此观察不恰当作意如何不产生的人,他的诸漏就会灭尽。这就是这里简要的解释。巴利
Idāni imassevatthassa yuttiṃ dassento āha ayoniso, bhikkhave…pe… pahīyantīti. Tena kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti, yasmā ayoniso manasikaroto āsavā uppajjanti, yoniso manasikaroto pahīyanti, tasmā jānitabbaṃ yoniso manasikāraṃ uppādetuṃ jānato, ayoniso manasikāro ca yathā na uppajjati, evaṃ passato āsavānaṃ khayo hotīti, ayaṃ tāvettha saṅkhepavaṇṇanā.
这段的详细解释是这样的:在这里,首先用“如理”和“不如理”这两个词,就已经涵盖了后面整部经的内容。因为后面的整部经是依流转与还灭来说的。以不如理作意为根本的是流转,以如理作意为根本的是还灭。怎么说呢?不如理作意不断增长时,会圆满两个法:无明和有爱。有无明时,“缘无明有行……乃至……纯大苦蕴集起”;有爱时,“缘爱有取……乃至……集起”。这样一来,这个不断做不如理作意的人,就像被暴风冲击而失控的船,像掉进恒河漩涡里的牛群,像被系在轮轴上、有力气也挣脱不了的牛,一再地在有、生趣、识住、有情居处中轮转打转。这就是以不如理作意为根本的流转。巴利
Ayaṃ pana vitthāro – tattha ‘‘yoniso ayoniso’’ti imehi tāva dvīhi padehi ābaddhaṃ hoti upari sakalasuttaṃ. Vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena hi upari sakalasuttaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayoniso manasikāramūlakañca vaṭṭaṃ, yoniso manasikāramūlakañca vivaṭṭaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ayoniso manasikāro hi vaḍḍhamāno dve dhamme paripūreti avijjañca bhavataṇhañca. Avijjāya ca sati ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti. Taṇhāya sati taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṃ…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti. Evaṃ ayaṃ ayoniso manasikārabahulo puggalo vātavegābhighātena vippanaṭṭhanāvā viya gaṅgāvaṭṭe patitagokulaṃ viya cakkayante yuttabalibaddo viya ca punappunaṃ bhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsesu āvaṭṭaparivaṭṭaṃ karoti, evaṃ tāva ayoniso manasikāramūlakaṃ vaṭṭaṃ.
而如理作意不断增长时,依照“诸比丘,可以期望成就如理作意的比丘将修习圣八支道,将多修习圣八支道”这句话,就能圆满以正见为首的八支道。那正见就是明;由于明生起,无明就灭,“无明灭则行灭……如是整个苦蕴灭尽”。这样应当知道,这是以如理作意为根本的还灭。如此,以这两个词就涵盖了后面全部经文。巴利
Yoniso manasikāro pana vaḍḍhamāno – ‘‘yoniso manasikārasampannassetaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno pāṭikaṅkhaṃ, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvessati, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bahulīkarissatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.55) vacanato sammādiṭṭhipamukhaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ paripūreti. Yā ca sammādiṭṭhi, sā vijjāti tassa vijjuppādā avijjānirodho, ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho…pe… evaṃ etassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti (mahāva. 1) evaṃ yoniso manasikāramūlakaṃ vivaṭṭaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ imehi dvīhi padehi ābaddhaṃ hoti upari sakalasuttaṃ.
这里经文这样连接:如果先说明断除诸漏,然后又说它们生起,那就不合理。因为已经断除的漏确实不会再重新生起。只有已经生起的漏,才谈得上断除。因此,世尊也从与前面相反的顺序来说:“诸比丘,不恰当的作意者……”等等。巴利
Evaṃ ābaddhe cettha yasmā pubbe āsavappahānaṃ dassetvā pacchā uppatti vuccamānā na yujjati. Na hi pahīnā puna uppajjanti. Uppannānaṃ pana pahānaṃ yujjati, tasmā uddesapaṭilomatopi ‘‘ayoniso, bhikkhave, manasikaroto’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“不如理作意”指的是生起前面所说的那种不如理作意。“未生起的漏生起”这句话应当这样理解:有人从未得到过的衣服等资具,或者从未得到过的侍者、同住者、弟子等某一种合意的东西,得到之后把它看成是美的、快乐的,以不如理的方式作意;或者对某些从未体验过的所缘,以各种方式不如理地作意,这时漏就生起了,这些漏就应当知道是“未生起的漏生起”。否则,在无始轮回中,根本不存在所谓“未生起”的漏。再者,对于曾经体验过的事物或所缘,如果有人因为本性清净,或者因为教示、遍问、学习教典、做新的业、如理作意等其中某一种原因,先前没有生起漏,后来却因为类似的条件突然生起,这些漏也应当知道是“未生起的漏生起”。而对于同样这些事物和所缘,反复生起的漏,就称为“已生起的漏增长”。否则,初次生起的漏就谈不上“增长”。巴利
Tattha ayoniso manasikarototi vuttappakāraṃ ayoniso manasikāraṃ uppādayato. Anuppannā ceva āsavā uppajjantīti ettha ye pubbe appaṭiladdhapubbaṃ cīvarādiṃ vā paccayaṃ upaṭṭhākasaddhivihārikaantevāsikānaṃ vā aññataraṃ manuññaṃ vatthuṃ paṭilabhitvā, taṃ subhaṃ sukhanti ayoniso manasikaroto, aññataraññataraṃ vā pana ananubhūtapubbaṃ ārammaṇaṃ yathā vā tathā vā ayoniso manasikaroto āsavā uppajjanti, te anuppannā uppajjantīti veditabbā, aññathā hi anamatagge saṃsāre anuppannā nāma āsavā na santi. Anubhūtapubbepi ca vatthumhi ārammaṇe vā yassa pakatisuddhiyā vā uddesaparipucchāpariyattinavakammayonisomanasikārānaṃ vā aññataravasena pubbe anuppajjitvā pacchā tādisena paccayena sahasā uppajjanti, imepi anuppannā uppajjantīti veditabbā. Tesuyeva pana vatthārammaṇesu punappunaṃ uppajjamānā uppannā pavaḍḍhantīti vuccanti. Ito aññathā hi paṭhamuppannānaṃ vaḍḍhi nāma natthi.
“如理作意”这一句里,诸比丘,如果一个人因为本性清净——就像大迦叶尊者和跋陀迦毗罗尼那样——或者因为教示、遍问等原因,诸漏没有生起,而他也知道:“我的诸漏还没有通过圣道被彻底断除,来吧,我要为了断除它们而修行。”然后他通过修习圣道,把一切漏都彻底断除。他的这些漏,就被称为“未生起的漏不再生起”。但如果一个人正在做事时,因为失去正念,诸漏忽然生起,他因此心生警惧,如理精勤,断除那些漏,他的漏就被称为“已生起的漏被断除”,就像曼达拉园寺的住者马哈帝沙长老那样。据说,他就在那座精舍里学习教法。后来他进村托钵时,面对不当的所缘,烦恼生起了。他用观照镇伏了那个烦恼,回到精舍。即使在梦里,那个所缘也不再出现。他于是心生警惧:“这个烦恼如果增长,会成为堕入恶趣的因。”便向老师告辞,离开精舍,到大僧护长老那里,领受了对治贪欲的不净业处,然后进入丛林深处,铺开粪扫衣坐下,以不来道断除了对五种欲乐的贪欲,起身礼敬老师,第二天就通达了所学的道。至于那些正在生起的漏,对于它们,并不存在通过修行的断除。巴利
Yonisoca kho, bhikkhaveti ettha pana yassa pakatisuddhiyā vā seyyathāpi āyasmato mahākassapassa bhaddāya ca kāpilāniyā, uddesaparipucchādīhi vā kāraṇehi āsavā nuppajjanti, so ca jānāti ‘‘na kho me āsavā maggena samugghātaṃ gatā, handa nesaṃ samugghātāya paṭipajjāmī’’ti. Tato maggabhāvanāya sabbe samugghāteti. Tassa te āsavā anuppannā na uppajjantīti vuccanti. Yassa pana kārakasseva sato satisammosena sahasā āsavā uppajjanti, tato saṃvegamāpajjitvā yoniso padahanto te āsave samucchindati, tassa uppannā pahīyantīti vuccanti maṇḍalārāmavāsīmahātissabhūtattherassa viya. So kira tasmiṃyeva vihāre uddesaṃ gaṇhāti, athassa gāme piṇḍāya carato visabhāgārammaṇe kileso uppajji, so taṃ vipassanāya vikkhambhetvā vihāraṃ agamāsi. Tassa supinantepi taṃ ārammaṇaṃ na upaṭṭhāsi. So ‘‘ayaṃ kileso vaḍḍhitvā apāyasaṃvattaniko hotī’’ti saṃvegaṃ janetvā ācariyaṃ āpucchitvā vihārā nikkhamma mahāsaṅgharakkhitattherassa santike rāgapaṭipakkhaṃ asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gumbantaraṃ pavisitvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ santharitvā nisajja anāgāmimaggena pañcakāmaguṇikarāgaṃ chinditvā uṭṭhāya ācariyaṃ vanditvā punadivase uddesamaggaṃ pāpuṇi. Ye pana vattamānuppannā, tesaṃ paṭipattiyā pahānaṃ nāma natthi.
16 现在,为了说明那些被断除的漏还有种种不同的断除方式,他抓住“已生的漏被断除”这一句,展开教说,说道:“诸比丘,有些漏应当通过见来断除……”等等。这位善于分别教法的法王,就是这样说的。其中,“通过见来断除”意思就是由见而断除。这个道理在一切处都适用。巴利
16. Idāni ‘‘uppannā ca āsavā pahīyantī’’ti idameva padaṃ gahetvā ye te āsavā pahīyanti, tesaṃ nānappakārato aññampi pahānakāraṇaṃ āvikātuṃ desanaṃ vitthārento atthi, bhikkhave, āsavā dassanā pahātabbātiādimāha yathā taṃ desanāpabhedakusalo dhammarājā. Tattha dassanā pahātabbāti dassanena pahātabbā. Esa nayo sabbattha.
关于“由见所断之漏”的注释巴利
Dassanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
17 17. 现在,他想按顺序逐一解释这些词句,于是先问:“比丘们,哪些漏应当通过见来断除?”然后依照《根本法门》注释中所说的方式,以人为立足点开始教导:“比丘们,在此,未听闻正法的凡夫……”其中,“对应当作意的法不了知”意思是:对应当转向、应当专注的法,他不了知。“对不应当作意的法”则是指与此相反的情况。这个道理也适用于后面其余的语句。不过,哪些法应当作意、哪些法不应当作意,从法本身来说并没有固定的规定,但从方式上来说则有准则:如果以某种方式作意时,会成为不善法生起的依据,就不应当以那种方式作意;如果以某种方式作意时,会成为善法生起的依据,就应当以那种方式作意。因此世尊说:“比丘们,若有人作意诸法时,未生的欲漏……”巴利
17. Idāni tāni padāni anupubbato byākātukāmo ‘‘katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā dassanā pahātabbā’’ti pucchaṃ katvā mūlapariyāyavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano’’ti puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha manasikaraṇīye dhamme nappajānātīti āvajjitabbe samannāharitabbe dhamme na pajānāti. Amanasikaraṇīyeti tabbiparīte. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Yasmā pana ime dhammā manasikaraṇīyā, ime amanasikaraṇīyāti dhammato niyamo natthi, ākārato pana atthi. Yenā ākārena manasikariyamānā akusaluppattipadaṭṭhānā honti, tenākārena na manasikātabbā. Yena kusaluppattipadaṭṭhānā honti, tenākārena manasikātabbā. Tasmā ‘‘ya’ssa, bhikkhave, dhamme manasikaroto anuppanno vā kāmāsavo’’tiādimāha.
这里,“他的”(ya'ssa)是指“对于那个他”,也就是对于那个没有听闻正法的凡夫。“作意”(manasikaroti)是指转向、把心投向那里。在“未生的欲漏或”(anuppanno vā kāmāsavo)中,“或”(vā)这个词是集合的意思,不是选择的意思。因此,就像在“诸比丘,凡是那些无足的有情或二足的有情……如来被称为他们中最上的”这句话里,意思是“无足的以及二足的”;又像在“为了已生有情的安住,或为了寻求再生的有情的扶助”这句话里,意思是“已生的以及寻求再生的”;又像在“从火或从水或从离间”这句话里,意思是“从火以及从水以及从离间”;同样地,在这里也应当理解为:未生的欲漏生起,已生的欲漏增长。其余的漏也应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha ya’ssāti ye assa assutavato puthujjanassa. Manasikarototi āvajjayato samannāharantassa. Anuppanno vā kāmāsavoti ettha samuccayattho vāsaddo, na vikappattho. Tasmā yathā ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā…pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (itivu. 90) vutte apadā ca dvipadā cāti attho, yathā ca ‘‘bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.402) vutte bhūtānañca sambhavesīnañcāti attho, yathā ca ‘‘aggito vā udakato vā mithubhedato vā’’ti (udā. 76) vutte aggito ca udakato ca mithubhedato cāti attho, evamidhāpi anuppanno ca kāmāsavo uppajjati, uppanno ca kāmāsavo pavaḍḍhatīti attho daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ sesesu.
在这里,“欲漏”是指对五欲的贪。“有漏”是指对色界、无色界存在的欲贪,对禅定的喜好,以及伴随常见和断见者。这样,见漏也被归入有漏之中。“无明漏”是指对四圣谛的无知。其中,当人把五欲当作乐味来作意时,未生的欲漏就会生起,已生的欲漏就会增长;当人把广大法当作乐味来作意时,未生的有漏就会生起,已生的有漏就会增长;当人把三地的法以作为四种颠倒之立足处的方式作意时,未生的无明漏就会生起,已生的无明漏就会增长。应当这样了知。与所说方式相反的,则是白分,应当详细展开。巴利
Ettha ca kāmāsavoti pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo. Bhavāsavoti rupārūpabhave chandarāgo, jhānanikanti ca sassatucchedadiṭṭhisahagatā. Evaṃ diṭṭhāsavopi bhavāsave eva samodhānaṃ gacchati. Avijjāsavoti catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃ. Tattha kāmaguṇe assādato manasikaroto anuppanno ca kāmāsavo uppajjati, uppanno ca pavaḍḍhati. Mahaggatadhamme assādato manasikaroto anuppanno ca bhavāsavo uppajjati, uppanno ca pavaḍḍhati. Tīsu bhūmīsu dhamme catuvipallāsapadaṭṭhānabhāvena manasikaroto anuppanno ca avijjāsavo uppajjati, uppanno ca pavaḍḍhatīti veditabbo. Vuttanayapaccanīkato sukkapakkho vitthāretabbo.
为什么这里只说了三种漏呢?因为这是从它们各自对治的解脱门来说的。欲漏是无愿解脱的对立面,另外两种漏是无相解脱和空解脱的对立面。所以,生起这三种漏的人,就与这三种解脱无缘;不生起这三种漏的人,就能获得这三种解脱。为了显示这个道理,才只说三种漏,应当这样理解。或者说,见漏在这里其实也已经包含在内了,这一点已经解释过了。巴利
Kasmā pana tayo eva āsavā idha vuttāti. Vimokkhapaṭipakkhato. Appaṇihitavimokkhapaṭipakkho hi kāmāsavo,. Animittasuññatavimokkhapaṭipakkhā itare. Tasmā ime tayo āsave uppādentā tiṇṇaṃ vimokkhānaṃ abhāgino honti, anuppādentā bhāginoti etamatthaṃ dassentena tayo eva vuttāti veditabbā. Diṭṭhāsavopi vā ettha vutto yevāti vaṇṇitametaṃ.
对于他不应作意的那些法,作意就是作意的因:因为他作意那些法,所以说“由此”。第二句也遵循同样的道理。“未生的漏生起,已生的漏增长”——这是对前面所说的诸漏,不加区分地作出的总结。巴利
Tassaamanasikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ manasikārāti manasikārahetu, yasmā te dhamme manasi karoti, tasmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo dutiyapadepi. ‘‘Anuppannā ceva āsavā uppajjanti, uppannā ca āsavā pavaḍḍhantī’’ti heṭṭhā vuttaāsavānaṃyeva abhedato nigamanametaṃ.
18 到这一步为止,为了在以补特伽罗为立足点的教法中指出“见所断的漏”,提到了无闻凡夫。这个无闻凡夫,就是前面那句“诸比丘,不如理作意时,未生起的诸漏也会生起……”里,以不如理作意为缘的欲漏等诸漏的所依——因为那些漏也是总括地这样说的。所以,那些漏也要通过这个补特伽罗来显示。现在,为了指出见所断的漏,就说他这样不如理作意:“我过去世存在过吗?”等等。在这里,以疑为首,同时也是为了显示见漏,而开始了这段教说。巴利
18. Ettāvatā yo ayaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya dassanā pahātabbe āsave niddisituṃ assutavā puthujjano vutto, so yasmā ‘‘ayoniso, bhikkhave, manasikaroto anuppannā ceva āsavā uppajjantī’’ti evaṃ sāmaññato vuttānaṃ ayoniso manasikārapaccayānaṃ kāmāsavādīnampi adhiṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā tepi āsave teneva puggalena dassetvā idāni dassanā pahātabbe āsave dassento so evaṃ ayoniso manasi karoti, ahosiṃ nu kho ahantiādimāha. Vicikicchāsīsena cettha diṭṭhāsavampi dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.
这段话的意思是:按照前面所说的方式,对谁会有诸漏生起,谁就是凡夫;而这里以“无闻”等说法所描述的,也正是这个凡夫。他这样不恰当地、用错误的方法、走在错误的路上作意。怎样作意呢?就是“我曾经存在过吗?……他将来会去哪里?”也就是说,他这样不恰当地作意,于是便生起了按“我曾经存在过吗?”等说法所讲的十六种疑。巴利
Tassattho, yassa te iminā vuttanayena āsavā uppajjanti, so puthujjano, yo cāyaṃ ‘‘assutavā’’tiādinā nayena vutto, so puthujjano evaṃ ayoniso anupāyena uppathena manasi karoti. Kathaṃ? Ahosiṃ nu kho…pe…so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatīti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti, so evaṃ ayoniso manasi karoti, yathāssa ‘‘ahaṃ ahosiṃ nu kho’’tiādinā nayena vuttā soḷasavidhāpi vicikicchā uppajjatīti.
在这里,“我曾经存在吗?难道不存在吗?”是基于常见相和无因生起相,对过去自己的存在或不存在生起疑惑。不必问“这是什么原因”。因为愚痴凡夫就像疯子一样,以各种方式乱动。而且,不如理作意本身就是这里的原因。那么,不如理作意又是什么原因呢?就是凡夫性本身,或者不见圣者等。难道凡夫也会如理作意吗?谁说过他完全不作意呢?但在那里,凡夫性并不是原因,听闻正法、亲近善知识等才是那里的原因。就像鱼肉等本身并不香,但通过加工等缘,也可以变得香。巴利
Tattha ahosiṃ nu kho nanu khoti sassatākārañca adhiccasamuppattiākārañca nissāya atīte attano vijjamānataṃ avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Kiṃ kāraṇanti na vattabbaṃ. Ummattako viya hi bālaputhujjano yathā vā tathā vā pavattati. Apica ayoniso manasikāroyevettha kāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ ayoniso manasikārassa pana kiṃ kāraṇanti. Sveva puthujjanabhāvo ariyānaṃ adassanādīni vā. Nanu ca puthujjanopi yoniso manasi karotīti. Ko vā evamāha na manasi karotīti. Na pana tattha puthujjanabhāvo kāraṇaṃ , saddhammassavanakalyāṇamittādīni tattha kāraṇāni. Na hi macchamaṃsādīni attano attano pakatiyā sugandhāni, abhisaṅkhārapaccayā pana sugandhānipi honti.
“我过去世是什么?”他是依着种姓、性别和投生处来疑惑:我过去世是刹帝利吗?还是婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家者、出家者、天或人当中的某一种呢?巴利
Kiṃnu kho ahosinti jātiliṅgūpapattiyo nissāya khattiyo nu kho ahosiṃ, brāhmaṇavessasuddagahaṭṭhapabbajitadevamanussānaṃ aññataroti kaṅkhati.
“我过去世是什么样子的呢?”这是依着体貌形态生起疑惑:“我过去世是高的吗?还是矮的、白的、黑的、有量的、无量的……或者其中某一种呢?”不过有些人说,这是依着“有主宰者创造”等见解,从原因方面生起疑惑:“我过去世是由于什么原因而有的呢?”巴利
Kathaṃ nu khoti saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya dīgho nu kho ahosiṃ, rassaodātakaṇhappamāṇikaappamāṇikādīnaṃ aññataroti kaṅkhati. Keci pana issaranimmānādiṃ nissāya kena nu kho kāraṇena ahosinti hetuto kaṅkhatīti vadanti.
“曾经是什么,后来变成了什么?”这是依靠种姓等,对自己的前世相续产生疑惑:“我曾经是刹帝利,后来变成婆罗门了吗?……曾经是天人,后来变成人了吗?”而在所有这些语句中,“addhāna”都是“时间”的另一种说法。巴利
Kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosinti jātiādīni nissāya khattiyo hutvā nu kho brāhmaṇo ahosiṃ…pe… devo hutvā manussoti attano paramparaṃ kaṅkhati. Sabbattheva pana addhānanti kālādhivacanametaṃ.
我将会存在吗?我不会存在吗?这是依靠常见相和断见相,对未来自己的存在或不存在产生疑惑。这里剩下的部分,和前面所说的一样。巴利
Bhavissāminu kho nanu khoti sassatākārañca ucchedākārañca nissāya anāgate attano vijjamānataṃ avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
“现在或当前这一段”是指:从此刻开始,以结生为起点、以死亡为终点,把一切正在发生的时间都包括进来。“于内疑惑”是指:对自己的诸蕴生起疑惑。“我存在吗?”是对自己是否存在产生怀疑。那么,这合理吗?在这里,合理还是不合理,有什么可想的呢?不过,这里也举出这样一个事例:据说,小母的儿子是秃头,大母的儿子不是秃头,人们给那个儿子剃了头。他起来后心想:“我难道是小母的儿子吗?”就这样,生起了“我存在吗?”的疑惑。巴利
Etarahi vā paccuppannamaddhānanti idāni vā paṭisandhiṃ ādiṃ katvā cutipariyantaṃ sabbampi vattamānakālaṃ gahetvā. Ajjhattaṃ kathaṃkathī hotīti attano khandhesu vicikiccho hoti. Ahaṃ nu khosmīti attano atthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Yuttaṃ panetanti? Yuttaṃ ayuttanti kā ettha cintā. Apicettha idaṃ vatthumpi udāharanti. Cūḷamātāya kira putto muṇḍo, mahāmātāya putto amuṇḍo, taṃ puttaṃ muṇḍesuṃ. So uṭṭhāya ahaṃ nu kho cūḷamātāya puttoti cintesi. Evaṃ ahaṃ nu khosmīti kaṅkhā hoti.
“我难道不存在吗?”——这是对自己的不存在产生怀疑。关于这一点,还有一个事例:据说有个人在捕鱼时,因为在水里站得太久,大腿都变凉了,他误把自己的大腿当成鱼,就拍打它。另一个人在看守坟场旁边的田地时,因为害怕而蜷缩着睡着了。他醒来后,把自己的两个膝盖当成两个夜叉,就拍打它们。像这样,就生起了“我难道不存在吗?”的怀疑。巴利
No nu khosmīti attano natthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Tatrāpi idaṃ vatthu – eko kira macche gaṇhanto udake ciraṭṭhānena sītibhūtaṃ attano ūruṃ macchoti cintetvā pahari. Aparo susānapasse khettaṃ rakkhanto bhīto saṅkuṭito sayi. So paṭibujjhitvā attano jaṇṇukāni dve yakkhāti cintetvā pahari. Evaṃ no nu khosmīti kaṅkhati.
“我到底是什么?”即使身为刹帝利,也会对自己的刹帝利身份产生怀疑。其余种姓也是如此。不过,身为天人却不知道自己是天人的情况,并不存在。但天人也会以“我是有色的吗?还是无色的呢?”这样的方式产生怀疑。如果有人问:刹帝利等为什么不知道自己的身份呢?因为他们无法亲自看见自己在各个家族中的投生。再者,在家人也会把布偶等误认为出家人;出家人也会以“我的业是不是坏了?”这样的方式,把自己误认为在家人。而人们也会像国王一样,对自己生起天人的想。巴利
Kiṃ nu khosmīti khattiyova samāno attano khattiyabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Esa nayo sesesu. Devo pana samāno devabhāvaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi. Sopi pana ‘‘ahaṃ rūpī nu kho arūpī nu kho’’tiādinā nayena kaṅkhati. Khattiyādayo kasmā na jānantīti ce. Apaccakkhā tesaṃ tattha tattha kule uppatti. Gahaṭṭhāpi ca potthalikādayo pabbajitasaññino. Pabbajitāpi ‘‘kuppaṃ nu kho me kamma’’ntiādinā nayena gahaṭṭhasaññino. Manussāpi ca rājāno viya attani devasaññino honti.
“我是怎样的?”这一句,还是按照前面所说的方式来理解。不过这里要说明的是:有人执取自身内部有一个叫做“命者”的东西,然后依着它的形状产生疑惑:“我是长的吗?还是短的、四角的、六角的、八角的、十六角的等等,属于其中某一种形态呢?”应当知道,他就是这样在疑惑。然而,对于当下身体的形状,没有人会不知道。巴利
Kathaṃ nu khosmīti vuttanayameva. Kevalañcettha abbhantare jīvo nāma atthīti gahetvā tassa saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya dīgho nu khosmi, rassacaturaṃsachaḷaṃsaaṭṭhaṃsasoḷasaṃsādīnaṃ aññatarappakāroti kaṅkhanto kathaṃ nu khosmīti kaṅkhatīti veditabbo. Sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ pana paccuppannaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi.
他疑惑的是:这个存在从哪里来,又将往哪里去?巴利
Kutoāgato, so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatīti attabhāvassa āgatigatiṭṭhānaṃ kaṅkhati.
19 19. 这样显示了十六种疑之后,现在为了显示以这个疑为开头的见漏,开始了这段开示。在显示它时,说了“对于那样不如理作意的他,六种见……”等。其中,应当这样理解:对于那个人,当疑这样生起时,对于这样不如理作意的他,由于那有疑者的不如理作意力量强,六种见中的某一种见便生起。在这些语句中,所有地方的“或”字都是选择的意思,说的是“这样或那样的见生起”。在这里,“有我”是常见,它在一切时间中都执取自我的存在。“是真、是实”:从真实与坚固的角度,认为“这是真实的”,执其为真实而牢固。而“无我”则是断见,因为执取存在的有情在处处坏灭。或者,前两种见由于执取在过去、现在、未来三时中存在,是常见;执取仅现在存在,是断见。后两种见由于执取在过去、未来不存在,如同执取“灰烬之供”者的见一样,是断见。执取仅在过去不存在,则是无因生起者的常见。巴利
19. Evaṃ soḷasappabhedaṃ vicikicchaṃ dassetvā idāni yaṃ iminā vicikicchāsīsena diṭṭhāsavaṃ dassetuṃ ayaṃ desanā āraddhā. Taṃ dassento tassa evaṃ ayoniso manasikaroto channaṃ diṭṭhīnantiādimāha. Tattha tassa puggalassa yathā ayaṃ vicikicchā uppajjati, evaṃ ayoniso manasikaroto tasseva savicikicchassa ayoniso manasikārassa thāmagatattā channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha sabbapadesu vāsaddo vikappattho, evaṃ vā evaṃ vā diṭṭhi uppajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthi me attāti cettha sassatadiṭṭhi sabbakālesu attano atthitaṃ gaṇhāti. Saccato thetatoti bhūtato ca thirato ca, ‘‘idaṃ sacca’’nti bhūtato suṭṭhu daḷhabhāvenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Natthi me attāti ayaṃ pana ucchedadiṭṭhi, sato sattassa tattha tattha vibhavaggahaṇato. Atha vā purimāpi tīsu kālesu atthīti gahaṇato sassatadiṭṭhi, paccuppannameva atthīti gaṇhanto ucchedadiṭṭhi. Pacchimāpi atītānāgatesu natthīti gahaṇato bhasmantāhutiyoti gahitadiṭṭhikānaṃ viya, ucchedadiṭṭhi. Atīte eva natthīti gaṇhanto adhiccasamuppattikasseva sassatadiṭṭhi.
“我以自己来了知自己”:这是以想蕴为代表,把诸蕴执取为我,再通过想去了知其余诸蕴,于是就变成“我以这个自己来了知这个自己”。
“我以自己来了知非我”:这是只把想蕴执取为我,把其余四蕴执取为非我,通过想去了知它们,于是就生起这种见。
“我以非我来了知我”:这是把想蕴执取为非我,把其余四蕴执取为我,通过想去了知它们,于是就生起这种见。
所有这些,都只是常见或断见。巴利
Attanāva attānaṃ sañjānāmīti saññākkhandhasīsena khandhe attāti gahetvā saññāya avasesakkhandhe sañjānato iminā attanā imaṃ attānaṃ sañjānāmīti hoti. Attanāva anattānanti saññākkhandhaṃyeva attāti gahetvā, itare cattāropi anattāti gahetvā saññāya tesaṃ jānato evaṃ hoti . Anattanāva attānanti saññākkhandhaṃ anattāti. Itare cattāro attāti gahetvā saññāya tesaṃ jānato evaṃ hoti, sabbāpi sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyova.
“能说”“能受”这一类说法,其实都是对常见(认为有恒常自我)的执取表现。其中,“能说”就是说话者,也就是造作语业的人。“能受”就是感受者,也就是能知道、能体验的人。他感受什么呢?在各种地方感受善业和恶业的果报。“在各种地方”就是在各种生、趣、住、住处中,或者在各种所缘对象中。“常”就是没有生起和坏灭。“恒”就是坚固、具有坚实。“常住”就是一切时都存在。“不变易之法”就是不会舍弃自己本性的法,就像迦罗甘塔迦鸟不会变成其他。“同于常住者”是指月亮、太阳、大海、大地、山等,依世间通行的说法被称为常住。“同于常住者”就是与常住者们相同。只要那些常住者住立,它就那样住立;这样执取的人就有这样的见解。巴利
Vado vedeyyotiādayo pana sassatadiṭṭhiyā eva abhinivesākārā. Tattha vadatīti vado, vacīkammassa kārakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vedayatīti vedeyyo, jānāti anubhavati cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ vedetīti, tatra tatra kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Tatra tatrāti tesu tesu yonigatiṭṭhitinivāsanikāyesu ārammaṇesu vā. Niccoti uppādavayarahito. Dhuvoti thiro sārabhūto. Sassatoti sabbakāliko. Avipariṇāmadhammoti attano pakatibhāvaṃ avijahanadhammo, kakaṇṭako viya nānappakārataṃ nāpajjati. Sassatisamanti candasūriyasamuddamahāpathavīpabbatā lokavohārena sassatiyoti vuccanti. Sassatīhi samaṃ sassatisamaṃ. Yāva sassatiyo tiṭṭhanti, tāva tatheva ṭhassatīti gaṇhato evaṃdiṭṭhi hoti.
比丘们,在“这称为恶见”等语句中,“这”是指向接下来要说的内容的直接指示。这里是联系恶见而说“这”,不是联系一般的见而说。在此处,见本身就是恶见,就像粪秽一样;或者说,这个见解落入种种见之中,因为包含在六十二见之内,所以叫恶见;或者说,由见而趣向,所以叫恶见。像“有我”这样的说法,仅仅是见的运作而已,这里并没有说存在任何真实的自我或恒常的东西。而这种见,因为难以走出,所以叫稠林;因为难以越过、令人恐惧,所以叫旷野,就像饥荒旷野、野兽旷野等一样。因为它与正见相违、相逆,所以叫歪曲。因为它有时执取常见、有时执取断见,所以叫异样的颤动,即种种摆动。因为它有束缚的作用,所以叫结。因此说“见稠林……见结”。现在为了显示它束缚的作用,就说“与见结相应”等话。这段话的简要含义是:被这个见结所束缚的凡夫,不能从生等这些状态中解脱。何必多说呢?就是不能从整个轮回的苦中解脱。巴利
Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, diṭṭhigatantiādīsu. Idanti idāni vattabbassa paccakkhanidassanaṃ. Diṭṭhigatasambandhena ca idanti vuttaṃ, na diṭṭhisambandhena. Ettha ca diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigataṃ, gūthagataṃ viya. Diṭṭhīsu vā gatamidaṃ dassanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiantogadhattātipi diṭṭhigataṃ. Diṭṭhiyā vā gataṃ diṭṭhigataṃ. Idañhi atthi me attātiādi diṭṭhiyā gamanamattameva, natthettha attā vā nicco vā kocīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sā cāyaṃ diṭṭhi dunniggamanaṭṭhena gahanaṃ. Duratikkamaṭṭhena sappaṭibhayaṭṭhena ca kantāro, dubbhikkhakantāravāḷakantārādayo viya. Sammādiṭṭhiyā vinivijjhanaṭṭhena vilomanaṭṭhena vā visūkaṃ. Kadāci sassatassa, kadāci ucchedassa gahaṇato virūpaṃ phanditanti vipphanditaṃ. Bandhanaṭṭhena saṃyojanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhigahanaṃ…pe… diṭṭhisaṃyojana’’nti. Idānissa tameva bandhanatthaṃ dassento diṭṭhisaṃyojanasaṃyuttotiādimāha. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepattho. Iminā diṭṭhisaṃyojanena saṃyutto puthujjano etehi jātiādīhi na parimuccatīti. Kiṃ vā bahunā, sakalavaṭṭadukkhatopi na muccatīti.
20 已经这样说明了六种见漏之后,由于戒禁取在讲欲漏等的时候就已经被显示出来了——那些被无明控制、在此教法之外执取戒禁的沙门婆罗门,是为了追求欲乐、来世之乐以及来世的清净——所以就不再单独显示它;又因为戒禁取已经被包含在见漏的执取里,所以也不单独显示。现在,为了说明那个通过见来断除诸漏的人,并说明那些漏的断除,先说明先前不如理作意的凡夫是怎样生起这些漏的,再说明与之相反的人是怎样断除的,因此开示说:“诸比丘,多闻……”等等。巴利
20. Evaṃ chappabhedaṃ diṭṭhāsavaṃ dassetvā yasmā sīlabbataparāmāso kāmāsavādivacaneneva dassito hoti. Kāmasukhatthañhi bhavasukhabhavavisuddhiatthañca avijjāya abhibhūtā ito bahiddhā samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlabbatāni parāmasanti, tasmā taṃ adassetvā diṭṭhiggahaṇena vā tassa gahitattāpi taṃ adassetvāva idāni yo puggalo dassanā pahātabbe āsave pajahati, taṃ dassetvā tesaṃ āsavānaṃ pahānaṃ dassetuṃ pubbe vā ayoniso manasikaroto puthujjanassa tesaṃ uppattiṃ dassetvā idāni tabbiparītassa pahānaṃ dassetuṃ sutavā ca kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha.
它的含义,从“这是苦”这一句出现之前,直到这里,都应按照前面所说的方式,以及从所说的反面来理解。从反面来说,应当这样理解:与对圣法不精通、未受调伏者相反,这就是“多闻圣弟子精通圣法、于圣法中善加调伏”。再者,从获得观智开始,直到种姓智为止,都应依照与此相应的含义,理解此人是圣弟子。巴利
Tassattho, yāva ‘‘so idaṃ dukkha’’nti āgacchati, tāva heṭṭhā vuttanayena ca vuttapaccanīkato ca veditabbo. Paccanīkato ca sabbākārena ariyadhammassa akovidāvinītapaccanīkato ayaṃ ‘‘sutavā ariyasāvako ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto’’ti veditabbo. Apica kho sikhāpattavipassanato pabhuti yāva gotrabhu, tāva tadanurūpena atthena ayaṃ ariyasāvakoti veditabbo.
21 对于“他如理作意‘这是苦’”等句,这里要说明其含义:那位以四谛为修行所缘的圣弟子,了知除渴爱外的三界诸蕴为苦,渴爱为苦集,二者不转起为灭,导向灭的道为道,如此先前已在老师身边学好了四谛的修行方法,后来某个时候登上了观之道,当他这样修行时,便对三有中的诸蕴如理作意“这是苦”——以正确的方法和途径去关注它、观察它。在这里,从开始一直到入流道为止,观其实都是用“作意”这个词来表达的。而那个能生起此苦、显现此苦的渴爱,他如理作意“这是集”。又因为苦与集到达这个阶段后就灭尽、不再生起,所以对于那叫做涅槃的,他如理作意“这是苦灭”。对于能导向灭的八支圣道,他如理作意“这是趣向苦灭之道”——以正确的方法和途径去关注它、观察它。巴利
21. ‘‘So idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādīsu pana ayaṃ atthavibhāvanā, so catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko ariyasāvako taṇhāvajjā tebhūmakā khandhā dukkhaṃ, taṇhā dukkhasamudayo, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodho, nirodhasampāpako maggoti evaṃ pubbeva ācariyasantike uggahitacatusaccakammaṭṭhāno aparena samayena vipassanāmaggaṃ samāruḷho samāno te tebhūmake khandhe idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karoti, upāyena pathena samannāharati ceva vipassati ca. Ettha hi yāva sotāpattimaggo, tāva manasikārasīseneva vipassanā vuttā. Yā panāyaṃ tasseva dukkhassa samuṭṭhāpikā pabhāvikā taṇhā, ayaṃ samudayoti yoniso manasi karoti. Yasmā pana dukkhañca samudayo ca idaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhanti nappavattanti, tasmā yadidaṃ nibbānaṃ nāma, ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti yoniso manasi karoti. Nirodhasampāpakaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yoniso manasi karoti, upāyena pathena samannāharati ceva vipassati ca.
这里的办法是:执著只存在于轮回中,在出离轮回时则没有。因此,他按照“此身中有地界、水界……”这样的方式,把握自身相续中的四大种以及随四大种而来的所造色,确定“这是色蕴”。当他在这样确定时,以那些心与心所法为所缘而生起,便确定“这些是四种无色蕴”。然后确定“这五蕴是苦”。如果再简要地说,它们就只有名和色两部分。这名色是依因缘而生的,他便确定它的因和缘——也就是无明、有、渴爱、业、食等因缘。接着,确定了那些缘法和缘所生法的各自自相之后,他推求“这些法原本不存在而后生起”,从而安立无常相;因为被生灭逼迫,所以是苦,安立苦相;因为不能自主,所以是无我,安立无我相。这样安立了三相之后,依次修观,便证得入流道。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ upāyo, abhiniveso nāma vaṭṭe hoti, vivaṭṭe natthi. Tasmā ‘‘ayaṃ atthi imasmiṃ kāye pathavīdhātu, āpodhātū’’tiādinā nayena sakasantatiyaṃ cattāri bhūtāni tadanusārena upādārūpāni ca pariggahetvā ayaṃ rūpakkhandhoti vavatthapeti. Taṃ vavatthāpayato uppanne tadārammaṇe cittacetasike dhamme ime cattāro arūpakkhandhāti vavatthapeti. Tato ime pañcakkhandhā dukkhanti vavatthapeti. Te pana saṅkhepato nāmañca rūpañcāti dve bhāgāyeva honti. Idañca nāmarūpaṃ sahetu sappaccayaṃ uppajjati. Tassa ayaṃ hetu ayaṃ paccayoti avijjābhavataṇhākammāhārādike hetupaccaye vavatthapeti. Tato tesaṃ paccayānañca paccayuppannadhammānañca yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ vavatthapetvā ime dhammā ahutvā hontīti aniccalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti, udayabbayapīḷitattā dukkhāti dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti. Avasavattanato anattāti anattalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti. Evaṃ tīṇi lakkhaṇāni āropetvā paṭipāṭiyā vipassanaṃ pavattento sotāpattimaggaṃ pāpuṇāti.
就在那一刹那,他以一次通达就通达了四谛,以一次现观就现观了四谛。苦是通过遍知的通达而通达的,集是通过断除的通达而通达的,灭是通过作证的通达而通达的,道是通过修习的通达而通达的。他又以遍知的现观来现观苦……乃至以修习的现观来现观道,但并不是用各不相同的智。实际上,他就是用同一个智,以涅槃为所缘,对其余三谛按各自的作用来通达和现观。因为在那时,他并不会这样想:“我在遍知苦”……乃至“我在修道”。但是,当那个智以涅槃为所缘、以通达的方式作证灭的时候,它同时也在完成遍知苦的作用、断除集的作用和修习道的作用。他这样以善巧方式如理作意时,就断除了三种结:以二十种事为基础的有身见,以八种事为基础的疑,以及执取“以戒清净、以禁戒清净”的戒禁取。其中,在四种漏里,有身见和戒禁取被归入见漏,所以它们既是漏也是结。疑只是结,不是漏,但因为被包含在“见所断漏”里面,所以也称它为漏。巴利
Tasmiṃ khaṇe cattāri saccāni ekapaṭivedheneva paṭivijjhati, ekābhisamayena abhisameti. Dukkhaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, samudayaṃ pahānapaṭivedhena, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhena, maggaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedhena. Dukkhañca pariññābhisamayena abhisameti…pe… maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti, no ca kho aññamaññena ñāṇena. Ekañāṇeneva hi esa nirodhaṃ ārammaṇato, sesāni kiccato paṭivijjhati ceva abhisameti ca. Na hissa tasmiṃ samaye evaṃ hoti – ‘‘ahaṃ dukkhaṃ parijānāmī’’ti vā…pe… ‘‘maggaṃ bhāvemī’’ti vā. Apica khvassa ārammaṇaṃ katvā paṭivedhavasena nirodhaṃ sacchikaroto evaṃ taṃ ñāṇaṃ dukkhapariññākiccampi samudayapahānakiccampi maggabhāvanākiccampi karotiyeva. Tassevaṃ upāyena yoniso manasikaroto tīṇi saṃyojanāni pahīyanti, vīsativatthukā sakkāyadiṭṭhi, aṭṭhavatthukā vicikicchā, ‘‘sīlena suddhi vatena suddhī’’ti sīlabbatānaṃ parāmasanato sīlabbataparāmāsoti. Tattha catūsu āsavesu sakkāyadiṭṭhisīlabbataparāmāsā diṭṭhāsavena saṅgahitattā āsavā ceva saṃyojanā ca. Vicikicchā saṃyojanameva, na āsavo . ‘‘Dassanā pahātabbā āsavā’’ti ettha pariyāpannattā pana āsavāti.
这些被称为……应当断除。这里是在说明:有身见等这些法,名为“见所断的漏”。或者说,当六种见中的任何一种见生起时,就是按它自身的样貌来分别有身见,因此才说“诸比丘,这些被称为”。这些漏在断除时,是与同生、同断除范畴的法一起被断除的。因为断除见漏时,与它同生于四种见相应心中的欲漏和无明漏也被断除。至于同属断除范畴的,则是在四种与见不相应的心中,为了求得龙、金翅鸟等成就而生起的有漏,以及与之相应的无明漏;在两种忧心中,能引发杀生等的无明漏;同样,与疑心相应的无明漏——这样一来,其余三种漏也全部被断除。所以这里用了复数来表达,应当这样理解其中的含义。这就是古代师长的意趣。巴利
‘‘Ime vuccanti…pe… pahātabbā’’ti ime sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo dassanā pahātabbā nāma āsavāti dassento āha. Atha vā yā ayaṃ channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjatīti evaṃ sarūpeneva sakkāyadiṭṭhi vibhattā. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ime vuccanti, bhikkhave’’ti. Sā ca yasmā sahajātapahānekaṭṭhehi saddhiṃ pahīyati. Diṭṭhāsave hi pahīyamāne taṃsahajāto catūsu diṭṭhisampayuttacittesu kāmāsavopi avijjāsavopi pahīyati . Pahānekaṭṭho pana catūsu diṭṭhivippayuttesu nāgasupaṇṇādisamiddhipatthanāvasena uppajjamāno bhavāsavo. Teneva sampayutto avijjāsavopi, dvīsu domanassacittesu pāṇātipātādinibbattako avijjāsavopi, tathā vicikicchācittasampayutto avijjāsavopīti evaṃ sabbathāpi avasesā tayopi āsavā pahīyanti. Tasmā bahuvacananiddeso katoti evamettha attho veditabbo. Esa porāṇānaṃ adhippāyo.
“见所断”——这里的“见”指的是入流道,意思是应当由它来断除。为什么入流道叫作“见”?因为它是第一次见到涅槃。那么种姓智不是更先见到吗?不是的,它虽然见到了,却没有完成应当做的事,因为它还没有断除诸结,所以不能说它“见”。就像有个村民,虽然见到了国王,但还没有献上礼物、事情还没有办成,于是说“我今天还没见到国王”——这里就可以用这个例子来说明。巴利
Dassanā pahātabbāti dassanaṃ nāma sotāpattimaggo, tena pahātabbāti attho. Kasmā sotāpattimaggo dassanaṃ? Paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato. Nanu gotrabhu paṭhamataraṃ passatīti? No na passati. Disvā kattabbakiccaṃ pana na karoti saṃyojanānaṃ appahānato. Tasmā passatīti na vattabbo. Yattha katthaci rājānaṃ disvāpi paṇṇākāraṃ datvā kiccanipphattiyā adiṭṭhattā ‘‘ajjāpi rājānaṃ na passāmī’’ti vadanto gāmavāsī puriso cettha nidassanaṃ.
关于应当通过防护而断除的漏的解说巴利
Saṃvarāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
22 22. 像这样用“见”说明了应当断除的漏之后,现在为了说明紧接着列出的、应当通过“防护”来断除的漏,世尊说:“比丘们,哪些漏应当通过防护来断除呢?”应当知道,后面各处都是这样衔接的。从这以下,我们只解释其中的含义。巴利
22. Evaṃ dassanena pahātabbe āsave dassetvā idāni tadanantaruddiṭṭhe saṃvarā pahātabbe dassetuṃ, katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā saṃvarā pahātabbāti āha. Evaṃ sabbattha sambandho veditabbo. Ito parañhi atthamattameva vaṇṇayissāma.
难道不是靠“见”和“修”这两种方式就能断尽诸漏,并没有什么不可断的漏吗?那为什么还要另外开示由防护等所断的漏呢?在预备阶段被防护等镇伏的诸漏,要经由四种道才能彻底断除。因此,为了说明在这些道的预备阶段,以这五种方式镇伏断除的情形,才这样开示。所以,前面所说的第一种就是见道;现在将以“修习”之名来说其余三种道,应当理解此(防护等预备行)就是所有这些道(含见道与三修道)的预备阶段修行。巴利
Nanu ca dassanena bhāvanāyāti imehi dvīhi appahātabbo āsavo nāma natthi, atha kasmā visuṃ saṃvarādīhi pahātabbe dassetīti. Saṃvarādīhi pubbabhāge vikkhambhitā āsavā catūhi maggehi samugghātaṃ gacchanti, tasmā tesaṃ maggānaṃ pubbabhāge imehi pañcahākārehi vikkhambhanappahānaṃ dassento evamāha. Tasmā yo cāyaṃ vutto paṭhamo dassanamaggoyeva, idāni bhāvanānāmena vuccissanti tayo maggā, tesaṃ sabbesampi ayaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadāti veditabbā.
在这里,“于此”指的是在这套教法当中。“审察”就是经过审察。这里面的“saṅkhā”这个词,可以在智、部分、施设、计算这几种意思里看到。比如在“审察之后受用一件”这类句子里,它出现在“智”的意思上;在“虚妄分别之想侵蚀”这类句子里,它出现在“部分”的意思上;在“那些法的数、名称”这类句子里,它出现在“施设”的意思上;在“不容易计算”这类句子里,它出现在“计算”的意思上。但在这里,应该把它理解为“智”。巴利
Tattha idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Paṭisaṅkhāti paṭisaṅkhāya. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhāsaddo ñāṇakoṭṭhāsapaññattigaṇanāsu dissati. ‘‘Saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.168) hi ñāṇe dissati. ‘‘Papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācarantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.201) koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅkhā samaññā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1313) paññattiyaṃ. ‘‘Na sukaraṃ saṅkhātu’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.128) gaṇanāyaṃ. Idha pana ñāṇe daṭṭhabbo.
“如理审察”的意思是:通过方法、通过途径去审察,也就是了知、观察。在这里,应当知道,对不防护(根门)所带来的过患加以审察,就是如理审察。而这种审察应当依据《燃烧经》的方式来了知,比如:“诸比丘,宁愿眼根被烧红、燃烧、炽燃、火舌通红的铁棒所触碰,也绝不在眼所识的色上以随形好而取相。”等等。“以眼根律仪防护而住”:这里,眼本身就是根,所以叫眼根;因为能防护,所以叫律仪,也就是遮止、关闭的意思。这是念的同义词。在眼根上的防护,就叫眼根律仪。就像“渡口的乌鸦”“洞穴里的乌龟”“山林中的水牛”等譬喻所说的那样。巴利
Paṭisaṅkhā yonisoti hi upāyena pathena paṭisaṅkhāya ñatvā paccavekkhitvāti attho. Ettha ca asaṃvare ādīnavapaṭisaṅkhā yoniso paṭisaṅkhāti veditabbā. Sā cāyaṃ ‘‘varaṃ, bhikkhave, tattāya ayosalākāya ādittāya sampajjalitāya sajotibhūtāya cakkhundriyaṃ sampalimaṭṭhaṃ, na tveva cakkhuviññeyyesu rūpesu anubyañjanaso nimittaggāho’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 4.235) ādittapariyāyanayena veditabbā. Cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatīti ettha cakkhumeva indriyaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ, saṃvaraṇato saṃvaro, pidahanato thakanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cakkhundriye saṃvaro cakkhundriyasaṃvaro. Titthakāko āvāṭakacchapo vanamahiṃsotiādayo viya.
在这里,虽然眼根上并没有律仪或不律仪。因为正念或失念并不是依靠眼净色而生起的。但是,当色所缘进入眼的范围时,有分心两次生起后灭去,接着唯作意界生起,执行转向的作用,然后灭去;之后眼识执行看的作用;接着异熟意界执行领受的作用;然后异熟无因意识界执行推度的作用;再之后唯作无因意识界生起,执行确定的作用,然后灭去。紧接着,速行心就开始速行。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi cakkhundriye saṃvaro vā asaṃvaro vā natthi. Na hi cakkhupasādaṃ nissāya sati vā muṭṭhasaccaṃ vā uppajjati. Apica yadā rūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhussa āpāthaṃ āgacchati, tadā bhavaṅge dvikkhattuṃ uppajjitvā niruddhe kiriyamanodhātu āvajjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā uppajjitvā nirujjhati, tato cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ, tato vipākamanodhātu sampaṭicchanakiccaṃ, tato vipākāhetukamanoviññāṇadhātu santīraṇakiccaṃ, tato kiriyāhetukamanoviññāṇadhātu voṭṭhabbanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā uppajjitvā nirujjhati. Tadanantaraṃ javanaṃ javati.
在这上面,不论是在有分的时候,还是在转向等任何一个阶段,都没有律仪或不律仪。但在速行的刹那,如果生起破戒、失念、无知、不能忍或懈怠,这就是不律仪。即使是这样生起的,它还是被称为“在眼根上的不律仪”。为什么呢?因为它存在的时候,门也没有防护,有分也没有防护,转向等心路过程的心也没有防护。就像什么呢?就像一座城市,四座城门没有关闭,即使城内的房屋、库房、内室等都关得很好,城里的一切财物仍然是没有保护、没有看管的。因为盗贼从城门进来后,想拿什么就拿什么。同样地,在速行中生起破戒等不善法时,由于这个不律仪存在,门也没有防护,有分也没有防护,转向等心路过程的心也没有防护。巴利
Tatthapi neva bhavaṅgasamaye, na āvajjanādīnaṃ aññatarasamaye saṃvaro vā asaṃvaro vā atthi. Javanakkhaṇe pana sace dussīlyaṃ vā muṭṭhasaccaṃ vā aññāṇaṃ vā akkhanti vā kosajjaṃ vā uppajjati, ayaṃ asaṃvaro hoti. Evaṃ hontopi so cakkhundriye asaṃvaroti vuccati. Kasmā? Tasmiñhi sati dvārampi aguttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi āvajjanādīni vīthicittānipi. Yathā kiṃ , yathā nagare catūsu dvāresu asaṃvutesu kiñcāpi anto gharakoṭṭhakagabbhādayo susaṃvutā, tathāpi antonagare sabbaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ arakkhitaṃ agopitameva hoti. Nagaradvārena hi pavisitvā corā yadicchanti, taṃ kareyyuṃ, evameva javane dussīlyādīsu uppannesu, tasmiṃ asaṃvare sati dvārampi aguttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi āvajjanādīni vīthicittānipīti.
当戒等善法在速行中生起时,眼门也得到守护,有分以及转向等心路过程的心也得到守护。这好比什么呢?就像城门紧闭时,即使城内的房屋等没有关闭,城里的一切财物仍然得到妥善守护和周密保护。因为城门关闭了,盗贼就进不来。同样地,当戒等善法在速行中生起时,眼门也得到妥善守护,有分以及转向等心路过程的心也得到妥善守护。因此,即使在速行刹那生起的心,也被说成是“在眼根上防护”。应当知道,这里指的就是念的防护。以眼根律仪防护,就是具足眼根的律仪防护,也就是“具足”的意思。正如在解释“具足巴帝摩卡防护”时说的:“以此巴帝摩卡防护而具足……成就。”把这些合在一起理解,“以眼根律仪防护”的意思就应当这样来领会。巴利
Tasmiṃ pana sīlādīsu uppannesu dvārampi guttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi āvajjanādīni vīthicittānipi. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā nagaradvāresu susaṃvutesu kiñcāpi anto gharādayo asaṃvutā, tathāpi antonagare sabbaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ surakkhitaṃ sugopitameva hoti. Nagaradvāresu hi pihitesu corānaṃ paveso natthi, evameva javane sīlādīsu uppannesu dvārampi suguttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi āvajjanādīni vīthicittānipi. Tasmā javanakkhaṇe uppajjamānopi cakkhundriye saṃvaroti vutto. Idha cāyaṃ satisaṃvaro adhippetoti veditabbo. Cakkhundriyasaṃvarena saṃvuto cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto, upetoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi, pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti imassa vibhaṅge ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti…pe… samannāgato’’ti (vibha. 511) vuttaṃ. Taṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā cakkhundriyasaṃvarena saṃvutoti evamattho veditabbo.
或者也可以这样理解:所谓“防护”,就是守护;而“关闭、遮挡”才是这里要表达的意思。以眼根律仪来防护,就是以眼根律仪守护;也就是把被称为眼根律仪的“正念门扇”安在眼门那里,就像在房门上关上门扇一样,起到守护、关闭、遮挡的作用。这里这个解释更加贴切。因为在“对不守护眼根律仪而住的人”和“对守护而住的人”这些语句中,看到的正是这个意思。巴利
Atha vā saṃvarīti saṃvuto, thakesi pidahīti vuttaṃ hoti. Cakkhundriye saṃvarasaṃvuto cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto, cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaññitaṃ satikavāṭaṃ cakkhudvāre, gharadvāre kavāṭaṃ viya saṃvari thakesi pidahīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayameva cettha attho sundarataro. Tathā hi ‘‘cakkhundriyasaṃvaraṃ asaṃvutassa viharato saṃvutassa viharato’’ti etesu padesu ayameva attho dissati.
“住”的意思是:这样以眼根律仪防护而住,无论以哪种威仪方式安住。在“yañhissā”等语句中,应当这样理解其含义:这位比丘虽具有眼根律仪,却未加守护、未加遮止而安住。另一种解释是,ye 这个音被替换成 yaṃ,hi 只是填补音节的虚词,意思是“他有”。巴利
Viharatīti evaṃ cakkhundriyasaṃvarasaṃvuto yena kenaci iriyāpathavihārena viharati. Yañhissātiādimhi yaṃ cakkhundriyasaṃvaraṃ assa bhikkhuno asaṃvutassa athaketvā apidahitvā viharantassāti evamattho veditabbo. Atha vā, ye-kārassa yanti ādeso. Hikāro ca padapūraṇo, ye assāti attho.
“会生起”是指“将会产生”。漏、损害热恼,指的是四种漏,以及其他能造成损害的热恼——烦恼热恼和果报热恼。因为,当眼门出现可爱所缘时,若以贪著欲乐滋味的方式去享受、欢喜,欲漏就会生起;若想着“我在未来的善趣中也能得到这样的东西”,以希求再有而享受,有漏就会生起;若执取“这是有情”或“这是属于有情的”,见漏就会生起;与这一切同时生起的无知,就是无明漏。这四种漏就这样生起。与这些漏相应的其他烦恼,就是损害热恼;或者,这些烦恼将来的果报,也是损害热恼。因为那些不防护而安住的人,确实会生起这些,所以说“会生起”。巴利
Uppajjeyyunti nibbatteyyuṃ. Āsavā vighātapariḷāhāti cattāro āsavā ca aññe ca vighātakarā kilesapariḷāhā vipākapariḷāhā ca. Cakkhudvāre hi iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ āpāthagataṃ kāmassādavasena assādayato abhinandato kāmāsavo uppajjati, īdisaṃ aññasmimpi sugatibhave labhissāmīti bhavapatthanāya assādayato bhavāsavo uppajjati, sattoti vā sattassāti vā gaṇhantassa diṭṭhāsavo uppajjati, sabbeheva sahajātaṃ aññāṇaṃ avijjāsavoti cattāro āsavā uppajjanti. Tehi sampayuttā apare kilesā vighātapariḷāhā, āyatiṃ vā tesaṃ vipākā. Tepi hi asaṃvutasseva viharato uppajjeyyunti vuccanti.
evaṃsa te的意思是“这样,它们对于他”。这里说的是:只有通过这种办法,这些漏才不会生起,而不是通过别的途径。这个道理也适用于“如理省思、以耳根防护而防护”等说法。巴利
Evaṃsa teti evaṃ assa te. Evaṃ etena upāyena na honti, no aññathāti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo paṭisaṅkhā yoniso sotindriyasaṃvarasaṃvutotiādīsu.
比丘们,这些就叫作“应当通过防护来断除的漏”。意思是:在六个门头,每一处各有四种,总共二十四种漏,都应当通过防护来断除。在这里要明白,一切处所说的“防护”,指的就是念的防护。巴利
Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā saṃvarā pahātabbāti ime chasu dvāresu cattāro cattāro katvā catuvīsati āsavā saṃvarena pahātabbāti vuccanti. Sabbattheva cettha satisaṃvaro eva saṃvaroti veditabbo.
关于“应当通过受用而断除的漏”的解说巴利
Paṭisevanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
23 关于“如理省思衣服”等段落中应当说明的内容,全部都已经在《清净道论》的“戒论”里讲过了。“若他有……者”的意思是,在衣服、团食等资具当中,他有某一样。“不作为受用”的意思是,像这样如理地不去耽着受用。其余部分和前面所说的一样。不过在这里要特别知道:对于还没得到衣服等资具就心生希求的人,或者对已经得到的资具产生贪着、沉溺其中的人,应当知道这就是欲漏的生起。同样,心里想着“我在别的殊胜存在中、在善趣存在中也将得到这些”,因为对存在的渴求而耽溺其中,应当知道这是有漏的生起;当一个人执取“我得到”“我没得到”,或者“这是我的”这种自我认知时,应当知道这是见漏的生起。然而,所有这些漏都与同时生起的无明漏相伴。这四种漏的生起,以及它们带来的果报热恼,也可以从产生新受来了解。巴利
23.Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvarantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge sīlakathāyaṃ vuttameva. Yañhissāti yaṃ cīvarapiṇḍapātādīsu vā aññataraṃ assa. Appaṭisevatoti evaṃ yoniso appaṭisevantassa. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalaṃ panidha aladdhaṃ cīvarādiṃ patthayato laddhaṃ vā assādayato kāmāsavassa uppatti veditabbā. Īdisaṃ aññasmimpi sampattibhave sugatibhave labhissāmīti bhavapatthanāya assādayato bhavāsavassa, ahaṃ labhāmi na labhāmīti vā mayhaṃ vā idanti attasaññaṃ adhiṭṭhahato diṭṭhāsavassa uppatti veditabbā. Sabbeheva pana sahajāto avijjāsavoti evaṃ catunnaṃ āsavānaṃ uppatti vipākapariḷāhā ca navavedanuppādanatopi veditabbā.
比丘们,这些就叫作应当通过受用而断除的漏。意思是:在每一种资具上各有四种漏,总共就是十六种漏;应当通过名为“智防护”的省察受用,来断除这些漏,所以这样说。巴利
Imevuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbāti ime ekamekasmiṃ paccaye cattāro cattāro katvā soḷasa āsavā iminā ñāṇasaṃvarasaṅkhātena paccavekkhaṇapaṭisevanena pahātabbāti vuccanti.
关于“应当通过忍耐来断除的漏”的解释巴利
Adhivāsanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
24 他如理省思之后,能堪忍寒冷。意思是:他借助适当的方法和途径去观察思惟之后,能够忍受寒冷,对寒冷能忍耐、能承受,不像无勇之人那样,稍微遇到一点寒冷就动摇、颤抖,放弃自己的业处。而且,应该像罗摩沙那迦长老那样,即使被极大的寒冷侵袭,也不动摇、不颤抖,只是一心作意业处。据说,长老住在支提山的毕扬古山洞精勤殿时,正值冬季降雪,他省思着世界中间地狱的苦,始终不舍弃业处,在露天中度过了一整夜。对炎热等情况,也应当以同样的方式理解其含义。巴利
24.Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso khamo hoti sītassāti upāyena pathena paccavekkhitvā khamo hoti sītassa sītaṃ khamati sahati, na avīrapuriso viya appamattakenapi sītena calati kampati kammaṭṭhānaṃ vijahati. Apica kho lomasanāgatthero viya anappakenāpi sītena phuṭṭho na calati na kampati, kammaṭṭhānameva manasi karoti. Thero kira cetiyapabbate piyaṅguguhāyaṃ padhānaghare viharanto antaraṭṭhake himapātasamaye lokantarikaniraye paccavekkhitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ avijahantova abbhokāse vītināmesi. Evaṃ uṇhādīsupi atthayojanā veditabbā.
其实,只要一位比丘能像这位长老一样,连极强烈的炎热都能忍受,就可以认定他是“能堪忍热”的人。据说,这位长老在夏天午饭后,坐在外面的经行处。当他专注作意业处时,汗水从腋下流出来。这时,他的弟子对他说:“尊者,请坐到这里吧,这里凉快。”长老回答:“贤友,我正是因为害怕炎热,才坐在这里的。”他省思无间大地狱之后,仍然照旧坐着。这里所说的“热”,应当理解为火热。不过,这段事迹是依据太阳晒热的情形来说的。巴利
Kevalañhi yo bhikkhu adhimattampi uṇhaṃ sahati sveva thero viya, ayaṃ ‘‘khamo uṇhassā’’ti veditabbo. Thero kira gimhasamaye pacchābhattaṃ bahicaṅkame nisīdi. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaronto sedāpissa kacchehi muccanti. Atha naṃ antevāsiko āha ‘‘idha, bhante, nisīdatha, sītalo okāso’’ti. Thero ‘‘uṇhabhayenevamhi āvuso idha nisinno’’ti avīcimahānirayaṃ paccavekkhitvā nisīdiyeva. Uṇhanti cettha aggisantāpova veditabbo. Sūriyasantāpavasena panetaṃ vatthu vuttaṃ.
如果有人两三次得不到饭或水,他回顾自己在无始轮回中曾投生到饿鬼道,心里依然不动摇,绝不放弃业处。即使被强烈的虻、蚊、风、热所触,他回顾自己曾投生为畜生道,心里依然不动摇,绝不放弃业处。即使被蛇类碰到,他回顾自己在无始轮回中曾多次在狮子、老虎等猛兽口中翻转的往事,心里依然不动摇,绝不放弃业处,就像精勤长老那样。这就应当理解为“能堪忍饥饿……乃至……蛇类的接触”。巴利
Yo ca dve tayo vāre bhattaṃ vā pānīyaṃ vā alabhamānopi anamatagge saṃsāre attano pettivisayūpapattiṃ paccavekkhitvā avedhento kammaṭṭhānaṃ na vijahatiyeva. Adhimattehi ḍaṃsamakasavātātapasamphassehi phuṭṭho cāpi tiracchānūpapattiṃ paccavekkhitvā avedhento kammaṭṭhānaṃ na vijahatiyeva. Sarīsapasamphassena phuṭṭho cāpi anamatagge saṃsāre sīhabyagghādimukhesu anekavāraṃ parivattitapubbabhāvaṃ paccavekkhitvā avedhento kammaṭṭhānaṃ na vijahatiyeva padhāniyatthero viya. Ayaṃ ‘‘khamo jighacchāya…pe… sarīsapasamphassāna’’nti veditabbo.
据说,长老在破布衣精舍的翅子树精进堂里听讲圣种法门时,被一条剧毒的蛇咬了。长老虽然知道被咬,却仍以清净的信心坐着,一心只是听法。毒性的发作变得僵滞。长老从具足戒开始,逐一省察自己的戒,生起“我的戒清净”的喜悦。喜悦一生起,毒就消退,渗入大地。长老就在那里得到心一境性,增长观慧,证得阿罗汉果。巴利
Theraṃ kira khaṇḍacelavihāre kaṇikārapadhāniyaghare ariyavaṃsaṃ suṇantaṃ ghoraviso sappo ḍaṃsi. Thero jānitvāpi pasannacitto nisinno dhammaṃyeva suṇāti. Visavego thaddho ahosi. Thero upasampadamaṇḍalaṃ ādiṃ katvā sīlaṃ paccavekkhitvā parisuddhasīlohamasmīti pītiṃ uppādesi. Saha pītuppādā visaṃ nivattitvā pathaviṃ pāvisi. Thero tattheva cittekaggataṃ labhitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.
如果有人因被骂,听到粗恶的话,且因粗恶之故,甚至听到被称为最下等事的话语,他只是省察忍耐的功德而不为所动,就像长诵无畏长老那样,此人就应当知道是“能忍粗恶之语、恶来之语道”的人。巴利
Yo pana akkosavasena durutte duruttattāyeva ca durāgate api antimavatthusaññite vacanapathe sutvā khantiguṇaṃyeva paccavekkhitvā na vedhati dīghabhāṇakaabhayatthero viya. Ayaṃ ‘‘khamo duruttānaṃ durāgatānaṃ vacanapathāna’’nti veditabbo.
那位长老因为乐于少欲知足的修行,讲说了大圣种行,整个大村庄的人都来了。长老因此得到很大的恭敬。另一位大长老受不了,就骂他说:“长诵者正在讲圣种行,却整夜吵吵闹闹”等等。两人各自回自己的精舍,同路走了一伽浮他左右。整整一伽浮他那么远,那人一直在骂他。后来到了两条精舍的路分开的地方,长诵长老站在那里,向他礼敬后说:“尊者,这是您的路。”那人像没听见一样走了。长老回到精舍,洗了脚坐下。他的弟子问他:“尊者,整整一伽浮他他都在骂您,您怎么一句话都没说?”长老说:“贤友,忍耐才是我的担子,不是不忍。就算在抬脚迈一步之间,我也看不到有跟业处分离的时候。”这里应当知道,言语本身就是言语之道。巴利
Thero kira paccayasantosabhāvanārāmatāya mahāariyavaṃsappaṭipadaṃ kathesi, sabbo mahāgāmo āgacchati. Therassa mahāsakkāro uppajjati. Taṃ aññataro mahāthero adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto dīghabhāṇako ariyavaṃsaṃ kathemīti sabbarattiṃ kolāhalaṃ karosītiādīhi akkosi. Ubhopi ca attano attano vihāraṃ gacchantā gāvutamattaṃ ekapathena agamaṃsu. Sakalagāvutampi so taṃ akkosiyeva. Tato yattha dvinnaṃ vihārānaṃ maggo bhijjati, tattha ṭhatvā dīghabhāṇakatthero taṃ vanditvā ‘‘esa, bhante, tumhākaṃ maggo’’ti āha. So asuṇanto viya agamāsi. Theropi vihāraṃ gantvā pāde pakkhāletvā nisīdi. Tamenaṃ antevāsiko ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, sakalagāvutaṃ paribhāsantaṃ na kiñci avocutthā’’ti āha. Thero ‘‘khantiyeva, āvuso, mayhaṃ bhāro, na akkhanti. Ekapaduddhārepi kammaṭṭhānaviyogaṃ na passāmī’’ti āha. Ettha ca vacanameva vacanapathoti veditabbo.
如果有人对已生起的身体感受——它因为逼迫而成为苦,因为浓厚而成为猛,因为粗恶而成为涩,因为锐利而成为刺痛,因为没有乐味而成为不可意,因为不增长心而成为不可喜,因为能夺命而成为夺命——也只是忍受,不动摇。他的本性就是这样,就像质多山上的勤修长老一样。应当知道,这就是“对于已生起的……具有忍耐本性者”。巴利
Yo pana uppannā sārīrikā vedanā dukkhamanaṭṭhena dukkhā, bahalaṭṭhena tibbā, pharusaṭṭhena kharā, tikhiṇaṭṭhena kaṭukā, assādavirahato asātā, manaṃ avaḍḍhanato amanāpā, pāṇaharaṇasamatthatāya pāṇaharā adhivāsetiyeva, na vedhati. Evaṃ sabhāvo hoti cittalapabbate padhāniyatthero viya. Ayaṃ ‘‘uppannānaṃ…pe… adhivāsanajātiko’’ti veditabbo.
据说,那位长老夜里精进修行后,站着的时候,腹内起了风病。他忍受不了,就翻来覆去。这时,站在经行道旁边的取食长老对他说:“贤友,出家之人应当有安忍的习性啊。”他答道:“善哉,尊者。”于是安忍下来,一动不动地躺着。那股风从肚脐一直裂到心脏。长老镇伏了感受,修习观,片刻之间就证得不来果,随即般涅槃。巴利
Therassa kira rattiṃ padhānena vītināmetvā ṭhitassa udaravāto uppajji. So taṃ adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto āvattati parivattati. Tamenaṃ caṅkamapasse ṭhito piṇḍapātiyatthero āha ‘‘āvuso, pabbajito nāma adhivāsanasīlo hotī’’ti. So ‘‘sādhu, bhante’’ti adhivāsetvā niccalo sayi. Vāto nābhito yāva hadayaṃ phāleti. Thero vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā vipassanto muhuttena anāgāmī hutvā parinibbāyīti.
“于彼”说的是:在冷等当中,哪怕只是任何一种法。“不能忍受”说的是:不能忍耐、无法承受的人。其余部分依照前面所说的方式理解。这里诸漏生起的情况应当这样理解:被寒冷触及时,如果渴望温暖,欲漏就生起;一切情况都是如此。如果想着“在成就的有和善趣的有当中,没有冷也没有热”,因而渴望存在,有漏就生起。如果执取“我冷、我热”,那就是见漏。与这一切相应的是无明漏。巴利
Yañhissāti sītādīsu yaṃkiñci ekadhammampi assa. Anadhivāsayatoti anadhivāsentassa akkhamantassa. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Āsavuppatti panettha evaṃ veditabbā. Sītena phuṭṭhassa uṇhaṃ patthayantassa kāmāsavo uppajjati, evaṃ sabbattha. Natthi no sampattibhave sugatibhave sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vāti bhavaṃ patthayantassa bhavāsavo. Mayhaṃ sītaṃ uṇhanti gāho diṭṭhāsavo. Sabbeheva sampayutto avijjāsavoti.
“这些被称为……应当通过忍耐来断除。”意思是:对于寒冷等每一种情况,各有四种漏,这样算下来就有许多漏,这些漏都应当通过这种被称为“忍耐与防护”的忍耐来断除。这里还应知道:因为这种忍耐能忍受寒冷等法,把它们承担起来并安住其上,而不是忍受不了就排斥,所以称为“忍耐”。巴利
‘‘Ime vuccanti…pe… adhivāsanā pahātabbā’’ti ime sītādīsu ekamekassa vasena cattāro cattāro katvā aneke āsavā imāya khantisaṃvarasaṅkhātāya adhivāsanāya pahātabbāti vuccantīti attho. Ettha ca yasmā ayaṃ khanti sītādidhamme adhivāseti, attano upari āropetvā vāsetiyeva. Na asahamānā hutvā nirassati, tasmā ‘‘adhivāsanā’’ti vuccatīti veditabbā.
需要靠回避来断除的诸漏的注释巴利
Parivajjanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
25 通过如理思惟而避开暴戾的大象,意思是:想到“我是沙门”,就不该站在暴戾大象的附近。因为由那个原因,可能会死,也可能只是受一场近乎死亡的苦。像这样用方法、途径、条件去观察之后,就避开、退离暴戾的大象。这个道理在一切地方都适用。“暴戾的”就是凶恶的,这里说的是野性难驯的。“枯树桩”指金合欢树桩之类。“多刺处”指有刺的地方,也就是刺生长的地方,这里说的是那种场所。“深坑”指四周边缘都断开的坑。“峭壁”指一边断开的崖。“污水沟”指丢弃剩水、胎儿排泄物等的处所。“泥沼”指那些同样的粪泥等流聚的地方。那即使只有膝盖那么深,也充满不净,而这两个地方都是非人凶恶的。因此应当避开它们。“非座处”在这里指不合适的座位,即非座处,从意义上应理解为不定处所的隐秘座位。“非行境”在这里也指不合适的行境,即非行境,它依妓女等类别而有五种。“恶友”指卑劣的、破戒的、像朋友一样的人,或者不是朋友的人。“亲近”指服侍。“有智慧的诸同梵行者”指聪明的、有智慧的诸同梵行者,这是对比丘们的称呼。因为他们同作一事、同诵一戒、同学一学,行此梵行,所以称为同梵行者。“于恶处”指于卑劣之处。“可能信受”指可能相信、可能执取:“这位具寿确实做了或将会做。”巴利
25.Paṭisaṅkhāyoniso caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjetīti ahaṃ samaṇoti caṇḍassa hatthissa āsanne na ṭhātabbaṃ. Tatonidānañhi maraṇampi siyā maraṇamattampi dukkhanti evaṃ upāyena pathena paccayena paccavekkhitvā caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjeti paṭikkamati. Esa nayo sabbattha. Caṇḍanti ca duṭṭhaṃ, vāḷanti vuttaṃ hoti. Khāṇunti khadirakhāṇuādiṃ. Kaṇṭakaṭṭhānanti kaṇṭakānaṃ ṭhānaṃ, yattha kaṇṭakā vijjanti, taṃ okāsanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sobbhanti sabbato paricchinnataṭaṃ. Papātanti ekato chinnataṭaṃ. Candanikanti ucchiṭṭhodakagabbhamalādīnaṃ chaḍḍanaṭṭhānaṃ. Oḷigallanti tesaṃyeva sakaddamādīnaṃ sandanokāsaṃ. Taṃ jaṇṇumattampi asucibharitaṃ hoti, dvepi cetāni ṭhānāni amanussaduṭṭhāni honti. Tasmā tāni vajjetabbāni. Anāsaneti ettha pana ayuttaṃ āsanaṃ anāsanaṃ, taṃ atthato aniyatavatthukaṃ rahopaṭicchannāsananti veditabbaṃ. Agocareti etthapi ca ayutto gocaro agocaro, so vesiyādibhedato pañcavidho. Pāpake mitteti lāmake dussīle mittapatirūpake, amitte vā. Bhajantanti sevamānaṃ. Viññū sabrahmacārīti paṇḍitā buddhisampannā sabrahmacārayo, bhikkhūnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Te hi ekakammaṃ ekuddeso samasikkhatāti imaṃ brahmaṃ samānaṃ caranti, tasmā sabrahmacārīti vuccanti. Pāpakesu ṭhānesūti lāmakesu ṭhānesu. Okappeyyunti saddaheyyuṃ, adhimucceyyuṃ ‘‘addhā ayamāyasmā akāsi vā karissati vā’’ti.
“凡任何属于他的”:这是指在象等中,哪怕只是他的任何一种。其余部分按前面所说的方式理解。不过,这里应当这样理解漏的生起:一个人被象等因缘所带来的痛苦所触,想要得到快乐时,欲漏就生起;他希求存在,心想“在圆满的存在中、在善趣的存在中,我们没有这样的痛苦”,这时有漏就生起;他执取“象踩我,马踩我”这样的想法,就是见漏;而无明漏则与所有这些漏相应。巴利
Yañhissāti hatthiādīsu yaṃkiñci ekampi assa. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Āsavuppatti panettha evaṃ veditabbā. Hatthiādinidānena dukkhena phuṭṭhassa sukhaṃ patthayato kāmāsavo uppajjati. Natthi no sampattibhave sugatibhave īdisaṃ dukkhanti bhavaṃ patthentassa bhavāsavo. Maṃ hatthī maddati, maṃ assoti gāho diṭṭhāsavo. Sabbeheva sampayutto avijjāsavoti.
这些被称为……由回避而应断除的漏,应当理解为:就象等每一种对象,各有四种,这样算下来就有许多漏,它们都要通过这种称为戒律防护的回避来断除。巴利
Ime vuccanti…pe… parivajjanā pahātabbāti ime hatthiādīsu ekekassa vasena cattāro cattāro katvā aneke āsavā iminā sīlasaṃvarasaṅkhātena parivajjanena pahātabbāti vuccantīti veditabbā.
驱除应断之漏的注释巴利
Vinodanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
26 通过如理作意,对已经生起的欲寻不再忍受:也就是按照“这个寻是不善的,这个寻是有过失的,这个寻会带来苦报,而且它会导致自我伤害”等这样的方式,如理观察欲寻的过患之后,对于在各种所缘上生起、产生、出现的欲寻,他不忍受,不把心安放在上面,或者说不让它留在内心。这就是它的含义。巴利
26.Paṭisaṅkhāyoniso uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetīti ‘‘iti pāyaṃ vitakko akusalo, itipi sāvajjo, itipi dukkhavipāko, so ca kho attabyābādhāya saṃvattatī’’tiādinā nayena yoniso kāmavitakke ādīnavaṃ paccavekkhitvā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ārammaṇe uppannaṃ jātamabhinibbattaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāseti, cittaṃ āropetvā na vāseti, abbhantare vā na vāsetītipi attho.
不忍受的时候,他做什么呢?他舍断它,丢弃它。巴利
Anadhivāsento kiṃ karotīti? Pajahati chaḍḍeti.
难道是像用簸箕把垃圾扔掉那样吗?并不是。实际上,它是消除它、刺痛它、刺穿它、把它赶出去。巴利
Kiṃ kacavaraṃ viya piṭakenāti? Na hi, apica kho naṃ vinodeti tudati vijjhati nīharati.
这是像用刺棒赶公牛那样吗?不是的。其实是要把它彻底清除、完全灭掉。就像它内部一点都不剩,哪怕连碎片那么一点都没有,就是这样把它处理掉。巴利
Kiṃ balibaddaṃ viya patodenāti? Na hi, atha kho naṃ byantīkaroti vigatantaṃ karoti. Yathāssa antopi nāvasissati antamaso bhaṅgamattampi, tathā naṃ karoti.
那么,怎样使它变成那样呢?所谓“使它归于不存在”,就是一步一步让它消失,通过镇伏断的方式,使它被好好地镇伏住,这就是那句话的意思。这个道理也适用于嗔寻和害寻。巴利
Kathaṃ pana naṃ tathā karotīti? Anabhāvaṃ gametīti anu anu abhāvaṃ gameti, vikkhambhanappahānena yathā suvikkhambhito hoti, tathā karotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo byāpādavihiṃsāvitakkesu.
在这里,“欲寻”是指《分别论》里说的:“凡是与欲相应的思索、寻、邪思惟。”这个道理也适用于其他两种寻。“已生已生”的意思是:每当它们生起,就在刚生起的那一刻。“或者生起一次就把它除掉,不会在第二次生起时对它置之不理,即使生起一百次,也每一次生起都把它驱除。”“恶不善”:因为意义低劣所以叫“恶”,因为不善巧所以叫“不善”。“法”:就是指这些欲寻等,或者也可以指全部九种大寻。其中前三种已经说过了,剩下六种是:亲属寻、地方寻、不死寻、与同情他人相应的寻、与利养恭敬名声相应的寻,以及与不愿被轻视相应的寻。巴利
Ettha ca kāmavitakkoti ‘‘yo kāmapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko micchāsaṅkappo’’ti vibhaṅge (vibha. 910) vutto. Esa nayo itaresu. Uppannuppanneti uppanne uppanne, uppannamatteyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sakiṃ vā uppanne vinodetvā dutiyavāre ajjhupekkhitā na hoti, satakkhattumpi uppanne uppanne vinodetiyeva. Pāpake akusaleti lāmakaṭṭhena pāpake, akosallatāya akusale. Dhammeti teyeva kāmavitakkādayo sabbepi vā nava mahāvitakke. Tattha tayo vuttā eva. Avasesā ‘‘ñātivitakko janapadavitakko amaravitakko parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko lābhasakkārasilokapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko anavaññattipaṭisaṃyutto vitakko’’ti (mahāni. 207) ime cha.
在这些寻当中,无论生起哪一种,其余的说明都和前面一样。不过在这里,欲寻就是欲漏;欲寻中更殊胜的部分是有漏;与那欲寻相应的则是见漏;而在一切寻当中,都有无明漏。应当这样了知诸漏的生起。巴利
Yañhissāti etesu vitakkesu yaṃkiñci assa, sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Kāmavitakko panettha kāmāsavo eva. Tabbiseso bhavāsavo. Taṃsampayutto diṭṭhāsavo. Sabbavitakkesu avijjāsavoti evaṃ āsavuppattipi veditabbā.
这些被称为……应当通过驱除而断除。应当知道,这里所说的以欲寻等为代表的各种漏,就是通过伴随着在每一种寻上观察其过患、被称为“精进防护”的驱除,而应当被断除的。巴利
Ime vuccanti…pe… vinodanā pahātabbāti ime kāmavitakkādivasena vuttappakārā āsavā iminā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vitakke ādīnavapaccavekkhaṇasahitena vīriyasaṃvarasaṅkhātena vinodanena pahātabbāti vuccantīti veditabbā.
关于“应当通过修行断除的漏”的解说巴利
Bhāvanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
27 通过如理思择而修习念觉支,意思是:先以正确的方法和途径,观察不修习的过患和修习的利益,然后修习念觉支。这个道理适用于所有觉支。在这里,虽然真正指的是在上三道生起时才会出现的出世间觉支,但为了让初学者对觉支不产生迷惑,我将结合世间和出世间两种方式来解释它们的含义。不过在这一处,应当舍弃世间的方式,只取出世间的方式来理解。其中,对于以念觉支等为首的那七个词,首先——巴利
27.Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetīti abhāvanāya ādīnavaṃ, bhāvanāya ca ānisaṃsaṃ upāyena pathena paccavekkhitvā satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti, esa nayo sabbattha. Ettha ca kiñcāpi ime uparimaggattayasamayasambhūtā lokuttarabojjhaṅgā eva adhippetā, tathāpi ādikammikānaṃ bojjhaṅgesu asammohatthaṃ lokiyalokuttaramissakena nesaṃ nayena atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāmi. Idha pana lokiyanayaṃ pahāya lokuttaranayo eva gahetabbo. Tattha satisambojjhaṅgantiādinā nayena vuttānaṃ sattannaṃ ādipadānaṃyeva tāva –
要从含义、特征等方面,以及从次第上加以判定。
智者应当以不增不减的方式去了知。巴利
Atthato lakkhaṇādīhi, kamato ca vinicchayo; Anūnādhikato ceva, viññātabbo vibhāvinā.
在这里,先讲念觉支:念,是以执持为义。这个念又以现起为特相,或者以不忘记为特相。经中也这样说:“大王,就像国王的管库官会不断清点国王的财宝:‘大王,有这么多金币,有这么多金块,有这么多财宝。’同样地,大王,念生起时,会不断清点善与不善、有罪与无罪、低劣与殊胜、黑与白等相对的法。这就是四念处。”这是详细说明。它的作用是不断清点。长老其实就是依据作用来说这个特相的。或者,它的作用是不混乱。它表现为面向所缘而现起。念本身就是觉支,所以叫念觉支。在这里,觉支就是觉悟的支分,或者觉悟者的组成部分。巴利
Tattha satisambojjhaṅge tāva saraṇaṭṭhena sati. Sā panesā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇā, apilāpanalakkhaṇā vā. Vuttampi hetaṃ ‘‘yathā, mahārāja, rañño bhaṇḍāgāriko rañño sāpateyyaṃ apilāpeti, ettakaṃ, mahārāja, hiraññaṃ, ettakaṃ suvaṇṇaṃ, ettakaṃ sāpateyyanti, evameva kho, mahārāja , sati uppajjamānā kusalākusalasāvajjānavajjahīnapaṇītakaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāge dhamme apilāpeti. Ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti (mi. pa. 2.1.13) vitthāro. Apilāpanarasā. Kiccavaseneva hissa etaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ therena vuttaṃ. Asammosarasā vā. Gocarābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Sati eva sambojjhaṅgo satisambojjhaṅgo. Tattha bodhiyā bodhissa vā aṅgoti bojjhaṅgo.
这段话要说明的是:当这个法集在世间道和出世间道生起的那一刹那,它就成了许多障碍的对立面,比如昏沉、掉举、停滞不前、过度用力、沉溺欲乐、自我折磨、执着断灭、执着永恒等等。这个法集包括念、择法、精进、喜、轻安、定、舍。圣弟子就是依靠这个法集而觉悟,所以它被称为“菩提”。所谓觉悟,就是从烦恼相续的沉睡中醒来,或者通达四圣谛,或者现证涅槃。正如经文所说:“修习七觉支后,证得无上正等正觉。”这个被称为法集的觉悟,它的组成部分就是觉支,就像禅支、道支等一样。巴利
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yā hi ayaṃ dhammasāmaggī, yāya lokiyalokuttaramaggakkhaṇe uppajjamānāya līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhana-kāmasukhattakilamathānuyoga-ucchedasassatābhinivesādīnaṃ anekesaṃ upaddavānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāya satidhammavicayavīriyapītipassaddhisamādhiupekkhāsaṅkhātāya dhammasāmaggiyā ariyasāvako bujjhatīti katvā ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati. Bujjhatīti kilesasantānaniddāya uṭṭhahati, cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati, nibbānameva vā sacchikarotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘satta bojjhaṅge bhāvetvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho’’ti. Tassā dhammasāmaggisaṅkhātāya bodhiyā aṅgotipi bojjhaṅgo, jhānaṅgamaggaṅgādayo viya.
这位圣弟子,因为依上述那种法集而觉悟,所以被称为“觉者”。那位觉者的组成部分,也就叫作“觉支”,就像军队的组成部分、战车的组成部分等一样。因此,注疏师们说:“或者说,正在觉悟的人的组成部分,就是觉支。”此外,还应依照《无碍解道》的方式理解其含义:“所谓觉支,是以什么含义称为觉支?导向觉悟,所以是觉支;正在觉悟,所以是觉支;随顺觉悟,所以是觉支;朝向觉悟,所以是觉支;完全觉悟,所以是觉支。”如此等等。殊胜而美好的觉支,就是正觉支。这样一来,正觉支就是念正觉支,也就是念觉支。对于这第一个词,先要这样从含义和特征等方面来了知它的判定。巴利
Yopesa yathāvuttappakārāya etāya dhammasāmaggiyā bujjhatīti katvā ariyasāvako ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati, tassa bodhissa aṅgotipi bojjhaṅgo, senaṅgarathaṅgādayo viya. Tenāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘bujjhanakassa puggalassa aṅgāti vā bojjhaṅgā’’ti. Apica ‘‘bojjhaṅgāti kenaṭṭhena bojjhaṅgā? Bodhāya saṃvattantīti bojjhaṅgā, bujjhantīti bojjhaṅgā, anubujjhantīti bojjhaṅgā, paṭibujjhantīti bojjhaṅgā, sambujjhantīti bojjhaṅgā’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.17) paṭisambhidānayenāpi attho veditabbo. Pasattho sundaro vā bojjhaṅgoti sambojjhaṅgo. Evaṃ sati eva sambojjhaṅgo satisambojjhaṅgo. Taṃ satisambojjhaṅgaṃ. Evaṃ tāva ekassa ādipadassa atthato lakkhaṇādīhi ca vinicchayo viññātabbo.
在第二项等觉支中,审察四谛之法,所以叫择法觉支。它的特相是审察,作用是照亮,现起是不迷乱。精进,因为具有勇猛的特质,又因为应当以正确的方式策励,所以叫精进。它的特相是策励,作用是支持,现起是不消沉。能让人喜悦,所以叫喜。它的特相是遍满,或者说是满足;作用是滋养身心;现起是身心的欣悦。因为平息了身心的不安,所以叫轻安。它的特相是寂静,作用是镇伏身心的不安,现起是身心不再动摇的清凉。因为令心等持,所以叫定。它的特相是不散乱,或者说是不散逸;作用是把心与心所汇集在一起;现起是心住立。因为以中舍而观,所以叫舍。它的特相是审虑,或者说是平等;作用是防止不足与过度,或者说是断除偏袒;现起是中立的状态。其余的解释和前面所说的一样。对于剩下的词,也应当以同样的方式,从含义和特相等方面来了知它们的抉择。巴利
Dutiyādīsu pana catusaccadhamme vicinātīti dhammavicayo. So pana vicayalakkhaṇo, obhāsanaraso, asammohapaccupaṭṭhāno. Vīrabhāvato vidhinā īrayitabbato ca vīriyaṃ. Taṃ paggahalakkhaṇaṃ , upatthambhanarasaṃ, anosīdanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ . Pīṇayatīti pīti. Sā pharaṇalakkhaṇā, tuṭṭhilakkhaṇā vā, kāyacittānaṃ pīṇanarasā, tesaṃyeva odagyapaccupaṭṭhānā. Kāyacittadarathapassambhanato passaddhi. Sā upasamalakkhaṇā, kāyacittadarathanimmaddanarasā, āyacittānaṃ aparipphandanabhūtasītibhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Samādhānato samādhi. So avikkhepalakkhaṇo, avisāralakkhaṇo vā, cittacetasikānaṃ sampiṇḍanaraso, cittaṭṭhitipaccupaṭṭhāno. Ajjhupekkhanato upekkhā. Sā paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇā, samavāhitalakkhaṇā vā, ūnādhikatānivāraṇarasā, pakkhapātupacchedarasā vā, majjhattabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Evaṃ sesapadānampi atthato lakkhaṇādīhi ca vinicchayo viññātabbo.
关于次第:这里,因为世尊说过“比丘们,我说念在一切处都有用”,由于念觉支能帮助其余所有觉支,所以最先说念觉支。此后,按照“他这样具念而住,以慧审察那法”等经文的方式,其余觉支先后宣说的用意已经在经典本身中说明了。在这里,应当这样理解关于次第的判定。巴利
Kamatoti ettha ca ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234) vacanato sabbesaṃ sesabojjhaṅgānaṃ upakārakattā satisambojjhaṅgova paṭhamaṃ vutto. Tato paraṃ ‘‘so tathā sato viharanto taṃ dhammaṃ paññāya pavicinatī’’tiādinā (vibha. 469) nayena sesabojjhaṅgānaṃ pubbāpariyavacane payojanaṃ sutteyeva vuttaṃ. Evamettha kamatopi vinicchayo viññātabbo.
为什么世尊刚好只说七个觉支,不多也不少呢?因为要对治昏沉和掉举,而且还要有一种能普遍适用的觉支。这里,有三个觉支是对治昏沉的。就像经里说的:“比丘们,当心昏沉的时候,正是修习择法觉支、精进觉支、喜觉支的时候。”另外三个觉支是对治掉举的。就像经里说的:“比丘们,当心掉举的时候,正是修习轻安觉支、定觉支、舍觉支的时候。”而这里面有一个觉支是普遍适用的。就像经里说的:“比丘们,我说念是普遍适用的。”也有读作“普遍适用”的,意思是:念在一切情况下都是需要的。这样一来,因为能对治昏沉和掉举,又因为有一种觉支普遍适用,所以世尊刚好只说七个觉支,不多也不少。在这里,关于不多不少的抉择,就应该这样来理解。巴利
Anūnādhikatoti kasmā pana bhagavatā satteva bojjhaṅgā vuttā anūnā anadhikāti. Līnuddhaccapaṭipakkhato sabbatthikato ca. Ettha hi tayo bojjhaṅgā līnassa paṭipakkhā. Yathāha – ‘‘yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Tayo uddhaccassa paṭipakkhā. Yathāha – ‘‘yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Eko panettha sabbatthiko. Yathāha – ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti. ‘‘Sabbatthaka’’ntipi pāṭho, dvinnampi sabbattha icchitabbanti attho. Evaṃ līnuddhaccapaṭipakkhato sabbatthikato ca satteva bojjhaṅgā vuttā anūnā anadhikāti, evamettha anūnādhikatopi vinicchayo viññātabbo.
先按“念觉支”等这样的方式,已经了解了所说的七个开头词的含义解释;现在对于“依远离”等说法,应当这样理解。“修习”就是增长,就是在自己的心相续中一再让它生起、产生。“依远离”就是依止于远离。“远离”就是远离的状态。这个远离有五种:彼分远离、镇伏远离、正断远离、安息远离、出离远离。这五者的差别,应当依照“于圣法未调伏”那里所说的方法来理解。因为那里所说的“调伏”,就是这里的“远离”。以上就是这五种远离。巴利
Evaṃ tāva ‘‘satisambojjhaṅga’’ntiādinā nayena vuttānaṃ sattannaṃ ādipadānaṃyeva atthavaṇṇanaṃ ñatvā idāni bhāveti vivekanissitantiādīsu evaṃ ñātabbā. Bhāvetīti vaḍḍheti, attano cittasantāne punappunaṃ janeti abhinibbattetīti attho. Vivekanissitanti viveke nissitaṃ. Vivekoti vivittatā. Svāyaṃ tadaṅgaviveko vikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhi nissaraṇavivekoti pañcavidho. Tassa nānattaṃ ‘‘ariyadhamme avinīto’’ti ettha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayameva hi tattha vinayoti vutto. Evaṃ etasmiṃ pañcavidhe viveke.
“依远离”应当这样理解:修习念觉支,是依于彼分远离、依于正断远离,也依于出离远离。确实,这位精勤修习觉支的瑜伽行者,在观照的刹那,从作用上说是依于彼分远离,从内心倾向说是依于出离远离;而在圣道之时,从作用上说是依于正断远离,从所缘上说是依于出离远离,如此修习念觉支。也有人主张依于五种远离,因为他们不只是在强力观、道、果的阶段才安立觉支,在观的前行——遍处禅那、入出息念、不净观、梵住禅等——也安立觉支,而义注师们并不反对这一点。因此,按他们的见解,在这些禅那生起的当下,从作用上就是依于镇伏远离。正如说“在观照的刹那,从内心倾向依于出离远离”,同样也应该说修习是依于安息远离。这个道理也适用于“依离贪”等表述。因为远离的层次,实际上就是离贪等的层次。巴利
Vivekanissitanti tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ samucchedavivekanissitaṃ nissaraṇavivekanissitañca satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetīti ayamattho veditabbo. Tathā hi ayaṃ bojjhaṅgabhāvanānuyutto yogī vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ, maggakāle pana kiccato samucchedavivekanissitaṃ, ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti. Pañcavidhavivekanissitantipi eke, te hi na kevalaṃ balavavipassanāmaggaphalakkhaṇesu eva bojjhaṅge uddharanti, vipassanāpādakakasiṇajjhānaānāpānāsubhabrahmavihārajjhānesupi uddharanti. Na ca paṭisiddhā aṭṭhakathācariyehi. Tasmā tesaṃ matena etesaṃ jhānānaṃ pavattikkhaṇe kiccato eva vikkhambhanavivekanissitaṃ. Yathā ca ‘‘vipassanākkhaṇe ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissita’’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ paṭippassaddhivivekanissitampi bhāvetīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Esa nayo virāganissitādīsu. Vivekaṭṭhā eva hi virāgādayo.
在这里,舍遣有两种:舍离的舍遣和进入的舍遣。其中,舍离的舍遣是指在观照的刹那以彼分断的方式、在圣道的刹那以正断的方式断除烦恼。进入的舍遣是指在观照的刹那以心倾向于涅槃的方式、在圣道的刹那以涅槃为所缘的方式进入涅槃。这两种舍遣都适用于这里兼具世间与出世间的义释方法。因为,这念觉支确实以所说的方式舍离烦恼,又进入涅槃。而“导向舍遣”这整个说法,意思是正在成为舍遣、已经转向舍遣、正在成熟、已经成熟。这就是说:“这位精勤修习觉支的比丘,依照念觉支成熟为舍离烦恼的舍遣和进入涅槃的舍遣的方式,依照它成熟的方式而修习它。”这个道理也适用于其余各个觉支。巴利
Kevalañhettha vossaggo duvidho pariccāgavossaggo ca pakkhandanavossaggo cāti. Tattha pariccāgavossaggoti vipassanākkhaṇe ca tadaṅgavasena, maggakkhaṇe ca samucchedavasena kilesappahānaṃ. Pakkhandanavossaggoti vipassanākkhaṇe tanninnabhāvena, maggakkhaṇe pana ārammaṇakaraṇena nibbānapakkhandanaṃ. Tadubhayampi imasmiṃ lokiyalokuttaramissake atthavaṇṇanānaye vaṭṭati. Tathā hi ayaṃ satisambojjhaṅgo yathāvuttena pakārena kilese pariccajati, nibbānañca pakkhandati. Vossaggapariṇāminti iminā pana sakalena vacanena vossaggattaṃ pariṇamantaṃ pariṇatañca paripaccantaṃ paripakkañcāti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘ayañhi bojjhaṅgabhāvanānuyutto bhikkhu yathā satisambojjhaṅgo kilesapariccāgavossaggattaṃ nibbānapakkhandanavossaggattañca paripaccati, yathā ca paripakko hoti, tathā naṃ bhāvetī’’ti. Esa nayo sesabojjhaṅgesu.
在这里,涅槃本身因为远离一切有为法而称为“远离”,因为是一切法的离贪状态而称为“离贪”,因为是息灭而称为“灭”。只有圣道才是转向于舍的,因此他修习念觉支,以远离为所缘而生起,就是依远离;同样也依离贪、依灭。而且,应当理解这里的含义是:在圣道刹那生起时,由于正断烦恼而具有遍舍的状态,以及由于趣入涅槃的状态,它成为转向于舍、成熟、圆满的。这个道理也适用于其余诸觉支。巴利
Idha pana nibbānaṃyeva sabbasaṅkhatehi vivittattā viveko, sabbesaṃ virāgabhāvato virāgo, nirodhabhāvato nirodhoti vuttaṃ. Maggo eva ca vossaggapariṇāmī, tasmā satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti vivekaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattiyā vivekanissitaṃ. Tathā virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ. Tañca kho ariyamaggakkhaṇuppattiyā kilesānaṃ samucchedato pariccāgabhāvena ca nibbānapakkhandanabhāvena ca pariṇataṃ paripakkanti ayameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Esa nayo sesabojjhaṅgesu.
“任何他的”这句话的意思是:在这些觉支当中,无论哪一个觉支属于他。其余部分和前面所说的一样。关于漏的生起,这里应当了解:与上三道相应的这些觉支,因为没有被修习,所以可能会生起欲漏、有漏、无明漏这三种漏;而对于正在这样修习的人来说,这些漏就不会生起。应当这样理解这个道理。巴利
Yañhissāti etesu bojjhaṅgesu yaṃkiñci assa. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Āsavuppattiyaṃ panettha imesaṃ uparimaggattayasampayuttānaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ abhāvitattā ye uppajjeyyuṃ kāmāsavo bhavāsavo avijjāsavoti tayo āsavā, bhāvayato evaṃsa te āsavā na hontīti ayaṃ nayo veditabbo.
这些被称为……应当通过修习断除。应当知道,这三种漏要通过与三道相应的觉支修习来断除,所以说为“通过修习而断除”。巴利
Ime vuccanti…pe… bhāvanā pahātabbāti ime tayo āsavā imāya maggattayasampayuttāya bojjhaṅgabhāvanāya pahātabbāti vuccantīti veditabbā.
28 现在,为了赞叹这位已经以七种方式断尽诸漏的比丘,显示断漏的功德利益,同时也以这些理由激励众生断除诸漏,世尊才说了下面这段话:“比丘们,因为……他终结了苦。”其中,“yato kho”里的“to”是表示所属关系的词尾,整个词的意思就是“他的”(yassa kho)。不过古代注释师们把它解释为“在那个时侯”(yasmiṃ kāle)。所谓“那些应通过见来断除的漏”,意思是那些应当由见道断除的漏,确实仅仅通过见道就被断除了;对于还没有断除的漏,他不会生起“已经断除”的想法。这个解释原则在一切地方都应这样详细理解。巴利
28. Idāni imehi sattahākārehi pahīnāsavaṃ bhikkhuṃ thomento āsavappahāne cassa ānisaṃsaṃ dassento eteheva ca kāraṇehi āsavappahāne sattānaṃ ussukkaṃ janento yato kho, bhikkhave…pe… antamakāsi dukkhassāti āha. Tattha yato khoti sāmivacane tokāro, yassa khoti vuttaṃ hoti. Porāṇā pana yasmiṃ kāleti vaṇṇayanti. Ye āsavā dassanā pahātabbāti ye āsavā dassanena pahātabbā, te dassaneneva pahīnā honti, na appahīnesuyeva pahīnasaññī hoti. Evaṃ sabbattha vitthāro.
以一切漏的防护而遮蔽:就是以一切漏的防护所遮蔽,或者说以一切漏的遮盖所遮蔽。彻底切断了渴爱:就是切断、截断、根除了一切渴爱。令结回转:就是令十种结回转而成为无垢。正确:是以正因、以正理。慢的现观:是对慢的见现观和断现观。因为阿拉汉道依其作用能照见慢,这是它的见现观;而以此见照见慢后,慢便即刻断除,犹如见到毒蛇的生命当即死亡。这是它的断现观。巴利
Sabbāsavasaṃvarasaṃvutoti sabbehi āsavapidhānehi pihito, sabbesaṃ vā āsavānaṃ pidhānehi pihito. Acchecchitaṇhanti sabbampi taṇhaṃ chindi, saṃchindi samucchindi. Vivattayi saṃyojananti dasavidhampi saṃyojanaṃ parivattayi nimmalamakāsi. Sammāti hetunā kāraṇena. Mānābhisamayāti mānassa dassanābhisamayā pahānābhisamayā ca. Arahattamaggo hi kiccavasena mānaṃ passati, ayamassa dassanābhisamayo. Tena diṭṭho pana so tāvadeva pahīyati diṭṭhavisena diṭṭhasattānaṃ jīvitaṃ viya. Ayamassa pahānābhisamayo.
“他作苦的边际”:像这样,因为以阿罗汉道正确地照见了慢、并且已经断除了慢,所以就有了以下几种“边”:比如“身体系缚的内部衰坏”(《小品》278)、“绿的边际”等(《中部》1.304)所说的最末界限之边;又如“比丘们,这是生计中的最低者”(《如是语》91;《相应部》3.80)所说的低劣之边;又如“有身是一边”(《增支部》6.61)所说的部分之边;以及“由一切因缘灭尽,这就是苦的尽头”(《相应部》2.51)所说的终尽之边——这样一共四种边。在这四种边当中,对于整个轮回的苦,他达到了第四种边,也就是所谓最终尽头之边,为它作界限、作终结。意思是说,他只留下最后残余的微量苦,也就是他作成了苦的尽头。巴利
Antamakāsi dukkhassāti evaṃ arahattamaggena sammā mānassa diṭṭhattā pahīnattā ca ye ime ‘‘kāyabandhanassa anto jīrati (cūḷava. 278). Haritantaṃ vā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.304) evaṃ vuttaantimamariyādanto ca, ‘‘antamidaṃ, bhikkhave, jīvikāna’’nti (itivu. 91; saṃ. ni. 3.80) evaṃ vuttalāmakanto ca, ‘‘sakkāyo eko anto’’ti (a. ni. 6.61) evaṃ vuttakoṭṭhāsanto ca, ‘‘esevanto dukkhassa sabbapaccayasaṅkhayā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.51) evaṃ vuttakoṭanto cāti evaṃ cattāro antā, tesu sabbasseva vaṭṭadukkhassa antaṃ catutthakoṭisaṅkhātaṃ antimakoṭisaṅkhātaṃ antamakāsi paricchedaṃ parivaṭumaṃ akāsi. Antimasamussayamattāvasesaṃ dukkhaṃ akāsīti vuttaṃ hoti.
那些比丘心生欢喜:意思是他们内心满足、满怀喜悦,或者说是与喜和悦相应的心。他们随喜世尊的教说:意思是世尊这番以灭尽苦为终极归宿的教说,说得善巧、宣说得善巧。他们心里认定“世尊确实如此!善逝确实如此!”便以头顶礼敬接受,完全随喜赞同。巴利
Attamanā te bhikkhūti sakamanā tuṭṭhamanā, pītisomanassehi vā sampayuttamanā hutvā. Bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti idaṃ dukkhassa antakiriyāpariyosānaṃ bhagavato bhāsitaṃ sukathitaṃ sulapitaṃ, evametaṃ bhagavā evametaṃ sugatāti matthakena sampaṭicchantā abbhanumodiṃsūti.
这里剩下没有讲到的内容,因为前面已经讲过,而且容易理解,所以就不再说了。因此,一切都应该按照前面所说的,逐句去审察。巴利
Sesamettha yaṃ na vuttaṃ, taṃ pubbe vuttattā ca suviññeyyattā ca na vuttaṃ. Tasmā sabbaṃ vuttānusārena anupadaso paccavekkhitabbaṃ.
3. 《法嗣经》的释义。巴利
3. Dhammadāyādasuttavaṇṇanā
29 “如是我闻”等语,是《法嗣经》的开头。因为这部经有它生起的因缘,所以先说明那个因缘,然后再解释其中先前没有出现过的词句。那么,这部经是以什么因缘而说的呢?是以利养和恭敬为因缘。据说,世尊获得了极大的利养和恭敬。就像他在四大不可数劫中圆满积累了布施波罗蜜那样,从四面八方涌起双倍的大云,降下洪流,仿佛要把一切波罗蜜汇聚在一生中一起显现果报,就这样生起了利养和恭敬的大洪流。于是,刹帝利、婆罗门等人从各处手捧饮食、车乘、衣服、花鬘、香、涂香等前来,到处寻找世尊:“佛陀在哪里?世尊在哪里?天中天、人中最上者、人狮子在哪里?”他们用几百辆车运来资具,找不到停放的地方,就在周围一俱卢舍的范围内,车轴挨着车轴停在那里,并且一直跟随着,就像盲者林婆罗门等人那样。这一切都应当按照《犍度》和诸经中所说的方式来理解。不仅世尊如此,比丘僧团也是这样。巴利
29.Evaṃme sutanti dhammadāyādasuttaṃ. Yasmā panassa aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo, tasmā taṃ dassetvā vassa apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ karissāma. Katarāya ca panidaṃ aṭṭhuppattiyā nikkhittanti. Lābhasakkāre. Bhagavato kira mahālābhasakkāro uppajji. Yathā taṃ cattāro asaṅkhyeyye pūritadānapāramīsañcayassa. Sabbadisāsu yamakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvā mahoghaṃ viya sabbapāramiyo ekasmiṃ attabhāve vipākaṃ dassāmāti sampiṇḍitā viya lābhasakkāramahoghaṃ nibbattayiṃsu. Tato tato annapānayānavatthamālāgandhavilepanādihatthā khattiyabrāhmaṇādayo āgantvā – ‘‘kahaṃ buddho, kahaṃ bhagavā, kahaṃ devadevo, narāsabho, purisasīho’’ti bhagavantaṃ pariyesanti. Sakaṭasatehipi paccaye āharitvā okāsaṃ alabhamānā samantā gāvutappamāṇampi sakaṭadhurena sakaṭadhuramāhaccatiṭṭhanti ceva anubandhanti ca. Andhakavindabrāhmaṇādayo viya. Sabbaṃ khandhake tesu tesu suttesu ca āgatanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Yathā ca bhagavato, evaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassāpi.
经中也这样说:那时,世尊受到恭敬、尊重、敬奉、供养、礼敬,是衣、食、坐卧处、病缘医药等资具的获得者;比丘僧团也同样受到恭敬……乃至……获得资具。(《优陀那》14)同样地:“准陀,如今在世间出现的任何僧团或团体中,准陀,我看不到有另一个僧团能像比丘僧团这样,在利养与荣耀上达到如此顶峰。”(《长部》3.176)巴利
Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sakkato hoti garukato mānito pūjito apacito lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānaṃ, bhikkhusaṅghopi kho sakkato hoti…pe… parikkhārāna’’nti (udā. 14). Tathā – ‘‘yāvatā kho, cunda, etarahi saṅgho vā gaṇo vā loke uppanno, nāhaṃ, cunda, aññaṃ ekasaṅghampi samanupassāmi, evaṃ lābhaggayasaggapattaṃ, yathariva, cunda, bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti (dī. ni. 3.176).
世尊和比丘僧团所得到的利养与恭敬合在一起,就像两条大河流汇合的水一样,多得无法衡量。渐渐地,比丘们变得看重资具、贪求资具。甚至吃完饭后,有人拿来油、蜜、糖浆等东西时,他们就敲响犍稚,大声喧嚷:“给我们师父!给我们亲教师!”这件事世尊也知道了。于是世尊觉得这太不像样,生起了法悚惧,心里思惟:巴利
Svāyaṃ bhagavato ca bhikkhusaṅghassa ca uppanno lābhasakkāro ekato hutvā dvinnaṃ mahānadīnaṃ udakamiva appameyyo ahosi. Kamena bhikkhū paccayagarukā paccayabāhulikā ahesuṃ. Pacchābhattampi telamadhuphāṇitādīsu āhaṭesu gaṇḍiṃyeva paharitvā ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyassa detha, upajjhāyassa dethā’’ti uccāsaddamahāsaddaṃ karonti. Sā ca nesaṃ pavatti bhagavatopi pākaṭā ahosi. Tato bhagavā ananucchavikanti dhammasaṃvegaṃ uppādetvā cintesi –
不能因为资具不如法就制定学处。因为善男子的沙门修行本来就离不开资具。来吧,我来教导法嗣的行道。对于想要学戒的善男子们来说,这将会像学处的制定一样,也像安放在城门口的全身镜一样。就像在城门口安放一面全身镜,四种姓的人照见自己的影像后,就会舍弃过失、变得没有瑕疵;同样,想要学戒的善男子们,想以修行上的庄严来庄严自己,只要作意这个以全身镜为比喻的教说,舍弃财物嗣的行道,圆满法嗣的行道,很快就能终结生老死。世尊就是依着这个因缘,宣说了这部经。巴利
‘‘Paccayā akappiyāti na sakkā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetuṃ. Paccayapaṭibaddhā hi kulaputtānaṃ samaṇadhammavutti. Handāhaṃ dhammadāyādapaṭipadaṃ desemi. Sā sikkhākāmānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ sikkhāpadapaññatti viya bhavissati nagaradvāre ṭhapitasabbakāyikaādāso viya ca, yathā hi nagaradvāre ṭhapite sabbakāyike ādāse cattāro vaṇṇā attano chāyaṃ disvā vajjaṃ pahāya niddosā honti, evameva sikkhākāmā kulaputtā payogamaṇḍanena attānaṃ maṇḍetukāmā imaṃ sabbakāyikādāsūpamaṃ desanaṃ āvajjitvā āmisadāyādapaṭipadaṃ vajjetvā dhammadāyādapaṭipadaṃ pūrentā khippameva jātijarāmaraṇassa antaṃ karissantī’’ti. Imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi.
在这里,“诸比丘,你们要成为我的法嗣,不要成为财物嗣”,意思就是:“诸比丘,你们要成为我法的继承者,不要成为财物的继承者。你们要领受我的法,不要领受我的财物。”这里说的就是这个意思。其中,“法”有两种:非权说的法和权说的法。“财物”也有两种:非权说的财物和权说的财物。怎么区分呢?道、果、涅槃这九种出世间法,就是非权说的法,是已生起的法,无论用什么权宜的说法、什么理由或什么借口,都不能叫它“法”。而那些以趣向还灭为依托的善法,比如有人为了希求还灭而行布施、受持戒律、做布萨羯磨、用香花等供养塔庙、听闻或宣说法、修习禅那与等至,这样修行,逐渐证得不死的涅槃——这就是权说的法。同样,衣服等四种资具就是非权说的财物,无论用什么权宜的说法、什么理由或什么借口,都不能叫它“财物”。而那些以趣向轮转为依托的善法,比如有人希求轮转、想要获得生存的福报而行布施……乃至修习等至,这样修行,逐渐获得天界或人间的成就——这就叫权说的财物。巴利
Tattha dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādāti dhammassa me dāyādā, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisassa. Yo mayhaṃ dhammo, tassa paṭiggāhakā bhavatha, yañca kho mayhaṃ āmisaṃ, tassa mā paṭiggāhakā bhavathāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha dhammopi duvidho – nippariyāyadhammo, pariyāyadhammoti. Āmisampi duvidhaṃ – nippariyāyāmisaṃ, pariyāyāmisanti. Kathaṃ? Maggaphalanibbānabhedo hi navavidhopi lokuttaradhammo nippariyāyadhammo nibbattitadhammo, na yena kenaci pariyāyena kāraṇena vā lesena vā dhammo. Yaṃ panidaṃ vivaṭṭūpanissitaṃ kusalaṃ, seyyathidaṃ, idhekacco vivaṭṭaṃ patthento dānaṃ deti, sīlaṃ samādiyati, uposathakammaṃ karoti, gandhamālādīhi vatthupūjaṃ karoti, dhammaṃ suṇāti deseti jhānasamāpattiyo nibbatteti, evaṃ karonto anupubbena nippariyāyadhammaṃ amataṃ nibbānaṃ paṭilabhati, ayaṃ pariyāyadhammo. Tathā cīvarādayo cattāro paccayā nippariyāyāmisameva, na aññena pariyāyena kāraṇena vā lesena vā āmisaṃ. Yaṃ panidaṃ vaṭṭagāmikusalaṃ, seyyathidaṃ, idhekacco vaṭṭaṃ patthento sampattibhavaṃ icchamāno dānaṃ deti…pe… samāpattiyo nibbatteti, evaṃ karonto anupubbena devamanussasampattiṃ paṭilabhati, idaṃ pariyāyāmisaṃ nāma.
在这里,非引申义的法也只属于世尊。因为比丘们正是由于世尊的宣说,才证得道、果和涅槃。经中也这样说:“婆罗门,那位世尊是未生之道的令生者,未起之道的令起者,未说之道的宣说者;他是道的知者、道的通达者、精通道者。而如今弟子们则随道而行,后来具足而住。”(《中部》3.79)又说:“贤友,那位世尊以所知而知,以所见而见;他已成为眼、成为智、成为法、成为梵;他是说者、讲述者、意义的引导者、不死法的施与者、法主、如来。”(《中部》1.203)引申义的法也同样只属于世尊。因为正是由于世尊的教导,人们才知道:“为了希求还灭而布施……乃至修成诸等至,就会逐渐获得不死的涅槃。”非引申义的财物也唯属世尊。因为正是由于世尊的允许,比丘们才从耆婆衣这件事开始,得到了上等衣服。正如世尊所说:“诸比丘,我允许居士衣。谁愿意,就做粪扫衣者;谁愿意,就接受居士衣。诸比丘,无论怎样,我所赞叹的只是知足。”(《大品》337)巴利
Tattha nippariyāyadhammopi bhagavatoyeva santako. Bhagavatā hi kathitattā bhikkhū maggaphalanibbānāni adhigacchanti. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘so hi brāhmaṇa bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā, asañjātassa maggassa sañjanetā, anakkhātassa maggassa akkhātā, maggaññū maggavidū maggakovido. Maggānugā ca pana etarahi sāvakā viharanti pacchā samannāgatā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.79) ca – ‘‘so hāvuso, bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti, passaṃ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato’’ti (ma. ni. 1.203) ca. Pariyāyadhammopi bhagavatoyeva santako. Bhagavatā hi kathitattā evaṃ jānanti ‘‘vivaṭṭaṃ patthetvā dānaṃ dento…pe… samāpattiyo nibbattento anukkamena amataṃ nibbānaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti. Nippariyāyāmisampi ca bhagavatoyeva santakaṃ. Bhagavatā hi anuññātattāyeva bhikkhūhi jīvakavatthuṃ ādiṃ katvā paṇītacīvaraṃ laddhaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gahapaticīvaraṃ. Yo icchati, paṃsukūliko hotu, yo icchati, gahapaticīvaraṃ sādiyatu. Itarītarenapāhaṃ, bhikkhave, santuṭṭhiṃyeva vaṇṇemī’’ti (mahāva. 337).
从前,比丘们得不到精美的团食,只能按家户顺序乞食,吃钵里零散的食物。后来世尊住在王舍城时,这样开许:“诸比丘,我允许僧团食、指定食、邀请食、筹食、半月食、布萨食、初日食。”(《小品》325)因为世尊这样开许,比丘们才得到了精美的食物。坐卧处也是这样。从前,比丘们只有未经建造的山崖、树下等作为坐卧处。后来世尊这样开许:“诸比丘,我允许五种住处。”(《小品》294)因为世尊这样开许,比丘们才得到了精舍、殿堂、重楼、平顶屋、石窟这些坐卧处。还有药,从前比丘们只用陈弃药作药。因为世尊这样开许:“诸比丘,我允许五种药,就是:酥油、鲜奶油、油、蜂蜜、糖。”(《大品》260)以这种方式开许之后,比丘们才得到了种种药。巴利
Pubbe ca bhikkhū paṇītapiṇḍapātaṃ nālatthuṃ. Sapadānapiṇḍiyālopabhojanā evāhesuṃ. Tehi rājagahe viharantena bhagavatā – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, saṅghabhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ nimantanaṃ salākabhattaṃ pakkhikaṃ uposathikaṃ pāṭipadika’’nti (cūḷava. 325) evaṃ anuññātattāyeva paṇītabhojanaṃ laddhaṃ. Tathā senāsanaṃ. Pubbe hi akatapabbhārarukkhamūlādisenāsanāyeva bhikkhū ahesuṃ. Te ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañca leṇānī’’ti (cūḷava. 294) evaṃ bhagavatā anuññātattāyeva vihāro aḍḍhayogo pāsādo hammiyaṃ guhāti imāni senāsanāni labhiṃsu. Pubbe ca muttaharītakeneva bhesajjaṃ akaṃsu. Te bhagavatāyeva – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañca bhesajjāni, seyyathidaṃ, sappi, navanītaṃ, telaṃ, madhu, phāṇita’’nti (mahāva. 260) evamādinā nayena anuññātattā nānābhesajjāni labhiṃsu.
即使是方便说的财物,也同样是世尊自己的东西。正是因为世尊亲口说过,人们才知道:“想要求得福报的人,布施、持戒……乃至修成各种禅定之后,就会一步步获得方便说所指的天上福报和人间福报。”正因为非方便说的法和方便说的法、非方便说的财物和方便说的财物,全都是世尊自己的东西,所以世尊为了显示自己就是这一切的主人,才说:“比丘们,你们要做我的法继承人,不要做财物继承人。”巴利
Pariyāyāmisampi bhagavatoyeva santakaṃ. Bhagavatā hi kathitattā yeva jānanti – ‘‘sampattibhavaṃ patthento dānaṃ datvā sīlaṃ…pe… samāpattiyo nibbattetvā anukkamena pariyāyāmisaṃ dibbasampattiṃ manussasampattiṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti. Tadeva, yasmā nippariyāyadhammopi pariyāyadhammopi nippariyāyāmisampi pariyāyāmisampi bhagavatoyeva santakaṃ, tasmā tattha attano sāmibhāvaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha mā āmisadāyādā’’ti.
属于我的法有两种,你们要成为它的继承人;而那属于我的财物,你们不要成为它的继承人。你们要成为法这份家业的拥有者,不要成为财物这份家业的拥有者。因为有人在胜者的教法里出家后,却以资具为第一,活在四种渴爱生起的地方,在法随法行的实践上丢下了自己的担子,这样的人就叫财物继承人。你们不要成为那样的人。反过来,有人对允许使用的资具,依靠少欲等品质,经过如理考量之后再受用,以修行为第一而安住,安住在四种圣种里,这样的人就叫法继承人。你们应当成为这样的人——这就是这句话的意思。巴利
Yo mayhaṃ santako duvidhopi dhammo, tassa dāyādā bhavatha. Yañca kho etaṃ mayhameva santakaṃ āmisaṃ, tassa dāyādā mā bhavatha. Dhammakoṭṭhāsasseva sāmino bhavatha, mā āmisakoṭṭhāsassa. Yo hi jinasāsane pabbajitvā paccayaparamo viharati catūsu taṇhuppādesu sandissamāno nikkhittadhuro dhammānudhammappaṭipattiyaṃ, ayaṃ āmisadāyādo nāma. Tādisā mā bhavatha. Yo pana anuññātapaccayesu appicchatādīni nissāya paṭisaṅkhā sevamāno paṭipattiparamo viharati catūsu ariyavaṃsesu sandissamāno, ayaṃ dhammadāyādo nāma. Tādisā bhavathāti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,如果有人在这里会这样想,或者将来会这样想:“世尊是不是不希望弟子们得到利养,才这样说呢?”为了表明“我正是希望他们得到极为殊胜的利养,才这样说”,所以说道:我对你们有慈悯……不是财物嗣。巴利
Idāni yesaṃ tattha etadahosi, bhavissati vā anāgatamaddhānaṃ ‘‘kiṃ nu kho bhagavā sāvakānaṃ alābhatthiko evamāhā’’ti, tesaṃ atipaṇītalābhatthiko ahaṃ evaṃ vadāmīti dassetumāha atthi me tumhesu…pe… no āmisadāyādāti.
这句话的意思是:我对你们有慈悯、有悲心,希望你们得到利益——到底因为什么理由、用什么方法,才能让弟子们成为法的继承者,拥有法财的份额,而不是成为财物的继承者呢?他心里的想法是这样的:据说,世尊看到那些看重财物的人,因为财物而失足跌倒——首先在过去时,如迦毗罗比丘,以“僧伽梨都烧起来了”等说法(《波罗夷》230;《相应部》2.218)所提到的恶比丘、比丘尼、学戒女等数百人,他们填满恶趣;也看到在自己教法中出家的提婆达多等人同样如此。另一方面,他看到重视法的舍利弗、目犍连、大迦叶等人,证得了神通、无碍解等功德。因此,为了让他们脱离恶趣、成就一切功德,世尊才这样说:“我对你们有慈悯,怎样能让弟子们成为法嗣,而不是财物嗣呢?”而且,看重资具的人,在四众当中就像假币,又像熄灭的炭火,没有光焰,没有威势。反之,心已转离而重视法的人,具足威势,就像狮子一样,能降伏一切。因此世尊也这样说:“我对你们……不希望你们成为财物嗣。”巴利
Tassāyamattho – atthi me tumhesu anukampā anuddayā hitesitā, kena nu kho kāraṇena kena upāyena sāvakā dhammadāyādā assu dhammakoṭṭhāsasāmino, no āmisadāyādāti. Ayaṃ pana adhippāyo, passati kira bhagavā āmisagarukānaṃ āmise upakkhalitānaṃ atītakāle tāva kapilassa bhikkhuno, ‘‘saṅghāṭipi ādittā hotī’’tiādinā (pārā. 230; saṃ. ni. 2.218) nayena āgatapāpabhikkhubhikkhunīsikkhamānādīnañca anekasatānaṃ apāyaparipūraṇattaṃ attano sāsane pabbajitānañca devadattādīnaṃ. Dhammagarukānaṃ pana sāriputtamoggallānamahākassapādīnaṃ abhiññāpaṭisambhidādiguṇappaṭilābhaṃ. Tasmā tesaṃ apāyā parimuttiṃ sabbaguṇasampattiñca icchanto āha – ‘‘atthi me tumhesu anukampā kinti me sāvakā dhammadāyādā bhaveyyuṃ, no āmisadāyādā’’ti. Paccayagaruko ca catuparisantare kūṭakahāpaṇo viya nibbutaṅgāro viya ca nittejo nippabho hoti. Tato vivattitacitto dhammagaruko tejavā sīhova abhibhuyyacārī, tasmāpi evamāha – ‘‘atthi me…pe… no āmisadāyādā’’ti.
世尊这样说“诸比丘,你们要成为我的法嗣,不要成为财物嗣”,是出于慈悯,希望弟子们得到更殊胜的利益,而不是不希望他们得到利益。说完这番话之后,现在为了显示不遵行这个教诫的过患,他说“诸比丘,你们……不成为法嗣”。其中“你们也会因此成为应被谴责者”的意思是:你们也会因为处于财物嗣的状态、而非处于法嗣的状态,而成为应被谴责者。也就是说,会被指出、被区分、被判定为“世尊的弟子以财物嗣的方式而住,不以法嗣的方式而住”,成为智者所呵斥的对象。怎么讲呢?就是“世尊的弟子以财物嗣的方式而住,不以法嗣的方式而住”。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’’ti idaṃ anukampāya paṇītataraṃ lābhaṃ icchantena vuttaṃ, no alābhatthikenāti sāvetvā idāni imassa ovādassa akaraṇe ādīnavaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tumhe ca me, bhikkhave…pe… no dhammadāyādā’’ti. Tattha tumhepi tena ādiyā bhaveyyāthāti tumhepi tena āmisadāyādabhāvena no dhammadāyādabhāvena ādiyā bhaveyyātha. Apadisitabbā visuṃ kātabbā vavatthapetabbā, viññūhi gārayhā bhaveyyāthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kinti? Āmisadāyādā satthusāvakā viharanti, no dhammadāyādāti.
我也同样会因为这件事而受到指责:我会因为你们成了财物继承人、而不是法继承人,而成为该被指责的人。怎么说呢?就是成了财物继承人……等等。世尊说这番话,是为了让他们变得非常柔软调顺。这里的意思是:如果你们贪着财物而行,有智慧的人就会指责我:“他明明是一切知者,怎么就不能让自己的弟子成为法继承人,反而让他们成了财物继承人呢?”就好比看到威仪不整的比丘,人们会指责他的老师和亲教师:“这是谁的同住弟子,谁的徒弟?”又好比看到行为恶劣、破戒的善家男孩或善家女孩,人们会指责他们的父母:“这是谁的儿子,谁的女儿?”同样,有智慧的人也会指责我:“他明明是一切知者,怎么就不能让自己的弟子成为法继承人,反而让他们成了财物继承人呢?”巴利
Ahampi tena ādiyo bhaveyyanti ahampi tena tumhākaṃ āmisadāyādabhāvena no dhammadāyādabhāvena gārayho bhaveyyaṃ. Kinti? Āmisa…pe… dāyādāti. Idaṃ bhagavā tesaṃ atīva mudukaraṇatthamāha. Ayañhi ettha adhippāyo – sace, bhikkhave, tumhe āmisalolā carissatha, tattha viññū maṃ garahissanti ‘‘kathañhi nāma sabbaññū samāno attano sāvake dhammadāyāde no āmisadāyāde kātuṃ na sakkotī’’ti. Seyyathāpi nāma anākappasampanne bhikkhū disvā ācariyupajjhāye garahanti ‘‘kassime saddhivihārikā, kassantevāsikā’’ti; seyyathā vā pana kulakumārake vā kulakumārikāyo vā dussīle pāpadhamme disvā mātāpitaro garahanti ‘‘kassime puttā, kassa dhītaro’’ti; evameva maṃ viññū garahissanti ‘‘kathañhi nāma sabbaññū samāno attano sāvake dhammadāyāde no āmisadāyāde kātuṃ na sakkotī’’ti.
世尊这样先指出不遵行这个教诫的过患,再说明遵行它的功德,然后说“你们也……从我……”等等。这里,“我也会因此不成为被指责的人”意思是:就像看见一些年轻比丘圆满履行义务、通晓诵习与问答、威仪具足如百岁上座,人们会问:“这是谁的同住弟子,谁的依止弟子?”当被告知是某位长老的弟子时,老师和亲教师就不会被指责、不会受呵责。同样,我因为你们是法嗣而不是财物嗣,当有人问:“谁的弟子在修行那罗迦行道、都瓦咤迦行道、月喻行道、车乘行道、大牛角娑罗林行道、大空行道,于四资具知足、乐于修习、于圣种姓现证,心从对资具的贪著中抽离,像从云中解脱的月亮一样安住?”回答说是“沙门乔达摩的弟子”时,智者就不会指责我、不会呵责我,而会说:“世尊真是一切知者,确实能让弟子舍弃财物嗣的行道,而成就法嗣的行道。”应当了知这一句的意趣,其余在黑分中所说的内容,则按相反的道理来理解。世尊这样说明了遵行这个教诫的功德之后,现在把这教诫付嘱给比丘们,说道:“因此,比丘们……不要成为财物嗣。”巴利
Evaṃ imassa ovādassa akaraṇe ādīnavaṃ dassetvā karaṇe ānisaṃsaṃ dassento tumhe ca metiādimāha. Tattha ahampi tena na ādiyo bhaveyyanti seyyathāpi nāma vattaparipūrake daharabhikkhū uddesaparipucchāsampanne vassasatikatthere viya ākappasampanne disvā, kassa saddhivihārikā, kassantevāsikāti, asukassāti, ‘‘patirūpaṃ therassa, paṭibalo vata ovadituṃ anusāsitu’’nti ācariyupajjhāyā na ādiyā na gārayhā bhavanti, evameva ahampi tena tumhākaṃ dhammadāyādabhāvena no āmisadāyādabhāvena kassa sāvakā nālakapaṭipadaṃ tuvaṭṭakapaṭipadaṃ candūpamapaṭipadaṃ rathavinītapaṭipadaṃ mahāgosiṅgasālapaṭipadaṃ mahāsuññatapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannā catupaccayasantosabhāvanārāmaariyavaṃsesu sakkhibhūtā paccayagedhato vivattamānasā abbhā muttacandasamā viharantīti; ‘‘samaṇassa gotamassā’’ti vutte ‘‘sabbaññū vata bhagavā, asakkhi vata sāvake āmisadāyādapaṭipadaṃ chaḍḍāpetvā dhammadāyādapaṭipattipūrake kātu’’nti viññūnaṃ na ādiyo na gārayho bhaveyyanti. Evamimasmiṃ pade adhippāyaṃ ñatvā sesaṃ kaṇhapakkhe vuttanayapaccanīkena veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ imassa ovādassa karaṇe ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā idāni taṃ ovādaṃ niyyātento āha – ‘‘tasmā tiha me, bhikkhave…pe… no āmisadāyādā’’ti.
30 世尊这样把教诫交代完毕之后,现在为了称赞那些圆满践行法嗣之道的人,就在这里说“在此,比丘们,我……”等等。因为听了世尊的称赞,确实会有人为了这个目标去修行。巴利
30. Evamimaṃ ovādaṃ niyyātetvā idāni tassā dhammadāyādapaṭipattiyā paripūrakāriṃ thometuṃ idhāhaṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Bhagavato hi thomanaṃ sutvāpi hontiyeva tadatthāya paṭipajjitāro.
这里,“在此”是一个不变词。“已食”就是已经吃过,意思是已经完成了吃饭这件事。“已受请拒食”是通过足量受请拒食而成为已受请拒食,意思是已经随自己的需要吃饱,拒绝再进食,已经满足了。受请拒食有四种:雨安居自恣、资具邀请、非残食拒食、足量受请拒食。其中,“诸比丘,我允许已住雨安居的比丘以三事自恣”,这是雨安居自恣。“尊者,我想以药物邀请僧团四个月”,以及“除了再邀请、除了常邀请”,这是资具邀请。“所谓已受请拒食,就是:座位已经摆好,食物已经摆好,有人站在伸手可及的范围内递送,拒绝已经表现出来,这就叫已受请拒食”,这是非残食拒食。“以精美的嚼食和啖食亲手使他满足、劝他吃饱”,这是足量受请拒食。这里指的就是这一种。因此说“已受请拒食,就是通过足量受请拒食而成为已受请拒食”。巴利
Tattha idhāti nipātapadametaṃ. Bhuttāvīti bhuttavā, katabhattakiccoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pavāritoti yāvadatthapavāraṇāya pavārito, yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjitvā paṭikkhittabhojano tittovāti vuttaṃ hoti. Catubbidhā hi pavāraṇā vassaṃvuṭṭhapavāraṇā paccayapavāraṇā anatirittapavāraṇā yāvadatthapavāraṇāti. Tattha, ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave, vassaṃvuṭṭhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi pavāretu’’nti (mahāva. 209) ayaṃ vassaṃvuṭṭhapavāraṇā. ‘‘Icchāmahaṃ, bhante, saṅghaṃ catumāsaṃ bhesajjena pavāretu’’nti (pāci. 303) ca ‘‘aññatra punapavāraṇāya aññatra niccapavāraṇāyā’’ti (pāci. 307) ca ayaṃ paccayapavāraṇā. ‘‘Pavārito nāma asanaṃ paññāyati, bhojanaṃ paññāyati, hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharati, paṭikkhepo paññāyati, eso pavārito nāmā’’ti (pāci. 239) ayaṃ anatirittapavāraṇā. ‘‘Paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.297, 358) ayaṃ yāvadatthapavāraṇā. Ayamidha adhippetā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pavāritoti yāvadatthapavāraṇāya pavārito’’ti.
“饱满”是指因食物而饱满。“完毕”是指已经吃完食物,这里要理解为省略了后面的词。意思是:该吃的量都已经吃了,我的进食行为已经结束。“满足”是从“dhā”这个词根来的,或者也可以说,因为没有饥饿之苦而称为安乐。“足量”是指我通过食物所得到的全部所需都已经达成。在这里,前三个词由后三个词来证明。因为一个“完毕”的人,就是已经吃过的人;一个“满足”的人,就是因为足量而受请拒食的人;一个“足量”的人,就是“饱满”的人。或者,前三个词是后三个词的原因:因为已经吃过,所以“完毕”;因为已经受请拒食,所以“满足”;因为“饱满”,所以“足量”。应当知道,这些都是基于某种安立而说的。巴利
Paripuṇṇoti bhojanena paripuṇṇo. Pariyositoti pariyositabhojano, uttarapadalopo daṭṭhabbo . Yāvatakaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ, tāvatakaṃ bhuttaṃ hoti, avasitā me bhojanakiriyāti attho. Suhitoti dhāto, jighacchādukkhābhāvena vā sukhitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Yāvadatthoti yāvatako me bhojanena attho, so sabbo pattoti. Ettha ca purimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pacchimāni sādhakāni. Yo hi pariyosito, so bhuttāvī hoti. Yo ca suhito, so yāvadatthapavāraṇāya pavārito. Yo yāvadattho, so paripuṇṇoti. Purimāni vā pacchimānaṃ. Yasmā hi bhuttāvī, tasmā pariyosito. Yasmā pavārito, tasmā suhito. Yasmā paripuṇṇo, tasmā yāvadatthoti. Sabbañcetaṃ parikappetvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“可能”(siyā)这个词,既用于确定的情况,也用于不确定的情况。像“地界可能是内的,也可能是外的”(《中部》3.349),这是确定的情况。“可能有某位比丘犯戒或违犯”(《中部》3.39),这是不确定的情况。在这里,两种用法都说得通。“多余的”,就是多余的法,也就是应当丢弃的法。意思是:它是多余的,而且应当丢弃,无须做任何其他事。“那时”,就是在那个时候。“被饥饿与羸弱所征服”,就是被饥饿和羸弱所侵袭、所缠住,长达八天或十天。在那些人当中,有些人虽然饥饿却不虚弱,能忍得住饥饿,但这些人并不是那样。为了说明这一点,所以把饥饿和羸弱两者都说了出来。“我对他们”,就是我对他们。“如果你们愿意”,就是如果你们希望。巴利
Siyāti ekaṃse ca vikappane ca. ‘‘Pathavīdhātu siyā ajjhattikā, siyā bāhirā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.349) ekaṃse. ‘‘Siyā aññatarassa bhikkhuno āpatti vītikkamo’’ti (ma. ni. 3.39) vikappane. Idha ubhayampi vaṭṭati. Atirekova atirekadhammo. Tathā chaḍḍanīya dhammo. Adhiko ca chaḍḍetabbo ca, na aññaṃ kiñci kātabboti attho. Athāti tamhi kāle. Jighacchādubbalyaparetāti jighacchāya ca dubbalyena ca paretā phuṭṭhā anugatā ca aṭṭhapi dasapi divasāni. Tattha keci jighacchitāpi na dubbalā honti, sakkonti jighacchaṃ sahituṃ. Ime pana na tādisāti dassetuṃ ubhayamāha. Tyāhanti te ahaṃ. Sace ākaṅkhathāti yadi icchatha.
在“少草处”这句中,“少草”指的是草还没长起来的地方。意思是:在那个地方,不存在会因团食覆盖而毁坏的草。这样一来,就同时包含了没有草的地方和大片草丛——因为在那种地方,就算用车子把团食倒下去,草也不会被弄坏。说这些,是为了不违犯损害植物类的学处。巴利
Appahariteti apparuḷhaharite, yasmiṃ ṭhāne piṇḍapātajjhottharaṇena vinassanadhammāni tiṇāni natthi, tasminti attho. Tena nittiṇañca mahātiṇagahanaṃ ca, yattha sakaṭenapi chaḍḍite piṇḍapāte tiṇāni na vinassanti, tañca ṭhānaṃ pariggahitaṃ hoti. Bhūtagāmasikkhāpadassa hi avikopanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ.
在没有生命的地方,指的是没有微小生物的地方,或者指没有会因团食倾倒而死亡之生物的大片水域。因为在小水洼里,把饭食倒进去搅浑时,微小的生物就会死;而在大湖之类的地方就不会这样。这是为了保护微小生物才这么说的。我将使它沉没,意思是我将把它浸入水中。巴利
Appāṇaketi nippāṇake piṇḍapātajjhottharaṇena maritabbapāṇakarahite vā mahāudakakkhandhe. Parittodake eva hi bhattapakkhepena āḷulite sukhumapāṇakā maranti, na mahātaḷākādīsūti. Pāṇakānurakkhaṇatthañhi etaṃ vuttaṃ. Opilāpessāmīti nimujjāpessāmi.
“其中一位”是指那两位当中的一位。对于善巧听闻这个法教、并且一再反复思惟的人,世尊才说“然而,这已说过了”。这里的“说过”(vutta)一词,也出现在剃发的语境中,比如“年轻的诈伪婆罗门,剃了头”;也出现在种植的语境中,比如“就像秋天播在田里的种子,会生长起来”;也出现在言说的语境中,比如“这是世尊所说,这是阿罗汉所说”。但在这里,应当理解为“已说过”。“然而,这已说过了”——这就是这句话的意思。“某种食财”是指四种资具食财中的任意一种,也就是一种。“此者”(yadidaṃ)是虚词,在各种性、数、格的表达中,都要根据上下文来转换它的意思。在这里,它的意思是“那个就是”,也就是“那叫做团食的东西”。这样说,就是在表达“这是食财中的一种”。“那我确实应当……”意思是“我确实应该……”。“如此”是指,就像现在度过这一刻一样,同样地度过一日一夜。“度过”就是消磨掉、让它过去。巴利
Tatrekassāti tesu dvīsu ekassa. Yo imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ suṭṭhu sutavā punappunaṃ āvajjeti ca , taṃ sandhāyāha vuttaṃ kho panetanti. Ayaṃ vutta-saddo kesohāraṇepi dissati ‘‘kāpaṭiko māṇavo daharo vuttasiro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.426). Ropitepi ‘‘yathā sāradikaṃ bījaṃ, khette vuttaṃ virūhatī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.3.31). Kathitepi ‘‘vuttamidaṃ bhagavatā, vuttamidaṃ arahatā’’tiādīsu. Idha pana kathite daṭṭhabbo. Kathitaṃ kho panetanti ayañhissa attho. Āmisaññataranti catunnaṃ paccayāmisānaṃ aññataraṃ, ekanti attho. Yadidanti nipāto, sabbaliṅgavibhattivacanesu tādisova tattha tattha atthato pariṇāmetabbo. Idha panāssa yo esoti attho. Yo eso piṇḍapāto nāma. Idaṃ āmisaññataranti vuttaṃ hoti. Yaṃnūnāhanti sādhu vatāhaṃ. Evanti yathā idāni imaṃ khaṇaṃ vītināmemi, evameva rattindivaṃ. Vītināmeyyanti khepeyyaṃ ativattāpeyyaṃ.
所谓“他那团食”是指:即使这团食物连整个天界在内的一切世间都该用头顶来恭敬接受,即使它是善逝吃剩的,他也不去吃它;他一心渴望成为法的继承人,便像头顶着火一样地审察,就带着那样的饥饿和虚弱,这样度过那一日一夜。巴利
So taṃ piṇḍapātanti so taṃ sadevakena lokena sirasā sampaṭicchitabbarūpaṃ sugatātirittampi piṇḍapātaṃ abhuñjitvā dhammadāyādabhāvaṃ ākaṅkhamāno ādittasīsūpamaṃ paccavekkhitvā teneva jighacchādubbalyena evaṃ taṃ rattindivaṃ vītināmeyya.
“接着是第二段”:在这个部分,简要来说是这样的——如果那位比丘心里想:“我何不……(中略)……就这样度过呢?”即使他这样想,出家人要在充满五欲猛兽的村落里寻找团食,就像在猛兽出没的森林里找药一样,也是很难的。而这份团食,既已摆脱了寻找食物的种种过患,又是世尊所剩下的,就好比一位父母双方血统都高贵的刹帝利青年。团食有五种情况不该受用。哪五种呢?因为嫌弃施主而不该受用,心想“这是无耻之徒的东西”;因为来源不清净而不该受用,心想“这是靠比丘尼周旋、让人心生恐惧和猜疑才得来的”;因为怜悯施主而不该受用,心想“供养这份团食的比丘正在挨饿”;自己虽然吃饱了,但出于对学童等身边弟子的悲悯,也不该受用,心想“学童们或其他依附我的人还在挨饿”——可他们其实也都吃饱了;还有,因为对方没有信心而不该受用,心想“供养这份团食的比丘是个没有信心的人”。而世尊已经完全摆脱了这五种情况。因为世尊在知耻者中最为第一,这份团食的来源绝对清净,世尊已经吃饱满足,也没有其他期待回报的人,世间一切有信者中,世尊最为第一。这样想过之后,他受用那份团食……(中略)……就这样度过。到这一步,即使有人不吃而修沙门法,他也没有受用那份本该受用的团食;即使有人吃了而修沙门法,他也是受用了那份本该受用的团食。团食本身没有差别,差别在于人。为了说明这一点,论主说“kiñcāpi”等话。巴利
Atha dutiyassāti imasmiṃ pana vāre esa saṅkhepo, sace so bhikkhu, yaṃnūnāhaṃ…pe… vītināmeyyanti cintento evampi cinteyya, pabbajitena kho vāḷamigākule araññe bhesajjaṃ viya pañcakāmaguṇavāḷākule gāme piṇḍapātopi dukkhaṃ pariyesituṃ. Ayaṃ pana piṇḍapāto iti pariyesanādīnavavimutto ca sugatātiritto cāti ubhato sujātakhattiyakumāro viya hoti, yehi ca pañcahi kāraṇehi piṇḍapāto na paribhuñjitabbo hoti. Seyyathidaṃ, puggalaṃ garahitvā na paribhuñjitabbo hoti ‘‘alajjipuggalassa santako’’ti. Aparisuddhauppattitāya na paribhuñjitabbo hoti ‘‘bhikkhuniparipācanaasantasambhāvanuppanno’’ti. Sāmikānukampāya na paribhuñjitabbo hoti ‘‘piṇḍapātasāmiko bhikkhu jighacchito’’ti. So dhāto tasseva antevāsikādīsu anukampāya na paribhuñjitabbo hoti ‘‘antevāsikā aññe vā tappaṭibaddhā jighacchitā’’ti, tepi dhātā suhitā, apica kho assaddhatāya na paribhuñjitabbo hoti ‘‘piṇḍapātasāmiko bhikkhu assaddho’’ti. Tehi ca kāraṇehi ayaṃ vimutto. Bhagavā hi lajjīnaṃ aggo, parisuddhuppattiko piṇḍapāto, bhagavā ca dhāto suhito, paccāsīsakopi añño puggalo natthi, ye loke saddhā, bhagavā tesaṃ aggoti evaṃ cintetvā ca so taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjitvā…pe… vītināmeyya. Ettāvatā yopi abhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti, sopi bhuñjitabbakameva piṇḍapātaṃ na bhutto hoti. Yopi bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti, sopi bhuñjitabbakameva bhutto hoti. Natthi piṇḍapāte viseso. Puggale pana atthi viseso. Tasmā taṃ dassento kiñcāpi sotiādimāha.
在这里,“kiñcāpi”这个词是用来表示允许和称赞的语气词。它允许什么?允许那位比丘无过失地受用。它称赞什么?称赞吃完之后修习沙门法。这段话的意思是:即使那位比丘确实吃了该吃的,做了该做的,但对我来说,还是前一位比丘——也就是那位拒绝团食而去修习沙门法的比丘——就像两位勇士中更勇猛的那位、两位智者中更有智慧的那位一样,他比第二位比丘更值得恭敬、更值得称赞,更应当被大大地恭敬和称赞。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpīti anujānanappasaṃsanatthe nipāto. Kiṃ anujānāti? Tassa bhikkhuno taṃ anavajjaparibhogaṃ. Kiṃ pasaṃsati? Bhutvā samaṇadhammakaraṇaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti yadipi so bhikkhu evaṃ bhuñjitabbameva bhuñjitvā kātabbameva kareyya. Atha kho asuyeva me purimo bhikkhūti yo purimo bhikkhu tampi piṇḍapātaṃ paṭikkhipitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti, soyeva mama dvīsu sūresu sūrataro viya dvīsu paṇḍitesu paṇḍitataro viya ca pujjataro ca pāsaṃsataro ca, dutiyabhikkhuto atirekena pūjanīyo ca pasaṃsanīyo cāti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,为了用道理来证明这个意思,世尊说:“这是什么原因呢?”等等。它的意思是:在这里,你们可能会想:“为什么那位比丘在世尊看来更值得恭敬、更值得赞叹呢?”回答是“因为那件事”——因为那位比丘拒绝团食,能在长时间里导向少欲……乃至……精进努力。怎么导向呢?假如他日后对资具生起过分贪求、邪恶欲望或强烈贪欲,那时,这个拒绝团食的行为就会像钩子一样制止他。他会这样反省:“喂!你连善逝所剩的团食都拒绝了,现在竟然生起这样的欲望!”同样,当不满足和不肯削减的心生起时,这个办法也能制止它们。这样一来,它就会导向少欲、知足和削减。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ kāraṇena sādhento taṃ kissa hetūtiādimāha. Tassattho, tattha siyā tumhākaṃ, kasmā so bhikkhu bhagavato pujjataro ca pāsaṃsataro cāti? Tañhi tassāti yasmā taṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkhipanaṃ tassa bhikkhuno dīgharattaṃ appicchatāya…pe… vīriyārambhāya saṃvattissati. Kathaṃ? Tassa hi sace aparena samayena paccayesu atricchatā vā pāpicchatā vā mahicchatā vā uppajjissati. Tato naṃ iminā piṇḍapātapaṭikkhepaṅkusena nivāressati ‘‘are tvaṃ sugatātirittampi piṇḍapātaṃ paṭikkhipitvā īdisaṃ icchaṃ uppādesī’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhamāno. Esa nayo asantuṭṭhiyā asaṃlekhassa cuppannassa nivāraṇe. Evaṃ tāvassa appicchatāya santuṭṭhiyā saṃlekhāya saṃvattissati.
关于“易养性”,这里要解释一下:有一种人,自己难伺候,对侍奉他的人也难伺候、难养活。另一种人,自己也好伺候,对侍奉他的人也好伺候、好养活。怎么讲呢?如果有人拿到酸的等食物后,又去找不酸的等食物;在这家拿到食物,却丢到那家去,走遍整个村子,最后端着空钵回到精舍躺下,这种人就是自己难伺候。还有人,别人把钵装满米饭、肉饭等送给他,他却摆出臭脸、不高兴的样子;或者当着施主的面贬低那钵饭,说“你们给的是什么呀”,然后把食物转送给沙弥或在家众,这种人就是对施奉者难伺候。人们看到这种情况,就远远躲开,心想“难伺候的比丘没法供养”。反过来,如果有人不管得到粗劣的还是精美的食物,都满心欢喜地吃完,然后回到精舍做自己的事,这种人就是自己好伺候。还有人对别人布施的,不论少或多、粗或精,都不嫌弃,心里欢喜、面容清净,当着施主的面吃完才离开,这种人就是对施奉者好伺候。人们看到这种情况,就非常信任地说:“我们的尊者真好伺候,一点点就满足,我们自己来供养他吧。”于是承诺下来并供养他。巴利
Subharatāyāti ettha ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā – idhekacco attanopi upaṭṭhākānampi dubbharo hoti dupposo. Ekacco attanopi upaṭṭhākānampi subharo hoti suposo. Kathaṃ? Yo hi ambilādīni laddhā anambilādīni pariyesati, aññassa ghare laddhaṃ aññassa ghare chaḍḍento sabbaṃ gāmaṃ vicaritvā rittapattova vihāraṃ pavisitvā nipajjati, ayaṃ attano dubbharo. Yo pana sālimaṃsodanādīnaṃ patte pūretvā dinnepi dummukhabhāvaṃ anattamanabhāvameva ca dasseti, tesaṃ vā sammukhāva taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ‘‘kiṃ tumhehi dinna’’nti apasādento sāmaṇeragahaṭṭhādīnampi deti , ayaṃ upaṭṭhākānaṃ dubbharo. Etaṃ disvā manussā dūrato parivajjanti dubbharo bhikkhu na sakkā positunti. Yo pana yaṃkiñci lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā laddhā tuṭṭhacittova bhuñjitvā vihāraṃ gantvā attano kammaṃ karoti, ayaṃ attano subharo. Yo ca paresampi appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā dānaṃ ahīḷetvā attamano vippasannamukho hutvā tesaṃ sammukhāva paribhuñjitvā yāti, ayaṃ upaṭṭhākānaṃ subharo. Etaṃ disvā manussā ativiya vissatthā honti – ‘‘amhākaṃ bhadanto subharo thokenapi tussati, mayameva naṃ posissāmā’’ti paṭiññaṃ katvā posenti.
在这里,如果后来他对自己或对侍者生起难养的心,那么他就会用这个拒绝团食的钩子来制止它,这样反省:“你啊,连善逝剩下的团食都拒绝过,现在竟然生起这样的心!”这样,他就会导向易养。如果他生起懈怠,也会用这个钩子来制止它,这样反省:“你啊,那时候连善逝剩下的团食都拒绝,即使被饥饿和虚弱折磨,也还是修习沙门法,今天却沉溺于懈怠!”这样,他就会导向精进策励。这样,他拒绝团食这件事,长久以来就会导向少欲……乃至精进策励。当他这样圆满这五种功德后,就会圆满十种论事。巴利
Tattha sace aparena samayena assa attano vā upaṭṭhākānaṃ vā dubbharatānayena cittaṃ uppajjissati. Tato naṃ iminā piṇḍapātapaṭikkhepaṅkusena nivāressati – ‘‘are tvaṃ sugatātirittampi piṇḍapātaṃ paṭikkhipitvā īdisaṃ cittaṃ uppādesī’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhamāno, evamassa subharatāya saṃvattissati. Sace panassa kosajjaṃ uppajjissati, tampi etenevaṅkusena nivāressati – ‘‘are tvaṃ nāma tadā sugatātirittampi piṇḍapātaṃ paṭikkhipitvā tathā jighacchādubbalyaparetopi samaṇadhammaṃ katvā ajja kosajjamanuyuñjasī’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhamāno, evamassa vīriyārambhāya saṃvattissati. Evamassa idaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkhipanaṃ dīgharattaṃ appicchatāya…pe… vīriyārambhāya saṃvattissati. Evamassime pañca guṇā paripūrā dasa kathāvatthūni paripūressanti.
怎么讲?在这里,经文本身就直接出现了少欲、知足、精进策励这三种,其余的则被归入“削减烦恼”这一项。因为“削减烦恼”正是所有论题的统称。正如经文所说:“阿难,凡是那种能削减烦恼、适合去除心的盖障、完全导向厌离、离贪、灭尽、寂静、证智、正觉、涅槃的论说,也就是:少欲论……”(《中部》3.189, 192)这样详细展开。如此,这五种功德圆满后,就会圆满十种论题。十种论题圆满后,就会圆满三学。巴利
Kathaṃ? Atra hi pāḷiyaṃyeva appicchatāsantuṭṭhitāvīriyārambhavasena tīṇi āgatāni, sesāni sallekhena saṅgahitāni. Idañhi sabbakathāvatthūnaṃ nāmameva, yadidaṃ sallekho. Yathāha – ‘‘yā ca kho ayaṃ, ānanda, kathā abhisallekhikā cetovinīvaraṇasappāyā ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati. Seyyathidaṃ, appicchakathā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.189, 192) vitthāro. Evaṃ ime pañca guṇā paripūrā dasa kathāvatthūni paripūressanti. Dasa kathāvatthūni paripūrāni tisso sikkhā paripūressanti.
怎么讲呢?在这十种论事当中,少欲论、知足论、不混杂论、戒论这四种,都归在增上戒学里。远离论、精进努力论、定论这三种,归在增上心学里。慧论、解脱论、解脱智见论这三种,归在增上慧学里。这样,十种论事圆满,就会让三学圆满;三学圆满,就会让五种无学法蕴圆满。巴利
Kathaṃ? Etesu hi appicchakathā santosakathā asaṃsaggakathā sīlakathāti imā catasso kathā adhisīlasikkhāsaṅgahitāyeva . Pavivekakathā vīriyārambhakathā samādhikathāti imā tisso adhicittasikkhasaṅgahitā . Paññākathā vimuttikathā vimuttiñāṇadassanakathāti imā tisso adhipaññāsikkhāsaṅgahitāti. Evaṃ dasa kathāvatthūni paripūrāni tisso sikkhā paripūressanti. Tisso sikkhā paripūrā pañca asekkhadhammakkhandhe paripūressanti.
怎么会这样呢?因为增上戒学修到圆满时,就是无学圣者的戒蕴;增上心学修到圆满时,就是无学圣者的定蕴;增上慧学修到圆满时,就是无学圣者的慧蕴、解脱蕴、解脱智见蕴。这样一来,三学圆满了,就会让五种无学法蕴圆满;五种法蕴圆满了,就会让不死的涅槃圆满。就像山顶上降下大雨,雨水灌满了山间的沟壑、溪流和支流;这些水满了以后,就灌满小池;小池满了,就灌满大池;大池满了,就灌满小河;小河满了,就灌满大河;大河满了,就灌满大海。同样地,这位比丘这五种功德圆满之后,就会从十种论事开始,一路圆满下去,直到不死的涅槃。这位比丘这样走上了法之继承的道路,就得到了最殊胜的法之继承。世尊清楚地看到这个道理,所以说道:“这是什么原因呢?诸比丘,正是因为那件事,那位比丘……”等等。巴利
Kathaṃ? Paripūrā hi adhisīlasikkhā asekkho sīlakkhandhoyeva hoti, adhicittasikkhā asekkho samādhikkhandho, adhipaññāsikkhā asekkhā paññā-vimutti-vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhā evāti evaṃ tisso sikkhā paripūrā pañca asekkhadhammakkhandhe paripūressanti. Pañca dhammakkhandhā paripūrā amataṃ nibbānaṃ paripūressanti. Seyyathāpi uparipabbate pāvussako mahāmegho abhivuṭṭho pabbatakandarasarasākhā paripūreti. Tā paripūrā kusobbhe, kusobbhā mahāsobbhe, mahāsobbhā kunnadiyo, kunnadiyo mahānadiyo, mahānadiyo mahāsamuddasāgaraṃ paripūrenti; evameva tassa bhikkhuno ime pañca guṇā paripūrā dasa kathāvatthuni ādiṃ katvā yāva amataṃ nibbānaṃ paripūressanti. Evamayaṃ bhikkhu dhammadāyādapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno paramadhammadāyādaṃ labhatīti etamatthaṃ sampassamāno bhagavā ‘‘taṃ kissa hetu tañhi tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno’’tiādimāha.
世尊就这样用理由确立了那位比丘更加值得恭敬、更加值得赞叹,现在为了引导那些比丘达到那种状态,便说了“因此,诸比丘,于我……”等这一段话。这话说的是什么意思呢?就是说:如果有人受用了那份团食之后再去修行沙门法,他就远离了这五种根本功德;如果有人不受用就去修行,他就是这些的有份者。因此世尊才说:“因此,诸比丘……不要成为财食的继承者。”巴利
Evaṃ tassa bhikkhuno pujjatarapāsaṃsatarabhāvaṃ kāraṇena sādhetvā idāni te bhikkhū tathattāya sanniyojento tasmā tiha me bhikkhavetiādimāha. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti, yasmā yo taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ kareyya, so imehi pañcahi mūlaguṇehi paribāhiro. Yo pana abhuñjitvā kareyya, so imesaṃ bhāgī hoti – ‘‘tasmā tiha me, bhikkhave…pe… no āmisadāyādā’’ti.
世尊说这段话,是从缘起讲完的地方开始,一直到“不要成为财食的继承者”这一段经文,都是世尊所开示的。说完这段之后,善逝——也就是因为走上了善妙之道而被称为善逝的世尊——从座位上起身,走进精舍。他从铺设好的殊胜佛座上站起来,进入自己的大香室,当时大众还没有散去。他为什么这样做呢?是为了赞叹法。巴利
Idamavoca bhagavāti idaṃ nidānapariyosānato pabhuti yāva no āmisadāyādāti suttappadesaṃ bhagavā avoca. Idaṃ vatvāna sugatoti idañca suttappadesaṃ vatvāva sobhanāya paṭipadāya gatattā sugatoti saṅkhaṃ pattoyeva bhagavā. Uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisī paññattavarabuddhāsanato uṭṭhahitvā vihāraṃ attano mahāgandhakuṭiṃ pāvisi asambhinnāya eva parisāya. Kasmā dhammathomanatthaṃ.
据说,佛陀在说法还没讲完就进入精舍时,会因为两种原因而进去:要么是为了称赞某个人,要么是为了称赞法。当他为了称赞某个人而进去时,他会这样想:“我只是简略地说了这个纲要,还没有详细展开。那些领受法的比丘们掌握之后,会去亲近阿难或迦旃延,向他们请教。他们会拿我的智慧来对照,然后讲说。接着那些领受法的人又会来问我,我就说:比丘们,阿难讲得好,迦旃延也讲得好。如果你们拿这个义理来问我,我也会同样为你们解答。这样我就称赞了那些人。于是比丘们对他们生起恭敬,去亲近他们;他们也会在义理和法上教导那些比丘。那些比丘受到教导后,圆满三学,就能到达苦的尽头。”巴利
Buddhā kira apariniṭṭhitāya desanāya vihāraṃ pavisantā dvīhi kāraṇehi pavisanti puggalathomanatthaṃ vā dhammathomanatthaṃ vā. Puggalathomanatthaṃ pavisanto evaṃ cintesi – ‘‘imaṃ mayā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, vitthārena avibhattaṃ, dhammapaṭiggāhakā bhikkhū uggahetvā ānandaṃ vā kaccānaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā pucchissanti, te mayhaṃ ñāṇena saṃsandetvā kathessanti, tato dhammapaṭiggāhakā puna maṃ pucchissanti, tesaṃ ahaṃ sukathitaṃ, bhikkhave, ānandena sukathitaṃ kaccānena, maṃ cepi tumhe etamatthaṃ puccheyyātha, ahampi naṃ evameva byākareyyanti evaṃ te puggale thomessāmi, tato tesu gāravaṃ janetvā bhikkhū upasaṅkamissanti, tepi bhikkhū atthe ca dhamme ca niyojessanti, te tehi niyojitā tisso sikkhā paripūrentā dukkhassantaṃ karissantī’’ti.
为了称扬法而走进精舍时,他心里这样想,就像在这里所想的:“等我走进精舍后,舍利弗就坐在这个集会当中,会呵责那些只继承物质供养的人,称赞继承法的人,并且开示法。这样一来,我们两人以一致的意乐和智慧所开示的教法,就会既是最上等的,又是受到敬重的,像石伞一样稳固。从渡过四种暴流的意义来说,它就像停在渡口的船;从上路前行的意义来说,它就像四匹良马所拉的车。又好比国王在集会中立下规矩说‘这样做的人会受这样的惩罚’,然后起身离座登上宫殿,仍坐在那里的将军就传达国王立下的规矩;同样,我所立下的开示,坐在这集会中的舍利弗会加以称赞并开示。这样,我们两人以智慧所开示的教法,就会更有力量,像正午的太阳一样炽然照耀。”就这样,他为了称扬法,从座位起身,走进了精舍。巴利
Dhammathomanatthaṃ pavisanto evaṃ cintesi, yathā idheva cintesi – ‘‘mayi vihāraṃ paviṭṭhe tameva āmisadāyādaṃ garahanto dhammadāyādañca thomento imissaṃyeva parisati nisinno sāriputto dhammaṃ desessati, evaṃ dvinnampi amhākaṃ ekajjhāsayāya matiyā desitā ayaṃ desanā aggā ca garukā ca bhavissati pāsāṇacchattasadisā. Caturoghanittharaṇaṭṭhena titthe ṭhapitā nāvā viya maggagamanaṭṭhena catuyuttaājaññaratho viya ca bhavissati. Yathā ca ‘evaṃ karontassa ayaṃ daṇḍo’ti parisati āṇaṃ ṭhapetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pāsādaṃ āruḷhe rājini tattheva nisinno senāpati taṃ raññā ṭhapitaṃ āṇaṃ pavatteti; evampi mayā ṭhapitaṃ desanaṃ imissaṃyeva parisati nisinno sāriputto thometvā desessati, evaṃ dvinnampi amhākaṃ matiyā desitā ayaṃ desanā balavatarā majjhanhikasūriyo viya pajjalissatī’’ti. Evamidha dhammathomanatthaṃ uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisi.
在这些情况下应当知道,世尊就在坐着的座位上消失,以心念的方式进入精舍。因为如果他以身体的方式前往,所有在场的大众都会围绕世尊一同前去,而大众一旦散乱一次,就再难重新聚集。所以,世尊只以心念的方式进入。巴利
Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu bhagavā nisinnāsaneyeva antarahito cittagatiyā vihāraṃ pavisatīti veditabbo. Yadi hi kāyagatiyā gaccheyya, sabbā parisā bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā gaccheyya, sā ekavāraṃ bhinnā puna dussannipātā bhaveyyāti bhagavā cittagatiyā eva pāvisi.
31 31. 当世尊这样进入之后,尊者舍利弗想随顺世尊的心意来赞叹那法,于是就在那里……(中略)……说了这样的话。这里,“尊者”是亲切的称呼。“舍利弗”是那位长老的名字,而且是随母得名,不是随父得名。因为他是婆罗门女鲁波舍利的儿子,所以称为舍利弗。“离去不久”,意思是离去之后没过多久。关于“贤友,诸比丘”:诸佛世尊招呼弟子时,称“诸比丘”;而弟子们心想“我们不要和佛陀一样”,所以先称“贤友”,然后再说“诸比丘”。被佛陀招呼的比丘僧团回答“尊者”;被弟子招呼时,则回答“贤友”。巴利
31. Evaṃ paviṭṭhe pana bhagavati bhagavato adhippāyānurūpaṃ taṃ dhammaṃ thometukāmo tatra khoāyasmā sāriputto…pe…etadavoca. Tattha āyasmāti piyavacanametaṃ. Sāriputtoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ, tañca kho mātito, na pitito. Rūpasāriyā hi brāhmaṇiyā so putto, tasmā sāriputtoti vuccati. Acirapakkantassāti pakkantassa sato nacirena. Āvuso, bhikkhaveti ettha pana buddhā bhagavanto sāvake ālapantā bhikkhaveti ālapanti. Sāvakā pana buddhehi sadisā mā homāti āvusoti paṭhamaṃ vatvā pacchā bhikkhaveti bhaṇanti. Buddhehi ca ālapito bhikkhusaṅgho bhadanteti paṭivacanaṃ deti, sāvakehi āvusoti.
“贤友,到底在什么范围内呢?”在这里,“到底在什么范围内”是限定范围的用语,意思就是“以多少程度”。“nu”这个字是表示疑问的。“kho”这个字只是语助词。“导师远离而住”,是说导师以三种远离而住,也就是身远离、心远离、依远离。“不修学远离”,是说这三种远离中任何一种都不修学,他们只成了物质利益的继承者。具寿舍利弗就是带着这个意思去问比丘们的。同样的道理,也适用于白分那一侧。巴利
Kittāvatānu kho, āvusoti ettha kittāvatāti paricchedavacanaṃ, kittakenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nukāro pucchāyaṃ. Khokāro nipātamattaṃ. Satthu pavivittassa viharatoti, tīhi vivekehi kāyacittaupadhivivekehi satthuno viharantassa. Vivekaṃ nānusikkhantīti tiṇṇaṃ vivekānaṃ aññatarampi nānusikkhanti, āmisadāyādāva hontīti imamatthaṃ āyasmā sāriputto bhikkhū pucchi. Esa nayo sukkapakkhepi.
听完这番话,想要了解这个义理的比丘们便从远处等开始说起。其中,“从远处”是指从别的国家、别的地区,乃至相隔无数由旬之远。“近处”就是附近。“了知”就是知道、觉悟。“请具寿舍利弗来说”的意思是:应该由具寿舍利弗来解说,具寿舍利弗应该自己分别解说。因为解释法义是具寿舍利弗的责任,而听闻是我们的责任——这就是这里的意趣,也与字面含义相符。关于“paṭibhātu”这个词,有些人说意思是“显现”,另一些人说意思是“呈现”。“持守”就是受持、完全掌握。于是长老想为他们说法,便说了“因此”等话。其中,“因此”是表示原因的词,“hi”是语助词。意思是:既然你们想听,又把这项任务交给了我,所以你们应当好好聆听。那些比丘也接受了长老的话,因此经文说:“是的,贤友……乃至……他们回应了。”巴利
Evaṃ vutte tamatthaṃ sotukāmā bhikkhū dūratopi khotiādimāhaṃsu. Tattha dūratopīti tiroraṭṭhatopi tirojanapadatopi anekayojanagaṇanatopīti vuttaṃ hoti. Santiketi samīpe. Aññātunti jānituṃ bujjhituṃ. Āyasmantaṃyeva sāriputtaṃ paṭibhātūti āyasmatoyeva sāriputtassa bhāgo hotu, āyasmā pana sāriputto attano bhāgaṃ katvā vibhajatūti vuttaṃ hoti. Āyasmato hi bhāgo yadidaṃ atthakkhānaṃ, amhākaṃ pana savanaṃ bhāgoti ayamettha adhippāyo, evaṃ saddalakkhaṇena sameti. Keci pana bhaṇanti ‘‘paṭibhātūti dissatū’’ti. Apare ‘‘upaṭṭhātū’’ti. Dhāressantīti uggahessanti pariyāpuṇissanti. Tato nesaṃ kathetukāmo thero tena hītiādimāha. Tattha tenāti kāraṇavacanaṃ. Hikāro nipāto. Yasmā sotukāmāttha, yasmā ca mayhaṃ bhāraṃ āropayittha, tasmā suṇāthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tepi bhikkhū therassa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchiṃsu, tenāha ‘‘evamāvusoti…pe…paccassosu’’nti.
于是,尊者舍利弗为了用三种方式说明世尊呵斥那些物质继承者时所说的“你们也会成为那样的继承者”这句话的含义,对那些比丘这样说道:“贤友,在这里,当导师独自远离而住时……乃至……贤友,仅仅如此,当导师独自远离而住时,声闻弟子们却不随学远离。”巴利
Atha nesaṃ, āmisadāyādaṃ garahantena bhagavatā ‘‘tumhepi tena ādiyā bhaveyyāthā’’ti ekenevākārena vuttamatthaṃ tīhi ākārehi dassento āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca – ‘‘idhāvuso , satthu pavivittassa viharato…pe… ettāvatā kho, āvuso, satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’ti.
到这里为止,世尊为了批评那种继承物质遗产的做法而说的“你们也会成为那样的继承者”,以及他自己提出的问题“到底要到什么程度……不跟随修学”,这两者的详细含义就已经很清楚地区分开了。而且,这只是针对弟子们说的,并没有涉及世尊自己成为物质遗产继承者的情况。因为,只有当世尊在教导弟子时,由他自己来说“我也会成为那样的继承者”才合适,弟子们是不该这样说的。这个道理在法施那一方面也同样适用。以上便是此处文脉衔接的次第。巴利
Ettāvatā yañca bhagavā āmisadāyādapaṭipadaṃ garahanto ‘‘tumhepi tena ādiyā bhaveyyāthā’’ti āha, yañca attanā pucchaṃ pucchi ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho…pe… nānusikkhantī’’ti, tassa vitthārato attho suvibhatto hoti. So ca kho bhagavato ādiyabhāvaṃ anāmasitvāva. Bhagavatoyeva hi yuttaṃ sāvake anuggaṇhantassa ‘‘ahampi tena ādiyo bhavissāmī’’ti vattuṃ, na sāvakānaṃ. Esa nayo sukkapakkhepi, ayaṃ tāvettha anusandhikkamayojanā.
这段义注的解说,是针对“于此”这个词,也就是在这教法之中。“师以远离”是说导师以三种远离而彻底远离。“不修学远离”是说他们不修学、不圆满身远离。如果这里是就三种远离而说的,那提问就没有差别了。因为这一段属于解答的部分。所以,通过这一句显示身远离,通过“某些法”等显示心远离,通过“生活奢侈”等显示依远离。这里应当这样从简把握其义理。巴利
Ayaṃ panatthavaṇṇanā idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane, satthu pavivittassāti satthuno tīhi vivekehi accantapavivittassa. Vivekaṃ nānusikkhantīti kāyavivekaṃ nānusikkhanti, na paripūrentīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yadi pana tividhaṃ vivekaṃ sandhāya vadeyya, pucchāya aviseso siyā. Byākaraṇapakkho hi ayaṃ. Tasmā iminā padena kāyavivekaṃ, ‘‘yesañca dhammāna’’ntiādinā cittavivekaṃ, ‘‘bāhulikā’’tiādinā upadhivivekañca dassetīti evamettha saṅkhepato attho veditabbo.
“某些法”是指贪等法,因为下文将以“贤友,在这里,贪是恶的”这样的方式来说。不弃舍,就是不舍弃,意思是不能圆满心远离。多作者,就是致力于衣服等种种繁多事物的人。散漫地执持教法,就是懈怠的人。关于“进入时先行”,这里“进入”指的是五盖,因为五盖有沉没、淹没的含义,所以说以五盖为先。“远离”是指依远离,也就是涅槃。放下负担,就是卸下负担,甚至不为证得它而付出努力;到这里为止,说的就是不能圆满依远离。巴利
Yesañca dhammānanti lobhādayo sandhāyāha, ye parato ‘‘tatrāvuso lobho ca pāpako’’tiādinā nayena vakkhati. Nappajahantīti na pariccajanti, cittavivekaṃ na paripūrentīti vuttaṃ hoti. Bāhulikāti cīvarādibāhullāya paṭipannā. Sāsanaṃ sithilaṃ gaṇhantīti sāthalikā. Okkamane pubbaṅgamāti ettha okkamanaṃ vuccanti avagamanaṭṭhena pañca nīvaraṇāni, tena pañcanīvaraṇapubbaṅgamāti vuttaṃ hoti. Paviveketi upadhiviveke nibbāne. Nikkhittadhurāti oropitadhurā, tadadhigamāya ārambhampi akurumānāti, ettāvatā upadhivivekaṃ na paripūrentīti vuttaṃ hoti.
到这里,一直是没有指定对象而说的;现在要限定对象来开示,于是说了“贤友,在那里”等话。为什么?因为如果只是笼统地说“以三种理由”,弟子们可能会漠不关心,心想:“他大概是在说别人吧,不是说我们。”但如果限定对象说“长老、中年、新学”,他们就会想:“这是在说我们”,于是生起恭敬心。就像国王说“大臣们应该把城里的街道打扫干净”,他们心里会想:“到底该谁去打扫呢?”结果谁也不动;但如果击鼓宣告各家打扫自家门前,所有人一下子就都打扫并装饰起来了。这里的道理也应该这样理解。巴利
Ettāvatā aniyameneva vatvā idāni desanaṃ niyamento ‘‘tatrāvuso’’tiādimāha. Kasmā? Sāvakā ‘‘tīhi ṭhānehī’’ti evañhi aniyametvāva vuccamāne ‘‘kampi maññe bhaṇati , na amhe’’ti udāsināpi honti. ‘‘Therā navā majjhimā’’ti evaṃ pana niyametvā vuccamāne amhe bhaṇatīti ādaraṃ karonti . Yathā raññā ‘‘amaccehi nagaravīthiyo sodhetabbā’’ti vuttepi ‘‘kena nu kho sodhetabbā’’ti maññamānā na sodhenti, attano attano gharadvāraṃ sodhetabbanti pana bheriyā nikkhantāya sabbe muhuttena sodhenti ca alaṅkaronti ca, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ.
这里,“在那里”指的是在那些弟子当中。“长老”指的是从十夏龄起算的比丘。“以三种理由”就是以三种原因。因为“处”这个词,可以在自在、安住、刹那、原因这些意思里看到。比如在“贤者帝释天是造了什么业而得到这个位置的”这类句子里,它是表示自在;在“他是处善巧者,箭无虚发”这类句子里,它是表示安住;在“这是如来应时应机说出的”这类句子里,它是表示刹那;在“知处为处,知非处为非处”这类句子里,它是表示原因。但在这里,只是指原因。因为原因就是果依之而住、依之而转起的所在,所以称为“处”。巴利
Tattha tatrāti tesu sāvakesu. Therāti dasavasse upādāya vuccanti. Tīhi ṭhānehīti tīhi kāraṇehi. Ayañhi ṭhānasaddo issariyaṭṭhitikhaṇakāraṇesu dissati. ‘‘Kiṃ panāyasmā devānamindo kammaṃ katvā imaṃ ṭhānaṃ patto’’tiādīsu hi issariye dissati. ‘‘Ṭhānakusalo hoti akkhaṇavedhī’’tiādīsu ṭhitiyaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhānasovetaṃ tathāgataṃ paṭibhātī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.87) khaṇe. ‘‘Ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato’’tiādīsu (vibha. 809; ma. ni. 1.148) kāraṇe. Idha pana kāraṇeyeva. Kāraṇañhi yasmā tattha phalaṃ tiṭṭhati tadāyattavuttibhāvena, tasmā ṭhānanti vuccati.
用第一个理由来说,“长老比丘们应当受呵责”——这里的“应当受呵责”就是该被指责。既然身为长老,却不去阿兰若、林野、偏僻的坐卧处,不肯放下村落边的住处,反而增长对群聚的喜好而住,连身远离都不能圆满,那他们在新学、中年的时候又会是什么样子?——他们就是这样该受谴责,贤友,他们正是因此受到指责。这里要显示的就是这个意思。用第二个理由来说,这里也应当这样连接:贤友,这些即使身为长老者,对导师说应当断除的那些法,不肯舍弃贪等法,连弹指那么短的时间坐在一边让心得一境都做不到,那他们在新学、中年的时候又会是什么样子?——他们就是这样该受谴责,贤友,他们正是因此受到指责。用第三个理由来说,这里也应当这样理解其连接:贤友,这些即使身为长老者,不靠随得的资具维持生活,反而致力于袈裟、钵、坐卧处、污秽之身的装饰,不圆满远离依著,那他们在新学、中年的时候又会是什么样子?——他们就是这样该受谴责,贤友,他们正是因此受到指责。对于中年和新学这两段,也依照同样的道理类推。巴利
Iminā paṭhamena ṭhānena therā bhikkhū gārayhāti ettha gārayhāti garahitabbā. Therā nāma samānā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni na upenti, gāmantasenāsanaṃ na muñcanti, saṅgaṇikārāmataṃ vaḍḍhentā viharanti, kāyavivekampi na paripūrenti, navamajjhimakāle kīdisā ahesunti evaṃ ninditabbā honti, imaṃ nindaṃ āvuso labhantīti dasseti. Dutiyena ṭhānenāti etthāpi ime nāma āvuso therāpi samānā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ satthā pahānamāha, te lobhādidhamme na jahanti, accharāsaṅghātamattampi ekamantaṃ nisīditvā cittekaggataṃ na labhanti, navamajjhimakāle kīdisā ahesunti evaṃ ninditabbā honti, imaṃ nindaṃ āvuso labhantīti dassetīti evaṃ yojanā kātabbā. Tatiyena ṭhānenāti etthāpi ime nāmāvuso, therāpi samānā itarītarena na yāpenti, cīvarapattasenāsanapūtikāyamaṇḍanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti upadhivivekaṃ apūrayamānā, navamajjhimakāle kīdisā ahesunti evaṃ ninditabbā honti, imaṃ nindaṃ, āvuso, labhantīti dassetīti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Esa nayo majjhimanavavāresu.
这里有一个差别。“中年”是指从五岁到九岁之间说的。“新学”是指不满五岁说的。就像在那里说他们在中年和新学时期是什么样子,这里也应该说他们在新学时期是什么样子,在长老时期将会是什么样子,在中年和长老时期将会是什么样子,这样连接起来。巴利
Ayaṃ pana viseso. Majjhimāti pañcavasse upādāya yāva nava vassā vuccanti. Navāti ūnapañcavassā vuccanti. Yathā ca tattha navamajjhimakāle kīdisā ahesunti vuttaṃ, evamidha navakāle kīdisā ahesuṃ, therakāle kīdisā bhavissanti, majjhimatherakāle kīdisā bhavissantīti vatvā yojetabbaṃ.
32 32. 在这个黑分里所说的相反道理,应当以相反的方法理解白分的含义。这里简要说明:这些长老虽然已是长老,仍然一由旬接一由旬地亲近阿兰若、林野、偏远的住处,即使到了适合前往村落附近住处的时节,也不去那里;即使身体已经这样衰老,仍然勤修精进,让施主们生起信心。那么,在中年和青年时期,他们又是怎样的呢?——以这第一个理由,长老们是值得赞叹的,他们获得赞叹。他们舍弃贪等烦恼,圆满心的远离。这位大长老也是如此:即使被同住比丘和弟子围绕,到了适合坐下来的时候,即使已经这么大年纪,仍然在吃完饭进入住处后,傍晚才出来;傍晚进去,早晨才出来。他修习遍作相,引发等至,证得道与果,以一切方式圆满心的远离——以这第二个理由,长老比丘们是值得赞叹的,他们获得赞叹。在长老本可以使用丝绸、细布等触感柔软、轻便的袈裟之时,这位大长老却仍然穿着粪扫衣,不放逸地受持教法,远离诸盖,进入果等至,圆满依远离而住。那么,在青年和中年时期,他又是怎样的呢?——以这第三个理由,长老们是值得赞叹的,他们获得赞叹。对于中年和青年部分,也依此理类推。巴利
32. Imasmiñca kaṇhapakkhe vuttapaccanīkanayena sukkapakkhe attho veditabbo. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo. Ime vata therāpi samānā yojanaparamparāya araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni sevanti, gāmantasenāsanaṃ upagantuṃ yuttakālepi na upagacchanti, evaṃ jiṇṇasarīrāpi āraddhavīriyā paccayadāyakānaṃ pasādaṃ janenti, navamajjhimakāle kīdisā ahesunti iminā paṭhamena ṭhānena therā pāsaṃsā bhavanti, pasaṃsaṃ labhanti. Lobhādayo pahāya cittavivekaṃ pūrenti, ayampi mahāthero saddhivihārikaantevāsikaparivārito hutvā nisīdituṃ yuttakālepi īdisepi vaye vattamāne bhattakiccaṃ katvā paviṭṭho sāyaṃ nikkhamati, sāyaṃ paviṭṭho pāto nikkhamati, kasiṇaparikammaṃ karoti, samāpattiyo nibbatteti, maggaphalāni adhigacchati, sabbathāpi cittavivekaṃ pūretīti iminā dutiyena ṭhānena therā bhikkhū pāsaṃsā bhavanti, pasaṃsaṃ labhanti. Yasmiṃ kāle therassa paṭṭadukūlakoseyyādīni sukhasamphassāni lahucīvarādīni yuttāni, tasmimpi nāma kāle ayaṃ mahāthero paṃsukūlāni dhāreti, asithilaṃ sāsanaṃ gahetvā vigatanīvaraṇo phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā upadhivivekaṃ paripūrayamāno viharati, navamajjhimakāle kīdiso ahosīti iminā tatiyena ṭhānena therā pāsaṃsā bhavanti, pasaṃsaṃ labhantīti. Esa nayo majjhimanavavāresu.
33 “贤友,在那里”这句话的连结是什么呢?前面以九种方式谴责了财物继承者的行道,又以九种方式称赞了法继承者的行道,并以十八种方式结束了这段开示。接着,对于那些“有些法,导师说要断除,他们却不断除”中所说的应当断除的法,为了具体指出“就是这些”,于是说了“贤友,在那里,贪……”等。这就是这里的连结。巴利
33.Tatrāvusoti ko anusandhi, evaṃ navahākārehi āmisadāyādapaṭipadaṃ garahanto, navahi dhammadāyādapaṭipadaṃ thomento, aṭṭhārasahākārehi desanaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā, ye te ‘‘yesañca dhammānaṃ satthā pahānamāha, te ca dhamme na pajahantī’’ti evaṃ pahātabbadhammā vuttā. Te sarūpato ‘‘ime te’’ti dassetumidaṃ ‘‘tatrāvuso, lobho cā’’tiādimāha, ayaṃ anusandhi.
另外,前面只是用间接的方式说了法,而财物则既用间接的方式、也用直接的方式说过了。现在,为了直接说明法,也就是出世间道,才说了这句话。这就是这里的连结。巴利
Apica heṭṭhā pariyāyeneva dhammo kathito. Āmisaṃ pana pariyāyenapi nippariyāyenapi kathitaṃ. Idāni nippariyāyadhammaṃ lokuttaramaggaṃ kathetumidamāha. Ayaṃ pettha anusandhi.
这里,“那里”是为了显示过去所说的教法,也就是指以“导师住在远离处时,弟子们却不随学远离”等这种方式所说的教法。贪是恶的,嗔也是恶的——这是在指出这两种法是恶的、低劣的,应当断除。其中,贪以贪求为特征,嗔以嗔怒为特征。在这两者中,贪发生在得到资具的人获得资具之时,嗔则发生在得不到之时。由于贪,人追求未得之物;由于嗔,得不到时就心生苦恼。贪针对的是可布施之物,嗔针对的是不布施的人或布施不称心之物的人。由于贪,人圆满九种以渴爱为根本的法;由于嗔,人圆满五种悭吝。巴利
Tattha tatrāti atītadesanānidassanaṃ, ‘‘satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’tiādinā nayena vuttadesanāyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Lobho ca pāpako, doso ca pāpakoti ime dve dhammā pāpakā lāmakā, ime pahātabbāti dasseti. Tattha lubbhanalakkhaṇo lobho. Dussanalakkhaṇo doso. Tesu lobho āmisadāyādassa paccayānaṃ lābhe hoti, doso alābhe. Lobhena aladdhaṃ pattheti, dosena alabhanto vighātavā hoti. Lobho ca deyyadhamme hoti, doso adāyake vā amanuññadāyake vā. Lobhena navataṇhāmūlake dhamme paripūreti, dosena pañca macchariyāni.
现在,为了说明断除它们的方法,而说了“为了断除贪……”等话。它的意思是:为了断除那邪恶的贪和嗔。这里说的“有一条中道”,是指着道而说的。因为贪是一个极端,嗔是另一个极端,这条道不接近、不落入这两个极端,已经从这两个极端中解脱出来,所以称为“中道”。由于它处在两者之间,所以是“中”;因为应当去实践,所以是“道”。同样地,沉溺于感官享乐是一个极端,折磨自己是一个极端;认为一切恒常存在是一个极端,认为死后彻底断灭是一个极端。应当按照前面那样的方式详细展开说明。巴利
Idāni tesaṃ pahānūpāyaṃ dassento lobhassa ca pahānāyātiādimāha. Tassattho, tassa pana pāpakassa lobhassa ca dosassa ca pahānāya. Atthi majjhimā paṭipadāti maggaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ. Maggo hi lobho eko anto, doso eko antoti ete dve ante na upeti, na upagacchati, vimutto etehi antehi, tasmā ‘‘majjhimā paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Etesaṃ majjhe bhavattā ‘‘majjhimā, paṭipajjitabbato ca paṭipadāti. Tathā kāmasukhallikānuyogo eko anto, attakilamathānuyogo eko anto, sassataṃ eko anto, ucchedo eko antoti purimanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ.
用“能作眼”等说法,是在称赞那条道本身。因为它能导向对诸谛的照见,从“作为照见的引导者”这个意义上说,所以叫“能作眼”;它能导向对诸谛的了知,从“令他了知”这个意义上说,所以叫“能作智”;又因为能让贪等止息,所以能导向寂静;又因为能显示四谛都是应当遍知的,所以能导向证知。“正觉”指的就是这条道,由于它能导向正觉,所以说它“能导向正觉”。因为道本身就是为了道的目的而运作,靠道来完成应当做的事。涅槃是无为的,但为了证悟它、亲自体证它,所以说它“能导向涅槃”。这就是这里的要点。除此之外的其他解释都是枝蔓之谈。巴利
Cakkhukaraṇītiādīhi pana tameva paṭipadaṃ thometi. Sā hi saccānaṃ dassanāya saṃvattati dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhenāti cakkhukaraṇī. Saccānaṃ ñāṇāya saṃvattati viditakaraṇaṭṭhenāti ñāṇakaraṇī. Rāgādīnañca vūpasamanato upasamāya saṃvattati. Catunnampi saccānaṃ abhiññeyyabhāvadassanato abhiññāya saṃvattati. Sambodhoti maggo, tassatthāya saṃvattanato sambodhāya saṃvattati. Maggoyeva hi maggatthāya saṃvattati maggena kātabbakiccakaraṇato. Nibbānaṃ nāma appaccayaṃ tassa pana sacchikiriyāya paccakkhakammāya saṃvattanato nibbānāya saṃvattatīti vuccati. Ayamettha sāro. Ito aññathā vaṇṇanā papañcā.
现在,为了从它本身的样子来显示那条中道,先问“哪一条是那条中道呢?”,然后以“正是这一条”等方式来回答。巴利
Idāni taṃ majjhimaṃ paṭipadaṃ sarūpato dassetukāmo ‘‘katamā ca sā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘ayamevā’’tiādinā nayena vissajjeti.
这里,“正是这一条”是表示限定的说法,为的是排除其他道,也为了说明这是佛陀、独觉佛和佛弟子共同拥有的。正如经中所说:“只有这一条道,没有别的道能带来见解的清净。”这条道因为远离烦恼,所以是“圣”;因为它能导向断除烦恼,因为它是圣者所说的,因为它能导向获得圣者的境界,所以是“圣”。因为具备八个支分,所以是“八支”,且并非脱离于诸支分之外独立存在,正如五支乐等一样。它在灭除烦恼中前进,或者寻求涅槃,或者被想求涅槃的人所寻求,或者被他们依之修行,所以是“道”。“犹如”是虚词,意思是“那个是什么呢”,或者“那八支是什么呢”。因为每一支本身就是道。正如所说:“正见既是道,也是因。”古人也说:“正见是见之道,正思惟是导向之道……正定是不散乱之道。”巴利
Tattha ayamevāti avadhāraṇavacanaṃ, aññamaggappaṭisedhanatthaṃ, buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvadassanatthañca. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘eseva maggo natthañño dassanassa visuddhiyā’’ti (dha. pa. 274). Svāyaṃ kilesānaṃ ārakattāpi ariyo. Aripahānāya saṃvattatītipi ariyena desitotipi ariyabhāvappaṭilābhāya saṃvattatītipi ariyo. Aṭṭhahi aṅgehi upetattā aṭṭhaṅgiko, na ca aṅgavinimutto pañcaṅgikatūriyādīni viya. Kilese mārento gacchati, maggati vā nibbānaṃ, maggīyati vā nibbānatthikehi, gammati vā tehi paṭipajjīyatīti maggo. Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa katamo so iti ceti attho, katamāni vā tāni aṭṭhaṅgānīti. Ekamekañhi aṅgaṃ maggoyeva. Yathāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi maggo ceva hetu cā’’ti (dha. sa. 1039). Porāṇāpi bhaṇanti – ‘‘dassanamaggo sammādiṭṭhi, abhiniropanamaggo sammāsaṅkappo…pe… avikkhepamaggo sammāsamādhī’’ti.
在正见等这些支分当中,正见的特征是正确地看见;正思惟的特征是正确地导向;正语的特征是正确地摄持;正业的特征是正确地发动;正命的特征是正确地净化;正精进的特征是正确地策励;正念的特征是正确地安住;正定的特征是正确地等持。它们的词源解释也应当依照同样的方式理解,比如“正见”就是“正确地看见”的意思。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhādīsu cetesu sammā dassanalakkhaṇā sammādiṭṭhi. Sammā abhiniropanalakkhaṇo sammāsaṅkappo. Sammā pariggahalakkhaṇā sammāvācā. Sammā samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇo sammākammanto. Sammā vodānalakkhaṇo sammāājīvo. Sammā paggahalakkhaṇo sammāvāyāmo. Sammā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇā sammāsati. Sammā samādhānalakkhaṇo sammāsamādhi. Nibbacanampi nesaṃ sammā passatīti sammādiṭṭhīti eteneva nayena veditabbaṃ.
在这里,正见生起时,会断除邪见、与它相违的烦恼以及无明;它以涅槃为所缘,又能观见与它相应的法。不过,这种观见是从“不迷惑”的角度来说的,并不是以那些相应法为所缘,因此才称为“正见”。巴利
Tattha sammādiṭṭhi uppajjamānā micchādiṭṭhiṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca avijjañca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca passati, te ca kho asammohato, no ārammaṇato, tasmā ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti vuccati.
正思惟舍断邪思惟以及与正思惟相违的烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,并正确地让相应法朝向所缘,因此称为“正思惟”。巴利
Sammāsaṅkappo micchāsaṅkappaṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā abhiniropeti, tasmā ‘‘sammāsaṅkappo’’ti vuccati.
正语会断除邪语以及与它相应的烦恼,以涅槃作为所缘,并且正确地把握与它相应的诸法,因此称为“正语”。巴利
Sammāvācā micchāvācaṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā pariggaṇhāti, tasmā ‘‘sammāvācā’’ti vuccati.
正业会舍断邪业以及和它相反的烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,并且正确地令相应诸法生起,因此称为“正业”。巴利
Sammākammanto micchākammantaṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā samuṭṭhāpeti, tasmā ‘‘sammākammanto’’ti vuccati.
正命会舍断邪命以及与正命相反的烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,并正确地净化与它相应的诸法,因此称为“正命”。巴利
Sammāājīvo micchāājīvaṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā vodāpeti, tasmā ‘‘sammāājīvo’’ti vuccati.
正精进舍断邪精进、与它相反的烦恼以及懈怠,以涅槃为所缘,又正确地策励相应诸法,因此称为“正精进”。巴利
Sammāvāyāmo micchāvāyāmaṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca kosajjañca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā paggaṇhāti, tasmā ‘‘sammāvāyāmo’’ti vuccati.
正念舍断邪念以及和它相对立的烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,又让相应诸法正确地现起,因此称为“正念”。巴利
Sammāsati micchāsatiṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā upaṭṭhāpeti, tasmā ‘‘sammāsatī’’ti vuccati.
正定舍断邪定、与正定对立的烦恼以及掉举,以涅槃为所缘,并正确地让相应诸法入定,因此称为“正定”。巴利
Sammāsamādhi micchāsamādhiṃ tappaccanīyakilese ca uddhaccañca pajahati, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca sammā samādhiyati, tasmā ‘‘sammāsamādhī’’ti vuccati.
现在,为了总结那同一条行道,他说:“贤友,这就是那条……”它的意思是:把四种出世间道合在一起而说的“八支道”,贤友,正是这条……导向涅槃。巴利
Idāni ayaṃ kho sā, āvusoti tameva paṭipadaṃ nigamento āha. Tassattho, yvāyaṃ cattāropi lokuttaramagge ekato katvā kathito ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’, ayaṃ kho sā, āvuso…pe… nibbānāya saṃvattatīti.
就这样,在说明了应当断除的诸法中的贪和嗔以及断除它们的方法之后,现在为了说明其他应当断除的诸法以及断除它们的方法,而说了“贤友,于此,忿……”等。其中,忿以发怒为特征,或以暴躁为特征;它的作用是造成愤恨,表现为恶意。恨以持续怀怨为特征,它的作用是不舍弃敌意,表现为跟随忿而来。这也说过:“先前是忿,后来是恨”等等(《分别论》891)。巴利
Evaṃ pahātabbadhammesu lobhadose tappahānupāyañca dassetvā idāni aññepi pahātabbadhamme tesaṃ pahānupāyañca dassento tatrāvuso, kodho cātiādimāha. Tattha kujjhanalakkhaṇo kodho, caṇḍikkalakkhaṇo vā, āghātakaraṇaraso, dussanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Upanandhanalakkhaṇo upanāho, vera appaṭinissajjanaraso, kodhānupabandhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno. Vuttañcetaṃ – ‘‘pubbakāle kodho, aparakāle upanāho’’tiādi (vibha. 891).
抹恩的特征是抹杀他人的功德,作用是毁坏那些功德,表现为遮蔽那些功德。攀比的特征是执持较量,作用是以他人的功德来等同自己的功德,表现为按他人功德的标准来衡量自己。巴利
Paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇo makkho, tesaṃ vināsanaraso, tadavacchādanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Yugaggāhalakkhaṇo paḷāso, paraguṇehi attano guṇānaṃ samīkaraṇaraso, paresaṃ guṇappamāṇena upaṭṭhānapaccupaṭṭhāno.
嫉妒的特点是不能忍受别人的成就,或者说是无法忍受别人的成功;它的作用是对于别人的成就感到不悦;它的表现是背离那些成就。悭吝的特点是隐藏自己的成就;它的作用是不愿自己的成就与他人共享;它的表现是收缩。巴利
Parasampattikhīyanalakkhaṇā issā, tassā akkhamanalakkhaṇā vā, tattha anabhiratirasā, tato vimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Attano sampattinigūhanalakkhaṇaṃ maccheraṃ, attano sampattiyā parehi sādhāraṇabhāvaasukhāyanarasaṃ, saṅkocanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.
谄的特征是掩饰自己造下的恶,作用是把它藏起来,现起是遮盖它。诳的特征是显示自己实际上没有的功德,作用是宣扬那些功德,现起是通过身体姿态等把那些功德表现出来。巴利
Katapāpapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā māyā, tassa nigūhanarasā, tadāvaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānā. Attano avijjamānaguṇapakāsanalakkhaṇaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ, tesaṃ samudāharaṇarasaṃ, sarīrākārehipi tesaṃ vibhūtakaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.
骄的特征是内心膨胀,作用是不屈从行为,表现为不柔和。瞋恼的特征是行为引起内心膨胀,作用是与人对立,表现为不恭敬。巴利
Cittassa uddhumātabhāvalakkhaṇo thambho, appatissayavuttiraso, amaddavatāpaccupaṭṭhāno. Karaṇuttariyalakkhaṇo sārambho, vipaccanīkatāraso, agāravapaccupaṭṭhāno.
慢的特点是抬高自己,作用是执著于我,表现方式是内心膨胀。过慢的特点是极度抬高自己,作用是极度执著于我,表现方式是内心极度膨胀。巴利
Uṇṇatilakkhaṇo māno, ahaṃkāraraso, uddhumātabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno. Abbhuṇṇatilakkhaṇo atimāno, ativiya ahaṅkāraraso. Accuddhumātabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno.
骄的特征是陶醉的状态,作用是执取陶醉,表现为疯狂。放逸的特征是在五种欲乐上放任心,作用是持续放任,表现为失去正念。应当这样了知这些法的特征等。这里是简略说明,详细的说明则应依据《分别论》中“其中,什么是忿”等所开示的方式来理解。巴利
Mattabhāvalakkhaṇo mado, madaggāhaṇaraso, ummādapaccupaṭṭhāno. Pañcasu kāmaguṇesu cittavossaggalakkhaṇo pamādo, vossaggānuppadānaraso, sativippavāsapaccupaṭṭhānoti evaṃ imesaṃ dhammānaṃ lakkhaṇādīni veditabbāni. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana ‘‘tattha katamo kodho’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 891) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
尤其在这里,一个贪图利养的人,自己得不到,看到别人得到就生气。他一旦生起嗔怒,那就是忿;如果一直怀恨不舍,就变成恨。他这样愤怒、怀恨,即使别人真有功德,也要去诋毁,还硬说“我也一样”,这就是他的诋毁和攀比。像这样诋毁、攀比的人,对于别人得到的利养、恭敬等,就嫉妒、恼怒地想:“他凭什么得到这些?”这就是他的嫉。如果他自己有什么成就,却受不了别人也共享,这就是他的悭。为了利养,即使自己有过失也藏起来,这就是他的谄。没有的功德也拿出来宣扬,这就是他的诳。他这样行事,如果按自己的盘算得到了利养,就因此变得僵硬傲慢,心不柔软,别人劝他“这事不该这样做”,他也听不进去,这就是他的骄。如果这时有人对他说“这事不该这样做”,他就心里冒火,拉下脸来,蛮横地说:“你算什么东西!”这就是他的愤发。然后,因为骄,他觉得自己“我最厉害”,就成了慢者;因为愤发,他看不起别人,觉得“这些人算什么”,就成了过慢,这就是他的慢和过慢。他凭着这些慢和过慢,生出种族骄慢等种种骄慢。一旦骄慢起来,就在各种欲乐对象等事情上放逸,这就是他的骄和放逸。巴利
Visesato cettha āmisadāyādo attanā alabhanto aññassa lābhino kujjhati, tassa sakiṃ uppanno kodho kodhoyeva, tatuttari upanāho. So evaṃ kuddho upanayhanto ca santepi aññassa lābhino guṇe makkheti, ahampi tādisoti ca yugaggāhaṃ gaṇhāti, ayamassa makkho ca paḷāso ca, evaṃ makkhī paḷāsī tassa lābhasakkārādīsu kiṃ imassa imināti issati padussati, ayamassa issā. Sace panassa kāci sampatti hoti, tassā tena sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ na sahati, idamassa maccheraṃ. Lābhahetu kho pana attano santepi dose paṭicchādeti, ayamassa māyā. Asantepi guṇe pakāseti. Idamassa sāṭheyyaṃ. So evaṃ paṭipanno sace yathādhippāyaṃ lābhaṃ labhati, tena thaddho hoti amuducitto, nayidaṃ evaṃ kātabbanti ovadituṃ asakkuṇeyyo, ayamassa thambho. Sace pana naṃ koci kiñci vadati ‘‘nayidaṃ evaṃ kātabba’’nti, tena sāraddhacitto hoti bhākuṭikamukho ‘‘ko me tva’’nti pasayha bhāṇī, ayamassa sārambho. Tato thambhena ‘‘ahameva seyyo’’ti attānaṃ maññanto mānī hoti. Sārambhena ‘‘ke ime’’ti pare atimaññanto atimānī, ayamassa māno ca atimāno ca. So tehi mānātimānehi jātimadādianekarūpaṃ madaṃ janeti. Matto samāno kāmaguṇādibhedesu vatthūsu pamajjati, ayamassa mado ca pamādo cāti.
这样,以物质利养为遗产的人就无法从这些恶法以及其他类似法中解脱出来。在这里,首先应当了知哪些是应当断除的法。而断除的方法,无论从字面上还是从意义上说,在一切情况下都是没有差别的。巴利
Evaṃ āmisadāyādo aparimutto hoti imehi pāpakehi dhammehi aññehi ca evarūpehi. Evaṃ tāvettha pahātabbadhammā veditabbā. Pahānupāyo pāṭhato ca atthato ca sabbattha nibbisesoyeva.
关于“智的修习次第”这一部分,这里应当了解它的分类、次第和修习方法。其中先说分类:这条中道有时是圣八支道,有时是七支道。当它依出世间初禅生起时,就是八支道;依其余禅那生起时,就是七支道。这里按照最究竟的说法,所以说是八支。因为除此之外,再没有别的道支了。这样,首先应当了解这里的分类。巴利
Ñāṇaparicayapāṭavatthaṃ panettha ayaṃ bhedo ca kamo ca bhāvanānayo ca veditabbo. Tattha bhedo tāva, ayañhi majjhimā paṭipadā kadāci ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo hoti, kadāci sattaṅgiko. Ayañhi lokuttarapaṭhamajjhānavasena uppajjamāno aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo hoti, avasesajjhānavasena sattaṅgiko. Ukkaṭṭhaniddesato panidha aṭṭhaṅgikoti vutto. Ito parañhi maggaṅgaṃ natthi. Evaṃ tāvettha bhedo veditabbo.
因为正见在一切善法中最殊胜,正如所说:“慧在善法中最上。”而且在善法这一类里,正见是前导,正如所说:“诸比丘,正见如何成为前导?他如实了知正见为正见,如实了知邪见为邪见。”经文对此有详细说明。又如所说:“诸比丘,明是诸善法成就的前导。”其余的道支都是由正见产生、从正见生起的,正如所说:“有正见的人,正思惟就生起……有正念的人,正定就生起。”所以,这些道支就是按照这个次第来说的。在这里,应当这样理解其次第。巴利
Yasmā pana sabbakusalānaṃ sammādiṭṭhi seṭṭhā, yathāha ‘‘paññā hi seṭṭhā kusalā vadantī’’ti (jā. 2.17.81). Kusalavāre ca pubbaṅgamā, yathāha ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi pubbaṅgamā hoti, sammādiṭṭhiṃ sammādiṭṭhīti pajānāti, micchādiṭṭhiṃ micchādiṭṭhīti pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.136) vitthāro. Yathā cāha ‘‘vijjā ca kho, bhikkhave, pubbaṅgamā kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyā’’ti. Tappabhavābhinibbattāni sesaṅgāni, yathāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhissa sammāsaṅkappo pahoti…pe… sammāsatissa sammāsamādhi pahotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.141). Tasmā iminā kamena etāni aṅgāni vuttānīti evamettha kamo veditabbo.
修习方式是这样的:有人修习以止为先导的观,有人修习以观为先导的止。怎么修呢?这里有一种人,先让近行定或安止定生起,这就是止;然后他以无常等相观照那个定以及和它相应的诸法,这就是观。这样一来,先有止,后有观,所以说他“修习以止为先导的观”。当他这样修习以止为先导的观时,圣道就生起;他反复练习、修习、多修习这条圣道;当他反复练习、修习、多修习这条圣道时,诸结被断除,随眠也被彻底清除。这就是修习以止为先导的观。巴利
Bhāvanānayoti koci samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāveti, koci vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ. Kathaṃ? Idhekacco paṭhamaṃ upacārasamādhiṃ vā appanāsamādhiṃ vā uppādeti, ayaṃ samatho; so tañca taṃsampayutte ca dhamme aniccādīhi vipassati, ayaṃ vipassanā. Iti paṭhamaṃ samatho, pacchā vipassanā. Tena vuccati ‘‘samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvetī’’ti. Tassa samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvayato maggo sañjāyati, so taṃ maggaṃ āsevati bhāveti bahulīkaroti, tassa taṃ maggaṃ āsevato bhāvayato bahulīkaroto saṃyojanāni pahīyanti, anusayā byantīhonti, evaṃ samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāveti.
在这里,有一类人还没有生起前面所说的那种止,就直接以无常等相观照五取蕴,这就是观。由于他的观已经圆满,对于在那观中生起的诸法,以舍离为所缘而生起心的一境性,这就是止。这样一来,观在前,止在后。因此说“修习观先行之止”。当他修习观先行之止时,圣道生起;他反复练习这条圣道……不断修习;当他反复练习……随眠烦恼就被彻底断除。这就是修习观先行之止。巴利
Idha panekacco vuttappakāraṃ samathaṃ anuppādetvāva pañcupādānakkhandhe aniccādīhi vipassati, ayaṃ vipassanā. Tassa vipassanāpāripūriyā tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ vossaggārammaṇato uppajjati cittassa ekaggatā, ayaṃ samatho. Iti paṭhamaṃ vipassanā pacchā samatho. Tena vuccati ‘‘vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ bhāvetī’’ti. Tassa vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ bhāvayato maggo sañjāyati, so taṃ maggaṃ āsevati…pe… bahulīkaroti, tassa taṃ maggaṃ āsevato…pe… anusayā byantīhonti (a. ni. 4.170; paṭi. ma. 2.1), evaṃ vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ bhāveti.
不过,无论是修习以止为先导的观的人,还是修习以观为先导的止的人,在出世间道生起的那一刹那,止和观都是同时并行、成对出现的。应当这样理解这里所说的修习方式。巴利
Samathapubbaṅgamaṃ pana vipassanaṃ bhāvayatopi vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ samathaṃ bhāvayatopi lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe samathavipassanā yuganaddhāva honti. Evamettha bhāvanānayo veditabboti.
《怖畏惊骇经》的注释巴利
4. Bhayabheravasuttavaṇṇanā
34 “如是我闻”这句,是《怖畏惊骇经》的开头。这里对其中未曾出现过的词作逐词解释:“时”这个虚词表示不中断。“确实”表示确定,意思是说世尊在舍卫城的精舍里安住,确实从未间断。“生闻”这个名字不是他父母取的,而是因为获得某个职位才得到的。据说所谓“生闻位”就是国师之位,国王把这个职位赐给了他,因此称为“生闻”。他念诵梵,所以是婆罗门,意思是持诵明咒的人。这本来就是对出身婆罗门者的训释说法。而圣者们因为已经舍弃了诸恶,所以也被称为婆罗门。巴利
34.Evaṃme sutanti bhayabheravasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā – athāti avicchedanatthe nipāto. Khoti avadhāraṇatthe, bhagavato sāvatthiyaṃ vihāre avicchinneyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Jāṇussoṇīti netaṃ tassa mātāpitūhi katanāmaṃ, apica kho ṭhānantarapaṭilābhaladdhaṃ. Jāṇussoṇiṭṭhānaṃ kira nāmetaṃ purohitaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ tassa raññā dinnaṃ, tasmā ‘‘jānussoṇī’’ti vuccati. Brahmaṃ aṇatīti brāhmaṇo, mante sajjhāyatīti attho. Idameva hi jātibrāhmaṇānaṃ niruttivacanaṃ. Ariyā pana bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇāti vuccanti.
对于“他前往世尊那里”这句话中的“由何处”一词,是表示处所含义的具格用法。因此这里应当这样理解:世尊在哪里,他就去那里。或者也可以这样理解:世尊因为什么原因值得天与人前去亲近,他就因为那个原因前去亲近。那么,世尊因为什么原因值得前去亲近呢?是因为人们想证得种种不同的殊胜功德,想享用甜美的果实,就像成群飞鸟总是飞向那棵常年结果的大树一样。巴利
Yenabhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti yenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, tasmā yattha bhagavā, tattha upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yena vā kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamādhippāyena, sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyena dijagaṇehi niccaphalitamahārukkho viya.
“他前往”这句话的意思就是“他去了”。“已经前往”则是说明前往这个动作已经完成。或者也可以这样理解:这样去了之后,他到了离世尊更近的地方,也就是所谓世尊的近旁。与世尊互相问候:就像世尊问他是否安好等,他也同样与世尊一起生起欢喜,如同凉水和热水混合后融为一体。他用这样的话来互相问候:“乔达摩尊者,您还好吗?还能维持吗?乔达摩尊者和乔达摩的弟子们少病、少疾、身体轻快、有力气、安住安乐吗?”因为这样的交谈能生起被称为喜与悦的互相欢喜,也适合用来互相问候,所以是“可问候的”;因为它的意义和言辞都优美动听,即使过了很久也能让人记住、能持续不断地进行,值得被忆念,所以是“可忆念的”。因为听的时候令人愉悦,所以是“可问候的”;因为回忆的时候令人愉悦,所以是“可忆念的”。同样,因为言辞清净,所以是“可问候的”;因为意义清净,所以是“可忆念的”。以种种方式进行了这样既可问候又可忆念的交谈之后,他结束、完成、终结了它,想询问自己前来所为之事,坐在一边。巴利
Upasaṅkamīti ca gatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā evaṃ gato tato āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ bhagavato samīpasaṅkhātaṃ gantvātipi vuttaṃ hoti. Bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodīti yathā khamanīyādīni pucchanto bhagavā tena, evaṃ sopi bhagavatā saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosi, sītodakaṃ viya uṇhodakena sammoditaṃ ekībhāvaṃ agamāsi. Yāya ca ‘‘kacci te, bho gotama, khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci bhoto gotamassa gotamasāvakānañca appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāro’’tiādikāya kathāya sammodi, taṃ pītipāmojjasaṅkhātasammodajananato sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato ca sammodanīyaṃ, atthabyañjanamadhuratāya sucirampi kālaṃ sāretuṃ nirantaraṃ pavattetuṃ araharūpato saritabbabhāvato ca sārāṇīyaṃ. Suyyamānasukhato ca sammodanīyaṃ, anussariyamānasukhato ca sāraṇīyaṃ. Tathā byañjanaparisuddhatāya sammodanīyaṃ, atthaparisuddhatāya sāraṇīyanti evaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā pariyosāpetvā niṭṭhāpetvā yenatthena āgato, taṃ pucchitukāmo ekamantaṃ nisīdi.
“一边”这个词,是中性抽象名词的用法,就像“日月运行不齐”等句子里的用法一样。因此,应当这样理解:他那样坐着,就是坐在一边。或者,这里的“一边”是处格意义的业格用法。“坐”是指走近后坐下。因为有智慧的人走近值得尊敬的人之后,由于懂得坐的礼仪,就坐在一边,而这位也是他们当中的一位,所以说他坐在一边。巴利
Ekamantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Tasmā yathā nisinno ekamantaṃ nisinno hoti, tathā nisīdīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Nisīdīti upāvisi. Paṇḍitā hi purisā garuṭṭhāniyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āsanakusalatāya ekamantaṃ nisīdanti, ayañca nesaṃ aññataro, tasmā ekamantaṃ nisīdi.
那么,怎样才算“坐在一边”呢?这是说,要避开六种坐姿上的毛病。哪六种呢?太远、太近、坐在上风处、坐在高处、坐在正对面、坐在太靠后。坐得太远的话,如果想说话,就得大声喊。坐得太近的话,会碰到别人。坐在上风处的话,身上的气味会熏到别人。坐在高处的话,显得不恭敬。坐在正对面的话,如果想看对方,就得眼睛直直地盯着对方的眼睛看。坐得太靠后的话,如果想看,就得伸长脖子去看。所以,他也是避开了这六种坐姿上的毛病才坐下,因此说“坐在一边”。巴利
Kathaṃ nisinno pana ekamantaṃ nisinno hotīti. Cha nisajjadose vajjetvā. Seyyathidaṃ, atidūraṃ accāsannaṃ uparivātaṃ unnatapadesaṃ atisammukhaṃ atipacchāti. Atidūre nisinno hi sace kathetukāmo hoti, uccāsaddena kathetabbaṃ hoti. Accāsanne nisinno saṅghaṭṭanaṃ karoti. Uparivāte nisinno sarīragandhena bādhati. Unnatappadese nisinno agāravaṃ pakāseti. Atisammukhā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, cakkhunā cakkhuṃ āhacca daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Atipacchā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, gīvaṃ pasāretvā daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā ayampi ete cha nisajjadose vajjetvā nisīdi, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisīdī’’ti.
“那些”就是指“这些人”。善男子有两种:出身善男子和德行善男子。其中,像经文里说的“那时,有一位名叫赖吒和罗的善男子,就是那个土喇果帝咖地方上等家族的儿子”,这样出生于高贵家族的人,就叫出身善男子。而像经文里说的“那些善男子,出于信心,从在家出家,过无家生活”,这样不论出生在什么家族,只要具足德行,就叫德行善男子。这里,他们凭这两个条件,都算是善男子。巴利
Yemeti ye ime. Kulaputtāti duvidhā kulaputtā jātikulaputtā ācārakulaputtā. Tattha ‘‘tena kho pana samayena raṭṭhapālo nāma kulaputto tasmiṃyeva thullakoṭṭhike aggakulassa putto’’ti (ma. ni. 2.294) evaṃ āgatā uccākulappasutā jātikulaputtā nāma. ‘‘Ye te kulaputtā saddhā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.78) evaṃ āgatā pana yattha katthaci kule pasutāpi ācārasampannā ācārakulaputtā nāma. Idha pana dvīhipi kāraṇehi kulaputtāyeva.
所谓信,就是信心。从家,就是从在家生活。非家,就是出家以及成为比丘的身份。其实出家在这里也叫“非家”,因为其中没有家,也就是说,这里没有农耕、牧牛等有益于在家的事业。比丘也没有家,所以叫“无家者”;无家者的状态就是“非家”。已出家,就是已经进入;这样说来,就是以各种方式进入了称为“非家”的出家,或者说进入了比丘的身份。前导者,就是走在前面的人、引导者。大有裨益者,就是在做利益之事时给予很大帮助的。尊贵的乔达摩是他们的劝导者,就是说,尊贵的乔达摩使那些善男子领受、修学增上戒等。那众人,指那一群人。便随所见而行:追随其见而修行,也就是说,尊贵的乔达摩有怎样的见、怎样的意乐、怎样的喜好,他们也变成那样的见、那样的意乐、那样的喜好。巴利
Saddhāti saddhāya. Agārasmāti agārato. Anagāriyanti pabbajjaṃ bhikkhubhāvañca. Pabbajjāpi hi natthettha agāriyanti anagāriyā, agārassa hitaṃ kasigorakkhādikammamettha natthīti attho. Bhikkhupi natthetassa agāranti anagāro, anagārassa bhāvo anagāriyaṃ. Pabbajitāti upagatā, evaṃ sabbathāpi anagāriyasaṅkhātaṃ pabbajjaṃ bhikkhubhāvaṃ vā upagatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pubbaṅgamoti purato gāmī nāyako. Bahukāroti hitakiriyāya bahūpakāro. Bhavaṃ tesaṃ gotamo samādapetāti te kulaputte bhavaṃ gotamo adhisīlādīni gāhetā sikkhāpetā. Sā janatāti so janasamūho. Diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjatīti dassanānugatiṃ paṭipajjati, yandiṭṭhiko bhavaṃ gotamo yaṃkhantiko yaṃruciko, tepi tandiṭṭhikā honti taṃkhantikā taṃrucikāti attho.
他为什么这样说呢?据说,这位婆罗门先前看到许多善男子住在家里时,像天子一样享受五种感官欲乐,内外都有人妥善守护。后来,这些人听了世尊如蜜般甘美的说法,生起信心,从家里出来出家,只以满足衣食为限,住在林间的坐卧处,即使没人守护,也无所猜疑、无所畏惧,欢喜踊跃,兴高采烈。他看到这些善男子这样,就思索:“这种安乐的住处是依靠谁才出现的呢?”于是对世尊生起了“沙门乔达摩”的清净信心。他为了表达这份信心,来到世尊面前,所以才这样说。巴利
Kasmā panāyaṃ evamāhāti? Esa kira pubbe aneke kulaputte agāramajjhe vasante devaputte viya pañcahi kāmaguṇehi paricāriyamāne anto ca bahi ca susaṃvihitārakkhe disvā, te aparena samayena bhagavato madhurarasaṃ dhammadesanaṃ sutvā saddhāya gharā nikkhamma pabbajitvā ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭhe āraññakesu senāsanesu kenaci arakkhiyamānepi anussaṅkitāparisaṅkite haṭṭhapahaṭṭhe udaggudagge addasa, disvā ca imesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ phāsuvihāro kaṃ nissāya uppanno’’ti cintento ‘‘samaṇaṃ gotama’’nti bhagavati pasādaṃ alattha. So taṃ pasādaṃ nivedetuṃ bhagavato santikaṃ āgato, tasmā evamāha.
这时,世尊接受并随喜他的话,便说:“正是如此,婆罗门……”等等。这里“正是如此”这个词,就是用来表达接受和随喜的。 “为我”就是指以我为对象。“信心”就是信心本身。这是针对“不是因为负债,不是因为恐惧”等情形说的。因为对于这类人,世尊才是前导者,对其他人则不是。“确实难以达到”,是说难以达成、难以承受,不是少福之人所能进入的,这就是这句话的意思。“阿兰若、山林”,就是阿兰若和山林。其中,虽然在阿毗达摩里已经究竟地说过:“走出门槛之外,这一切都是阿兰若”,但这里指的,是能成就阿兰若支的坐卧处,也就是所说的“最后五百弓”那种,应当知道就是指这个。巴利
Athassa bhagavā taṃ vacanaṃ sampaṭicchanto abbhanumodanto ca evametaṃ brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Vacanasampaṭicchanānumodanatthoyeva hi ettha ayaṃ evanti nipāto. Mamaṃ uddissāti maṃ uddissa. Saddhāti saddhāyeva. Na iṇaṭṭhā na bhayaṭṭātiādīni sandhāyāha. Īdisānaṃyeva hi bhagavā pubbaṅgamo, na itaresaṃ. Durabhisambhavāni hīti sambhavituṃ dukkhāni dussahāni, na sakkā appesakkhehi ajjhogāhitunti vuttaṃ hoti. Araññavanapatthānīti araññāni ca vanapatthāni ca. Tattha kiñcāpi abhidhamme nippariyāyena, ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhilā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti vuttaṃ, tathāpi yantaṃ ‘‘pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti āraññikaṅganipphādakaṃ senāsanaṃ vuttaṃ, tadeva adhippetanti veditabbaṃ.
所谓“山林”,是指越过村落边界、人们不常去的地方,那里不耕种,也不播种。经里也这样说:“‘山林’这个词,是远离的坐卧处的说法;‘山林’这个词,是树林坐卧处的说法;‘山林’这个词,是令人恐惧的坐卧处的说法;‘山林’这个词,是令人毛骨悚然的坐卧处的说法;‘山林’这个词,是边远之处的坐卧处的说法;‘山林’这个词,是无人靠近的坐卧处的说法。”在这里,除了“边远”这一种说法之外,其余的说法都可以用来理解“山林”。“边远的”,就是处于尽头、极其遥远。“难以做到”指的是身远离难以做到。“难以喜乐”是指不容易安住、不快乐。“在独一性中”,就是在独处的状态中。这说明了什么呢?说明即使做到了身远离,要让心在那里安住喜乐也很困难,因为世间人确实喜欢成双成对地相处。“似乎夺去”,意思是好像夺走、好像吞掉。“意”,就是心。“对于得不到定的人”,是指得不到近行定或安止定的人。这说明了什么呢?对这样的比丘来说,各种像草叶声、鹿声等种种令人恐惧的声音会扰乱他的心,好像夺走他的心一样。这一切,那位婆罗门在见到那些因信心而出家的善男子住在森林中时,感到惊叹,就这样说了。巴利
Vanapatthanti gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānaṃ, yattha na kasīyati na vapīyati. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘vanapatthanti dūrānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacanaṃ, vanapatthanti vanasaṇḍānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ, vanapatthanti bhiṃsanakānametaṃ, vanapatthanti salomahaṃsānametaṃ, vanapatthanti pariyantānametaṃ, vanapatthanti na manussūpacārānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Ettha ca pariyantānanti imamekaṃ pariyāyaṃ ṭhapetvā sesapariyāyehi vanapatthāni veditabbānī. Pantānīti pariyantāni atidūrāni. Dukkaraṃ pavivekanti kāyavivekaṃ dukkaraṃ. Durabhiramanti abhiramituṃ na sukhaṃ. Ekatteti ekībhāve. Kiṃ dasseti? Kāyaviveke katepi tattha cittaṃ abhiramāpetuṃ dukkaraṃ. Dvayaṃdvayārāmo hi ayaṃ lokoti. Haranti maññeti haranti viya ghasanti viya. Manoti manaṃ. Samādhiṃ alabhamānassāti upacārasamādhiṃ vā appanāsamādhiṃ vā alabhantassa. Kiṃ dasseti? Īdisassa bhikkhuno tiṇapaṇṇamigādisaddehi vividhehi ca bhiṃsanakehi vanāni cittaṃ vikkhipanti maññeti, sabbaṃ brāhmaṇo saddhāpabbajitānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ araññavāse (vibha. 529) vimhito āha.
关于身作业品的讨论巴利
Kāyakammantavārakathā
35 35. 于是,世尊像前面那样,用“正是如此,婆罗门”等话接受了那些说法并随喜之后,因为在十六种情形中,那样的住处对于还没有掌握所缘的人确实很难住,而对已经掌握所缘的人则不难;而且菩萨自己当时也正是那样还没有掌握所缘的人。所以,为了显示像自己那样的人在那种住处中的难行,便说了“我也……”等话。巴利
35. Athassa bhagavā purimanayeneva ‘‘evametaṃ brāhmaṇā’’tiādīhi taṃ taṃ vacanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā abbhanumoditvā ca yasmā soḷasasu ṭhānesu ārammaṇapariggaharahitānaṃyeva tādisāni senāsanāni durabhisambhavāni, na tesu ārammaṇapariggāhayuttānaṃ, attanā ca bodhisatto samāno tādiso ahosi, tasmā attano tādisānaṃ senāsanānaṃ durabhisambhavataṃ dassetuṃ, mayhampi khotiādimāha.
这里,“在正觉之前”是指成正觉以前,也就是证得圣道之前。“尚未正觉”是指还没有通达四谛。“作为菩萨”是指作为将要证得正等正觉的有情,或者说,作为心系菩提、执著于菩提的有情。因为从在燃灯佛世尊足下以八法具足而发愿成功那时起,如来就心系菩提,执著于“这是我应当证得的”,为了证得它而不断精进、从不放弃,所以称为菩萨。“那样的我”是指作为那样一位菩萨的我。“凡有任何沙门或婆罗门”是指任何出家者或自称婆罗门的人。巴利
Tattha pubbeva sambodhāti sambodhato pubbeva, ariyamaggappattito aparabhāgeyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anabhisambuddhassāti appaṭividdhacatusaccassa. Bodhisattasseva satoti bujjhanakasattasseva sammāsambodhiṃ adhigantuṃ arahasattasseva sato, bodhiyā vā sattasseva laggasseva sato. Dīpaṅkarassa hi bhagavato pādamūle aṭṭhadhammasamodhānena abhinīhārasamiddhito pabhuti tathāgato bodhiyā satto laggo ‘‘pattabbā mayā esā’’ti tadadhigamāya parakkamaṃ amuñcantoyeva āgato, tasmā bodhisattoti vuccati. Tassa mayhanti tassa evaṃ bodhisattasseva sato mayhaṃ. Ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vāti ye keci pabbajjūpagatā vā bhovādino vā.
“身业不清净”:就是具备杀生等不清净的身业。“以不清净身业之过为因”:意思是说,以被称为不清净身业的自身过失为因,也就是因为不清净身业的缘故。“确实”:这是表示确定语气的助词。“不善”:是有罪过、不安稳。“怖畏恐惧”:是内心惊慌和对可怕对象的恐惧的另一种说法。其中,怖畏因为带有罪过的含义而称为不善,恐惧因为带有不安稳的含义而应当理解。“喊来、招来”:就是召唤、引来。怎么会这样呢?那些人做了杀生等事之后,心想:“我们做了不该做的事,如果我们冒犯过的人知道了,现在一定会追来,让我们遭受伤害和毁灭。”于是进入森林,坐在树丛间或灌木丛中。他们稍微听到一点草声或叶声,就恐惧、惊怖,以为“这下我们完了”,就像被人赶来包围、捆绑、杀害一样。这样,那种怖畏恐惧就以自己把恐惧加到自己身上的方式“喊来、招来”。巴利
Aparisuddhakāyakammantāti aparisuddhena pāṇātipātādinā kāyakammantena samannāgatā. Aparisuddhakāyakammantasandosahetūti aparisuddhassa kāyakammantasaṅkhātassa attano dosassa hetu, aparisuddhakāyakammantakāraṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Haveti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Akusalanti sāvajjaṃ akkhemañca. Bhayabheravanti bhayañca bheravañca. Cittutrāsassa ca bhayānakārammaṇassa cetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tatra bhayaṃ sāvajjaṭṭhena akusalaṃ, bheravaṃ akkhemaṭṭhenāti veditabbaṃ. Avhāyantīti pakkosanti. Kathaṃ? Te hi pāṇātipātādīni katvā ‘‘mayaṃ ayuttamakamhā, sace no te jāneyyuṃ, yesaṃ aparajjhimhā, idāni anubandhitvā anayabyasanaṃ āpādeyyu’’nti araññaṃ pavisitvā gacchantare vā gumbantare vā nisīdanti. Te ‘‘appamattakampi tiṇasaddaṃ vā paṇṇasaddaṃ vā sutvā, idānimhā naṭṭhā’’ti tasanti vittasanti, āgantvā parehi parivāritā viya baddhā vadhitā viya ca honti. Evaṃ taṃ bhayabheravaṃ attani samāropanaṭṭhena avhāyanti pakkosanti.
我确实不会以不清净的身业,去受用那些阿兰若、山林、偏远的坐卧处。这里“vo”只是个语气助词。所谓“圣者”,指的是诸佛和佛弟子。所谓“身业清净”,就是成为这样的人。所谓“我是他们中的一员”,就是说我也是他们当中的一员。因为菩萨不论在家还是出家,身业都是清净的。“bhiyyo”是表示更多的助词。“pallomaṃ”指毛发平伏,意思是安稳、吉祥。“āpādiṃ”意为获得,是说获得了更多的安稳,或者说以超越的方式获得了安稳,或者以超越的方式获得了安稳。“为了在林野中住”是指为了在林野中居住的目的。巴利
Nakho panāhaṃ…pe… paṭisevāmīti ahaṃ kho pana aparisuddhakāyakammanto hutvā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni na paṭisevāmi. Ye hi voti ettha voti nipātamattaṃ. Ariyā vuccanti buddhā ca buddhasāvakā ca. Parisuddhakāyakammantāti īdisā hutvā. Tesamahaṃ aññataroti tesaṃ ahampi eko aññataro. Bodhisatto hi gahaṭṭhopi pabbajitopi parisuddhakāyakammantova hoti. Bhiyyoti atirekatthe nipāto. Pallomanti pannalomataṃ, khemaṃ sotthibhāvanti attho. Āpādinti āpajjiṃ, atirekaṃ sotthibhāvaṃ atirekena vā sotthibhāvamāpajjinti vuttaṃ hoti. Araññe vihārāyāti araññe vihāratthāya.
语业品等的解说巴利
Vacīkammantavārādivaṇṇanā
36 这个解释方法在一切地方都适用。不过这里有一个差别:在语业这一部分,所谓“语业不清净的人”,就是做了妄语等不清净语业的人。他们怎么招来怖畏和恐惧呢?他们用妄语破坏别人的利益,用离间语拆散朋友,用粗恶语在大众中刺伤别人的痛处,用无意义的闲话毁掉其他众生的生计,然后想:“我们做了不该做的事,如果我们得罪的那些人知道了,现在一定会追过来,让我们遭殃、毁灭。”于是他们跑进森林,坐在路中间或者灌木丛里。他们只要听到一点点草声或叶子响,就害怕、惊恐,心想:“这下我们完了”,就像被人包围了、被绑住了、被杀害了一样。就这样,那种怖畏和恐惧通过“加在自己身上”的方式被招来、被唤来。巴利
36. Esa nayo sabbattha. Ayaṃ pana viseso, vacīkammantavāre tāva aparisuddhavacīkammantāti aparisuddhena musāvādādinā vacīkammantena samannāgatā. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te musāvādena parassa atthaṃ bhañjitvā, pisuṇavācāya mittabhedaṃ katvā pharusavācāya paresaṃ parisamajjhe mammāni tuditvā niratthakavācāya parasattānaṃ kammante nāsetvā ‘‘mayaṃ ayuttamakamhā, sace no te jāneyyuṃ, yesaṃ aparajjhimhā, idāni anubandhitvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpeyyu’’nti araññaṃ pavisitvā gacchantare vā gumbantare vā nisīdanti. Te ‘‘appamattakampi tiṇasaddaṃ vā paṇṇasaddaṃ vā sutvā idānimhā naṭṭhā’’ti tasanti vittasanti āgantvā parehi parivāritā viya baddhā vadhitā viya ca honti. Evaṃ taṃ bhayabheravaṃ attani samāropanaṭṭhena avhāyanti, pakkosanti.
在意业这一部分,“意业不清净者”是指具足贪欲等不清净意业的人。他们怎样招来怖畏恐惧呢?他们对他人守护、保护的财物生起贪欲和不正的贪着;对他人发怒;让其他众生执取邪见之后,心想:“我们做了不该做的事……”他们以“把怖畏安到自己身上”的方式,招来、唤来怖畏恐惧。巴利
Manokammantavāre aparisuddhamanokammantāti aparisuddhena abhijjhādinā manokammantena samannāgatā. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te paresaṃ rakkhitagopitesu bhaṇḍesu abhijjhāvisamalobhaṃ uppādetvā parassa kujjhitvā parasatte micchādassanaṃ gāhāpetvā mayaṃ ayuttamakamhā…pe… attani samāropanaṭṭhena avhāyanti pakkosanti.
在“活命”这一部分里,“命不清净者”是指以不清净的方式谋生的人,也就是靠行医、替人传话、放贷取利等二十一种邪命来过活的人。他们怎么招来恐惧和害怕呢?他们这样维持生活后,听到有人说:“那些要净化教法的三藏比丘们,为了净化教法已经出发了,今天或明天就会到这里来。”于是他们跑进森林,坐在路中间……(中略)……心里恐惧、惊慌。因为在他们看来,那些人一来,就会把他们围住、抓住,就像被迫穿上白衣一样。剩下的解释和前面一样。巴利
Ājīvavāre aparisuddhājīvāti aparisuddhena vejjakammadūtakammavaḍḍhipayogādinā ekavīsatianesanabhedena ājīvena samannāgatā. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te evaṃ jīvikaṃ kappetvā suṇanti – ‘‘sāsanasodhakā kira tepiṭakā bhikkhū sāsanaṃ sodhetuṃ nikkhantā, ajja vā sve vā idhāgamissantī’’ti araññaṃ pavisitvā gacchantare vā…pe… tasanti vittasanti. Te hi āgantvā parivāretvā gahitā viya odātavatthanivāsitā viya ca hontīti. Sesaṃ tādisameva.
37 从这以下,“有贪欲者”等说法中,虽然贪欲和嗔恚已经包含在意业里,但还是要知道,这里是按五盖的角度再次说的。其中,“有贪欲者”是指习惯贪求他人财物等的人。“在诸欲中极度贪染”是指在事欲上有厚重的烦恼贪染。他们怎么会招来怖畏恐惧呢?因为他们的所缘不固定。这些所缘不固定的人住在森林里时,白天看到的东西,到了晚上就变成怖畏恐惧出现在他们面前——他们内心混乱,一点点小事就害怕、惊恐;看到绳子或藤蔓,就以为是蛇;看到树桩,就以为是夜叉;看到土坡或山,就以为是大象;就像被蛇等害得遭殃、毁灭一样。其余的解释和前面一样。巴利
37. Ito paraṃ abhijjhālūtiādīsu kiñcāpi abhijjhābyāpādā manokammantena saṅgahitā tathāpi nīvaraṇavasena puna vuttāti veditabbā. Tattha abhijjhālūti parabhaṇḍādiabhijjhāyanasīlā. Kāmesu tibbasārāgāti vatthukāmesu bahalakilesarāgā, te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te avavatthitārammaṇā honti, tesaṃ avavatthitārammaṇānaṃ araññe viharantānaṃ divā diṭṭhaṃ rattiṃ bhayabheravaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti – ‘‘te ākulacittā appamattakenapi tasanti vittasanti, rajjuṃ vā lataṃ vā disvā sappasaññino honti, khāṇuṃ disvā yakkhasaññino, thalaṃ vā pabbataṃ vā disvā hatthisaññino sappādīhi anayabyasanaṃ āpāditā viya hontī’’ti. Sesaṃ tādisameva.
38 心败坏者:因为舍弃了正常状态,所以心是败坏的。被烦恼跟随的心确实会舍弃正常状态,就像陈旧的饭菜一样腐坏。邪恶心思惟者:指邪恶的心思惟,也就是说,具备不善、能让他人受害的心思惟。他们如何招来怖畏恐惧?此后,怖畏恐惧的招来方式,应当按有贪欲者那一段所说的方式来理解。如果有不同之处,我们会在那里说明。而但我确实不是心败坏者这一句,则显示:我是心怀慈爱者、心怀利益者。因为菩萨正是如此。如此,在一切处,都应当从所说诸过的对治一面来赞叹菩萨的德行。巴利
38.Byāpannacittāti pakatibhāvavijahanena vipannacittā. Kilesānugatañhi cittaṃ pakatibhāvaṃ vijahati, purāṇabhattabyañjanaṃ viya pūtikaṃ hoti. Paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappāti paduṭṭhacittasaṅkappā, abhadrakena paresaṃ anatthajanakena cittasaṅkappena samannāgatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Bhayabheravāvhāyanaṃ ito pabhuti abhijjhāluvāre vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Yattha pana viseso bhavissati, tattha vakkhāma. Na kho panāhaṃ byāpannacittoti ettha pana mettacitto ahaṃ hitacittoti dasseti, īdisā hi bodhisattā honti. Evaṃ sabbattha vuttadosapaṭipakkhavasena bodhisattassa guṇā vaṇṇetabbā.
39 被昏沉睡眠缠缚:意思是,被叫作“昏沉”的心之病态,以及被叫作“睡眠”的其余心所之病态所缠缚、被征服、被抓住。这里说的就是这个意思。这类人常常睡得多。巴利
39.Thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitāti cittagelaññabhūtena thinena sesanāmakāyagelaññabhūtena middhena ca pariyuṭṭhitā, abhibhūtā gahitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Te niddābahulā honti.
40 掉举:指本性掉举、内心躁动不安,因为掉举,心在单一所缘上摇摆不定,就像旗杆上的旗帜被风吹动一样。心未寂止:指心未得寂静,在这里适合理解为懊悔。巴利
40.Uddhatāti uddhaccapakatikā vipphandamānacittā, uddhaccena hi ekārammaṇe cittaṃ vipphandati dhajayaṭṭhiyaṃ vātena paṭākā viya. Avūpasantacittāti anibbutacittā, idha kukkuccaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
41 疑者、犹豫者:这里说的就是同一个第五盖。因为对所缘生起“这到底是什么?”的疑惑,所以称为疑;因为无法决断“就是这个”,所以称为犹豫。具足这个盖的沙门婆罗门,就称为疑者、犹豫者。巴利
41.Kaṅkhī vicikicchīti ettha ekamevidaṃ pañcamaṃ nīvaraṇaṃ. Kiṃ nu kho idanti ārammaṇaṃ kaṅkhanato kaṅkhā, idamevidanti nicchetuṃ asamatthabhāvato vicikicchāti vuccati, tena samannāgatā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ‘‘kaṅkhī vicikicchī’’ti vuttā.
42 “自赞毁他”是指:有些人抬高自己、吹捧自己,把自己放在高位,同时又贬低别人、指责别人、诽谤别人,把别人踩在低位。这就是对这类人的称呼。他们怎么会招来恐惧和害怕呢?他们被别人追赶:“听说某某和某某抬高自己,还指责我们,把我们当奴隶一样使唤。抓住他们!”于是他们逃跑,躲进森林,或者跑到路中间、灌木丛里。这里应当像身业那部分一样详细展开。巴利
42.Attukkaṃsanakā paravambhīti ye attānaṃ ukkaṃsenti ukkhipanti, ucce ṭhāne ṭhapenti, parañca vambhenti garahanti nindanti, nīce ṭhāne ṭhapenti, tesametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te parehi ‘‘asuko ca kira asuko ca attānaṃ ukkaṃsenti, amhe garahanti, dāse viya karonti, gaṇhatha ne’’ti anubaddhā palāyitvā araññaṃ pavisitvā gacchantare vā gumbantare vāti kāyakammantasadisaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ.
43 “畏惧者”:是指那种因为恐惧而身体僵硬、汗毛直竖的人。“胆怯种类者”:是说天生就胆小怕事,像村里的孩子那样,动不动就害怕,没有胆量,怯懦退缩。巴利
43.Chambhīti kāyathambhanalomahaṃsanakarena thambhena samannāgatā. Bhīrukajātikāti bhīrukapakatikā, gāmadārakā viya bhayabahulā asūrā kātarāti vuttaṃ hoti.
44 利养、恭敬、名声:在这里,能得到的东西就叫利养,这是对四种资具的称呼。恭敬,意思是美好的侍奉,也就是把资具准备得越来越精致、越来越美好来供养;还有别人对自己表达尊重,或者用花等物品来供奉。名声,是指称扬赞叹的话。利养、恭敬和名声合在一起,就是利养恭敬名声。想要:就是渴望得到。它们怎样带来怖畏恐惧,和贪欲那一部分说的一样。不过,为了说明这里的含义,接下来要讲一个可爱村者的故事——巴利
44.Lābhasakkārasilokanti ettha labbhatīti lābho, catunnaṃ paccayānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sakkāroti sundarakāro, paccayā eva hi paṇītapaṇītā sundarasundarā ca abhisaṅkharitvā katā sakkārāti vuccanti. Yā ca parehi attano gāravakiriyā pupphādīhi vā pūjā. Silokoti vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ etaṃ , lābhañca sakkārañca silokañca lābhasakkārasilokaṃ. Nikāmayamānāti patthayamānā. Bhayabheravāvhāyanaṃ abhijjhāluvārasadisameva. Tadatthadīpakaṃ panettha piyagāmikavatthuṃ kathenti –
据说,有个叫“可爱村者”的比丘,看见受持头陀支的比丘们得到利养,就心想:“我也受持头陀支,把利养弄到手。”于是他受持了冢间住支,住在坟场里。有一天,一头干完活的老牛白天在放牧的地方吃了草,夜里来到那座坟场,把头搁在一丛花里,站着反刍。可爱村者夜里出来经行,听到它下巴发出的声响,心想:“这肯定是天王知道我贪图利养才住在坟场,特意来折磨我。”于是他走到那头老牛面前,合掌礼拜,整夜哀求道:“善士,天王啊,今晚这一夜请您饶了我,从明天起我再也不这样做了。”等到太阳升起,他看清了那不过是头牛,就用棍子打它,把它赶跑,嘴里说着:“你吓了我一整夜!”巴利
Eko kira piyagāmiko nāma bhikkhu samādinnadhutaṅgānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ lābhaṃ disvā ‘‘ahampi dhutaṅgaṃ samādiyitvā lābhaṃ uppādemī’’ti cintetvā sosānikaṅgaṃ samādāya susāne vasati. Athekadivasaṃ eko kammamutto jaraggavo divā gocare caritvā rattiṃ tasmiṃ susāne pupphagumbe sīsaṃ katvā romanthayamāno aṭṭhāsi. Piyagāmiko rattiṃ caṅkamanā nikkhanto tassa hanusaddaṃ sutvā cintesi ‘‘addhā maṃ lābhagiddho esa susāne vasatīti ñatvā devarājā viheṭhetuṃ āgato’’ti, so jaraggavassa purato añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘sappurisa devarāja ajja me ekarattiṃ khama, sve paṭṭhāya na evaṃ karissāmī’’ti namassamāno sabbarattiṃ yācanto aṭṭhāsi. Tato sūriye uṭṭhite taṃ disvā kattarayaṭṭhiyā paharitvā palāpesi ‘‘sabbarattiṃ maṃ bhiṃsāpesī’’ti.
45 懈怠者,就是被懒惰控制的人。劣精进者,就是精进低劣、缺少精进、脱离精进,也就是说没有精进。其中,懈怠者缺少的是身体上的精进努力,劣精进者缺少的是心理上的精进努力。他们连对所缘做最基本的确定都做不到。他们“所缘未确定”等后面的内容,都和前面一样。巴利
45.Kusītāti kosajjānugatā. Hīnavīriyāti hīnā vīriyena virahitā viyuttā, nibbīriyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kusītā kāyikavīriyārambhavirahitā honti, hīnavīriyā cetasikavīriyārambhavirahitā. Te ārammaṇavavatthānamattampi kātuṃ na sakkonti. Tesaṃ avavatthitārammaṇānanti sabbaṃ pubbasadisameva.
46 46.“失念”就是失去了正念。“不正知”就是没有慧。与此相反的说法是“我正念现前”,所以这本质上还是属于正念范畴的问题。这里提到慧,是为了说明他们的念很虚弱。因为念有两种:与慧相应的,和与慧不相应的。其中,与慧相应的念强大有力,不相应的念则虚弱无力。所以,即使他们有时候也有念,但由于不正知,他们仍然是失念的人,因为那虚弱的念无法发挥念本身应有的作用。为了说明这个意思,才说他们“不正知”。这些如此失念、不正知的人,连对所缘做最基本的确定都做不到,后面的一切描述都和前面一样。巴利
46.Muṭṭhassatīti naṭṭhassatī. Asampajānāti paññārahitā, imassa ca paṭipakkhe ‘‘upaṭṭhitassatīhamasmī’’ti vacanato satibhājaniyamevetaṃ. Paññā panettha satidubbalyadīpanatthaṃ vuttā. Duvidhā hi sati paññāsampayuttā paññāvippayuttā ca. Tattha paññāsampayuttā balavatī, vippayuttā dubbalā, tasmā yadāpi tesaṃ sati hoti, tadāpi asampajānantā muṭṭhassatīyeva te, dubbalāya satiyā satikiccābhāvatoti etamatthaṃ dīpetuṃ ‘‘asampajānā’’ti vuttaṃ. Te evaṃ muṭṭhassatī asampajānā ārammaṇavavatthānamattampi kātuṃ na sakkontīti sabbaṃ pubbasadisameva.
47 未得定的人,是指缺少近行定和安止定的人。心散乱的人,是指心飘荡不定的人。因为缺少定力,掉举就趁机钻了进来,让这些缺少定力的人的心在各种所缘之间到处游转,就像林中的猴子在树枝间跳来跳去一样;他们也因为掉举而在单一的所缘上躁动不安。就像前面所说的那样,这些如此未得定、心散乱的人,连对所缘做最基本的确定都做不到;后面的一切也和前面一样。巴利
47.Asamāhitāti upacārappanāsamādhivirahitā. Vibbhantacittāti ubbhantacittā. Samādhivirahena laddhokāsena uddhaccena tesaṃ samādhivirahānaṃ cittaṃ nānārammaṇesu paribbhamati, vanamakkaṭo viya vanasākhāsu uddhaccena ekārammaṇe vipphandati. Pubbe vuttanayenena te evaṃ asamāhitā vibbhantacittā ārammaṇavavatthānamattampi kātuṃ na sakkontīti sabbaṃ pubbasadisameva.
48 “劣慧者”是无慧之人的另一种叫法。不过,并不存在所谓“坏掉的慧”。
“eḷamūgā”就是“elamukhā”,是把 kha 音变成了 ga 音,意思是“流着口水的嘴”。因为智慧低劣的人说话时,口水会从嘴里流出来,而口水就叫作“elā”。正如经典里说:“看见那流着口水、有双舌的蛇。”所以这些人被称为“eḷamūgā”。也有写成“elamukhā”的版本;有些人读作“elamugā”,另一些人读作“elamukā”,但无论哪种读法,意思都是“流着口水的嘴”。
那么,他们是怎么招来怖畏恐惧的呢?这些智慧低劣、流着口水的人,连对所缘做一点点确定都做不到。他们无法确定所缘,住在林中时,白天看到的东西到了夜里就变成怖畏恐惧出现在眼前。他们内心混乱,稍微一点小事就惊慌害怕:看到绳子或藤蔓,就以为是蛇;看到树桩,就以为是夜叉;看到平地或山丘,就以为是大象;好像已经被蛇等害得遭殃了一样。他们就这样把那种怖畏恐惧安到自己身上,所以说是“招来”,也就是把它呼唤过来。
“我是具慧者”这里,“具慧者”是指具有慧、拥有慧,但并不是指拥有观慧,也不是指拥有道慧,而是指在这十六种情形中拥有确定所缘的慧。其余部分到处都和前面所说的一样。巴利
48.Duppaññāti nippaññānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Paññā pana duṭṭhā nāma natthi. Eḷamūgāti elamukhā, kha-kārassa ga-kāro kato. Lālamukhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Duppaññānañhi kathentānaṃ lālā mukhato galati, lālā ca elāti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘passelamūgaṃ uragaṃ dujjivha’’nti. Tasmā te ‘‘eḷamūgā’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Elamukhā’’tipi pāṭho. ‘‘Elamugā’’ti keci paṭhanti, apare ‘‘elamukā’’tipi, sabbattha ‘‘elamukhā’’ti attho. Te kathaṃ bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti? Te duppaññā eḷamūgā ārammaṇavavatthānamattampi kātuṃ na sakkonti. Tesaṃ avavatthitārammaṇānaṃ araññe viharantānaṃ divā diṭṭhaṃ rattiṃ bhayabheravaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti ‘‘te ākulacittā appamattakenapi tasanti vittasanti, rajjuṃ vā lataṃ vā disvā sappasaññino honti, khāṇuṃ disvā yakkhasaññino, thalaṃ vā pabbataṃ vā disvā hatthisaññino sappādīhi anayavyasanaṃ āpāditā viya hontī’’ti. Evaṃ taṃ bhayabheravaṃ attani samāropanaṭṭhena avhāyanti pakkosanti. Paññāsampannohamasmīti ettha paññāsampannoti paññāya sampanno samannāgato, no ca kho vipassanāpaññāya, na maggapaññāya, apica kho pana imesu soḷasasu ṭhānesu ārammaṇavavatthānapaññāyāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttanayamevāti.
怖畏、恐怖及住处等的说明巴利
Bhayabheravasenāsanādivaṇṇanā
49 “于我”这个说法,前后是怎么连结起来的呢?
据说,菩萨在逐一观察这十六种所缘的时候,并没有看到怖畏恐惧。他心想:“所谓怖畏恐惧,据说会在这样的夜晚、这样的住处出现。那我不如就到那里去找找看。”于是他就去追寻怖畏恐惧了。世尊现在为了向那位婆罗门显示此义,故说“于我”等语。巴利
49.Tassamayhanti ko anusandhi? Bodhisatto kira imāni soḷasārammaṇāni pariggaṇhanto ca bhayabheravaṃ adisvā bhayabheravaṃ nāma evarūpāsu rattīsu evarūpe senāsane ca paññāyati, handa naṃ tatthāpi gavesissāmīti bhayabheravagavesanamakāsi, etamatthaṃ bhagavā idāni brāhmaṇassa dassento tassa mayhantiādimāha.
这里,“yā”和“tā”这两个词,都是对夜晚本身的总说和分别解说。在“abhiññātā”这个词里,“abhi”是表示特征的前缀。所以,“abhiññātā”应当理解为:通过月圆、月缺等特征而被认知。至于“abhilakkhitā”,这里只是加了一个前缀而已,因此“abhilakkhitā”的意思就是“应当被标记的”,也就是说,为了布萨、受持戒律、听闻正法、供养、礼敬等目的,而应当被标记、被注意、被辨识。巴利
Tattha yā tāti ubhayametaṃ rattīnaṃyeva uddesaniddesavacanaṃ. Abhiññātāti ettha abhīti lakkhaṇatthe upasaggo. Tasmā abhiññātāti candapāripūriyā candaparikkhayenāti evamādīhi lakkhaṇehi ñātāti veditabbā. Abhilakkhitāti ettha upasaggamattameva, tasmā abhilakkhitāti lakkhaṇīyā icceva attho, uposathasamādānadhammassavanapūjāsakkārādikaraṇatthaṃ lakkhetabbā sallakkhetabbā upalakkhetabbāti vuttaṃ hoti.
十四日是指从半月第一天算起,到第十四天圆满的那一整夜。十五日和八日也是这样。半月包括白半月和黑半月。这三者各算两次,一共就是六个夜晚。所以无论哪里都要配上“半月”来说,也就是“半月的十四日、半月的十五日、半月的八日”。那为什么不把第五日也算进去呢?因为它并不是任何时候都有的。据说,在佛陀世尊还没有出现的时候,或者虽然出现了但还没有般涅槃的时候,第五日并没有被特别标出来。世尊般涅槃之后,结集法的长老们想:“现在听闻正法的机会变得很少了。”于是他们共同商定,把第五日定为闻法日。从那时起,它才被特别标出来。正因为它不是任何时候都有的,所以这里没有把它算进去。巴利
Cātuddasīti pakkhassa paṭhamadivasato pabhuti catuddasannaṃ pūraṇī ekā ratti. Evaṃ pañcadasī aṭṭhamī ca. Pakkhassāti sukkapakkhassa kaṇhapakkhassa ca. Etā tisso tisso katvā cha rattiyo, tasmā sabbattha pakkhavacanaṃ yojetabbaṃ ‘‘pakkhassa cātuddasī pakkhassa pañcadasī pakkhassa aṭṭhamī’’ti. Atha pañcamī kasmā na gahitāti? Asabbakālikattā. Buddhe kira bhagavati anuppannepi uppajjitvā aparinibbutepi pañcamī anabhilakkhitāyeva, parinibbute pana dhammasaṅgāhakattherā cintesuṃ ‘‘dhammassavanaṃ cirena hotī’’ti. Tato sammannitvā pañcamīti dhammassavanadivasaṃ ṭhapesuṃ, tato pabhuti sā abhilakkhitā jātā, evaṃ asabbakālikattā ettha na gahitāti.
像那样的地方,就是指那一类处所。园塔是指花园、果园等园林本身,它们就是园塔。因为受到恭敬对待,所以被称为庙,意思是应当受到供养。林庙是指祀献林、丛林、秀美的森林、天神的娑罗林等树林本身,它们就是林庙。树庙是指在村庄、城镇等入口处应当受到供养的树木,这些树木本身就是树庙。世间人以为这些园林、树林和树木中有天神居住,或者把它们想成有天神,于是对它们生起天神的想,恭敬它们、供养它们,因此它们全都被称为庙。可怖畏的是指能让人产生恐惧的,无论看见还是听见,都会让人害怕。毛发竖立的是指伴随着毛发竖立而出现,因为一进入其中就会让人毛发竖立。我或许能见到,意思是:我或许真能见到那种怖畏恐惧。在后来的时候,是指从“我这样想”那个时候之后的另一段时间。巴利
Tathārūpāsūti tathāvidhāsu. Ārāmacetiyānīti pupphārāmaphalārāmādayo ārāmā eva ārāmacetiyāni. Cittīkataṭṭhena hi cetiyānīti vuccanti, pūjanīyaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vanacetiyānīti baliharaṇavanasaṇḍasubhagavanadevasālavanādīni vanāniyeva vanacetiyāni. Rukkhacetiyānīti gāmanigamādidvāresu pūjanīyarukkhāyeva rukkhacetiyāni. Lokiyā hi dibbādhivatthāti vā maññamānā tesuyeva vā dibbasaññino hutvā ārāmavanarukkhe cittīkaronti , pūjenti, tena te sabbepi cetiyānīti vuccanti. Bhiṃsanakānīti bhayajanakāni, passatopi suṇatopi bhayaṃ janenti. Salomahaṃsānīti saheva lomahaṃsena vattanti, pavisamānasseva lomahaṃsajananato. Appeva nāma passeyyanti api nāma taṃ bhayabheravaṃ passeyyameva. Aparena samayenāti, ‘‘etadahosi yaṃnūnāha’’nti evaṃ cintitakālato paṭṭhāya aññena kālena.
在那里,婆罗门,我住在那种地方——那些住所是夜叉、罗刹、毕舍遮等众生的住处,是人们祈愿、献供的对象,地上散落着花、香、肉、血、油脂、脾、肺和酒等污物,湿漉漉地铺满一地,就像被一股脑倒下来一样。即使是白天看到,也会让人觉得心脏都要裂开了。正是针对这样的地方,才说“婆罗门,我住在那里”。“有兽前来”是说鹿、羚羊、犀牛、豹、猪等各类野兽用角顶、用蹄刨地而来;其实这里把所有四足动物都叫做“兽”。在某些地方,黑豺也被叫做“兽”。正如所说——巴利
Tattha ca me brāhmaṇa viharatoti tathārūpesu senāsanesu yaṃ yaṃ manussānaṃ āyācanaupahārakaraṇārahaṃ yakkhaṭṭhānaṃ pupphadhūpamaṃsaruhiravasāmedapihakapapphāsasurāmerayādīhi okiṇṇakilinnadharaṇitalaṃ ekanipātaṃ viya yakkharakkhasapisācānaṃ, yaṃ divāpi passantānaṃ hadayaṃ maññe phalati, taṃ ṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tattha ca me, brāhmaṇa, viharato’’ti. Mago vā āgacchatīti siṅgāni vā khurāni vā koṭṭento gokaṇṇakhaggadīpivarāhādibhedo mago vā āgacchati, sabbacatuppadānañhi idha magoti nāmaṃ. Katthaci pana kāḷasiṅgālopi vuccati. Yathāha –
你的肩膀像公牛的一样,你的伸展像狮子的一样;
兽王啊,我向你致敬,尽管如此,我们仍能得到一些东西。巴利
‘‘Usabhasseva te khandho, sīhasseva vijambhitaṃ; Magarāja namo tyatthu, api kiñci labhāmase’’ti. (jā. 1.3.133);
孔雀或者把干木头弄掉下来,意思是:孔雀或者把干木头从树上摇动,让它掉下来。这里用孔雀来代表,是指一切飞禽,所以说任何飞禽都包括在内。或者,孔雀后面的“或者”一词,是说或者是别的什么飞禽。这个道理也适用于前面“或者走兽”的说法。或者风吹动落叶堆,意思是:风或者吹动、扬起落叶碎屑。那定然就是正在到来的怖畏恐惧,意思是:这正在到来的,必定就是那怖畏恐惧。从此以后,应当知道所缘本身就是怖畏恐惧。因为该所缘是微细怖畏和强烈怖畏的所缘,所以乐所缘之色就像乐本身一样。我到底为什么偏偏唯盼恐怖而住呢?我究竟是因为什么原因,纯粹地期盼恐怖、渴望恐怖而安住呢?巴利
Moro vā kaṭṭhaṃ pātetīti moro vā sukkhakaṭṭhaṃ rukkhato cāletvā pāteti. Moraggahaṇena ca idha sabbapakkhiggahaṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, tena yo koci pakkhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā moro vāti vā saddena añño vā koci pakkhīti. Esa nayo purime magaggahaṇepi. Vāto vā paṇṇakasaṭaṃ eretīti vāto vā paṇṇakacavaraṃ ghaṭṭeti. Etaṃ nūna taṃ bhayabheravaṃ āgacchatīti yametaṃ āgacchati, taṃ bhayabheravaṃ nūnāti. Ito pabhuti ca ārammaṇameva bhayabheravanti veditabbaṃ. Parittassa ca adhimattassa ca bhayassa ārammaṇattā sukhārammaṇaṃ rūpaṃ sukhamiva. Kiṃ nu kho ahaṃ aññadatthu bhayapaṭikaṅkhī viharāmīti ahaṃ kho kiṃ kāraṇaṃ ekaṃseneva bhayaṃ ākaṅkhamāno icchamāno hutvā viharāmi.
“如实”和“对如实者”的意思是:以任何一种威仪而存在、已经存在、正在存在、正在持续,或者已经具备那种威仪的。“于我面前”就是在我身边。“如是如实,或如是者”的意思是:以那同样的威仪而存在、已经存在、正在存在、正在持续,或者已经具备那种威仪的。所谓“我确实……遮止”:据说,当菩萨正在经行时,遇到鹿角声、蹄声等这一类成为怖畏恐惧所缘的声音,大士既不站住,也不坐下,也不躺下,而是在经行当中审察、探究,看不到有什么怖畏恐惧,那只不过是对鹿角声、蹄声等的感知罢了。他明白:“这只是这么一回事,并不是怖畏恐惧”,于是便停下来,或者坐下,或者躺下。为了说明这个意思,才说了“我确实……”等话。这个道理适用于所有省略重复的地方。而且应当知道,从这里往后,所说的诸威仪不是按威仪本身的顺序,而是按邻近的顺序来说的:因为当怖畏恐惧出现时,正在经行的人不会站住、不会坐下、不会躺下;而当怖畏恐惧出现时,已经站住的人也不会经行。巴利
Yathābhūtaṃ yathābhūtassāti yena yena iriyāpathena bhūtassa bhavitassa sato vattamānassa samaṅgībhūtassa vā. Meti mama santike. Tathābhūtaṃ tathābhūto vāti tena teneva iriyāpathena bhūto bhavito santo vattamāno samaṅgībhūto vāti attho. So kho ahaṃ…pe… paṭivinemīti bodhisattassa kira caṅkamantassa tasmiṃ magasiṅgakhurasaddādibhede bhayabheravārammaṇe āgate neva mahāsatto tiṭṭhati, na nisīdati na sayati, atha kho caṅkamantova parivīmaṃsanto parivicinanto bhayabheravaṃ na passati, magasiṅgakhurasaddādimattameva cetaṃ hoti, so taṃ ñatvā idaṃ nāmetaṃ, na bhayabheravanti tato tiṭṭhati vā nisīdati vā sayati vā. Etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘so kho aha’’ntiādimāha. Esa nayo sabbapeyyālesu. Ito parañca iriyāpathapaṭipāṭiyā avatvā āsannapaṭipāṭiyā iriyāpathā vuttāti veditabbā, caṅkamantassa hi bhayabherave āgate na ṭhito na nisinno na nipanno ṭhitassāpi āgate na caṅkamīti evaṃ tassa āsannapaṭipāṭiyā vuttāti.
无迷乱住的解说巴利
Asammohavihāravaṇṇanā
50 像这样,在那些令人恐惧的地方显示出自己没有恐惧和害怕之后,现在为了显示在禅修者容易迷惑的地方自己安住于不迷惑的状态,于是说道:“然而,婆罗门,有……”等等。巴利
50. Evaṃ bhiṃsanakesupi ṭhānesu attano bhayabheravābhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni jhāyīnaṃ sammohaṭṭhānesu attano asammohavihāraṃ dassetuṃ santi kho pana, brāhmaṇātiādimāha.
在这里,“有”的意思是存在、出现、能被找到。“实际是夜晚,却认为是白天”,意思是实际是夜晚,却把它认作“这是白天”。“实际是白天,却认为是夜晚”,意思是实际是白天,却把它认作“这是夜晚”。为什么这些人会有这样的想呢?要么是因为不擅长把握出定的时机,要么是因为鸟的叫声。怎么回事呢?比如有一个人修成了白遍,白天做了准备工作,白天入了定,然后生起这样的作意:“我要在白天出定”,但他并不擅长判断时间的长短。结果白天过去了,他在夜里才出定。由于白遍遍满的修习,他的定境清明、明亮、非常清晰。因为他在入定时生起了“我要在白天出定”的作意,又加上白遍遍满的清明明亮,所以实际是夜晚,他却认为是白天。再比如有一个人修成了青遍,夜里做了准备工作,夜里入了定,然后生起这样的作意:“我要在夜里出定”,但他也不擅长判断时间的长短。结果夜里过去了,他在白天才出定。由于青遍遍满的修习,他的定境不清明、不明亮。因为他在入定时生起了“我要在夜里出定”的作意,又加上青遍遍满的不清明不明亮,所以实际是白天,他却认为是夜晚。像这样,就是因为不擅长把握出定的时机,他们才会有这样的想。巴利
Tattha santīti atthi saṃvijjanti upalabbhanti. Rattiṃyeva samānanti rattiṃyeva santaṃ, divāti sañjānantīti ‘‘divaso aya’’nti sañjānanti. Divāyeva samānanti divasaṃyeva santaṃ. Rattīti sañjānantīti ‘‘ratti aya’’nti sañjānanti. Kasmā panete evaṃsaññino hontīti. Vuṭṭhānakosallābhāvato vā sakuṇarutato vā. Kathaṃ? Idhekacco odātakasiṇalābhī divā parikammaṃ katvā divā samāpanno divāyeva vuṭṭhahāmīti manasikāraṃ uppādeti, no ca kho addhānaparicchede kusalo hoti. So divasaṃ atikkamitvā rattibhāge vuṭṭhāti. Odātakasiṇapharaṇavasena cassa visadaṃ hoti vibhūtaṃ suvibhūtaṃ. So, divā vuṭṭhahāmīti uppāditamanasikāratāya odātakasiṇapharaṇavisadavibhūtatāya ca rattiṃyeva samānaṃ divāti sañjānāti. Idha panekacco nīlakasiṇalābhī rattiṃ parikammaṃ katvā rattiṃ samāpanno rattiṃyeva vuṭṭhahāmīti manasikāraṃ uppādeti, no ca kho addhānaparicchede kusalo hoti. So rattiṃ atikkamitvā divasabhāge vuṭṭhāti. Nīlakasiṇapharaṇavasena cassa avisadaṃ hoti avibhūtaṃ. So rattiṃ vuṭṭhahāmīti uppāditamanasikāratāya nīlakasiṇapharaṇāvisadāvibhūtatāya ca divāyeva samānaṃ rattīti sañjānāti. Evaṃ tāva vuṭṭhānakosallābhāvato evaṃsaññino honti.
另外,有些人是因为鸟叫声而产生这种想法的。比如有人坐在精舍深处,那些白天鸣叫的鸟,像乌鸦之类,把月光误以为天亮了,就在夜里叫起来,也可能因为别的原因叫。他听到这些鸟叫声,就把明明是夜晚的时候当成白天。还有一种情况:有人坐在山谷之间、幽深茂密的山窟里,赶上连续七天大雨,阳光完全被遮住。那些夜里鸣叫的鸟,像猫头鹰之类,即使到了正午时分,也因为到处一片漆黑而躲在暗处,凭着“现在是夜里”的感觉,或者因为别的原因就叫起来。他听到这些鸟叫声,就把明明是白天的时候当成夜晚。像这样,就是因为鸟叫声而产生了这样的认知。这就是我所说的这种认知。“我说这属于迷乱住”:意思是说,这属于迷乱住的范围,包含在迷乱住里面,是迷乱住当中的一种。巴利
Sakuṇarutato pana idhekacco antosenāsane nisinno hoti. Atha divā ravanakasakuṇā kākādayo candālokena divāti maññamānā rattiṃ ravanti, aññehi vā kāraṇehi. So tesaṃ saddaṃ sutvā rattiṃyeva samānaṃ divāti sañjānāti. Idha panekacco pabbatantare gambhīrāya ghanavanappaṭicchannāya giriguhāya sattāhavaddalikāya vattamānāya antarahitasūriyāloke kāle nisinno hoti. Atha rattiṃ ravanakasakuṇā ulūkādayo majjhanhikasamayepi tattha tattha samandhakāre nilīnā rattisaññāya vā aññehi vā kāraṇehi ravanti. So tesaṃ saddaṃ sutvā divāyeva samānaṃ rattīti sañjānāti. Evaṃ sakuṇarutato evaṃsaññino hontīti. Idamahanti idaṃ ahaṃ evaṃ sañjānanaṃ . Sammohavihārasmiṃ vadāmīti sammohavihārapariyāpannaṃ antogadhaṃ, sammohavihārānaṃ aññataraṃ vadāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.
婆罗门,我确实……能清楚地知道。菩萨对一昼夜的划分是明明白白的。就算碰上连下七天大雨、日月都看不见的时候,他照样知道:食前的时间过了这么多,食后的时间过了这么多,初夜过了这么多,中夜过了这么多,后夜过了这么多。所以他才那样说。菩萨已经圆满了诸波罗蜜,能这样了知,这并不奇怪。因为就连安住在部分智上的声闻弟子,他们对一昼夜的划分也是清清楚楚的。巴利
Ahaṃ kho pana brāhmaṇa…pe… sañjānāmīti pākaṭo bodhisattassa rattindivaparicchedo sattāhavaddalepi candimasūriyesu adissamānesupi jānātiyeva ‘‘ettakaṃ purebhattakālo gato, ettakaṃ pacchābhattakālo, ettakaṃ paṭhamayāmo, ettakaṃ majjhimayāmo, ettakaṃ pacchimayāmo’’ti, tasmā evamāha. Anacchariyañcetaṃ yaṃ pūritapāramī bodhisatto evaṃ jānāti. Padesañāṇe ṭhitānaṃ sāvakānampi hi rattindivaparicchedo pākaṭo hoti.
据说在迦利耶尼大寺里,瞿达多长老在阳光有两指宽的时候去取食物,在阳光有一指宽的时候进食。即使太阳还看不见,他也一早就进入住处,到了那个时辰就出来。有一天,寺里的园丁们想:“明天长老出来的时候,我们一定要看到他。”于是准备好食物,坐在计时柱下等着。长老正好在阳光两指宽的时候就出来了。据说从那时起,即使太阳还没出来,他们只要凭长老出来的时间就知道该敲鼓了。巴利
Kalyāṇiyamahāvihāre kira godattatthero dvaṅgulakāle bhattaṃ gahetvā aṅgulakāle bhuñjati. Sūriye adissamānepi pātoyeva senāsanaṃ pavisitvā tāya velāya nikkhamati. Ekadivasaṃ ārāmikā ‘‘sve therassa nikkhamanakāle passāmā’’ti bhattaṃ sampādetvā kālatthambhamūle nisīdiṃsu. Thero dvaṅgulakāleyeva nikkhamati. Tato pabhuti kira sūriye adissamānepi therassa nikkhamanasaññāya eva bheriṃ ākoṭenti.
在阿阇迦罗精舍,黑天长老在雨安居期间敲击夜分梆子,这是长老一贯的做法。他并不操作夜分计时的水钟,其他比丘才操作。初夜结束时,长老拿起木槌,刚站定,或者只敲一两下时,夜分计时器就落下了。他就是这样在三个夜分中修习沙门法。长老清晨入村托钵,得到食物后回到精舍,到进食时拿起钵,然后去白天用功的地方,继续修习沙门法。比丘们看到计时柱后,如果找不到长老,就派人去找他。派去的比丘在长老刚从白天用功的地方出来时,或者在半路上遇见他。如此,即使是安住于分智的声闻弟子,对昼夜的分际也这么清楚明了,何况菩萨呢。巴利
Ajagaravihārepi kāḷadevatthero antovasse yāmagaṇḍikaṃ paharati, āciṇṇametaṃ therassa. Na ca yāmayantanāḷikaṃ payojeti, aññe bhikkhū payojenti. Atha nikkhante paṭhame yāme there muggaraṃ gahetvā ṭhitamatteyeva ekaṃ dve vāre paharanteyeva vā yāmayantaṃ patati, evaṃ tīsu yāmesu samaṇadhammaṃ katvā thero pātoyeva gāmaṃ pavisitvā piṇḍapātaṃ ādāya vihāraṃ āgantvā bhojanavelāya pattaṃ gahetvā divā vihāraṭṭhānaṃ gantvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti. Bhikkhū kālatthambhaṃ disvā therassa adisvā āgamanatthāya pesenti. So bhikkhu theraṃ divā vihāraṭṭhānā nikkhamantameva vā antarāmagge vā passati. Evaṃ padesañāṇe ṭhitānaṃ sāvakānampi rattindivaparicchedo pākaṭo hoti, kimaṅgaṃ pana bodhisattānanti.
在这里,应当这样理解前后文的关联:婆罗门,若有人这样说——“那位具有不迷惑之法的众生出现在世间……为了天与人的利益、安乐”——他这样说就是在正确地说,就是如实而说,不是说虚妄话的人。而这样说——“我”才是那个正确地说、如实而说、不说虚妄话的人——他也是在正确地说,也是如实而说,也不是说虚妄话的人。巴利
Yaṃ kho taṃ brāhmaṇa…pe… vadeyyāti ettha pana ‘‘yaṃ kho taṃ, brāhmaṇa, asammohadhammo satto loke uppanno…pe… sukhāya devamanussāna’’nti vacanaṃ vadamāno koci sammā vadeyya, sammā vadamāno siyā, na vitathavādī assa. Mameva taṃ vacanaṃ vadamāno sammā vadeyya, sammā vadamāno siyā, na vitathavādī assāti evaṃ padasambandho veditabbo.
在这里,“无迷乱法”是指本性无迷乱。“世间”是指人世间。“为了众多人的利益”,是为了众多众生的利益,也就是通过智慧的成就,教导他们现世和来世的利益。“为了众多人的安乐”,是为了众多众生的安乐,也就是通过布施的成就,给予他们生活用具带来的安乐。“出于对世间的怜悯”,是为了怜悯世间,也就是通过慈和悲的成就,像父母一样守护、保护世间。“为了天与人的利益、益处、安乐”:这里举出天和人,其实只是取那些有能力、堪受教化的众生,为了让他们证得涅槃的道和果,而显示自己出现于世。应当知道:说“为了利益”,指的是为了究竟的利益,也就是为了涅槃;说“为了益处”,指的是能达成涅槃的道,因为再没有比能达成涅槃的道更高的益处了;说“为了安乐”,指的是果定之乐,因为再没有比这更高的安乐了。经中也这样说:“此定是现法乐住,未来也感乐果。”巴利
Tattha asammohadhammoti asammohasabhāvo. Loketi manussaloke. Bahujanahitāyāti bahujanassa hitatthāya, paññāsampattiyā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikahitūpadesakoti. Bahujanasukhāyāti bahujanassa sukhatthāya, cāgasampattiyā upakaraṇasukhassa dāyakoti. Lokānukampāyāti lokassa anukampatthāya, mettākaruṇāsampattiyā mātāpitaro viya lokassa rakkhitā gopayitāti. Atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānanti idha devamanussaggahaṇena ca bhabbapuggalaveneyyasatteyeva gahetvā tesaṃ nibbānamaggaphalādhigamāya attano uppattiṃ dassetīti veditabbo. Atthāyāti hi vutte paramatthatthāya nibbānāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Hitāyāti vutte taṃ sampāpakamaggatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti, nibbānasampāpakamaggato hi uttari hitaṃ nāma natthi. Sukhāyāti vutte phalasamāpattisukhatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti, tato uttari sukhābhāvato. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko’’ti (dī. ni. 3.355; a. ni. 5.27; vibha. 804).
前行道的解释等巴利
Pubbabhāgapaṭipadādivaṇṇanā
51 世尊这样向那位婆罗门显示了自己在证得佛陀功德之后最终安住的“无迷乱住”。现在,为了说明他是靠哪条修行道路,从前行阶段开始就一直修,最终证得这究竟的无迷乱住,婆罗门于是说了“我确实已经发起……”等话。巴利
51. Evaṃ bhagavā buddhaguṇapaṭilābhāvasānaṃ attano asammohavihāraṃ brāhmaṇassa dassetvā idāni yāya paṭipadāya taṃ koṭippattaṃ asammohavihāraṃ adhigato, taṃ pubbabhāgato pabhuti dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ kho pana me brāhmaṇātiādimāha.
有些人则说:“这位婆罗门听了关于无迷乱住的解说之后,心里生起了这样的念头:‘他到底是靠哪种修行方法才证得这个的?’佛陀知道了他的心思,为了向他表明‘我就是靠这种修行方法证得了这个最殊胜的无迷乱住’,所以这样说了。”巴利
Keci panāhu ‘‘imaṃ asammohavihāraṃ sutvā brāhmaṇassa cittamevaṃ uppannaṃ ‘kāya nu kho paṭipadāya imaṃ patto’ti, tassa cittamaññāya imāyāhaṃ paṭipadāya imaṃ uttamaṃ asammohavihāraṃ pattoti dassento evamāhā’’ti.
在这里,婆罗门,所谓“我确实已经发起了精进”,意思是:婆罗门,这个无上的无迷乱住,不是我以懈怠、失念、身体躁动不安、内心散乱的状态证得的。相反,为了证得它,我确实发起了精进。当我坐在菩提道场时,我发起了具备四支的精进,它被策励起来、无松懈地运转。也正是因为精进已经发起,它才变得不退缩。巴利
Tattha āraddhaṃ kho pana me, brāhmaṇa, vīriyaṃ ahosīti, brāhmaṇa, na mayā ayaṃ uttamo asammohavihāro kusītena muṭṭhassatinā sāraddhakāyena vikkhittacittena vā adhigato, apica kho tadadhigamāya āraddhaṃ kho pana me vīriyaṃ ahosi, bodhimaṇḍe nisinnena mayā caturaṅgavīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ ahosi, paggahitaṃ asithilappavattitanti vuttaṃ hoti. Āraddhattāyeva ca metaṃ asallīnaṃ ahosi.
念已现前、没有忘失:这里不只是精进,我的念也因为面对所缘而现前了;正因为念现前,所以叫没有忘失。身已轻安:由于身心两种轻安生起,我的身也变得轻安了。其中,因为名身轻安时,色身也一定轻安,所以不区分名身和色身,整体就说“身已轻安”。无躁热:又因为身已轻安,所以就没有躁热,意思是已经远离了躁动不安。心得定、心一境:我的心也已妥善地安置、很好地安立,就像准确地投向所缘一样;正因为心得定,所以成为一境、不动摇、无悸动。到这里为止,说的就是禅那的前分行道。巴利
Upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhāti na kevalañca vīriyameva, satipi me ārammaṇābhimukhībhāvena upaṭṭhitā ahosi. Upaṭṭhitattāyeva ca asammuṭṭhā. Passaddho kāyoti kāyacittappassaddhisambhavena kāyopi me passaddho ahosi. Tattha yasmā nāmakāye passaddhe rūpakāyopi passaddhoyeva hoti, tasmā nāmakāyo rūpakāyoti avisesetvāva passaddho kāyoti vuttaṃ. Asāraddhoti so ca kho passaddhattāyeva asāraddho, vigatadarathoti vuttaṃ hoti. Samāhitaṃ cittaṃ ekagganti cittampi me sammā āhitaṃ suṭṭhu ṭhapitaṃ appitaṃ viya ahosi. Samāhitattā eva ca ekaggaṃ acalaṃ nipphandananti, ettāvatā jhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadā kathitā hoti.
现在,为了说明通过这条修行道路所证得的殊胜成果——从初禅开始,一直到三种明为终点——世尊才说了“那个我确实……”等话。其中,关于“远离诸欲……成就并安住于第四禅”等在这里应当说明的内容,在《清净道论》的地遍解说中已经全部讲过了。唯一的区别是:那里说的是“成就并安住”,这里说的是“安住”。那么,世尊是修习了什么业处之后,才成就并安住于这些禅那的呢?是修习了入出息念这个业处。巴利
Idāni imāya paṭipadāya adhigataṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ ādiṃ katvā vijjāttayapariyosānaṃ visesaṃ dassento so kho ahantiādimāha. Tattha vivicceva kāmehi…pe… catutthajjhānaṃ upasampajjavihāsinti ettha tāva yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge pathavīkasiṇakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Kevalañhi tattha ‘‘upasampajja viharatī’’ti āgataṃ, idha ‘‘vihāsi’’nti, ayameva viseso. Kiṃ katvā pana bhagavā imāni jhānāni upasampajja vihāsīti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā. Kataraṃ? Ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ.
这四种禅那,对某些人来说是为了达到心一境性,对某些人来说是作为观的基础,对某些人来说是作为神通的基础,对某些人来说是作为灭尽定的基础,对某些人来说则是为了转生到“有”当中。
其中,对漏尽者来说,是为了达到心一境性。因为他们为了“进入禅那后,我们要以专一的心安乐地度过这一天”,这样作遍的准备工作,然后生起八种等至。
对有学人和凡夫来说,他们为了从等至出定后以等持的心来进行观照,为此而生起禅那,这些禅那对他们就是作为观的基础。
至于那些生起八种等至之后,进入作为神通基础的禅那,从等至出定后,按照“一身变成多身”等经文所说的方式,想要求证神通而生起禅那的人,这些禅那对他们就是作为神通的基础。
至于那些生起八种等至之后,为了进入灭尽定,七天里没有心识,想在现世就达到灭尽涅槃、安乐而住,为此而生起禅那的人,这些禅那对他们就是作为灭尽定的基础。
至于那些生起八种等至之后,心想“我们要以不退失的禅那转生到梵天世界”而生起禅那的人,这些禅那对他们就是为了转生到“有”当中。巴利
Imāni ca pana cattāri jhānāni kesañci cittekaggatatthāni honti, kesañci vipassanāpādakāni, kesañci abhiññāpādakāni, kesañci nirodhapādakāni, kesañci bhavokkamanatthāni. Tattha khīṇāsavānaṃ cittekaggatatthāni honti. Te hi samāpajjitvā ekaggacittā sukhaṃ divasaṃ viharissāmāti iccevaṃ kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattenti. Sekkhaputhujjanānaṃ samāpattito vuṭṭhāya samāhitena cittena vipassissāmāti nibbattentānaṃ vipassanāpādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ekopi hutvā bahudhā hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.238; paṭi. ma. 1.102) vuttanayā abhiññāyo patthentā nibbattenti, tesaṃ abhiññāpādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā sattāhaṃ acittā hutvā diṭṭheva dhamme nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ patvā sukhaṃ viharissāmāti nibbattenti, tesaṃ nirodhapādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā aparihīnajjhānā brahmaloke uppajjissāmāti nibbattenti, tesaṃ bhavokkamanatthāni honti.
不过要知道,世尊在菩提树下生起的这第四禅,既是他的观禅基础,也是神通基础,还能成办一切事业,并且能带来所有世间与出世间的功德。巴利
Bhagavatā panidaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ bodhirukkhamūle nibbattitaṃ, taṃ tassa vipassanāpādakañceva ahosi abhiññāpādakañca sabbakiccasādhakañca, sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakanti veditabbaṃ.
宿住论的注释巴利
Pubbenivāsakathāvaṇṇanā
52 52. 他是那些功德的施与者,显示其中一部分,而说了“so evaṃ samāhite citte”(当心这样专注时)等话。其中,关于两种明的逐句解释以及修习方法,在《清净道论》里已经详细说明。只不过在那里说的是“so evaṃ samāhite citte…pe… abhininnāmeti”(当心这样专注时……令转向),而这里说的是“abhininnāmesi”(我令转向了)。还有“Ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇā”(婆罗门,这确实是我的……)这一段安止的经文,在那里还没有出现,只有这一点差别。其中,“so”指“那个我”。“abhininnāmesi”的意思是“我令转向”。而且从“abhininnāmesi”这个说法来看,这里的“so”应当理解为“那个我”。巴利
52. Yesañca guṇānaṃ dāyakaṃ ahosi, tesaṃ ekadesaṃ dassento so evaṃ samāhite cittetiādimāha. Tattha dvinnaṃ vijjānaṃ anupadavaṇṇanā ceva bhāvanānayo ca visuddhimagge vitthārito. Kevalañhi tattha ‘‘so evaṃ samāhite citte…pe… abhininnāmetī’’ti vuttaṃ, idha ‘‘abhininnāmesi’’nti. Ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇāti ayañca appanāvāro tattha anāgatoti ayameva viseso. Tattha soti so ahaṃ. Abhininnāmesinti abhinīhariṃ. Abhininnāmesinti ca vacanato soti ettha so ahanti evamattho veditabbo.
因为这里讲的宿命通智是依世尊本人来说的,所以应当这样理解“他从那里死后,生到了这里”这句话的衔接。这里,“他从那里死后”是对那位转生者的回顾观察;“生到了这里”则是指紧接着这次投生之后。“我在那里出生”应当理解为是指兜率天。其中“我在那里也曾是,名叫某某”是说:我在那兜率天时,是名叫善白幢的天子。“如是种姓”是说与那些天神同一种姓。“如是容貌”是说金色的容貌。“如是饮食”是说天界的甘露饮食。“如是感受乐”是说这样感受天界之乐;而“苦”只是行苦而已。“寿量如此”是说如此以五十七俱胝与六百万岁为寿量之限。“他从那里死”即我从兜率天死;“生于这里”即在此摩诃摩耶王后腹中结生。巴利
Yasmā cidaṃ bhagavato vasena pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ āgataṃ, tasmā ‘‘so tato cuto idhūpapanno’’ti ettha evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Ettha hi so tato cutoti paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇaṃ. Tasmā idhūpapannoti imissā idhūpapattiyā anantaraṃ. Amutra udapādinti tusitabhavanaṃ sandhāyāhāti veditabbo. Tatrāpāsiṃ evaṃnāmoti tatrāpi tusitabhavane setaketu nāma devaputto ahosiṃ. Evaṃgottoti tāhi devatāhi saddhiṃ ekagotto. Evaṃvaṇṇoti suvaṇṇavaṇṇo. Evamāhāroti dibbasudhāhāro. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti evaṃ dibbasukhapaṭisaṃvedī. Dukkhaṃ pana saṅkhāradukkhamattameva . Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ sattapaññāsavassakoṭisaṭṭhivassasatasahassāyupariyanto. Sotato cutoti so ahaṃ tato tusitabhavanato cuto. Idhūpapannoti idha mahāmāyāya deviyā kucchimhi nibbatto.
在“ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇā”等句中,“me”就是“我”。“明”以能让人了知为含义,所以叫明。它让人了知什么?让人了知宿住。“无明”就是对那宿住不能了知,也就是覆盖它的愚痴,所以叫无明。“黑暗”就是那愚痴,因为具有覆盖的作用,所以叫黑暗。“光明”就是那明,因为具有照亮的作用,所以叫光明。这里实际的意思是:明已经被证得,其余的话是赞叹。连接起来就是:这明确实已被我证得;对于证得这明的我,无明已被摧毁,也就是已消失。为什么?因为明已经生起。剩下的两个词,道理也一样。巴利
Ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇātiādīsu meti mayā. Vijjāti viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā. Kiṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsaṃ. Avijjāti tasseva pubbenivāsassa aviditakaraṇaṭṭhena tappaṭicchādako moho vuccati. Tamoti sveva moho paṭicchādakaṭṭhena ‘‘tamo’’ti vuccati. Ālokoti sāyeva vijjā obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena ‘‘āloko’’ti vuccati. Ettha ca vijjā adhigatāti ayaṃ attho, sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacanaṃ. Yojanā panettha ayaṃ kho me vijjā adhigatā, tassa me adhigatavijjassa avijjā vihatā, vinaṭṭhāti attho. Kasmā? Yasmā vijjā uppannā. Esa nayo itarasmimpi padadvaye.
在这里,“yathā”是譬喻,“taṃ”是语气助词。因为正念不分离,所以是“不放逸的”;因为精进的灼热,所以是“热忱的”;因为对身体和生命都不顾恋,所以是“心志已决的”,也就是已被派遣、已投入的意思。这段话要表达的是:“就像不放逸、热忱、心志已决的人这样安住时,无明会被摧毁,明会生起;黑暗会被摧毁,光明会生起。同样地,我的无明已被摧毁,明已生起;黑暗已被摧毁,光明已生起。对于我这份精勤修行的投入,所得到的正是与之相应的果报。”巴利
Yathātanti ettha yathāti opamme. Tanti nipāto. Satiyā avippavāsena appamattassa. Vīriyātāpena ātāpino. Kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya pahitattassa, pesitattassāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘yathā appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avijjā vihaññeyya, vijjā uppajjeyya. Tamo vihaññeyya, āloko uppajjeyya. Evameva mama avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā. Tamo vihato, āloko uppanno. Etassa me padhānānuyogassa anurūpameva phalaṃ laddha’’nti.
天眼智论的注释巴利
Dibbacakkhuñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
53 在讲死与生的这部分里,因为这里的经文是依着世尊来说的,所以才说“我看见、我了知”,这就是不同之处。其余部分和《清净道论》里说的完全一样。巴利
53. Cutūpapātakathāyaṃ yasmā idha bhagavato vasena pāḷi āgatā, tasmā ‘‘passāmi pajānāmī’’ti vuttaṃ, ayaṃ viseso. Sesaṃ visuddhimagge vuttasadisameva.
这里,“明”指的是天眼智明。“无明”指的是覆盖众生死亡与结生的无明。其余部分和前面所说的一样。再者,因为对于圆满波罗蜜的大士们来说,并没有什么预备工作——他们只要把心转向,就能忆念种种宿世住处,并以天眼看见众生。因此,那种从预备工作开始讲的修习方法,在这里并不适用。巴利
Ettha pana vijjāti dibbacakkhuñāṇavijjā. Avijjāti sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhipaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti. Yasmā ca pūritapāramīnaṃ mahāsattānaṃ parikammakiccaṃ nāma natthi. Te hi citte abhininnāmitamatteyeva anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranti, dibbena cakkhunā satte passanti. Tasmā yo tattha parikammaṃ ādiṃ katvā bhāvanānayo vutto, na tena idha atthoti.
漏尽智论释巴利
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
54 心如此专注时,应当理解为作为观禅基础的第四禅心。“为了漏尽智”的意思是,为了阿罗汉道智。因为阿罗汉道能灭尽诸漏,所以称为“漏尽”,而这里的智就属于它,因为它被包含在其中。“令心转向”的意思是,引导出观禅之心。对于“这是苦”等说法,他是以通达自性相而如实地彻知、了知、证知:“苦只有这么多,没有比这更多的”,这就是遍知一切苦谛。而“这是苦集”,指的是能产生苦的渴爱。苦和集这两者最终灭尽、停止运作的地方,就是涅槃,这就是“这是苦灭”。能导向那涅槃的圣道,就是“这是导向苦灭之道”。他以通达自性相而如实地彻知、了知、证知——应当知道,这就是这里的意思。巴利
54. Tatiyavijjāya so evaṃ samāhite citteti vipassanāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti arahattamaggañāṇatthāya. Arahattamaggo hi āsavavināsanato āsavānaṃ khayoti vuccati, tatra cetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tappariyāpannattāti. Cittaṃ abhininnāmesinti vipassanācittaṃ abhinīhariṃ. So idaṃ dukkhanti evamādīsu ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ jāniṃ paṭivijjhiṃ. Tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti. Tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati, taṃ tesaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti. Tassa sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ jāniṃ paṭivijjhinti evamattho veditabbo.
像这样从自性方面说明了诸谛之后,现在再从烦恼的角度、以间接的方式来说明,于是说出“这些是漏”等话。“当我这样知、这样见时”,意思是对这样知、这样见的我而言。这里说的是与观一起达到顶点的道。“欲漏”就是从欲漏的角度说,也就是从欲漏中解脱。“心解脱”这句话显示果的特征,因为在道的刹那心解脱,在果的刹那则是已解脱。“在解脱时有解脱智”这句话显示省察智。“生已尽”等话则显示这种智的范围,因为世尊用那种智进行省察时,彻知了“生已尽”等。然而,世尊所尽的是什么生?他又是如何彻知它的呢?首先,他的过去生并没有尽,因为过去就已尽;未来生也没有尽,因为未来没有努力;现在生也没有尽,因为现在正存在。然而,由于道未修习而会在一种、四种、五种蕴的诸有中出生的、一种、四种、五种蕴分别的生,由于道已修习而达到不生法性,所以是已尽的;他省察由修道所断的烦恼,了知“在烦恼不存在时,即使存在的业也成为未来不再结生的”,以此而彻知。巴利
Evaṃ sarūpato saccāni dassetvā idāni kilesavasena pariyāyato dassento ime āsavātiādimāha. Tassa me evaṃ jānato evaṃ passatoti tassa mayhaṃ evaṃ jānantassa evaṃ passantassa. Saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ katheti. Kāmāsavāti kāmāsavato. Vimuccitthāti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti, maggakkhaṇe hi cittaṃ vimuccati, phalakkhaṇe vimuttaṃ hoti. Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇanti iminā paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ dasseti. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmiṃ, tena hi ñāṇena bhagavā paccavekkhanto ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādīni abbhaññāsi. Katamā pana bhagavato jāti khīṇā, kathañca naṃ abbhaññāsīti? Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā, pubbeva khīṇattā, na anāgatā, anāgate vāyāmābhāvato, na paccuppannā, vijjamānattā. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā, taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā ‘‘kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃ hotī’’ti jānanto abbhaññāsi.
“已住”是指已经住过、圆满住过,意思是已作、已行、已完成。“梵行”是指道梵行。因为与凡夫善士一起的七有学,才称为住于梵行;而漏已尽者则是已住梵行。所以世尊省察自己的梵行住时,彻知“梵行已住”。“应作已作”的意思是:对于四谛,通过四道,以遍知、断除、证悟、修习的方式,完成了十六种应作之事。因为凡夫善士等还在作这件事,而漏已尽者则是应作已作者。所以世尊省察自己所应作的时,彻知“应作已作”。巴利
Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ, kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ, puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ sattasekkhā brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasanti nāma, khīṇāsavo vutthavāso. Tasmā bhagavā attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘vusitaṃ brahmacariya’’nti abbhaññāsi. Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi taṃ kiccaṃ karonti, khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā bhagavā attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti abbhaññāsi.
“不再有此后有”:他现在彻知:“如今,我不再需要为了再有这样的存在——也就是那十六种应作的状态——或者为了灭尽烦恼,而做修习道的工作了。”或者说,“不再有此后有”是指:从这种存在状态,也就是现在这组五蕴相续中,我不会再有另一组五蕴相续了。而这五蕴已经被完全了知,就像断了根的树一样安住着。它们在最终识灭尽时,会像没有燃料的火一样彻底熄灭。巴利
Nāparaṃitthattāyāti idāni puna itthabhāvāya evaṃsoḷasakiccabhāvāya, kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanākiccaṃ me natthīti abbhaññāsi. Atha vā itthattāyāti itthabhāvato imasmā evaṃpakārā idāni vattamānakkhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ mayhaṃ natthi. Ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā rukkhā viya. Te carimakaviññāṇanirodhena anupādāno viya jātavedo nibbāyissantīti abbhaññāsi.
现在,为了向那位婆罗门说明这种由省察智所包含的漏尽智的证得,世尊说了“婆罗门,这就是我的……”等话。其中,“明”是指阿拉汉道智的明。“无明”是指遮蔽四圣谛的无明。其余部分和前面所说的一样。到这里为止,用宿住智说明了对过去的智慧,用天眼说明了对现在和未来的智慧,用漏尽智说明了一切世间与出世间的功德。这样,以三明统摄了一位一切知者的一切功德并加以阐明,从而向那位婆罗门显示了他自己的无迷住。巴利
Idāni evaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇapariggahitaṃ āsavānaṃ khayañāṇādhigamaṃ brāhmaṇassa dassento, ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Tattha vijjāti arahattamaggañāṇavijjā. Avijjāti catusaccapaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ettāvatā ca pubbenivāsañāṇena atītaṃsañāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhunā paccuppannānāgataṃsañāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayena sakalalokiyalokuttaraguṇanti evaṃ tīhi vijjāhi sabbepi sabbaññuguṇe saṅgahetvā pakāsento attano asammohavihāraṃ brāhmaṇassa dassesi.
住在阿兰若的因由解说巴利
Araññavāsakāraṇavaṇṇanā
55 55. 据说,听到这话时,那位婆罗门心想:“沙门乔达摩自称什么都懂,可到现在还是不肯离开住在林子里,难道他还有什么别的事要做吗?”于是世尊知道了他的心思,就顺着他的心思说:“婆罗门,你或许会这样想……”等等。这里,“婆罗门,你或许会这样想”的意思是:婆罗门,你有时候可能会这样想。“可是,婆罗门,这事不该这样看”的意思是:婆罗门,你不该这样看——不该认为我受用边远的坐卧处是因为还没断贪等等。这样先否定了受用边远坐卧处的无理由,然后显示理由,说“有二种……”等等。这里,义就是义利。因此,“婆罗门,我有二种义利”是说:婆罗门,我观察到二种义、二种理由。其中,“自己的现法乐住”:这里,“现法”指的是当前可见的自身;“乐住”指的是四种威仪住处的安乐。因为在林中独住的人,甚至从大小便之事开始,一切威仪住处都是安乐的,所以应知“现法乐住”就是这个意思。“以及愍念后代众生”:如何以林中住而愍念后代众生呢?因为信而出家的善男子们,看到世尊住在林中,就会想:世尊尚且不舍弃林中坐卧处,而对于他来说,没有什么应遍知、应断、应修、应证的法,何况我们呢?于是他们就会认为应当在那里住。这样他们很快就会成为苦的终结者。这样就是愍念后代众生。为了显示这个意思,他说“愍念后代众生”。巴利
55. Evaṃ vutte kira brāhmaṇo cintesi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo sabbaññutaṃ paṭijānāti, ajjāpi ca araññavāsaṃ na vijahati, atthi nu khvassa aññampi kiñci karaṇīya’’nti. Athassa bhagavā ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā iminā ajjhāsayānusandhinā, siyā kho pana tetiādimāha. Tattha siyā kho pana te, brāhmaṇa, evamassāti, brāhmaṇa, kadāci tuyhaṃ evaṃ bhaveyya. Na kho panetaṃ brāhmaṇa evaṃ daṭṭhabbanti etaṃ kho pana, brāhmaṇa, tayā mayhaṃ pantasenāsanapaṭisevanaṃ avītarāgāditāyāti evaṃ na daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ pantasenāsanapaṭisevane akāraṇaṃ paṭikkhipitvā kāraṇaṃ dassento dve kho ahantiādimāha. Tattha atthoyeva atthavaso. Tasmā dve kho ahaṃ, brāhmaṇa, atthavaseti ahaṃ kho, brāhmaṇa, dve atthe dve kāraṇāni sampassamānoti vuttaṃ hoti. Attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāranti ettha diṭṭhadhammo nāma ayaṃ paccakkho attabhāvo. Sukhavihāro nāma catunnampi iriyāpathavihārānaṃ phāsutā, ekakassa hi araññe antamaso uccārapassāvakiccaṃ upādāya sabbeva iriyāpathā phāsukā honti, tasmā diṭṭhadhammassa sukhavihāranti ayamattho veditabbo. Pacchimañca janataṃ anukampamānoti kathaṃ araññavāsena pacchimā janatā anukampitā hoti? Saddhāpabbajitā hi kulaputtā bhagavato araññavāsaṃ disvā bhagavāpi nāma araññasenāsanāni na muñcati, yassa nevatthi pariññātabbaṃ na pahātabbaṃ na bhāvetabbaṃ na sacchikātabbaṃ, kimaṅgaṃ pana mayanti cintetvā tattha vasitabbameva maññissanti. Evaṃ khippameva dukkhassantakarā bhavissanti. Evaṃ pacchimā janatā anukampitā hoti. Etamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pacchimañca janataṃ anukampamāno’’ti.
说法随喜的注释巴利
Desanānumodanāvaṇṇanā
56 婆罗门听了之后很满意,就说了“具慈悯性”等话。其中,“具慈悯性”是指具有慈悯的种类、慈悯的本性。“众人”是指人群。“正如阿拉汉、正自觉者所应慈悯的那样”,意思是:就像阿拉汉、正自觉者会慈悯的那样,同样地具足慈悯性。巴利
56. Taṃ sutvā attamano brāhmaṇo anukampitarūpātiādimāha. Tattha anukampitarūpāti anukampitajātikā anukampitasabhāvā. Janatāti janasamūho. Yathā taṃ arahatā sammāsambuddhenāti yathā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho anukampeyya, tatheva anukampitarūpāti.
他这样说完之后,又随喜世尊的这次说法,对世尊这样说:“太好了,乔达摩尊者!太好了,乔达摩尊者!”这里“abhhikkanta”这个词,出现在“灭尽”“美好”“端丽”“随喜”这些意思里。比如“尊者,夜已经过去,初夜分已经结束,比丘僧团坐了很久了”这类句子里,它是“灭尽”的意思;而“这人在四种人当中,是更殊胜、更优胜的”这类句子里,则是“美好”的意思。巴利
Evañca pana vatvā puna taṃ bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ abbhanumodamāno bhagavantaṃ etadavoca abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṃ, bho gotamāti. Tatthāyaṃ abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanesu dissati. ‘‘Abhikkantā, bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 383; a. ni. 8.20) hi khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.
谁以神通与名声而光耀,来礼敬我的双足?
以极其美妙的容色,照亮了一切方所。
(「殊妙」:是容貌端丽之义)巴利
‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. –
在“殊胜啊,尊者”这类话里,是表示随喜。这里也是表示随喜。既然是在表示随喜,那就应当知道,这其实是在说:“善哉,善哉,乔达摩贤者!”巴利
Ādīsu (vi. va. 857) abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ, bhante’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.250; pārā. 15) abbhanumodane . Idhāpi abbhanumodaneyeva. Yasmā ca abbhanumodane, tasmā sādhu sādhu bho, gotamāti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
在害怕时、愤怒时、称赞时、匆忙时、好奇惊讶时;
在欢笑时、在忧伤时、在净信时、在行为时,智者无谤而出言。巴利
‘‘Bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāyaṃ, turite kotūhalacchare; Hāse soke pasāde ca, kare āmeḍitaṃ budho’’ti. –
通过这个特征,应当知道:在这里,这个词因为净信和因为称赞,被说了两次。或者,“abhikkantaṃ”就是“abhikantaṃ”,说的是极其合意、极其悦人、极其美好。巴利
Iminā ca lakkhaṇena idha pasādavasena pasaṃsāvasena cāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttoti veditabbo. Atha vā abhikkantanti abhikantaṃ. Atiiṭṭhaṃ atimanāpaṃ, atisundaranti vuttaṃ hoti.
在这里,他用一个“殊胜”来赞叹说法,用另一个“殊胜”来表达自己的净信。这里的意思是:“乔达摩尊者,乔达摩尊者的说法真是殊胜啊;乔达摩尊者,我因为乔达摩尊者的说法而生起净信,这真是殊胜啊。”或者,这是针对世尊的言教,以一对对(双重)意义来赞叹:乔达摩尊者的言教,因为能灭除种种过失而殊胜,因为能证得种种功德而殊胜;同样地,因为能让人生起信心而殊胜,因为能让人生起智慧而殊胜;因为能带来真实的利益而殊胜,因为文句具足而殊胜;因为字句浅显易懂而殊胜,因为义理深奥而殊胜;因为听起来悦耳而殊胜,因为能打动人心而殊胜;因为不抬高自己而殊胜,因为不贬低他人而殊胜;因为以悲心而清凉而殊胜,因为以智慧而清净而殊胜;因为呈现在眼前时令人欢喜而殊胜,因为反复推敲时经得起检验而殊胜;因为听闻时能获得安乐而殊胜,因为审察时能获得真实利益而殊胜。应当这样把这些意义一一对应起来理解。巴利
Tattha ekena abhikkantasaddena desanaṃ thometi, ekena attano pasādaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanā, abhikkantaṃ yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanaṃ āgamma mama pasādoti. Bhagavatoyeva vā vacanaṃ dve dve atthe sandhāya thometi – bhoto gotamassa vacanaṃ abhikkantaṃ dosanāsanato, abhikkantaṃ guṇādhigamanato, tathā saddhājananato, paññājananato, sātthato, sabyañjanato, uttānapadato, gambhīratthato, kaṇṇasukhato, hadayaṅgamato, anattukkaṃsanato, aparavambhanato, karuṇāsītalato, paññāvadātato, āpātharamaṇīyato, vimaddakkhamato, suyyamānasukhato, vīmaṃsīyamānahitatoti evamādīhi yojetabbaṃ.
接下来,他又用四个比喻来赞叹说法本身。其中,nikkujjita 指倒扣着放、面朝下放置,或者本来就是面朝下的。ukkujjeyya 是把脸朝上翻过来。paṭicchanna 是被草、树叶等遮住的东西。vivareyya 是把它打开。mūḷhassa 是迷失方向的人。maggaṃ ācikkheyya 是拉着他的手告诉他“这就是路”。andhakāra 中的黑暗,是由黑半月第十四日、半夜、茂密丛林和浓云这四种情况造成的。以上是字面上浅显的含义。巴利
Tato parampi catūhi upamāhi desanaṃyeva thometi. Tattha nikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ, heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā. Ukkujjeyyāti upari mukhaṃ kareyya. Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādicchāditaṃ. Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya. Mūḷhassāti disāmūḷhassa. Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā ‘‘esa maggo’’ti vadeyya. Andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasīaḍḍharattaghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalehi caturaṅge tame, ayaṃ tāva anuttānapadattho.
这段的意趣是这样:就像有人把倒扣的东西翻正过来,同样,乔达摩尊者把我这个背离正法、堕入非法的人,从非法中救拔出来;就像把遮盖的东西揭开,他把自从迦叶世尊的教法隐没以来被邪见密林遮蔽的教法揭示出来;就像为迷路的人指示道路,他为走上邪路、行于错道的我,指示了通向天界与解脱的道路;就像在黑暗中举起油灯,他为沉没在愚痴黑暗中、看不见佛等三宝之相的我,举起了能破除那遮蔽的愚痴黑暗的教法明灯。乔达摩尊者以这些方式向我开示,所以说法以种种方式被开示出来。巴利
Ayaṃ pana adhippāyayojanā – yathā koci nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya, evaṃ saddhammavimukhaṃ asaddhamme patitaṃ maṃ asaddhammā vuṭṭhāpentena, yathā paṭicchannaṃ vivareyya . Evaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānato pabhuti micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchannaṃ sāsanaṃ vivarantena, yathā mūḷhassa maggaṃ ācikkheyya, evaṃ kummaggamicchāmaggappaṭipannassa me saggamokkhamaggaṃ ācikkhantena, yathā andhakāre telapajjotaṃ dhāreyya, evaṃ mohandhakāre nimuggassa me buddhādiratanarūpāni apassato tappaṭicchādakamohandhakāraviddhaṃsakadesanāpajjotadhāraṇena mayhaṃ bhotā gotamena etehi pariyāyehi pakāsitattā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsitoti.
净信行相的注释巴利
Pasannākāravaṇṇanā
他这样赞叹完这番开示之后,因为这次开示而对三宝生起了清净的信心,为了表达这份净信,便说出了“esāhaṃ”等话。其中,“esāhaṃ”就是“eso ahaṃ”(我)。“我皈依乔达摩尊者”的意思是:乔达摩尊者是我的皈依处、我的依靠,是灾祸的救护者、利益的赐予者。怀着这样的心意,我皈依乔达摩尊者、亲近他、侍奉他、承事他;或者说,我由此而了知、而觉悟。因为凡是含有“去”这一意义的词根,也含有“觉悟”的意义。所以“gacchāmi”(我去)在这里表达的就是“我了知”“我觉悟”的意思。“以及法和比丘僧团”:在这里,能够护持那些已证得圣道、已作证涅槃、依照教导修行而不堕入恶趣的人,所以称为“法”。从义理上说,这就是圣道和涅槃。经中确实这样说:“比丘们,在一切有为法中,圣八支道被称为最上的。”广解便是如此。而且不只是圣道和涅槃,还包括与圣果一起的教理之法。这在《伞童子天宫》中确实说过——巴利
Evaṃ desanaṃ thometvā imāya desanāya ratanattayapasannacitto pasannākāraṃ karonto esāhantiādimāha. Tattha esāhanti eso ahaṃ. Bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti bhavaṃ me gotamo saraṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ, aghassa tātā , hitassa ca vidhātāti iminā adhippāyena bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ gacchāmi, bhajāmi, sevāmi, payirupāsāmi, evaṃ vā jānāmi, bujjhāmīti. Yesañhi dhātūnaṃ gatiattho, buddhipi tesaṃ attho. Tasmā gacchāmīti imassa jānāmi, bujjhāmīti ayamattho vutto. Dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti ettha pana adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne ca apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo, so atthato ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34) vitthāro. Na kevalañca ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca, apica kho ariyaphalehi saddhiṃ pariyattidhammopi. Vuttañhetaṃ chattamāṇavakavimāne –
远离贪欲、无有动摇、没有忧悲,这是无为法、不违逆的。
这个甘甜、纯熟、善加分别的法,你应当为了皈依而亲近它。巴利
‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ; Madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ, dhammamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 887);
在这里,“离贪”说的是道;“无动、无忧”说的是果;“无为法”说的是涅槃。“不违逆、甘甜、熟练、善为分别”是指由三藏所分别的一切法蕴。“以正见与戒律和合而聚集”名为僧伽,从义理上说,就是八种圣者组成的团体。这一点在《天宫经》中也已经说过。巴利
Ettha rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Anejamasokanti phalaṃ. Dhammamasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ. Appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattanti piṭakattayena vibhattā sabbadhammakkhandhāti. Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātena saṃhatoti saṅgho, so atthato aṭṭha ariyapuggalasamūho. Vuttañhetaṃ tasmiṃyeva vimāne.
人们说,大果报在哪里被布施,就是在四种清净的士夫对中。
这八种人都是见法者,你应当为了求得皈依而亲近这样的僧伽。巴利
‘‘Yattha ca dinnamahapphalamāhu, catūsu sucīsu purisayugesu; Aṭṭha ca puggala dhammadasā te, saṅghamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 888);
比丘们的僧团就是比丘僧团。到这里,这位婆罗门已经宣说了三种皈依。巴利
Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho bhikkhusaṅgho. Ettāvatā brāhmaṇo tīṇi saraṇagamanāni paṭivedesi.
关于皈依的讨论的注释巴利
Saraṇagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
现在,为了在皈依这件事上具备善巧,先要了解:什么是皈依,什么是皈依的行为,谁在皈依,皈依行为的分类,皈依行为的结果,皈依的杂染,以及皈依的败坏。应当按这样的方式来理解。具体来说,先从词义上看,“皈依”有“杀害”的意思。也就是说,通过皈依的行为,皈依者的怖畏、惊恐、痛苦和恶趣的杂染被杀害、被摧毁,这就是它的含义。这个词本身就是三宝的别称。巴利
Idāni tesu saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ. Yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, saraṇagamanappabhedo , saraṇagamanassa phalaṃ, saṃkileso, bhedoti ayaṃ vidhi veditabbo. Seyyathidaṃ – padatthato tāva hiṃsatīti saraṇaṃ, saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena bhayaṃ santāsaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatiparikilesaṃ hanati vināsetīti attho, ratanattayassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
或者,佛陀以行利益、止不利,从而摧毁众生的恐惧;法以度越轮回旷野、给予安稳;僧以让微小的善业也能获得广大果报。因此,从这个角度来说,三宝就是皈依。由对三宝的清净信心与极度敬重,烦恼已被摧毁,生起以三宝为究竟归宿之心,这就是皈依的行为。具足这种心的人就是皈依者,意思是:他以如是生起的心,认定“这三者是我的皈依,是我的归宿”,如此趣向。这就是“皈依”“皈依的行为”以及“谁在皈依”这三者的含义。巴利
Atha vā hite pavattanena ahitā ca nivattanena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati buddho. Bhavakantārā uttāraṇena assāsadānena ca dhammo. Appakānampi kārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena saṅgho. Tasmā imināpi pariyāyena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ. Tappasādataggarutāhi vihatakileso tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ. Taṃsamaṅgisatto saraṇaṃ gacchati, vuttappakārena cittuppādena etāni me tīṇi saraṇāni saraṇaṃ, etāni parāyaṇanti evaṃ upetīti attho. Evaṃ tāva saraṇaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchatīti idaṃ tayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
皈依的分类有两种:出世间皈依和世间皈依。其中,出世间皈依是已见真谛的人在道的刹那,通过彻底断除皈依的杂染,从所缘来说以涅槃为所缘,从作用来说则在整个三宝上圆满成就。世间皈依则是凡夫通过镇伏皈依的杂染,从所缘来说以佛陀等的功德为所缘而成就;从意义上说,这就是在佛陀等对象上获得信心,而这种以信心为根本的正见,在十种福德业事中,被称为见正直业。巴利
Saraṇagamanappabhede pana duvidhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ lokuttaraṃ lokiyañca. Tattha lokuttaraṃ diṭṭhasaccānaṃ maggakkhaṇe saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedena ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhati. Lokiyaṃ puthujjanānaṃ saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanena ārammaṇato buddhādiguṇārammaṇaṃ hutvā ijjhati, taṃ atthato buddhādīsu vatthūsu saddhāpaṭilābho, saddhāmūlikā ca sammādiṭṭhi dasasu puññakiriyavatthūsu diṭṭhijukammanti vuccati.
这个皈依以四种方式发生:把自己奉献出去、以对方为归宿、进入弟子的身份、以及顶礼。其中,把自己奉献出去就是像这样说:“从今天开始,我把自身奉献给佛陀、奉献给法、奉献给僧。”也就是把自身完全交给佛陀等。以对方为归宿就是像这样说:“从今天开始,我以佛陀为归宿,以法为归宿,以僧为归宿,请你们这样记住我。”也就是成为以佛陀等为归宿的人。进入弟子的身份就是像这样说:“从今天开始,我是佛陀的弟子,是法的弟子,是僧的弟子,请你们这样记住我。”也就是进入弟子的身份。顶礼就是像这样说:“从今天开始,我对佛陀、法、僧这三者,做问讯、起迎、合掌、恭敬的礼仪,请你们这样记住我。”也就是对佛陀等表达最高的谦敬。因为这四种形式中,只要做了其中任何一种,皈依就已经成立。巴利
Tayidaṃ catudhā pavattati attasanniyyātanena tapparāyaṇatāya sissabhāvūpagamanena paṇipātenāti. Tattha attasanniyyātanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa niyyātemi, dhammassa, saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīnaṃ attapariccajanaṃ. Tapparāyaṇatā nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhaparāyaṇo, dhammaparāyaṇo, saṅghaparāyaṇo iti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ tapparāyaṇabhāvo. Sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhassa antevāsiko, dhammassa, saṅghassāti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ sissabhāvūpagamo. Paṇipāto nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammaṃ buddhādīnaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ karomi, iti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīsu paramanipaccakāro. Imesañhi catunnaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarampi karontena gahitaṃyeva hoti saraṇagamanaṃ.
另外,我把自身奉献给世尊,把自身奉献给法,把自身奉献给僧。我奉献生命,我的自身已经完全奉献,我的生命已经完全奉献,我尽这一生皈依佛陀,佛陀是我的皈依、我的庇护、我的救护——这样也应理解为自我奉献。还有,“但愿我能见到导师,但愿我能见到世尊本人!但愿我能见到善逝,但愿我能见到世尊本人!但愿我能见到正自觉者,但愿我能见到世尊本人!”像这样,应当看作如同大迦叶皈依那样,进入弟子的身份。巴利
Apica bhagavato attānaṃ pariccajāmi, dhammassa, saṅghassa attānaṃ pariccajāmi. Jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, pariccattoyeva me attā, pariccattaṃyeva me jīvitaṃ, jīvitapariyantikaṃ buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, buddho me saraṇaṃ leṇaṃ tāṇanti evampi attasanniyyātanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthārañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sugatañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sammāsambuddhañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ bhagavantameva passeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) evampi mahākassapassa saraṇagamanaṃ viya sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
我要四处游行,从一个村落到另一个村落,从一座城到另一座城。
我礼敬正等觉者,也礼敬正法的善妙法性。巴利
‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi, gāmā gāmaṃ purā puraṃ; Namassamāno sambuddhaṃ, dhammassa ca sudhammata’’nti. (su. ni. 194; saṃ. ni. 1.246) –
同样地,应当知道“以彼为归处”也像旷野夜叉等人皈依那样。比如:“那时,梵摩婆罗门从座位上起身,把上衣披到一边肩上,用头面顶礼世尊的双足,用嘴亲吻世尊的双足,用双手抚摸世尊的双足,并报出自己的名字:‘乔达摩贤者,我是梵摩婆罗门;乔达摩贤者,我是梵摩婆罗门。’”(《中部》2.394)如此,礼拜也应当被看待。巴利
Evampi āḷavakādīnaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ viya tapparāyaṇatā veditabbā. ‘‘Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo, brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.394) evampi paṇipāto daṭṭhabbo.
而这种顶礼,按亲属、怖畏、老师、应受供养者这四种情况,分成四种。其中,只有因为对方是应受供养者而礼拜,才算真正成为皈依;另外三种不算。因为皈依是依最殊胜的标准来受持,也依最殊胜的标准而破裂。所以,如果有个释迦族人或者拘利人,心想“佛陀是我们的亲属”而礼拜,这皈依根本就没有成立。或者有人心想“沙门乔达摩受国王尊敬,有大威势,要是不礼拜他,他可能会害我们”,因为害怕而礼拜,这皈依也根本没有成立。又或者有人在菩萨时期曾从世尊那里学过一点法,记在心里,到了佛陀成道之后——巴利
So panesa ñātibhayācariyadakkhiṇeyyavasena catubbidho hoti. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātena saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na itarehi. Seṭṭhavaseneva hi saraṇaṃ gayhati, seṭṭhavasena bhijjati, tasmā yo sākiyo vā koliyo vā ‘‘buddho amhākaṃ ñātako’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā ‘‘samaṇo gotamo rājapūjito mahānubhāvo, avandiyamāno anatthampi kareyyā’’ti bhayena vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā bodhisattakāle bhagavato santike kiñci uggahitaṃ saramāno buddhakāle vā –
用一份财富来生活,用两份来经营事业;
第四份应当存起来,以备遇到灾难时用。巴利
‘‘Ekena bhoge bhuñjeyya, dvīhi kammaṃ payojaye; Catutthañca nidhāpeyya, āpadāsu bhavissatī’’ti. (dī. ni. 3.265) –
接受了这样的教导之后,如果心想“这是我的老师”而向他行礼,那皈依其实并没有真正受持。但如果心想“这是世间最值得供养的人”而向他行礼,那皈依才算真正受持了。巴利
Evarūpaṃ anusāsaniṃ uggahetvā ‘‘ācariyo me’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo pana ‘‘ayaṃ loke aggadakkhiṇeyyo’’ti vandati, teneva gahitaṃ hoti saraṇaṃ.
已经受持皈依的男居士或女居士,即使礼敬在其他外道中出家的亲属,心里想“这是我的亲属”,皈依也不会破失,更何况礼敬没有出家的亲属。同样,因为害怕而礼敬国王,也不会破失皈依——因为国王受到全国尊崇,若不礼敬他,他可能会加害于人。同样,礼敬教导某种技艺的外道,心里想“这是我的老师”,皈依也不会破失。应当这样理解皈依破失与不破失的差别。巴利
Evaṃ gahitasaraṇassa ca upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā aññatitthiyesu pabbajitampi ñātiṃ ‘‘ñātako me aya’’nti vandato saraṇagamanaṃ na bhijjati, pageva apabbajitaṃ. Tathā rājānaṃ bhayavasena vandato, so hi raṭṭhapūjitattā avandiyamāno anatthampi kareyyāti. Tathā yaṃkiñci sippaṃ sikkhāpakaṃ titthiyaṃ ‘‘ācariyo me aya’’nti vandatopi na bhijjatīti evaṃ saraṇagamanappabhedo veditabbo.
在这里,对于出世间的皈依来说,四种沙门果是异熟果,一切苦的灭尽是功德利益果。因为这样说:巴利
Ettha ca lokuttarassa saraṇagamanassa cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalaṃ, sabbadukkhakkhayo ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
如果有人已经皈依佛、法、僧,
他以正慧看清四圣谛。
苦、苦的生起,以及超越苦。
以及通往苦的止息的圣八支道。
这个皈依处确实安稳,这个皈依处最为殊胜。
依靠这个皈依,就能从一切苦中解脱。巴利
‘‘Yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato; Cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passati. Dukkhaṃ dukkhasamuppādaṃ, dukkhassa ca atikkamaṃ; Ariyañcaṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ, dukkhūpasamagāminaṃ. Etaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, etaṃ saraṇamuttamaṃ; Etaṃ saraṇamāgamma, sabbadukkhā pamuccatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 190-192);
另外,还要从“不执为常”等方面来理解出世间皈依的利益果报。经中就是这样说的:“比丘们,这是不可能的,绝无可能:见具足的人会把任何行执为常,会把任何行执为乐,会把任何法执为我,会杀害母亲的生命,会杀害父亲的生命,会杀害阿罗汉的生命,会以嗔恨心使如来流血,会分裂僧团,会另外宣称有其他导师。这种事根本不可能存在。”巴利
Apica niccato anupagamanādivasena petassa ānisaṃsaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ, ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya, sukhato upagaccheyya, kañci dhammaṃ attato upagaccheyya, mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pitaraṃ arahantaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, duṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeyya, saṅghaṃ bhindeyya, aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.128; a. ni. 1.268-276).
不过,对世间皈依来说,投生善趣的成就和财富的成就本身就是它的果报。经中也是这样说的:巴利
Lokiyassa pana saraṇagamanassa bhavasampadāpi bhogasampadāpi phalameva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
凡是已经皈依佛陀的人,
他们不会堕入恶趣。
舍弃了人身之后,
他们将使天众圆满。巴利
‘‘Yekeci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, Na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ; Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, Devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.37);
另外还有这样的说法:“那时,帝释天带着八万天众,来到具寿大目犍连所在的地方……坐在一边的帝释天,具寿大目犍连对他说:‘帝释,皈依佛是很好的。帝释,正是因为皈依佛,这里有些众生在身体坏灭、死后,投生到善趣、天界。’这些天人以十种方面胜过其他天人:天界的寿命、天界的容貌、天界的快乐、天界的名声、天界的权威,以及天界的色、声、香、味、触。”对法和僧也是如此。此外,还应依据《韦拉摩经》等,了解皈依的果报有种种差别。皈依的果报应当这样来理解。巴利
Aparampi vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho sakko devānamindo asītiyā devatāsahassehi saddhiṃ yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno, tenupasaṅkami…pe… ekamantaṃ ṭhitaṃ kho sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno etadavoca ‘sādhu kho devānaminda buddhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, buddhaṃ saraṇagamanahetu kho devānaminda evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjantī’ti. Te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti dibbena āyunā dibbena vaṇṇena sukhena yasena ādhipateyyena dibbehi rūpehi saddehi gandhehi rasehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341). Esa nayo dhamme saṅghe ca. Apica velāmasuttādivasenāpi (a. ni. 9.20) saraṇagamanassa phalaviseso veditabbo. Evaṃ saraṇagamanaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这里,世间皈依会因为对三宝无知、怀疑、邪智等而受到染污,因此不会有大光明,也不会有大威力。出世间的皈依则没有这种染污。世间皈依的破毁又分为两种:有过失的和没有过失的。其中,有过失的破毁,是因为把自己交付给外道导师等而产生的,它会带来不可爱的果报。没有过失的破毁,则因命终而终止,因为没有异熟果,所以没有果报。但出世间的皈依完全没有这种破毁,因为即使转生到别的生命状态中,圣弟子也绝不会归向其他导师。应当这样理解皈依的染污和破毁。愿尊贵的乔达摩认我为近事男,意思是:愿尊贵的乔达摩把我认作“这是近事男”,也就是让他知道。巴利
Tattha lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ tīsu vatthūsu aññāṇasaṃsayamicchāñāṇādīhi saṃkilissati, na mahājutikaṃ hoti, na mahāvipphāraṃ. Lokuttarassa natthi saṃkileso. Lokiyassa ca saraṇagamanassa duvidho bhedo sāvajjo anavajjo ca. Tattha sāvajjo aññasatthārādīsu attasanniyyātanādīhi hoti, so aniṭṭhaphalo. Anavajjo kālaṃ kiriyāya, so avipākattā aphalo. Lokuttarassa pana nevatthi bhedo. Bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako aññasatthāraṃ na uddisatīti evaṃ saraṇagamanassa saṃkileso ca bhedo ca veditabboti. Upāsakaṃ maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretūti maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo ‘‘upāsako aya’’nti evaṃ dhāretu, jānātūti attho.
在家男信徒行仪说的解释巴利
Upāsakavidhikathāvaṇṇanā
不过,为了彻底弄清楚在家男信徒的规矩,这里还需要了解一些零散的问题:什么是在家男信徒?为什么叫在家男信徒?他的戒行是什么?他的谋生方式是什么?他的失败是什么?他的成就又是什么?巴利
Upāsakavidhikosallatthaṃ panettha ko upāsako, kasmā upāsakoti vuccati, kimassa sīlaṃ, ko ājīvo, kā vipatti, kā sampattīti idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这里,什么是近事男?就是任何已经皈依三宝的在家人。经中这样说:“摩诃男,当近事男已经皈依佛、已经皈依法、已经皈依僧,摩诃男,仅凭这一点,他就是近事男。”巴利
Tattha ko upāsakoti yo koci tisaraṇagato gahaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yato kho mahānāma upāsako buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti. Ettāvatā kho mahānāma upāsako hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
为什么叫近事男?因为亲近奉侍三宝。他亲近奉侍佛,所以叫近事男;亲近奉侍法,所以叫近事男;亲近奉侍僧,所以叫近事男。巴利
Kasmā upāsakoti ratanattayassa upāsanato. So hi buddhaṃ upāsatīti upāsako. Dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ upāsatīti upāsako.
他的戒是什么?就是五种远离。正如经中所说:摩诃男,当一位近事男远离杀生,远离不与取,远离欲邪行,远离妄语,远离诸酒放逸处,摩诃男,到这一步,这位近事男就是具戒者了。巴利
Kimassasīlanti pañca veramaṇiyo. Yathāha ‘‘yato kho mahānāma upāsako pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti adinnādānā , kāmesu micchācārā, musāvādā, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti. Ettāvatā kho mahānāma upāsako sīlavā hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
什么是活命?就是舍弃五种邪命买卖之后,如法、公平地维持生活。正如经中所说:比丘们,有五种买卖是优婆塞不应做的。是哪五种?武器买卖、人口买卖、肉类买卖、酒类买卖、毒药买卖。比丘们,这五种买卖是优婆塞不应做的。巴利
Ko ājīvoti pañca micchāvaṇijjā pahāya dhammena samena jīvitakappanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘pañcimā, bhikkhave, vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā. Katamā pañca? Satthavaṇijjā, sattavaṇijjā, maṃsavaṇijjā, majjavaṇijjā, visavaṇijjā. Imā kho, bhikkhave, pañca vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā’’ti (a. ni. 5.177).
什么是衰损?就是他戒律上的衰损和谋生方式上的衰损,这就是他的衰损。再者,那使他成为旃陀罗、垢秽及被呵责者的,也应当知道,这就是他的衰损。从义理上说,那就是无信等五种法。正如经中所说:比丘们,具足五种法的近事男,就是近事男中的旃陀罗、近事男中的垢秽、近事男中的被呵责者。是哪五种?他无信、破戒、迷信吉兆、相信吉祥而不相信业,还从这之外去寻求应受供养的人,并在那里先做供养。(《增支部》5.175)巴利
Kā vipattīti yā tasseva sīlassa ca ājīvassa ca vipatti, ayamassa vipatti. Apica yāya esa caṇḍālo ceva hoti malañca patikuṭṭho ca. Sāpissa vipattīti veditabbā. Te ca atthato assaddhiyādayo pañca dhammā honti. Yathāha ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakacaṇḍālo ca hoti upāsakamalañca upāsakapatikuṭṭho ca. Katamehi pañcahi? Assaddho hoti, dussīlo hoti, kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, maṅgalaṃ pacceti no kammaṃ, ito ca bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesati tattha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
所谓“成就”,就是他的戒成就和谋生成就,这就是成就。还有让他成为宝等的信等五种法。就像经里说的:“比丘们,具足五种法的在家男信徒,就是在家的宝、在家的莲花、在家的白莲花。哪五种呢?他有信仰,持戒清净,不迷信吉凶预兆,相信业而不是相信祥瑞,不在别处寻找应受供养的人,而是先在这里做供养。”巴利
Kāsampattīti yā cassa sīlasampadā ca ājīvasampadā ca, sā sampatti. Ye cassa ratanabhāvādikarā saddhādayo pañca dhammā. Yathāha ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakaratanañca hoti upāsakapadumañca upāsakapuṇḍarīkañca. Katamehi pañcahi? Saddho hoti, sīlavā hoti, na kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, kammaṃ pacceti no maṅgalaṃ, na ito bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ gavesati, idha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
从今日起,这里“agga”这个词,可以在“起始”“尖端”“部分”“最上”这几种意思里看到。比如在“守门人,从今日起,我关闭尼乾陀和尼乾陀女的门”这类句子里,它是“起始”的意思。在“用那个指尖去碰这个指尖”“甘蔗尖、竹尖”这类句子里,它是“尖端”的意思。在“酸的部分、甜的部分或苦的部分”“比丘们,我允许按精舍的部分或周房的部分来分配”这类句子里,它是“部分”的意思。在“比丘们,凡是无足的众生……如来被称为他们当中最上的”这类句子里,它是“最上”的意思。但在这里,应当理解为“起始”。所以“ajjatagge”就是把今天作为开始,这里的意思应当这样理解。“ajjataṃ”就是“今天的状态”。也有写成“ajjadagge”的读法,其中“da”是连接音,意思还是以今天为开始。巴利
Ajjataggeti ettha ayaṃ aggasaddo ādikoṭikoṭṭhāsaseṭṭhesu dissati. ‘‘Ajjatagge, samma dovārika, āvarāmi dvāraṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ nigaṇṭhīna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.70) hi ādimhi dissati. ‘‘Teneva aṅgulaggena taṃ aṅgulaggaṃ parāmaseyya, (kathā. 441) ucchaggaṃ veḷagga’’ntiādīsu koṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Ambilaggaṃ vā madhuraggaṃ vā tittakaggaṃ vā (saṃ. ni. 5.374), anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vihāraggena vā pariveṇaggena vā bhājetu’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 318) koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā…pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.34) seṭṭhe. Idha panāyaṃ ādimhi daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā ajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvā, evamettha attho veditabbo. Ajjatanti ajjabhāvaṃ. Ajjadaggeti vā pāṭho, da-kāro padasandhikaro, ajja aggaṃ katvāti attho.
“Pāṇupetaṃ”(尽形寿)的意思是:与生命同在,只要我的生命还在延续,就一直如此。愿乔达摩尊师认可我、知道我是这样的近事男:以三皈依而皈依,不依止其他导师,能做适当的服务。即使有人用锋利的剑砍断我的头,我也绝不会说“佛陀不是佛陀”,或者说“法不是法”,或者说“僧伽不是僧伽”。他这样把自身完全奉献而皈依之后,又以四种资具发出邀请,然后从座位上起身,顶礼世尊,右绕三圈,随后离去。巴利
Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ, yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ. Anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇaṃ gataṃ upāsakaṃ kappiyakārakaṃ maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretu jānātu. Ahañhi sacepi me tikhiṇena asinā sīsaṃ chindeyya, neva buddhaṃ ‘‘na buddho’’ti vā dhammaṃ ‘‘na dhammo’’ti vā, saṅghaṃ ‘‘na saṅgho’’ti vā vadeyyanti. Evaṃ attasanniyyātanena saraṇaṃ gantvā catūhi ca paccayehi pavāretvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmīti.
《无垢经》注释巴利
5. Anaṅgaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
57 “如是我闻……具寿舍利弗”这一段,就是《无垢经》。这里是对其中不明显词句的解释。就像在这部经里一样,在一切经中也都如此。所以从这以后,不再多说这些,只对前面没有解释过的词句作解释。巴利
57.Evaṃme sutaṃ…pe… āyasmā sāriputtoti anaṅgaṇasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – yathā cettha, evaṃ sabbasuttesu. Tasmā ito paraṃ ettakampi avatvā apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃyeva karissāma.
“四”是数量的限定。补特伽罗指有情、人、士夫。但不能因此就认为这位大长老是主张补特伽罗实有的人,因为这位尊者是一切佛弟子中最殊胜的,他只是毫无违背地开示世尊佛陀的教法。巴利
Cattāroti gaṇanaparicchedo. Puggalāti sattā narā posā. Ettāvatā ca puggalavādī mahātheroti na gahetabbaṃ, ayañhi āyasmā buddhaputtānaṃ seṭṭho, so buddhassa bhagavato desanaṃ avilomentoyeva deseti.
世俗说与究竟说的开示论注释巴利
Sammutiparamatthadesanākathāvaṇṇanā
佛陀世尊的开示有两种:世俗的开示和究竟义理的开示。其中,讲“人”“众生”“女人”“男人”“刹帝利”“婆罗门”“天人”“魔”这类,就是世俗的开示。讲“无常”“苦”“无我”,以及“蕴”“界”“处”“念处”这类,就是究竟义理的开示。巴利
Buddhassa bhagavato duvidhā desanā sammutidesanā, paramatthadesanā cāti. Tattha puggalo satto itthī puriso khattiyo brāhmaṇo devo māroti evarūpā sammutidesanā. Aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, khandhā dhātū āyatanāni satipaṭṭhānāti evarūpā paramatthadesanā.
在这里,世尊如果看到有些众生听了随顺世俗说法的教说,就能通达其中的义理,断除愚痴,证得殊胜的果位,就为他们说随顺世俗的教说。如果有些众生听了胜义说法的教说,才能通达义理,断除愚痴,证得殊胜的果位,就为他们说胜义的教说。这里有个譬喻:好比一位精通各地方言的老师,能讲解三部吠陀的义理。有些学童听得懂用达罗毗荼语说的内容,他就用达罗毗荼语给他们讲;有些学童听得懂安达卡语等其他某种语言,他就用那种语言给他们讲。这样一来,那些学童依靠这位聪明善巧的老师,很快就能学会技艺。在这个譬喻里,老师就好比佛陀世尊;三部吠陀就好比需要宣说的三藏;老师对各地语言的精通,就好比世尊对世俗和胜义的善巧;操各种方言的学童,就好比那些能够透过世俗或胜义教说而悟入的、可受教化的众生;老师用达罗毗荼语等来讲解,就应当理解为世尊以世俗或胜义的方式来说法。这里又说:巴利
Tattha bhagavā ye sammutivasena desanaṃ sutvā atthaṃ paṭivijjhitvā mohaṃ pahāya visesaṃ adhigantuṃ samatthā, tesaṃ sammutidesanaṃ deseti. Ye pana paramatthavasena desanaṃ sutvā atthaṃ paṭivijjhitvā mohaṃ pahāya visesamadhigantuṃ samatthā, tesaṃ paramatthadesanaṃ deseti. Tatthāyaṃ upamā, yathā hi desabhāsākusalo tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ atthasaṃvaṇṇanako ācariyo ye damiḷabhāsāya vutte atthaṃ jānanti, tesaṃ damiḷabhāsāya ācikkhati. Ye andhakabhāsādīsu aññatarāya, tesaṃ tāya tāya bhāsāya. Evaṃ te māṇavakā chekaṃ byattaṃ ācariyamāgamma khippameva sippaṃ uggaṇhanti. Tattha ācariyo viya buddho bhagavā. Tayo vedā viya kathetabbabhāvena ṭhitāni tīṇi piṭakāni. Desabhāsākosallamiva sammutiparamatthakosallaṃ. Nānādesabhāsā māṇavakā viya sammutiparamatthadesanāpaṭivijjhanasamatthā veneyyasattā. Ācariyassa damiḷabhāsādiācikkhanaṃ viya bhagavato sammutiparamatthavasena desanā veditabbā. Āha cettha –
正等觉者——说法者中最殊胜的人——宣说了两种谛。
世俗谛和究竟谛之外,找不到第三个谛。
约定俗成的言说就是真,因为是世间共许的缘故。
胜义言说是谛,因为它以诸法的真实性为根据。
所以,对于善于运用世俗言说、作为世间依怙的导师——
对于随顺世间假名而说话的人,并不会生起妄语。巴利
‘‘Duve saccāni akkhāsi, sambuddho vadataṃ varo; Sammutiṃ paramatthañca, tatiyaṃ nūpalabbhati. Saṅketavacanaṃ saccaṃ, lokasammutikāraṇā; Paramatthavacanaṃ saccaṃ, dhammānaṃ bhūtakāraṇā. Tasmā vohārakusalassa, lokanāthassa satthuno; Sammutiṃ voharantassa, musāvādo na jāyatī’’ti.
另外,世尊用八种原因来讲“人”的说法:为了说明惭与愧,为了说明“业是自己的”,为了说明个人的努力,为了说明无间业,为了说明梵住,为了说明宿命通,为了说明布施的清净,以及为了不废弃世间的通称。因为如果只说“蕴、界、处感到惭、感到愧”,一般人听不懂,会陷入困惑,甚至反感,心想:“蕴、界、处感到惭、感到愧,这是什么意思?”但如果换种说法——“女人感到惭、感到愧,男人感到惭、感到愧,刹帝利感到惭、感到愧,婆罗门感到惭、感到愧,天人感到惭、感到愧,魔罗感到惭、感到愧”——一般人就听得懂,不会困惑,也不会反感。所以,世尊为了说明惭与愧,才讲“人”的说法。巴利
Apica aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā puggalakathaṃ katheti – hirottappadīpanatthaṃ, kammassakatādīpanatthaṃ, paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ, ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ, brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ, pubbenivāsadīpanatthaṃ, dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ, lokasammutiyā appahānatthañcāti. ‘‘Khandhadhātuāyatanāni hirīyanti ottappantī’’ti hi vutte mahājano na jānāti, sammohamāpajjati, paṭisattu hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhadhātuāyatanāni hirīyanti ottappanti nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Itthī hirīyati ottappati puriso khattiyo brāhmaṇo devo māro’’ti vutte pana jānāti, na sammohamāpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti. Tasmā bhagavā hirottappadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
如果说“蕴是业主、界是业主、处是业主”,也同样会让人不明白。所以,世尊为了说明“业属于自己”这个道理,才讲说关于补特伽罗的教说。巴利
‘‘Khandhā kammassakā dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā kammassakatādīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
即使有人说“竹林精舍等大寺是由蕴所造、由界所造、由处所造”,道理也是一样。所以,世尊为了说明每个人自己的行为,才讲说关于补特伽罗的教说。巴利
‘‘Veḷuvanādayo mahāvihārā khandhehi kārāpitā dhātūhi āyatanehī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā paccattapurisakāradīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
如果说“蕴杀害母亲、杀害父亲、杀害阿罗汉、出佛身血、破和合僧,界和处也做这些事”,同样会让人困惑。所以,世尊为了说明无间业,才讲关于补特伽罗的教说。如果说“蕴修慈、界修慈、处修慈”,也是同样的情况。所以,世尊为了说明梵住,才讲关于补特伽罗的教说。巴利
‘‘Khandhā mātaraṃ jīvitā voropenti pitaraṃ arahantaṃ ruhiruppādakammaṃ karonti, saṅghabhedakammaṃ karonti, dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā ānantariyadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā mettāyanti dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā brahmavihāradīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
如果说“蕴能回忆过去生,界能回忆过去生,处能回忆过去生”,道理也是一样。所以,世尊为了说明回忆过去生这件事,就讲说关于人的教导。可是如果说“蕴接受布施,界接受布施,处接受布施”,一般人就听不懂,会陷入困惑,甚至产生抵触:“这蕴、界、处接受布施,到底是什么意思?”但如果换种说法——“人接受布施,持戒的人接受布施,具足善法的人接受布施”——大家就听得懂,不会困惑,也不会抵触。所以,世尊为了说明布施供养的清净,就讲说关于人的教导。巴利
‘‘Khandhā pubbenivāsamanussaranti dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi eseva nayo. Tasmā bhagavā pubbenivāsadīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti. ‘‘Khandhā dānaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti vuttepi mahājano na jānāti, sammohamāpajjati, paṭisattu hoti ‘‘kimidaṃ khandhadhātuāyatanāni paṭiggaṇhanti nāmā’’ti. ‘‘Puggalā paṭiggaṇhanti sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā’’ti vutte pana jānāti, na sammohamāpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti. Tasmā bhagavā dakkhiṇāvisuddhidīpanatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ katheti.
诸佛世尊并不舍弃世俗的共识,他们立足于世间的名称、世间的言语、世间的说法来宣说法。因此,世尊为了不舍弃世俗共识,也讲说关于人的言谈。因此,这位具寿因为善巧于世间称谓,不违背佛陀世尊的教说,立足于世俗共识而说:贤友,有四种人。因此,在这里不应以胜义来把握,只应以世俗的方式来了知人。巴利
Lokasammutiñca buddhā bhagavanto nappajahanti, lokasamaññāya lokaniruttiyaṃ lokābhilāpe ṭhitāyeva dhammaṃ desenti. Tasmā bhagavā lokasammutiyā appahānatthampi puggalakathaṃ katheti. Tasmā ayampi āyasmā lokavohārakusalatāya buddhassa bhagavato desanaṃ avilomento lokasammutiyaṃ ṭhatvāva cattārome, āvuso, puggalāti āha. Tasmā ettha paramatthavasena aggahetvā sammutivaseneva puggalo veditabbo.
“已存在、可被发现”是指:按世间的约定来说,它们是存在的、可以被认知的。“于世间”是指众生世间。而在“有垢”等说法里,“垢”在某些地方指的是烦恼。就像经中说:“其中,哪三种是垢?贪是垢,嗔是垢,痴是垢。”(《分别论》924)在某些地方,则指任何一种污秽或泥垢,就像经中说:“为了去除那尘或垢而努力。”还有些地方,指的是那一类地面,比如菩提场、塔庙场等,应当这样理解。但在这里,指的是种种猛利的烦恼被称为“垢”。因为下文将会说:“贤友,这个‘垢’是对那些不善的、邪恶的欲行境的称呼。”(《中部》1.60)与垢同在,就是“有垢”。巴利
Santo saṃvijjamānāti lokasaṅketavasena atthi upalabbhamānā. Lokasminti sattaloke. Sāṅgaṇova samānotiādīsu pana aṅgaṇanti katthaci kilesā vuccanti. Yathāha ‘‘tattha katamāni tīṇi aṅgaṇāni? Rāgo aṅgaṇaṃ, doso aṅgaṇaṃ, moho aṅgaṇa’’nti (vibha. 924). Katthaci yaṃkiñci malaṃ vā paṅko vā, yathāha ‘‘tasseva rajassa vā aṅgaṇassa vā pahānāya vāyamatī’’ti. Katthaci tathārūpo bhūmibhāgo, so bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇantiādīnaṃ vasena veditabbo. Idha pana nānappakārā tibbakilesā ‘‘aṅgaṇa’’nti adhippetā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘pāpakānaṃ kho etaṃ, āvuso, akusalānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ adhivacanaṃ, yadidaṃ aṅgaṇa’’nti (ma. ni. 1.60). Saha aṅgaṇena sāṅgaṇo.
“有垢”是指本身就是有烦恼的人。他不能如实知道“我内心有垢”,意思是:他不知道自己心相续中有烦恼,也不知道这些烦恼是粗硬、凶暴的,应当舍弃而不应执取,就像涂了毒的箭一样,因此不能如实了知它们的真实性质。如果有人既知道“有烦恼”,又能这样了知,就被称为“如实了知‘我内心有垢’”。至于那些烦恼既没有被道断除,又因为以种种方式防护而没有生起的人,这里就理解为“无垢”。他不能如实知道“我内心无垢”,意思是:他不知道“我的烦恼只是因为以种种方式防护才没有,并不是被道断除了”,也不知道“这些烦恼一旦生起,就会造成极大的损害,它们是粗硬、凶暴的,就像涂了毒的箭一样”,因此不能如实了知它们的真实性质。如果有人既知道“因为这个原因才没有”,又能这样了知,就被称为“如实了知‘我内心无垢’”。其中“在那些人中”,指在四种人当中,或者指在两种有垢者当中。“yo ayaṃ”就是“这个”;也有“yāyaṃ”这样的读法。巴利
Sāṅgaṇovasamānoti sakilesoyeva santo . Atthi me ajjhattaṃ aṅgaṇanti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātīti mayhaṃ attano cittasantāne kileso atthītipi na jānāti. ‘‘Ime kilesā nāma kakkhaḷā vāḷā jahitabbā na gahitabbā visaduṭṭhasallasadisā’’ti evaṃ yāthāvasarasatopi na jānāti. Yo atthīti ca jānāti, evañca jānāti. So ‘‘atthi me ajjhattaṃ aṅgaṇanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti vuccati. Yassa pana na ca maggena samūhatā kilesā, na ca uppajjanti yena vā tena vā vāritattā, ayamidha anaṅgaṇoti adhippeto. Natthi me ajjhattaṃ aṅgaṇanti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātīti ‘‘mayhaṃ kilesā yena vā tena vā vāritattā natthi, na maggena samūhatattā’’ti na jānāti, ‘‘te uppajjamānā mahāanatthaṃ karissanti kakkhaḷā vāḷā visaduṭṭhasallasadisā’’ti evaṃ yāthāvasarasatopi na jānāti. Yo pana ‘‘iminā kāraṇena natthī’’ti ca jānāti, evañca jānāti, so ‘‘natthi me ajjhattaṃ aṅgaṇanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti vuccati . Tatrāti tesu catūsu puggalesu, tesu vā dvīsu sāṅgaṇesu, yvāyanti yo ayaṃ, yāyantipi pāṭho.
58 贤友舍利弗,问“什么是因,什么是缘”,这其实是用两种说法在问同一个原因。也就是说,由于什么因、什么缘,这两个人当中一个被称为最上士、一个被称为下劣士,这里的因和缘到底是什么,应当这样来理解它们的关联。在这里,虽然说的是“不了知”和“了知”,但了知与不了知这两者本身就是因,也是缘。巴利
58.Ko nu kho, āvuso, sāriputta, hetu ko paccayoti ubhayenāpi kāraṇameva pucchati. Yenimesanti yena hetunā yena paccayena imesaṃ dvinnaṃ eko seṭṭhapuriso eko hīnapurisoti akkhāyati, so ko hetu ko paccayoti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘nappajānāti pajānātī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ, pajānanā nappajānanāti idameva ubhayaṃ hetu ceva paccayo ca.
59 长老为了用自己的善巧辩才把这件事说得更清楚,接着又说“再者,贤友……”等等。其中,“此人应当如此期盼”是说:这个人应当这样期盼。“他只将得到这个,而不是别的”,意思是应当这样希求,也就是说这必定会发生。接着用“将不会生起欲”等说法,是就“不生起欲”等而说的。巴利
59. Thero pana attano vicitrapaṭibhānatāya taṃ pākaṭataraṃ katvā dassetuṃ puna tatrāvusotiādimāha. Tattha tassetaṃ pāṭikaṅkhanti tassa puggalassa etaṃ pāṭikaṅkhitabbaṃ. Idameva esa pāpuṇissati, na aññanti icchitabbaṃ, avassaṃ bhāvīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Na chandaṃ janessatī’’tiādinā nayena vuttaṃ achandajananādiṃ sandhāyāha.
在这里,如果不了知,他就不会为了断除那种垢染而生起想要去做的欲求,也就是不会生起欲。不会精勤,是说不会为此付出比那更强的努力。不会发起精进,是说他甚至不会发起、不会令已经具有力量的精进运转起来,这样说。有垢,是指被贪等这些垢染所染。心染污,是指由于那些垢染而心更加染污、污秽、受逼迫、受热恼。命终,就是将会死去。巴利
Tattha ca na chandaṃ janessatīti appajānanto tassa aṅgaṇassa pahānatthaṃ kattukamyatāchandaṃ na janessati. Na vāyamissatīti tato balavataraṃ vāyāmaṃ na karissati, na vīriyaṃ ārabhissatīti thāmagatavīriyaṃ pana neva ārabhissati, na pavattessatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sāṅgaṇoti imehi rāgādīhi aṅgaṇehi sāṅgaṇo. Saṃkiliṭṭhacittoti tehiyeva suṭṭhutaraṃ kiliṭṭhacitto malīnacitto vibādhitacitto upatāpitacitto ca hutvā. Kālaṃ karissatīti marissati.
就像这样,意思是如同。铜钵,就是铜制的容器。带来的,就是拿来的。从市场或铁匠家,是指从市场,或者从制作铜钵的铁匠家里。以尘,是指从外面沾上的尘土、泥沙之类。以垢,是指就在那里生起的铜锈。被覆盖,就是被盖住。既不享用,是指人们不用它来倒水、放食物等,不去使用它。也不清洗,是指不用洗涤、擦拭等方式把它弄干净。在尘处,就是灰尘所在的地方。也可以这样读,就是灰尘落下的地方,或者起居坐卧的地方,或者床下,或者垃圾堆,或者别的器具之间,凡是会被灰尘撒落的地方。会更染污、更沾垢:这里说的是,因为被丢在尘处,所以更染污;因为不使用、不清洗,所以更沾垢。这是一种反问式的说法。由此应当这样理解它的意思:贤友,那个铜钵这样处理之后,过了一段时间,变得更染污、更沾垢,到底是土钵还是铜钵,就难以分辨了,是不是这样?长老承认这一点,说:是这样,贤友。接着,法将又继续说明这个比喻,说了“就像这样”等话。这里应当这样把比喻和所比喻的意思对应起来:有垢的人,就像脏铜钵。从铜钵不被使用等,到被丢在尘处,就像那个人在能得到出家机会时,却在医生等从事俗务的人跟前得到出家。铜钵又变得更染污,就像那个人逐渐跟随老师、戒师学习时,却去做医生等俗事;住在这个阶段,就是有垢而命终。或者,逐渐犯下恶作、恶说;住在这个阶段,就是有垢而命终。或者,逐渐犯下波逸提、偷兰遮,犯下僧残,犯下波罗夷,杀害母亲等犯下五无间罪;住在这个阶段,就是有垢而命终。巴利
Seyyathāpīti yathā nāma. Kaṃsapātīti kaṃsalohabhājanaṃ. Ābhatāti ānītā. Āpaṇā vā kammārakulā vāti āpaṇato vā kaṃsapātikārakānaṃ kammārānaṃ gharato vā. Rajenāti āgantukarajena paṃsuādinā. Malenāti tattheva uṭṭhitena lohamalena. Pariyonaddhāti sañchannā. Na ceva paribhuñjeyyunti udakakhādanīyapakkhipanādīhi paribhogaṃ na kareyyuṃ. Na ca pariyodapeyyunti dhovanaghaṃsanādīhi na parisuddhaṃ kārāpeyyuṃ. Rajāpatheti rajapathe. Ayameva vā pāṭho, rajassa āgamanaṭṭhāne vā vuṭṭhānuṭṭhāne vā heṭṭhāmañce vā thusakoṭṭhake vā bhājanantare vā, yattha rajena okirīyatīti attho. Saṃkiliṭṭhatarā assa malaggahitāti ettha rajāpathe nikkhipanena saṃkiliṭṭhatarā, aparibhogāpariyodapanehi malaggahitatarāti vuttaṃ hoti, paṭipucchāvacanañcetaṃ. Tenassa evamattho veditabbo, āvuso, sā kaṃsapāti evaṃ karīyamānā aparena kālena saṃkiliṭṭhatarā ca malaggahitatarā ca mattikapātīti vā kaṃsapātīti vā itipi dujjānā bhaveyya nu kho noti, thero taṃ paṭijānanto āha ‘‘evamāvuso’’ti. Puna dhammasenāpati opammaṃ sampaṭipādento, evameva khotiādimāha. Tatthevaṃ opammasaṃsandanā veditabbā – kiliṭṭhakaṃsapātisadiso sāṅgaṇo puggalo. Saṃkiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā naparibhuñjanamādiṃ katvā rajāpathanikkhepo viya tassa puggalassa pabbajjaṃ labhamānassa vejjakammādīsu pasutapuggalasantike pabbajjāpaṭilābho. Saṃkiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā puna saṃkiliṭṭhatarabhāvo viya tassa puggalassa anukkamena ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ anusikkhato vejjakammādikaraṇaṃ, ettha ṭhitassa sāṅgaṇakālakiriyā. Atha vā anukkamena dukkaṭadubbhāsitavītikkamanaṃ, ettha ṭhitassa sāṅgaṇakālakiriyā. Atha vā anukkamena pācittiyathullaccayavītikkamanaṃ, saṅghādisesavītikkamanaṃ, pārājikavītikkamanaṃ, mātughātādiānantariyakaraṇaṃ, ettha ṭhitassa sāṅgaṇakālakiriyāti.
心染污而命终这句话,不能理解成是以不善心命终。因为一切众生都是以本心、有分心命终的。这句话是就“没有净化心相续而命终”这个意思说的,应当这样理解。巴利
Saṃkiliṭṭhacitto kālaṃ karissatīti ettha ca akusalacittena kālaṃ karissatīti na evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Sabbasattā hi pakaticittena bhavaṅgacitteneva kālaṃ karonti. Ayaṃ pana avisodhetvā cittasantānaṃ kālaṃ karissatīti etamatthaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttoti veditabbo.
第二种情况中说“应当令它清净”:意思是透过清洗、摩擦、用细灰擦拭、抹拭等做法,使它像镜面一样清净。又说“不把它留在有灰尘的地方”:意思是不把它丢在前面所说的那种地方,而是放进箱盒之类的东西里,或者用布包起来挂在象牙桩上。其余内容应当依照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Dutiyavāre pariyodapeyyunti dhovanaghaṃsanasaṇhachārikāparimajjanādīhi parisuddhaṃ ādāsamaṇḍalasadisaṃ kareyyuṃ. Na ca naṃ rajāpatheti pubbe vuttappakāre ṭhāne anikkhipitvā karaṇḍamañjūsādīsu vā ṭhapeyyuṃ, paliveṭhetvā vā nāgadante lageyyuṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayānusāreneva gahetabbaṃ.
这里的比喻对应关系应当这样理解:一个有烦恼污垢但堪能修行的人,就像一只沾了污垢的铜钵。就像那只沾了污垢的铜钵,经过使用等过程之后被放到清净的地方;同样,这个人得到出家机会,在品行端正的比丘面前获得出家身份。那些比丘教导他、教诫他,即使看到他有一点点放逸,也会执行惩罚羯磨,反复让他学习。就像那只沾满污垢的铜钵后来变得清净洁净;同样,这个人跟随老师和戒师学习,逐渐正确地行持和实践,当他安住在这个阶段时,就是在无垢的状态中命终。或者,他逐渐安立在清净的戒上,学习适合自己根器的佛陀教法,受持头陀支,取用适合自己的业处,舍弃住在村落和住处,而住在偏远的坐卧处,当他安住在这个阶段时,就是在无垢的状态中命终。或者,他依次修习遍禅的准备功夫,通过成就八等至来镇伏烦恼;从作为观禅基础的禅那出定后,以观禅暂时断除烦恼;证得入流果……乃至亲证阿罗汉果,当他安住在这个阶段时,就是毕竟在毫无垢染的状态中命终。巴利
Upamāsaṃsandanā cettha evaṃ veditabbā – kiliṭṭhakaṃsapātisadiso sāṅgaṇo bhabbapuggalo. Kiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā paribhuñjanamādiṃ katvā suddhaṭṭhāne ṭhapanaṃ viya tassa puggalassa pabbajjaṃ labhamānassa pesalabhikkhūnaṃ santike pabbajjāpaṭilābho. Ye ovadanti anusāsanti appamattakampi pamādaṃ disvā daṇḍakammaṃ katvā punappunaṃ sikkhāpenti, saṃkiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā aparakāle parisuddhapariyodātabhāvo viya tassa puggalassa ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ anusikkhato anukkamena sammāvattapaṭipatti, ettha ṭhitassa anaṅgaṇakālakiriyā. Atha vā anukkamena parisuddhe sīle patiṭṭhāya attano anurūpaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā dhutaṅgāni samādāya attano anukūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gāmantasenāsanavāsaṃ muñcitvā pantasenāsanavāso, ettha ṭhitassa anaṅgaṇakālakiriyā. Atha vā anukkamena kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā aṭṭhasamāpattinibbattanena kilesavikkhambhanaṃ, vipassanāpādakajjhānā vuṭṭhāya vipassanāya kilesānaṃ tadaṅganivāraṇaṃ, sotāpattiphalādhigamo…pe… arahattasacchikiriyāti ettha ṭhitassa accantaṃ anaṅgaṇakālakiriyā eva.
第三方面,净相是指能引发贪欲的可爱所缘。作意是指在那所缘上失念之后,心转向它。由于他作意那净相,意思是说,以那个人对净相作意为原因。将毁坏,意思是将损害、将压倒。应当知道,贪确实在生起时会截断善的心路过程,自己变成不善速行而持续存在,因此毁坏善心。其余内容应当依照前面所说的方式类推理解。巴利
Tatiyavāre subhanimittanti rāgaṭṭhāniyaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ. Manasi karissatīti tasmiṃ vipannassati taṃ nimittaṃ āvajjissati. Tassa subhanimittassa manasikārāti tassa puggalassa subhanimittamanasikārakāraṇā. Anuddhaṃsessatīti hiṃsissati adhibhavissati. Rāgo hi uppajjanto kusalavāraṃ pacchinditvā sayameva akusalajavanaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhanto kusalacittaṃ anuddhaṃsetīti veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayānusāreneva gahetabbaṃ.
这里的比喻对应关系应当这样理解:一个本性烦恼少、没有污垢的人,就像一只干净的铜钵。对干净的铜钵不加使用,把它丢在满是灰尘的地方——这就像那个人在获得出家身份之后的情形。从这里往后,全都和第一种情况相同。巴利
Opammasaṃsandanā panettha evaṃ veditabbā – parisuddhakaṃsapātisadiso pakatiyā appakileso anaṅgaṇapuggalo. Parisuddhakaṃsapātiyā naparibhuñjanaṃ ādiṃ katvā rajāpathe nikkhepo viya tassa puggalassa pabbajjaṃ labhamānassāti ito paraṃ sabbaṃ paṭhamavārasadisameva.
在第四部分,“不会作意净相”这句话,因为他没有失去正念,所以不会去注意那个相。其余内容应当按照第二部分的思路来理解。“这位,贤友”等语句,则和“是谁呢,贤友”那一段里所说的方式一样。巴利
Catutthavāre subhanimittaṃ na manasi karissatīti tasmiṃ sativirahābhāvato taṃ nimittaṃ nāvajjissati, sesaṃ dutiyavārānusārena veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Ayaṃ kho, āvuso’’tiādi ‘‘ko nu kho, āvuso’’tiādimhi vuttanayameva.
60 现在,大目犍连尊者想让那个垢染从各个方面清楚地显露出来,于是以“垢染啊,垢染”这样的方式询问,被问者就回答,说了“贤友,这确实是恶人的事”等话。其中,“在欲求的范围内活动的人”,意思是在欲求中活动、被欲求所淹没而造作种种忿怒与不满的人。“假如这里某个人有这种情形”,是说假如这里某个人生起这样的欲求,这种情形、这个原因确实存在、是有、可以找到。“愿我犯了”,意思是愿我犯了戒。“而比丘们不要知道我”,就是愿比丘们不要知道我。那么这里到底是什么情形呢?就是贪求利养。因为贪求利养的比丘,即使本来是个修了福的人,受到人们恭敬尊重,也会这样想:“长老们知道犯了戒的比丘后,会告诉中座比丘;中座比丘告诉新学比丘;新学比丘告诉寺里吃剩食等的贱民;他们再告诉前来受教诫的比丘尼。这样一步步下来,四众都会知道。这样一来,我的利养就有了障碍。唉,要是我犯了戒,而比丘们又不知道我,那该多好啊!”巴利
60. Idāni taṃ aṅgaṇaṃ nānappakārato pākaṭaṃ kārāpetukāmenāyasmatā mahāmoggallānena ‘‘aṅgaṇaṃ aṅgaṇa’’ntiādinā nayena puṭṭho taṃ byākaronto pāpakānaṃ kho etaṃ, āvusotiādimāha. Tattha icchāvacarānanti icchāya avacarānaṃ, icchāvasena otiṇṇānaṃ pavattānaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kopaappaccayānanti attho. Yaṃ idhekaccassāti yena idhekaccassa evaṃ icchā uppajjeyya, taṃ ṭhānaṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ vijjati atthi, upalabbhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Āpanno assanti āpanno bhaveyyaṃ. Na ca maṃ bhikkhū jāneyyunti bhikkhū ca maṃ na jāneyyuṃ. Kiṃ panettha ṭhānaṃ, lābhatthikatā. Lābhatthiko hi bhikkhu pakatiyāpi ca katapuñño manussehi sakkato garukato evaṃ cinteti ‘‘āpattiṃ āpannaṃ bhikkhuṃ therā ñatvā majjhimānaṃ ārocenti, te navakānaṃ, navakā vihāre vighāsādādīnaṃ, te ovādaṃ āgatānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ, evaṃ kamena catasso parisā jānanti. Evamassa lābhantarāyo hoti. Aho vatāhaṃ āpattiñca vata āpanno assaṃ, na ca maṃ bhikkhū jāneyyu’’nti.
比丘们能认出那位比丘,是因为有某种缘由让其他比丘认出他来,这个缘由确实存在,并非没有。因为长老们知道之后,会告诉中座比丘们。这样一来,他就按前面所说的方式,在四众弟子中变得人尽皆知。如此出名之后,他被恶名所压倒,即使走进上百户人家的村庄,在成百的门槛边乞食之后,也只能像刚洗过一样空着钵出来。于是他心想:比丘们知道我犯了戒,他们就这样把我毁了。因此他愤怒、不满。正是由于这个原因,他既愤怒,被愤怒所压倒,又不满,被忧愁所压倒。巴利
Yaṃ taṃ bhikkhuṃ bhikkhū jāneyyunti yena kāraṇena taṃ bhikkhuṃ aññe bhikkhū jāneyyuṃ, taṃ kāraṇaṃ vijjati kho pana atthiyeva, no natthi. Therā hi ñatvā majjhimānaṃ ārocenti. Evaṃ so pubbe vuttanayena catūsu parisāsu pākaṭo hoti. Evaṃ pākaṭo ca ayasābhibhūto gāmasatampi pavisitvā ummārasatesu ṭhānesu uñchitvā yathādhotena pattena nikkhamati. Tato jānanti maṃ bhikkhū āpattiṃ āpannoti tehi camhi evaṃ nāsitoti cintetvā, iti so kupito hoti appatīto so iminā kāraṇena kupito ceva hoti kodhābhibhūto appatīto ca domanassābhibhūto.
贤友,忿怒和不满,这两者就是垢秽。贤友,属于行蕴的忿怒,和属于受蕴的不满,这两者就是垢秽——这里应该这样理解它的含义。而且,这段话是针对那一类人说的。不过,贪是这垢秽的前分,痴也因为与之相应而被包含在内了。巴利
Yo ceva kho , āvuso, kopo yo ca appaccayo ubhayametaṃ aṅgaṇanti, āvuso, yo cāyaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahito kopo, yo ca vedanākkhandhasaṅgahito appaccayo, etaṃ ubhayaṃ aṅgaṇanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Idañca tādisānaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Lobho pana imassa aṅgaṇassa pubbabhāgavasena, moho sampayogavasenāpi gahitoyeva hoti.
“想私下呵责”是指:像前面那样,把那位比丘带到精舍边上的住处,关上门再呵责他。
“确有这种情形”是说:确实有这种情况——那些聪明、调伏的比丘,可能会把那位比丘带到四众当中,用“你在某个地方做了医疗的事”这类方式来呵责他。这样他就在四众中出了名。像这样出了名、又被恶名压倒——这些全都和前面一样。巴利
Anurahomanti purimasadisameva bhikkhuṃ gahetvā vihārapaccante senāsanaṃ pavesetvā dvāraṃ thaketvā codente icchati. Ṭhānaṃ kho panetanti etaṃ kāraṇaṃ vijjati, yaṃ taṃ bhikkhuṃ catuparisamajjhe ānetvā byattā vinītā ‘‘tayā asukamhi nāma ṭhāne vejjakammaṃ kata’’ntiādinā nayena codeyyuṃ. So catūsu parisāsu pākaṭo hoti. Evaṃ pākaṭo ca ayasābhibhūtoti sabbaṃ purimasadisameva.
“有同等之人”,就是指与自己程度相当的人。“同等”,是说对方也犯了戒。“对应之人”,就是指举罪的人。他希望由同样犯了戒的人来举罪,心里想:“你也犯了这样那样的戒,你先把那些罪处理了,再来举发我。”他认为这样自己才有话可说。另外,在出身等方面与自己相当的人,也叫“有同等之人”。因为他希望由在出身、家族、多闻、聪慧、头陀支等方面与自己同等的人来举罪,觉得“由这样的人来说,不会太难受”。“没有对应之人”,这里是指不合适的对应之人就是没有对应之人。由于在犯戒等方面与他不同、与他敌对、与他相违的人,不适合做举罪者——这就是这句话的意思。所以他就生气了:他正是因为这种被没有对应之人举罪的方式而这样生起气来。巴利
Sappaṭipuggaloti samāno puggalo. Samānoti sāpattiko. Paṭipuggaloti codako. Ayaṃ sāpattikeneva codanaṃ icchati, tvampi imañcimañca āpattiṃ āpanno, taṃ tāva paṭikarohi pacchā maṃ codessasīti vattuṃ sakkāti maññamāno. Apica jātiādīhipi samāno puggalo sappaṭipuggalo. Ayañhi attano jātiyā kulena bāhusaccena byattatāya dhutaṅgenāti evamādīhipi samāneneva codanaṃ icchati, tādisena vuttaṃ nātidukkhaṃ hotīti maññamāno. Appaṭipuggaloti ettha ayutto paṭipuggalo appaṭipuggalo. Imehi āpattādīhi asadisattā paṭisattu paṭisallo codako bhavituṃ ayuttoti vuttaṃ hoti. Iti so kupitoti iti so imāya appaṭipuggalacodanāya evaṃ kupito hoti.
在第四种情况里,“啊!但愿”出现在责备的语境中,比如“啊,我们的智者!啊,我们的多闻者、三明者!”也出现在希求的语境中,比如“啊!但愿我还在年少时就给我灌顶,立我为王。”这里正是用在希求的语境中。“反复询问”就是一再地询问。这位比丘是贪求利养的人,他希望世尊反复地询问自己,而且是以征询认可的方式,中间不夹杂道、果、观禅之类的内容。因为他看到世尊在大众中反复询问舍利弗等大长老:“舍利弗,你怎么看?”“目犍连、迦叶、罗睺罗,眼是常还是无常?”这样反复询问之后便开示法,人们就称赞说:“这些智者长老真能让导师欢喜。”并供奉利养恭敬。因此,渴求这种利养恭敬的他,这样思量之后,就像一根竖立的木桩一样,出现在世尊面前。巴利
Catutthavāre aho vatāti ‘‘aho vata re amhākaṃ paṇḍitakā, aho vata re amhākaṃ bahussutakā tevijjakā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.291) garahāyaṃ dissati. ‘‘Aho vata maṃ daharaṃyeva samānaṃ rajje abhisiñceyyu’’nti (mahāva. 57) patthanāyaṃ. Idha patthanāyameva. Paṭipucchitvā paṭipucchitvāti punappunaṃ pucchitvā. Ayaṃ bhikkhu lābhatthiko bhagavato attānaṃ paṭipucchitabbaṃ icchati, tañca kho anumatipucchāya, no maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā antaraṃ katvā. Ayañhi passati bhagavantaṃ sāriputtādayo mahāthere ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasi, sāriputta, moggallāna, kassapa , rāhula cakkhuṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti evaṃ parisamajjhe paṭipucchitvā paṭipucchitvā dhammaṃ desentaṃ, manusse ca ‘‘tesa paṇḍitā therā satthu cittaṃ ārādhentī’’ti vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇante, lābhasakkārañca upaharante. Tasmā taṃ lābhasakkāraṃ icchanto evaṃ cintetvā nikhaṇitvā ṭhapitakhāṇu viya bhagavato puratova hoti.
他就这样生气了。那时,世尊根本没理会他,而是去问另一位长老,然后开示法。他因此对世尊和那位长老都生了气。他是怎么对世尊生气的呢?他心想:“我从出家以来,就没有离开过香室和周围这片区域,时时刻刻都像影子一样跟着,可世尊连问都不问我一声,哪怕一次法的开示都没给过我。他刚见到那位长老,问了一下,就给他开示法。”他就是这么对世尊生气的。他又是怎么对那位长老生气的呢?他心想:“这个老长老在世尊面前像根木桩一样坐着,那些管事的比丘什么时候才能把他赶到没用的地方去、把他撵走呢?要是这精舍里没有他,世尊肯定会跟我说话的。”他就是这么对那位长老生气的。巴利
Iti so kupitoti atha bhagavā taṃ amanasikaritvāva aññaṃ theraṃ paṭipucchitvā dhammaṃ deseti , tena so kupito hoti bhagavato ca therassa ca. Kathaṃ bhagavato kuppati? ‘‘Ahaṃ pabbajitakālato pabhuti gandhakuṭipariveṇato bahinikkhamanaṃ na jānāmi, sabbakālaṃ chāyāva na vijahāmi, maṃ nāma pucchitvā dhammadesanāmattampi natthi. Taṃmuhuttaṃ diṭṭhamattakameva theraṃ pucchitvā dhammaṃ desetī’’ti evaṃ bhagavato kuppati. Kathaṃ therassa kuppati? ‘‘Ayaṃ mahallakatthero bhagavato purato khāṇu viya nisīdati, kadā nu kho imaṃ dhammakammikā abhabbaṭṭhānaṃ pāpetvā nīharissanti, ayañhi yadi imasmiṃ vihāre na bhaveyya, avassaṃ bhagavā mayā saddhiṃ sallapeyyā’’ti evaṃ therassa kuppati.
把“令在前、令在前”理解为放在最前面、放在最前面,也就是让他被人簇拥着,这就是“令他被人围绕”的意思。这个人同样是个贪求利养的人,因为他看到多闻的比丘们被一大群随从簇拥着进村、礼塔,又看到在家信众见到他们那副风光后,满心欢喜地做出恭敬的表示。所以他心里就盼着这样。“生气”是说,他在两种情形下会发火:对比丘们发火,也对那位长老发火。怎么对比丘们发火呢?“这些比丘,凡是我得到的衣或团食,他们都拿去受用了,却连一个拿着我的钵和衣跟在我身后的人都没有。”他就这样对比丘们发火。怎么对长老发火呢?“这位老长老,在各种场合都自己出头露面,那些法事比丘什么时候才能把他赶走呢?要是没有这个人,他们肯定会来簇拥我了。”巴利
Purakkhatvā purakkhatvāti purato purato katvā, samparivāretvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayampi lābhatthikoyeva, ayañhi passati bahussute bhikkhū mahāparivārena gāmaṃ pavisante, cetiyaṃ vandante, tesañca taṃ sampattiṃ disvā upāsake pasanne pasannākāraṃ karonte. Tasmā evaṃ icchati. Kupitoti ayampi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati bhikkhūnaṃ therassa ca. Kathaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ? ‘‘Ime yadeva mayhaṃ uppajjati cīvaraṃ vā piṇḍapāto vā, taṃ gahetvā paribhuñjanti, mayhaṃ pana pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā piṭṭhito āgacchantopi natthī’’ti evaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kuppati. Kathaṃ therassa? ‘‘Eso mahallakatthero tesu tesu ṭhānesu sayameva paññāyati, kudāssu nāma naṃ dhammakammikā nikkaḍḍhissanti, imasmiṃ asati avassaṃ maṃyeva parivāressantī’’ti.
在食堂,就是吃饭的地方。最上座,就是僧团长老的座位。最上水,就是供养用的净水。最上食,就是僧团长老的食物。或者可以说,在一切处,“最上”都是殊胜的意思。在这件事上,“只有我才该得到”这种欲求,还不算极大的过失;但“别的比丘不该得到”这种念头,就是极大的过失了。这个人也是贪求利养的人,他靠着穿袈裟等威仪,显得清净可敬,有时出家,有时又还俗。因此,他先前得到过的座位等,后来得不到了,就这样想:那位比丘不该得到。也就是说,那位比丘在长老们的上座等中得不到,而按这个次序,在中座比丘和其他新学比丘中,有时只能得到随便哪种、最差的座位等。生气,是说他在两种情况下发怒:对在家人发怒,对长老发怒。怎样对在家人发怒呢?这些人在吉庆等场合,本来是依靠我,比丘们才得到供养,他们说:“尊者,请带这么多比丘来怜悯我们吧。”现在他们却带着那个刚见到的老迈长老就走了。算了,随他们去吧,等他们有事求我的时候,我就会知道。他这样对在家人发怒。怎样对长老发怒呢?如果没有这些长老,在家人一定会来邀请我。他这样对长老发怒。巴利
Bhattaggeti bhojanaṭṭhāne. Aggāsananti saṅghattherāsanaṃ. Aggodakanti dakkhiṇodakaṃ. Aggapiṇḍanti saṅghattherapiṇḍaṃ. Sabbattha vā agganti paṇītādhivacanametaṃ. Tattha ahameva labheyyanti icchā nātimahāsāvajjā. Na añño bhikkhu labheyyāti pana atimahāsāvajjā . Ayampi lābhatthiko pāsādiko hoti cīvaradhāraṇādīhi, kadāci pabbajati, kadāci vibbhamati. Tena so pubbe laddhapubbaṃ āsanādiṃ pacchā alabhanto evaṃ cintesi. Na so bhikkhu labheyyāti na so bhikkhu therānaṃ aggāsanādīsu tadanusārena majjhimānaṃ aññesañca navānaṃ kadāci yaṃ vā taṃ vā sabbanihīnaṃ āsanādiṃ labhati. Kupitoti ayampi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati manussānañca therānañca. Kathaṃ manussānaṃ? ‘‘Ime maṅgalādīsu maṃ nissāya bhikkhū labhanti, ete, ‘bhante, ettake bhikkhū gahetvā amhākaṃ anukampaṃ karothā’ti vadanti, idāni taṃmuhuttaṃ diṭṭhamattakaṃ mahallakattheraṃ gahetvā gatā, hotu idāni, nesaṃ kicce uppanne jānissāmī’’ti evaṃ manussānaṃ kuppati. Kathaṃ therānaṃ? ‘‘Ime nāma yadi na bhaveyyuṃ, maṃyeva manussā nimanteyyu’’nti evaṃ therānaṃ kuppati.
“应当随喜”意思是应当去做随喜。这个人也是贪求利养的人,他懂得某种半吊子的随喜,就盼望着:“随喜的时候会有很多女人过来,她们认出我之后,从此就会给我送钵食。”他这样盘算着。这里说“处”的意思是:随喜对多闻的人来说是一种负担,所以说应当让多闻的人去随喜。“生气”是指他在三种情形下都会发火:对在家人、对长老、对说法的人。怎么对在家人发火呢?“这些人以前都来找我,求我说:‘请我们的龙长老、我们的善意长老来为我们随喜吧!’今天却提都不提了。”他这样对在家人发火。怎么对长老发火呢?“这位僧团长老也不开口说一句:‘你们去亲近你们常供养的龙长老、善意长老吧,他会来随喜的。’”他这样对长老发火。怎么对说法的人发火呢?“长老话音刚落,这人就像被揍过的公鸡一样急急忙忙地讲起来,怎么就没人把他赶走呢?要是没有他,随喜的人就该是我了。”他这样对说法的人发火。巴利
Anumodeyyanti anumodanaṃ kareyyaṃ. Ayampi lābhatthiko yaṃ vā taṃ vā khaṇḍānumodanaṃ jānāti, ‘‘so anumodanaṭṭhāne bahū mātugāmā āgacchanti, tā maṃ sañjānitvā tato pabhuti thālakabhikkhaṃ dassantī’’ti patthento evaṃ cintesi. Ṭhānanti bahussutānaṃ anumodanā bhāro, tena bahussuto anumodeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kupitoti ayampi tīsu ṭhānesu kuppati manussānaṃ therassa dhammakathikassa ca. Kathaṃ manussānaṃ? ‘‘Ime pubbe maṃyeva upasaṅkamitvā yācanti ‘amhākaṃ nāgatthero amhākaṃ sumanatthero anumodatū’ti, ajja pana nāvocu’’nti evaṃ manussānaṃ kuppati. Kathaṃ therassa? ‘‘Ayaṃ saṅghatthero ‘tumhākaṃ kulupakaṃ nāgattheraṃ sumanattheraṃ upasaṅkamatha, ayaṃ anumodissatī’ti na bhaṇatī’’ti evaṃ therassa kuppati. Kathaṃ dhammakathikassa? ‘‘Therena vuttamatteyeva pahāraṃ laddhakukkuṭo viya turitaturitaṃ vassati, imaṃ nāma nikkaḍḍhantā natthi, imasmiñhi asati ahameva anumodeyya’’nti evaṃ dhammakathikassa kuppati.
“来到园中”指的是聚集在精舍里的人。这个人也是贪求利养的,他懂一点零零碎碎的讲法,看到在那种场合里,比丘们从两三由旬外赶来聚集,整夜听闻佛法,而满心欢喜的年轻比丘或沙弥们高声赞叹“善哉!善哉!”第二天,比丘们进村后,在家信众问他们:“尊者,是谁说的法?”他们回答:“是某某和某某。”人们听了之后生起信心,就对说法的人大加恭敬供养。他想要得到这种恭敬,就这样想。所谓“处”,是说说法对多闻且善于判断的人来说是一种职责,因此这里的意思是应该让多闻的人来说法。所谓“生气”,是他连诵出一首四句偈的机会都得不到,于是对自己愚钝这件事生起怒气,心想:“我这么愚钝、智慧低劣,哪里还能得到说法的机会呢?”巴利
Ārāmagatānanti vihāre sannipatitānaṃ. Ayampi lābhatthiko yaṃ vā taṃ vā khaṇḍadhammakathaṃ jānāti, so passati tādisesu ṭhānesu dviyojanatiyojanato sannipatitvā bhikkhū sabbarattikāni dhammassavanāni suṇante, tuṭṭhacitte ca dahare vā sāmaṇere vā sādhu sādhūti mahāsaddena sādhukāraṃ dente, tato dutiyadivase antogāmagate bhikkhū upāsakā pucchanti ‘‘ke, bhante, dhammaṃ kathesu’’nti. Te bhaṇanti ‘‘asuko ca asuko cā’’ti. Taṃ sutvā pasannā manussā dhammakathikānaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ karonti. So taṃ icchamāno evaṃ cintesi. Ṭhānanti bahussutānaṃ vinicchayakusalānaṃ dhammadesanā bhāro, tena bahussuto deseyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kupitoti catuppadikaṃ gāthampi vattuṃ okāsaṃ alabhamāno kupito hoti attano mandabhāvassa ‘‘ahañhi mando duppañño kuto labhissāmi desetu’’nti.
“比丘尼们”是指为了接受教诫、为了听诵戒、为了问法义,或者为了做供养而来寺院聚集的比丘尼们。这个人也是冲着利养来的,他心里这样想:这些出身大家族的比丘尼出家了,当她们进入那些人家坐下时,人们会问:“你们是从谁那里接受教诫、听诵戒或者问法义的?”然后她们会说:“某位尊者多闻,你们供养他、为他做事吧。”于是他心里就生起了这种贪求。“处”是说:教诫等事本来就是多闻者的职责,所以这里的意思是,应该由多闻者来教导。“被激怒”是说:他在两种情况下都会被激怒。一种是对那些比丘尼生气,心想:“她们以前是靠着我才能做布萨、自恣这些事,现在却一见到那位新来的长老,马上就跑到他那边去了。”另一种是对说法者生气,心想:“这个人随随便便就给她们教诫了。”巴利
Bhikkhunīnanti ovādatthaṃ vā uddesatthaṃ vā paripucchatthaṃ vā pūjākaraṇatthaṃ vā ārāmaṃ āgantvā sannipatitabhikkhunīnaṃ. Ayampi lābhatthiko, tassevaṃ hoti imā mahākulā pabbajitā bhikkhuniyo, tāsu kulesu pavisetvā nisinnāsu manussā pucchissanti ‘‘kassa santike ovādaṃ vā uddesaṃ vā paripucchaṃ vā gaṇhathā’’ti. Tato vakkhanti ‘‘asuko nāma ayyo bahussuto, tassa detha karothā’’ti, tenassa evaṃ icchā uppajjati. Ṭhānanti ovādādayo nāma bahussutānaṃ bhāro, tena bahussuto deseyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kupitoti ayampi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati, tāsañca bhikkhunīnaṃ ‘‘imā pubbe maṃ nissāya uposathappavāraṇādīni labhanti, tā idāni taṃmuhuttaṃ diṭṭhamattakamahallakattherassa santikaṃ gatā’’ti. Dhammakathikassa ca ‘‘esa imāsaṃ sahasā ovādaṃ adāsiyevā’’ti.
对近事男们,是指来到寺院的近事男。所谓放下事务的大近事男,就是把事业交给儿子、兄弟之后,为了听法而四处走动的近事男。这位比丘想为他们说法,原因是什么?他想:这些近事男生起净信之后,也会告诉近事女们,然后和近事女们一起,只把利养和恭敬奉献给我一个人。这个“处”应当由多闻者来承担。“忿怒者”:他也在两种情况下发怒:对近事男们想:这些人到别处去听法,不到我们亲教师跟前听法,算了,等他们有事的时候我就知道了;对说法者想:这个人正在给他们说法。巴利
Upāsakānanti, ārāmagatānaṃ upāsakānaṃ. Nissaṭṭhakammantā nāma mahāupāsakā honti, te puttabhātukānaṃ kammaṃ niyyātetvā dhammaṃ suṇantā vicaranti, ayaṃ tesaṃ desetuṃ icchati, kiṃ kāraṇā? Ime pasīditvā upāsikānampi ārocessanti, tato saddhiṃ upāsikāhi mayhameva lābhasakkāraṃ upaharissantīti. Ṭhānaṃ bahussuteneva yojetabbaṃ. Kupitoti ayampi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati, upāsakānañca ‘‘ime aññattha suṇanti, amhākaṃ kulupakassa santike suṇāmāti nāgacchanti, hotu idāni, tesaṃ uppanne kicce jānissāmī’’ti dhammakathikassa ca, ‘‘ayametesaṃ desetī’’ti.
这里说的“近事女”,是指来到寺院园区的近事女。所谓近事女,就是那些为了做座位供养等事,或者为了在布萨日,或者为了听闻正法而聚集来的女人。其余内容,和讲近事男那一段里说的一样。巴利
Upāsikānanti ārāmagatānaṃ. Upāsikā nāma āsanapūjādikaraṇatthaṃ vā uposathadivase vā dhammassavanatthaṃ sannipatitā. Sesaṃ upāsakavāre vuttanayameva.
“应当恭敬”:就是应当恭敬地做,好好地做。由此,他希望别人对自己所做的行为是恭敬的、美好的。“应当尊重”:就是以有分量的方式对待。由此,他希望比丘们把自己放在受尊重的位置上。“应当敬爱”:就是应当喜爱。“应当供养”:像这样恭敬、尊重、敬爱时,又以生活资具供养,他渴望得到资具的供养。“处”:指“可爱、可尊重、应当亲近修习”这种状态。只有多闻且具戒的人,才配得上这样的对待,因此比丘们应当这样对待他们。“忿怒者”:他也在两种情况下发怒:对比丘们心想“他们在恭敬那个人”,对长老则心想“要是这个人不在,他们就会恭敬我了”。这个道理同样适用于后面三项。巴利
Sakkareyyunti sakkaccañca kareyyuṃ, sundarañca kareyyuṃ. Iminā attani kāraṃ karīyamānaṃ sakkaccaṃ katañca sundarañca pattheti. Garuṃ kareyyunti bhāriyaṃ kareyyuṃ. Iminā bhikkhūhi attānaṃ garuṭṭhāne ṭhapīyamānaṃ pattheti. Māneyyunti piyāyeyyuṃ. Pūjeyyunti evaṃ sakkarontā garuṃ karontā mānentā paccayehi pūjeyyunti paccayapūjaṃ pattheti. Ṭhānanti ‘‘piyo garu bhāvaniyo’’ti vuttappakāro bahussuto ca sīlavā ca etaṃ vidhiṃ arahati tena bhikkhū evarūpaṃ evaṃ kareyyunti vuttaṃ hoti. Kupitoti ayampi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati bhikkhūnañca ‘‘ime etaṃ sakkarontī’’ti therassa ca ‘‘imasmiṃ asati maṃyeva sakkareyyu’’nti. Esa nayo ito paresu tīsu vāresu.
对于殊胜的衣:“殊胜的衣”指精细布、绢布、羊毛布、丝绸等昂贵、细软、触感舒适的衣。在这里,想要“只有我自己得到”,这种欲求还不算太大的过失;但若是想“别的比丘不要得到”,那就是大过失了。巴利
Paṇītānaṃcīvarānanti paṭṭadukūlapaṭṭuṇṇakoseyyādīnaṃ mahagghasukhumasukhasamphassānaṃ cīvarānaṃ. Idhāpi ahameva lābhī assanti icchā nātimahāsāvajjā. Na añño bhikkhu lābhī assāti pana mahāsāvajjā.
“殊胜的团食”:指配有熟酥、油、蜂蜜、糖等的最上团食。“殊胜的坐卧具”:指价值数百、数千乃至十万的床、椅等殊胜坐卧具。“病缘药资具”:指熟酥、油、蜂蜜、糖浆等最上药物。在所有这些情形中,这个“处”都应当由多闻且有福报的人来受用。“忿怒者”:在所有情形中,他都在两方面生气:对在家众心想:“这些人对那些比丘根本没有亲近之情。我长期和他们住在一起,为了粪扫衣、为了乞食,或者为了酥油等,挨家挨户次第乞食,他们却连一天也不曾给我任何殊胜的资具。可一见到外来的长老,要什么就给什么。”对长老则想:“这位长老只是在他们面前晃来晃去,那些管事的比丘什么时候才能把他赶走?一旦他不在了,我就能独享利养。”巴利
Paṇītānaṃ piṇḍapātānanti sappitelamadhusakkarādipūritānaṃ seṭṭhapiṇḍapātānaṃ. Paṇītānaṃ senāsanānanti anekasatasahassagghanakānaṃ mañcapīṭhādīnaṃ paṇītānaṃ. Gilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānanti sappitelamadhuphāṇitādīnaṃ uttamabhesajjānaṃ. Sabbatthāpi ṭhānaṃ bahussutehi puññavantehi ca yojetabbaṃ. Kupitoti sabbatthāpi dvīsu ṭhānesu kuppati, manussānañca ‘‘imesaṃ nāma paricitabhāvopi natthi, dīgharattaṃ ekato vasantassa paṃsukūlatthāya vā piṇḍapātatthāya vā sappitelādikāraṇā vā gharapaṭipāṭiyā carantassāpi me ekadivasampi kiñci paṇītaṃ paccayaṃ na denti. Āgantukaṃ mahallakaṃ pana disvāva yaṃ icchati, taṃ dentī’’ti, therassa ca ‘‘ayampi mahallako imesaṃ attānaṃ dassentoyeva carati, kudāssu nāma naṃ dhammakammikā nikkaḍḍheyyuṃ, evaṃ imasmiṃ asati ahameva lābhī assa’’nti.
贤友们,这些:就是指前面用十九种方式说过的那些欲求界。巴利
Imesaṃ kho, etaṃ āvusoti imesaṃ heṭṭhā ekūnavīsativārehi vuttānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ.
61 “被看见也被听到”:那些欲求界的对象并不是用眼睛看见的,也不是用耳朵听到的,因为它们属于意识认知的范围。但是,对于一个还没有断除欲求界的人来说,当他看到由欲求界所驱动而造作的身业时,就好像亲眼看见了欲求界本身;当他听到由欲求界所驱动而造作的语业时,就好像亲耳听到了欲求界本身。因此说“被看见也被听到”。当面的时候是被看见的;背后的时候则是被听到的,比如“听说某位比丘是那样的人”。“即使”这个词同时带有称赞和责备的意味。借此称赞他住在阿兰若,也责备他还没有断除欲求界。巴利
61.Dissanti ceva sūyanti cāti na icchāvacarā cakkhunā dissanti, na sotena sūyanti, manoviññāṇavisayattā. Appahīnaicchāvacarassa pana puggalassa icchāvacaravasena pavattakāyakammaṃ disvā diṭṭhā viya vacīkammaṃ sutvā sutā viya ca honti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dissanti ceva sūyanti cā’’ti. Paccakkhakāle dissanti, ‘‘asuko kira bhikkhu īdiso’’ti tirokkhakāle sūyanti. Kiñcāpīti anuggahagarahavacanaṃ. Tena āraññikattaṃ anuggaṇhāti, icchāvacarānaṃ appahānaṃ garahati.
这里的搭配关系是这样的:即使那位比丘拒绝了村落附近的住处,成了林野住者,住在偏远幽静的地方,但他这些感官欲求仍然没有断除。即使他拒绝了额外的利养,成了常乞食者。即使他避开了贪求的行为,成了亲手乞食者。即使他谢绝了居士布施的衣物,成了粪扫衣者。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ yojanā, kiñcāpi so bhikkhu gāmantasenāsanaṃ paṭikkhipitvā āraññiko hoti, ante pantasenāsane vasati, ime cassa ettakā icchāvacarā appahīnā. Kiñcāpi so atirekalābhaṃ paṭikkhipitvā piṇḍapātiko hoti. Kiñcāpi so loluppacāraṃ vajjetvā sapadānacārī hoti. Kiñcāpi so gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhipitvā paṃsukūliko hoti.
说到“持粗衣者”,这里的“粗”应当从三方面来理解:刀粗、线粗、染粗。其中,用刀割成一块一块的,叫刀粗,这会使衣服的价值降低;用粗长线缝制的,叫线粗,这会使触感变差,摸起来粗糙;用染料染色的,叫染粗,这会使颜色变差,显得难看。即使这位比丘穿着这样刀粗、线粗、染粗的衣服,但他的这些欲求之事仍然被看见、被听到,还没有断除,那么有智慧的同梵行者们就不会恭敬他……乃至……不会供养他。这是什么原因呢?这里的“taṃ”只是语气助词,“什么原因”就是什么缘故。因为他的那些恶行被人听到了。由于这些欲求之事尚未断除——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Lūkhacīvaradharoti ettha pana lūkhanti satthalūkhaṃ suttalūkhaṃ rajanalūkhanti tīhi kāraṇehi lūkhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha satthena khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chinnaṃ satthalūkhaṃ nāma, taṃ agghena parihāyati, thūladīghasuttakena sibbitaṃ suttalūkhaṃ nāma, taṃ phassena parihāyati kharasamphassaṃ hoti. Rajanena rattaṃ rajanalūkhaṃ nāma, taṃ vaṇṇena parihāyati dubbaṇṇaṃ hoti. Kiñcāpi so bhikkhu evaṃ satthalūkhasuttalūkharajanalūkhacīvaradharo hoti, ime cassa ettakā icchāvacarā appahīnā dissanti ceva sūyanti ca, atha kho naṃ viññū sabrahmacārī neva sakkaronti…pe… na pūjentīti. Taṃ kissa hetūti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ, kissa hetūti kiṃ kāraṇā. Te hi tassa…pe… sūyanti ca yasmā tassa te pāpakā sūyanti cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Imesaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ appahīnattāti ayamettha adhippāyo.
现在,为了用譬喻把这件事说清楚,他讲了“犹如”等那段话。其中,“尸体”指死尸。蛇的尸体就是蛇尸,其他几种也是这样。要知道,这里之所以只举这三种,是因为它们极其令人厌恶、令人作呕。因为像兔子、猪等其他动物的尸体,人们还会用辛辣调料等加工后拿来吃。但这三种尸体,就算是新鲜的,人们也已经很厌恶了,更何况时间久了腐烂发臭的呢。“装填”是堆置、装满的意思,也就是说,取了尸体放进铜钵里。“另一只钵”就是另外一只钵。“盖覆”就是遮盖。“市场间”指市场之间人群拥挤的街口。“行经”就是走过去。“如精美殊胜之物”指像洁净、令人喜爱的东西一样。而且,这是说像送给新娘的礼品那样。所谓“新娘”是指母亲,为她送去的礼品是精美的。两处重复,都是出于尊重或赞叹的语气。也有版本读作“jaññajaññaṃ byā”。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya pākaṭaṃ karonto seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tattha kuṇapanti matakaḷevaraṃ. Ahissa kuṇapaṃ ahikuṇapaṃ. Evaṃ itarāni. Atipaṭikūlajigucchanīyabhāvato cettha imāneva tīṇi vuttānīti veditabbāni. Aññesañhi sasasūkarādīnaṃ kuṇapaṃ manussā kaṭukabhaṇḍādīhi abhisaṅkharitvā paribhuñjantipi. Imesaṃ pana kuṇapaṃ abhinavampi jigucchantiyeva, ko pana vādo kālātikkamena pūtibhūte. Racayitvāti vaḍḍhetvā, paripūretvāti attho, kuṇapaṃ gahetvā kaṃsapātiyaṃ pakkhipitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññissāti aparāya. Paṭikujjitvāti pidahitvā . Antarāpaṇanti āpaṇānamantare mahājanasaṃkiṇṇaṃ racchāmukhaṃ. Paṭipajjeyyunti gaccheyyuṃ. Jaññajaññaṃ viyāti cokkhacokkhaṃ viya manāpamanāpaṃ viya. Apica vadhukāpaṇṇākāraṃ viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vadhukāti janetti vuccati, tassā nīyamānaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ jaññaṃ, ubhayatthāpi ādaravasena vā pasaṃsāvasena vā punaruttaṃ. ‘‘Jaññajaññaṃ byā’’tipi pāṭho.
打开就是揭开。一看到那具尸体,厌恶马上就会生起,意思是:那具尸体一被看见,那些人当下就产生厌恶。所谓厌恶,是指对生起“这是令人不快的”这种已生心与心所的称呼。这个道理同样适用于可厌与厌逆。所谓即使是饥饿的人,就是指即便肚子饿了的人。也不会有想吃的欲望,就是说不会生起想吃的念头。更何况已吃饱的人,意思是说,已经吃饱的人更是首先就不会生起想吃的欲望。巴利
Apāpuritvāti vivaritvā. Tassa saha dassanena amanāpatā ca saṇṭhaheyyāti tassa kuṇapassa dassanena saheva tassa janassa amanāpatā tiṭṭheyya. Amanāpatāti ca ‘‘amanāpamida’’nti uppannacittacetasikānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Esa nayo paṭikulyajegucchatāsu. Jighacchitānampīti chātānampi. Na bhottukamyatā assāti bhuñjitukāmatā na bhaveyya. Pageva suhitānanti dhātānaṃ pana paṭhamatarameva bhuñjitukāmatā na bhaveyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
这里用譬喻来对应说明:干净的铜钵好比这个人出家的形相;把尸体放进钵里,好比还没有断除欲求所行;用另一个铜钵盖住,好比用阿兰若住等头陀支来掩盖欲求所行;打开铜钵,因为看见尸体而让人厌恶,好比不持守阿兰若住等头陀支,因为暴露了欲求所行,就让同梵行者不再恭敬他等等。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ upamāsaṃsandanā – parisuddhakaṃsapātisadisaṃ imassa pabbajjāliṅgaṃ, kuṇaparacanaṃ viya icchāvacarānaṃ appahānaṃ, aparakaṃsapātiyā paṭikujjhanaṃ viya āraññikaṅgādīhi icchāvacarappaṭicchādanaṃ, kaṃsapātiṃ vivaritvā kuṇapadassanena janassa amanāpatā viya āraññikaṅgādīni anādiyitvā icchāvacaradassanena sabrahmacārīnaṃ asakkārakaraṇāditāti.
62 在白分(月盈分)这边,“虽”是认可和赞叹的话,用它来认可阿兰若住,并赞叹断除欲求之事。“受邀者”就是接受邀请的人。“拣择去黑者”就是经过拣择、去掉黑色部分。关于“多种汤、多种菜肴”,这里的“汤”指可以用手拿取的食物;“菜肴”指配菜,因此像鱼、肉、绿豆汤等就叫多种汤,而种种肉等配菜就叫多种菜肴。其余内容应按照前面所说的方法来理解。巴利
62. Sukkapakkhe pana, kiñcāpīti anuggahapasaṃsāvacanaṃ, tena āraññikattaṃ anuggaṇhāti, icchāvacarappahānaṃ pasaṃsati. Nemantanikoti nimantanapaṭiggāhako. Vicitakāḷakanti vicinitvā apanītakāḷakaṃ. Anekasūpaṃ anekabyañjananti ettha sūpo nāma hatthahāriyo vuccati. Byañjananti uttaribhaṅgaṃ, tena macchamaṃsamuggasūpādīhi anekasūpaṃ, nānappakāramaṃsādibyañjanehi anekabyañjananti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
在譬喻的对应说明中,应当这样理解:就像把上等米饭调配好,这好比断除欲求之事;用另一只铜钵把它盖住,这好比以少欲为动机的村落住等头陀行,把断除欲求之事遮盖起来;揭开铜钵,让人看到上等米饭而生起欢喜,同样,不执取村落住等头陀行,让人看到断除欲求之事,同梵行者因此生起恭敬等,应当如此了知。巴利
Upamāsaṃsandane ca sālivarabhattaracanaṃ viya icchāvacarappahānaṃ, aparakaṃsapātiyā paṭikujjhanaṃ viya appicchatāsamuṭṭhānehi gāmantavihārādīhi icchāvacarappahānappaṭicchādakaṃ, kaṃsapātiṃ vivaritvā sālivarabhattadassanena janassa manāpatā viya gāmantavihārādīni anādiyitvā icchāvacarappahānadassanena sabrahmacārīnaṃ sakkārakaraṇāditā veditabbā.
63 贤友舍利弗,我想到一个譬喻。意思是:贤友舍利弗,我心里浮现出一个譬喻,也就是说我想讲一个譬喻。“请说吧”的意思是:请你说出来,让它显现,也就是“你讲吧”。“一时”这里的“一”只是个虚词,说的是“在某一个时候”,这是用受格来表示处所。“我住在王舍城鹫峰山”:王舍城是那座城的名字;因为四周被山环绕,像围栏一样,所以叫鹫峰山。我住在那个城里,意思是依止那座城而住。“那时我”就是“那个时候的我”。这里“那”是表示另起一段话题的开端虚词,“我”是虚词,只是用来补足音节。“上午时分”是指一天的前半段时间。意思是上午的时候,或者说上午的一段时间就是上午时分,说的是上午的一个刹那,这样在绝对关联中就用受格。“穿好衣服”就是披覆好衣服,这里应当理解为依照在精舍中穿衣和换衣的方式。或者是为了进入村庄而整理好衣着,因为他在这之前并非没有穿衣。巴利
63.Upamā maṃ, āvuso sāriputta, paṭibhātīti mayhaṃ, āvuso sāriputta, upamā upaṭṭhāti. Ekaṃ upamaṃ vattukāmo ahanti adhippāyo. Paṭibhātu tanti tuyhaṃ paṭibhātu upaṭṭhātu, vada tvanti adhippāyo. Ekamidāhanti ettha idāti nipātamattaṃ, ekasmiṃ samaye ahanti vuttaṃ hoti, bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Rājagahe viharāmi giribbajeti, rājagahanti tassa nagarassa nāmaṃ. Samantato pana giriparikkhepena vajo viya saṇṭhitattā giribbajanti vuccati. Tasmiṃ nagare viharāmi, taṃ nissāya ahaṃ viharāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha khvāhanti atha kho ahaṃ. Ettha ca athāti aññādhikāravacanārambhe nipāto. Khoti padapūraṇamatte. Pubbaṇhasamayanti divasassa pubbabhāgasamayaṃ. Pubbaṇhasamayeti attho, pubbaṇhe vā samayaṃ pubbaṇhasamayaṃ, pubbaṇhe ekaṃ khaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti, evaṃ accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ labbhati. Nivāsetvāti paridahitvā, vihāranivāsanaparivattanavasenetaṃ veditabbaṃ. Gāmappavesanatthāya vā saṇṭhapetvā nivāsanavasena, na hi so tato pubbe anivattho ahosi.
拿起钵和衣,就是用手持钵,用身体披衣。为了团食,就是为了乞食。Samīti 是他的名字。车匠之子,就是造车匠的儿子。般度之子,就是般度的儿子。邪命外道,就是裸形沙门。旧车匠之子,就是出身于旧车匠家族的儿子。近立,就是走上前去站着。曲,是指向一侧弯曲。弯,是指像蛇爬行的路线那样。过患,是指松软、凹凸不平、有节疤等等。如如,是表示时间的虚词,意思是“每当……的时候”,也就是在那个时候;如是也是表示时间,意思是在那个时候。他按照自己墨线的方向构思,另一个人就在他构思的那一刻,在他所构思的地方砍削。欢喜,就是自心满足、喜悦,被喜与乐所占据的心。说出欢喜之语,就是因欢喜而说话,或者说与欢喜状态相应的话,即说出、表达出来。如同以心了知心一般。巴利
Pattacīvaramādāyāti pattaṃ hatthena cīvaraṃ kāyena ādiyitvā. Piṇḍāyāti piṇḍapātatthāya. Samītīti tassa nāmaṃ. Yānakāraputtoti rathakāraputto. Paṇḍuputtoti paṇḍussa putto. Ājīvakoti naggasamaṇako. Purāṇayānakāraputtoti porāṇayānakārakulassa putto. Paccupaṭṭhitoti upagantvā ṭhito. Vaṅkaṃ nāma ekato kuṭilaṃ. Jimhaṃ nāma sappagatamaggasadisaṃ. Dosanti phegguvisamagaṇṭhikādi. Yathā yathāti kālatthe nipāto, yadā yadā yasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāleti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā tathāti ayampi kālatthoyeva, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāleti vuttaṃ hoti. So attano suttānulomena cintesi, itaro tena cintitakkhaṇe cintitaṭṭhānameva tacchati. Attamanoti sakamano tuṭṭhamano pītisomanassehi gahitamano. Attamanavācaṃ nicchāresīti attamanatāya vācaṃ , attamanabhāvassa vā yuttaṃ vācaṃ nicchāresi udīrayi, pabyāharīti vuttaṃ hoti. Hadayā hadayaṃ maññe aññāyāti cittena cittaṃ jānitvā viya.
没有信心,是指对佛、法、僧没有信心。为了活命,是指被债务、恐惧等逼迫,没办法在外面活下去,于是来到这里,成了只为谋生的人。不是出于信心,就是说不是凭信心而来。狡诈、欺诳,是说具备谄曲和欺骗。欺伪者,是指学过骗术的人,也就是说,已经达到谄曲成熟稳固的地步。因为谄曲就是显示本来不存在的功德,如同展示不存在的商品优点一样,所以称为“欺伪”。高慢,是指像高高翘起的芦苇一样,意思是生起了空洞虚妄的傲慢。轻躁,是指热衷于装饰钵、衣等轻浮举动。饶舌,是指嘴巴尖利,也就是说话粗恶;散乱语,是指言语不加约束,整天说些毫无意义的废话。于诸根不护门,是指在六根门不防护自己的行为。于食不知量,是指饮食方面本应知道适当的分量,也就是在寻求、接受、食用时懂得适度,他们却不知道这个分寸。不专修警寤,是指不致力于保持清醒警觉。于沙门义无期望,是指对沙门法毫不关心,意思是缺乏随顺法的实践。于学处无深重恭敬,是指对诸学处没有深厚的恭敬,或者常常违犯、越戒。多事等词,已在前面说法嗣者那段说过;懈怠等词,已在前面怖畏恐惧那段说过。以法门,是指通过说法的方式。巴利
Assaddhāti buddhadhammasaṅghesu saddhāvirahitā. Jīvikatthāti iṇabhayādīhi pīḷitā bahi jīvituṃ asakkontā idha jīvikatthikā hutvā. Na saddhāti na saddhāya. Saṭhā māyāvinoti māyāsāṭheyyehi yuttā. Ketabinoti sikkhitakerāṭikā, nipphannathāmagatasāṭheyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sāṭheyyañhi abhūtaguṇadassanato abhūtabhaṇḍaguṇadassanasamaṃ katvā ‘‘kerāṭiya’’nti vuccati. Unnaḷāti uggatanaḷā, uṭṭhitatucchamānāti vuttaṃ hoti . Capalāti pattacīvaramaṇḍanādinā cāpallena yuttā. Mukharāti mukhakharā, kharavacanāti vuttaṃ hoti, vikiṇṇavācāti asaṃyatavacanā, divasampi niratthakavacanappalāpino. Indriyesu aguttadvārāti chasu indriyesu asaṃvutakammadvārā. Bhojane amattaññunoti bhojane yā mattā jānitabbā pariyesanapaṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu yuttatā, tassā ajānanakā. Jāgariyaṃ ananuyuttāti jāgare ananuyuttā. Sāmaññe anapekkhavantoti samaṇadhamme nirapekkhā, dhammānudhammappaṭipattirahitāti attho. Sikkhāya na tibbagāravāti sikkhāpadesu bahulagāravā na honti, āpattivītikkamabahulā vā. Bāhulikātiādi dhammadāyāde vuttaṃ, kusītātiādi bhayabherave. Dhammapariyāyenāti dhammadesanāya.
“因为信心,从家出家”:他们本来就有信心,出家之后也是凭着信心,从在家生活走向无家生活。他们好像喝进去、好像吃进去:当他们说出欢喜的话时,就好像用嘴在喝;当他们内心随喜时,就好像用意在吃。“太好了”:就是真好、善哉的意思。“同梵行者”:这个词用短音也行,用长音也行。用短音时,指的是舍利弗;用长音时,指的是同梵行者们。如果指舍利弗,意思就是“同梵行的舍利弗把我们从不善中救拔出来”;如果指同梵行者们,意思就是“同梵行者们把我们从不善中救拔出来”。“年轻”:年纪小。“青年”:正处在青春时期。“有妆饰性”:本性就爱打扮。在这里,有些人虽然年纪小,却不算青年,比如特别幼小的孩子;有些人虽然是青年,却并不爱打扮,比如性情调柔的人,或者被懒惰、放逸等毛病压倒的人。但这里特别指的是既年轻、又青春、又爱妆饰的人,所以才这样说。青莲等花,是按世间共同认可的说法来讲的。“如此,他们”:他们就这样。“两位大龙象”:两位大龙象,因为这两位首座弟子被称为“大龙象”。这里的词义是这样:他们不因贪欲等而前往,所以叫龙;他们不因种种道而回到已断除的烦恼,所以叫龙;他们不做种种恶行,所以叫龙。这是这里的简略含义。详细含义则应依照《大义释》中所说的方式来了知。再者——巴利
Saddhā agārasmāti pakatiyāpi saddhā, pabbajitāpi saddhāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitā. Pivanti maññe ghasanti maññeti pivanti viya ghasanti viya. Attamanavācaṃ nicchārentā vacasā pivanti viya, abbhanumodantā manasā ghasanti viya. Sādhu vatāti sundaraṃ vata . Sabrahmacārīti rassampi vaṭṭati dīghampi. Rasse sati sāriputtassa upari hoti, dīghe sati sabrahmacārīnaṃ. Yadā sāriputtassa upari hoti, tadā sabrahmacārī sāriputto amhe akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvāti attho. Yadā sabrahmacārīnaṃ, tadā sabrahmacārayo akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvāti attho. Daharoti taruṇo. Yuvāti yobbanabhāve ṭhito. Maṇḍanakajātikoti alaṅkārakasabhāvo. Tattha koci taruṇopi yuvā na hoti yathā atitaruṇo, koci yuvāpi maṇḍanakajātiko na hoti yathā upasantasabhāvo, ālasiyabyasanādīhi vā abhibhūto, idha pana daharo ceva yuvā ca maṇḍanakajātiko ca adhippeto, tasmā evamāha. Uppalādīni lokasammatattā vuttāni. Itiha teti evaṃ te. Ubho mahānāgāti dvepi mahānāgā, dvepi hi ete aggasāvakā ‘‘mahānāgā’’ti vuccanti. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho, chandādīhi na gacchantīti nāgā, tena tena maggena pahīne kilese na āgacchantīti nāgā, nānappakārakaṃ āguṃ na karontīti nāgā, ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana mahāniddese (mahāni. 80) vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Apica –
在世间,他不造作任何恶行,
舍弃一切结缚,解开诸束缚;
他在一切处都不执著,已经解脱。
他被称呼为龙象,因为他如此如然。巴利
‘‘Āguṃ na karoti kiñci loke, Sabbasaṃyoge visajja bandhanāni; Sabbattha na sajjatī vimutto, Nāgo tādi pavuccate tathattā’’ti. (su. ni. 527; mahāni. 80);
这里应当这样理解:伟大的龙象就是大龙象,意思是说,他们比其他的漏尽者龙象更值得供养,也更值得赞叹。“相互”就是一个对另一个。“同等随喜”就是平等地随喜。在这里,大目犍连以这个譬喻随喜,法将舍利弗则说:“贤友,请你继续讲。”因此经文说:“他们相互对彼此的善说,平等地随喜。”巴利
Evamettha attho veditabbo. Mahantā nāgā mahānāgā, aññehi khīṇāsavanāgehi pujjatarā ca pāsaṃsatarā cāti attho. Aññamaññassāti añño aññassa. Samanumodiṃsūti samaṃ anumodiṃsu. Tattha imāya upamāya mahāmoggallāno anumodi, paṭibhātu taṃ āvusoti dhammasenāpati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aññamaññassa subhāsitaṃ samanumodiṃsū’’ti.
《希望经》的注释巴利
6. Ākaṅkheyyasuttavaṇṇanā
64 “如是我闻”这一段,就是《希望经》。其中,“具戒”有三种具足,是按圆满、具足、甘美来说的。具体如下——巴利
64.Evaṃme sutanti ākaṅkheyyasuttaṃ. Tattha sampannasīlāti tividhaṃ sampannaṃ paripuṇṇasamaṅgimadhuravasena. Tattha –
鹦鹉们正在啄食成熟的稻田,拘希耶。
梵天,我告诉你,我没法阻止他。巴利
‘‘Sampannaṃ sālikedāraṃ, suvā bhuñjanti kosiya; Paṭivedemi te brahme, na naṃ vāretumussahe’’ti. (jā. 1.14.1);
这叫作“圆满成就”。“以这个巴帝摩卡防护,他已经具备、完全具备、进入、完全进入、获得、成就、具足”(《分别论》511),这叫作“具足成就”。“尊者,这大地的底层是圆满的,就像纯净的小蜂蜜一样甘美”(《波罗夷》17),这叫作“蜜成就”。不过在这里,圆满成就和具足成就两者都适用。所以“戒圆满”应当这样理解:或者成为戒行圆满的人,或者成为具足戒的人。这就是这里的意思。那么,戒是以什么意义称为戒呢?是以持守的意义称为戒。关于它的详细解释,在《清净道论》中已经说过。巴利
Idaṃ paripuṇṇasampannaṃ nāma. ‘‘Iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto upāgato samupāgato upapanno sampanno samannāgato’’ti (vibha. 511) idaṃ samaṅgisampannaṃ nāma. ‘‘Imissā, bhante, mahāpathaviyā heṭṭhimatalaṃ sampannaṃ, seyyathāpi khuddamadhuṃ aneḷakaṃ, evamassāda’’nti (pārā. 17) idaṃ madhurasampannaṃ nāma. Idha pana paripuṇṇasampannampi samaṅgisampannampi vaṭṭati. Tasmā sampannasīlāti paripuṇṇasīlā hutvātipi sīlasamaṅgino hutvātipi evamettha attho vedibbo. Sīlanti kenaṭṭhena sīlaṃ? Sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Tassa vitthārakathā visuddhimagge vuttā.
在这里,用“戒圆满”这个说法,是通过去除戒的缺陷来成就戒的圆满,就像通过去除田地的缺陷来成就田地的圆满一样。正如一块田地,如果同时存在种子缺陷、播种缺陷、水缺陷和盐碱缺陷这四种问题,那它就是不圆满的。巴利
Tattha ‘‘paripuṇṇasīlā’’ti iminā atthena khettadosavigamena khettapāripūrī viya sīladosavigamena sīlapāripūrī vuttā hoti. Yathā hi khettaṃ bījakhaṇḍaṃ vappakhaṇḍaṃ udakakhaṇḍaṃ ūsakhaṇḍanti catudosasamannāgataṃ aparipūraṃ hoti.
在这里,所谓“种子有缺陷”,是指种子中间夹杂着残缺或腐烂的种子;把这些种子播到哪里,哪里的庄稼就长不出来,这块田就有了缺陷。所谓“播种有缺陷”,是指不善巧的人播种时,中间时不时漏掉种子。这样一来,到处都长不出庄稼,这块田就有了缺陷。所谓“水有缺陷”,是指有些地方水太多,有些地方又没有水;在那种情况下,庄稼也长不出来,这块田就有了缺陷。所谓“盐碱有缺陷”,是指农夫在某个地方用犁翻耕四五次,把土层弄得太深,于是那里就生出盐碱;在那种情况下,庄稼也长不出来,这块田就有了缺陷。这样的田不会有大果报、大利益,即使播下很多种子,也只能得到很少的收成。而当这四种缺陷消除后,田地就圆满了。这样的田地就会有大果报、大利益。同样地,戒如果具备四种缺陷——残缺、漏洞、斑点、杂色——就是不圆满的。这样的戒不会有大果报、大利益。而当这四种缺陷消除后,戒田就圆满了,这样的戒就会有大果报、大利益。巴利
Tattha bījakhaṇḍaṃ nāma yattha antarantarā bījāni khaṇḍāni vā pūtīni vā honti, tāni yattha vapanti, tattha sassaṃ na uṭṭheti, khettaṃ khaṇḍaṃ hoti. Vappakhaṇḍaṃ nāma yattha akusalo bījāni vapanto antarantarā nipāteti. Evañhi sabbattha sassaṃ na uṭṭheti, khettaṃ khaṇḍaṃ hoti. Udakakhaṇḍaṃ nāma yattha katthaci udakaṃ atibahu vā na vā hoti, tatrāpi hi sassāni na uṭṭhenti, khettaṃ khaṇḍaṃ hoti. Ūsakhaṇḍaṃ nāma yattha kassako kismiñci padese naṅgalena bhūmiṃ cattāro pañca vāre kasanto atigambhīraṃ karoti, tato ūsaṃ uppajjati, tatrāpi hi sassaṃ na uṭṭheti, khettaṃ khaṇḍaṃ hoti, tādisañca khettaṃ na mahapphalaṃ hoti na mahānisaṃsaṃ, tatrāpi hi bahumpi vapitvā appaṃ labhati. Imesaṃ pana catunnaṃ dosānaṃ vigamā khettaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hoti. Tādisañca khettaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsaṃ. Evameva khaṇḍaṃ chiddaṃ sabalaṃ kammāsanti catudosasamannāgataṃ sīlaṃ aparipūraṃ hoti. Tādisañca sīlaṃ na mahapphalaṃ hoti, na mahānisaṃsaṃ. Imesaṃ pana catunnaṃ dosānaṃ vigamā sīlakhettaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hoti, tādisañca sīlaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsaṃ.
“具足戒”这句话,是用来说:你们要具备戒、与戒结合、与戒相应而安住。在这里,戒的圆满有两个原因:一是看到犯戒的过患,二是看到持戒的利益。这两方面在《清净道论》里都有详细说明。巴利
‘‘Sīlasamaṅgino’’ti iminā panatthena sīlena samaṅgibhūtā samodhānaṃ gatā samannāgatā hutvā viharathāti idameva vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha dvīhi kāraṇehi sampannasīlatā hoti sīlavipattiyā ca ādīnavadassanena sīlasampattiyā ca ānisaṃsadassanena. Tadubhayampi visuddhimagge vitthāritaṃ.
关于这一点,岛寺住者善意长老这样说:世尊用“戒圆满”这句话,先总说了四遍清净戒,接着又用“巴帝摩卡防护所防护”这句,把其中最为首要的戒详细展开来开示。可是,他的弟子、精通三藏的小龙长老却说:世尊在前后两处说的都是巴帝摩卡防护,因为巴帝摩卡防护本身就是戒,其余三种只是被称为戒而已。他不认可那种说法,说道:所谓“根律仪”,不过就是守护六根门而已;所谓“活命遍净”,不过就是以如法、正当的方式获得资具而已;所谓“资具依止”,不过就是在获得资具之后,以“这是为了什么”来省察之后再受用而已。严格来说,只有巴帝摩卡防护才是戒。一个人的巴帝摩卡防护如果已经毁坏,他就像被砍断头的人一样,不能说“我还能保护剩下的手和脚”。但如果一个人的巴帝摩卡防护完好无损,他就像头没有被砍断的人一样,能保住性命,然后再把其余部分恢复正常并加以保护。所以,世尊用“戒圆满”开示了巴帝摩卡防护,又用“具足巴帝摩卡”作为它的同义词,为了把它详细展开来开示,才说了“巴帝摩卡防护所防护”等话。巴利
Tattha ‘‘sampannasīlā’’ti ettāvatā kira bhagavā catupārisuddhisīlaṃ uddisitvā ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutā’’ti iminā tattha jeṭṭhakasīlaṃ vitthāretvā dassesīti dīpavihāravāsī sumanatthero āha. Antevāsiko panassa tepiṭakacūḷanāgatthero āha – ubhayatthāpi pātimokkhasaṃvaro bhagavatā vutto, pātimokkhasaṃvaroyeva hi sīlaṃ. Itarāni pana tīṇi sīlanti vuttaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthīti ananujānanto vatvā āha – ‘‘indriyasaṃvaro nāma chadvārarakkhāmattakameva, ājīvapārisuddhi dhammena samena paccayuppattimattakaṃ, paccayanissitaṃ paṭiladdhapaccaye idamatthanti paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanamattakaṃ. Nippariyāyena pātimokkhasaṃvarova sīlaṃ. Yassa so bhinno, ayaṃ chinnasīso viya puriso hatthapāde sesāni rakkhissatīti na vattabbo. Yassa pana so arogo, ayaṃ acchinnasīso viya puriso jīvitaṃ sesāni puna pākatikāni katvā rakkhituṃ sakkoti. Tasmā ‘sampannasīlā’ti iminā pātimokkhasaṃvaraṃ uddisitvā ‘sampannapātimokkhā’ti tasseva vevacanaṃ vatvā taṃ vitthāretvā dassento ‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutā’tiādimāhā’’ti.
在这里,“巴帝摩卡防护所防护”是指具足巴帝摩卡防护。“行处与行境圆满”是指在行为和行境两方面都圆满。“于微小”是指在微细的地方。“诸过失”是指不善法。“见怖畏者”是指见到怖畏。“受持”是指正确地接受。“修学于诸学处”是指在每一条学处上,接受之后再修学。另外还有一种解释:“受持已,修学于诸学处”是指凡是属于应当修学的所有身业和语业,全部接受之后去修学。这是简要的说明;如果详细展开,所有这些“巴帝摩卡防护”等词句,在《清净道论》中已经讲过。巴利
Tattha pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutāti pātimokkhasaṃvarena samannāgatā. Ācāragocarasampannāti ācārena ca gocarena ca sampannā. Aṇumattesūti appamattakesu. Vajjesūti akusaladhammesu. Bhayadassāvīti bhayadassino. Samādāyāti sammā ādiyitvā. Sikkhatha sikkhāpadesūti sikkhāpadesu taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhatha. Apica samādāya sikkhatha sikkhāpadesūti yaṃkiñci sikkhākoṭṭhāsesu sikkhitabbaṃ kāyikaṃ vācasikañca, taṃ sabbaṃ samādāya sikkhathāti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana sabbānetāni pātimokkhasaṃvarādīni padāni visuddhimagge vuttāni.
65 “若比丘希望”这句话,是为了什么而说的呢?是为了显示持戒的利益。就算是刚出家不久的人,或者智慧不够的人,也可能会这样想:“世尊说‘要圆满戒’,可是圆满戒到底有什么利益、有什么殊胜、有什么增长呢?”为了向他们说明这十七种利益,世尊才这样宣说。目的是让他们哪怕只是听到“为同梵行者所喜爱、悦意”一直到“漏尽”这样的利益,也能去圆满戒。就像那位“毒刺商人”一样。所谓“毒刺商人”,指的就是卖糖浆的商人。巴利
65.Ākaṅkheyya ceti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Sīlānisaṃsadassanatthaṃ. Sacepi acirapabbajitānaṃ vā duppaññānaṃ vā evamassa ‘‘bhagavā sīlaṃ pūrethāti vadati, ko nu kho sīlapūraṇe ānisaṃso, ko viseso, kā vaḍḍhī’’ti? Tesaṃ sattarasa ānisaṃse dassetuṃ evamāha. Appeva nāma etaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyamanāpatādiāsavakkhayapariyosānaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ sutvāpi sīlaṃ paripūreyyunti. Visakaṇṭakavāṇijo viya. Visakaṇṭakavāṇijo nāma guḷavāṇijo vuccati.
据说,那个商人用车子装了糖块、糖浆、砂糖等东西,来到边远的村庄,大声吆喝:“来买毒刺啊,来买毒刺啊!”村民们听到后,心想:“所谓毒,是很厉害的东西,谁吃了就会死;刺也能扎死人。这两样都很厉害,能有什么好处?”于是他们把家门闩上,还把孩子们赶走了。商人看到这情形,心想:“这些村民不懂得交易,让我用个法子让他们来买。”于是吆喝道:“来买极甜的啊,来买极美味的啊!糖块、糖浆、砂糖,统统都能买到,用假铜钱、假金币什么的也能买到!”村民们听了,欢欢喜喜地跑来,付了很多钱,买了很多。这里,商人吆喝“来买毒刺啊”,就像世尊说“诸比丘,要具足戒而住……乃至受持、学习诸学处”。村民们心想“这两样都很厉害,能有什么好处”,就像比丘们心想:“世尊说‘要具足戒而住’,可戒这东西严厉、粗重,跟嬉戏娱乐等是相反的,具足戒到底有什么好处?”后来商人说“来买极甜的啊”等话,就像世尊为了说明从“为同梵行者所喜爱、悦意”一直到“漏尽”这十七种利益,而说了“若比丘希望”等话。应当这样理解。巴利
So kira guḷaphāṇitakhaṇḍasakkharādīni sakaṭenādāya paccantagāmaṃ gantvā ‘‘visakaṇṭakaṃ gaṇhatha, visakaṇṭakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti ugghosesi. Taṃ sutvā gāmikā ‘‘visaṃ nāma kakkhaḷaṃ, yo naṃ khādati, so marati, kaṇṭakampi vijjhitvā māreti, ubhopete kakkhaḷā, ko ettha ānisaṃso’’ti gehadvārāni thakesuṃ, dārake ca palāpesuṃ. Taṃ disvā vāṇijo ‘‘avohārakusalā ime gāmikā, handa ne upāyena gaṇhāpemī’’ti ‘‘atimadhuraṃ gaṇhatha, atisāduṃ gaṇhatha, guḷaṃ phāṇitaṃ sakkharaṃ samagghaṃ labbhati, kūṭamāsakakūṭakahāpaṇādīhipi labbhatī’’ti ugghosesi. Taṃ sutvā gāmikā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā āgantvā bahumpi mūlaṃ datvā gahesuṃ. Tattha vāṇijassa ‘‘visakaṇṭakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti ugghosanaṃ viya bhagavato ‘‘sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharatha…pe… samādāya sikkhatha sikkhāpadesū’’ti vacanaṃ. ‘‘Ubhopete kakkhaḷā, ko ettha ānisaṃso’’ti gāmikānaṃ cintanaṃ viya bhagavā ‘‘sampannasīlā viharathā’’ti āha, ‘‘sīlañca nāmetaṃ kakkhaḷaṃ pharusaṃ khiḍḍādipaccanīkaṃ, ko nu kho sampannasīlānaṃ ānisaṃso’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ cintanaṃ. Atha tassa vāṇijassa ‘‘atimadhuraṃ gaṇhathā’’tiādivacanaṃ viya bhagavato piyamanāpatādiāsavakkhayapariyosānaṃ sattarasaānisaṃsappakāsanatthaṃ ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce’’tiādivacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这段话里,“若希望”意思是如果希望、如果想要。“应成为可爱者”是说应当用慈爱的眼光来看待他,他应当成为生起情感的基础,这就是这句话的意思。“悦意”是说能让他们心意增长,或者说能通过他们的心意而达到,也就是应当以慈心遍满,这就是这句话的意思。“尊重”是说在他们当中应当被置于尊贵的地位,就像石伞盖一样。“应被尊重”是说“确实,这位具寿知其所知、见其所见”,应当这样被尊重。“于诸戒上为圆满实行者”是说唯独在四种清净戒上应当是圆满实行者,应当以无缺、圆满的方式具足,这就是这句话的意思。“内住心寂止之实践者”是说致力于自己内心的寂止。这里“内”和“于自己”是同一个意思,只是文句不同。而这里的“寂止”一词是业格,却取依处格之义。“不弃除禅那者”是说禅那不向外移除,或者禅那不被破坏,因为“移除、破坏”这个词有移出、破坏的意思。它的用法,比如在“除去傲慢而行为谦下”等语句中可以看到。巴利
Tattha ākaṅkheyya ceti yadi ākaṅkheyya yadi iccheyya. Piyo ca assanti piyacakkhūhi sampassitabbo, sinehuppattiyā padaṭṭhānabhūto bhaveyyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Manāpoti tesaṃ manavaḍḍhanako, tesaṃ vā manena pattabbo, mettacittena pharitabboti vuttaṃ hoti. Garūti tesaṃ garuṭṭhāniyo pāsāṇacchattasadiso. Bhāvanīyoti ‘‘addhā ayamāyasmā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passatī’’ti evaṃ sambhāvanīyo. Sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti catupārisuddhisīlesuyeva paripūrakārī assa, anūnena paripūritākārena samannāgato bhaveyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ajjhattaṃ cetosamathamanuyuttoti attano cittasamathe yutto, ettha hi ajjhattanti vā attanoti vā etaṃ ekatthaṃ, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Bhummatthe panetaṃ samathanti upayogavacanaṃ. Anūti iminā upasaggena yoge siddhaṃ. Anirākatajjhānoti bahi anīhaṭajjhāno, avināsitajjhāno vā, nīharaṇavināsatthañhi idaṃ nirākaraṇaṃ nāma. Thambhaṃ niraṃkatvā nivātavuttītiādīsu cassa payogo daṭṭhabbo.
具备七种随观,就是与七种随观相应。七种随观就是:无常随观、苦随观、无我随观、厌离随观、离贪随观、灭随观、弃舍随观。这些在《清净道论》里有详细说明。“令空寂之处增长者”,就是让空寂之处增长的人。在这里,比丘以止和观取业处之后,日夜进入空寂之处坐下,就应当知道他是“令空寂之处增长者”。不过,即使是在单层楼阁等殿堂里做事的人,也绝不能被看作令空寂之处增长者。巴利
Vipassanāya samannāgatoti sattavidhāya anupassanāya yutto, sattavidhā anupassanā nāma aniccānupassanā dukkhānupassanā anattānupassanā nibbidānupassanā virāgānupassanā nirodhānupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanāti. Tā visuddhimagge vitthāritā. Brūhetā suññāgārānanti vaḍḍhetā suññāgārānaṃ, ettha ca samathavipassanāvasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā rattindivaṃ suññāgāraṃ pavisitvā nisīdamāno bhikkhu ‘‘brūhetā suññāgārāna’’nti veditabbo. Ekabhūmakādipāsāde kurumānopi pana neva suññāgārānaṃ brūhetāti daṭṭhabboti.
到这里应当明白:就像讲渴爱活动的教法,一开始虽然是按渴爱来讲的,但因为慢和邪见都以渴爱为立足处,所以慢和邪见也就被含摄进来,逐渐形成了关于三种戏论的教法;同样,这个教法一开始虽然是按增上戒学来讲的,但因为止和观都以戒为立足处,所以止和观也就被含摄进来,逐渐形成了关于三学的教法。巴利
Ettāvatā ca yathā taṇhāvicaritadesanā paṭhamaṃ taṇhāvasena āraddhāpi taṇhāpadaṭṭhānattā mānadiṭṭhīnaṃ mānadiṭṭhiyo osaritvā kamena papañcattayadesanā jātā, evamayaṃ desanā paṭhamaṃ adhisīlasikkhāvasena āraddhāpi sīlapadaṭṭhānattā samathavipassanānaṃ samathavipassanāyo osaritvā kamena sikkhattayadesanā jātāti veditabbā.
在这里,“于戒上圆满实行”这一句,说的是增上戒学。“内心专注于寂止、不弃禅那”这一句,说的是增上心学。“具足观”这一句,说的是增上慧学。而“令空屋增长”这一句,则是从止的角度说令空屋增长属于增上心学,从观的角度说令空屋增长属于增上慧学,这样就把两种学合在一起说了。这里,“内心专注于寂止、不弃禅那”这些词句,说的是守护戒的心一境性;“观”这个词,说的是守护戒的对诸行的把握。巴利
Ettha hi ‘‘sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’ti ettāvatā adhisīlasikkhā vuttā. ‘‘Ajjhattaṃ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno’’ti ettāvatā adhicittasikkhā, ‘‘vipassanāya samannāgato’’ti ettāvatā adhipaññāsikkhā, ‘‘brūhetā suññāgārāna’’nti iminā pana samathavasena suññāgāravaḍḍhane adhicittasikkhā, vipassanāvasena adhipaññāsikkhāti evaṃ dvepi sikkhā saṅgahetvā vuttā. Ettha ca ‘‘ajjhattaṃ cetosamathamanuyutto anirākatajjhāno’’ti imehi padehi sīlānurakkhikā eva cittekaggatā kathitā. ‘‘Vipassanāyā’’ti iminā padena sīlānurakkhiko saṅkhārapariggaho.
心一境性怎样守护戒呢?如果一个人没有心一境性,疾病生起时就会受苦;被疾病折磨得心神散乱,他甚至会为了平息病苦而毁掉戒。可是,如果一个人有心一境性,他就能压伏疾病带来的苦,进入等至;在入定的那一刻,苦被远远抛开,更强的乐生起。心一境性就是这样守护戒的。巴利
Kathaṃ cittekaggatā sīlamanurakkhati? Yassa hi cittekaggatā natthi, so byādhimhi uppanne vihaññati, so byādhivihato vikkhittacitto sīlaṃ vināsetvāpi byādhivūpasamaṃ kattā hoti. Yassa pana cittekaggatā atthi, so taṃ byādhidukkhaṃ vikkhambhetvā samāpattiṃ samāpajjati, samāpannakkhaṇe dukkhaṃ dūrāpakataṃ hoti, balavatarasukhamuppajjati. Evaṃ cittekaggatā sīlaṃ anurakkhati.
对诸行的把握怎样守护戒呢?如果一个人对诸行没有把握,他就会对自己的身心生起强烈的我执,认为“这是我的色身,这是我的识”。当遇到饥荒、疾病、恐惧等境况时,他甚至会毁坏戒来养活自己的身体。但如果一个人对诸行有把握,他就不会对自己的身心生起强烈的我执或爱染。当遇到饥荒、疾病、恐惧等境况时,哪怕他的肠子流到体外,哪怕他干枯消瘦,哪怕他被砍成碎块、碎成百片千片,他也绝不会毁坏戒来养活自己的身体。对诸行的把握就是这样守护戒的。“使空寂之处增长”这句话,则是说明要让这两种修习不断增长、扩展、持续不断地实践。巴利
Kathaṃ saṅkhārapariggaho sīlamanurakkhati? Yassa hi saṅkhārapariggaho natthi, tassa ‘‘mama rūpaṃ mama viññāṇa’’nti attabhāve balavamamattaṃ hoti, so tathārūpesu dubbhikkhabyādhibhayādīsu sampattesu sīlaṃ vināsetvāpi attabhāvaṃ posetā hoti. Yassa pana saṅkhārapariggaho atthi, tassa attabhāve balavamamattaṃ vā sineho vā na hoti, so tathārūpesu dubbhikkhabyādhibhayādīsu sampattesu sacepissa antāni bahi nikkhamanti, sacepi ussussati visussati, khaṇḍākhaṇḍiko vā hoti satadhāpi sahassadhāpi, neva sīlaṃ vināsetvā attabhāvaṃ posetā hoti. Evaṃ saṅkhārapariggaho sīlamanurakkhati. ‘‘Brūhetā suññāgārāna’’nti iminā pana tasseva ubhayassa brūhanā vaḍḍhanā sātaccakiriyā dassitā.
世尊这样说明:因为,如果有人想要成为同梵行者所喜爱、所欢喜、所敬重、所尊崇的人,他不需要再做别的什么,唯一要做的就是具备戒等功德。具备这些功德的人,才会被同梵行者喜爱、欢喜、敬重、尊崇。关于这一点也确实说过:巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā yasmā ‘‘sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo cassaṃ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cā’’ti ime cattāro dhamme ākaṅkhantena natthaññaṃ kiñci kātabbaṃ, aññadatthu sīlādiguṇasamannāgatena bhavitabbaṃ, idiso hi sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo hoti manāpo garu bhāvanīyo. Vuttampi hetaṃ –
具备戒行与正见,安住于法,说真实语的人。
自己做着善行的人,众人都会喜爱他。巴利
‘‘Sīladassanasampannaṃ , dhammaṭṭhaṃ saccavādinaṃ; Attano kamma kubbānaṃ, taṃ jano kurute piya’’nti. (dha. pa. 217);
所以,世尊先说了“比丘们,如果比丘希望‘愿我成为同梵行者所喜爱、悦意、尊重和恭敬的人’,他就应当在戒上圆满修习……乃至……乐于空寂之处”,然后现在又说:因为即使是想获得资具等利益的人,也只应当做这件事,而不是别的什么,所以说“比丘们,如果比丘希望‘愿我得到利养’”等等。但要知道,世尊在这里并不是以利养为动机来讲戒等圆满。因为世尊早已断除乞食之语,不说有所图谋之语,他这样教导弟子,怎么会以利养为动机来讲戒等圆满呢?这是随顺个人的内心倾向而说的。因为如果有人这样想:“如果我们不被四种资具所困扰,就能圆满戒等”,世尊就随顺他们的这种心意而这样说。而且,这本身就是戒的一种利益——也就是所谓的四种资具。正如有智慧的人,把存放在仓库等处的财物拿出来,既不留给子女,自己也不享用,而是布施给持戒的人。这是为了显示戒本身固有的利益而说的。巴利
Tasmā ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo cassaṃ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cāti sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī…pe… suññāgārāna’’nti vatvā idāni yasmā paccayalābhādiṃ patthayantenāpi idameva karaṇīyaṃ, na aññaṃ kiñci, tasmā ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu lābhī assa’’ntiādimāha. Na cettha bhagavā lābhanimittaṃ sīlādiparipūraṇaṃ kathetīti veditabbo. Bhagavā hi ghāsesanaṃ chinnakatho na vācaṃ payuttaṃ bhaṇeti, evaṃ sāvake ovadati, so kathaṃ lābhanimittaṃ sīlādiparipūraṇaṃ kathessati, puggalajjhāsayavasena panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yesañhi evaṃ ajjhāsayo bhaveyya ‘‘sace mayaṃ catūhi paccayehi na kilameyyāma, sīlādiṃ pūretuṃ sakkuṇeyyāmā’’ti, tesaṃ ajjhāsayavasena bhagavā evamāha. Apica rasānisaṃso esa sīlassa, yadidaṃ cattāro paccayā nāma. Tathā hi paṇḍitamanussā koṭṭhādīsu ṭhapitaṃ nīharitvā puttādīnampi adatvā attanāpi aparibhuñjitvā sīlavantānaṃ dentīti sīlassa sarasānisaṃsadassanatthaṃ petaṃ vuttaṃ.
在第三部分中,“我对其”就是指我对他们。“他们的那些所作业”就是指那些天人或人对我的资助供养之业。因为不只是人类,天人们也会向具足戒等功德者提供资具,就像帝释天对大迦叶尊者那样。“大果”和“大功德”这两者含义相同,只是言辞不同。能够结出广大的世间乐果,所以称为大果;能够成为广大的出世间乐果之缘,所以称为大功德。因为对于具足戒等功德者,即使只是布施一勺食物,或者用五肘大小的土地建成叶庵来布施,也能在无数千劫中保护施者免于堕入恶趣;最终更会成为证入不死涅槃界的缘。在这里,“我施予乳粥”等是实例,而整部《饿鬼事》和《天宫事》也都足以作为证明。因此,这是为了开示:想要让施主对自己所作的布施获得大果报的人,自己也应当具备戒等功德。巴利
Tatiyavāre yesāhanti yesaṃ ahaṃ. Tesaṃ te kārāti tesaṃ devānaṃ vā manussānaṃ vā te mayi katā paccayadānakārā. Devāpi hi sīlādiguṇayuttānaṃ paccaye denti, na kevalaṃ manussāyeva, sakko viya āyasmato mahākassapassa. Mahapphalā mahānisaṃsāti ubhayametaṃ atthato ekaṃ, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Mahantaṃ vā lokiyasukhaṃ phalantīti mahapphalā. Mahato lokuttarasukhassa ca paccayā hontīti mahānisaṃsā. Sīlādiguṇayuttassa hi kaṭacchubhikkhāpi pañcaratanamattāya bhūmiyā paṇṇasālāpi katvā dinnā anekāni kappasahassāni duggativinipātato rakkhati, pariyosāne ca amatāya parinibbānadhātuyāpaccayo hoti. ‘‘Khīrodanaṃ ahamadāsi’’ntiādīni (vi. va. 413) cettha vatthūni, sakalameva vā petavatthu vimānavatthu ca sādhakaṃ. Tasmā paccayadāyakehi attani katānaṃ kārānaṃ mahapphalataṃ icchantenāpi sīlādiguṇayutteneva bhavitabbanti dasseti.
在第四部分,“亲属”指岳母岳父方面的亲族。“同血亲”指由同一血统相连的祖父母等。“亡者”指已经投生到他界的人。“已故的”指已经死了的人。“他们对他的”指他们对我的净信心,或者以净信心对我的忆念。比如,有位比丘已故的父亲或母亲心想“我们这位亲属长老持戒、具足善法”,于是生起净信心并忆念那位比丘,那么对那位已故的父母亲属来说,仅仅那份心的净信,或者仅仅那一念忆念,就有大果报、大利益,足以在许多百千劫中挡住恶趣,最终引导到不死。世尊确实这样说过:“诸比丘,那些具足戒、具足定、具足慧、具足解脱、具足解脱知见的比丘,诸比丘,我说仅仅见到那些比丘就有大利益。诸比丘,听闻、忆念、随他出家、亲近、侍奉那些比丘,我说也有大利益。”所以这里要说明的是:即使希望亲属和同血亲对自己生起净信与忆念能有大果报,自己也必须具足戒等功德。巴利
Catutthavāre ñātīti sassusasurapakkhikā. Sālohitāti ekalohitasambaddhā pītipitāmahādayo . Petāti peccabhāvaṃ gatā. Kālaṅkatāti matā. Tesaṃ tanti tesaṃ taṃ mayi pasannacittataṃ vā pasannena cittena anussaraṇaṃ vā. Yassa hi bhikkhuno kālaṅkato pitā vā mātā vā ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātako thero sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo’’ti pasannacitto hutvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ anussarati, tassa so cittappasādopi taṃ anussaraṇamattampi mahapphalaṃ mahānisaṃsameva hoti, anekāni kappasatasahassāni duggatito vāretuṃ ante ca amataṃ pāpetuṃ samatthameva hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘ye te, bhikkhave, bhikkhū sīlasampannā samādhisampannā paññā, vimutti, vimuttiñāṇadassanasampannā, dassanaṃpāhaṃ, bhikkhave, tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahukāraṃ vadāmi. Savanaṃ, anussatiṃ, anupabbajjaṃ, upasaṅkamanaṃ, payirupāsanaṃpāhaṃ, bhikkhave, tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahukāraṃ vadāmī’’ti (itivu. 104). Tasmā ñātisālohitānaṃ attani cittappasādassa anussatiyā ca mahapphalataṃ icchantenāpi sīlādiguṇayutteneva, bhavitabbanti dasseti.
66 在第五部分,“能忍受不乐与乐”是指:我应当成为不乐与乐的克服者、制伏者、碾压者。这里,“不乐”是指对殊胜的善法和僻静住处感到厌烦。“乐”是指对五种欲乐的贪着。“愿不乐不能制胜我”意思是:愿不乐不能克服我,不能压迫我,不能碾压我。“已生起”指已产生、已出现。因为具足戒等功德的人,能克服、碾压不乐与乐,将其粉碎而安住。因此,这是为了显示:即使是希望自己成为这样的人,也必须具足戒等功德。巴利
66. Pañcamavāre aratiratisaho assanti aratiyā ratiyā ca saho abhibhavitā ajjhottharitā bhaveyyaṃ. Ettha ca aratīti adhikusalesu dhammesu pantasenāsanesu ca ukkaṇṭhā. Ratīti pañcakāmaguṇarati. Na ca maṃ arati saheyyāti mañca arati na abhibhaveyya na maddeyya na ajjhotthareyya. Uppannanti jātaṃ nibbattaṃ. Sīlādiguṇayutto hi aratiñca ratiñca sahati ajjhottharati madditvā tiṭṭhati. Tasmā īdisaṃ attānaṃ icchantenāpi sīlādiguṇayutteneva bhavitabbanti dasseti.
在第六组里,“恐惧”既指内心的惊恐,也指所缘本身;“怖畏”则只指所缘。其余内容和第五组所说的一样。因为具足戒等功德的人,确实能承受、压伏恐惧和怖畏,把它碾碎后安住下来,就像住在圣末山寺的大达塔长老那样。巴利
Chaṭṭhavāre bhayaṃ cittutrāsopi ārammaṇampi. Bheravaṃ ārammaṇameva. Sesaṃ pañcamavāre vuttanayameva. Sīlādiguṇayutto hi bhayabheravaṃ sahati ajjhottharati madditvā tiṭṭhati ariyakoṭiyavāsīmahādattatthero viya.
据说,这位长老在路上走着,看见一座让人心生欢喜的树林,心想:“今天就在这里修一修沙门法,然后再走。”于是他离开道路,在一棵树下铺好僧伽梨,盘腿坐下。因为长老持戒的威德力,树神的孩子们没办法维持自己的形态,就大声哭闹起来。树神也摇动那棵树。长老却纹丝不动地坐着。那位树神又放烟,又放火,还是没法让长老动一下。于是她变成一个在家男信众的样子,走过来顶礼,站在一旁。长老问:“你是谁?”她说:“尊者,我是住在这棵树上的树神。”长老问:“刚才那些变化是你弄的吗?”她说:“是的,尊者。”长老又问:“为什么这么做?”她回答说:“尊者,因为您持戒的威德力,我的孩子们没办法维持自己的形态,才哭闹起来。我为了把您赶走,就做了那些事。”长老说:“那你为什么不事先跟我说:‘尊者,请您别住在这里,我不得安稳’呢?现在你什么都不用说了。我要是因为怕非人而离开,就会被人说:‘圣末山寺的大达塔因为怕非人跑了。’我觉得丢脸,所以我就要住在这里。至于你,今天随便去哪里住都行。”像这样,具足戒等功德的人,就是能扛住恐惧和怖畏的人。因此,想要成为这样的人,就应当具足戒等功德——这就是这段要说明的。巴利
Thero kira maggaṃ paṭipanno aññataraṃ pāsādikaṃ araññaṃ disvā ‘‘idhevajja samaṇadhammaṃ katvā gamissāmī’’ti maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisīdi. Rukkhadevatāya dārakā therassa sīlatejena sakabhāvena saṇṭhātuṃ asakkontā vissaramakaṃsu. Devatāpi rukkhaṃ cālesi. Thero acalova nisīdi. Sā devatā dhūmāyi, pajjali, neva sakkhi theraṃ cāletuṃ, tato upāsakavaṇṇenāgantvā vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. ‘‘Ko eso’’ti vuttā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, etasmiṃ rukkhe adhivatthā devatā’’ti avoca. Tvaṃ ete vikāre akāsīti. Āma bhanteti. Kasmāti ca vuttā āha – ‘‘tumhākaṃ, bhante , sīlatejena dārakā sakabhāvena saṇṭhātuṃ asakkontā vissaramakaṃsu, sāhaṃ tumhe palāpetuṃ evamakāsi’’nti. Thero āha – ‘‘atha kasmā idha, bhante, mā vasatha, mayhaṃ aphāsūti paṭikacceva nāvacāsi. Idāni pana mā kiñci avaca, ariyakoṭiyamahādatto amanussabhayena gatoti vacanato lajjāmi, tenāhaṃ idheva vasissaṃ, tvaṃ pana ajjekadivasaṃ yattha katthaci vasāhī’’ti. Evaṃ sīlādiguṇayutto bhayabheravasaho hoti. Tasmā īdisamattānaṃ icchantenāpi sīlādiguṇayutteneva bhavitabbanti dasseti.
在第七组(的注释)中,关于“增上心所成”:所谓“增上心”,指的是殊胜、清净的心,也就是增上心。从增上心生起的,或者依止增上心的,就称为“增上心所成”。“现法乐住”:就是在现法中安乐地安住。“现法”指的是当下这个可见的自身,意思是说在自身中成为安乐的住处。这是对色界禅那的称呼。因为那些禅修者进入并安住于这些禅那时,就在这一生中体验到没有杂染的出离之乐,所以称为“现法乐住”。“随意而得”:是指随自己的意愿而获得,也就是按照自己的希求而获得,能在想要入定的那一刻就入定,这里说的是他具备这样的能力。“无难而得”:是指能轻松地镇伏敌对法而入定,这里说的是他具备这样的能力。“无滞而得”:是指获得无滞碍的、宽广的成就,能够按照预定的时间恰好出定,这里说的是他具备这样的能力。因为有一种人虽然能获得(禅定),却不能在想入定的那一刻随意入定;有一种人能够那样入定,却要费力才能镇伏障碍;还有一种人能够那样入定,也能不费力地镇伏障碍,却不能像按量米的机器一样,在预定的时间恰好出定。然而,无论谁想要成就这三种圆满,他都应当在戒上成为圆满的行者。巴利
Sattamavāre ābhicetasikānanti abhicetoti abhikkantaṃ visuddhacittaṃ vuccati, adhicittaṃ vā, abhicetasi jātāni ābhicetasikāni, abhiceto sannissitānīti vā ābhicetasikāni. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānanti diṭṭhadhamme sukhavihārānaṃ. Diṭṭhadhammoti paccakkho attabhāvo vuccati, tattha sukhavihārabhūtānanti attho, rūpāvacarajjhānānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tāni hi appetvā nisinnā jhāyino imasmiṃyeva attabhāve asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ nekkhammasukhaṃ vindanti, tasmā ‘‘diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānī’’ti vuccanti. Nikāmalābhīti nikāmena lābhī attano icchāvasena lābhī, icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjituṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Akicchalābhīti sukheneva paccanīkadhamme vikkhambhetvā samāpajjituṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Akasiralābhīti akasirānaṃ vipulānaṃ lābhī, yathāparicchedeyeva vuṭṭhātuṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ekacco hi lābhīyeva hoti, na pana sakkoti icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjituṃ. Ekacco sakkoti tathā samāpajjituṃ, pāribandhike pana kicchena vikkhambheti. Ekacco tathā samāpajjati, pāribandhike ca akiccheneva vikkhambheti, na sakkoti nāḷikāyantaṃ viya yathāparicchedeyeva ca vuṭṭhātuṃ. Yo pana imaṃ tividhampi sampadaṃ icchati, sopi sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti.
像这样,在说到作为神通基础的禅那时,虽然已经进入了神通的部分,但世尊并没有就此打住,因为戒的功德利益不只是作为神通基础的禅那和神通本身,还包括四种无色界禅那以及三种较低的圣道。所以,为了把这一切全都涵盖进来并展示出来,世尊接着说了“如果希望……中略……那些寂静的……”等话。巴利
Evaṃ abhiññāpādake jhāne vutte kiñcāpi abhiññānaṃ vāro āgato, atha kho naṃ bhagavā aggahetvāva yasmā na kevalaṃ abhiññāpādakajjhānāni ca abhiññāyoyeva ca sīlānaṃ ānisaṃso, apica kho cattāri āruppajhānānipi tayo ca heṭṭhimā ariyamaggā, tasmā taṃ sabbaṃ pariyādiyitvā dassetuṃ ākaṅkheyya ce…pe… ye te santāti evamādimāha.
在这里,“寂止”是指禅支的寂止和所缘的寂止。“解脱”是指从敌对法中解脱出来,并且心倾向于所缘。“超越色”是指超越了色界禅那。应当这样连接文句:“那些超越色的、寂止的解脱。”否则,如果问“超越色之后做什么”,就说不清楚了。“无色”是指从所缘和果报两方面都远离了色法。“以身触证”是指以名身触证、达到,也就是证得的意思。其余部分和前面所说的一样。这段话的意思是:如果有比丘想要触证这些解脱并安住其中,他也应当在戒上圆满修习。巴利
Tattha santāti aṅgasantatāya ceva ārammaṇasantatāya ca. Vimokkhāti paccanīkadhammehi vimuttattā ārammaṇe ca adhimuttattā. Atikkamma rūpeti rūpāvacarajjhāne atikkamitvā, ye te vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe santāti padasambandho, itarathā hi atikkamma rūpe kiṃ karotīti na paññāyeyyuṃ. Āruppāti ārammaṇato ca vipākato ca rūpavirahitā. Kāyena phusitvāti nāmakāyena phusitvā pāpuṇitvā, adhigantvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttānameva. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘yopi bhikkhu ime vimokkhe phusitvā viharitukāmo, sopi sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’ti.
67 第九番。“三结”是指被称为有身见、疑、戒禁取的三种束缚。它们把蕴、趣、有等和蕴、趣、有等连结起来,或者把业和果连结起来,所以称为“结”,意思是束缚。“遍尽”就是通过彻底灭尽。“入流者”就是已进入流。“流”是道的别名。“入流者”就是指具足这个道的人,也就是具足此道的补特伽罗。就像经里说的:“舍利弗,人们常说流、流。舍利弗,什么是流呢?”“尊者,这圣八支道就是流,也就是:正见……中略……正定。”“舍利弗,人们常说入流者、入流者。舍利弗,什么是入流者呢?”“尊者,凡具足这八支道者,此人称为入流者,即这位名为某某、姓某某的具寿。”这里是以道给果命名,因此应知安住于果位者为“入流者”。“不堕法”者,堕即堕落,他没有堕法,名为不堕法,即是说他没有堕入恶趣的自性。为什么?因为那些趣向恶趣的法已被断除。“决定趣向正觉”者,正觉是究竟趣向、去处,他以此为趣向,名为决定趣向正觉,意思是必定到达上三道。为什么?因为已获得初道。“唯于戒”者,即使想成为这样的人,也唯于戒而圆满。巴利
67. Navamavāre tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānanti sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ bandhanānaṃ. Tāni hi saṃyojenti khandhagatibhavādīhi khandhagatibhavādayo, kammaṃ vā phalena, tasmā saṃyojanānīti vuccanti, bandhanānīti attho. Parikkhayāti parikkhayena. Sotāpannoti sotaṃ āpanno. Sototi ca maggassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sotāpannoti taṃsamaṅgipuggalassa. Yathāha ‘‘soto sototi hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati. Katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sototi? Ayameva hi, bhante, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Seyyathidaṃ, sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhīti. Sotāpanno sotāpannoti hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati. Katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sotāpannoti? Yo hi, bhante, iminā aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena samannāgato, ayaṃ vuccati sotāpanno, yoyaṃ āyasmā evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto’’ti. Idha pana maggena phalassa nāmaṃ dinnaṃ, tasmā phalaṭṭho ‘‘sotāpanno’’ti veditabbo. Avinipātadhammoti vinipātetīti vinipāto, nāssa vinipāto dhammoti avinipātadhammo, na attānaṃ apāye vinipātasabhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Ye dhammā apāyagamaniyā, tesaṃ pahīnattā. Sambodhi paraṃ ayanaṃ gati assāti sambodhiparāyaṇo, uparimaggattayaṃ avassaṃ sampāpakoti attho. Kasmā? Paṭiladdhapaṭhamamaggattā. Sīlesvevāti īdiso hotukāmopi sīlesvevassa paripūraṇārīti.
在第十番里,为了赞叹一来道,虽然三结已经被初道彻底断尽,仍然把它们提出来说。“贪嗔痴变得薄弱”,意思是这些烦恼处于薄弱的状态,或者说由于使它们变得薄弱的缘故。这里应当从两方面来理解薄弱:一是偶尔才生起,二是现行时力量微弱。因为一来者的烦恼不像随转凡夫那样频繁生起,只是偶尔、极少地生起,呈现稀疏的样子,就像在播种稀疏的田地里长出的嫩芽。即使生起,也不像随转凡夫那样以压制、弥漫、覆盖、制造黑暗的方式生起,而是非常微弱、稀薄地生起,犹如薄云层,又如苍蝇的翅膀。巴利
Dasamavāre paṭhamamaggena parikkhīṇānipi tīṇi saṃyojanāni sakadāgāmimaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ vuttāni. Rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttāti etesaṃ tanubhāvena, tanuttakaraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha dvīhi kāraṇehi tanuttaṃ veditabbaṃ adhiccuppattiyā ca pariyuṭṭhānamandatāya ca. Sakadāgāmissa hi vaṭṭānusārimahājanasseva kilesā abhiṇhaṃ na uppajjanti, kadāci karahaci uppajjanti viraḷākārā hutvā, viraḷavāpite khette aṅkurā viya. Uppajjamānāpi ca vaṭṭānusārimahājanasseva maddantā pharantā chādentā andhakāraṃ karontā na uppajjanti, mandamandā uppajjanti tanukākārā hutvā, abbhapaṭalamiva makkhikāpattamiva ca.
对此,有些长老说:“一来者的烦恼即使很久才生起,但生起时却很浓厚,因为确实能见到他有子女。”不过,这种说法并不成立。因为仅仅碰触一下四肢身体,也可能会有子女。应当知道,一来者的烦恼之所以薄弱,只有两个原因:不频繁生起,以及现行烦恼的力量微弱。巴利
Tattha keci therā bhaṇanti ‘‘sakadāgāmissa kilesā kiñcāpi cirena uppajjanti, bahalāva uppajjanti, tathā hissa puttā ca dhītaro ca dissantī’’ti, etaṃ pana appamāṇaṃ. Puttadhītaro hi aṅgapaccaṅgaparāmasanamattenapi hontīti. Dvīhiyeva kāraṇehissa kilesānaṃ tanuttaṃ veditabbaṃ adhiccuppattiyā ca pariyuṭṭhānamandatāya cāti.
“一来者”,就是只来一次的人。“只来一次这个世间”,意思是仅仅一次,以结生的方式再来到这个人界。因为,如果有人在这里修成一来道,就在这里般涅槃,这种情况不算在内;如果有人在这里修道后投生天界,在那里般涅槃;如果有人在天界修道,就在那里般涅槃;如果有人在天界修道后,再投生到人界,在那里般涅槃——这些也都不算在内。只有那种在这里修道后投生天界,在天界住满寿命,然后再投生到人界才般涅槃的人,才应当理解为“只来一次这个世间”。“作苦边”,即作轮转之苦的终结。即使想成为如是之人,也是于戒上的圆满成就者。巴利
Sakadāgāmīti sakiṃ āgamanadhammo. Sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvāti ekavāraṃyeva imaṃ manussalokaṃ paṭisandhivasena āgantvā. Yopi hi idha sakadāgāmimaggaṃ bhāvetvā idheva parinibbāti, sopi idha na gahito. Yopi idha maggaṃ bhāvetvā devesu upapajjitvā tattheva parinibbāti. Yopi devaloke maggaṃ bhāvetvā tattheva parinibbāti. Yopi devaloke maggaṃ bhāvetvā idheva manussaloke nibbattitvā parinibbāti. Yo pana idha maggaṃ bhāvetvā devaloke nibbatto, tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā puna idheva upapajjitvā parinibbāti, ayamidha gahitoti veditabbo. Dukkhassantaṃ kareyyanti vaṭṭadukkhassa paricchedaṃ kareyyaṃ. Sīlesvevāti īdiso hotukāmopi sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti.
第十一论题中,“五种”是数量上的限定。“下分”:“下”指下方、低处,“下分”就是属于下部的意思,指的是作为投生欲界之因缘的。 “结”就是束缚。应当知道,这些结就是前面所说的那些结,再加上欲贪结和瞋恚结。因为如果一个人没有断除这些结,即使他投生到了有顶天,寿命耗尽时仍然会投生到欲界。应当知道,这种人就像吞了钩的鱼,又像脚上绑了长绳的鸟。这里重新提到前面所说的内容,应当理解为只是为了赞叹。“化生者”:这句话是为了排除其余的生起方式。“于彼处般涅槃者”:就是在那个梵天界中般涅槃。“不退转法”:其本性不再从那个梵天界以结生的方式退转回来。“就在这些戒上”:即使是想成为这样的人,也应当在这些戒上圆满修习。巴利
Ekādasamavāre pañcannanti gaṇanaparicchedo. Orambhāgiyānanti oraṃ vuccati heṭṭhā, heṭṭhābhāgiyānanti attho, kāmāvacaraloke uppattipaccayānanti adhippāyo. Saṃyojanānanti bandhanānaṃ, tāni kāmarāgabyāpādasaṃyojanehi saddhiṃ pubbe vuttasaṃyojanāneva veditabbāni. Yassa hi etāni appahīnāni, so kiñcāpi bhavagge uppanno hoti, atha kho āyuparikkhayā kāmāvacare nibbattatiyeva, gilitabalisamacchūpamo svāyaṃ puggalo dīghasuttakena pāde baddhavihaṅgūpamo cāti veditabbo. Pubbe vuttānampi cettha vacanaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthamevāti veditabbaṃ. Opapātikoti sesayonipaṭikkhepavacanametaṃ. Tatthaparinibbāyīti tattheva brahmaloke parinibbāyī. Anāvattidhammo tasmā lokāti tato brahmalokā paṭisandhivasena puna anāvattisabhāvo. Sīlesvevāti īdiso hotukāmopi sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti.
68 68. 在这样宣说了不来道之后,虽然第四道的内容已经出现,但世尊并没有接着直接讲它。为什么呢?因为戒的功德利益并不只是漏尽通这一项,世间五通也是戒带来的好处。所以,为了开示这些世间通;又因为一旦讲了漏尽,整个开示就算结束了,如果真是这样,这些功德就还没说到,这次说法就会变成所谓的“光秃秃的通智之说”;也是为了把各种通完整地展示出来;还因为安住于不来道的人,已经彻底断除了定障——欲贪和瞋恚,所以能轻松自在地成就神变。不来者本来就是戒与定都修得圆满的人。因此,世尊才在合适的地方,为了开示世间通,说了“若比丘期望……种种的……”等话。这就是这里的上下文衔接。巴利
68. Evaṃ anāgāmimagge vutte kiñcāpi catutthamaggassa vāro āgato, atha kho naṃ bhagavā aggahetvāva yasmā na kevalā āsavakkhayābhiññā eva sīlānaṃ ānisaṃso, apica kho lokiyapañcābhiññāyopi, tasmā tāpi dassetuṃ, yasmā ca āsavakkhaye kathite desanā niṭṭhitā hoti, evañca sati imesaṃ guṇānaṃ akathitattā ayaṃ kathā muṇḍābhiññākathā nāma bhaveyya, tasmā ca abhiññāpāripūriṃ katvā dassetumpi, yasmā ca anāgāmimagge ṭhitassa sukhena iddhivikuppanā ijjhati, samādhiparibandhānaṃ kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ samūhatattā, anāgāmī hi sīlesu ca samādhimhi ca paripūrakārī, tasmā yuttaṭṭhāneyeva lokiyābhiññāyo dassetumpi ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce…pe… anekavihita’’nti evamādimāhāti ayamanusandhi.
其中,对于以“种种如意通”等方式出现的五种世间神通,它们的经文解释以及相关的修习方法,都已经在《清净道论》中说明了。巴利
Tattha ‘‘anekavihitaṃ iddhividha’’ntiādinā nayena āgatānaṃ pañcannampi lokiyābhiññānaṃ pāḷivaṇṇanā saddhiṃ bhāvanānayena visuddhimagge vuttā.
69 第六通“诸漏灭尽”:就是通过阿罗汉道灭尽一切烦恼。“无漏”:就是远离诸漏。“心解脱、慧解脱”:在这里,用“心”这个词指的是与阿罗汉果相应的定,用“慧”这个词指的是与那相应的慧。其中应当知道:定因为从贪欲中解脱,所以叫心解脱;慧因为从无明中解脱,所以叫慧解脱。世尊也这样说过:“比丘们,凡是他所有的定,那就是他的定根;凡是他所有的慧,那就是他的慧根。比丘们,就是这样,因为离贪而有心解脱,因为离无明而有慧解脱。”另外,在这里还应当知道:止的成果是心解脱,观的成果是慧解脱。巴利
69. Chaṭṭhābhiññāya āsavānaṃ khayāti arahattamaggena sabbakilesānaṃ khayā. Anāsavanti āsavavirahitaṃ. Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti ettha cetovacanena arahattaphalasampayuttova samādhi, paññāvacanena taṃsampayuttā paññāva vuttā. Tattha ca samādhi rāgato vimuttattā cetovimutti, paññā avijjāya vimuttattā paññāvimuttīti veditabbā. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yo hissa, bhikkhave, samādhi, tadassa samādhindriyaṃ. Yā hissa, bhikkhave, paññā, tadassa paññindriyaṃ. Iti kho, bhikkhave , rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttī’’ti, apicettha samathaphalaṃ cetovimutti, vipassanāphalaṃ paññāvimuttīti veditabbā.
就在今生这个身体里。自己以神通亲证,意思是完全用自己的智慧亲自证见,不靠别人而了知。成就而住,就是达到、完成之后而安住。唯独在戒上,意思是即使想抖落一切烦恼、证得心解脱和慧解脱的人,也唯独要在戒上做到圆满。巴利
Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti attanoyeva paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā, aparapaccayena ñatvāti attho. Upasampajja vihareyyanti pāpuṇitvā sampādetvā vihareyyaṃ. Sīlesvevāti evaṃ sabbāsave niddhunitvā cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ adhigantukāmopi sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti.
世尊就这样从戒的功德利益讲起,一直讲到阿拉汉果,现在要把所有这些戒的功德利益总括起来展示,于是说出总结语:“诸比丘,具足戒……乃至……正是针对这一点而说的。”这段话的简要含义是:“诸比丘,你们要具足戒而安住……乃至……要受持、修学诸学处”——凡是我先前这样说的,全部都是指:具足戒的比丘,会被同梵行者喜爱、觉得可意,受到尊重、值得恭敬,是资具的获得者,能让供养资具的人得到大果报,能因忆念过去亲属的意愿而带来殊胜果报,能忍受不满与满足,能忍受恐惧与怖畏,能获得色界禅那和无色界禅那,还能亲自以神通证得下面这三种沙门果、五种世间神通以及漏尽智——他成为这些功德的亲证者,是依神通现证。正是针对这一点、关于这一点而说的。世尊说了这些话,那些比丘内心欢喜,对世尊所说的话深感满意。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā sīlānisaṃsakathaṃ yāva arahattā kathetvā idāni sabbampi taṃ sīlānisaṃsaṃ sampiṇḍetvā dassento nigamanaṃ āha ‘‘sampannasīlā, bhikkhave…pe… idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepattho, ‘‘sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharatha…pe… samādāya sikkhatha sikkhāpadesū’’ti iti yaṃ taṃ mayā pubbe evaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ sabbampi sampannasīlo bhikkhu sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo hoti manāpo, garu bhāvanīyo paccayānaṃ lābhī, paccayadāyakānaṃ mahapphalakaro, pubbañātīnaṃ anussaraṇacetanāya phalamahattakaro, aratiratisaho, bhayabheravasaho, rūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ arūpāvacarajjhānānañca lābhī, heṭṭhimāni tīṇi sāmaññaphalāni pañca lokiyābhiññā āsavakkhayañāṇanti ca ime ca guṇe sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikattā hoti, etaṃ paṭicca idaṃ sandhāya vuttanti. Idamavoca bhagavā, attamanā te bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
7. 《布经》注释巴利
7. Vatthasuttavaṇṇanā
70 “如是我闻”这句是《布经》的开头。其中,“诸比丘,犹如布”这一段,只是一个譬喻的说法。世尊用譬喻时,有时先给出譬喻,再说明义理;有时先说明义理,再给出譬喻;有时用譬喻把义理包起来说;有时用义理把譬喻包起来说。巴利
70.Evaṃme sutanti vatthasuttaṃ. Tattha seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, vatthanti upamāvacanamevetaṃ. Upamaṃ karonto ca bhagavā katthaci paṭhamaṃyeva upamaṃ dassetvā pacchā atthaṃ dasseti, katthaci paṭhamamatthaṃ dassetvā pacchā upamaṃ, katthaci upamāya atthaṃ parivāretvā dasseti, katthaci atthena upamaṃ.
世尊之所以这样,是因为他开示整部《天行使者经》时,先举出譬喻:“诸比丘,就好像有两间带门的屋子,一个眼力好的人站在中间,就能看见。”(《中部》3.261)然后才说明其中的义理。而开示整部《神通种类经》时,他则先用“穿墙、穿壁、穿山,毫无阻碍地行走,就像在虚空中一样”(《长部》1.238;《无碍解道》1.102)这种方式,把整个神通种类先说明清楚,然后才举出譬喻。开示整部《小心材譬喻经》时,他用“譬如有个婆罗门男子,追求心材、寻找心材”(《中部》1.318)这种方式,用譬喻把整部经的义理包裹起来显示。开示《蛇譬喻经》《大心材譬喻经》等经时,他用“诸比丘,在此有些善男子学习法——经……中略……诸比丘,譬如有人需要蛇”(《中部》1.238)这种方式,用义理把譬喻包裹起来显示。巴利
Tathā hesa – ‘‘seyyathāpissu, bhikkhave, dve agārā sadvārā, tattha cakkhumā puriso majjhe ṭhito passeyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.261) sakalampi devadūtasuttaṃ upamaṃ paṭhamaṃ dassetvā pacchā atthaṃ dassento āha. ‘‘Tirokuṭṭaṃ tiropākāraṃ tiropabbataṃ asajjamāno gacchati, seyyathāpi ākāse’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.238; paṭi. ma. 1.102) pana nayena sakalampi iddhividhamatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ dassetvā pacchā upamaṃ dassento āha. ‘‘Seyyathāpi brāhmaṇapuriso sāratthiko sāragavesī’’tiādināva (ma. ni. 1.318) nayena sakalampi cūḷasāropamasuttaṃ upamāya atthaṃ parivāretvā dassento āha. ‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, ekacce kulaputtā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti suttaṃ…pe… seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso alagaddatthiko’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.238) nayena sakalampi alagaddasuttaṃ mahāsāropamasuttanti evamādīni suttāni atthena upamaṃ parivāretvā dassento āha.
世尊在这里先给出譬喻,再说明其中的义理。那么,世尊为什么要这样开示呢?这是为了随顺听法者的根性,或者是为了展现说法方式的善巧。因为有些人在先看到譬喻之后,再听到所讲的义理就能轻松通达,世尊就为他们先给出譬喻。这个道理在所有地方都适用。而世尊因为彻底通达法界,所以达到了说法方式的善巧。因此,这位具足说法善巧、于法自在的法王,想怎么说法就怎么说法。应当知道,世尊就是这样随顺听法者的根性,或者凭借说法方式的善巧,而如此开示的。巴利
Svāyaṃ idha paṭhamaṃ upamaṃ dassetvā pacchā atthaṃ dasseti. Kasmā panevaṃ bhagavā dassetīti? Puggalajjhāsayena vā desanāvilāsena vā. Ye hi puggalā paṭhamaṃ upamaṃ dassetvā vuccamānamatthaṃ sukhena paṭivijjhanti, tesaṃ paṭhamaṃ upamaṃ dasseti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Yassā ca dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā desanāvilāsaṃ patto hoti, tassā suppaṭividdhā. Tasmā esa desanāvilāsampatto dhammissaro dhammarājā, so yathā yathā icchati, tathā tathā dhammaṃ desetīti evaṃ iminā puggalajjhāsayena vā desanāvilāsena vā evaṃ dassetīti veditabbo.
这里,“布”是指本身清净的布。“被杂染、被垢秽所染”:是指被外来的尘土等杂染所污染,又因为汗垢等污秽附着在上面,所以叫被垢秽所染。“染料种类”在这里就是指染料本身。“移近”是指把布凑过去。如果说“如果要染成青色”,意思就是为了染成青色,或者为了青色的布料而移近。其他地方也是这样。因为染工为了染成青色而移近时,是凑近铜青、叶青之类的青色染料;为了染成黄色而移近时,是凑近像迦尼迦罗花那样的黄色染料;为了染成红色而移近时,是凑近像般度耆婆花那样的红色染料;为了染成茜色而移近时,是凑近像夹竹桃花那样淡红色的染料。因此说“如果要染成青色……中略……如果要染成茜色”。巴利
Tattha vatthanti pakatiparisuddhaṃ vatthaṃ. Saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ malaggahitanti āgantukena paṃsurajādinā saṃkilesena saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ, sedajallikādinā malena gahitattā malaggahitaṃ. Raṅgajāteti ettha raṅgameva raṅgajātaṃ. Upasaṃhareyyāti upanāmeyya. Yadi nīlakāyāti nīlakāya vā, nīlakatthāya vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ sabbattha. Rajako hi nīlakatthāya upasaṃharanto kaṃsanīlapalāsanīlādike nīlaraṅge upasaṃharati. Pītakatthāya upasaṃharanto kaṇikārapupphasadise pītakaraṅge. Lohitakatthāya upasaṃharanto bandhujīvakapupphasadise lohitakaraṅge. Mañjiṭṭhakatthāya upasaṃharanto kaṇavīrapupphasadise mandarattaraṅge. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yadi nīlakāya…pe… yadi mañjiṭṭhakāyā’’ti.
它只会是染得难看的颜色,就是说,它只会被染成极其难看的颜色。它只会是不清净的颜色,就是说,它的青色不会纯净,其余的颜色也不会纯净。因为这样的布,即使放进青色染缸里,也不会变成纯青色;放进其他染缸里,也不会变成纯黄色等颜色,只会呈现像枯萎的青色、野生荆豆花、翅子树花、班度耆婆花、夹竹桃花那样的颜色。那是什么原因呢?是说这块布因为什么原因、什么缘由而变成这样,或者说,在那块布上,染料因为什么原因而染成这般难看、这般不清净呢?正是因为布本身有杂染的状态,才是这里的原因,跟其他任何东西都没有关系,所以世尊说:比丘们,是因为布不清净。巴利
Durattavaṇṇamevassāti duṭṭhu rañjitavaṇṇameva assa. Aparisuddhavaṇṇamevassāti nīlavaṇṇopissa parisuddho na bhaveyya, sesavaṇṇopi. Tādisañhi vatthaṃ nīlakumbhiyā pakkhittampi sunīlaṃ na hoti, sesakumbhīsu pakkhittampi pītakādivaṇṇaṃ na hoti, milātanīla kuraṇḍa-kaṇikāra-bandhujīvaka-kaṇavīrapupphavaṇṇameva hoti. Taṃ kissa hetūti taṃ vatthaṃ kissa hetu kiṃ kāraṇā īdisaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ vā vatthe raṅgajātaṃ kissa hetu īdisaṃ durattavaṇṇaṃ aparisuddhavaṇṇaṃ hotīti? Yasmā panassa vatthassa saṃkiliṭṭhabhāvoyevettha kāraṇaṃ, na aññaṃ kiñci, tasmā ‘‘aparisuddhattā, bhikkhave, vatthassā’’ti āha.
“同样地”这句话,是用来点明譬喻的对应关系。“在心有杂染时”,意思是心被杂染的时候。那么,世尊为什么用染污的布来打比方呢?是为了显示精进努力能带来大果报。就像被外来尘垢染污的布,因为本性洁白,再洗一次就能恢复洁白;不像天生就黑的羊毛,怎么努力也没用。同样,心被外来的烦恼染污,但就本性而言,它在一切结生心和有分心的刹那中都是洁白的。正如经中所说:“比丘们,此心极光净,只是被外来的随烦恼所染污。”在净化它的时候,能够让它变得更加光净,在这里付出的努力绝不会白费。因此应当知道,世尊用染污的布来打比方,是为了显示精进努力能带来大果报。巴利
Evameva khoti upamāsampaṭipādanaṃ. Citte saṃkiliṭṭheti cittamhi saṃkiliṭṭhamhi. Kasmā pana bhagavā saṃkiliṭṭhavatthena opammaṃ akāsīti ce, vāyāmamahapphaladassanatthaṃ. Yathā hi āgantukehi malehi saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ vatthaṃ pakatiyā paṇḍarattā puna dhovīyamānaṃ paṇḍaraṃ hoti, na tattha jātikāḷake viya eḷakalome vāyāmo nipphalo hoti, evaṃ cittampi āgantukehi kilesehi saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ. Pakatiyā pana taṃ sakalepi paṭisandhibhavaṅgavāre paṇḍarameva. Yathāha – ‘‘pabhassaramidaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, tañca kho āgantukehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭha’’nti (a. ni. 1.51). Taṃ visodhīyamānaṃ sakkā pabhassarataraṃ kātuṃ, na tattha vāyāmo nipphaloti evaṃ vāyāmamahapphaladassanatthaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhavatthena opammaṃ akāsīti veditabbo.
“必将堕入恶趣”的意思是:在这样的心中,恶趣是可以预料的;这个人必定只会堕入恶趣,绝不会去别处。不要这样认为恶趣是值得欲求的,即它必定会发生。这里所说的恶趣,分为两种:行为上的恶趣和投生处的恶趣。行为上的恶趣又分为两种:在家者的行为恶趣和出家者的行为恶趣。巴利
Duggati pāṭikaṅkhāti īdise citte duggati pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, duggatiṃ eva esa pāpuṇissati , nāññanti evaṃ duggati icchitabbā, avassaṃ bhāvīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sā cāyaṃ duggati nāma paṭipattiduggati, gatiduggatīti duvidhā hoti. Paṭipattiduggatipi agāriyapaṭipattiduggati, anagāriyapaṭipattiduggatīti duvidhā hoti.
在家人如果内心被染污,就会杀生,也会偷盗,甚至把十种不善业道全都做尽,这就是他在家人行为的悲惨境地。他停留在这条路上,身体坏灭之后,就会堕入地狱,也会堕入畜生道,也会堕入饿鬼界,这就是他投生处的悲惨境地。巴利
Agāriyo hi saṃkiliṭṭhacitto pāṇampi hanati, adinnampi ādiyati, sakalepi dasa akusalakammapathe pūreti, ayamassa agāriyapaṭipattiduggati. So tattha ṭhito kāyassa bhedā nirayampi gacchati, tiracchānayonimpi, pettivisayampi gacchati, ayamassa gatiduggati.
即使是在这个教法里出家的出家修行人,如果内心染污,也会替人传话送信,做医生治病,从事分裂僧团、破坏佛塔的事,靠布施竹器等手段来谋生,甚至把一切不合戒律、不应当去的行为都做尽——这就是他作为出家修行人的行为上的悲惨下场。他停在这种状态里,身体坏灭之后,会堕入地狱,也会堕入畜生道,也会堕入饿鬼界,成为所谓的沙门夜叉、沙门饿鬼,身上的僧伽梨衣等燃烧起来,全身着火,发出八种哀嚎声四处游荡——这就是他投生之处的悲惨下场。巴利
Anagāriyopi imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajito saṃkiliṭṭhacitto dūteyyapahiṇagamanaṃ gacchati, vejjakammaṃ karoti, saṅghabhedāya cetiyabhedāya parakkamati, veḷudānādīhi jīvikaṃ kappeti, sakalampi anācāraṃ agocarañca paripūreti, ayamassa anagāriyapaṭipattiduggati.So tattha ṭhito kāyassa bhedā nirayampi gacchati, tiracchānayonimpi, pettivisayampi gacchati samaṇayakkho nāma hoti samaṇapeto, ādittehi saṅghāṭiādīhi sampajjalitakāyo aṭṭassaraṃ karonto vicarati, ayamassa gatiduggati.
“譬如”这个词,是为了显示善净的一面才开始说的。它的含义,应当通过前面黑暗面所说的相反内容来理解。在这里,善趣也有两种:行道善趣和生处善趣。行道善趣又分两种:在家者的行道善趣和出家者的行道善趣。在家者如果内心清净,就能远离杀生,也远离不与取,甚至能圆满十善业道,这就是他的在家者行道善趣。他安住在这上面,身体坏灭之后,就能投生到人间的大富贵身或天界的大福报身,这就是他的生处善趣。巴利
Seyyathāpīti sukkapakkhaṃ dassetumāraddho, tassattho kaṇhapakkhe vuttapaccanīkeneva veditabbo. Etthāpi ca sugati nāma paṭipattisugati gatisugatīti duvidhā hoti. Paṭipattisugatipi agāriyapaṭipattisugati anagāriyapaṭipattisugatīti duvidhā hoti. Agāriyo hi parisuddhacitto pāṇātipātāpi viramati, adinnādānāpi, sakalepi dasa kusalakammapathe paripūreti, ayamassa agāriyapaṭipattisugati. So tattha ṭhito kāyassa bhedā manussamahantatampi devamahantatampi upapajjati, ayamassa gatisugati.
一位出家者在这个教法里出家之后,以清净的心净化四种遍净戒,受持十三种头陀支,在三十八种所缘里选取适合自己的业处,住在偏僻的坐卧处,作遍处预备业,生起诸禅那等至,修习入流道……中间省略……修习不还道,这就是他出家者的行道善趣。他安住在那之后,身体坏灭时,或者投生到人间的三种大族姓家,或者投生到六种欲界天,或者投生到十种梵天世界,或者投生到五种净居天,或者投生到四种无色处,这就是他的生处善趣。巴利
Anagāriyopi imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvā parisuddhacitto catupārisuddhisīlaṃ sodheti, terasa dhutaṅgāni samādiyati, aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu attano anukūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā pantasenāsane paṭisevamāno kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā jhānasamāpattiyo nibbatteti, sotāpattimaggaṃ bhāveti…pe… anāgāmimaggaṃ bhāveti, ayamassa anagāriyapaṭipattisugati. So tattha ṭhito kāyassa bhedā manussaloke vā tīsu mahākulesu, chasu vā kāmāvacaradevesu, dasasu vā brahmabhavanesu , pañcasu vā suddhāvāsesu, catūsu vā āruppesu upapajjati, ayamassa gatisugatīti.
71 71. 说完“心被染污时,就该预期恶趣;心不被染污时,就该预期善趣”之后,现在为了指出心被哪些随烦恼所染污,而说:“比丘们,什么是心的随烦恼?贪欲与邪贪……”等等。巴利
71. Evaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhe citte duggati pāṭikaṅkhā, asaṃkiliṭṭhe ca sugatīti vatvā idāni yehi upakkilesehi cittaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ hoti, te dassento katame ca, bhikkhave, cittassa upakkilesā? Abhijjhā visamalobhotiādimāha.
在这里,对属于自己的财物生起的欲贪是“贪欲”,对属于他人的财物生起的是“邪贪”。或者也可以说:不论是对自己的财物还是对他人的财物,在合宜、应得的情况下生起的欲贪是“贪欲”,在不合宜、不应得的情况下生起的是“邪贪”。不过大长老说:“你们为什么要作这种区分呢?不管合宜还是不合宜,因为《分别论》中说‘贪是不正,嗔是不正,痴是不正’,所以没有任何一种贪可以叫作‘不是不正’的。因此,贪本身就是以‘贪求’的意义而称为‘贪欲’,以‘不正’的意义而称为‘邪’,这两者是同一个意思,只是说法不同罢了。”而这种贪欲和邪贪一旦生起,就会染污心,使心不能清净明亮。因此被称为“心的随烦恼”。巴利
Tattha sakabhaṇḍe chandarāgo abhijjhā, parabhaṇḍe visamalobho. Atha vā sakabhaṇḍe vā parabhaṇḍe vā hotu, yuttapattaṭṭhāne chandarāgo abhijjhā, ayuttāpattaṭṭhāne visamalobho. Thero panāha ‘‘kissa vinibbhogaṃ karotha, yutte vā ayutte vā hotu, ‘rāgo visamaṃ doso visamaṃ moho visama’nti (vibha. 924) vacanato na koci lobho avisamo nāma, tasmā lobhoyeva abhijjhāyanaṭṭhena abhijjhā, visamaṭṭhena visamaṃ, ekatthametaṃ byañjanameva nāna’’nti. So panesa abhijjhāvisamalobho uppajjitvā cittaṃ dūseti, obhāsituṃ na deti. Tasmā ‘‘cittassa upakkileso’’ti vuccati.
就像这个一样,由九种嗔怒事生起的,是嗔恚;由十种嗔怒事生起的,是忿怒。一再缠缚内心,是怨恨。破坏在家者或出家者善行的,是抹恩。比如一个在家者,因为某个有悲悯心的人,把他从贫贱中提拔到高位,后来他却想:“你为我做过什么?”就这样抹掉了对方的善行。出家者也是这样:从做沙弥的时候起,亲教师或依止阿阇梨就用四种资具、教导和提问来摄受他,教他说法、方法、论典和善巧等。后来,他得到国王、大臣等的恭敬尊重,却对亲教师和依止阿阇梨不恭不敬,别人就说:“这人年少时,我们这样摄受养育他,如今他却毫无情义。”他若说:“你们为我做过什么?”就这样抹掉了他们的善行。这种抹恩一旦生起,就会染污他的心,让心不能光洁明耀。因此称为心的随烦恼。巴利
Yathā cesa, evaṃ navavidhaāghātavatthusambhavo byāpādo. Dasavidhaāghātavatthusambhavo kodho. Punappunaṃ cittapariyonandhano upanāho. Agāriyassa vā anagāriyassa vā sukatakaraṇavināsano makkho. Agāriyopi hi kenaci anukampakena daliddo samāno ucce ṭhāne ṭhapito, aparena samayena ‘‘kiṃ tayā mayhaṃ kata’’nti tassa sukatakaraṇaṃ vināseti. Anagāriyopi sāmaṇerakālato pabhuti ācariyena vā upajjhāyena vā catūhi paccayehi uddesaparipucchāhi ca anuggahetvā dhammakathānayapakaraṇakosallādīni sikkhāpito, aparena samayena rājarājamahāmattādīhi sakkato garukato ācariyupajjhāyesu acittīkato caramāno ‘‘ayaṃ amhehi daharakāle evaṃ anuggahito saṃvaḍḍhito ca, atha panidāni nissineho jāto’’ti vuccamāno ‘‘kiṃ mayhaṃ tumhehi kata’’nti tesaṃ sukatakaraṇaṃ vināseti, tassa so sukatakaraṇavināsano makkho uppajjitvā cittaṃ dūseti, obhāsituṃ na deti. Tasmā ‘‘cittassa upakkileso’’ti vuccati.
就像这样,当这种攀比心压向多闻的人时,会以“像这样多闻的人,来世去向都还不确定,你和我又有什么差别”等方式生起,这就是执著于争高低的攀比。对他人获得的恭敬等加以讥嫌,就是嫉妒。不能忍受自己的成就要与他人共享,就是悭吝。行欺骗之事的,是谄。以狡诈的方式生起的,是诳。狡诈的人就像Āyatana鱼一样。据说Āyatana鱼在鱼群中露出尾巴,在蛇群中露出头,好让对方知道“我和你们是一样的”。同样,狡诈的人无论去亲近经师还是论师,都会这样对那人说:“我是您的随从,您是怜悯我的人,我不会离开您。”他心里想:“这样他们就会认为‘这个人对我们有恭敬,有敬重’。”这种以狡诈方式生起的诳,一旦生起就会染污他的心,让心无法光洁明耀。因此称为心的随烦恼。巴利
Yathā cāyaṃ, evaṃ bahussutepi puggale ajjhottharitvā ‘‘īdisassa ceva bahussutassa aniyatā gati, tava vā mama vā ko viseso’’tiādinā nayena uppajjamāno yugaggāhagāhī paḷāso. Paresaṃ sakkārādīni khīyanā issā. Attano sampattiyā parehi sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ asahamānaṃ macchariyaṃ. Vañcanikacariyabhūtā māyā. Kerāṭikabhāvena uppajjamānaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ. Kerāṭiko hi āyatanamaccho viya hoti. Āyatanamaccho nāma kira macchānaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ dasseti sappānaṃ sīsaṃ , ‘‘tumhehi sadiso aha’’nti jānāpetuṃ. Evameva kerāṭiko puggalo yaṃ yaṃ suttantikaṃ vā ābhidhammikaṃ vā upasaṅkamati, taṃ taṃ evaṃ vadati ‘‘ahaṃ tumhākaṃ baddhacaro, tumhe mayhaṃ anukampakā, nāhaṃ tumhe muñcāmī’’ti ‘‘evamete ‘sagāravo ayaṃ amhesu sappatisso’ti maññissantī’’ti. Tassetaṃ kerāṭikabhāvena uppajjamānaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ uppajjitvā cittaṃ dūseti, obhāsituṃ na deti. Tasmā ‘‘cittassa upakkileso’’ti vuccati.
就像这样,因风而鼓胀的皮囊一样僵硬、昂首挺立、行为不柔和的,就是“顽”。比这更进一步的做法,就是“暴”。这种“暴”可以从两方面产生:从不善和从善。其中,在家人看到别人做了装饰等事情,就生起想要做得比那多一倍的心;出家人看到别人学了多少或讲了多少,就以慢心生起想要比那多一倍、再多一倍的心——这是不善的暴。但在家人看到别人布施一餐饭,自己就想布施两餐或三餐,由此生起的心;出家人看到别人掌握了一部尼迦耶,不依靠慢心,只是因为看到这个就克服自己的懈怠,想要掌握两部尼迦耶,由此生起的心——这是善的暴。不过这里指的是不善的那种。因为这种不善的暴一旦生起,就会染污心,不让心明亮照耀,所以称为“心的随烦恼”。巴利
Yathā cetaṃ, evaṃ vātabharitabhastasadisathaddhabhāvapaggahitasiraanivātavuttikārakaraṇo thambho. Taduttarikaraṇo sārambho. So duvidhena labbhati akusalavasena ceva kusalavasena ca. Tattha agāriyassa parena kataṃ alaṅkārādiṃ disvā taddiguṇakaraṇena uppajjamāno, anagāriyassa ca yattakaṃ yattakaṃ paro pariyāpuṇāti vā katheti vā, mānavasena taddiguṇataddiguṇakaraṇena uppajjamāno akusalo. Agāriyassa pana paraṃ ekaṃ salākabhattaṃ dentaṃ disvā attanā dve vā tīṇi vā dātukāmatāya uppajjamāno, anagāriyassa ca parena ekanikāye gahite mānaṃ anissāya kevalaṃ taṃ disvā attanā ālasiyaṃ abhibhuyya dve nikāye gahetukāmatāya uppajjamāno kusalo. Idha pana akusalo adhippeto. Ayañhi uppajjitvā cittaṃ dūseti, obhāsituṃ na deti. Tasmā ‘‘cittassa upakkileso’’ti vuccati.
正如这里,基于出身等而令心高举、生起的,就是慢;极度高举的,是过慢;带着沉醉执取的样态,是憍;在五欲功德中放纵自心而生起的,是放逸。这些一旦生起,就会染污心,不让心明亮照耀,因此称为心的随烦恼。巴利
Yathā cāyaṃ, evaṃ jātiādīni nissāya cittassa uṇṇativasena pavattamāno māno, accuṇṇativasena atimāno, madaggahaṇākāro mado, kāmaguṇesu cittavossaggavasena uppajjamāno pamādo uppajjitvā cittaṃ dūseti, obhāsituṃ na deti. Tasmā ‘‘cittassa upakkileso’’ti vuccati.
那么,世尊在开示随烦恼时,为什么先举出贪等来开示呢?因为贪是最先生起的。一切有情无论投生在哪里,哪怕是在净居天,最初都是由于对存在的贪爱而生起贪,之后,其余烦恼才依各自相应的条件,随其所生而起。而且,并不是只有这十六种才是心的随烦恼,应当知道,依照这个方式,一切烦恼都已经被包含在内了。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavā upakkilesaṃ dassento lobhamādiṃ katvā dassetīti? Tassa paṭhamuppattito. Sabbasattānañhi yattha katthaci upapannānaṃ antamaso suddhāvāsabhūmiyampi sabbapaṭhamaṃ bhavanikantivasena lobho uppajjati, tato attano attano anurūpapaccayaṃ paṭicca yathāsambhavaṃ itare, na ca ete soḷaseva cittassa upakkilesā, etena pana nayena sabbepi kilesā gahitāyeva hontīti veditabbā.
72 72. 用这些内容显示了染污之后,现在为了显示清净,说了“诸比丘,那位……”等话。其中,“如是知已”就是这样知道之后。“舍断”是指以正断的方式,通过圣道来舍断。在这里,应当从烦恼的次第和道的次第两方面来理解这种舍断。先从烦恼的次第来说:贪欲、邪贪、顽固、暴戾、慢、过慢、骄傲这七种烦恼,由阿罗汉道舍断;嗔恨、忿怒、怨恨、放逸这四种烦恼,由不来道舍断;抹恩、攀比、嫉妒、悭吝、谄曲、诳骗这六种烦恼,由入流道舍断。再从道的次第来说:由入流道舍断抹恩、攀比、嫉妒、悭吝、谄曲、诳骗这六种;由不来道舍断嗔恨、忿怒、怨恨、放逸这四种;由阿罗汉道舍断贪欲、邪贪、顽固、暴戾、慢、过慢、骄傲这七种。巴利
72. Ettāvatā saṃkilesaṃ dassetvā idāni vodānaṃ dassento sa kho so, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha iti viditvāti evaṃ jānitvā. Pajahatīti samucchedappahānavasena ariyamaggena pajahati. Tattha kilesapaṭipāṭiyā maggapaṭipāṭiyāti dvidhā pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kilesapaṭipāṭiyā tāva abhijjhāvisamalobho thambho sārambho māno atimāno madoti ime cha kilesā arahattamaggena pahīyanti. Byāpādo kodho upanāho pamādoti ime cattāro kilesā anāgāmimaggena pahīyanti. Makkho paḷāso issā macchariyaṃ māyā sāṭheyyanti ime cha sotāpattimaggena pahīyantīti. Maggapaṭipāṭiyā pana, sotāpattimaggena makkho paḷāso issā macchariyaṃ māyā sāṭheyyanti ime cha pahīyanti. Anāgāmimaggena byāpādo kodho upanāho pamādoti ime cattāro. Arahattamaggena abhijjhāvisamalobho thambho sārambho māno atimāno madoti ime cha pahīyantīti.
不过在这个地方,应当知道:这些烦恼无论是入流道所断的,还是其余诸道所断的,世尊在这里其实是针对由不来道断除的情况,才说了“他断除贪欲、邪贪这个心的随烦恼”等话。这是此处从传承诸道而来的合理解释,而且因为上面已经明确说到第四道,所以这样理解是合适的。因为贪欲、邪贪等烦恼中,被第三道断除后残余下来的部分,是由那一道断除的;其余的烦恼,也是由这一道断除的。实际上,即使是入流道所断的烦恼,由于能令它们生起的心还没有被断除,所以只有靠不来道才能将它们彻底断除。但有些人在这里主张是由初道断除的,这与前后文不相符。也有人说是镇伏断,那只是他们自己的想法而已。巴利
Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ime kilesā sotāpattimaggavajjhā vā hontu, sesamaggavajjhā vā, atha kho anāgāmimaggeneva pahānaṃ sandhāya ‘‘abhijjhāvisamalobhaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahatī’’tiādimāhāti veditabbā. Ayamettha paveṇimaggāgato sambhavo, so ca upari catutthamaggasseva niddiṭṭhattā yujjati, tatiyamaggena pahīnāvasesānañhi visamalobhādīnaṃ tena pahānaṃ hoti, sesānaṃ imināva. Yepi hi sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti, tepi taṃsamuṭṭhāpakacittānaṃ appahīnattā anāgāmimaggeneva suppahīnā hontīti. Keci pana paṭhamamaggena cettha pahānaṃ vaṇṇayanti, taṃ pubbāparena na sandhiyati. Keci vikkhambhanappahānampi, taṃ tesaṃ icchāmattameva.
73 “诸比丘,当……时”这句话里,“当……时”指的是在某个时候。“已断除”则是就证得不来道的那个刹那所说的断除。巴利
73.Yatokho, bhikkhaveti ettha yatoti yamhi kāle. Pahīno hotīti anāgāmimaggakkhaṇe pahānaṃ sandhāyevāha.
74 “他于佛具足不动净信”这句话,应当按每一个词这样搭配理解:“诸比丘,当贪欲邪贪已被断除时,他便于佛具足不动净信……”这位比丘通过不来道获得了出世间净信,后来在另一个时候随念佛、法、僧的功德时,世间净信又生起了。世尊为了显示他这兼具世间与出世间两部分的净信,才说了“于佛具足不动净信”等话。巴利
74.So buddhe aveccappasādenāti etaṃ ‘‘yato kho, bhikkhave, abhijjhāvisamalobho pahīno hoti, so buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hotī’’ti evaṃ ekamekena padena yojetabbaṃ. Imassa hi bhikkhuno anāgāmimaggena lokuttarappasādo āgato, athassa aparena samayena buddhaguṇe dhammaguṇe saṅghaguṇe ca anussarato lokiyo uppajjati, tamassa sabbampi lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ pasādaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘buddhe aveccappasādenā’’tiādimāha.
这里说的“不坏净信”,是指因为如实了知佛、法、僧的功德而生起的、不动摇、不退失的净信。现在,为了说明那位比丘随念时这种不坏净信是怎样生起的,世尊就以“他确实是这样一位世尊……”等说法,详细展开了三种随念。关于这些内容的解释,在《清净道论》的“随念论”部分已经全面讲过了。巴利
Tattha aveccappasādenāti buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇānaṃ yāthāvato ñātattā acalena accutena pasādena. Idāni yathā tassa bhikkhuno anussarato so aveccappasādo uppanno, taṃ vidhiṃ dassento ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā nayena tīṇi anussatiṭṭhānāni vitthāresi. Tesaṃ atthavaṇṇanā sabbākārena visuddhimagge anussatikathāyaṃ vuttā.
75 75. 这样显示了世间与出世间混合的净信之后,现在为了说明他省察烦恼的断除以及自身具备不坏净信时所生起的喜悦等利益,世尊说了“正如有限的……”等话。因为不来者省察边境已平息的盗贼祸乱时,就像住在大城里的国王一样,当他省察“这些和那些烦恼已被我断除”时,会生起强烈的喜悦。为了显示这一点,世尊说了“正如有限的……”等话。巴利
75. Evamassa lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ pasādaṃ dassetvā idāni kilesappahānaṃ aveccappasādasamannāgatañca paccavekkhato uppajjamānaṃ somanassādiānisaṃsaṃ dassento yathodhi kho panassātiādimāha. Anāgāmissa hi paccante vuṭṭhitaṃ corupaddavaṃ vūpasametvā taṃ paccavekkhato mahānagare vasantassa rañño viya ime cime ca mama kilesā pahīnāti attano kilesappahānaṃ paccavekkhato balavasomanassaṃ uppajjati. Taṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘yathodhi kho panassā’’tiādimāha.
这句话的意思是:那位不来比丘这样具备“于佛具足不动净信……于法……于僧……是世间无上福田”,对他而言,烦恼已按各自的范围被断舍、被弃舍,也就是依各自的范围而断舍;那些烦恼类已被吐出、解脱、断除、弃舍。所谓“依各自的范围”,有两种范围:烦恼的范围和道的范围。其中,从烦恼的范围来说,凡是某一类道所应断的烦恼,就不与其他道所应断的烦恼混杂,而是依它自己所属的范围被断除。从道的范围来说,凡是应由某一道断除的烦恼,就由那一道断除。这样,依各自的范围,那些烦恼类才真正被断舍、弃舍。他这样省察之后,获得了喜悦,并在此基础上进一步获得“义的喜悦”,于是能说“我于佛具足不动净信”——这就是前后的关联。巴利
Tassattho – yvāyaṃ anāgāmī bhikkhu evaṃ ‘‘buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti…pe… dhamme…pe… saṅghe…pe… anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassā’’ti, tassa yathodhi kho cattaṃ hoti paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, sakasakaodhivasena cattameva hoti, taṃ taṃ kilesajātaṃ vantaṃ muttaṃ pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ. Sakasakaodhivasenāti dve odhī kilesodhi ca maggodhi ca. Tattha kilesodhivasenāpi ye kilesā yaṃ maggavajjhā, te aññamaggavajjhehi amissā hutvā sakeneva odhinā pahīnā. Maggodhivasenāpi ye kilesā yena maggena pahātabbā, tena teyeva pahīnā honti. Evaṃ sakasakaodhivasena taṃ taṃ kilesajātaṃ cattameva hoti paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ paccavekkhitvā ca laddhasomanasso tatuttaripi so ‘‘buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgatomhī’’ti labhati atthavedanti sambandho.
也有一种读法是“Yatodhi kho”。按照这种读法,意思是:这位比丘的烦恼,已经按各自所属的圣道范围被断舍、被舍弃。其中,“yato”是表示原因的词,意思是“因为”。“odhi”(界限、分际)指的是下面三个道。为什么?因为这三个道是划分了范围、作了分类,把应当由更高的道断除的烦恼搁在一边,只断除自己该断的那部分,所以称为“odhi”。而阿罗汉道则不留任何残余地断除一切烦恼,所以称为“anodhi”(无分际)。这位比丘的烦恼,是由下面三个道断舍的。因此说“yatodhi kho panassa cattaṃ hoti”(因为他的烦恼已按分际被断舍)。“kho pana”在这里只是语气词。整段的意思是:因为他这样按分际断舍、舍弃了烦恼,所以他省察之后生起喜悦,更进一步获得“义的喜悦”,能说“我于佛具足不坏净信”——应当按经文的文句这样理解。巴利
Yatodhi khotipi pāṭho. Tassa vasena ayamattho, assa bhikkhuno yatodhi kho pana cattaṃ hoti paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ. Tattha yatoti kāraṇavacanaṃ, yasmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Odhīti heṭṭhā tayo maggā vuccanti. Kasmā? Te hi odhiṃ katvā koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā uparimaggena pahātabbakilese ṭhapetvā pajahanti, tasmā odhīti vuccanti. Arahattamaggo pana kiñci kilesaṃ anavasesetvā pajahati, tasmā anodhīti vuccati. Imassa ca bhikkhuno heṭṭhāmaggattayena cattaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yatodhi kho panassa cattaṃ hotī’’ti. Tattha kho panāti nipātamattaṃ. Ayaṃ pana piṇḍattho. Yasmā assa odhi cattaṃ hoti paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, tasmā taṃ paccavekkhitvā ca laddhasomanasso tatuttaripi so ‘‘buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgatomhī’’ti labhati atthavedanti yathāpāḷi netabbaṃ.
在这里,“已舍弃”这一说法,是从舍弃自身存在状态的角度来讲的。“已吐出”则是为了显示不执取的状态。“已解脱”是为了显示从相续中脱离出来。“已断除”是为了显示即使已经解脱,在某些情况下也不会再停留。“已出离”则是为了显示先前曾执取之物的舍离,或者显示面向出离的状态,或者显示以修习的力量克服之后而舍离的状态——这样说就是这个意思。
“获得义悦、获得法悦”当中,对佛等的不坏净信本身就是“义”,因为应当亲近它、应当归投它;能持守、使人不堕落的,就是“法”。“悦”既指典据,也指智,也指喜悦。比如在“三吠陀的通达者”等说法中,“悦”指典据;在“若人了知那位婆罗门是吠陀通达者、无所拥有、不贪着欲有”等说法中,指智;在“生于喜悦者游于世间”等说法中,指喜悦。而在这里,指的是喜悦以及与喜悦相应的智。因此,“获得义悦、获得法悦”应当理解为:获得以不坏净信为所缘的喜悦,以及由喜悦所成的智。巴利
Tattha cattanti idaṃ sakabhāvapariccajanavasena vuttaṃ. Vantanti idaṃ pana anādiyanabhāvadassanavasena. Muttanti idaṃ santatito vinimocanavasena. Pahīnanti idaṃ muttassapi kvaci anavaṭṭhānadassanavasena. Paṭinissaṭṭhanti idaṃ pubbe ādinnapubbassa paṭinissaggadassanavasena paṭimukhaṃ vā nissaṭṭhabhāvadassanavasena bhāvanābalena abhibhuyya nissaṭṭhabhāvadassanavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Labhati atthavedaṃ labhati dhammavedanti ettha buddhādīsu aveccappasādoyeva araṇīyato attho, upagantabbatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhāraṇato dhammo, vinipatituṃ appadānatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vedoti ganthopi ñāṇampi somanassampi. ‘‘Tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.256) hi gantho ‘‘vedo’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Yaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vedagumābhijaññā, akiñcanaṃ kāmabhāve asatta’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 1065) ñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ye vedajātā vicaranti loke’’tiādīsu somanassaṃ. Idha pana somanassañca somanassasampayuttañāṇañca adhippetaṃ, tasmā ‘‘labhati atthavedaṃ labhati dhammavedanti aveccappasādārammaṇasomanassañca somanassamayañāṇañca labhatī’’ti evamettha attho veditabbo.
或者,“义悦”是指:当人观察不坏净信时所生起的那种悦,也就是前面说的那种悦。“法悦”是指:当人观察不坏净信的因,也就是按类别断除烦恼时所生起的那种悦,同样也是前面说的那种悦。在这里也可以这样理解其含义。正如经中所说:“对因的智是法辨析,对因之果的智是义辨析。”(《分别论》718-719)“与法相应的欢悦”:就是观察这个义、这个法,以及由义和法所带来的功德所成的悦时,所生起的欢悦。因为这种欢悦与以无过失为特征、随观察的方式而生起的法相应,所以称为“与法相应”。“欢喜者生喜”:因为这种欢悦而欢喜的人,生起无染的喜。“喜心者”:因为那种喜而内心满足。“身轻安”:身体也轻安,不安止息了。“轻安之身有乐”:这样止息了身体的不安之后,感受心所生的乐。“心定”:心很好地安住,像被安放进去一样,不动地停住。巴利
Atha vā atthavedanti aveccappasādaṃ paccavekkhato uppannaṃ vuttappakārameva vedaṃ. Dhammavedanti aveccappasādassa hetuṃ odhiso kilesappahānaṃ paccavekkhato uppannaṃ vuttappakārameva vedanti evampi ettha attho veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā, hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 718-719). Dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjanti tameva atthañca dhammañca atthadhammānisaṃsabhūtaṃ vedañca paccavekkhato uppannaṃ pāmojjaṃ. Tañhi anavajjalakkhaṇena paccavekkhaṇākārappavattena dhammena upasañhitanti vuccati. Pamuditassa pīti jāyatīti iminā pāmojjena pamuditassa nirāmisā pīti jāyati. Pītimanassāti tāya pītiyā pīṇitamanassa. Kāyo passambhatīti kāyopi passaddho hoti vūpasantadaratho. Passaddhakāyo sukhanti evaṃ vūpasantakāyadaratho cetasikaṃ sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti cittaṃ sammā ādhiyati appitaṃ viya acalaṃ tiṭṭhati.
76 76. 这样,先说明了观察具备不坏净信的烦恼断除时生起的喜悦等利益,现在以“然而,依我所断的程度……”这样的段落开示他这种观察进行的方式,接着显示这正是不来道威力之果,而说了“比丘们,正是他……”等话。巴利
76. Evamassa kilesappahānaṃ aveccappasādasamannāgataṃ paccavekkhato uppajjamānaṃ somanassādiānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘yathodhi kho pana me’’ti vārena tassa paccavekkhaṇāya pavattākāraṃ pakāsetvā tasseva anāgāmimaggānubhāvasūcakaṃ phalaṃ dassento sa kho so, bhikkhavetiādimāha.
在这里,“有这样的戒”显示的是与不来道相应的戒蕴。“有这样的法”“有这样的慧”显示的则是与它相应的定蕴和慧蕴。“良米”指红米、香米等各种各样的大米。“团食”指米饭。“拣除黑粒”指已经把黑粒去掉。对这样的比丘来说,前面所说的那种团食,不论对道还是对果,都不会成为障碍。对已经获得功德的人来说,它还能造成什么障碍呢?即使是对还没有获得第四道和第四果、但为了证得它们而开始修观的人来说,那种食物也不会成为障碍,它根本不可能造成障碍。为什么?因为他的心已经通过上述戒、定、慧所包含的道而得到净化了。巴利
Tattha evaṃsīloti tassa anāgāmimaggasampayuttaṃ sīlakkhandhaṃ dasseti. Evaṃdhammo evaṃpaññoti taṃsampayuttameva samādhikkhandhaṃ paññākkhandhañca dasseti. Sālīnanti lohitasāligandhasāliādīnaṃ anekarūpānaṃ. Piṇḍapātanti odanaṃ. Vicitakāḷakanti apanītakāḷakaṃ. Nevassa taṃ hoti antarāyāyāti tassa evaṃvidhassa bhikkhuno taṃ vuttappakārapiṇḍapātabhojanaṃ maggassa vā phalassa vā neva antarāyāya hoti, paṭiladdhaguṇassa hi taṃ kimantarāyaṃ karissati? Yopissa appaṭiladdho catutthamaggo ca phalaṃ ca tappaṭilābhāya vipassanaṃ ārabhatopi nevassa taṃ hoti antarāyāya, antarāyaṃ kātuṃ asamatthameva hoti. Kasmā? Vuttappakārasīladhammapaññāsaṅgahena maggena visuddhacittattā.
因为这里的原因正是这个,所以为了说明与之相应的比喻,就说了“犹如”等开头的话。巴利
Yasmā cettha etadeva kāraṇaṃ, tasmā tadanurūpaṃ upamaṃ dassento seyyathāpītiādimāha.
在这里,清净就是澄净。因垢秽去除而纯净,就是清净。因光明闪耀而洁净,就是皎洁。冶金师的炉口,就是金匠的坩埚口。金匠的坩埚在这里称为“炉”,但在别处,灯盏等也叫这个。比如《长部》1.159中说“在举着的灯火中”,那里的灯就称为“炉”。《中部》3.360中说“应绑火炬,绑好火炬后涂抹炉口”,那里的“炉口”指炭火盆。《本生经》2.22.649中说“像铁匠的炉,里面燃烧而不外露”,那里的“炉”指铁匠的熔炉。《长部》1.24中说“果报如此,将有流星坠落”,那里的疾风称为“炉”。但在这里以及“用钳子夹取纯金后投入炉口中”等类似的地方,应当知道金匠的坩埚就是“炉”。巴利
Tattha acchanti vippasannaṃ. Parisuddhaṃ malavigamena. Pariyodātaṃ pabhassaratāya. Ukkāmukhanti suvaṇṇakārānaṃ mūsāmukhaṃ. Suvaṇṇakārānaṃ mūsā hi idha ukkā, aññattha pana dīpikādayopi vuccanti. ‘‘Ukkāsu dhārīyamānāsū’’ti (dī. ni. 1.159) hi āgataṭṭhāne dīpikā ‘‘ukkā’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Ukkaṃ bandheyya, ukkaṃ bandhitvā ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpeyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.360) āgataṭṭhāne aṅgārakapallaṃ. ‘‘Kammārānaṃ yathā ukkā, anto jhāyati no bahī’’ti (jā. 2.22.649) āgataṭṭhāne kammāruddhanaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃvipāko ukkāpāto bhavissatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.24) āgataṭṭhāne vātavego ‘‘ukkā’’ti vuccati. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne aññesu ca evarūpesu ‘‘saṇḍāsena jātarūpaṃ gahetvā ukkāmukhe pakkhipatī’’ti āgataṭṭhānesu suvaṇṇakārānaṃ mūsā ‘‘ukkā’’ti veditabbā.
这里,这个比喻的对应关系是这样的:应当把这位比丘在凡夫阶段的心,看作被欲贪等污垢所伴随,就像脏布和脏金一样。不还道则像清水和坩埚口。依靠那水和坩埚口,布与金子得以清净;同样,这位比丘依靠前面所说的、包含戒与定与慧的不还道,心得清净。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ upamāsaṃsandanā – saṃkiliṭṭhavatthaṃ viya hi saṃkiliṭṭhajātarūpaṃ viya ca imassa bhikkhuno puthujjanakāle kāmarāgādimalānugataṃ cittaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Acchodakaṃ viya ukkāmukhaṃ viya ca anāgāmimaggo. Taṃ udakaṃ ukkāmukhañca āgamma vatthasuvaṇṇānaṃ parisuddhatā viya tassa bhikkhuno vuttappakārasīladhammapaññāsaṅgahaṃ anāgāmimaggaṃ āgamma visuddhacittatāti.
77 “他以与慈俱行的心”这句话,是依照随顺连结的方式而说的开示。连结有三种:提问连结、意乐连结、随顺连结。其中,“这样说时,有一位比丘对世尊这样说:‘尊者,当外处不存在时,会有恐惧不安吗?’‘比丘,会有。’世尊说”(《中部》1.242)。像这样,针对提问者而作答的经文,应当知道就是提问连结。“婆罗门,你也许会这样想:难道今天沙门乔达摩还是未离贪的人吗?”(《中部》1.55)像这样,先了解他人的意乐之后才说的经文,应当知道就是意乐连结。再者,开示最初由某一法引发,接下来则依照与该法相应的法、或者与该法相对立的法,在那些经文中继续展开,依据这些情况,应当知道就是随顺连结。比如,在《愿求经》中,开头由戒引发开示,后面则说到六种神通。在《锯喻经》中,开头由不堪忍引发,后面则说到锯喻的教诫。在《蛇喻经》中,开头由说明邪见引发,后面则说到三转空性的阐明。在《小马邑经》中,开头由说明烦恼引发,后面则说到梵住。在《憍赏弥经》中,开头由争吵引发,后面则说到可念之法。在这部《布经》中也是一样,开头由说明烦恼引发,后面则说到梵住。因此说“依照随顺连结的方式而说的开示”。不过,关于梵住,逐句的解释以及修习的方法,全部都已经在《清净道论》中完整说明了。巴利
77.So mettāsahagatena cetasāti yathānusandhivasena desanā āgatā. Tayo hi anusandhī pucchānusandhi ajjhāsayānusandhi yathānusandhīti. Tattha ‘‘evaṃ vutte aññataro bhikkhu bhagavantaṃ etadavoca ‘siyā nu kho, bhante, bahiddhā asati paritassanā’ti? ‘Siyā bhikkhū’ti bhagavā avocā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.242). Evaṃ pucchantānaṃ vissajjitasuttavasena pucchānusandhi veditabbo. ‘‘Siyā kho pana te brāhmaṇa evamassa, ajjāpi nūna samaṇo gotamo avītarāgo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.55) evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā vuttassa suttassa vasena ajjhāsayānusandhi veditabbo. Yena pana dhammena ādimhi desanā uṭṭhitā, tassa dhammassa anurūpadhammavasena vā paṭipakkhavasena vā yesu suttesu upari desanā āgacchati, tesaṃ vasena yathānusandhi veditabbo . Seyyathidaṃ, ākaṅkheyyasutte heṭṭhā sīlena desanā uṭṭhitā, upari cha abhiññā āgatā. Kakacūpame heṭṭhā akkhantiyā uṭṭhitā, upari kakacūpamovādo āgato. Alagadde heṭṭhā diṭṭhiparidīpanena uṭṭhitā, upari tiparivaṭṭasuññatāpakāsanā āgatā, cūḷaassapure heṭṭhā kilesaparidīpanena uṭṭhitā, upari brahmavihārā āgatā. Kosambiyasutte heṭṭhā bhaṇḍanena uṭṭhitā, upari sāraṇīyadhammā āgatā. Imasmimpi vatthasutte heṭṭhā kilesaparidīpanena uṭṭhitā, upari brahmavihārā āgatā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathānusandhivasena desanā āgatā’’ti. Brahmavihāresu pana anupadavaṇṇanā ca bhāvanānayo ca sabbo sabbākārena visuddhimagge vutto.
78 世尊这样开示了:梵住修习是对治贪欲等杂染烦恼的,由于完全断除了欲贪和嗔恨,摧毁了敌对者,从而获得了立足处,这是不来者的梵住修习。现在,为了开示他的观,进而显示证得阿罗汉果,而说“他这样了知‘有此’”等语。巴利
78. Evaṃ bhagavā abhijjhādīnaṃ upakkilesānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ sabbaso ca kāmarāgabyāpādappahānena vihatapaccatthikattā laddhapadaṭṭhānaṃ tassa anāgāmino brahmavihārabhāvanaṃ dassetvā idānissa arahattāya vipassanaṃ dassetvā arahattappattiṃ dassetuṃ so atthi idantiādimāha.
它的意思是:那位不来者这样修习梵住之后,从这些梵住中的任何一种出定,然后按照名称,把这些梵住法、它们所依靠的心所依处,以及以心所依处为依靠的诸色法,以“这些法和所依色确实存在”这种方式确定下来,他了知“这是存在的”。到此为止,他就完成了对苦谛的确定。接着,他通达那苦的起因,了知“这是低劣的”。到此为止,他就完成了对集谛的确定。接着,他寻找断除它的方法,了知“这是殊胜的”。到此为止,他就完成了对道谛的确定。接着,他寻找通过那条道所应证得的境界,了知“在这一切想所达到的之上,还有出离”。意思是:在我所证得的这些梵住想所达到的之上,还有更超胜的出离,也就是涅槃,他这样了知。到此为止,他就完成了对灭谛的确定。“他这样知、这样见”:他以观慧,用这四种方式了知四谛;以道慧,这样照见。就像《怖畏经》中所说的那样,他的心也从欲漏中解脱……乃至了知“这是最后一生,不再有后有”。巴利
Tassattho – so anāgāmī evaṃ bhāvitabrahmavihāro etesaṃ brahmavihārānaṃ yato kutoci vuṭṭhāya te eva brahmavihāradhamme nāmavasena tesaṃ nissayaṃ hadayavatthuṃ vatthunissayāni bhūtānīti iminā nayena bhūtupādāyadhamme rūpavasena ca vavatthapetvā atthi idanti pajānāti, ettāvatānena dukkhasaccavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Tato tassa dukkhassa samudayaṃ paṭivijjhanto atthi hīnanti pajānāti, ettāvatānena samudayasaccavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Tato tassa pahānupāyaṃ vicinanto atthi paṇītanti pajānāti, ettāvatānena maggasaccavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Tato tena maggena adhigantabbaṭṭhānaṃ vicinanto atthi uttari imassa saññāgatassa nissaraṇanti pajānāti, imassa mayā adhigatassa brahmavihārasaññāgatassa uttari nissaraṇaṃ nibbānaṃ atthīti evaṃ pajānātīti adhippāyo, ettāvatānena nirodhasaccavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Tassa evaṃ jānato evaṃ passatoti tassa vipassanāpaññāya evaṃ catūhi ākārehi cattāri saccāni jānato, maggapaññāya evaṃ passato, bhayabherave vuttanayeneva kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccati…pe… itthattāyāti pajānātīti.
世尊就这样把开示一路引导到阿拉汉果,然后因为世尊知道:坐在那个集会中的那位婆罗门信奉沐浴清净,他听到这样赞叹沐浴清净之后,就会出家并证得阿拉汉果。所以,为了警策他,世尊特别说出这段衔接语:“比丘们,这位比丘称为‘以内在的沐浴而沐浴者’。”其中,“以内在的沐浴”指的是以内在烦恼的出离来沐浴。巴利
Evaṃ yāva arahattā desanaṃ pāpetvā idāni yasmā tassaṃ parisati nhānasuddhiko brāhmaṇo nisinno, so evaṃ nhānasuddhiyā vaṇṇaṃ vuccamānaṃ sutvā pabbajitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatīti bhagavatā vidito, tasmā tassa codanatthāya ‘‘ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sināto antarena sinānenā’’ti imaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ anusandhimāha. Tattha antarena sinānenāti abbhantarena kilesavuṭṭhānasinānena.
79 79.“孙德利格跋勒德瓦哲”是这样得名的:那位婆罗门自己的族姓是跋勒德瓦哲,但他有一种见解,认为在孙德利格河里沐浴就能灭除罪恶,因此被称为“孙德利格跋勒德瓦哲”。他听了世尊这番话之后,心里想:“我们称赞沐浴能得清净,沙门乔达摩也照样称赞,看来他现在跟我们同愿了。”于是,他以为世尊是去了跋呼迦河,在那里把罪恶冲掉之后才回来的,就问道:“尊者乔达摩是不是去跋呼迦河沐浴?”世尊为了彻底破除这位婆罗门的邪见,既不说“我去”,也不说“我不去”,而是说:“婆罗门,跋呼迦河有什么用?跋呼迦河能做什么?”这句话的意思是:跋呼迦河有什么用?它能做什么?它根本没有能力对任何人有所帮助,我去那里做什么呢?巴利
79.Sundarikabhāradvājoti bhāradvājo nāma so brāhmaṇo attano gottavasena, sundarikāya pana nadiyā sinātassa pāpappahānaṃ hotīti ayamassa diṭṭhi, tasmā ‘‘sundarikabhāradvājo’’ti vuccati. So taṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ sutvā cintesi ‘‘mayaṃ sinānasuddhiṃ vaṇṇema, samaṇopi gotamo tatheva vaṇṇeti, samānacchando dāni esa amhehī’’ti. Atha bhagavantaṃ bāhukaṃ nadiṃ gantvā taṃ tattha pāpaṃ pavāhetvā āgataṃ viya maññamāno āha ‘‘gacchati pana bhavaṃ gotamo bāhukaṃ nadiṃ sināyitu’’nti? Bhagavā tassa gacchāmīti vā na gacchāmīti vā avatvāyeva brāhmaṇassa diṭṭhisamugghātaṃ kattukāmo ‘‘kiṃ brāhmaṇa bāhukāya nadiyā , kiṃ bāhukā nadī karissatī’’ti āha. Tassattho kiṃ payojanaṃ bāhukāya, kiṃ sā karissati? Asamatthā sā kassaci atthāya, kiṃ tattha gamissāmīti?
这时,婆罗门称赞它,说了“公认粗恶”等话。其中,“公认粗恶”是指被公认为具有粗恶的性质;而“粗恶的性质”指的是清净的状态,意思是它能带来清净,所以这样说就是被如此公认。也有写成“公认优胜”的读法。它的意思是:被公认为能使人到达殊胜的世界。“公认福德”是指被公认为福德。“冲走”是指带走、净化。“以偈颂说出”就是用偈颂来宣说。所说的偈颂,要么只是为了说明其中义理而对喜欢偈颂的人说,要么是为了说明特别的义理。但在这里,应当知道这些偈颂是为了说明两种义理而说的。巴利
Atha brāhmaṇo taṃ pasaṃsanto lokkhasammatātiādimāha. Tattha lokkhasammatāti lūkhabhāvasammatā, lūkhabhāvanti cokkhabhāvaṃ, visuddhibhāvaṃ detīti evaṃ sammatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Lokyasammatātipi pāṭho. Tassattho, seṭṭhaṃ lokaṃ gamayatīti evaṃ sammatāti. Puññasammatāti puññanti sammatā. Pavāhetīti gamayati visodheti. Gāthāhi ajjhabhāsīti gāthāhi abhāsi. Gāthā ca vuccamānā tadatthadīpanatthameva vā gāthārucikānaṃ vuccati, visesatthadīpanatthaṃ vā. Idha panetā ubhayatthadīpanatthaṃ vuttāti veditabbā.
“跋呼迦”这个词在这里正是为了说明这个意思,其余的词则是为了说明各自特别的意思。因为就像世人会去跋呼迦河一样,他们也会去阿提卡卡等地方,想通过沐浴把罪业冲走。其中,那些住得离这些地方近的人,一天沐浴三次;住得远的,就依次一天两次、一天一次、隔一天一次,这样一直到隔一年才沐浴一次。而那些完全没办法去的人,也会让人用瓶子从那里打水回来沐浴。但这一切都没有意义。所以,为了说明这个特别的意思,才说了“阿提卡卡等”这样的话。巴利
Bāhukanti idameva hi ettha vacanaṃ tadatthadīpakaṃ, sesāni visesatthadīpakāni. Yatheva hi bāhukaṃ, evaṃ adhikakkādīnipi loko gacchati nhānena pāpaṃ pavāhetuṃ. Tattha ye tesaṃ ṭhānānaṃ āsannā honti, te divasassa tikkhattuṃ nhāyanti. Ye dūrā, te yathākkamaṃ dvikkhattuṃ sakiṃ ekadivasantaraṃ, evaṃ yāva saṃvaccharantaraṃ nhāyanti. Ye pana sabbathāpi gantuṃ na sakkonti, te ghaṭehipi tato udakaṃ āharāpetvā nhāyanti. Sabbañcetaṃ niratthakaṃ, tasmā imaṃ visesatthaṃ dīpetuṃ adhikakkādīnipīti āha.
在这其中,阿提卡卡是一处渡口,因为具备沐浴的设施而得到这个名称。伽耶也是一处渡口,形状像圆形的池塘。巴雅迦同样是恒河上的一处渡口,正对着摩诃波那陀王沉入恒河的那座宫殿的阶梯。巴户咖、孙陀利迦、辩才天女、波怙摩底,这四条则是河流。愚者指没有智慧的人。跳入指走进其中。不得清净指没有达到烦恼的清净,只是冲掉了尘垢而已。巴利
Tattha adhikakkanti nhānasambhāravasena laddhavohāraṃ ekaṃ titthaṃ vuccati. Gayātipi maṇḍalavāpisaṇṭhānaṃ titthameva vuccati. Payāgāti etampi gaṅgāya ekaṃ titthameva mahāpanādassa rañño gaṅgāyaṃ nimuggapāsādassa sopānasammukhaṭṭhānaṃ, bāhukā sundarikā sarassatī bāhumatīti imā pana catasso nadiyo. Bāloti duppañño. Pakkhandoti pavisanto. Na sujjhatīti kilesasuddhiṃ na pāpuṇāti, kevalaṃ rajojallameva pavāheti.
孙陀利迦能做什么呢?孙陀利迦在净除烦恼上能做什么?它什么也做不了。这个道理也适用于巴雅迦和巴呼迦。以上这三句说完了,其余四句也就通过特性与滋养的方式说到了。因此应当知道:就像孙陀利迦、巴雅迦、巴呼迦什么也做不了一样,阿提迦卡等也是如此。巴利
Kiṃ sundarikā karissatīti sundarikā kilesavisodhane kiṃ karissati? Na kiñci kātuṃ samatthāti adhippāyo. Esa nayo payāgabāhukāsu. Imehi ca tīhi padehi vuttehi itarānipi cattāri lakkhaṇāhāranayena vuttāneva honti, tasmā yatheva sundarikā payāgā bāhukā na kiñci karonti, tathā adhikakkādayopīti veditabbā.
“怀怨者”是指具有杀生等五种怨仇的人。“造过恶者”是指做过残忍之事的人。这里说“并不能净化他”,意思是:孙陀利迦河、巴雅迦河或巴户咖河都不能净化他,不能使他清净。“恶业者”是指与邪恶的怨仇恶业相连的人,或者与卑劣的业相连的人;也是在说,即使还没有达到怨仇恶业那种程度,只要与微小的恶行相连,也算是恶业者。巴利
Verinti pāṇātipātādipañcaverasamannāgataṃ. Katakibbisanti kataluddakammaṃ. Na hi naṃ sodhayeti sundarikā vā payāgā vā bāhukā vā na sodhaye, na sodhetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāpakamminanti pāpakehi verakibbisakammehi yuttaṃ, lāmakakamme yuttaṃ vā verakibbisabhāvaṃ appattehi khuddakehipi pāpehi yuttanti vuttaṃ hoti.
“清净者”就是没有烦恼的人。“清净者、业清净者”是指:出于无烦恼而清净,且具足清净身业等之人。“恒常都是颇勒具那星宿节”是说:无烦恼的人永远都处在颇勒具那星宿节。据说那个婆罗门有这样的见解:“在颇勒具那月,于上颇勒具那星宿节那天沐浴的人,能洗净一整年所造的恶。”世尊为了驳斥他这个见解,才说“清净者确实恒常都是颇勒具那星宿节”。无烦恼的人永远都是颇勒具那星宿节,那其他人又怎么能清净呢?“恒常布萨”是说:即使没有在十四日、十五日等日子受持布萨支戒,清净者也永远安住于布萨。“清净者、业清净者”是指:出于无烦恼而清净,且具足清净身业等之人。“戒律恒常成就”是说:如此之人,与善法相应的戒律受持也永远都是圆满的。“应在此沐浴”是指:应在此——在我的教法中沐浴。这是什么意思呢?“如果你想要洗净内在的烦恼垢染,就应在此——在我的教法中,用八支道之水沐浴,除此之外,这里是没有的。”巴利
Suddhassāti nikkilesassa. Sadā phaggūti niccampi phaggunīnakkhattameva. Phaggunamāse kira ‘‘uttaraphaggunadivase yo nhāyati, so saṃvaccharaṃ katapāpaṃ sodhetī’’ti evaṃ diṭṭhiko so brāhmaṇo, tenassa bhagavā taṃ diṭṭhiṃ paṭihananto āha ‘‘suddhassa ve sadā phaggū’’ti. Nikkilesassa niccaṃ phaggunīnakkhattaṃ, itaro kiṃ sujjhatīti? Uposatho sadāti suddhassa ca cātuddasapannarasādīsu uposathaṅgāni asamādiyatopi niccameva uposatho. Suddhassa sucikammassāti nikkilesatāya suddhassa sucīhi ca kāyakammādīhi samannāgatassa. Sadā sampajjate vatanti īdisassa ca kusalūpasañhitaṃ vatasamādānampi niccaṃ sampannameva hotīti. Idheva sināhīti imasmiṃyeva mama sāsane sināhi. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Sace ajjhattikakilesamalappavāhanaṃ icchasi, idheva mama sāsane aṭṭhaṅgikamaggasalilena sināhi, aññatra hi idaṃ natthī’’ti.
现在,以适合他的教导方式,显示在三种门中的清净,世尊说了“应于一切众生行无畏”等话。其中,“无畏”指没有恐惧、利益众生的状态,这里说的就是慈。由此显示了他的意门清净。巴利
Idānissa sappāyadesanāvasena tīsupi dvāresu suddhiṃ dassento sabbabhūtesu karohi khematantiādimāha. Tattha khematanti abhayaṃ hitabhāvaṃ, mettanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etenassa manodvārasuddhi dassitā hoti.
如果不说妄语,这就有了他言语之门的清净。如果不伤害众生,如果不取别人没给的东西,这就有了他身体之门的清净。而“有信心、不吝啬”这些,则是把他这样一个三门已经清净的人,进一步引向信具足和施舍具足。至于“你去伽耶又能做什么?水井对你来说也是伽耶”这半颂,要这样理解:如果你能让一切众生得到安稳,不说妄语,不杀生,不取别人没给的东西,有信心而不吝啬,那你去伽耶又能做什么?对你来说,水井就是伽耶。因为就算去伽耶沐浴,无论在水井还是在伽耶,靠的都是这套修行来清净烦恼;而洗净身上的污垢,这两处并没有什么差别。还要知道:因为世间人更认可伽耶,所以当有人问“乔达摩尊者去巴户咖吗”时,世尊没有说“你去巴户咖又能做什么”,而是说“你去伽耶又能做什么”。巴利
Sace musā na bhaṇasīti etenassa vacīdvārasuddhi. Sace pāṇaṃ na hiṃsasi sace adinnaṃ nādiyasīti etehi kāyadvārasuddhi. Saddahāno amaccharīti etehi pana naṃ evaṃ parisuddhadvāraṃ saddhāsampadāya cāgasampadāya ca niyojesi. Kiṃ kāhasi gayaṃ gantvā, udapānopi te gayāti ayaṃ pana upaḍḍhagāthā, sace sabbabhūtesu khemataṃ karissasi, musā na bhaṇissasi, pāṇaṃ na hanissasi, adinnaṃ nādiyissasi, saddhahāno amaccharī bhavissasi, kiṃ kāhasi gayaṃ gantvā udapānopi te gayā , gayāyapi hi te nhāyantassa udapānepi imāya eva paṭipattiyā kilesasuddhi, sarīramalasuddhi pana ubhayattha samāti evaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Yasmā ca loke gayā sammatatarā, tasmā tassa bhagavā ‘‘gacchati pana bhavaṃ gotamo bāhuka’’nti puṭṭhopi ‘‘kiṃ kāhasi bāhukaṃ gantvā’’ti avatvā ‘‘kiṃ kāhasi gayaṃ gantvā’’ti āhāti veditabbo.
80 “如此所说”等语,因为是在《怖骇经》里说过的,所以意思很清楚。至于“独处”等词:“独处”是指身体远离人群;“远离”是指心远离烦恼;“不放逸”是指在业处上不丢失正念;“热诚”是指由身精进和心精进所构成的热诚;“心已投向”是指对身体和生命都不眷恋;“住”是指以某种威仪而住;“不久”是指从出家算起不久。“善男子”有两种:出身好的善男子和品行好的善男子,而这里这位两种都具备。“从家”就是从家里。“家业”是指耕田、牧牛等养家糊口的工作;“非家业”是指这里没有家业,这是出家的同义词。“出家”是指趣向、归入。“彼无上”即那无上。“梵行终”是指圣道梵行的终点,也就是所说的阿罗汉果。善男子正是为了这个目的而出家。“现法”是指在那一生中。“自证知”是指自己以智慧亲自证知,也就是不依赖他人而证知的意思。“成就而住”是指达到、完成而住;这样住着,便“生已尽……证知”。以此显示他的省察境界。巴利
80.Evaṃ vutteti evamādi bhayabherave vuttattā pākaṭameva. Eko vūpakaṭṭhotiādīsu pana eko kāyavivekena . Vūpakaṭṭho cittavivekena. Appamatto kammaṭṭhāne sati avijahanena. Ātāpī kāyikacetasikavīriyasaṅkhātena ātāpena. Pahitatto kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya. Viharanto aññatarairiyāpathavihārena. Nacirassevāti pabbajjaṃ upādāya vuccati. Kulaputtāti duvidhā kulaputtā jātikulaputtā ca ācārakulaputtā ca, ayaṃ pana ubhayathāpi kulaputto. Agārasmāti gharā. Agārassa hitaṃ agāriyaṃ, kasigorakkhādikuṭumbaposanakammaṃ vuccati, natthi ettha agāriyanti anagāriyaṃ, pabbajjāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pabbajantīti upagacchanti upasaṅkamanti. Tadanuttaranti taṃ anuttaraṃ. Brahmacariyapariyosānanti maggabrahmacariyassa pariyosānaṃ, arahattaphalanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa hi atthāya kulaputtā pabbajanti. Diṭṭheva dhammeti tasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti attanāyeva paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā, aparappaccayaṃ katvāti attho. Upasampajja vihāsīti pāpuṇitvā sampādetvā vihāsīti, evaṃ viharanto ca khīṇā jāti…pe… abbhaññāsi. Etenassa paccavekkhaṇabhūmiṃ dasseti.
那么,他的“生”是怎样穷尽的?又是怎样了知的呢?下面来说。虽然这在《怖骇经》里也讲过,但为了在这里展示用第一人称来衔接的方法,还是再简略地说一遍:并不是他过去的生已经穷尽,因为过去早就已经灭尽了;也不是未来的生,因为对未来无从用力;也不是现在的生,因为它正存在着。而是说:在还没有修道的时候,未来会在一种蕴的有、四种蕴的有或五种蕴的有当中,生起分为一种蕴、四种蕴、五种蕴等种种差别的生;由于已经修习了道,这种生就达到“不再生起”的状态而穷尽了。他通过反观修道所断除的烦恼,知道烦恼已经不存在,并且了知现有的业在未来也不会再导致结生,因此他了知“生已尽”。巴利
Katamā panassa jāti khīṇā? Kathañca naṃ abbhaññāsīti? Vuccate, kāmañcetaṃ bhayabheravepi vuttaṃ, tathāpi naṃ idha paṭhamapurisavasena yojanānayassa dassanatthaṃ puna saṅkhepato bhaṇāma. Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā, pubbeva khīṇattā. Na anāgatā, tattha vāyāmābhāvato. Na paccuppannā, vijjamānattā. Maggassa pana abhāvitattā yā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā, taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃ hotīti jānanto jānāti.
已住是指已经住下、完全住下,意思是已经完成、已经实行、已经达到究竟。梵行是指道之梵行。应作已作的意思是:在四圣谛中,通过四道,以遍知、断除、证悟、修习的方式,那十六种应完成的任务都已经完成了。不再有此状态是说,现在不再为了再生此存在、不再为了如此十六种任务之状态,或者不再为了断尽烦恼而修习道。或者也可以说,此状态是指从这样的存在、从当下正在相续的五蕴来说,不再有别的五蕴相续了。然而这五蕴已得遍知而住立,恰如断根之树,他如是了知。其中之一是指一个。阿拉汉是指成为世尊阿拉汉弟子中的一员。巴利
Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ, kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyabhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti idāni punaitthabhāvāya evaṃsoḷasakiccabhāvāya, kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanā natthīti. Atha vā, itthattāyāti itthabhāvato imasmā evaṃpakārā idāni vattamānakkhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ natthi. Ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti, chinnamūlako rukkho viyāti abbhaññāsi. Aññataroti eko. Arahatanti arahantānaṃ, bhagavato sāvakānaṃ arahataṃ abbhantaro ahosīti.
第8篇《削减经》的注释巴利
8. Sallekhasuttavaṇṇanā
81 如是我闻,这句是《削减经》的开头。其中,大准陀是那位长老的名字。傍晚时分就是傍晚的时候。从宴坐起:这里的宴坐,是指从种种众生行中退回来,收摄隐藏,独处一处,也就是独一、远离的意思。从这种状态中出来的人,就叫作从宴坐起。不过,这位长老是从最殊胜的宴坐——果等至中出来的,所以说是从宴坐起。顶礼世尊后,是以修整得洁净光亮的头顶,恭敬地顶礼世尊;或者也可以理解为让世尊开口说话,比如愿你快乐,准陀!这样发出言语。据说,世尊受人顶礼后,会抬起像金鼓一样的颈项,发出悦耳、可爱、如同甘露灌顶一般的梵音,按着每个人的名字说道:愿你快乐!这是诸如来的惯例。关于这一点,有佐证的经文:尊者,帝释天王与大臣眷属一起,以头顶礼世尊之足。世尊说:愿五髻快乐,帝释天王与大臣眷属一起快乐!因为天、人、阿修罗、龙、乾闼婆,以及其他种种众生,都想要快乐。诸如来就是以这样的方式,向有大威力的夜叉回礼。巴利
81.Evaṃme sutanti sallekhasuttaṃ. Tattha mahācundoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Sāyanhasamayanti sāyanhakāle. Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti ettha paṭisallānanti tehi tehi sattasaṅkhārehi paṭinivattitvā sallānaṃ nilīyanaṃ, ekībhāvo pavivekoti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo tato vuṭṭhito, so paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito nāma hoti. Ayaṃ pana yasmā paṭisallānānaṃ uttamato phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhāsi, tasmā ‘‘paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito’’ti vutto. Bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvāti samadasanakhujjalavibhūsitena sirasā bhagavantaṃ sakkaccaṃ vanditvā, abhivādāpetvā vā ‘‘sukhī bhava, cundā’’ti evaṃ vacībhedaṃ kārāpetvā, bhagavā pana kira vandito samāno suvaṇṇadundubhisadisaṃ gīvaṃ paggayha kaṇṇasukhaṃ pemaniyaṃ amatābhisekasadisaṃ brahmaghosaṃ nicchārento ‘‘sukhī hohī’’ti tassa tassa nāmaṃ gahetvā vadati, etaṃ āciṇṇaṃ tathāgatānaṃ. Tatridaṃ sādhakasuttaṃ, ‘‘sakko, bhante, devānamindo sāmacco saparijano bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatīti, sukhī hotu pañcasikha sakko devānamindo sāmacco saparijano, sukhakāmā hi devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā, ye caññe santi puthukāyā’’ti. Evañca pana tathāgatā evarūpe mahesakkhe yakkhe abhivadantīti.
这些:现在如同把将要说的内容引到面前一样而说。种种的:就是各种各样的。见:就是邪见。在世间生起:就是在众生当中出现。与我论相关的:是指与“把色看作我”这一类方式所展开的我论相关联,这些有二十种。与世界论相关的:是指与“我及世间是常”这一类方式所展开的世界论相关联,这些有八种:常、无常、亦常亦无常、非常非无常、有边、无边、亦有边亦无边、非有边非无边——也就是依“我及世间”这样的方式而展开。巴利
Yā imāti idāni vattabbābhimukhaṃ karonto viya āha. Anekavihitāti nānappakārā. Diṭṭhiyoti micchādiṭṭhiyo . Loke uppajjantīti sattesu pātubhavanti. Attavādappaṭisaṃyuttāti ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinayappavattena attavādena paṭisaṃyuttā, tā vīsati bhavanti. Lokavādappaṭisaṃyuttāti ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’tiādinayappavattena lokavādena paṭisaṃyuttā, tā aṭṭha honti sassato, asassato, sassato ca asassato ca, neva sassato nāsassato, antavā, anantavā, antavā ca anantavā ca, nevantavā nānantavā attā ca loko cāti evaṃ pavattattā.
在“只是最初作意”等句中,意思是这样的:尊者,如果一位比丘只是对最初作意——即使还没有证得预流道,仅仅是在作意那与观混合的最初作意——那么,仅仅通过这种方式,就能断除和舍离这些邪见吗?应当知道,这位长老虽然自己并不是增上慢者,但为了断除那些增上慢者的增上慢,他表现得像是一个增上慢者那样来提问。另有一种说法:长老的弟子中,有人以为单凭最初作意就能彻底断除诸邪见,也有人以为诸等至住即是削减住。长老正是为了那些人的利益,才向世尊提问。巴利
Ādimevātiādīsu ayamattho kiṃ nu kho bhante ādimeva manasikarontassa appatvāpi sotāpattimaggaṃ vipassanāmissakapaṭhamamanasikārameva manasikarontassa bhikkhuno evametāsaṃ ettakeneva upāyena etāsaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ pahānañca paṭinissaggo ca hotīti. Idañca thero attanā anadhimānikopi samāno adhimānikānaṃ adhimānappahānatthaṃ adhimāniko viya hutvā pucchatīti veditabbo. Apare panāhu ‘‘therassa antevāsikā ādimanasikāreneva diṭṭhīnaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ hotīti evaṃsaññinopi, samāpattivihārā sallekhavihārāti evaṃsaññinopi atthi. So tesaṃ atthāya bhagavantaṃ pucchatī’’ti.
82 82. 接着,世尊为了向对方开示断除这些邪见的方法,说了“哪些这些”等话。其中,“这些邪见在哪里生起”等语,是针对五蕴说的。因为正是这些邪见在这些蕴中生起。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,当诸色存在时,执取色,便生起这样的见:‘这就是我,这就是世间,我死后将成为常、稳固、永恒、不变易之法。’”经文广说如此。若从所缘的角度改用单数来说,就是“在哪里”——意思是“在哪个所缘上生起”。在这里,应当了知“生起”“随眠”“现行”这三者的差别:就生的层面说,未生而正在生的,叫“生起”;反复熏习、变得强有力而未被对治的,叫“随眠”;已经到达身门和语门的,叫“现行”。这就是它们之间的差别。在“那不是我的”等句中,那个作为五蕴差别的所缘,不是我的;我也不是那个;那个也不是我的我——如此以如实正慧观察。首先应当这样理解词义。巴利
82. Athassa bhagavā tāsaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ pahānūpāyaṃ dassento yā imātiādimāha. Tattha yattha cetā diṭṭhiyo uppajjantītiādi pañcakkhandhe sandhāya vuttaṃ. Etesu hi etā diṭṭhiyo uppajjanti. Yathāha ‘‘rūpe kho, bhikkhave, sati rūpaṃ abhinivissa evaṃ diṭṭhi uppajjati, so attā so loko so pecca bhavissāmi nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.152) vitthāro. Ārammaṇavasena pana ekavacanaṃ katvā yattha cāti āha, yasmiṃ ārammaṇe uppajjantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ca uppajjanti anusenti samudācarantīti imesaṃ evaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Jātivasena hi ajātā jāyamānā uppajjantīti vuccanti. Punappunaṃ āsevitā thāmagatā appaṭivinītā anusentīti. Kāyavacīdvāraṃ sampattā samudācarantīti, idametesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ. Taṃ netaṃ mamātiādīsu taṃ pañcakkhandhappabhedaṃ ārammaṇametaṃ mayhaṃ na hoti, ahampi eso na asmi, eso me attāpi na hotīti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya passatoti evaṃ tāva padattho veditabbo.
在这里,“这是我的”是一种爱的执取;当人执取它时,就会执取一百零八种爱行差别的爱戏论。“我是这个”是一种慢的执取;当人执取它时,就会执取九种差别的慢戏论。“这是我的自我”是一种见的执取;当人执取它时,就会执取六十二种恶见差别的见戏论。因此,世尊说“这不是我的”时,是在否定前面所说的种种爱戏论;说“我不是这个”时,是在否定慢戏论;说“这不是我的自我”时,是在否定见戏论。在这里,应当知道爱和慢只是与见同一立足。所谓“如此”,是指以“这不是我的”等方式来看这五蕴。所谓“如实”,是指依照它的自性,依照它实际存在的样子;也就是说,五蕴确实是以这种方式存在的,但以“我的”等方式所执取的那个东西,实际上并不以那种方式存在。所谓“以正慧观察”,是指以到达预流道慧为终点的观慧,好好地观察。所谓“如此这些”,是指以这样的方法,对这些。断除和舍离,这两个都是彻底断除的同义词。巴利
Yasmā pana ettha etaṃ mamāti taṇhāgāho, tañca gaṇhanto aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritappabhedaṃ taṇhāpapañcaṃ gaṇhāti. Esohamasmīti mānagāho, tañca gaṇhanto navappabhedaṃ mānapapañcaṃ gaṇhāti. Eso me attāti diṭṭhigāho, tañca gaṇhanto dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatappabhedaṃ diṭṭhipapañcaṃ gaṇhāti. Tasmā netaṃ mamāti vadanto bhagavā yathāvuttappabhedaṃ taṇhāpapañcaṃ paṭikkhipati. Nesohamasmīti mānapapañcaṃ. Na meso attāti diṭṭhipapañcaṃ. Diṭṭhekaṭṭhāyeva cettha taṇhāmānā veditabbā. Evametanti evaṃ ‘‘netaṃ mamā’’tiādinā ākārena etaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ. Yathābhūtanti yathā sabhāvaṃ, yathā atthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Khandhapañcakañhi eteneva ākārena atthi. Mamantiādinā pana gayhamānampi tenākārena nevatthīti adhippāyo. Sammappaññāya passatoti sotāpattimaggapaññāpariyosānāya vipassanāpaññāya suṭṭhu passantassa. Evametāsanti etena upāyena etāsaṃ. Pahānaṃ paṭinissaggoti ubhayampetaṃ samucchedappahānassevādhivacanaṃ.
世尊这样被具寿大准陀问及“是不是仅仅依靠最初的作意,就能断除诸见呢”这个问题,是为了那些增上慢的人。世尊先说明了预流道能断除邪见,现在又亲自为增上慢者分析禅那的情况,于是说出了“然而,有一种情形”等话。这里所说的“增上慢者”,是指那些还没有证得却以为自己已经证得、因而生起增上慢的人。这种增上慢,既不会在随顺世间流转的愚痴凡夫身上生起,也不会在圣弟子身上生起。因为入流者不会生起“我是一来者”的增上慢,一来者不会生起“我是不来者”的增上慢,不来者不会生起“我是应供者”的增上慢。这种慢只会生起在这样一种修行者身上:他依靠止或观镇伏了烦恼,一直精勤努力,已经发起了观。因为他看不到被止镇伏或被观镇伏的烦恼现行,就会生起“我是入流者”“我是一来者”“我是不来者”“我是应供者”这样的增上慢,就像住在塔朗嘎拉帝萨山的法授长老教诫的那些长老一样。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā ādimanasikāreneva diṭṭhīnaṃ pahānaṃ hoti nu kho noti āyasmatā mahācundena adhimānikānaṃ vasena pañhaṃ puṭṭho sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhippahānaṃ dassetvā idāni sayameva adhimānikānaṃ jhānaṃ vibhajanto ṭhānaṃ kho panetantiādimāha. Tattha adhimānikā nāma yesaṃ appatte pattasaññāya adhimāno uppajjati, svāyaṃ uppajjamāno neva lokavaṭṭānusārīnaṃ bālaputhujjanānaṃ uppajjati, na ariyasāvakānaṃ. Na hi sotāpannassa ‘‘sakadāgāmī aha’’nti adhimāno uppajjati, na sakadāgāmissa ‘‘anāgāmī aha’’nti, na anāgāmino ‘‘arahā aha’’nti, kārakasseva pana samathavasena vā vipassanāvasena vā vikkhambhitakilesassa niccaṃ yuttapayuttassa āraddhavipassakassa uppajjati. Tassa hi samathavikkhambhitānaṃ vā vipassanāvikkhambhitānaṃ vā kilesānaṃ samudācāraṃ apassato ‘‘sotāpanno ahanti vā, sakadāgāmī, anāgāmī , arahā aha’’nti vā adhimāno uppajjati, talaṅgaratissapabbatavāsidhammadinnattherena ovādiyamānattherānaṃ viya.
据说,这位长老刚受具足戒不久,许多比丘依照他的教诫而住,便证得了殊胜的成就。住在帝沙大寺的比丘僧团听说了这件事,就说:“这位长老不会把人引到没有利益的地方,去把他请来吧。”于是派出了好些比丘。他们到了之后,说:“贤友法授,比丘僧团召请您。”他问:“诸位尊者,你们是在找自己,还是在找别人呢?”他们回答:“善士,我们是在找自己。”他就给他们传授了业处,他们全都证得了阿拉汉果。比丘僧团又派了别的比丘去,这样一直到第三次派去的比丘,也全都在那里证得阿拉汉果,住了下来。巴利
Therassa kira acirūpasampannasseva ovāde ṭhatvā bahū bhikkhū visesaṃ adhigacchiṃsu. Taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā tissamahāvihāravāsī bhikkhusaṅgho ‘‘na aṭṭhānaniyojako theroti theraṃ ānethā’’ti sambahule bhikkhū pāhesi. Te gantvā, ‘‘āvuso, dhammadinna bhikkhusaṅgho taṃ pakkosāpetī’’ti āhaṃsu. So āha ‘‘kiṃ pana tumhe, bhante, attānaṃ gavesatha para’’nti? Attānaṃ sappurisāti, so tesaṃ kammaṭṭhānamadāsi, sabbeva arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Bhikkhusaṅgho puna aññe bhikkhū pāhesi, evaṃ yāvatatiyaṃ pahitā sabbepi tattheva arahattaṃ patvā vihariṃsu.
于是僧团见派去的人一个个都不回来,就又派了一位年纪大的出家人去。他到了之后说:“尊者法授,住在帝沙大寺的比丘僧团已经三次派人到你这里来了。你竟然不把僧团的命令当回事,不肯来!”长老问:“什么事?”他连自己的叶屋都没进,就让人拿了钵和衣,立刻动身离开。走到半路,他进了汉卡那寺。那里有一位上座长老,戒腊已经超过六十年,因为增上慢而自称证得了阿拉汉果。法授长老走到他跟前,顶礼、问候之后,问他证得的境界。那位长老说:“是的,法授,出家人该做的事,我早就做完了,到现在已经六十多年了。”法授问:“尊者,您能运用神通吗?”他说:“能,法授。”法授说:“太好了,尊者,请您变出一头大象,正面向您冲过来。”长老说:“好的,贤友。”于是上座长老变出一头大白象,七处着地,三处流着液,甩着尾巴,把鼻子塞进嘴里,好像要用两根象牙刺穿似的,正面向他冲过来。他看见这头自己变出来的大象,吓得拔腿就跑。就在那一刻,他明白“我不是阿拉汉”,便蹲在法授脚前说:“贤友,请你做我的依靠吧!”法授说:“尊者,别忧愁,别不高兴,增上慢只会发生在还在修行的人身上。”他安慰了那位长老,然后给了他业处。那位长老依照他的教导去做,证得了阿拉汉果。巴利
Tato saṅgho gatagatā nāgacchantīti aññataraṃ vuḍḍhapabbajitaṃ pāhesi. So gantvā ca, ‘‘bhante, dhammadinna tikkhattuṃ tissamahāvihāravāsī bhikkhusaṅgho tuyhaṃ santike pesesi, tvaṃ nāma saṅghassa āṇaṃ garuṃ na karosi, nāgacchasī’’ti āha. Thero kimetanti paṇṇasālaṃ appavisitvāva pattacīvaraṃ gāhāpetvā tāvadeva nikkhami, so antarāmagge haṅkanavihāraṃ pāvisi. Tattha ceko mahāthero saṭṭhivassātīto adhimānena arahattaṃ paṭijānāti. Thero taṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā adhigamaṃ pucchi. Thero āha ‘‘āma dhammadinna, yaṃ pabbajitena kātabbaṃ, cirakataṃ taṃ mayā, atītasaṭṭhivassomhi etarahī’’ti. Kiṃ, bhante, iddhimpi vaḷañjethāti. Āma dhammadinnāti. Sādhu vata, bhante, hatthiṃ tumhākaṃ paṭimukhaṃ āgacchantaṃ māpethāti. Sādhāvusoti thero sabbasetaṃ sattappatiṭṭhaṃ tidhāpabhinnaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ bījayamānaṃ soṇḍaṃ mukhe pakkhipitvā dvīhi dantehi vijjhitukāmaṃ viya paṭimukhaṃ āgacchantaṃ mahāhatthiṃ māpesi. So taṃ attanāyeva māpitaṃ hatthiṃ disvā bhīto palāyituṃ ārabhi. Tadāva attānaṃ ‘‘nāhaṃ arahā’’ti ñatvā dhammadinnassa pādamūle ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā ‘‘patiṭṭhā me hohi, āvuso’’ti āha. Dhammadinno ‘‘mā, bhante, soci, mā anattamano ahosi, kārakānaṃyeva adhimāno uppajjatī’’ti theraṃ samassāsetvā kammaṭṭhānamadāsi. Thero tassovāde ṭhatvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.
在质多罗山上,也住着一位同样的长老。法授去拜访他,也同样向他提问,他也同样作了回答。于是法授对他说:“尊者,您也能施展神通吗?”他回答:“能,贤友。”法授说:“太好了,尊者,请您变出一座池塘。”长老就变了出来。“尊者,请在这里变出一丛莲花。”他也变了出来。“请在莲花丛中变出一朵大莲花。”他也变了出来。“请在这莲花丛中变出一个能歌善舞、声音美妙的女子形象。”他也变了出来。然后法授说:“尊者,请您反复注视这个。”说完,自己就进了楼阁。那位长老注视着她的时候,六十年间被镇伏的烦恼动摇了,他当下知道自己,就像前一位长老那样,在法授长老跟前取得业处,证得了阿拉汉果。巴利
Cittalapabbatepi tādisova thero vasati. Dhammadinno tampi upasaṅkamitvā tatheva pucchi. Sopi tatheva byākāsi. Tato naṃ dhammadinno kiṃ, bhante, iddhimpi vaḷañjethāti āha. Āmāvusoti. Sādhu vata, bhante, ekaṃ pokkharaṇiṃ māpethāti. Thero māpesi. Ettha, bhante, padumagumbaṃ māpethāti. Tampi māpesi. Padumagumbe mahāpadumaṃ māpethāti. Tampi māpesi. Etasmiṃ padumagumbe ṭhatvā madhurassarena gāyantaṃ naccantañca ekaṃ itthiviggahaṃ māpethāti. Tampi māpesi. So etaṃ, bhante, punappunaṃ upanijjhāyathāti vatvā sayaṃ pāsādaṃ pāvisi. Therassa taṃ upanijjhāyato saṭṭhivassāni vikkhambhitakilesā caliṃsu, so tadā attānaṃ ñatvā purimatthero viya dhammadinnattherassa santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.
法授也按顺序来到了帝沙大寺。那时候,长老们已经扫完塔院,以佛陀为所缘生起了喜悦,正坐在那里。据说这是他们的日常行持。因此,他们中没有一个人对法授说“把衣钵放在这里”,也没有人向他问讯。他们认出“这应该就是法授”,于是便向他提问。他回答所问时,像用利剑斩断一束睡莲茎一样犀利,然后用脚趾叩击大地,说:“尊者,这无心的大地尚且知道法授的功德,你们却不知道。”接着诵出了这个偈子——巴利
Dhammadinnopi anupubbena tissamahāvihāraṃ agamāsi. Tasmiñca samaye therā cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjitvā buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ uppādetvā nisinnā honti, etaṃ kira tesaṃ vattaṃ. Tena nesaṃ ekopi ‘‘idha pattacīvaraṃ ṭhapehī’’ti dhammadinnaṃ vattā pucchitāpi nāhosi. Dhammadinno eso bhaveyyāti ñatvā pana pañhaṃ pucchiṃsu. So pucchitapañhe tiṇhena asinā kumudanāḷakalāpaṃ viya chinditvā pādaṅguliyā mahāpathaviṃ pahari. Bhante ayaṃ acetanā mahāpathavīpi dhammadinnassa guṇaṃ jānāti. Tumhe pana na jānitthāti ca vatvā imaṃ gāthamāha –
无心识的大地能辨识善恶。
尊者,你们有心,却不知道什么是功德、什么是非功德。巴利
‘‘Acetanāyaṃ pathavī, vijānāti guṇāguṇaṃ; Sacetanātha kho bhante, na jānātha guṇāguṇa’’nti.
他当下就腾空飞起,直接去了多楞伽罗帝须山。增上慢就是这样在修行者心里生起来的。所以,世尊针对这类比丘,在分析禅那时,才说了“然而,这是处……”等这一段话。巴利
Tāvadeva ca ākāse abbhuggantvā talaṅgaratissapabbatameva agamāsi. Evaṃ kārakasseva adhimāno uppajjati. Tasmā bhagavā tādisānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vasena jhānaṃ vibhajanto ṭhānaṃ kho panetantiādimāha.
这句话的意思是:确实有这种情况,并非没有。有人可能会想:某位比丘像外道游行者一样,远离诸欲……成就初禅而住。但如果他因此认为“我以削减烦恼的方式而住”,把这种修行方式当成是在削减烦恼,那就不合理了。因为对有增上慢的比丘来说,禅那并不是削减烦恼,也不是削减烦恼的修行。为什么呢?因为这种禅那没有以观为基础。他进入禅那后,出来时并不观察诸行,禅那只是让他的心达到一境性,成为现法乐住。所以,为了说明这个道理,世尊说:“准陀,在圣者律中,这些不叫削减,在圣者律中,这些叫现法乐住。”巴利
Tassattho, atthetaṃ kāraṇaṃ, no natthi. Yena idhekacco bhikkhu bāhiraparibbājakehi sādhāraṇaṃ vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyya, yaṃ pana tassa evamassa sallekhena viharāmīti, yaṃ paṭipattividhānaṃ kilese saṃlikhati, tenāhaṃ viharāmīti, taṃ na yujjati, na hi adhimānikassa bhikkhuno jhānaṃ sallekho vā sallekhapaṭipadā vā hoti. Kasmā? Avipassanāpādakattā. Na hi so jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati, jhānaṃ panassa cittekaggamattaṃ karoti, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāro hoti. Tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘na kho panete, cunda, ariyassa vinaye sallekhā vuccanti, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārā ete ariyassa vinaye vuccantī’’ti āha.
在这里,“这些”要理解为复数,这是就禅那法而言的,也就是说,指的是“这些初禅法”。或者也可以就等至而言:因为即使只是一种初禅,也会由于反复进入等至而持续生起,所以就成了多数。或者也可以就所缘而言:因为即使只是一种初禅,也会由于在地遍等不同所缘上生起而成为多数。这个道理也适用于第二、第三、第四禅。但在无色禅中,由于所缘没有差别,所以只能根据前面两种原因来理解复数。巴利
Tattha eteti jhānadhammavasena bahuvacanaṃ veditabbaṃ, ete paṭhamajjhānadhammāti vuttaṃ hoti. Samāpattivasena vā, ekampi hi paṭhamajjhānaṃ punappunaṃ samāpattivasena pavattattā bahuttaṃ gacchati. Ārammaṇavasena vā, ekampi hi paṭhamajjhānaṃ pathavīkasiṇādīsu pavattivasena bahuttaṃ gacchatīti. Esa nayo dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānesu. Āruppajhānesu pana ārammaṇabhedābhāvato purimakāraṇadvayavaseneva bahuvacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
因为,这些禅那的支和所缘都是寂静的——也就是说,它们既已寂灭又微细,所以那四个禅那被称为“寂静住”,应当这样理解。以上是这四个禅那共同的注释。至于分别的注释,则应依照“完全超越了色想”等经文语句来说明。这在《清净道论》中已经全面解说过。巴利
Yasmā cetesaṃ aṅgānipi santāni ārammaṇānipi, nibbutāni ceva sukhumāni cāti vuttaṃ hoti, tasmā tāni santā ete vihārāti evaṃ vuttānīti veditabbāni. Ayaṃ tāva tesaṃ catunnampi sādhāraṇā vaṇṇanā. Visesavaṇṇanā pana ‘‘sabbaso rūpasaññāna’’ntiādipadānusārato vattabbā siyā. Sā visuddhimagge sabbākārena vuttāyeva.
83 正因为增上慢比丘的禅那住不以观为基础,所以不是削减住。因为他进入禅那之后,并不会从禅那中出来去观照诸行,只是让心得一境性,这对他来说就成了现法乐住。因此,为了说明这个道理,先把色界禅和无色界禅分别开来,接着为了指出应当在何处、以四十四种方式做削减,以及削减的对象和削减本身,经文才接着说“然而,在此……”等等。巴利
83. Evaṃ yasmā adhimānikassa bhikkhuno jhānavihāro avipassanāpādakattā sallekhavihāro na hoti, na hi so jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati, cittekaggakaro diṭṭhadhamme sukhavihāro panassa hoti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento rūpajjhānāni ca arūpajjhānāni ca vibhajitvā idāni ca yattha sallekho kātabbo catucattālīsāya ākārehi, tañca vatthuṃ tañca sallekhaṃ dassento idha kho pana votiādimāha.
为什么又说“在八种等至中,无害等才是减损”呢?因为它们是出世间的根基。对外道来说,八种等至只是轮回的根基;而在佛陀的教法中,连皈依都是出世间的根基,更何况无害等这些品质。也应当通过这部经来理解:“就像对一位证得八等至、又具五神通的外道布施,比起对佛教中已皈依的人布施,后者果报更大。”《施清净经》正是针对这一点说:“对已远离欲贪的外道布施,可预期获得百千俱胝倍的果报;对正在为证得入流果而修行的人布施,可预期获得无数、不可测量的布施果报,更何况对已证入流果的人。”因为从皈依开始,那里指的就是正在为证得入流果而修行的人。以上是这一段经文的衔接。巴利
Kasmā pana ‘‘aṭṭhahi samāpattīhi avihiṃsādayo sallekhā’’ti vuttā? Lokuttarapādakattā. Bāhirakānañhi aṭṭha samāpattiyo vaṭṭapādakāyeva. Sāsane saraṇagamanampi lokuttarapādakaṃ, pageva avihiṃsādayo. Imināyeva ca suttena veditabbaṃ ‘‘yathā bāhirakassa aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino pañcābhiññassāpi dinnadānato sāsane tisaraṇagatassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ hotī’’ti. Idañhi sandhāya dakkhiṇāvisuddhisutte ‘‘bāhirake kāmesu vītarāge dānaṃ datvā koṭisatasahassaguṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṃ datvā asaṅkheyyā appameyyā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, ko pana vādo sotāpanne’’ti vuttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.379). Saraṇagamanato paṭṭhāya hi tattha sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno adhippetoti, ayaṃ tāvettha pāḷiyojanā.
不过在逐词注释里,“在此”这个词是指明害心等事。“但是”只是一个语气助词。“你们”是表示工具意义的属格。简略的意思是这样的:我们以“他人将会成为害心者”等等方式,来说明害心等事。在此,准陀,你们应当实行削减。巴利
Anupadavaṇṇanāyaṃ pana idhāti vihiṃsādivatthudīpanametaṃ. Kho panāti nipātamattaṃ. Voti karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, ayaṃ pana saṅkhepattho, yadetaṃ ‘‘pare vihiṃsakā bhavissantī’’tiādinā nayena vihiṃsādivatthuṃ vadāma. Idha, cunda, tumhehi sallekho kātabboti.
这样简略地说完之后,现在再详细展开,说道:“其他人将会成为不伤害者,而我们在这里要成为不伤害者——应当实行削减”等等。巴利
Evaṃ saṅkhepato vatvā idāni vitthārento ‘‘pare vihiṃsakā bhavissanti, mayamettha avihiṃsakā bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“其他人”指的是任何未致力于这种削减修行的人。“他们将成为伤害者”,意思是他们会用手、土块等东西去伤害众生。“我们在这里要成为不伤害者”,意思是:在其他人会成为伤害者的那种情形下,我们反而要成为不伤害者,生起无害之心并安住其中。因此,“削减应当被实行”——你们就应当这样去实行削减。而这里所说的“削减”,应当理解为就是“无害”。因为无害确实能削减伤害、断除伤害,所以被称为“削减”。这个道理在一切地方都适用。但这里有一个特别之处:“其他人是邪见者”——应当知道,这是把业道中排在最后的邪见,和邪性中排在最前面的邪见合在一起,统称为“见”。同样,在说“我们在这里是正见者”的地方,说的就是正见。这里关于业道的讨论,将在《正见经》中详细说明;而邪性中的邪见等,则在《二种寻思》中(说明)。巴利
Tattha pareti ye keci imaṃ sallekhamananuyuttā. Vihiṃsakā bhavissantīti pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vātiādīhi sattānaṃ vihesakā bhavissanti. Mayamettha avihiṃsakā bhavissāmāti mayaṃ pana yattheva vatthusmiṃ pare evaṃ vihiṃsakā bhavissanti, ettheva avihiṃsakā bhavissāma, avihiṃsaṃ uppādetvā viharissāma. Iti sallekho karaṇīyoti evaṃ tumhehi sallekho kātabbo . Sallekhoti ca idha avihiṃsāva veditabbā. Avihiṃsā hi vihiṃsaṃ sallekhati, taṃ chindati, tasmā sallekhoti vuccati. Esa nayo sabbattha. Ayaṃ pana viseso. Pare micchādiṭṭhīti ettha kammapathānaṃ antamicchādiṭṭhiñca micchattānaṃ ādimicchādiṭṭhiñca missetvā diṭṭhi vuttāti veditabbā. Tathā mayamettha sammādiṭṭhīti vuttaṭṭhāne sammādiṭṭhi. Ettha ca kammapathakathā vitthārato sammādiṭṭhisutte āvi bhavissati. Micchattesu micchādiṭṭhiādayo dvedhāvitakke.
这里再做个简要说明。杀生,就是杀害生命,所以叫杀生者。不与取,就是拿走别人没给的东西,所以叫不与取者,意思是偷取他人的财物。行非梵行,就是做卑劣下贱的事,所以叫非梵行者,意思是从事淫欲之事。行梵行,就是行最殊胜的道,所以叫梵行者,意思是远离淫欲。这里还应知道,梵行就是削减,因为梵行能削减非梵行。妄语,就是说破坏他人利益、空洞不实的话,所以叫妄语者。离间语,是指对他人说挑拨离间的话。粗恶语,是指对他人说刺伤痛处的话。杂秽语,是指说无意义、没用的废话。贪欲,是指常常贪求他人财物。瞋心,是指内心败坏、污浊。邪见,是指持有邪恶、被智者呵责的见解,也就是具备业道所摄的、以“没有布施”等为根据的邪见,以及属于邪性所摄、不能导向出离的见解。正见,是指持有善妙、被智者赞叹的见解,也就是具备业道所摄的、以“有布施”等为根据的业果正见,以及属于正性所摄的圣道正见。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo, pāṇaṃ atipātentīti pāṇātipātī pāṇaghātakāti attho. Adinnaṃ ādiyantīti adinnādāyī, parassa hārinoti attho. Abrahmaṃ hīnaṃ lāmakadhammaṃ carantīti abrahmacārī, methunadhammappaṭisevakāti attho. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ paṭipadaṃ carantīti brahmacārī, methunā paṭiviratāti attho. Ettha ca brahmacariyaṃ sallekhoti veditabbaṃ. Brahmacariyañhi abrahmacariyaṃ sallekhati. Musā vadantīti musāvādī, paresaṃ atthabhañjanakaṃ tucchaṃ alikaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāroti attho. Pisuṇā vācā etesanti pisuṇavācā. Paresaṃ mammacchedikā pharusā vācā etesanti pharusavācā. Samphaṃ niratthakavacanaṃ palapantīti samphappalāpī. Abhijjhāyantīti abhijjhālū, parabhaṇḍalubbhanasīlāti attho. Byāpannaṃ pūtibhūtaṃ cittametesanti byāpannacittā. Micchā pāpikā viññugarahitā etesaṃ diṭṭhīti micchādiṭṭhī, kammapathapariyāpannāya natthi dinnantiādivatthukāya, micchattapariyāpannāya aniyyānikadiṭṭhiyā ca samannāgatāti attho. Sammā sobhanā viññuppasatthā etesaṃ diṭṭhīti sammādiṭṭhī, kammapathapariyāpannāya atthi dinnantiādikāya kammassakatādiṭṭhiyā, sammattapariyāpannāya maggadiṭṭhiyā ca samannāgatāti attho.
邪思惟是指不真实、不导向出离的不善思惟。这个道理也适用于邪语等项。但这里有一个差别:和邪思惟等不同,并没有一个单独叫邪念的法存在,它其实是对回忆过去时所生起的四种不善蕴的称呼。世尊也说过:“比丘们,这种随念是存在的,我不是说它不存在;比丘们,随念得子、随念得财、随念得荣誉。”这段话应当理解为:是在说种种思惟时,以类似念的形态生起。关于邪智:这里邪智应当理解为,在造恶时以谋划手段的方式生起的愚痴,以及作恶之后以“我做得很好”这种方式省察时生起的愚痴。具足这种愚痴的人就是邪智者。关于正智:这里,具有十九种分类的省察智称为正智,具足这种省察智的人就是正智者。关于邪解脱:指那些本来并未解脱,却认为自己“我们解脱了”的人,或者对未解脱的状态生起解脱想的人。这里的词义是:他们有邪谬、罪恶、颠倒的解脱,所以叫邪解脱。邪解脱也是对如上所说的方式生起的不善蕴的称呼。而除了与果相应的正见等八支之外,其余的法应当理解为正解脱。正解脱因为削除了邪解脱而安住,所以应当理解为削减。在这里劝导时说道:我们应当在这里成就正解脱,因此要作削减。巴利
Micchāsaṅkappāti ayāthāvaaniyyānikaakusalasaṅkappā. Esa nayo micchāvācātiādīsu. Ayaṃ pana viseso, micchāsaṅkappādayo viya hi micchāsati nāma pāṭiekko koci dhammo natthi, atītaṃ pana cintayato pavattānaṃ catunnampi akusalakkhandhānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yampi vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘atthesā, bhikkhave, anussati, nesā natthīti vadāmi, puttalābhaṃ vā, bhikkhave, anussarato, dhanalābhaṃ vā, bhikkhave, anussarato, yasalābhaṃ vā, bhikkhave, anussarato’’ti, tampi taṃ taṃ cintentassa satipatirūpakena uppattiṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ . Micchāñāṇīti ettha ca micchāñāṇanti pāpakiriyāsu upāyacintāvasena pāpaṃ katvā ‘‘sukataṃ mayā’’ti paccavekkhaṇākārena ca uppanno moho veditabbo, tena samannāgatā puggalā micchāñāṇī. Sammāñāṇīti ettha pana ekūnavīsatibhedaṃ paccavekkhaṇāñāṇaṃ ‘‘sammāñāṇa’’nti vuccati, tena samannāgatā puggalā sammāñāṇī. Micchāvimuttīti avimuttāyeva samānā ‘‘vimuttā maya’’nti evaṃsaññino, avimuttiyaṃ vā vimuttisaññino. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho, micchā pāpikā viparītā vimutti etesaṃ atthīti micchāvimuttī. Micchāvimuttīti ca yathāvuttenākārena pavattānaṃ akusalakkhandhānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Phalasampayuttāni pana sammādiṭṭhiādīni aṭṭhaṅgāni ṭhapetvā sesadhammā sammāvimuttīti veditabbā. Sā ca micchāvimuttiṃ sallikhitvā ṭhitattā sallekhoti veditabbā. Tattha niyojento āha ‘‘mayamettha sammāvimuttī bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo’’ti.
从这里往后,有三种是依盖来说的。不过,因为“贪欲者、嗔怒心者”等在业道中已经说过,所以应当知道,这里没有提到最初两种盖。其中,被昏沉睡眠所缠缚、所压倒的,就是被昏沉睡眠所缠缚。具有掉举的,就是掉举者。在观察思惟时感到困难、无法作出决断的,就是疑者。“忿怒者”等十种,是依心的染污来说的。其中,关于忿怒等应当说明的内容,在《法嗣根本经》等中都已经说过。这里再说明词义:“忿怒者”是指有忿怒习性的人。“怀恨者”是指有怀恨习性的人,或谓其有怀恨,故称怀恨者。“欺诈者”和“谄媚者”也是如此。“嫉妒者”是指妒忌之人。“悭吝者”是指吝啬之人,或谓其有悭吝,故称悭吝者。“诳惑者”是指奸诈之人,即不说正直之语、惯用机巧诡计者之称谓。“谄媚者”是指具有谄媚之人。因固执之故,为固执者。因大慢相应之故,为大慢者。依与所说相反之方式,应知白分。巴利
Ito parāni tīṇi nīvaraṇavasena vuttāni. Abhijjhālū byāpannacittāti evaṃ kammapathesu vuttattā panettha paṭhamāni dve nīvaraṇāni na vuttānīti veditabbāni. Tattha thinamiddhena pariyuṭṭhitā abhibhūtāti thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitā. Uddhaccena samannāgatāti uddhatā. Vicinantā kicchanti na sakkonti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kātunti vicikicchī. Kodhanātiādīni dasa cittassa upakkilesavasena vuttāni. Tattha kodhādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ dhammadāyādavatthasuttesu vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – kodhanāti kujjhanasīlā. Upanāhīti upanāhanasīlā, upanāho vā etesaṃ atthīti upanāhī. Tathā makkhī palāsī ca. Issantīti issukī. Maccharāyantīti maccharī, maccheraṃ vā etesaṃ atthīti maccharī. Saṭhayantīti saṭhā, na sammā bhāsantīti vuttaṃ hoti, kerāṭikayuttānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Māyā etesaṃ atthīti māyāvī. Thambhasamaṅgitāya thaddhā. Atimānayogena atimānī. Vuttapaccanīkanayena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
难教者:说话时很难劝说,不管别人怎么劝,他们都接受不了。与此相反的是“易教者”。像提婆达多那样的人,是他们的“恶友”;像佛陀或舍利弗那样的人,是他们的“善知识”。在身恶行等事上,因为放任自心,所以叫“放逸者”;相反则应知道是“不放逸者”。这三种是作为杂项来说的。
“不信者”等七种,则是按非法来说的。其中,对三宝等处没有信心,所以叫“不信者”。在善的一面,有信心就叫“信者”;或者说他们有信心,所以也叫“信者”。没有惭耻,叫“无惭者”,这是指对不善法等的生起不感到厌恶的人。心中有惭耻,或者心与惭耻相应,叫“有惭者”。不害怕造恶,叫“无愧者”,意思是说对不善法等的生起不感到恐惧。与此相反的是“有愧者”。听闻很少,叫“少闻者”;这里的“少”不能理解成“一点点”,而应理解成“没有”,因为“少闻者”是指没有听闻、缺乏教法的人。听闻很多,叫“多闻者”,这是指即使只如实了解一首如来所说的偈颂,也能照着去实践的人。因为卑劣而停滞,叫“懈怠者”,这是对精进低劣者的称呼。已经发起精进,叫“勤精进者”,这是对真正投入正勤者的称呼。忘失正念,叫“失念者”,意思是正念已经丢失。正念现前,叫“具念者”,这是指正念经常朝向所缘而运作的人。智慧败坏,叫“恶慧者”,意思是智慧已经丢失。具足智慧,叫“具慧者”;这里的“智慧”应理解为观慧。因为在这个地方,观慧的资粮已经圆满,所以古代长老们的教诫就是:这里所说的正是观慧。巴利
Dubbacāti vattuṃ dukkhā kiñci vuccamānā na sahanti. Tabbiparītā suvacā. Devadattādisadisā pāpakā mittā etesanti pāpamittā. Buddhā vā sāriputtādisadisā vā kalyāṇā mittā etesanti kalyāṇamittā. Kāyaduccaritādīsu cittavossaggavasena pamattā. Viparītā appamattāti veditabbā. Imāni tīṇi pakiṇṇakavasena vuttāni. Assaddhātiādīni satta asaddhammavasena. Tattha tīsu vatthūsu saddhā etesaṃ natthīti assaddhā. Sukkapakkhe saddahantīti saddhā, saddhā vā etesaṃ atthītipi saddhā. Natthi etesaṃ hirīti ahirikā, akusalasamāpattiyā ajigucchamānānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Hirī etesaṃ mane, hiriyā vā yuttamanāti hirimanā. Na ottappantīti anottappī, akusalasamāpattiyā na bhāyantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tabbiparītā ottappī. Appaṃ sutametesanti appassutā, appanti ca thokanti na gahetabbaṃ, natthīti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Appassutā’’ti hi nissutā sutavirahitā vuccanti. Bahu sutametesanti bahussutā, tathāgatabhāsitaṃ ekampi gāthaṃ yāthāvato ñatvā anurūpapaṭipannānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Kucchitā sīdantīti kusītā, hīnavīriyānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Āraddhaṃ vīriyametesanti āraddhavīriyā, sammappadhānayuttānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ, muṭṭhā sati etesanti muṭṭhassatī, naṭṭhassatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Upaṭṭhitā sati etesanti upaṭṭhitassatī, niccaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhappavattasatīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Duṭṭhā paññā etesanti duppaññā, naṭṭhapaññāti vuttaṃ hoti. Paññāya sampannāti paññāsampannā, paññāti ca idha vipassanāpaññā veditabbā. Vipassanāsambhāro hi paripūro imasmiṃ ṭhāne āgato, tasmā vipassanāpaññāva ayanti porāṇānaṃ āṇā.
现在,为了说明那唯一能障碍出世间功德、不导向解脱的邪见,以三种方式开示“执取自见者”等。其中,执取自己的见解,就是“执取自见者”。牢牢抓住不放,就是“坚执者”;“坚执”意思是牢固,所以“坚执者”就是牢牢抓住的人。见到合理的理由后就放弃自己见解的,就是“舍弃者”;以苦、以难、以费力,即使举出很多理由,也无法使其舍弃,就是“难舍弃者”。这是对那些把自己生起的见解牢牢执为“只有这才是真理”,即使佛陀等人举出理由来劝说,也不肯放弃的人的说法。因为这样的人,无论执取的是法还是非法,都会像乌龟把四肢收进自己的壳里一样,把这一切全都收进去,说“我的老师们是这样说的”“我们是这样听来的”,然后像鳄鱼咬住东西一样死死抓住,不肯放开。与此相反的一面,应当按相反的意思来理解。巴利
Idāni ekameva lokuttaraguṇānaṃ antarāyakaraṃ aniyyānikadiṭṭhiṃ tīhākārehi dassento sandiṭṭhiparāmāsītiādimāha. Tattha sandiṭṭhiṃ parāmasantīti sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī. Ādhānaṃ gaṇhantīti ādhānaggāhī, ādhānanti daḷhaṃ vuccati, daḷhaggāhīti attho. Yuttakāraṇaṃ disvāva laddhiṃ paṭinissajjantīti paṭinissaggī, dukkhena kicchena kasirena bahumpi kāraṇaṃ dassetvā na sakkā paṭinissaggaṃ kātunti duppaṭinissaggī, ye attano uppannaṃ diṭṭhiṃ idameva saccanti daḷhaṃ gaṇhitvā api buddhādīhi kāraṇaṃ dassetvā vuccamānā na paṭinissajjanti, tesametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tādisā hi puggalā yaṃ yadeva dhammaṃ vā adhammaṃ vā gaṇhanti, taṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘evaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyehi kathitaṃ, evaṃ amhehi suta’’nti kummova aṅgāni sake kapāle antoyeva samodahanti, kumbhīlaggāhaṃ gaṇhanti na vissajjanti. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
84 就这样,用四十四种方式说明了削减之后,现在为了说明在这种削减中心念的生起也有很大帮助,所以说了“心念的生起确实……”等话。巴利
84. Evaṃ catucattālīsāya ākārehi sallekhaṃ dassetvā idāni tasmiṃ sallekhe cittuppādassāpi bahūpakārataṃ dassetuṃ cittuppādampi kho ahantiādimāha.
它的意思是:准陀,我说,在诸善法中,即使只是心的生起,也有很大的帮助;更何况那些以身和语随顺而行的事——比如,当最初的心生起时,就照那样用身体去实行那些法,或者用语言命令“去做”,或者学习、反复询问等——在这里,还用多说吗?这是在显示:那些随顺而行的事确实一向都有很大的帮助。那么,为什么这里心的生起也有很大的帮助呢?因为它一向带来利益和安乐,而且是那些随顺而行之事的因。巴利
Tassattho , ahaṃ, cunda, kusalesu dhammesu cittuppādampi bahūpakāraṃ vadāmi, yā panetā kāyena ca vācāya ca anuvidhiyanā, yathā paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ, tatheva tesaṃ dhammānaṃ kāyena karaṇaṃ, vācāya ca ‘‘karothā’’ti āṇāpanaṃ vā, uggahaparipucchādīni vā, tattha vādoyeva ko, ekantabahūpakārāyeva hi tā anuvidhiyanāti dasseti. Kasmā panettha cittuppādopi bahūpakāroti? Ekantahitasukhāvahattā anuvidhiyanānaṃ hetuttā ca.
确实,“我要布施”这样的心生起时,这个心本身就能带来纯粹的利益和安乐,而且也是后续行动的因。正因为生起了这样的心,他才会在第二天封住大路,搭起大帐篷,向一百位比丘或一千位比丘布施,并吩咐身边的人:“去邀请比丘僧团,供养他们,款待他们!”同样,“我要布施僧团衣服、住处、药物”这样的心生起时,这个心本身也能带来纯粹的利益和安乐,并且成为后续行动的因。正因为生起了这样的心,他才会准备衣服等物品,亲自布施,也让人布施。这个道理同样适用于皈依等情形。巴利
‘‘Dānaṃ dassāmī’’ti hi cittuppādo sayampi ekantahitasukhāvaho anuvidhiyanānampi hetu, evañhi uppannacittattāyeva dutiyadivase mahāvīthiṃ pidahitvā mahāmaṇḍapaṃ katvā bhikkhusatassa vā bhikkhusahassassa vā dānaṃ deti, ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nimantetha pūjetha parivisathā’’ti parijane āṇāpeti. Evaṃ ‘‘saṅghassa cīvaraṃ senāsanaṃ bhesajjaṃ dassāmī’’ti cittuppādo sayampi ekantahitasukhāvaho anuvidhiyanānampi hetu, evaṃ uppannacittattāyeva hi cīvarādīni abhisaṅkharoti deti dāpeti ca. Esa nayo saraṇagamanādīsu.
确实,先在心里生起“我皈依”这个念头,然后才以身或口领受皈依。同样,先在心里生起“我要受持五支、八支或十支戒”这个念头,然后才以身或口受持;先在心里生起“出家后,我要在四种戒上安住”这个念头,然后以身和口去圆满应当圆满的戒。先在心里生起“我要学习佛语”这个念头,然后才以口学习一部、两部、三部、四部或五部尼柯耶。同样地,头陀支的受持、业处的取用、遍的准备、禅那的等至、观、道果、辟支菩提、正等正觉,也都应当这样来理解。巴利
‘‘Saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti hi cittaṃ uppādetvāva pacchā kāyena vā vācāya vā saraṇaṃ gaṇhāti. Tathā ‘‘pañcaṅgaṃ aṭṭhaṅgaṃ dasaṅgaṃ vā sīlaṃ samādiyissāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā kāyena vā vācāya vā samādiyati, ‘‘pabbajitvā catūsu sīlesu patiṭṭhahissāmī’’ti ca cittaṃ uppādetvā kāyena vācāya ca pūretabbaṃ sīlaṃ pūreti. ‘‘Buddhavacanaṃ uggahessāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvāva ekaṃ vā nikāyaṃ dve vā tayo vā cattāro vā pañca vā nikāye vācāya uggaṇhāti. Evaṃ dhutaṅgasamādāna-kammaṭṭhānuggaha-kasiṇaparikamma-jhānasamāpattivipassanāmaggaphala- paccekabodhi-sammāsambodhivasena netabbaṃ.
“我将成佛”这个心的生起,本身就带来纯粹的利益和安乐,也是随后随顺践行的因。正是因为生起了这样的心,他后来才在四阿僧祇劫又十万劫那么长的时间里,用身体和语言圆满各种波罗蜜,游化世间,度化包括天人在内的一切众生。这样看来,在任何情况下,心的生起都有大利益。不过要知道,用身体和语言去实际践行,利益就更大了。巴利
‘‘Buddho bhavissāmī’’ti hi cittuppādo sayampi ekantahitasukhāvaho anuvidhiyanānampi hetu, evañhi uppannacittattāyeva aparena samayena kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni kāyena vācāya ca pāramiyo pūretvā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ tārento vicarati. Evaṃ sabbattha cittuppādopi bahūpakāro. Kāyavācāhi pana anuvidhiyanā atibahūpakārāyevāti veditabbā.
像这样说明了在善法中心生起也有大利益之后,现在敦促人投入其中,便说了“因此,准陀啊……”等话。这话的意思本身就很明白。巴利
Evaṃ kusalesu dhammesu cittuppādassāpi bahūpakārataṃ dassetvā idāni tattha niyojento ‘‘tasmā tiha cundā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ atthato pākaṭameva.
85 已经用四十四种方式说明了减损,也说明了即使只是生起心念也有很大帮助。现在,为了指出这减损本身就是达成利益的道路,世尊说了“譬如……”等话。巴利
85. Evaṃ catucattālīsāya ākārehi dassite sallekhe cittuppādassāpi bahūpakārataṃ dassetvā idāni tasseva sallekhassa hitādhigamāya maggabhāvaṃ dassento seyyathāpītiādimāha.
它的意思是:准陀,就像有一条路因为树桩、荆棘、石头等而崎岖不平,为了绕开它、避开它,另有一片像经过精心平整的土地那样平坦的路;又像有一处渡口,被树根、岩石、悬崖、鳄鱼和摩伽罗等弄得十分凶险,为了绕开它、避开它,另有一处不凶险、渐渐变深、像阶梯板一样的渡口,走上那处渡口的人就能轻松地进入那条河或湖里沐浴,或者渡到对岸。同样地,准陀,对于具有伤害心、与崎岖道路和凶险渡口相似的伤害所具备的害人者来说,为了避开它,就有与平坦道路和平坦渡口相似的无害。正如为了避开崎岖道路和凶险渡口而准备了平坦的道路和渡口,为了避开伤害而准备了无害,也是这样;依此而行,就能轻松地进入人间或天界,享受福报,或者超越世间。所有的词句都应当用同样的方法来连接理解。巴利
Tassattho , yathā nāma, cunda, khāṇukaṇṭakapāsāṇādīhi visamo maggo bhaveyya, tassa parikkamanāya parivajjanatthāya añño suparikammakato viya bhūmibhāgo samo maggo bhaveyya, yathā ca rukkhamūlapāsāṇapapātakumbhīlamakarādi paribyākulaṃ visamaṃ titthamassa, tassa parikkamanāya parivajjanatthāya aññaṃ avisamaṃ anupubbagambhīraṃ sopānaphalakasadisaṃ titthaṃ bhaveyya, yaṃ paṭipanno sukheneva taṃ nadiṃ vā taḷākaṃ vā ajjhogāhetvā nhāyeyya vā uttareyya vā, evameva kho, cunda, visamamaggavisamatitthasadisāya vihiṃsāya samannāgatassa vihiṃsakapuggalassa samamaggasamatitthasadisā avihiṃsā hoti parikkamanāya. Yatheva hi visamamaggatitthaparivajjanatthāya samo maggo ca titthañca paṭiyattaṃ, evaṃ vihiṃsāparivajjanatthāya avihiṃsā paṭiyattā, yaṃ paṭipanno sukheneva manussagatiṃ vā devagatiṃ vā ajjhogāhetvā sampattiṃ vā anubhaveyya uttareyya vā lokā. Eteneva upāyena sabbapadāni yojetabbāni.
86 86. 这样,为了显示那本身利益证得的道路性,现在显示其上部趋向性,说了“譬如”等话。巴利
86. Evaṃ tasseva hitādhigamāya maggabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni uparibhāgaṅgamanīyataṃ dassento, seyyathāpītiādimāha.
它的意思是:准陀,就像所有不善法——不论它们是不是能导致结生的因,也不论在结生时是不是能产生异熟的因——因为异熟时会带来不可意、不可爱的果报,所以都按它们的种类被称为“导向下堕”;同样,所有善法——不论它们是不是能导致结生的因,也不论在结生时是不是能产生异熟的因——因为异熟时会带来可意、可爱的果报,所以都按它们的种类被称为“导向上升”。准陀,害人者也是如此……导向上升。这里有一个譬喻的对应:就像一切不善都导向下堕,害人者那一分害也同样如此;就像一切善都导向上升,无害者那一分无害也同样如此。应当用同样的方式,以不善类比不善,以善类比善,这就是此处的意趣所在。巴利
Tassattho, yathā nāma, cunda, ye keci akusalā dhammā paṭisandhiyā janakā vā ajanakā vā, dinnāyapi paṭisandhiyā vipākajanakā vā ajanakā vā, sabbe te jātivasena adhobhāgaṅgamanīyāti evaṃnāmāva honti, vipākakāle aniṭṭhākantavipākattā. Yathā ca ye keci kusalā dhammā paṭisandhiyā janakā vā ajanakā vā dinnāyapi paṭisandhiyā vipākajanakā vā ajanakā vā, sabbe te jātivasena uparibhāgaṅgamanīyāti evaṃnāmāva honti, vipākakāle iṭṭhakantavipākattā, evameva kho, cunda, vihiṃsakassa…pe… uparibhāgāyāti. Tatrāyaṃ opammasaṃsandanā – yathā sabbe akusalā adhobhāgaṅgamanīyā, evaṃ vihiṃsakassa ekā vihiṃsāpi. Yathā ca sabbe kusalā uparibhāgaṅgamanīyā, evaṃ avihiṃsakassa ekā avihiṃsāpi. Eteneva upāyena akusalaṃ akusalena kusalañca kusalena upametabbaṃ, ayaṃ kirettha adhippāyoti.
87 87. 这样显示了这减损法能导向上升之后,现在为了显示它有能力导向般涅槃,世尊说了“准陀,他确实……”等话。其中,“他”是指前面所说的那种人。引出“对此”这个提示语之后,应当知道一切文句是这样关联的:准陀,一个人自己陷在泥沼里,他确实能拉起另一个陷在泥沼里的人。所谓“陷在泥沼里”,是说沉没在深泥中的人,但在圣者的律中不是这样。在圣者的律中,泥沼是指五种欲,陷在泥沼里是指沉溺其中的愚痴凡夫。所以这里的意义应当这样理解:准陀,就像有人自己沉没在深及鼻子的泥沼里,却想抓住另一个同样沉没在那里的人的手或头把他拉起来,这是不可能的,因为并没有能让他把那人拉起来并站到干地上的条件;同样,一个人自己陷在五种欲的泥沼里,他确实能拉起另一个同样陷在泥沼里的人,这是不可能的。巴利
87. Evaṃ tasseva sallekhassa uparibhāgaṅgamanīyataṃ dassetvā idāni parinibbāpane samatthabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ so vata cundātiādimāha. Tattha soti vuttappakārapuggalaniddeso. Tassa yoti imaṃ uddesavacanaṃ āharitvā yo attanā palipapalipanno, so vata, cunda, paraṃ palipapalipannaṃ uddharissatīti evaṃ sabbapadesu sambandho veditabbo. Palipapalipannoti gambhīrakaddame nimuggo vuccati, no ca kho ariyassa vinaye. Ariyassa pana vinaye palipanti pañca kāmaguṇā vuccanti. Palipannoti tattha nimuggo bālaputhujjano, tasmā evamettha atthayojanā veditabbā. Yathā, cunda, koci puriso yāva nāsikaggā gambhīre kaddame nimuggo aparaṃ tattheva nimuggaṃ hatthe vā sīse vā gahetvā uddharissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati, na hi taṃ kāraṇamatthi, yena so taṃ uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhapeyya, evameva yo attanā pañcakāmaguṇapalipe palipanno, so vata paraṃ tatheva palipapalipannaṃ uddharissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati.
这里或许会有人觉得不合理:凡夫比丘、比丘尼、近事男、近事女听了说法之后,确实也有人通达了法,所以陷入泥沼的人也能把别人拉出来。但这种想法不能这样看。实际上,在那个情形里,是世尊在救拔,说法的人只是得到称赞而已,就像替国王读信的人一样。比如国王把信送到边境,那里的人不识字,就请识字的人来读,听了内容之后,他们恭敬地照办,说这是国王的命令,而不会认为这是读信人的命令。读信的人只是因为用流利、不结巴的语言读出来而得到称赞。同样,虽然舍利弗等说法者宣说法,但他们就像朗读写在贝叶上文字的人,那佛法的开示其实是世尊的,就像国王的命令一样。那些听了之后通达法的人,应当知道是世尊在救拔他们。说法者只是因为用流利、不结巴的语言说法而得到称赞。因此,这是合理的。至于白分,则按相反的方式理解。巴利
Tattha siyā ayuttametaṃ, puthujjanānampi bhikkhubhikkhunīupāsakaupāsikānaṃ dhammadesanaṃ sutvā hontiyeva dhammaṃ abhisametāro, tasmā palipapalipanno uddharatīti, taṃ na tathā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bhagavāyeva hi tattha uddharati, pasaṃsāmattameva pana dhammakathikā labhanti raññā pahitalekhavācako viya. Yathā hi rañño paccantajanapade pahitaṃ lekhaṃ tattha manussā lekhaṃ vācetuṃ ajānantā yo vācetuṃ jānāti, tena vācāpetvā tamatthaṃ sutvā ‘‘rañño āṇā’’ti ādarena sampādenti, na ca nesaṃ hoti ‘‘lekhavācakassa ayaṃ āṇā’’ti. Lekhavācako pana ‘‘vissaṭṭhāya vācāya vācesi anelagaḷāyā’’ti pasaṃsāmattameva labhati, evameva kiñcāpi sāriputtapabhutayo dhammakathikā dhammaṃ desenti, atha kho likhitapaṇṇavācako viya te honti. Bhagavatoyeva pana sā dhammadesanā rañño āṇā viya. Ye ca taṃ sutvā dhammaṃ abhisamenti, te bhagavāyeva uddharatīti veditabbā. Dhammakathikā pana ‘‘vissaṭṭhāya vācāya dhammaṃ desenti anelagaḷāyā’’ti pasaṃsāmattameva labhantīti. Tasmā yuttamevetanti. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
对于“未调伏、未调御、未般涅槃”这几个词,在这里应当这样理解:因为还没有去除烦恼之毒,所以是“未调伏”;因为还没有修学律仪,所以是“未调御”;因为烦恼还没有止息,所以是“未般涅槃”。像这样的人,要去调伏他人、令他人去除烦恼之毒、教导他人修学三学,或者令他人般涅槃、止息他人的烦恼——这是不可能的。反过来,从清净的一面来看,则应知为善的方面。巴利
Adantoavinīto aparinibbutoti ettha pana anibbisatāya adanto. Asikkhitavinayatāya avinīto. Anibbutakilesatāya aparinibbutoti veditabbo. So tādiso paraṃ damessati, nibbisaṃ karissati , vinessati vā tisso sikkhā sikkhāpessati, parinibbāpessati vā tassa kilese nibbāpessatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
同样地,准陀,对于有害之人……直到寂灭这一段,应当这样理解其含义:就像自己没陷进泥沼的人,能把陷进泥沼的别人拉出来;自己已调御的人,能调御别人;自己已受教诫的人,能教诫别人;自己已寂灭的人,能让别人寂灭——这是合理、可能的。那是什么道理呢?因为自身具备不陷泥沼、已调御、已受教诫、已寂灭这些素质。同样地,准陀,对于有害之人,无害能导向寂灭。这话说的是什么?自己无害的人,他那份无害,就能让那个有害之人的害意走向寂灭。因为自己无害的人,能够止息别人加害的思惟,这是合理、可能的。那是什么道理呢?正是因为他自身无害这一素质。因为一个人自己亲证了什么,就有能力劝别人也朝着这个目标去修行。巴利
Evameva kho, cunda, vihiṃsakassa…pe… parinibbānāyāti ettha pana evamattho veditabbo – yathā hi attanā apalipapalipanno paraṃ palipapalipannaṃ uddharissati, danto damessati, vinīto vinessati, parinibbuto parinibbāpessatīti ṭhānametaṃ vijjatīti. Kiṃ pana tanti? Apalipapalipannattaṃ, dantattaṃ vinītattaṃ parinibbutattañca, evameva kho, cunda, vihiṃsakassa purisapuggalassa avihiṃsā hoti parinibbānāya. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yo attanā avihiṃsako, tassa yā avihiṃsā, ayaṃ yā esā vihiṃsakassa parassa vihiṃsā, tassā parinibbānāya hoti, attanā hi avihiṃsako parassa vihiṃsācetanaṃ nibbāpessatīti ṭhānametaṃ vijjati. Kiṃ pana tanti? Avihiṃsakattameva. Yañhi yena attanā adhigataṃ hoti, so paraṃ tadatthāya samādapetuṃ sakkotīti.
或者也可以这样理解:就像一个人自己没陷进泥沼,已经调伏了自己,已经调御了自己,已经彻底寂灭,他就有能力把别人从泥沼里拉出来,能调伏别人,能训练别人,能令别人彻底寂灭——这是合理、可能的。同样地,一个心怀伤害之意的人,在修习断除伤害之道时,所生起的无害之心,就能导向寂灭。因为就像已经彻底寂灭的人能令尚未寂灭的人寂灭一样,只有无害的意志才能真正止息有害的意志。为了说明这个道理,世尊才说了“同样地,准陀……”这一段话,这里的含义应当这样理解。而且,这里适用的道理,在一切相关的地方都一样。不过,因为怕说得太繁琐,就没有逐词逐句地解释。巴利
Atha vā yathā attanā apalipanno danto vinīto parinibbuto paraṃ palipapalipannaṃ adantaṃ avinītaṃ aparinibbutañca uddharissati damessati vinessati parinibbāpessatīti ṭhānametaṃ vijjati, evameva vihiṃsakassa purisapuggalassa vihiṃsāpahānāya maggaṃ bhāvayato uppannā avihiṃsā hoti parinibbānāya. Parinibbuto viya hi aparinibbutaṃ avihiṃsācetanāva vihiṃsācetanaṃ parinibbāpetuṃ samatthā. Etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘evameva kho, cundā’’tiādimāhāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yathā cettha, evaṃ sabbapadesu. Ativitthārabhayena pana anupadayojanā na katāti.
88 世尊这样显示了它能令(害等法)般涅槃的能力之后,现在为了总结这段开示,并劝人投入法的实践,就说了“iti kho, cunda”等话。其中,“削减之因”是指削减的原因。这个道理在这里适用于一切情况:不害等法之所以成为削减之因,正是因为它削减了害等法。因为要依靠这些法来生起心,所以它是心生起之因;因为害等法应当被这些法所避开,所以它是避开之因;因为它能成就更高的阶段,所以它是上分因;因为它能让害等法般涅槃,所以它是般涅槃之因。“寻求利益者”,是指为你们寻求利益的人。“具足慈悯者”,是指怀着慈悯的人。“出于慈悯”,是指以慈悯心摄持之后,完全施与付出。“我已为你们作了应作之事”,意思是我通过为你们开示这五种方式,已经完成了对你们应尽的责任。因为一位具足慈悯的导师所应做的,正是这样无误地宣说正法。从此之后,实践就是弟子们自己的事了。因此世尊才说:“准陀,这些树下……这是我对你们的教诫。”巴利
88. Evaṃ tassa parinibbāpane samatthabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni taṃ desanaṃ nigametvā dhammapaṭipattiyaṃ niyojetuṃ iti kho, cundātiādimāha. Tattha sallekhapariyāyoti sallekhakāraṇaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha ettha avihiṃsādayo eva vihiṃsādīnaṃ sallekhanato sallekhakāraṇaṃ . Tesaṃ vasena cittassa uppādetabbato cittupādakāraṇaṃ, vihiṃsādi, parikkamanassa hetuto parikkamanakāraṇaṃ, uparibhāganipphādanato uparibhāgakāraṇaṃ , vihiṃsādīnaṃ parinibbāpanato parinibbānakāraṇanti veditabbā. Hitesināti hitaṃ esantena. Anukampakenāti anukampamānena. Anukampaṃ upādāyāti anukampaṃ cittena pariggahetvā, pariccātipi vuttaṃ hoti. Kataṃ vo taṃ mayāti taṃ mayā ime pañca pariyāye dassentena tumhākaṃ kataṃ. Ettakameva hi anukampakassa satthu kiccaṃ, yadidaṃ aviparītadhammadesanā. Ito paraṃ pana paṭipatti nāma sāvakānaṃ kiccaṃ. Tenāha etāni, cunda, rukkhamūlāni…pe… amhākaṃ anusāsanīti.
在这里,“树下”等话,是在指出树下这个居住处。“空闲处”等话,是在指出远离人群的地方。这两者合起来,就是在说明适合修行者的住处,把遗产交托给他们。“你们要修禅那”的意思是:以专注所缘的禅那,审察三十八种所缘;以观照特相的禅那,从无常等角度审察蕴、处等。也就是说,要增长止和观。“不要放逸”,就是不要懈怠。“不要事后追悔”:有些人年轻时、健康时、具足七种顺缘等福报时、导师还在世时,因为没有如理作意,日夜只顾吃喝享乐,沉溺在躺卧的快乐和睡眠的快乐里,放逸度日。他们后来到了衰老时、生病时、临终时、遭遇灾祸时、导师般涅槃之后,回想起自己过去放逸的生活,又看到伴随结生的业如此沉重,就会追悔莫及。为了说明这个道理,世尊说“不要事后追悔”。这就是我对你们的教诫——意思是:这就是从我这里传给你们的教诫——“你们要修禅那,不要放逸”,也就是忠告。巴利
Tattha ca rukkhamūlānīti iminā rukkhamūlasenāsanaṃ dasseti. Suññāgārānīti iminā janavivittaṭṭhānaṃ. Ubhayenāpi ca yogānurūpasenāsanamācikkhati, dāyajjaṃ niyyāteti. Jhāyathāti ārammaṇūpanijjhānena aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇāni, lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena ca aniccādito khandhāyatanādīni upanijjhāyatha, samathañca vipassanañca vaḍḍhethāti vuttaṃ hoti. Mā pamādatthāti mā pamajjittha. Mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvatthāti ye hi pubbe daharakāle, ārogyakāle, sattasappāyādisampattikāle, satthu sammukhībhāvakāle ca yonisomanasikāravirahitā rattindivaṃ maṅgulabhattā hutvā seyyasukhaṃ middhasukhamanubhontā pamajjanti, te pacchā jarākāle, rogakāle, maraṇakāle, vipattikāle, satthu parinibbutakāle ca taṃ pubbe pamādavihāraṃ anussarantā, sappaṭisandhikālakiriyañca bhāriyaṃ sampassamānā vippaṭisārino honti, tumhe pana tādisā mā ahuvatthāti etamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvatthā’’ti. Ayaṃ vo amhākaṃ anusāsanīti ayaṃ amhākaṃ santikā ‘‘jhāyatha mā pamādatthā’’ti tumhākaṃ anusāsanī, ovādoti vuttaṃ hoti.
第9章《正见经》的注释巴利
9. Sammādiṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā
89 “如是我闻”开头的这部经就是《正见经》。其中,长老所问的像“贤友,人们说‘正见、正见’,到底怎样才算是正见呢,贤友”或者“贤友,什么是不善”这样的所有问题,全都是为了要开示而问的问题。巴利
89.Evaṃme sutanti sammādiṭṭhisuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhīti, āvuso, vuccati, kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso’’ti vā ‘‘katamaṃ panāvuso , akusala’’nti vā evaṃ yattakā therena pucchā vuttā, sabbā kathetukamyatā pucchā eva.
在这里,因为不论是知道的人还是不知道的人——外道也好,佛教内部的人也好——都会依据传闻或亲身经验而说“正见”。所以,他依据许多人的说法,两次重复提起来说:“贤友,人们说‘正见、正见’。”这里的意思是:有些人也称它为正见,另一些人也称它为正见;当它这样被称呼时,若依据它的意义和特征来看,贤友,一位圣弟子到底要具备到什么程度才算是正见呢?这里,“正见者”就是指具备清净、殊胜之见的人。不过,当“正见”这个词纯粹就法本身来说时,就应该理解为:那种清净、殊胜的见就是正见。巴利
Tattha yasmā jānantāpi sammādiṭṭhīti vadanti ajānantāpi bāhirakāpi sāsanikāpi anussavādivasenāpi attapaccakkhenāpi, tasmā taṃ bahūnaṃ vacanaṃ upādāya dvikkhattuṃ āmasanto ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhīti, āvuso, vuccatī’’ti āha. Ayañhi ettha adhippāyo, aparehipi sammādiṭṭhīti vuccati, athāparehipi sammādiṭṭhīti vuccati, svāyaṃ evaṃ vuccamāno atthañca lakkhaṇañca upādāya kittāvatā nu kho, āvuso, ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi hotīti. Tattha sammādiṭṭhīti sobhanāya pasatthāya ca diṭṭhiyā samannāgato. Yadā pana dhammeyeva ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhisaddo vattati, tadāssa sobhanā pasatthā ca diṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhīti evamattho veditabbo.
这种正见有两种:世间正见和出世间正见。其中,相信业是自己的、以及随顺真理的智,是世间正见;简单来说,一切有漏的慧也都是世间正见。与圣道、圣果相应的慧,是出世间正见。人则分为三种:凡夫、有学和无学。凡夫又分两种:外道和教内之人。其中,外道的业论者依“业属于自己”的见解而有正见,但没有随顺真理的智,因为他们执取我见。教内之人则两种都有。有学以决定性的正见而成为正见者;无学以无学的正见而成为正见者。不过,这里说的“正见者”,是指具备了决定性的、能导向出离的出世间善正见的人。因此经文说:“他的见已正直,以对法的不坏净信而成就,已来到这正法。”因为出世间善正见不落入两个极端,以正直的方式而行,并且断除了身曲等一切歪曲,所以称为“见正直”。而具备这种见的人,对九种出世间法也以不可动摇的净信而成就;他解开一切见的纠缠,断除一切烦恼,从生死轮回中出离,圆满修行之道,以圣道而来到这由正自觉者所宣说、以不死为归宿、名为涅槃的正法,因此这样说。巴利
Sā cāyaṃ sammādiṭṭhi duvidhā hoti lokiyā lokuttarāti. Tattha kammassakatāñāṇaṃ saccānulomikañāṇañca lokiyā sammādiṭṭhi, saṅkhepato vā sabbāpi sāsavā paññā. Ariyamaggaphalasampayuttā paññā lokuttarā sammādiṭṭhi. Puggalo pana tividho hoti puthujjano sekkho asekkho ca. Tattha puthujjano duvidho hoti bāhirako sāsaniko ca. Tattha bāhirako kammavādī kammassakatādiṭṭhiyā sammādiṭṭhi hoti, no saccānulomikāya attadiṭṭhiparāmāsakattā. Sāsaniko dvīhipi. Sekkho niyatāya sammādiṭṭhiyā sammādiṭṭhi. Asekkho asekkhāya. Idha pana niyatāya niyyānikāya lokuttarakusalasammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti adhippeto. Tenevāha ‘‘ujugatāssa diṭṭhi dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato āgato imaṃ saddhamma’’nti, lokuttarakusalasammādiṭṭhiyeva hi antadvayamanupagamma ujubhāvena gatattā , kāyavaṅkādīni ca sabbavaṅkāni samucchinditvā gatattā ujugatā hoti, tāyeva ca diṭṭhiyā samannāgato navappakārepi lokuttaradhamme aveccappasādena acalappasādena samannāgato hoti, sabbadiṭṭhigahanāni ca vinibbeṭhento sabbakilese pajahanto jātisaṃsārā nikkhamanto paṭipattiṃ pariniṭṭhapento ariyena maggena āgato imaṃ sambuddhappaveditaṃ amatogadhaṃ nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ saddhammanti vuccati.
“从何时”这一说法,是限定时间的用语,意思就是“在某个时候”。“他彻知不善”:他彻知被称为十不善业道的不善;他以灭尽为所缘的智慧,从作用上通达“这是苦”,从而彻知不善。“他彻知不善根”:他也彻知作为其根本和因缘的不善根;同样以那种方式通达“这是苦的集起”。这个道理在“善及善根”等处也一样适用。就像这里一样,从这以后的所有条目,都应当理解为从作用上了知事相。“即便仅此”:仅凭这些,即凭这了知不善等。“便成为正见者”:是说具备如前所说的出世间正见。“他的见已正直……已来至此正法”:到这里,简略的开示就结束了。这开示本身是简略的,但那些比丘的如理作意与通达,则应理解为详细展开的。巴利
Yato khoti kālaparicchedavacanametaṃ, yasmiṃ kāleti vuttaṃ hoti. Akusalañca pajānātīti dasākusalakammapathasaṅkhātaṃ akusalañca pajānāti, nirodhārammaṇāya pajānanāya kiccavasena ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti paṭivijjhanto akusalaṃ pajānāti. Akusalamūlañca pajānātīti tassa mūlapaccayabhūtaṃ akusalamūlañca pajānāti, teneva pakārena ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti paṭivijjhanto. Esa nayo kusalañca kusalamūlañcāti etthāpi. Yathā cettha, evaṃ ito paresu sabbavāresu kiccavaseneva vatthupajānanā veditabbā. Ettāvatāpīti ettakena iminā akusalādippajānanenāpi. Sammādiṭṭhi hotīti vuttappakārāya lokuttarasammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato hoti. Ujugatāssa…pe… imaṃ saddhammanti ettāvatā saṃkhittadesanā niṭṭhitā hoti. Desanāyeva cesā saṃkhittā, tesaṃ pana bhikkhūnaṃ vitthāravaseneva sammāmanasikārappaṭivedho veditabbo.
不过在第二番里,应当知道:开示是详细的,作意的通达也是详细的。在那里,比丘们看到详细开示的结尾有“完全断除贪随眠……”等话,就说:“略说开示讲的是两种较低的道,详说开示讲的是两种较高的道。”但长老说:“略说开示也是总括四道而说的,详说开示也是。”而这里对略说和详说的这种分析,在每一番里都应当按这里所说的方式来理解。从这以下,我们只解释那些还没解释过、意义不明的词句。巴利
Dutiyavāre pana desanāpi vitthārena manasikārappaṭivedhopi vitthāreneva vuttoti veditabbo. Tattha ‘‘saṃkhittadesanāya dve heṭṭhimamaggā, vitthāradesanāya dve uparimamaggā kathitā’’ti bhikkhū āhaṃsu vitthāradesanāvasāne ‘‘sabbaso rāgānusayaṃ pahāyā’’tiādivacanaṃ sampassamānā. Thero panāha ‘‘saṃkhittadesanāyapi cattāro maggā rāsito kathitā, vitthāradesanāyapī’’ti. Yā cāyaṃ idha saṃkhittavitthāradesanāsu vicāraṇā āvikatā, sā sabbavāresu idha vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Apubbānuttānapadavaṇṇanāmattameva hi ito paraṃ karissāma.
不善业道的解释巴利
Akusalakammapathavaṇṇanā
在这里,先就第一轮开示的详细说明来说,在“贤友,杀生是不善”等语句中,应当知道“不善”是不善巧的生起,或者是从后面将要说的善法的对立面来说的。从它的特征来看,是有过失的、有苦报的,或者是染污的。这就是这里共通词句的解释。巴利
Tattha paṭhamavārassa tāva vitthāradesanāya ‘‘pāṇātipāto kho, āvuso, akusala’’ntiādīsu akosallappavattiyā akusalaṃ veditabbaṃ, parato vattabbakusalappaṭipakkhato vā. Taṃ lakkhaṇato sāvajjadukkhavipākaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ vā. Ayaṃ tāvettha sādhāraṇapadavaṇṇanā.
在特殊情况下,杀害有情就是杀生,也被说为杀害有情、杀死有情。这里说的“有情”,从世俗说法来看是众生,从究竟意义来看是命根。对于那个有情,如果生起“这是有情”的想,发起想要断绝命根的加行,并通过身门或语门中的任意一门生起的杀思,就是杀生。在没有功德的畜生等有情中,对小的有情罪过小,对体型大的有情罪过大。为什么?因为加行粗重。即使加行相同,也会因为对象巨大而成为重罪。在有功德的人等有情中,对功德少的有情罪过小,对功德大的有情罪过大。如果身体大小和功德相等,就要知道:因为烦恼和加行柔和,罪过小;因为猛烈,罪过大。它的五个构成条件是:有情、有情想、杀心、加行、由此而死。加行有六种:亲手做、叫人做、投掷或设置机关、放置毒物等固定手段、以咒术所做、以神通所做。不过,如果在这里详细展开,就会太繁琐,所以不详细展开,其他类似情况也是如此。有需要的人,可以查阅《一切善见律注》来了解。巴利
Asādhāraṇesu pana pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. So guṇavirahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu pāṇesu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāsarīre mahāsāvajjo. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya. Payogasamattepi vatthumahantatāya. Guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo. Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjoti veditabbo. Tassa pañca sambhārā honti pāṇo, pāṇasaññitā, vadhakacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena maraṇanti. Cha payogā sāhatthiko, āṇattiko, nissaggiyo, thāvaro, vijjāmayo, iddhimayoti. Imasmiṃ panettha vitthārīyamāne atipapañco hoti, tasmā naṃ na vitthārayāma, aññañca evarūpaṃ. Atthikehi pana samantapāsādikaṃ vinayaṭṭhakathaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172) oloketvā gahetabbo.
不与取就是取走别人没给的东西,也就是拿走他人的财物、偷盗、窃取。这里说的“未给与”,是指他人所拥有并守护的东西;对于这种东西,主人即使随意取用,也不会受到惩罚,也没有过失。对于那样属于他人所有并守护的东西,如果心里知道“这是他人所有并守护的”,然后生起想要把它拿走的行动,这种偷盗的思就是不与取。这种事,如果对象是他人低劣的财物,过失就小;如果对象是殊胜之物,过失就大。为什么?因为对象本身殊胜。在对象相同的情况下,如果财物属于功德更大的人,过失就大;相比之下,如果财物属于功德较少的人,过失就小。它的五个构成条件是:他人所有并守护之物、知道是他人所有并守护之物、偷盗心、加行、由此拿走。加行有六种,就是亲手做等。而这些加行会随着相应情况,通过偷取、强夺、藏匿、设计、欺骗等取走方式而发生。以上就是这里的简要说明。详细的解释在《一切善见律注》中说过。巴利
Adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parassa haraṇaṃ theyyaṃ, corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ, yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti. Tasmiṃ pana parapariggahite parapariggahitasaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ. Taṃ hīne parasantake appasāvajjaṃ , paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya. Vatthusamatte sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ. Taṃ taṃ guṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ. Tassa pañca sambhārā honti parapariggahitaṃ, parapariggahitasaññitā, theyyacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena haraṇanti. Cha payogā sāhatthikādayova. Te ca kho yathānurūpaṃ theyyāvahāro, pasayhāvahāro, paṭicchannāvahāro, parikappāvahāro, kusāvahāroti imesaṃ avahārānaṃ vasena pavattāti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.92) vutto.
在这里,“欲”指的是男女淫欲的行为。“邪行”指的是完全应受呵责的卑劣行为。从特征上说,以行非法之事的意图,通过身体表现出来、违越不可行对象的思,就是邪淫。巴利
Kāmesumicchācāroti ettha pana kāmesūti methunasamācāresu. Micchācāroti ekantanindito lāmakācāro. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā kāmesumicchācāro.
在这里,“不可行处”是指:对男子来说,首先是母亲守护的女子、父亲守护的女子、父母守护的女子、兄长守护的女子、姐妹守护的女子、亲族守护的女子、宗族守护的女子、法守护的女子、有守护的女子、有惩罚标记的女子,这十种就是母护女等;还有财买女、自愿同居女、为财而住女、为衣而住女、水钵迎娶女、拾薪女、既是女奴又是妻子、既是女佣又是妻子、战俘女、临时女,这十种就是财买女等。这样一共是二十种女子。而对女子来说,两种有守护、有惩罚标记的女子,以及十种财买女等,对于这十二种女子而言,其他男子就是“不可行处”。这种邪淫,如果发生在没有戒德等功德的不可行处,过失小;如果发生在具足戒德等功德的不可行处,过失大。它有四个条件:不可行处的对象、对那对象生起行淫之心、行淫的加行、以性器官进入性器官而违犯并领受。加行只有一种:必须亲自去做。巴利
Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma purisānaṃ tāva māturakkhitā, piturakkhitā, mātāpiturakkhitā, bhāturakkhitā, bhaginirakkhitā, ñātirakkhitā, gottarakkhitā, dhammarakkhitā, sārakkhā, saparidaṇḍāti māturakkhitādayo dasa ; dhanakkītā, chandavāsinī, bhogavāsinī, paṭavāsinī, odapattakinī, obhaṭacumbaṭā, dāsī ca bhariyā ca, kammakārī ca bhariyā ca, dhajāhatā, muhuttikāti etā ca dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo. Itthīsu pana dvinnaṃ sārakkhāsaparidaṇḍānaṃ, dasannañca dhanakkītādīnanti dvādasannaṃ itthīnaṃ aññe purisā, idaṃ agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. So panesa micchācāro sīlādiguṇarahite agamanīyaṭṭhāne appasāvajjo, sīlādiguṇasampanne mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā agamanīyavatthu, tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ, sevanapayogo, maggenamaggappaṭipattiadhivāsananti. Eko payogo sāhatthiko eva.
“妄语”是指以欺骗为目的、破坏他人利益的言语行为或身体行为。如果怀着欺骗的意图,去发动欺骗他人的身体行为或言语行为,那个思就是妄语。另一种解释:“妄”是不真实、不正确的事情;“语”是把那件事当作真实、正确来告知对方。从特征上说,对于不真实的事情,想要让对方把它当作真实来理解,能发动这种告知的思,就是妄语。这个妄语破坏了对方的利益,如果利益小,罪过就小;如果利益大,罪过就大。另外,在家人因为不愿意把自己的东西给别人,而说“没有”之类的话,这种妄语罪过小;但作为证人,为了破坏他人利益而说的妄语,罪过大。出家人得到一点点油或酥,带着开玩笑的意图,用讲老故事的方式说“今天村里的油像河水一样流”,这样发起的妄语罪过小;但如果明明没看见却说看见了,用这种方式说的妄语,罪过大。它具备四个条件:不真实的事情、欺骗的心、相应的努力、对方理解那个意思。只有一种加行,就是亲自去做。应当理解为:通过身体、或身体所附带的物品、或语言,做出欺骗的行为。如果通过那个行为,让对方理解了那个意思,那么在发动那个行为的思生起的那一刹那,就已经被妄语业所系缚了。巴利
Musāti visaṃvādanapurekkhārassa atthabhañjako vacīpayogo kāyapayogo vā. Visaṃvādanādhippāyena panassa paravisaṃvādanakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. Aparo nayo musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu. Vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Apica gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya natthītiādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanatthaṃ vutto mahāsāvajjo. Pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadīmaññe sandatī’’ti purāṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana diṭṭhantiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā honti atathaṃ vatthu, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthavijānananti. Eko payogo sāhatthikova. So kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā vācāya vā visaṃvādakakiriyākaraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Tāya ce kiriyāya paro tamatthaṃ jānāti, ayaṃ kiriyāsamuṭṭhāpikacetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakammunā bajjhati.
说到离间语等,如果某种话能让听者对自己生起亲密感,对别人产生疏远感,那就是离间语。如果某种话让自己和对方都变得粗暴,这种话本身也粗砺,既不悦耳也不让心舒服,那就是粗恶语。如果所说的话杂乱无意义,那就是杂秽语。作为这些言语根本的思,也得到离间语等的名称,这里所指的就是那个思。其中,心有染污的人,为了离间他人,或者为了让自己成为他人眼中可亲的人,而发动身行或语行的思,就是离间语。它所离间的对象功德小,罪过就小;功德大,罪过就大。它有四个条件:有一个可被离间的对方;以“这样他们就会分开、就会离散”的离间意图为主导,或者以“我会成为可爱、可信任的人”的贪爱意图为主导;相应的努力;对方了解那个意思。巴利
Pisuṇā vācātiādīsu yāya vācāya yassa taṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tassa hadaye attano piyabhāvaṃ parassa ca suññabhāvaṃ karoti, sā pisuṇā vācā. Yāya pana attānampi parampi pharusampi karoti, sā vācā sayampi pharusā neva kaṇṇasukhā na hadayasukhā vā, ayaṃ pharusā vācā. Yena samphaṃ palapati niratthakaṃ, so samphappalāpo. Tesaṃ mūlabhūtā cetanāpi pisuṇāvācādināmameva labhati, sā eva ca idha adhippetāti. Tattha saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa paresaṃ vā bhedāya attano piyakamyatāya vā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pisuṇā vācā. Sā yassa bhedaṃ karoti, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā cattāro sambhārā bhinditabbo paro, ‘‘iti ime nānā bhavissanti vinā bhavissantī’’ti bhedapurekkhāratā vā, ‘‘ahaṃ piyo bhavissāmi vissāsiko’’ti piyakamyatā vā, tajjo vāyāmo, tassa tadatthavijānananti.
由想伤害他人要害的身行或语行所引发的、纯粹粗暴的思,就是粗恶语。为了说明这一点,有这样一个事例:据说有个男孩不听母亲的话,往森林里走去,母亲没法把他叫回来,就骂他说:“愿凶暴的母水牛追你!”结果就在那片森林里,一头母水牛出现了。男孩就作真实语:“我母亲嘴上说的,愿它不要发生;她心里想的,愿它实现!”那头母水牛当场就像被绑住一样,停在那里不动了。所以,即使言语的作用能伤到他人的要害,只要内心柔和,就不算粗恶语。因为父母有时也会对孩子说:“愿盗贼把你们剁成碎块!”可哪怕一片莲叶落在孩子身上,他们都不愿意。轨范师和亲教师有时也会对依止者说:“这些无惭无愧的家伙到处乱跑,把他们赶走!”但他们心里其实是希望这些人获得教法的成就和证悟的成就。正如内心柔和时,言语不会成为粗恶语;同样,只是言语柔和,也不等于就不是粗恶语。因为对于想杀害某人的人来说,说“让他舒服地躺着吧”这样的话,并不是非粗恶语。只有内心粗暴,这样的言语才是粗恶语。它针对谁而说,如果那人功德浅,罪过就小;功德深,罪过就大。它有三个条件:所骂的对象是他人、内心愤怒、以及骂的行为。巴利
Parassa mammacchedakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā ekantapharusā cetanā pharusā vācā. Tassa āvibhāvatthamidaṃ vatthu – eko kira dārako mātuvacanaṃ anādiyitvā araññaṃ gacchati, taṃ mātā nivattetuṃ asakkontī ‘‘caṇḍā taṃ mahiṃsī anubandhatū’’ti akkosi. Athassa tattheva araññe mahiṃsī uṭṭhāsi. Dārako ‘‘yaṃ mama mātā mukhena kathesi taṃ mā hotu, yaṃ cittena cintesi taṃ hotū’’ti saccakiriyamakāsi. Mahiṃsī tattheva baddhā viya aṭṭhāsi. Evaṃ mammacchedakopi payogo cittasaṇhatāya pharusā vācā na hoti. Mātāpitaro hi kadāci puttake evampi vadanti ‘‘corā vo khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ karontū’’ti, uppalapattampi ca nesaṃ upari patantaṃ na icchanti. Ācariyupajjhāyā ca kadāci nissitake evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kiṃ ime ahirikā anottappino caranti niddhamatha ne’’ti. Atha kho nesaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiṃ icchanti. Yathā ca cittasaṇhatāya pharusā vācā na hoti, evaṃ vacanasaṇhatāya apharusā vācāpi na hoti. Na hi mārāpetukāmassa ‘‘imaṃ sukhaṃ sayāpethā’’ti vacanaṃ apharusā vācā hoti. Cittapharusatāya panesā pharusā vācāva. Sā yaṃ sandhāya pavattitā, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā tayo sambhārā akkositabbo paro, kupitacittaṃ, akkosanāti.
由能传达无意义之事的身业和语业所引发的不善思,就是杂秽语。由习行微少故罪轻,由习行重大故罪重。它有两个构成条件:以谈论婆罗多大战、悉多被劫等毫无意义的闲话为先导,以及说这类话。巴利
Anatthaviññāpakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā akusalacetanā samphappalāpo. So āsevanamandatāya appasāvajjo, āsevanamahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Tassa dve sambhārā bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādiniratthakakathāpurekkhāratā, tathārūpīkathākathananti.
“贪欲”就是贪求,意思是:面对他人的财物,心朝向它、倾向于它而活动。它的特相是像“啊,但愿这个成为我的!”这样对他人财物生起贪求。跟不与取一样,罪过有轻也有重。它有两个条件:他人的财物,以及把它归为自己。因为即使以他人财物为对象生起了贪,只要还没有以“啊,但愿这个成为我的”这种方式把它归为自己,业道就还没有构成。巴利
Abhijjhāyatīti abhijjhā, parabhaṇḍābhimukhī hutvā tanninnatāya pavattatīti attho. Sā ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamassā’’ti evaṃ parabhaṇḍābhijjhāyanalakkhaṇā. Adinnādānaṃ viya appasāvajjā ca mahāsāvajjā ca. Tassā dve sambhārā parabhaṇḍaṃ, attano pariṇāmanañca. Parabhaṇḍavatthuke hi lobhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatīdaṃ mamassā’’ti attano na pariṇāmeti.
损害他人的利益和安乐,就叫嗔害。它的特相是想要毁灭他人、内心怀着恼害,就像粗恶语一样,罪过有轻有重。它有两个构成条件:其他有情的痛苦,以及想要毁灭他的念头。因为即使是对其他有情生起了忿怒,只要还没有想到“啊,但愿他断灭、消亡!”——还没有想要他毁灭,就还不算构成业道。巴利
Hitasukhaṃ byāpādayatīti byāpādo. So paravināsāya manopadosalakkhaṇo , pharusā vācā viya appasāvajjo mahāsāvajjo ca. Tassa dve sambhārā parasatto ca, tassa ca vināsacintā. Parasattavatthuke hi kodhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatāyaṃ ucchijjeyya vinasseyyā’’ti tassa vināsaṃ na cinteti.
由于不能如实执取,所以看错了,这就叫邪见。它的特相是像“没有布施这回事”这样颠倒地看事情。跟绮语一样,它有小罪也有大罪。另外,不定邪见是小罪,决定邪见是大罪。它有两个构成条件:对事相的认知方式颠倒了,而且它怎么执取那个对象,那个对象就照着那样显现出来。巴利
Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvena micchā passatīti micchādiṭṭhi. Sā ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā nayena viparītadassanalakkhaṇā. Samphappalāpo viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Apica aniyatā appasāvajjā, niyatā mahāsāvajjā. Tassā dve sambhārā vatthuno ca gahitākāraviparītatā, yathā ca taṃ gaṇhāti, tathābhāvena tassupaṭṭhānanti.
对这十种不善业道,应当从五个方面来分析和判定:法、部分、所缘、受、根。巴利
Imesaṃ pana dasannaṃ akusalakammapathānaṃ dhammato koṭṭhāsato ārammaṇato vedanāto mūlatoti pañcahākārehi vinicchayo veditabbo.
在这里,就“法”这一项来说:按顺序,前七种本身就是思;贪欲等三种则是与思相应的心所。巴利
Tattha dhammatoti etesu hi paṭipāṭiyā satta, cetanādhammāva honti, abhijjhādayo tayo cetanāsampayuttā.
从“部分”的角度来说:按顺序排的前七种,再加上邪见,这八种只是业道,不是根本。贪欲和嗔恚既是业道,也是根本。因为贪欲一旦作为根本,就是贪这个不善根;嗔恚就是嗔不善根。巴利
Koṭṭhāsatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta, micchādiṭṭhi cāti ime aṭṭha kammapathā eva honti, no mūlāni. Abhijjhābyāpādā kammapathā ceva mūlāni ca. Abhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā lobho akusalamūlaṃ hoti. Byāpādo doso akusalamūlaṃ.
从所缘的角度来说:杀生以命根为所缘,所以是行所缘。不与取可以以有情为所缘,也可以以行所缘。邪淫因为以触为所缘,所以是行所缘;也有人说它以有情为所缘。妄语可以以有情为所缘,也可以以行所缘,离间语也是这样。粗恶语只以有情为所缘。杂秽语依所见、所闻、所觉、所知,可以以有情为所缘,也可以以行所缘;贪欲也是这样。嗔恚只以有情为所缘。邪见则依三地诸法,是行所缘。巴利
Ārammaṇatoti pāṇātipāto jīvitindriyārammaṇato saṅkhārārammaṇo hoti. Adinnādānaṃ sattārammaṇaṃ vā saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ vā. Micchācāro phoṭṭhabbavasena saṅkhārārammaṇo. Sattārammaṇotipi eke. Musāvādo sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā. Tathā pisuṇā vācā. Pharusā vācā sattārammaṇāva. Samphappalāpo diṭṭhasutamutaviññātavasena sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā, tathā abhijjhā. Byāpādo sattārammaṇova. Micchādiṭṭhi tebhūmakadhammavasena saṅkhārārammaṇā.
从“受”的角度来说:杀生是苦受。虽然国王们看到盗贼时,即使笑着下令“去,把他杀了”,但他们决意时的思心所仍然只与苦受相应。不与取与三种受都可能相应。邪淫依乐受和舍受而有两种受,但在决意邪淫的心中没有舍受。妄语与三种受都可能相应,离间语也一样。粗恶语只是苦受。杂秽语与三种受都可能相应。贪欲依乐受和舍受而有两种受,邪见也一样。嗔恚是苦受。巴利
Vedanātoti pāṇātipāto dukkhavedano hoti. Kiñcāpi hi rājāno coraṃ disvā hasamānāpi ‘‘gacchatha naṃ ghātethā’’ti vadanti, sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā pana nesaṃ dukkhasampayuttāva hoti. Adinnādānaṃ tivedanaṃ. Micchācāro sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedano, sanniṭṭhāpakacitte pana majjhattavedano na hoti. Musāvādo tivedano, tathā pisuṇā vācā. Pharusā vācā dukkhavedanāva. Samphappalāpo tivedano . Abhijjhā sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedanā, tathā micchādiṭṭhi. Byāpādo dukkhavedano.
从“根”的角度来说:杀生以嗔和痴为根,所以有两个根。不与取以嗔和痴为根,或者以贪和痴为根。邪淫以贪和痴为根。妄语以嗔和痴为根,或者以贪和痴为根;离间语和绮语也是这样。粗恶语以嗔和痴为根。贪欲只以痴为根,所以只有一个根;嗔恚也是这样。邪见以贪和痴为根,所以有两个根。巴利
Mūlatoti pāṇātipāto dosamohavasena dvimūlako hoti. Adinnādānaṃ dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā. Micchācāro lobhamohavasena. Musāvādo dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā, tathā pisuṇā vācā samphappalāpo ca. Pharusā vācā dosamohavasena. Abhijjhā mohavasena ekamūlā, tathā byāpādo. Micchādiṭṭhi lobhamohavasena dvimūlāti.
在“贪是不善根”等说法中,因为会贪求,所以叫贪;因为会嗔怒,所以叫嗔;因为会迷惑,所以叫痴。在这三者当中,贪本身就是不善,因为它有罪过、会带来苦的果报;而对于杀生等不善法来说,有些是以贪为相应生起的原因,有些是以贪为亲依止缘,所以贪被称为不善根。经中也这样说:“贤友,被贪欲战胜、心被贪欲完全控制的人,甚至会杀害生命……”等等。嗔和痴作为不善根的道理,也是这样。巴利
Lobho akusalamūlantiādīsu lubbhatīti lobho. Dussatīti doso. Muyhatīti moho. Tesu lobho sayañca akusalo sāvajjadukkhavipākaṭṭhena, imesañca pāṇātipātādīnaṃ akusalānaṃ kesañci sampayuttappabhāvakaṭṭhena kesañci upanissayapaccayaṭṭhena mūlanti akusalamūlaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘ratto kho āvuso rāgena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto pāṇampi hanatī’’tiādi. Dosamohānaṃ akusalamūlabhāvepi eseva nayo.
善业道的解释巴利
Kusalakammapathavaṇṇanā
在“离杀生是善”等说法里,杀生等的含义已经讲过了。“离”之所以叫 veramaṇī,是因为它“远离怨害”(veraṃ maṇati),意思是断除怨害。或者,因为它是通过这种行为来远离,所以把词形变化后成为 veramaṇī。以上是从字面上解释。从含义上说,“离”是指与善心相应的远离,也就是经里说的“当人远离杀生时,那时对杀生的不乐、远离”这样所说的与善心相应的远离。这种远离按类别分有三种:时离、受戒离、断除离。其中,没有受持学处的人,在遇到犯戒的场合时,会考虑自己的出身、年龄、学识等,心想“我们做这种事不合适”,因此不去违犯,这时生起的远离就应当理解为时离,就像锡兰岛的恰卡那近事男那样。巴利
Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī kusalantiādīsu pāṇātipātādayo vuttatthā eva. Veraṃ maṇatīti veramaṇī, veraṃ pajahatīti attho. Viramati vā etāya karaṇabhūtāya, vikārassa vekāraṃ katvāpi veramaṇī. Ayaṃ tāvettha byañjanato vaṇṇanā. Atthato pana veramaṇīti kusalacittasampayuttā virati. Yā ‘‘pāṇātipātā viramantassa, yā tasmiṃ samaye pāṇātipātā ārati viratī’’ti evaṃ vuttā kusalacittasampayuttā virati, sā bhedato tividho hoti sampattavirati samādānavirati samucchedaviratīti. Tattha asamādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ attano jātivayabāhusaccādīni paccavekkhitvā ‘‘ayuttaṃ amhākaṃ evarūpaṃ kātu’’nti sampattavatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati sampattaviratīti veditabbā sīhaḷadīpe cakkanaupāsakassa viya.
据说恰卡那小时候,母亲就生了病。医生说:“得弄到新鲜带血的兔肉才行。”于是恰卡那的哥哥对他说:“孩子,去田里转转吧。”就把他派了出去。恰卡那到了田里。那时候,正好有一只野兔跑来吃嫩稻子,它一看见恰卡那,就慌忙逃跑,结果被藤蔓缠住了,发出“叽叽”的叫声。恰卡那顺着声音走过去,抓住了那只野兔,心想:“我来给母亲做药。”但他又想:“这样不对。我怎么能为了母亲活命,就夺走另一个生命呢?”于是他把野兔放了,说:“去吧,到树林里去,跟别的野兔一起吃草喝水吧。”哥哥问他:“孩子,抓到野兔了吗?”他就把事情经过告诉了哥哥。哥哥听了就责备他。他走到母亲面前,说了一句真实语,立下誓言:“从我出生以来,我不记得自己曾经故意夺走任何众生的生命。”话音刚落,他母亲的病就好了。巴利
Tassa kira daharakāleyeva mātuyā rogo uppajji. Vejjena ca ‘‘allasasamaṃsaṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tato cakkanassa bhātā ‘‘gaccha tāta khettaṃ āhiṇḍāhī’’ti cakkanaṃ pesesi. So tattha gato. Tasmiñca samaye eko saso taruṇasassaṃ khādituṃ āgato hoti, so taṃ disvā vegena dhāvento valliyā baddho ‘‘kiri kirī’’ti saddamakāsi. Cakkano tena saddena gantvā taṃ gahetvā cintesi ‘‘mātu bhesajjaṃ karomī’’ti. Puna cintesi ‘‘na metaṃ patirūpaṃ, yvāhaṃ mātu jīvitakāraṇā paraṃ jīvitā voropeyya’’nti. Atha naṃ ‘‘gaccha araññe sasehi saddhiṃ tiṇodakaṃ paribhuñjā’’ti muñci. Bhātarā ca ‘‘kiṃ tāta saso laddho’’ti pucchito taṃ pavattiṃ ācikkhi. Tato naṃ bhātā paribhāsi. So mātusantikaṃ gantvā ‘‘yatohaṃ jāto, nābhijānāmi sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropetā’’ti saccaṃ vatvā adhiṭṭhāsi. Tāvadevassa mātā arogā ahosi.
至于已经受持学处的人,在受持学处之后,甚至更进一步,宁可舍弃自己的性命也不违犯学处,这时生起的远离,应当知道就是“受戒离”,就像住在北增山的近事男那样。巴利
Samādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ pana sikkhāpadasamādāne ca tatuttari ca attano jīvitampi pariccajitvā vatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati samādānaviratīti veditabbā uttaravaḍḍhamānapabbatavāsīupāsakassa viya.
据说,这位住在安跋利耶寺的宾伽拉佛护长老座下受了学处后,就去耕田。那时他的牛走失了,他为了找那头牛,爬上了北增山,在那里被一条大蟒蛇缠住了。他心想:“我用这把锋利的刀把它的头砍下来。”接着又想:“这对我来说不合适。我既然在可敬的尊师座下受了学处,怎么能破戒呢?”这样想了三次之后,他下定决心:“我宁可舍弃生命,也不破学处。”于是把扛在肩上那根装着锋利刀头的棍子扔进了树林。就在那一刻,大蟒蛇松开他,离开了。巴利
So kira ambariyavihāravāsīpiṅgalabuddharakkhitattherassa santike sikkhāpadāni gahetvā khettaṃ kassati. Athassa goṇo naṭṭho, so taṃ gavesanto uttaravaḍḍhamānapabbataṃ āruhi, tatra naṃ mahāsappo aggahesi. So cintesi ‘‘imāyassa tikhiṇavāsiyā sīsaṃ chindāmī’’ti. Puna cintesi ‘‘na metaṃ patirūpaṃ, yvāhaṃ bhāvanīyassa garuno santike sikkhāpadaṃ gahetvā bhindeyya’’nti. Evaṃ yāvatatiyaṃ cintetvā ‘‘jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, na sikkhāpada’’nti aṃse ṭhapitaṃ tikhiṇadaṇḍavāsiṃ araññe chaḍḍesi. Tāvadeva naṃ mahāvāḷo muñcitvā agamāsīti.
与圣道相应的远离,应当知道它是“断除离”。因为从它生起的时候开始,圣者们连“我要杀生”这样的心都不会生起。不过,这种远离因为是善巧地运作,所以被称为善;或者,因为从可厌的卧处而名为“善”的恶戒被割断,所以也是善。然而,对于“贤友,什么是善?”这个问题,因为与问题不相符,所以不称为善。巴利
Ariyamaggasampayuttā pana virati samucchedaviratīti veditabbā. Yassā uppattito pabhuti ‘‘pāṇaṃ ghātessāmī’’ti ariyapuggalānaṃ cittampi na uppajjatīti. Sā panāyaṃ virati kosallappavattiyā kusalanti vuttā. Kucchitasayanato vā kusanti laddhavohāraṃ dussīlyaṃ lunātītipi kusalaṃ. Katamañcāvuso kusalanti imassa pana pañhassa ananurūpattā kusalāti na vuttā.
就像对不善业道那样,对这些善业道,也应当从法、部分、所缘、受、根这五个方面来判别了知。巴利
Yathā ca akusalānaṃ, evaṃ imesampi kusalakammapathānaṃ dhammato koṭṭhāsato ārammaṇato vedanāto mūlatoti pañcahākārehi vinicchayo veditabbo.
在这里,就“法”而言:因为在这些当中,按顺序来说,七种思也存在,离也存在。最后三项则只与思相应。巴利
Tattha dhammatoti etesu hi paṭipāṭiyā satta cetanāpi vaṭṭanti, viratiyopi. Ante tayo cetanāsampayuttāva.
从部分来说,按顺序,前七项只是业道,不是根本;最后三项既是业道,也是根本。因为无贪欲到达根本时,就是无贪善根;无嗔到达根本时,就是无嗔善根;正见到达根本时,就是无痴善根。巴利
Koṭṭhāsatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta kammapathā eva, no mūlāni. Ante tayo kammapathā ceva mūlāni ca. Anabhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā alobho kusalamūlaṃ hoti. Abyāpādo adoso kusalamūlaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhi amoho kusalamūlaṃ.
从所缘来看,杀生等不善业道的所缘,就是这些善业道的所缘。因为所谓“离”,针对的正是那些应当避免的事。然而,就像以涅槃为所缘的圣道能断除烦恼一样,应当知道:这些以命根等为所缘的业道,也能断除杀生等恶戒。巴利
Ārammaṇatoti pāṇātipātādīnaṃ ārammaṇāneva etesaṃ ārammaṇāni, vītikkamitabbatoyeva hi veramaṇī nāma hoti. Yathā pana nibbānārammaṇo ariyamaggo kilese pajahati, evaṃ jīvitindriyādiārammaṇāpete kammapathā pāṇātipātādīni dussīlyāni pajahantīti veditabbā.
就“受”而言:这些全都是乐受,或者是舍受。因为一旦达到善,就不存在所谓的苦受。巴利
Vedanātoti sabbe sukhavedanā vā honti, majjhattavedanā vā. Kusalaṃ patvā hi dukkhavedanā nāma natthi.
从“根”的角度来说:依次来看,前七种业道,如果是以与智相应的心来远离,就依无贪、无嗔、无痴而成为三根;如果是以与智不相应的心来远离,就成为二根。无贪,如果是以与智相应的心来远离,就成为二根;如果是以与智不相应的心来远离,就成为一根。不过,无贪本身不会成为自己的根,无嗔也是这样。正见则依无贪和无嗔而成为二根。巴利
Mūlatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta kammapathā ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa alobhaadosaamohavasena timūlā honti. Ñāṇavippayuttacittena viramantassa dvimūlā. Anabhijjhā ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa dvimūlā. Ñāṇavippayuttacittena ekamūlā. Alobho pana attanāva attano mūlaṃ na hoti, abyāpādepi eseva nayo. Sammādiṭṭhi alobhādosavasena dvimūlāvāti.
在“无贪是善根”等说法里,“无贪”就是没有贪,这是与贪相对立的那一法的名称。无嗔、无痴也是这样理解。在这三者当中,无贪本身就是善的;而对于不杀生等这些善法来说,它对某些以相应令生的意义、对某些以亲依止缘的意义,成为它们的根,所以叫善根。无嗔和无痴作为善根,也是同样的道理。巴利
Alobho kusalamūlantiādīsu na lobhoti alobho, lobhapaṭipakkhassa dhammassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Adosāmohesupi eseva nayo. Tesu alobho sayañca kusalaṃ, imesañca pāṇātipātā veramaṇīādīnaṃ kusalānaṃ kesañci sampayuttappabhāvakaṭṭhena kesañci upanissayapaccayaṭṭhena mūlanti kusalamūlaṃ. Adosāmohānampi kusalamūlabhāve eseva nayo.
现在,为了把前面通过略说和广说所讲的全部义理做一个总结,论师说出了“尊者,从……以来”等这一段开示。其中,“如此了知不善”,就是按照前面已经详细说明的方式,依十不善业道来了知不善。“如此了知不善根”等也是这样。到这里,就以这一种方式,完整说明了修习四圣谛业处的人直到证得阿拉汉果的解脱之道。是怎样的呢?在这里,除了贪欲之外,十不善业道和十善业道属于苦谛。贪欲和贪,即不善根,这两类法从直接意义上说是集谛。但从间接意义上说,一切业道也都是苦谛,一切善根和不善根也都是集谛。这两者的不再生起就是灭谛。遍知苦、断除集、证知灭的圣道就是道谛。这样,苦谛和道谛这两个谛是依其自身性质直接说明的,集谛和灭谛这两个谛则应当以回转的方式来了知。巴利
Idāni sabbampi taṃ saṅkhepena ca vitthārena ca desitamatthaṃ nigamento yato kho āvusotiādiappanāvāramāha. Tattha evaṃ akusalaṃ pajānātīti evaṃ yathāniddiṭṭhadasākusalakammapathavasena akusalaṃ pajānāti. Evaṃ akusalamūlantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettāvatā ekena nayena catusaccakammaṭṭhānikassa yāva arahattā niyyānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti. Kathaṃ? Ettha hi ṭhapetvā abhijjhaṃ dasa akusalakammapathā ca kusalakammapathā ca dukkhasaccaṃ. Abhijjhā ca lobho akusalamūlañcāti ime dve dhammā nippariyāyena samudayasaccaṃ. Pariyāyena pana sabbepi kammapathā dukkhasaccaṃ. Sabbāni kusalākusalamūlāni samudayasaccaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ . Dukkhaṃ parijānanto samudayaṃ pajahamāno nirodhaṃ pajānanto ariyamaggo maggasaccanti iti dve saccāni sarūpena vuttāni, dve āvattahāravasena veditabbāni.
他就这样以一切方式断除了贪随眠:也就是说,他这样了知不善等法,以一切方式断除了贪随眠。驱除了瞋随眠:意思是以一切方式彻底去除了瞋随眠。到此为止,讲的是不来道。根除了“我是”的见慢随眠:即不把五蕴中任何一法当作作者,以“我是”这种总体执取的方式生起的见慢随眠,将其彻底拔除。巴利
So sabbaso rāgānusayaṃ pahāyāti so evaṃ akusalādīni pajānanto sabbākārena rāgānusayaṃ pajahitvā. Paṭighānusayaṃ paṭivinodetvāti paṭighānusayañca sabbākāreneva nīharitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettāvatā anāgāmimaggo kathito. Asmīti diṭṭhimānānusayaṃ samūhanitvāti pañcasu khandhesu kañci dhammaṃ anavakārīkaritvā ‘‘asmī’’ti iminā samūhaggahaṇākārena pavattaṃ diṭṭhimānānusayaṃ samugghāṭetvā.
在这里,“见慢随眠”指的是与见相似的慢随眠。因为这种慢随眠是以“我是”的方式生起的,所以它和见相似,因此这样称呼。想要详细了解这个“我慢”的人,应该去看《蕴品》里的《差摩经》(相应部3.89)。巴利
Tattha diṭṭhimānānusayanti diṭṭhisadisaṃ mānānusayanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi mānānusayo asmīti pavattattā diṭṭhisadiso hoti, tasmā evaṃ vutto . Imañca asmimānaṃ vitthārato viññātukāmena khandhiyavagge khemakasuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 3.89) oloketabbanti.
断除了无明,就是断除了作为轮回根源的无明。生起了明,就是生起了能根除那无明的阿罗汉道之明。到这里,就讲完了阿罗汉道。在现世中成为苦的终结者,就是在这一生当中,成为轮回之苦的终结者。说到这里,说“仅此而已吗,贤友”,是在交付教导,也就是依据在这业道教导中所说的作意通达之力而说的。其余部分和前面所说的一样。如此,他以不来道和阿罗汉道结束了开示。巴利
Avijjaṃ pahāyāti vaṭṭamūlaṃ avijjaṃ pajahitvā. Vijjaṃ uppādetvāti tassā avijjāya samugghāṭikaṃ arahattamaggavijjaṃ uppādetvā. Ettāvatā arahattamaggo kathito. Diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro hotīti asmiṃyeva attabhāve vaṭṭadukkhassa paricchedakaro hoti. Ettāvatāpi kho, āvusoti desanaṃ niyyāteti, imāya kammapathadesanāya vuttamanasikārappaṭivedhavasenapīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Evaṃ anāgāmimaggaarahattamaggehi desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
90 那些比丘听了尊者舍利弗以善与不善为切入点所说的四圣谛教导之后,就用“善哉,贤友”这句话来表示赞同。这里说的是:他们以这句话心生欢喜,用言语接受,内心也感到亲切。现在,因为这位长老有能力用各种方式开演四圣谛的教导——正如经中所说:“比丘们,舍利弗能够详细地解说、教授四圣谛。”——又因为他还想进一步开示,所以说了“仅此而已吗,贤友”这样的话。因此,那些比丘还想以另一种方式听受圣谛的教导,就进一步向尊者舍利弗提问。也就是说,他们自己问过之后,又针对所答的内容继续追问:“贤友,或许还有别的解说方式,或许还有别的理由。”他们就是以这种方式提出了补充的问题,或者说,问的是前一个问题更深一层的部分。这时,长老为了回答他们,说了“或许有,贤友”等话。其中,对不明显词语的解释是:“食”就是缘。因为缘能带来它自己的果,所以称为“食”。巴利
90.Sādhāvusoti kho…pe… āgato imaṃ saddhammanti evaṃ āyasmato sāriputtassa kusalākusalamukhena catusaccadesanaṃ sutvā taṃ āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṃ ‘‘sādhāvuso’’ti iminā vacanena te bhikkhū abhinanditvā imasseva vacanassa samuṭṭhāpakena cittena anumoditvā vacasā sampaṭicchitvā cetasā sampiyāyitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Idāni yasmā thero nānappakārena catusaccadesanaṃ desetuṃ paṭibalo, yathāha ‘‘sāriputto, bhikkhave, pahoti cattāri ariyasaccāni vitthārena ācikkhituṃ desetu’’nti yasmā vā uttarimpi desetukāmova hutvā ‘‘ettāvatāpi kho’’ti avaca, tasmā aparenapi nayena saccadesanaṃ sotukāmā te bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ sāriputtaṃ uttariṃ pañhaṃ apucchiṃsu. Tena sayameva pucchitvā vissajjitapañhato uttariṃ siyā kho panāvuso, aññopi pariyāyo bhaveyya aññampi kāraṇanti iminā nayena aññaṃ atirekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchiṃsu, purimapañhassa vā uparibhāge pucchiṃsūti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha nesaṃ byākaramāno thero siyā, āvusotiādimāha. Tatthāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā, āhāranti paccayaṃ. Paccayo hi āharati attano phalaṃ, tasmā ‘‘āhāro’’ti vuccati.
对于“已生者”或“有情”等说法中,“已生”指已经出生、已经产生。“求有”指那些寻求、追求出生、再生的人。其中,在四类出生方式里,卵生和胎生的众生,只要还没有破开卵壳或胎膜,就称为“求有”;破开卵壳或胎膜出来之后,就称为“已生”。湿生和化生的众生,在第一个心识刹那称为“求有”,从第二个心识刹那起就称为“已生”。或者,无论以哪种姿态出生,只要还没有达到那之外的另一种状态,就称为“求有”,此后就称为“已生”。巴利
Bhūtānaṃvā sattānantiādīsu bhūtāti sañjātā, nibbattā. Sambhavesīnanti ye sambhavaṃ jātiṃ nibbattiṃ esanti gavesanti. Tattha catūsu yonīsu aṇḍajajalābujā sattā yāva aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca na bhindanti, tāva sambhavesino nāma. Aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca bhinditvā bahi nikkhantā bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajā opapātikā ca paṭhamacittakkhaṇe sambhavesino nāma. Dutiyacittakkhaṇato pabhuti bhūtā nāma. Yena yena vā iriyāpathena jāyanti, yāva te tato aññaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tāva sambhavesino nāma. Tato paraṃ bhūtā nāma.
或者,“已生”是指已经出生、已经产生。那些被算作“只是已生而不会再出生”的人,这是对诸漏尽者的称呼。“求有”是指还在寻求出生的人。因为有学人和凡夫还没有断除“有”的结缚,所以他们在未来仍然寻求出生,这是对有学人和凡夫的称呼。这样一来,通过这两个词,就完全涵盖了一切众生。这里“vā”这个词是连接的意思,所以应当理解为“已生者与求有者”。巴利
Atha vā bhūtāti jātā abhinibbattā, ye bhūtāyeva na puna bhavissantīti saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ khīṇāsavānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sambhavamesantīti sambhavesino. Appahīnabhavasaṃyojanattā āyatimpi sambhavaṃ esantānaṃ sekkhaputhujjanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Evaṃ sabbathāpi imehi dvīhi padehi sabbasatte pariyādiyati. Vāsaddo cettha sampiṇḍanattho, tasmā bhūtānañca sambhavesīnañcāti ayamattho veditabbo.
“为住立”是指住立之义。“为资助”是指资助之义、饶益之义。这是用词的差别,但两个词的意思其实是同一个。或者也可以这样理解:“为住立”是指对各个有情已生起的诸法,以相续不断的方式令其不中断;“为资助”是指令未生起的诸法得以生起。这两者都应当从两种情况来看:既是为了已生诸法的住立与资助,也是为了求有者的住立与资助。“段食”:因为要捏成团才能吞下去,所以叫段食,这是以米饭、粥等为载体的食素的名称。“或粗或细”:载体粗大,所以叫粗;载体微细,所以叫细。但从自性来说,段食属于细色,所以段食本身就是细的。而它依载体而有的粗与细,则要视具体载体而定。巴利
Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthaṃ. Anuggahāyāti anuggahatthaṃ upakāratthaṃ. Vacanabhedo cesa, attho pana dvinnampi padānaṃ ekoyeva. Atha vā ṭhitiyāti tassa tassa sattassa uppannadhammānaṃ anuppabandhavasena avicchedāya. Anuggahāyāti anuppannānaṃ uppādāya. Ubhopi cetāni bhūtānaṃ ṭhitiyā ceva anuggahāya ca. Sambhavesīnaṃ vā ṭhitiyā ceva anuggahāya cāti evaṃ ubhayattha daṭṭhabbāni. Kabaḷīkāro āhāroti kabaḷaṃ katvā ajjhoharitabbato kabaḷīkāro āhāro, odanakummāsādivatthukāya ojāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Oḷāriko vā sukhumo vāti vatthuoḷārikatāya oḷāriko, vatthusukhumatāya sukhumo. Sabhāvena pana sukhumarūpapariyāpannattā kabaḷīkāro āhāro sukhumova hoti. Sāpi cassa vatthuto oḷārikatā sukhumatā ca upādāyupādāya veditabbā.
鳄鱼吃的是石头,孔雀的食物比鳄鱼的更细。据说鳄鱼把石头吞下去,石头一到肚子里就化掉了。孔雀吃蛇、蝎子这类东西。跟孔雀的食物相比,鬣狗的食物更细。据说鬣狗吃扔了三年之久的角和骨头,这些东西只要被它的唾液沾湿,就会像根茎一样变软。跟鬣狗的食物相比,大象的食物更细。大象也吃各种树枝。跟大象的食物相比,野牛、牛耳鹿之类的动物食物更细。据说它们吃各种干枯的树叶等。跟它们的食物相比,牛的食物更细。牛吃鲜草和干草。跟牛的食物相比,兔子的食物更细。跟兔子的食物相比,鸟的食物更细。跟鸟的食物相比,边地人的食物更细。跟边地人的食物相比,村主的食物更细。跟村主的食物相比,国王和大臣的食物更细。跟他们的食物相比,转轮圣王的食物更细。跟转轮圣王的食物相比,地居天的食物更细。跟地居天的食物相比,四大王天的食物更细。这样一直往下说,直到他化自在天的食物,他们的食物已经达到最细的程度。巴利
Kumbhīlānañhi āhāraṃ upādāya morānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Kumbhīlā kira pāsāṇe gilanti. Te ca nesaṃ kucchippattāva vilīyanti. Morā sappavicchikādipāṇe khādanti. Morānaṃ pana āhāraṃ upādāya taracchānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te kira tivassachaḍḍitāni visāṇāni ceva aṭṭhīni ca khādanti. Tāni ca nesaṃ kheḷena temitamatteneva kandamūlaṃ viya mudukāni honti. Taracchānampi āhāraṃ upādāya hatthīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Tepi nānārukkhasākhāyo khādanti. Hatthīnaṃ āhārato gavayagokaṇṇamigādīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te kira nissārāni nānārukkhapaṇṇādīni khādanti. Tesampi āhārato gunnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te allasukkhatiṇāni khādanti. Tesaṃ āhārato sasānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Sasānaṃ āhārato sakuṇānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Sakuṇānaṃ āhārato paccantavāsīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Paccantavāsīnaṃ āhārato gāmabhojakānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Gāmabhojakānaṃ āhārato rājarājamahāmattānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Tesampi āhārato cakkavattino āhāro sukhumo. Cakkavattino āhārato bhummadevānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Bhummadevānaṃ āhārato cātumahārājikānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Evaṃ yāva paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ āhāro vitthāretabbo, tesaṃ āhāro sukhumotveva niṭṭhaṃ patto.
在这里,对于粗重的所依,食素是微少而虚弱的;对于细妙的所依,食素则是强而有力的。就像这样:喝下满满一钵粥的人,片刻之间就饿了,想吃随便什么东西;而只喝下大约一勺酥油的人,一整天都不想再吃。其中,所依能消除疲劳,却不能维持;食素能维持,却不能消除疲劳。两者结合在一起,就既能消除疲劳,也能维持。巴利
Ettha ca oḷārike vatthusmiṃ ojā parittā hoti dubbalā, sukhume balavatī. Tathā hi ekapattapūrampi yāguṃ pīvato muhutteneva jighacchito hoti, yaṃkañcideva khāditukāmo. Sappiṃ pana pasaṭamattaṃ pivitvā divasaṃ abhottukāmo hoti. Tattha vatthu parissamaṃ vinodeti, na pana sakkoti pāletuṃ. Ojā pāleti, na sakkoti parissamaṃ vinodetuṃ. Dve pana ekato hutvā parissamañceva vinodenti pālenti cāti.
“触为第二”指的是眼触等六种触。在这四种食当中,应当知道它是第二种食。这只是说法开示的次第而已。因此,不应该在这里追问:到底是由于什么原因,把它排在第二或第三。“意思食”说的就是思本身。“识”指的是任何一种心。巴利
Phassodutiyoti cakkhusamphassādi chabbidhopi phasso. Etesu catūsu āhāresu dutiyo āhāroti veditabbo. Desanānayo eva cesa. Tasmā iminā nāma kāraṇena dutiyo vā tatiyo vāti idamettha na gavesitabbaṃ. Manosañcetanāti cetanā eva vuccati. Viññāṇanti yaṃkiñci cittaṃ.
这里有人问:如果“食”的意思就是“缘”的意思,那么,在其他众生的其他缘也存在的情况下,为什么只说了这四种呢?回答是:因为它们对内在相续来说是特别的缘。确实,对于以段食为食的众生来说,段食是色身的特别缘;对于名身来说,触是受的特别缘;思是识的特别缘;识是名色的特别缘。正如所说的:巴利
Etthāha, yadi paccayaṭṭho āhāraṭṭho, atha kasmā aññesupi sattānaṃ paccayesu vijjamānesu imeyeva cattāro vuttāti? Vuccate, ajjhattikasantatiyā visesapaccayattā. Visesapaccayo hi kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhānaṃ sattānaṃ rūpakāyassa kabaḷīkāro āhāro. Nāmakāye vedanāya phasso, viññāṇassa manosañcetanā, nāmarūpassa viññāṇaṃ. Yathāha –
比丘们,就像这个身体依靠食物而维持,因为依赖食物才能存续,没有食物就无法存续;同样地,受以触为条件,识以行为条件,名色以识为条件。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ayaṃ kāyo āhāraṭṭhitiko, āhāraṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhati, anāhāro no tiṭṭhati. Tathā phassapaccayā vedanā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti.
那么,这里什么是食?它带来什么?段食带来以食素为第八的诸色法,触食带来三种受,意思食带来三有,识食带来结生名色。巴利
Ko panettha āhāro, kiṃ āharatīti? Kabaḷīkārāhāro ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharati. Phassāhāro tisso vedanā, manosañcetanāhāro tayo bhave, viññāṇāhāro paṭisandhināmarūpanti.
怎么带来的呢?先说段食:食物刚放进嘴里,仅仅这样就已经生出八种色法。被牙齿嚼碎后吞下去时,每一粒食物也都各各生出八种色法。就这样,它带来以食素为第八的诸色法。巴利
Kathaṃ? Kabaḷīkārāhāro tāva mukhe ṭhapitamattoyeva aṭṭha rūpāni samuṭṭhāpeti. Dantavicuṇṇitaṃ pana ajjhohariyamānaṃ ekekaṃ sitthaṃ aṭṭhaṭṭha rūpāni samuṭṭhāpetiyeva. Evaṃ ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharati.
再说触食:可感为乐的触生起时,就带来乐受;同样,可感为苦的触带来苦受,可感为不苦不乐的触带来不苦不乐受。这样,触食从一切方面带来三种受。巴利
Phassāhāro pana sukhavedaniyo phasso uppajjamāno sukhavedanaṃ āharati, tathā dukkhavedaniyo dukkhaṃ, adukkhamasukhavedaniyo adukkhamasukhanti evaṃ sabbathāpi phassāhāro tisso vedanā āharati.
意食:会投生到欲有的业,就带来欲有;会投生到色有、无色有的业,就带来各自对应的那种有。这样看来,意食从一切方面来说,都会带来三种有。巴利
Manosañcetanāhāro kāmabhavūpagaṃ kammaṃ kāmabhavaṃ āharati, rūpārūpabhavūpagāni taṃ taṃ bhavaṃ. Evaṃ sabbathāpi manosañcetanāhāro tayo bhave āharati.
识食则是指:在结生的那一刹那,与识相应的三个蕴,以及依三种十法聚而生的三十种色,识以俱生缘等缘的方式带来它们,所以称为食。这样,识食带来结生名色。巴利
Viññāṇāhāro pana ye ca paṭisandhikkhaṇe taṃsampayuttakā tayo khandhā, yāni ca tisantativasena tiṃsarūpāni uppajjanti, sahajātādipaccayanayena tāni āharatīti vuccati. Evaṃ viññāṇāhāro paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatīti.
这里,“意思食带来三有”,说的是有漏的善思和不善思。“识带来结生名色”,说的只是结生识。不过,从普遍意义上说,因为它们能带来与自身相应、由自身所生的诸法,所以应当知道它们就是“食”。巴利
Ettha ca manosañcetanāhāro tayo bhave āharatīti sāsavā kusalākusalacetanāva vuttā. Viññāṇaṃ paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatīti paṭisandhiviññāṇameva vuttaṃ . Avisesena pana taṃsampayuttataṃsamuṭṭhānadhammānaṃ āharaṇato pete āhārāti veditabbā.
在这四种食当中,段食通过支持身体来完成食的作用;触食就在接触的当下起作用;意思食就在不断策励的当下起作用;识食就在了别的当下起作用。巴利
Etesu catūsu āhāresu kabaḷīkārāhāro upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādheti. Phasso phusantoyeva, manosañcetanā āyūhamānāva. Viññāṇaṃ vijānantameva.
怎么说呢?段食确实就是通过支持身体、维持身体,让众生得以存活。这个由业所生的身体,也要靠段食来支持,才能维持十年、百年,直到寿命的极限。就像什么呢?就像母亲生下的孩子,要靠乳母喂奶等来养育,才能长久存活;又像靠柱子支撑的房子。这也是经上说的——巴利
Kathaṃ? Kabaḷīkārāhāro hi upatthambhentoyeva kāyaṭṭhapanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Kammajanitopi hi ayaṃ kāyo kabaḷīkārāhārena upatthambhito dasapi vassāni vassasatampi yāva āyuparimāṇaṃ tiṭṭhati. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā mātuyā janitopi dārako dhātiyā thaññādīni pāyetvā posiyamānova ciraṃ tiṭṭhati, yathā cupatthambhena upatthambhitagehaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
大王,就像房屋快要倒塌时,人们用另一根木头把它撑住,因为有那根木头撑着,房屋就不会倒;同样的道理,大王,这个身体是靠食物维持的,依靠食物才能存续。巴利
‘‘Yathā mahārāja gehe patante aññena dārunā upatthambhenti, aññena dārunā upatthambhitaṃ santaṃ evaṃ taṃ gehaṃ na patati, evameva kho mahārāja ayaṃ kāyo āhāraṭṭhitiko, āhāraṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
段食就是这样通过支持来达成食的作用。即使这样达成了作用,段食仍然是两种色相续的缘:食等起色和执受色。它对业生色扮演护持者的角色而成为缘,对食等起色扮演生起者的角色而成为缘。巴利
Evaṃ kabaḷīkāro āhāro upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādheti. Evaṃ sādhentopi ca kabaḷīkāro āhāro dvinnaṃ rūpasantatīnaṃ paccayo hoti āhārasamuṭṭhānassa ca upādinnassa ca. Kammajānaṃ anupālako hutvā paccayo hoti. Āhārasamuṭṭhānānaṃ janako hutvā paccayo hoti.
触也是同样:当它接触到作为乐等感受之基础的所缘时,就在乐等感受生起的同时,成为众生得以持续存在的条件。意思则是在以善业或不善业进行造作的同时,由于能产生存在的根本,而成为众生得以持续存在的条件。识则是在了知的同时,由于使名色运转起来,而成为众生得以持续存在的条件。巴利
Phasso pana sukhādivatthubhūtaṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusantoyeva sukhādivedanāpavattanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Manosañcetanā kusalākusalakammavasena āyūhamānāyeva bhavamūlanipphādanato sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Viññāṇaṃ vijānantameva nāmarūpappavattanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti.
当这些食以支持等方式正在完成食的作用时,应当看出有四种恐惧。也就是:在段食上,贪爱本身就是恐惧;在触食上,接近本身就是恐惧;在意思食上,造作本身就是恐惧;在识食上,投生本身就是恐惧。这是什么缘故呢?因为对段食生起贪爱之后,众生以寒热等为先,为了食物而做印章、计算等种种工作,遭受了很多苦。有些人即使在这教法中出家,也以行医等不正当方式寻求食物,在现世就成为应受呵责的人;在来世,则依照《相相应》中所说“他的僧伽梨衣炽燃、全面燃烧”等与相相连的经文所说那样,成为沙门饿鬼。仅凭这个缘故,就应当知道:在段食上,贪爱本身就是恐惧。巴利
Evaṃ upatthambhanādivasena āhārakiccaṃ sādhayamānesu panetesu cattāri bhayāni daṭṭhabbāni. Seyyathidaṃ, kabaḷīkārāhāre nikantiyeva bhayaṃ, phasse upagamanameva, manosañcetanāya āyūhanameva, viññāṇe abhinipātoyeva bhayanti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Kabaḷīkārāhāre hi nikantiṃ katvā sītādīnaṃ purekkhatā sattā āhāratthāya muddāgaṇanādikammāni karontā anappakaṃ dukkhaṃ nigacchanti. Ekacce ca imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvāpi vejjakammādikāya anesanāya āhāraṃ pariyesantā diṭṭhepi dhamme gārayhā honti. Samparāyepi tassa saṅghāṭipi ādittā sampajjalitātiādinā lakkhaṇasaṃyutte vuttanayena samaṇapetā honti. Imināva tāva kāraṇena kabaḷīkārāhāre nikantiyeva bhayanti veditabbā.
那些贪著触的人,即使贪恋触的滋味,也不去侵犯别人守护、看管着的妻女、财物等。物主们把他们连同财物一起抓住,或者把他们一节一节地砍碎,扔到垃圾堆里,或者交给国王。国王就命令对他们施加各种刑罚。身体毁坏、命终之后,恶趣就是他们该去的地方。这样一来,以贪著触的滋味为根源的现世怖畏和来世怖畏,全都落到了他们头上。由于这个原因,应当知道:对触食来说,靠近它本身就是怖畏。巴利
Phassaṃ upagacchantāpi phassassādino paresaṃ rakkhitagopitesu dārādīsu bhaṇḍesu aparajjhanti. Te saha bhaṇḍena bhaṇḍasāmikā gahetvā khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ vā chinditvā saṅkārakūṭesu chaḍḍenti. Rañño vā niyyātenti. Tato ne rājā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārāpeti. Kāyassa ca bhedā duggati nesaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā hoti. Iti phassassādamūlakaṃ diṭṭhadhammikampi samparāyikampi bhayaṃ sabbamāgatameva hoti. Iminā kāraṇena phassāhāre upagamanameva bhayanti veditabbaṃ.
不过,正是因为造作善业和不善业,以这些业为根源,三有中的一切怖畏才全都随之而来。由于这个原因,应当知道:在意思食中,造作本身就是怖畏。巴利
Kusalākusalakammāyūhaneneva pana tammūlakaṃ tīsu bhavesu bhayaṃ sabbamāgataṃyeva hoti. Iminā kāraṇena manosañcetanāhāre āyūhanameva bhayanti veditabbaṃ.
结生识无论投生到哪个地方,就在那个地方执取结生名色而出生;当它在那里出生时,一切怖畏也就随之而生,因为都以它为根本。由于这个原因,应当知道:在识食当中,投生本身就是怖畏。巴利
Paṭisandhiviññāṇañca yasmiṃ yasmiṃ ṭhāne abhinipatati, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ gahetvāva nibbattati, tasmiñca nibbatte sabbabhayāni nibbattāniyeva honti, tammūlakattāti, iminā kāraṇena viññāṇāhāre abhinipātoyeva bhayanti veditabbo.
对于这些如此可怕的诸食,正自觉者为了彻底断除对粗抟食的贪欲,用“诸比丘,譬如一对夫妇”等这样的方式,开示了子肉譬喻;为了彻底断除对触食的贪欲,用“诸比丘,譬如一头无皮母牛”等这样的方式,开示了无皮母牛譬喻;为了彻底断除对意思食的贪欲,用“诸比丘,譬如火坑”等这样的方式,开示了火坑譬喻;为了彻底断除对识食的贪欲,用“诸比丘,譬如罪犯”等这样的方式,开示了百矛刺身的譬喻。巴利
Evaṃ sabhayesu pana imesu āhāresu sammāsambuddho kabaḷīkārāhāre nikantipariyādānatthaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dve jāyampatikā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.63) nayena puttamaṃsūpamaṃ desesi. Phassāhāre nikantipariyādānatthaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, gāvī niccammā’’tiādinā nayena niccammagāvūpamaṃ desesi. Manosañcetanāhāre nikantipariyādānatthaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, aṅgārakāsū’’tiādinā nayena aṅgārakāsūpamaṃ desesi. Viññāṇāhāre nikantipariyādānatthaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, coraṃ āgucāri’’ntiādinā nayena sattisatāhatūpamaṃ desesi.
这里取真实义,简略地说明:据说有一对夫妻,带着儿子,只带了很少的干粮,走上了一条一百由旬的旷野之路。他们走了五十由旬后,干粮就吃完了。他们被饥渴折磨,坐在稀疏的树荫下。这时丈夫对妻子说:“贤妻,从这里往四周五十由旬内,没有村庄,也没有集镇。所以,男人该做的许多事,比如耕田、放牛等等,我现在已经做不了了。来吧,你把我杀了,吃我一半的肉,另一半留作干粮,带着儿子走出旷野。”妻子也说:“夫君,女人该做的许多事,比如纺线、织布等等,我现在也已经做不了了。来吧,你把我杀了,吃我一半的肉,另一半留作干粮,带着儿子走出旷野。”于是丈夫对她说:“贤妻,女人一死,两个人显然都活不成。因为幼小的孩子离开母亲就活不了。但如果我们活着,以后还能再生孩子。来吧,现在就杀了儿子,取他的肉,走出旷野。”巴利
Tatrāyaṃ bhūtamatthaṃ katvā saṅkhepato atthayojanā, dve kira jāyampatikā puttaṃ gahetvā parittena pātheyyena yojanasatikaṃ kantāramaggaṃ paṭipajjiṃsu. Tesaṃ paññāsa yojanāni gantvā pātheyyaṃ niṭṭhāsi. Te khuppipāsāturā viraḷacchāyāyaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Tato puriso bhariyaṃ āha ‘‘bhadde ito samantā paññāsa yojanāni gāmo vā nigamo vā natthi, tasmā yaṃ taṃ purisena kātabbaṃ bahumpi kasigorakkhādikammaṃ, na dāni sakkā taṃ mayā kātuṃ, ehi maṃ māretvā upaḍḍhamaṃsaṃ khāditvā upaḍḍhaṃ pātheyyaṃ katvā puttena saddhiṃ kantāraṃ nittharāhī’’ti. Sāpi āha ‘‘sāmi mayā dāni yaṃ taṃ itthiyā kātabbaṃ bahumpi suttakantanādikammaṃ, taṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, ehi maṃ māretvā upaḍḍhamaṃsaṃ khāditvā upaḍḍhaṃ pātheyyaṃ katvā puttena saddhiṃ kantāraṃ nittharāhī’’ti. Tato so taṃ āha ‘‘bhadde mātugāmamaraṇena dvinnaṃ maraṇaṃ paññāyati. Na hi mando kumāro mātaraṃ vinā jīvituṃ sakkoti. Yadi pana mayaṃ jīvāma, puna dārakaṃ labheyyāma, handa dāni puttakaṃ māretvā maṃsaṃ gahetvā kantāraṃ nittharāmā’’ti.
于是母亲对儿子说:“孩子,到你父亲那里去吧。”儿子就去了。这时父亲说:“我为了养育这个孩子,耕田、放牛等等,吃了多少苦啊,我实在下不了手杀儿子,你自己去杀你的孩子吧。”说完就对他说:“孩子,还是回你母亲那里去吧。”儿子就又去了。这时母亲也说:“我为了求这个儿子,行牛行、行狗行、向天神祈祷等等,已经受了那么多苦,更何况怀着他、护着他的时候呢?我实在下不了手杀儿子。”说完就对他说:“孩子,还是回你父亲那里去吧。”就这样,儿子在父母两人之间来回奔走,就死掉了。他们看见儿子死了,痛哭一场之后,就照前面说的那样取了肉,一边吃一边继续往前走。他们吃这子肉的时候,因为九种原因觉得它可厌,所以既不是为了玩乐,也不是为了陶醉,不是为了打扮,也不是为了装饰,纯粹只是为了走出这片旷野。巴利
Tato mātā puttamāha ‘‘tāta pitu santikaṃ gacchāhī’’ti. So agamāsi. Athassa pitā ‘‘mayā puttakaṃ posessāmīti kasigorakkhādīhi anappakaṃ dukkhamanubhūtaṃ, na sakkomi puttaṃ māretuṃ, tvaṃyeva tava puttakaṃ mārehī’’ti vatvā ‘‘tāta mātusantikameva gacchāhī’’ti āha. So agamāsi. Athassa mātāpi ‘‘mayā puttaṃ patthentiyā govatakukkuravatadevatāyācanādīhipi tāva anappakaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhūtaṃ, ko pana vādo kucchinā pariharantiyā? Na sakkāhaṃ puttaṃ māretu’’nti vatvā ‘‘tāta pitusantikaṃyeva gacchāhī’’ti āha. Evaṃ so dvinnaṃ antarā gacchantoyeva mato. Te taṃ disvā paridevitvā pubbe vuttanayeneva maṃsāni gahetvā khādantā pakkamiṃsu. Tesaṃ so puttamaṃsāhāro navahi kāraṇehi paṭikulattā neva davāya hoti, na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya, kevalaṃ kantāranittharaṇatthāyeva hoti.
是哪九种原因让它显得可厌呢?就是:同族之肉、亲属之肉、儿子之肉、爱子之肉、幼嫩之肉、生肉、无乳酪等调味的肉、无盐、未熏。因此,如果一位比丘把段食看成跟儿子肉一样,他就能断除对它的贪欲。以上便是关于儿子肉譬喻的义理说明。巴利
Katamehi navahi kāraṇehi paṭikūloti ce? Sajātimaṃsatāya ñātimaṃsatāya puttamaṃsatāya piyaputtamaṃsatāya taruṇamaṃsatāya āmakamaṃsatāya agorasamaṃsatāya aloṇatāya adhūpitatāyāti. Tasmā yo bhikkhu kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ evaṃ puttamaṃsasadisaṃ passati , so tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyati. Ayaṃ tāva puttamaṃsūpamāyaṃ atthayojanā.
在无皮母牛的譬喻里,就像那头牛从脖子到蹄子之间的皮被剥掉之后,它无论靠在哪里站着,都会在那里被虫蚁啃咬,纯粹成为苦的起因;同样,触无论依靠什么事物、什么所缘而存在,都会成为由那事物和所缘所生的感受之苦的起因。所以,如果比丘这样把触食看成跟无皮母牛一样,就能断尽对它的贪爱。这就是无皮母牛譬喻的义理连结。巴利
Niccammagāvūpamāyaṃ pana yathā sā gāvī gīvato yāva khurā, tāva cammaṃ uddāletvā muttā yaṃ yadeva nissāya tiṭṭhati, tattha pāṇakehi khajjamānā dukkhassevādhikaraṇaṃ hoti, evaṃ phassopi yaṃ yadeva vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ vā nissāya tiṭṭhati, taṃtaṃvatthārammaṇasambhavassa vedayitadukkhassa adhikaraṇameva hoti. Tasmā yo bhikkhu phassāhāraṃ evaṃ niccammagāvisadisaṃ passati , so tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyati, ayaṃ niccammagāvūpamāyaṃ atthayojanā.
在火坑譬喻中,正如那个火坑一样,三有也具有极度灼热的含义。正如两个男人分别抓住那人的手臂,把他拖向火坑,意思食也具有把众生拖入诸有的含义。因此,如果比丘把意思食看作像那两个把罪人拖向火坑的男人,就能彻底断除对它的贪爱。这就是火坑譬喻的义理连结。巴利
Aṅgārakāsūpamāyaṃ pana yathā sā aṅgārakāsu, evaṃ mahāpariḷāhaṭṭhena tayo bhavā. Yathā nānābāhāsu gahetvā tattha upakaḍḍhakā dve purisā, evaṃ bhavesu upakaḍḍhanaṭṭhena manosañcetanā. Tasmā yo bhikkhu manosañcetanāhāraṃ evaṃ aṅgārakāsūpakaḍḍhakapurisasadisaṃ passati, so tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyati, ayaṃ aṅgārakāsūpamāyaṃ atthayojanā.
在百矛穿刺的譬喻里,那个男子在上午被一百支矛刺中。这些矛在他身上刺出一百个伤口,刺进去之后停了一下,穿透过去,从后面落下来;另外两百支矛也是这样。这样一来,在他被刺中的地方,那些矛并没有落在那里,而是穿身而过,他全身就被这些矛刺得千疮百孔。光是生起一个伤口所产生的苦,就已经无法衡量了,更何况三百个伤口呢?在这里,矛刺下去的时刻,就像结生识生起的时刻;伤口的产生,就像诸蕴的产生;伤口中生起苦受,就像诸蕴已经生起之后,生起以轮回为根源的种种苦。另一种解释是:那个造罪的人,就像结生识;他因为被矛击中而产生的众多伤口,就像以识为缘而生的名色;以伤口为缘,那个人生起剧烈的苦,就应当理解为:以名色为缘,识生起三十二种业因、九十八种疾病等种种苦。因此,如果比丘能把识食看成就像被百矛穿刺一样,他就能彻底断除对它的贪爱。这就是百矛穿刺譬喻中的义理连结。巴利
Sattisatāhatūpamāyaṃ pana yena so puriso pubbaṇhasamaye sattisatena haññati, tamassa sarīre vaṇamukhasataṃ katvā antarā aṭṭhatvā vinivijjhitvā aparabhāgeyeva patati, evaṃ itarāni dve sattisatāni, evamassa patitokāse apatitvā apatitvā gatāhi sattīhi sabbasarīraṃ chiddāvachiddameva hoti, tassa ekavaṇamukhepi uppannassa dukkhassa pamāṇaṃ natthi, ko pana vādo tīsu vaṇamukhasatesu? Tattha sattinipātakālo viya paṭisandhiviññāṇanibbattakālo. Vaṇamukhajananaṃ viya khandhajananaṃ. Vaṇamukhesu dukkhavedanuppādo viya jātesu khandhesu vaṭṭamūlakanānāvidhadukkhuppādo. Aparo nayo, āgucārī puriso viya paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Tassa sattighātehi uppannavaṇamukhāni viya viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ. Vaṇamukhapaccayā tassa purisassa kakkhaḷadukkhuppādo viya nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇassa dvattiṃsakammakāraṇaaṭṭhanavutirogādivasena nānappakārakadukkhuppādo daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā yo bhikkhu viññāṇāhāraṃ evaṃ sattisatāhatasadisaṃ passati. So tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyati, ayaṃ sattisatāhatūpamāyaṃ atthayojanā.
他这样彻底断除对诸食的贪爱时,就遍知了四种食;这些食被遍知之后,一切事也都同样被遍知了。世尊确实这样说过:巴利
So evaṃ imesu āhāresu nikantiṃ pariyādiyanto cattāropi āhāre parijānāti, yesu pariññātesu sabbampi pariññātaṃ vatthu pariññātameva hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,当段食被彻底了知时,对五欲的贪就被彻底了知了。当对五欲的贪被彻底了知时,就不再有那样的结——圣弟子被那结系缚着,就会再回到这个世间。比丘们,当触食被彻底了知时,三种受就被彻底了知了。当三种受被彻底了知时,我说圣弟子没有什么更需要做的了。比丘们,当意思食被彻底了知时,三种渴爱就被彻底了知了。当三种渴爱被彻底了知时,我说圣弟子没有什么更需要做的了。比丘们,当识食被彻底了知时,名色就被彻底了知了。当名色被彻底了知时,我说圣弟子没有什么更需要做的了。巴利
‘‘Kabaḷīkāre, bhikkhave, āhāre pariññāte pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo pariññāto hoti. Pañcakāmaguṇike rāge pariññāte natthi taṃ saṃyojanaṃ, yena saṃyojanena saṃyutto ariyasāvako puna imaṃ lokaṃ āgaccheyya. Phasse, bhikkhave, āhāre pariññāte tisso vedanā pariññātā honti. Tīsu vedanāsu pariññātāsu ariyasāvakassa natthi kiñci uttarikaraṇīyanti vadāmi. Manosañcetanāya, bhikkhave, āhāre pariññāte tisso taṇhā pariññātā honti. Tīsu taṇhāsu pariññātāsu ariyasāvakassa natthi kiñci uttarikaraṇīyanti vadāmi. Viññāṇe, bhikkhave, āhāre pariññāte nāmarūpaṃ pariññātaṃ hoti. Nāmarūpe pariññāte ariyasāvakassa natthi kiñci uttarikaraṇīyanti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.63).
“爱集起则食集起”的意思是:由于先前爱集起,结生时的诸食便生起。如何呢?确实,在结生刹那,依三事和合而生起的三十色法之中,有食素存在。这就是依爱为缘而生起的已执受段食。与结生心相应的触、思,以及该心本身作为识,这些就是依爱为缘而生起的已执受触食、意思食、识食。如此,应知由于先前的爱集起,而有结生诸食的集起。然而,因为这里把已执受和未执受的食合在一起解说,所以未执受的食也应当这样理解:由于爱集起而有食集起。也就是说,在与八种贪俱行之心等起的色法当中,有食素存在,这是依俱生爱为缘而生起的未执受段食;而与贪俱行之心相应的触、思,以及该心本身作为识,这些就是依爱为缘而生起的未执受触食、意思食、识食。巴利
Taṇhāsamudayā āhārasamudayoti purimataṇhāsamudayā paṭisandhikānaṃ āhārānaṃ samudayo nibbatto hotīti attho. Kathaṃ? Paṭisandhikkhaṇe hi tisantativasena uppannasamatiṃsarūpabbhantare jātā ojā atthi. Ayaṃ taṇhāpaccayā nibbatto upādinnakakabaḷīkārāhāro. Paṭisandhicittasampayuttā pana phassacetanā sayañca cittaṃ viññāṇanti ime taṇhāpaccayā nibbattā upādinnakaphassamanosañcetanā viññāṇāhārāti. Evaṃ tāva purimataṇhāsamudayā paṭisandhikānaṃ āhārānaṃ samudayo veditabbo. Yasmā panidha upādinnakāpi anupādinnakāpi āhārā missetvā kathitā, tasmā anupādinnakānampi evaṃ taṇhāsamudayā āhārasamudayo veditabbo . Aṭṭhalobhasahagatacittasamuṭṭhitesu hi rūpesu ojā atthi, ayaṃ sahajātataṇhāpaccayā nibbatto anupādinnakakabaḷīkārāhāro. Lobhasahagatacittasampayuttā pana phassacetanā sayañca cittaṃ viññāṇanti ime taṇhāpaccayā nibbattā anupādinnakaphassamanosañcetanā viññāṇāhārāti.
“爱灭所以食灭”是说:作为已执受和未执受诸食之因缘的爱灭尽了,由这爱的灭尽,便可了知食的灭尽。其余部分和前面所说的一样。不过这里有一个差别:在这里,四谛都是以它们自身的真实面貌直接说出来的。就像这里一样,从这以后的一切场合也都是如此。因此,在任何地方都不应混淆,而要把四谛一一分辨清楚。还有,在一切场合中,“贤友,仅此而已”这句付嘱教法的话,都要配合各处分说的法来连接。在这里的连结是这样的:说“仅此而已”,意思就是“仅以这食的开示中所说的作意通达”。这个道理在一切地方都适用。巴利
Taṇhānirodhāāhāranirodhoti imissā upādinnakānañca anupādinnakānañca āhārānaṃ paccayabhūtāya taṇhāya nirodhena āhāranirodho paññāyati. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ayaṃ pana viseso, idha cattāripi saccāni sarūpeneva vuttāni. Yathā ca idha, evaṃ ito uttarimpi sabbavāresūti. Tasmā sabbattha asammuyhantena saccāni uddharitabbāni. Sabbavāresu ca ‘‘ettāvatāpi kho āvuso’’ti idaṃ desanāniyyātanaṃ tattha tattha desitadhammavasena yojetabbaṃ. Tassa idha tāva ayaṃ yojanā ettāvatāpīti imāya āhāradesanāya vuttamanasikārappaṭivedhavasenāpīti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo sabbatthāpi.
91 现在,比丘们说“贤友,太好了”,像前面那样随喜、赞同长老所说的话之后,又进一步提问。长老也用另一种方式为他们解答。这个模式适用于此后每一个段落。所以,从这以后,我们不再涉及这类叙述性的话,只就他用每一种方式解答的内容来注释其含义。而在这一段的略说开示中,“他了知苦”这里的“苦”,指的是苦谛。至于广说开示中应当说明的一切内容,在《清净道论》的“谛的解释”中已经讲过了。巴利
91. Idāni ‘‘sādhāvuso’’ti purimanayeneva therassa bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā te bhikkhū uttarimpi pañhaṃ pucchiṃsu. Thero ca nesaṃ aññenapi pariyāyena byākāsi. Esa nayo ito paresupi sabbavāresu. Tasmā ito paraṃ evarūpāni vacanāni anāmasitvā yena yena pariyāyena byākaroti, tassa tasseva atthaṃ vaṇṇayissāma. Imassa pana vārassa saṅkhepadesanāyaṃ dukkhañca pajānātīti ettha dukkhanti dukkhasaccaṃ. Vitthāradesanāyaṃ pana yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge saccaniddese vuttamevāti.
老死品注释巴利
Jarāmaraṇavāravaṇṇanā
92 从此以后,开示是依缘起的方式进行的。其中,在老死这一节里,首先应当知道,“那些各个的”这句话,是简要地描述众多有情的共通情况。因为如果说“这是提婆达多的老,这是善月的老”,即使讲上一整天,有情也说不完。但用这两个词,就没有任何一个有情被遗漏。所以说“这是简要地描述众多有情的共通情况”。巴利
92. Ito paraṃ paṭiccasamuppādavasena desanā hoti. Tattha jarāmaraṇavāre tāva tesaṃ tesanti ayaṃ saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddesoti ñātabbo. Yā devadattassa jarā, yā somadattassa jarāti evañhi divasampi kathentassa neva sattā pariyādānaṃ gacchanti. Imehi pana dvīhi padehi na koci satto apariyādinno hoti. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso’’ti.
“在那一一者当中”这一句,是就趣和生类的角度,对众多部类所作的共通说明。“众生部类”则是通过共通说明,对所指出的具体形态加以举例显示。在“老、老化状态”等当中,“老”是就自性作的说明,“老化状态”是就行相作的说明。“牙齿脱落”等则是就时间流逝中所起的作用作的说明。最后两个是就本质作的说明。因为,以“这是老”这个词,是从自性上说明了老,所以这是对它的自性说明;以“老化状态”这个词,是从行相上说明,所以这是对它的行相说明;以“牙齿脱落”这个词,是就时间流逝中牙齿、指甲呈现脱落状态所起的作用来说明;以“头发灰白”这个词,是就头发、体毛呈现灰白状态所起的作用来说明;以“皮肤起皱”这个词,是就肌肉萎缩、皮肤呈现皱纹状态所起的作用来说明。因此,这“牙齿脱落”等三种,是就时间流逝中所起的作用对老所作的说明。通过这些变异现象的显现,显示了已经明显显露出来的老。就像水、火或风,通过草木等被冲毁、被摧折或被烧焦,其经过的路径变得明显,但那路径并不是水、火等本身;同样,老通过牙齿脱落等状态,其经过的路径变得明显,即使睁开眼睛也能被把握到。但牙齿脱落等本身并不是老,因为老不是眼识所能了别的。巴利
Tamhi tamhīti ayaṃ gatijātivasena anekesaṃ nikāyānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso. Sattanikāyeti sādhāraṇaniddesena niddiṭṭhassa sarūpanidassanaṃ. Jarā jīraṇatātiādīsu pana jarāti sabhāvaniddeso. Jīraṇatāti ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccantiādayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā. Pacchimā dve pakatiniddesā. Ayañhi jarāti iminā padena sabhāvato dīpitā, tenassāyaṃ sabhāvaniddeso. Jīraṇatāti iminā ākārato. Tenassāyaṃ ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccanti iminā kālātikkame dantanakhānaṃ khaṇḍitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Pāliccanti iminā kesalomānaṃ palitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Valittacatāti iminā maṃsaṃ milāpetvā tace valittabhāvakaraṇakiccato dīpitā. Tenassā ime khaṇḍiccantiādayo tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā. Tehi imesaṃ vikārānaṃ dassanavasena pākaṭībhūtā pākaṭajarā dassitā. Yatheva hi udakassa vā aggino vā vātassa vā tiṇarukkhādīnaṃ sambhaggapalibhaggatāya vā jhāmatāya vā gatamaggo pākaṭo hoti, na ca so gatamaggo tāneva udakādīni, evameva jarāya dantādīsu khaṇḍiccādivasena gatamaggo pākaṭo, cakkhuṃ ummīletvāpi gayhati. Na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarā, na hi jarā cakkhuviññeyyā hoti.
“寿命的减损、诸根的成熟”这两个词,是就时间流逝之后才变得明显这一点来说的,因此说明了被称为寿尽以及眼等诸根成熟的这种本质。应当知道,这最后两个是对本质的说明。巴利
Āyuno saṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripākoti imehi pana padehi kālātikkameyeva abhibyattatāya āyukkhayacakkhādiindriyaparipākasaññitāya pakatiyā dīpitā. Tenassime pacchimā dve pakatiniddesāti veditabbā.
在这里,因为人到了衰老时寿命会减损,所以“老”被称为“寿命的减损”,这是以结果来代称原因。又因为年轻时眼等诸根非常清净明利,连极细微的对象也能轻松地取到,而到了衰老时,诸根已经成熟、浑浊、不清晰,连粗大的对象也无法取到,所以“老”也被称为“诸根的成熟”,同样是以结果来代称原因。而这样解说的老,整体上又分为两种:明显的老和隐藏的老。巴利
Tattha yasmā jaraṃ pattassa āyu hāyati, tasmā jarā ‘‘āyuno saṃhānī’’ti phalūpacārena vuttā . Yasmā ca daharakāle suppasannāni sukhumampi attano visayaṃ sukheneva gaṇhanasamatthāni cakkhādīni indriyāni jaraṃ pattassa paripakkāni āluḷitāni avisadāni oḷārikampi attano visayaṃ gahetuṃ asamatthāni honti, tasmā ‘‘indriyānaṃ paripāko’’tipi phalūpacāreneva vuttā. Sā panāyaṃ evaṃ niddiṭṭhā sabbāpi jarā pākaṭā paṭicchannāti duvidhā hoti.
在这里,从牙齿等出现缺损等状态可以看出,色法中的老叫作“显露的老”。而在无色法中,因为看不到这类变化,所以叫作“隐藏的老”。其中,那种牙齿等缺损的状态,由于牙齿等本身很容易辨认,所以只是颜色形状罢了;用眼睛看到它之后,再通过意门去思惟:“这些牙齿已经被老击坏了”,这样便知道有老。就像看到绑在水池处的牛头形出水口等,就知道下面有水一样。再者,老还可以分为两种:无间隔的老和有间隔的老。其中,对于珠宝、黄金、白银、珊瑚、太阳等,对于处于幼年期等阶段的众生,以及对于花、果、嫩芽等没有生命的东西,因为中间阶段颜色等变化很难察觉,所以这种老叫作“无间隔的老”,意思是没有间断的老。反之,在前面所说的其他情形中,因为中间各个阶段颜色等变化都很容易辨认,所以应当知道这种老叫作“有间隔的老”。巴利
Tattha dantādīsu khaṇḍabhāvādidassanato rūpadhammesu jarā pākaṭajarā nāma. Arūpadhammesu pana tādisassa vikārassa adassanato paṭicchannajarā nāma. Tattha yvāyaṃ khaṇḍādibhāvo dissati, so tādisānaṃ dantādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā vaṇṇoyeva, taṃ cakkhunā disvā manodvārena cintetvā ‘‘ime dantā jarāya pahaṭā’’ti jaraṃ jānāti udakaṭṭhāne baddhāni gosīsādīni oloketvā heṭṭhā udakassa atthibhāvaṃ jānanaṃ viya. Puna avīci savīcīti evampi duvidhā hoti. Tattha maṇikanakarajatapavāḷasūriyādīnaṃ mandadasakādīsu pāṇīnaṃ viya pupphaphalapallavādīsu ca apāṇīnaṃ viya antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ duviññeyyattā jarā avīcijarā nāma, nirantarajarāti attho. Tato aññesu pana yathāvuttesu antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā jarā savīcijarā nāmāti veditabbā.
从这里往后,“那些各个的”等等,应当完全按照前面所说的方式来理解。不过,在“死、消逝状态”等说法中,“死”是从消逝的作用来说的,这是一蕴、四蕴、五蕴有情的通称。“消逝状态”是用状态词来显示死的特征。“破坏”是说明已死的诸蕴坏灭。“消失”是说就像破碎的陶瓶一样,已坏已死的诸蕴无论以什么方式都不再存在,这是显示其不复存在。“死亡、死”就是名为死神的死,以此排除断灭死等不正常的死。所谓“时”就是终结者,它的作用就是“寿尽”,由此显示世间共许的死。巴利
Ito paraṃ, tesaṃ tesantiādi vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Cuti cavanatātiādīsu pana cutīti cavanakavasena vuccati, ekacatupañcakkhandhānaṃ sāmaññavacanametaṃ. Cavanatāti bhāvavacanena lakkhaṇanidassanaṃ. Bhedoti cutikkhandhānaṃ bhaṅguppattiparidīpanaṃ. Antaradhānanti ghaṭasseva bhinnassa bhinnānaṃ cutikkhandhānaṃ yena kenaci pariyāyena ṭhānābhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Maccu maraṇanti maccusaṅkhātaṃ maraṇaṃ. Tena samucchedamaraṇādīni nisedheti. Kālo nāma antako, tassa kiriyāti kālakiriyā. Etena lokasammutiyā maraṇaṃ dīpeti.
现在,为了从究竟意义上说明,接着说了“诸蕴的坏灭”等话。因为从究竟意义上说,确实只有诸蕴在坏灭,并没有任何一个叫“有情”的东西在死去。不过,当诸蕴正在坏灭时,就说“有情在死”;当诸蕴已经坏灭时,就说“有情死了”——这只是世间的假名说法。巴利
Idāni paramatthena dīpetuṃ, khandhānaṃ bhedotiādimāha. Paramatthena hi khandhāyeva bhijjanti, na satto nāma koci marati. Khandhesu pana bhijjamānesu satto marati, bhinnesu matoti vohāro hoti.
在这里,诸蕴的坏灭是就四现相来说的,躯体的舍弃是就一现相来说的。或者也可以这样理解:诸蕴的坏灭是就四现相等来说的,躯体的舍弃是就其余两种现相来说的。为什么呢?因为在这两种有当中,也都存在着被称为色身的躯体。又或者,因为在四大王天等处,诸蕴只是坏灭,并没有舍弃什么,所以那些情况就诸蕴而言是诸蕴的坏灭,而在人等处则是躯体的舍弃。在这里,由于死是舍弃躯体的原因,所以说死是躯体的舍弃,应当这样理解其中的含义。巴利
Ettha ca catuvokāravasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, ekavokāravasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Catuvokāravasena vā khandhānaṃ bhedo, sesadvayavasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo veditabbo. Kasmā? Bhavadvayepi rūpakāyasaṅkhātassa kaḷevarassa sambhavato. Atha vā yasmā ca cātumahārājikādīsu khandhā bhijjanteva, na kiñci nikkhipanti, tasmā tesaṃ vasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, manussādīsu kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Ettha ca kaḷevarassa nikkhepakāraṇato maraṇaṃ kaḷevarassa nikkhepoti vuttanti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
就这样,这个老和这个死,此谓,朋友们:把这两者合在一起,就叫做老死。其余部分和前面所说的方法一样。巴利
Iti ayañca jarā idañca maraṇaṃ. Idaṃ vuccatāvusoti idaṃ ubhayampi ekato katvā jarāmaraṇanti kathīyati. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
93 93. 在“生”这一部分中,关于“生”“已生”等说法:以正在产生的意义叫“生”,这是就处尚未圆满来说的。以已经产生的意义叫“已生”,这是就处已圆满来说的。以进入的意义叫“入胎”,这是就卵生和胎生来说的。因为他们进入卵壳和胎膜时,就像钻进去一样执取结生。以现起出生的意义叫“再生”,这是就湿生和化生来说的,因为他们直接显现而出生。以上是随俗说法的开示。巴利
93. Jātivāre jāti sañjātītiādīsu jāyanaṭṭhena jāti, sā aparipuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā. Sañjāyanaṭṭhena sañjāti, sā paripuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā. Okkamanaṭṭhena okkanti, sā aṇḍajajalābujavasena yuttā. Te hi aṇḍakosañca vatthikosañca okkamantā pavisantā viya paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti. Abhinibbattanaṭṭhena abhinibbatti, sā saṃsedajaopapātikavasena yuttā, te hi pākaṭāyeva hutvā nibbattanti. Ayaṃ tāva vohāradesanā.
现在说的是究竟义的开示。因为从究竟义来看,只有诸蕴显现,没有众生。其中“诸蕴”这个词,要理解为:在一蕴的生存中,取一蕴;在四蕴的生存中,取四蕴;在五蕴的生存中,取五蕴。“显现”就是生起。“诸处”在这里,要按各处正在生起的那些处来统摄理解。“获得”就是在相续中显现,因为那些法只要显现,就被称为已获得。“贤友,这称为生”这句话,是对按世俗说法和究竟义两种方式所说的“生”作总结。而在“有的集起”这句里,要理解作为生之缘的是业有。其余内容,和前面所说的方式相同。巴利
Idāni paramatthadesanā hoti. Khandhāyeva hi paramatthato pātubhavanti, na satto. Tattha ca khandhānanti ekavokārabhave ekassa catuvokārabhave catunnaṃ pañcavokārabhave pañcannampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pātubhāvoti uppatti. Āyatanānanti ettha tatra tatra uppajjamānāyatanavaseneva saṅgaho veditabbo. Paṭilābhoti santatiyaṃ pātubhāvoyeva. Pātubhavantāneva hi tāni paṭiladdhāni nāma honti. Ayaṃ vuccatāvuso jātīti iminā padena vohārato paramatthato ca desitāya jātiyā nigamanaṃ karotīti. Bhavasamudayāti ettha pana jātiyā paccayabhūto kammabhavo veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
94 94. 在有品中,欲有指业有和再生有。其中,业有就是能导向欲有的业。因为它是再生有的因,所以就像“诸佛出世是乐”(《法句》194)、“恶业积聚是苦”(《法句》117)这类说法一样,是借用果的名称来称它为“有”。再生有则是由那种业所产生、被执取的五蕴。因为它在那里存在,所以称为“有”。这样,从一切方面来说,这里的业和再生这两者,都被称为“欲有”。色有和无色有也是同样的道理。而在“取的集起”这句话里,对于善的业有,取只是以亲依止缘的方式成为缘;对于不善的业有,它既以亲依止缘的方式,也以俱生缘等方式成为缘;对于一切再生有,则只是以亲依止缘的方式成为缘。其余内容与前面所说相同。巴利
94. Bhavavāre kāmabhavoti kammabhavo ca upapattibhavo ca. Tattha kammabhavo nāma kāmabhavūpagaṃ kammameva. Tañhi upapattibhavassa kāraṇattā ‘‘sukho buddhānamuppādo (dha. pa. 194) dukkho pāpassa uccayo’’tiādīni (dha. pa. 117) viya phalavohārena bhavoti vuttaṃ. Upapattibhavo nāma tena kammena nibbattaṃ upādinnakhandhapañcakaṃ. Tañhi tattha bhavatīti katvā bhavoti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sabbathāpi idaṃ kammañca upapatti ca ubhayampetamidha ‘‘kāmabhavo’’ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo rūpārūpabhavesu. Upādānasamudayāti ettha pana upādānaṃ kusalakammabhavassa upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti. Akusalakammabhavassa upanissayavasenapi sahajātādivasenapi. Upapattibhavassa pana sabbassāpi upanissayavaseneva. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
取支的详细解释巴利
Upādānavāravaṇṇanā
95 在取支这部分,说到“欲取”等词时:人们用这种贪去执取感官对象上的欲,或者贪本身就在执取欲,所以叫“欲取”。也可以说,欲本身就是取,所以叫“欲取”。“取”的意思是牢牢抓住。这里的前缀upa就是“坚固”的意思,就像在“upāyāsa(恼)”“upakaṭṭhā(近行)”这些词里的用法一样。这是对五欲功德方面贪染的统称。这是这里的简要解释。如果要详细解释,就应当按《法集论》1220和《分别论》938所说的那样来理解:“其中,什么是欲取?就是对诸欲的欲贪……”巴利
95. Upādānavāre kāmupādānantiādīsu vatthukāmaṃ upādiyati etena, sayaṃ vā taṃ upādiyatīti kāmupādānaṃ. Kāmo ca so upādānañcāti vā kāmupādānaṃ. Upādānanti daḷhaggahaṇaṃ vuccati. Daḷhattho hi ettha upasaddo, ‘‘upāyāsa upakaṭṭhā’’tiādīsu viya pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ kāmupādānaṃ, yo kāmesu kāmacchando’’ti (dha. sa. 1220; vibha. 938) vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
同样地,见本身就是取,所以叫见取。或者,人们执取于见,又或者人们以那种见去执取见,所以叫见取。因为后起的见会执取先前的见,人们也会凭借那种见去执取见。就像经文里说的:“我与世间是常,只有这是真的,其他都是虚妄”等等。这是对除了戒禁取和我语取之外一切恶见的总称。这是这里的简要解释。若要详细解释,则应依照《法集论》1220和《分别论》938所说的方式来了知:“其中,什么是见取?即‘没有布施’……”等等。巴利
Tathā diṭṭhi ca sā upādānañcāti diṭṭhupādānaṃ. Atha vā diṭṭhiṃ upādiyati, upādiyanti vā etena diṭṭhinti diṭṭhupādānaṃ. Upādiyati hi purimadiṭṭhiṃ uttaradiṭṭhi. Upādiyanti ca tāya diṭṭhiṃ. Yathāha ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 3.27), sīlabbatupādānaattavādupādānavajjassa sabbadiṭṭhigatassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ diṭṭhupādānaṃ natthi dinna’’nti (dha. sa. 1220; vibha. 938) vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
同样地,他们借此执取戒禁,或者自己执取那戒禁,又或者那戒禁本身就是执取,所以叫戒禁取。因为对牛戒、牛禁等法门坚定执著“这样就能得到清净”,所以它们本身就是执取。这是这里的简要解释。若要详细解释,则应按照“其中,什么是戒禁取?就是外部的沙门、婆罗门通过戒行得到清净”这样的说法来理解。巴利
Tathā sīlabbataṃ upādiyanti etena, sayaṃ vā taṃ upādiyati, sīlabbatañca taṃ upādānañcāti vā sīlabbatupādānaṃ. Gosīlagovatādīni hi evaṃ suddhīti abhinivesato sayameva upādānāni ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ sīlabbatupādānaṃ, ito bahiddhā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sīlena suddhī’’ti vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
现在人们藉此而说,所以叫“论说”;人们藉此而执取,所以叫“取”。他们论说什么、执取什么呢?是论说“我”、执取“我”。或者,执取关于“我”的论说,就叫“我语取”;或者,仅仅把“有我”这种论说本身当作“我”来执取,所以叫“我语取”。这是对以二十种事为基础的有身见的称呼。这里是简略说明。若要详细说明,则应按照《法集论》第1223段所说的方式来理解:“其中,什么是我语取?就是在这里,一个没有听闻正法的凡夫,不见诸圣者……”巴利
Idāni vadanti etenāti vādo. Upādiyanti etenāti upādānaṃ. Kiṃ vadanti, upādiyanti vā? Attānaṃ. Attano vādupādānaṃ attavādupādānaṃ. Attavādamattameva vā attāti upādiyati etenāti attavādupādānaṃ, vīsativatthukāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ attavādupādānaṃ, idha assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti (dha. sa. 1223) vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
在“渴爱集起”这一句里,这里的渴爱对欲取来说,是作为亲依止缘,或者以无间缘、等无间缘、无有缘、离去缘、习行缘的方式成为缘。对其余几种取,也以俱生缘等方式成为缘。其余部分就按前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Taṇhāsamudayāti ettha taṇhā kāmupādānassa upanissayavasena anantarasamanantaranatthivigatāsevanavasena vā paccayo. Avasesānaṃ pana sahajātādivasenāpi. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
渴爱门类的解释巴利
Taṇhāvāravaṇṇanā
96 在渴爱这一节里,从色渴爱……一直到法渴爱,是这样得名的:在眼门等处的速行道上生起的渴爱,就像“长者子”“婆罗门子”这类称呼是依父亲而来一样,它是依与父亲相似的所缘境而得名的。这里,以色为所缘境的渴爱,或者说对色生起的渴爱,就是色渴爱。它作为欲贪而生起,贪著于色,就是欲爱。它作为与常见相应的贪而生起,把色贪著为恒常、稳固、永恒,就是有爱。它作为与断见相应的贪而生起,把色贪著为会断灭、会坏灭、死后就不再有,就是无有爱。这样,色渴爱共有三种。声渴爱等等也像色渴爱一样,这样就有十八种渴爱行。它们在内色等上有十八种,在外色等上有十八种,共三十六种。这样,过去三十六种,未来三十六种,现在三十六种,总共一百零八种。或者,依照“执取内在的,才有‘我存在’、‘我如此存在’”(《分别论》973-974)这类说法,依止内色等的有十八种;依照“执取外在的,才有‘我以此而存在’、‘我以此而如此存在’”(《分别论》975)这类说法,依止外色等的有十八种,共三十六种。这样,过去三十六种,未来三十六种,现在三十六种,也总共是一百零八种渴爱行。如果再加以归纳,在色等所缘境上,只有六类渴爱,也只有欲爱、有爱、无有爱这三种。巴利
96. Taṇhāvāre rūpataṇhā…pe… dhammataṇhāti evaṃ cakkhudvārādīsu javanavīthiyaṃ pavattāya taṇhāya ‘‘seṭṭhiputto brāhmaṇaputto’’ti evamādīsu pitito nāmaṃ viya pitisadisārammaṇato nāmaṃ. Ettha ca rūpārammaṇā taṇhā, rūpe taṇhāti rūpataṇhā. Sā kāmarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ assādentī pavattamānā kāmataṇhā. Sassatadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ sassatanti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā bhavataṇhā. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ ucchijjati vinassati pecca na bhavissatīti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā vibhavataṇhāti evaṃ tividhā hoti. Yathā ca rūpataṇhā, tathā saddataṇhādayopīti etāni aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni honti. Tāni ajjhattarūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa. Iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti aṭṭhasataṃ. ‘‘Ajjhattikassupādāya ‘asmī’ti hoti , ‘itthasmī’ti hotī’’ti (vibha. 973-974) vā evamādīnā ajjhattikarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasa, ‘‘bāhirassupādāya ‘iminā asmī’ti hoti, ‘iminā itthasmī’ti hotī’’ti vā (vibha. 975) evamādinā bāhirarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa. Iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti evampi aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni honti. Puna saṅgahe karīyamāne rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu chaḷeva taṇhākāyā tissoyeva kāmataṇhādayo hontīti evaṃ –
以解说的意义而称为解说,以广说的意义而称为广说;
再者,有智慧的人应当概括地了知渴爱。巴利
Niddesatthena niddesa-vitthārā vitthārassa ca; Puna saṅgahato taṇhā, viññātabbā vibhāvināti.
在“受的集起”这一句里,这里所说的“受”指的是果报受。那么,这个受在六门中怎么成为渴爱的缘呢?因为它有可贪著的味道。确实,众生由于贪著乐受的味道,把受当成“我的”,对受生起渴爱,变得染著于受,于是在眼门只希求可爱的色,得到之后就贪著它,还对提供所缘的画师等人恭敬供养。同样,在耳门等处,他们希求可爱的声音等,得到之后就贪著它,还对提供所缘的弹琴者、调香师、厨师、织工、展示种种技艺的人等恭敬供养。这就像什么呢?就像那些因为疼爱儿子而把儿子当成“我的”的人,会恭敬供养乳母,只用适宜的熟酥、乳汁等来喂他、养他。其余内容按前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Vedanāsamudayāti ettha pana vedanāti vipākavedanā adhippetā. Sā kathaṃ chasu dvāresu taṇhāya paccayo hotīti ce? Assādanīyato. Sukhāya hi vedanāya assādanena sattā vedanaṃ mamāyantā vedanāya taṇhaṃ uppādetvā vedanārāgarattā hutvā cakkhudvāre iṭṭhameva rūpaṃ patthenti, laddhā ca naṃ assādenti, ārammaṇadāyakānañca cittakārādīnaṃ sakkāraṃ karonti. Tathā sotadvārādīsu iṭṭhe ca saddādayo patthenti, laddhā ca ne assādenti, ārammaṇadāyakānañca vīṇāvādaka-gandhikasūda-tantavāya-nānāvidhasippasandassakādīnaṃ sakkāraṃ karonti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā puttasinehena puttaṃ mamāyantā dhātiyā sakkāraṃ karonti, sappāyasappikhīrādīniyeva naṃ pāyenti ceva bhojenti ca. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
97 在受节中,所谓“受身”,就是各种受的聚集。眼触所生的受……乃至……意触所生的受,因为《分别论》中这样说:“眼触所生的受有善的、有不善的、有无记的”,所以在眼门等处生起的善、不善、无记诸受,就像“舍利弗”“满慈子”等名字是随母得名一样,是依据类似母亲的来源而得名的。这里的词义是:以眼触为因生起的受,就叫眼触所生受。这个道理在一切地方都适用。以上是这里的总说。不过,从异熟的角度来说,应当知道:在眼门中,受是与两种眼识、两种意界、三种意识界相应的。这个道理也适用于耳门等处。在意门中,则只与意识界相应。巴利
97. Vedanāvāre vedanākāyāti vedanāsamūhā. Cakkhusamphassajā vedanā…pe… manosamphassajā vedanāti etaṃ ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā vedanā atthi kusalā, atthi akusalā, atthi abyākatā’’ti (vibha. 34) evaṃ vibhaṅge āgatattā cakkhudvārādīsu pavattānaṃ kusalākusalābyākatavedanānaṃ ‘‘sāriputto, mantāṇiputto’’ti evamādīsu mātito nāmaṃ viya mātisadisavatthuto nāmaṃ. Vacanattho panettha cakkhusamphassahetu jātā vedanā cakkhusamphassajā vedanāti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Ayaṃ tāvettha sabbasaṅgāhikakathā . Vipākavasena pana cakkhudvāre dve cakkhuviññāṇāni, dve manodhātuyo, tisso manoviññāṇadhātuyoti etāhi sampayuttavasena vedanā veditabbā. Esa nayo sotadvārādīsu. Manodvāre manoviññāṇadhātusampayuttāva.
在“触之集”这一句里,应当知道:在五门中,以五处为依的诸受,它们的集起就是与它们同时生起的眼触等的集起。对其余诸受来说,眼触等则是以亲依止等方式作为它们的缘。在意门中,对那些以彼为所缘的受,以及无门的结生、有分、死时之受,应当知道它们的集起就是与它们同时生起的意触的集起。其余内容,按照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Phassasamudayāti ettha pana pañcadvāre pañcavatthukavedanānaṃ sahajātacakkhusamphassādisamudayā samudayo hoti. Avasesānaṃ cakkhusamphassādayo upanissayādivasena paccayā. Manodvāre tadārammaṇavedanānaṃ advārikānañca paṭisandhibhavaṅgacutivedanānaṃ sahajātamanosamphassasamudayā samudayo hotīti veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
98 在触这一节里,“眼触”就是指在眼处的触。这个道理在一切处都一样。“眼触……乃至……身触”,说到这里,已经讲了善、不善异熟的、以五种处为依的十种触。至于“意触”,这个词是指其余二十二种世间的、异熟的、与意相应的触。“六处集起”是说:应当知道,由于眼等六处的集起,这六种触也就集起。剩下的部分,按照前面所说的方式理解就可以了。巴利
98. Phassavāre cakkhusamphassoti cakkhumhi samphasso. Esa nayo sabbattha. Cakkhusamphasso…pe… kāyasamphassoti ettāvatā ca kusalākusalavipākā pañcavatthukā dasa samphassā vuttā honti. Manosamphassoti iminā sesā bāvīsati lokiyavipākamanasampayuttaphassā. Saḷāyatanasamudayāti channaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ āyatanānaṃ samudayena imassa chabbidhassāpi samphassassa samudayo hotīti veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
六处节的注释巴利
Saḷāyatanavāravaṇṇanā
99 在六处这一节里,关于“眼处”等等,凡是应当解说的内容,全都和《清净道论》中“蕴的解说”和“处的解说”里所讲的一样。至于“名色集”这里,则是说:什么样的名、什么样的色,以及什么样的名色是某个处的缘,就依着这个道理,按照《清净道论》“缘起的解说”中所说的方式,来了知“由名色集而有六处集”。其余部分也和前面所说的相同。巴利
99. Saḷāyatanavāre cakkhāyatanantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge khandhaniddese ceva āyatananiddese ca vuttanayameva. Nāmarūpasamudayāti ettha pana yaṃ nāmaṃ yañca rūpaṃ, yañca nāmarūpaṃ yassa āyatanassa paccayo hoti, tassa vasena visuddhimagge paṭiccasamuppādaniddese vuttanayena nāmarūpasamudayā saḷāyatanasamudayo veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttappakāramevāti.
名色节注释巴利
Nāmarūpavāravaṇṇanā
100 在名色部分里,名以“朝向”为特相,色以“变坏”为特相。不过在广释部分中,其中的受就是受蕴,想就是想蕴,思、触、作意应当知道是行蕴。虽然确实还有其他法也归在行蕴里,但这三种在一切最微弱的心中也都有,所以这里就只按它们来显示行蕴。关于“四大”,“四”是数量上的限定;“大种”是地、水、火、风的别名。至于它们为什么被称为“大种”,以及这里其他的判别方式,这些在《清净道论》解释色蕴的地方都已经说过了。巴利
100. Nāmarūpavāre namanalakkhaṇaṃ nāmaṃ. Ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ. Vitthāravāre panassa vedanāti vedanākkhandho. Saññāti saññākkhandho. Cetanā phasso manasikāroti saṅkhārakkhandho veditabbo. Kāmañca aññepi saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā dhammā santi, ime pana tayo sabbadubbalesupi cittesu santi. Tasmā etesaṃyeva vasenettha saṅkhārakkhandhopi dassito. Cattāri ca mahābhūtānīti ettha cattārīti gaṇanaparicchedo. Mahābhūtānīti pathavīāpatejavāyānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yena pana kāraṇena tāni mahābhūtānīti vuccanti, yo cettha añño vinicchayanayo, so sabbo visuddhimagge rūpakkhandhaniddese vutto.
关于“执取四大”这句:这里的“四”是属格,表示受格的意义,也就是说“四大种”。所谓“执取”,就是执取、抓取的意思。也有人解释为“依止”。“转起”这个词在这里是省略的。或者,这个属格是表示集合的意思。因此应当这样理解:执取四大的集合而正在转起的色。如此,在一切处,那些地等四大,以及依四大而转起、在阿毗达摩教典中按眼处等差别所说的二十三种色,这一切都应理解为“色”。在“识集”这句中,凡作为某名、某色、某名色之缘的那种识,即依彼,应依照《清净道论》“缘起解释”中所说的方法,由识集而理解名色集。其余部分如前所说。巴利
Catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyāti ettha pana catunnanti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, cattāri ca mahābhūtānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Upādāyāti upādiyitvā, gahetvāti attho. Nissāyātipi eke. Vattamānanti ayañcettha pāṭhaseso. Samūhatthe vā etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Tena catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ samūhaṃ upādāya pavattamānaṃ rūpanti ayamattho veditabbo. Evaṃ sabbatthāpi yāni cattāri pathavīādīni mahābhūtāni, yañca catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vattamānaṃ cakkhāyatanādibhedena abhidhammapāḷiyameva vuttaṃ tevīsatividhaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ sabbampi ‘‘rūpa’’nti veditabbaṃ. Viññāṇasamudayāti ettha pana yaṃ viññāṇaṃ yassa nāmassa yassa ca rūpassa yassa ca nāmarūpassa paccayo hoti, tassa vasena visuddhimagge paṭiccasamuppādaniddese vuttanayeneva viññāṇasamudayā nāmarūpasamudayo veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
识品的解说巴利
Viññāṇavāravaṇṇanā
101 在识品中,眼识就是依于眼而生的识,或者说是从眼生起的识,所以叫眼识。耳识、鼻识、舌识、身识也是这样。除此之外,只有意本身就是识,所以叫意识。这是对除了五识之外的三地果心的称呼。在“行之集”这一句里,应当理解为:以什么样的行作为某一识的缘,就由那种行的集起而有识的集起。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
101. Viññāṇavāre cakkhuviññāṇanti cakkhumhi viññāṇaṃ, cakkhuto vā jātaṃ viññāṇanti cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Evaṃ sotaghānajivhākāyaviññāṇāni. Itaraṃ pana manoyeva viññāṇanti manoviññāṇaṃ. Dvipañcaviññāṇavajjassa tebhūmakavipākacittassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saṅkhārasamudayāti ettha pana yo saṅkhāro yassa viññāṇassa paccayo hoti, tassa vasena saṅkhārasamudayā viññāṇasamudayo veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
行品的注释巴利
Saṅkhāravāravaṇṇanā
102 102. 在“行”这一品中,“行”的特相是造作。不过在广释部分里,它的“身行”是指从身体生起的行,也就是在身门以策动的方式生起的二十种身思——包括欲界善的八种和不善的十二种,这是对它们的称呼。“语行”是指从语言生起的行,也就是在语门以言语表达的方式生起的同样这二十种语思,这是对它们的称呼。“心行”是指从心生起的行,也就是不发动身门和语门、独自坐在僻静处思维的人所生起的、属于世间善与不善的二十九种意思,这是对它们的称呼。在“无明集”这一句中,应当知道:对于善法,无明以亲依止缘的方式作为条件;对于不善法,无明也以俱生等方式作为条件。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
102. Saṅkhāravāre abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇo saṅkhāro. Vitthāravāre panassa kāyasaṅkhāroti kāyato pavattasaṅkhāro, kāyadvāre copanavasena pavattānaṃ kāmāvacarakusalato aṭṭhannaṃ, akusalato dvādasannanti vīsatiyā kāyasañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vacīsaṅkhāroti vacito pavattasaṅkhāro, vacīdvāre vacanabhedavasena pavattānaṃ vīsatiyā eva vacīsañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cittasaṅkhāroti cittato pavattasaṅkhāro, kāyavacīdvāre copanaṃ akatvā raho nisīditvā cintayantassa pavattānaṃ lokiyakusalākusalavasena ekūnatiṃsamanosañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Avijjāsamudayāti ettha pana kusalānaṃ upanissayavasena akusalānaṃ sahajātādivasenāpi avijjāpaccayo hotīti veditabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
无明品的解说巴利
Avijjāvāravaṇṇanā
103 103. 在无明品中,“对苦的无知”就是指对苦圣谛的无知,这是“痴”的别名。对“对集的无知”等等,也是同样的道理。其中,“对苦的无知”要从四种角度来理解:被包含在内、作为依处、作为所缘、以及覆蔽。也就是说,它因为属于苦圣谛的范围,所以被包含在苦中;苦圣谛以依处缘的方式成为它的依处,以所缘缘的方式成为它的所缘;而且它还覆蔽苦圣谛,因为它阻碍了对苦圣谛真实面貌的透彻了知,也不让关于苦的智慧有机会生起。巴利
103. Avijjāvāre dukkhe aññāṇanti dukkhasacce aññāṇaṃ, mohassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Esa nayo samudaye aññāṇantiādīsu. Tattha catūhi kāraṇehi dukkhe aññāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ antogadhato vatthuto ārammaṇato paṭicchādanato ca. Tathā hi taṃ dukkhasaccapariyāpannattā dukkhe antogadhaṃ, dukkhasaccañcassa nissayapaccayabhāvena vatthu, ārammaṇapaccayabhāvena ārammaṇaṃ, dukkhasaccañca etaṃ paṭicchādeti, tassa yāthāvalakkhaṇappaṭivedhanivāraṇena, ñāṇappavattiyā cettha appadānena.
对“集”的无知,要从三个方面来理解:作为所依、作为所缘,以及由于覆蔽。对“灭”和“道”的无知,则只从一个方面来理解,即由于覆蔽。因为对灭和道的无知只是覆蔽性的——它阻碍对灭和道真实特相的彻证,也不让关于灭和道的智慧有机会生起。但它并不被包含在灭和道之中,因为它不属于后二圣谛的范畴。后二圣谛也不是它的所依,因为两者不是同时生起的。后二圣谛也不是它的所缘,因为它不是缘取灭和道而生起的。后二圣谛因为极其甚深而难以见到,但在这里,并不会生起那种“盲然”状态的无知。而前二圣谛因为具有欺诳性,其自性特相难以见到,所以也是甚深的;在那里,无知是以颠倒执取的方式生起的。巴利
Samudaye aññāṇaṃ tīhi kāraṇehi veditabbaṃ vatthuto ārammaṇato paṭicchādanato ca. Nirodhe paṭipadāyañca aññāṇaṃ ekeneva kāraṇena veditabbaṃ paṭicchādanato. Nirodhapaṭipadāya hi paṭicchādakameva aññāṇaṃ tesaṃ yāthāvalakkhaṇappaṭivedhanivāraṇena, tesu ca ñāṇappavattiyā appadānena. Na pana tattha antogadhaṃ, tasmiṃ saccadvaye apariyāpannattā. Na tassa taṃ saccadvayaṃ vatthu, asahajātattā. Nārammaṇaṃ, tadārabbha appavattanato. Pacchimañhi saccadvayaṃ gambhīrattā duddasaṃ, na cettha andhabhūtaṃ aññāṇaṃ pavattati. Purimaṃ pana vañcaniyaṭṭhena sabhāvalakkhaṇassa duddasattā gambhīraṃ, tattha vipallāsaggāhavasena pavattati.
另外,说到“苦”,仅凭这一点,无明就已经从摄类、所依、所缘和作用这几个方面被说明了。说到“苦集”,则是从所依、所缘和作用这几个方面被说明。说到“苦灭”和“趣向苦灭之道”,则只是从作用方面被说明。而笼统地说“无知”,应当知道这是从它自身的本性来标示的。再者,在“漏的集起”这一句里,欲漏和有漏是以俱生等方式作为无明的缘;而无明漏则仅仅以亲依止缘的方式作为缘。在这里,应当知道先前生起的无明就是无明漏,它成为后来不断生起的无明的亲依止缘。其余内容如前所说。巴利
Apica dukkheti ettāvatā saṅgahato vatthuto ārammaṇato kiccato ca avijjā dīpitā. Dukkhasamudayeti ettāvatā vatthuto ārammaṇato kiccato ca. Dukkhanirodhe dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāyāti ettāvatā kiccato. Avisesato pana aññāṇanti etena sabhāvato niddiṭṭhāti ñātabbā. Āsavasamudayāti ettha pana kāmāsavabhavāsavā sahajātādivasena avijjāya paccayā honti. Avijjāsavo upanissayavaseneva. Pubbuppannā cettha avijjā avijjāsavoti veditabbā. Sā aparāparuppannāya avijjāya upanissayapaccayo hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
漏的部分的解释巴利
Āsavavāravaṇṇanā
104 104. 在“漏”的部分里,“无明集”这一句:在这里,无明以俱生等方式,是欲漏和有漏的缘;而对无明漏来说,则只是以亲依止缘的方式。又应当知道,这里前后不断生起的无明,就是无明漏;先前生起的无明本身,正是后来不断生起的无明漏的亲依止缘。其余内容跟前面所说的一样。这一部分,是为了显示即使在缘起各支中被列为第一的无明,也有它的缘,才这样说的。通过这样说的这一部分,轮回的无始性就得到了成立。怎么成立呢?因为以漏的集起为缘,就有无明的集起;以无明的集起为缘,也有漏的集起。这样,漏是无明的缘,无明也是漏的缘。这样一来,无明的前际就不可知;因为无明的前际不可知,轮回的无始性就得到了成立。巴利
104. Āsavavāre avijjāsamudayāti ettha avijjā kāmāsavabhavāsavānaṃ sahajātādivasena paccayo hoti. Avijjāsavassa upanissayavaseneva. Aparāparuppannā cettha avijjā avijjāsavoti veditabbā. Pubbuppannā avijjāyevassa aparāparuppannassa avijjāsavassa upanissayapaccayo hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti. Ayaṃ vāro yā esā paṭiccasamuppādapadesu jeṭṭhikā avijjā, tassāpi paccayadassanavasena vutto. Evaṃ vuttena vārena saṃsārassa anamataggatā sādhitā hoti. Kathaṃ? Āsavasamudayena hi avijjāsamudayo. Avijjāsamudayenāpi āsavasamudayo. Evaṃ āsavā avijjāya avijjāpi āsavānaṃ paccayoti katvā pubbakoṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, tassā apaññāyanato saṃsārassa anamataggatā siddhā hotīti.
就这样,在这部经里,一共宣说了十六个部分:业道部分、食部分、苦部分、老死部分、生部分、有部分、取部分、渴爱部分、受部分、触部分、六处部分、名色部分、识部分、行部分、无明部分、漏部分。巴利
Evaṃ sabbepime imasmiṃ sutte kammapathavāro āhāravāro dukkhavāro jarā-maraṇa-jāti-bhava-upādāna-taṇhā-vedanā-phassa-saḷāyatana-nāmarūpa- viññāṇa-saṅkhāra-avijjā-āsavavāroti soḷasavārā vuttā.
在这些当中,每一部分的略说和广说两种分法合起来,共有三十二处。这样,在这部经里,就在这三十二处中说了四圣谛;而在以广说方式展开的十六处中,说了阿罗汉果。不过按照这位长老的看法,在三十二处中的每一处,都说了四圣谛和四道。所以,在完整收归五部的一切佛语中,除了这部《正见经》,再没有哪部经能像它这样,三十二次阐明四圣谛,又三十二次开示阿罗汉果。巴利
Tesu ekekassa vārassa saṅkhepavitthāravasena dvidhā vibhattā dvattiṃsaṭṭhānāni honti. Iti imasmiṃ sutte imesu dvattiṃsaṭṭhānesu cattāri saccāni kathitāni. Etesaṃyeva vitthāravasena vuttesu soḷasasu ṭhānesu arahattaṃ kathitaṃ. Therassa pana matena dvattiṃsāyapi ṭhānesu cattāri saccāni cattāro ca maggā kathitāti. Iti sakalepi pañcamahānikāyasaṅgahite buddhavacane natthi taṃ suttaṃ, yattha dvattiṃsakkhattuṃ cattāri saccāni dvattiṃsakkhattuñca arahattaṃ pakāsitaṃ aññatra imamhā sammādiṭṭhisuttāti.
尊者舍利弗如是说:以三十二种四圣谛的方式、三十二种阿罗汉果的方式——总共六十四种方式——庄严地开示《正见经》后,尊者舍利弗说了这番话。比丘们满心欢喜,对尊者舍利弗所说的法十分赞同。巴利
Idamavocāyasmāsāriputtoti idaṃ dvattiṃsāya catusaccapariyāyehi dvattiṃsāya arahattapariyāyehīti catusaṭṭhiyā kāraṇehi alaṅkaritvā sammādiṭṭhisuttaṃ āyasmā sāriputto avoca, attamanā te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
第10章 《念处经》的注释巴利
10. Satipaṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
105 105. “如是我闻”这句,就是《念处经》。其中,“住在俱卢人当中”的意思是:名叫俱卢的国中王子们,他们居住的那个地区,哪怕只是一个地区,也依习惯用语称为“俱卢”,所以就是在那个俱卢地区里。不过,注释师们说:在曼陀多王时代,其他三洲的人们听说“赡部洲是佛陀、独觉佛、大声闻、转轮王等上等人出现的地方,是最殊胜的洲,极其可爱”,于是便跟着以轮宝为先导、巡游四洲的转轮王曼陀多王一起来到这里。之后,国王问统帅宝:巴利
105. Evaṃ me sutanti satipaṭṭhānasuttaṃ. Tattha kurūsu viharatīti kurunāmakā jānapadino rājakumārā, tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīsaddena kurūti vuccati, tasmiṃ kurūsu janapade. Aṭṭhakathācariyā panāhu – mandhātukāle tīsu dīpesu manussā jambudīpo nāma buddhapaccekabuddhamahāsāvakacakkavattipabhutīnaṃ uttamapurisānaṃ uppattibhūmi uttamadīpo atiramaṇīyoti sutvā raññā mandhātucakkavattinā cakkaratanaṃ purakkhatvā cattāro dīpe anusaṃyāyantena saddhiṃ āgamaṃsu. Tato rājā pariṇāyakaratanaṃ pucchi –
难道还有比人间更可爱的地方吗?巴利
‘‘Atthi nu kho manussalokato ramaṇīyataraṃ ṭhāna’’nti?
陛下,您为什么这样说?巴利
‘‘Kasmā deva evaṃ bhaṇasi?
你难道没看见日月的威力吗?巴利
‘‘Kiṃ na passasi candimasūriyānaṃ ānubhāvaṃ?
难道他们的地方不比这里更让人舒服吗?巴利
‘‘Nanu etesaṃ ṭhānaṃ ito ramaṇīyatara’’nti?
国王以轮宝为前导,到了那里。四大天王一听说“曼陀多王大王来了”,就想着:“这位大王有大神通、大威德,没法用武力抵挡。”于是各自把王权交了出来。他接过王权后,又问:“还有没有比这里更美的地方?”他们就告诉他三十三天界:“陛下,三十三天界更美。那里有帝释天王,这四大天王是他的侍从,站在守门的地方。帝释天王有大神通、大威德。他受用的地方有:高达一千由旬的胜利殿,高五百由旬的善法堂天众集会处,一百五十由旬的胜利车,还有伊罗婆那象王,以及以千株天树庄严的欢喜园、杂色园、果实园、混合园。还有一棵高达百由旬的波利质多树,树下有一块长六十由旬、宽五十由旬、厚十五由旬、色如善意花的黄色毡石;它柔软极了,帝释天王坐上去时,半身就会陷进去。”巴利
Rājā cakkaratanaṃ purakkhatvā tattha agamāsi. Cattāro mahārājāno ‘‘mandhātumahārājā āgato’’ti sutvāva ‘‘mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo rājā na sakkā yuddhena paṭibāhitu’’nti sakarajjaṃ niyyātesuṃ. So taṃ gahetvā puna pucchi – ‘‘atthi nu kho ito ramaṇīyataraṃ ṭhāna’’nti. Athassa tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ kathayiṃsu – ‘‘tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ, deva, ramaṇīyataraṃ, tattha sakkassa devarañño ime cattāro mahārājāno paricārakā dovārikabhūmiyaṃ tiṭṭhanti. Sakko devarājā mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo. Tassimāni pana upabhogaṭṭhānāni, yojanasahassubbedho vejayantapāsādo, pañcayojanasatubbedhā sudhammā devasabhā, diyaḍḍhayojanasatiko vejayantaratho, tathā erāvaṇo hatthī, dibbarukkhasahassapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nandanavanaṃ cittalatāvanaṃ phārusakavanaṃ missakavanaṃ . Yojanasatubbedho pāricchattako koviḷāro, tassa heṭṭhā saṭṭhiyojanāyāmā paṇṇāsayojanavitthatā pañcadasayojanubbedhā jayasumanapupphavaṇṇā paṇḍukambalasilā, yassā mudutāya sakkassa nisīdato upaḍḍhakāyo anupavisatī’’ti.
国王听了之后,就想动身去那里,于是把轮宝抛向空中。轮宝和四支军队一起停在空中。接着,轮宝从两层天界之间降下来,和以将领宝为首的四支军队一起落在大地上。国王却独自一人去了三十三天。帝释天一听“曼陀多来了”,就出来迎接他,说:“欢迎你,大王,这是你的地方,大王。请你来治理吧,大王。”说完,就和众歌舞宫女把王权分成两份,给了他一份。国王刚在三十三天住下,人身就消失了,天身随即显现。巴利
Taṃ sutvā rājā tattha gantukāmo cakkaratanaṃ abbhukkiri . Taṃ ākāse patiṭṭhāsi saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Atha dvinnaṃ devalokānaṃ vemajjhato cakkaratanaṃ otaritvā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāsi saddhiṃ pariṇāyakaratanappamukhāya caturaṅginiyā senāya. Rājā ekakova tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ agamāsi. Sakko ‘‘mandhātā āgato’’ti sutvāva tassa paccuggamanaṃ katvā – ‘‘svāgataṃ te, mahārāja, sakaṃ te, mahārāja. Anusāsa, mahārājā’’ti vatvā saddhiṃ nāṭakehi rajjaṃ dvebhāge katvā ekaṃ bhāgamadāsi. Rañño tāvatiṃsabhavane patiṭṭhitamattasseva manussabhāvo vigacchi, devabhāvo pāturahosi.
据说,他和帝释一起坐在黄毯石上时,只要一眨眼,就能看出两人的不同。天人们如果没有仔细分辨,就会把帝释和他搞混。他在那里享受天界的福乐,长达三十六位帝释出生又死去的期间,他一直治理着天界,却还是不满足于欲乐。从那里死后,他落到自己的园林里,身体被风吹日晒,就这样死了。巴利
Tassa kira sakkena saddhiṃ paṇḍukambalasilāyaṃ nisinnassa akkhinimisamattena nānattaṃ paññāyati. Taṃ asallakkhentā devā sakkassa ca tassa ca nānatte muyhanti. So tattha dibbasampattiṃ anubhavamāno yāva chattiṃsa sakkā uppajjitvā cutā, tāva rajjaṃ kāretvā atittoyeva kāmehi tato cavitvā attano uyyāne patiṭṭhito vātātapena phuṭṭhagatto kālamakāsi.
轮宝停在大地上之后,将领宝让人把曼陀多王的凉鞋刻在金板上,写着“这是曼陀多王的王国”,然后就这样统治王国。那些从三洲来的人再也回不去了,就走到将领宝面前请求说:“天王,我们是靠着国王的威德才来到这里的,现在回不去了,请赐给我们住的地方。”他就给他们各自一个地方。其中,从东毗提诃来的人所居住的地方,沿用了原来的称呼,叫做毗提诃国;从西牛货洲来的人所居住的地方,叫做阿巴兰特地方;从北俱卢洲来的人所居住的地方,叫做俱卢国。因为那里有许多村落、城镇等,就用复数来称呼。因此说“在俱卢国中居住”。巴利
Cakkaratane pana pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhite pariṇāyakaratanaṃ suvaṇṇapaṭṭe mandhātuupāhanaṃ likhāpetvā idaṃ mandhāturajjanti rajjamanusāsi. Tepi tīhi dīpehi āgatamanussā puna gantuṃ asakkontā pariṇāyakaratanaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘deva mayaṃ rañño ānubhāvena āgatā, idāni gantuṃ na sakkoma, vasanaṭṭhānaṃ no dehī’’ti yāciṃsu. So tesaṃ ekekaṃ janapadamadāsi. Tattha pubbavidehato āgatamanussehi āvasitapadeso tāyeva purimasaññāya videharaṭṭhanti nāmaṃ labhi. Aparagoyānato āgatamanussehi āvasitapadeso aparantajanapadoti nāmaṃ labhi. Uttarakuruto āgatamanussehi āvasitapadeso kururaṭṭhanti nāmaṃ labhīti . Bahuke pana gāmanigamādayo upādāya bahuvacanena voharīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kurūsu viharatī’’ti.
“剑磨瑟昙”是俱卢国的一个城镇。关于“剑磨瑟昙”这个词,有些人把这里的 dha 音解释成 da 音的意思,说“杂色者在此被调伏”,所以叫“剑磨瑟昙”。这里说的“杂色者”,指的就是食人者剑磨瑟足。据说他的脚被木桩刺伤,伤口愈合后变得像斑纹木一样,因此被称为剑磨瑟足。他就是在那个地方被调伏的,被制止了食人的行为。是谁调伏了他?是大士。那是在哪个本生故事里?有些人说是《大须陀须摩本生》,但这些长老说是《阇耶帝须本生》。因为那时大士调伏了剑磨瑟足。正如所说——巴利
Kammāsadhammaṃnāma kurūnaṃ nigamoti. Kammāsadhammanti ettha keci dha-kārassa da-kārena atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Kammāso ettha damitoti kammāsadammo. Kammāsoti kammāsapādo porisādo vuccati. Tassa kira pāde khāṇukena viddhaṭṭhāne vaṇo ruhanto cittadārusadiso hutvā ruhi, tasmā kammāsapādoti paññāyittha . So ca tasmiṃ okāse damito porisādabhāvato paṭisedhito. Kena? Mahāsattena. Katarasmiṃ jātaketi? Mahāsutasomajātaketi eke. Ime pana therā jayaddisajātaketi vadanti. Tadā hi mahāsattena kammāsapādo damito. Yathāha –
当我还是阇耶帝须的儿子时,
般遮罗国主的亲生儿子;
我舍弃了自己的生命,把父亲救了出来。
我也让甘马萨巴陀(斑足)生起了净信。巴利
‘‘Putto yadā homi jayaddisassa, Pañcālaraṭṭhādhipatissa atrajo; Cajitvāna pāṇaṃ pitaraṃ pamocayiṃ, Kammāsapādampi cahaṃ pasādayi’’nti.
有些人只从“dha”这个音来解释它的含义。据说,俱卢国居民的俱卢法在那个地方生起了杂染,所以那个地方就叫“剑磨瑟昙”,意思是“在这里,法是以杂染的方式生起的”。在那里建立的村落也叫这个名字。为什么不用处格来表达呢?因为那里不是住处。据说,世尊在那个村落里并没有任何精舍作为住处。离开村落之后,在一处水源充足、景色宜人的地方,有一片大树林,世尊就住在那里。他以那个村落作为乞食的村落。因此,这里的含义应当这样理解:“他住在俱卢国,以名为剑磨瑟昙的俱卢人聚落作为乞食的村落。”巴利
Keci pana dha-kāreneva atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Kururaṭṭhavāsīnaṃ kira kuruvattadhammo tasmiṃ kammāso jāto, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ kammāso ettha dhammo jātoti kammāsadhammanti vuccati. Tattha niviṭṭhanigamassāpi etadeva nāmaṃ. Bhummavacanena kasmā na vuttanti? Avasanokāsato. Bhagavato kira tasmiṃ nigame vasanokāso koci vihāro nāhosi. Nigamato pana apakkamma aññatarasmiṃ udakasampanne ramaṇīye bhūmibhāge mahāvanasaṇḍo ahosi. Tattha bhagavā vihāsi. Taṃ nigamaṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā, tasmā evamettha attho veditabbo ‘‘kurūsu viharati kammāsadhammaṃ nāma kurūnaṃ nigamo, taṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā’’ti.
对总说部分的解说巴利
Uddesavārakathāvaṇṇanā
106 “比丘们,这是一条唯一的道路。”世尊为什么说这部经呢?因为俱卢国的人有能力领受甚深的教导。据说,俱卢国的比丘、比丘尼、近事男、近事女,由于那个国家气候、水土等条件都很好,受用适宜的气候和资具,身体和心常常保持健康、柔韧。他们依靠身心柔韧所带来的慧力,能够把握甚深的法义。世尊看到他们有能力领受甚深教导,就在二十一处开示禅修业处,导向阿罗汉果,宣说了这部义理甚深的《念处经》。就像一个人得到了一只金花篮,往里面装各种花;或者得到一只金箱,往里面装七宝;同样,世尊得到了俱卢国的大众,就为他们开示甚深的法。正因为如此,世尊在这里也宣说了其他义理甚深的经典,比如长部里的《大因缘经》《大念处经》,以及这部中部里的《心材譬喻经》《树譬喻经》《赖吒和罗经》《摩犍提经》《不动适应经》等。巴利
106.Ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggoti. Kasmā bhagavā idaṃ suttamabhāsi? Kururaṭṭhavāsīnaṃ gambhīradesanāpaṭiggahaṇasamatthatāya. Kururaṭṭhavāsino kira bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo utupaccayādisampannattā tassa raṭṭhassa sappāyautupaccayasevanena niccaṃ kallasarīrā kallacittā ca honti. Te cittasarīrakallatāya anuggahitapaññābalā gambhīrakathaṃ pariggahetuṃ samatthā honti. Tena tesaṃ bhagavā imaṃ gambhīradesanāpaṭiggahaṇasamatthataṃ sampassanto ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu kammaṭṭhānaṃ arahatte pakkhipitvā idaṃ gambhīratthaṃ satipaṭṭhānasuttaṃ abhāsi. Yathā hi puriso suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭakaṃ labhitvā tattha nānāpupphāni pakkhipeyya, suvaṇṇamañjūsaṃ vā pana labhitvā sattaratanāni pakkhipeyya, evaṃ bhagavā kururaṭṭhavāsiparisaṃ labhitvā gambhīradesanaṃ desesi. Tenevettha aññānipi gambhīratthāni dīghanikāye mahānidānaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ imasmiṃ majjhimanikāye sāropamaṃ rukkhūpamaṃ raṭṭhapālaṃ māgaṇḍiyaṃ āneñjasappāyanti aññānipi suttāni desesi.
再说,在那个地方,四众弟子本来就一向致力于念处的修习,就连奴仆、佣人这些人,也都在谈论跟念处有关的话。在水边、纺线的地方等等,也不会出现没有意义的闲谈。如果有哪个女人被问到:“大姐,你修哪一种念处?”她回答“什么都没修”,大家就会责备她:“你这条命真是白活了,你虽然活着,却跟死人一样。”然后教导她:“以后别再这样了。”再让她学某一种念处。如果她说“我在修某某念处”,大家就会称赞说:“好啊,好啊!”然后赞叹她:“你这一生过得真有意义,你才算真正得到了人身,正自觉者就是为了你这样的人出世的。”诸如此类。而且在这里,不只是人类才致力于念处,连依附他们生活的畜生也一样。这里有个事例:据说有个耍杂技的人,带着一只小鹦鹉,一边训练一边到处走。他住在比丘尼寺院附近,走的时候把小鹦鹉忘了,就离开了。沙弥尼们把它捡来照顾,给它取名叫“佛护”。有一天,大长老尼看见它坐在前面,就喊了一声:“佛护?”巴利
Apica tasmiṃ janapade catasso parisā pakatiyāva satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānuyogamanuyuttā viharanti, antamaso dāsakammakaraparijanāpi satipaṭṭhānappaṭisaṃyuttameva kathaṃ kathenti. Udakatitthasuttakantanaṭṭhānādīsupi niratthakakathā nāma na pavattati. Sace kāci itthī ‘‘amma tvaṃ kataraṃ satipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ manasikarosī’’ti pucchitā ‘‘na kiñcī’’ti vadati. Taṃ garahanti ‘‘dhiratthu tava jīvitaṃ, jīvamānāpi tvaṃ matasadisā’’ti. Atha naṃ ‘‘mā dāni puna evamakāsī’’ti ovaditvā aññataraṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhāpenti. Yā pana ‘‘ahaṃ asukaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaromī’’ti vadati. Tassā ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti sādhukāraṃ datvā ‘‘tava jīvitaṃ sujīvitaṃ, tvaṃ nāma manussattaṃ pattā, tavatthāya sammāsambuddho uppanno’’tiādīhi pasaṃsanti. Na kevalañcettha manussajātiyāyeva satipaṭṭhānamanasikārayuttā, te nissāya viharantā tiracchānagatāpi. Tatridaṃ vatthu – eko kira naṭako suvapotakaṃ gahetvā sikkhāpento vicarati. So bhikkhunupassayaṃ upanissāya vasitvā gamanakāle suvapotakaṃ pamussitvā gato. Taṃ sāmaṇeriyo gahetvā paṭijaggiṃsu. Buddharakkhitotissa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Taṃ ekadivasaṃ purato nisinnaṃ disvā mahātherī āha – ‘‘buddharakkhitā’’ti?
有没有人在注意你?巴利
Atthi koci tava manasikāroti?
贤友,住在出家人身边的时候,不应该让自己放任散漫,应该保持某种作意。别的你做不到,那就反复念诵“骨,骨”吧。她听从长老尼的教导,就一边念着“骨,骨”,一边四处行走。巴利
Āvuso , pabbajitānaṃ santike vasantena nāma vissaṭṭhaattabhāvena bhavituṃ na vaṭṭati, kocideva manasikāro icchitabbo, tvaṃ pana aññaṃ na sakkhissasi ‘‘aṭṭhi aṭṭhī’’ti sajjhāyaṃ karohīti. So theriyā ovāde ṭhatvā ‘‘aṭṭhi aṭṭhī’’ti sajjhāyanto carati.
一天清晨,它坐在门拱顶上晒着初升的太阳,一只鸟用爪子把它抓住了。它发出“叽叽”的叫声。沙弥尼们听到后,说:“尊者,佛护被鸟抓住了,我们去救它!”于是她们拿起土块等东西追上去,把它救了下来。带回来后,放在长老尼面前,长老尼说道:巴利
Taṃ ekadivasaṃ pātova toraṇagge nisīditvā bālātapaṃ tapamānaṃ eko sakuṇo nakhapañjarena aggahesi. So ‘‘kiri kirī’’ti saddamakāsi. Sāmaṇeriyo sutvā ‘‘ayye buddharakkhito sakuṇena gahito, mocema na’’nti leḍḍuādīni gahetvā anubandhitvā mocesuṃ. Taṃ ānetvā purato ṭhapitaṃ therī āha –
佛护,你被鸟抓住的时候,心里在想什么?巴利
‘‘Buddharakkhita, sakuṇena gahitakāle kiṃ cintesī’’ti?
尊者,我没想别的。我只想:一堆骨头叼着另一堆骨头走,不管走到哪儿都会散掉。尊者,我就是只想着那一堆骨头。巴利
Na ayye aññaṃ cintesiṃ, ‘‘aṭṭhipuñjova aṭṭhipuñjaṃ gahetvā gacchati, katarasmimpi ṭhāne vippakirissatī’’ti evaṃ ayye aṭṭhipuñjameva cintesinti.
善哉,善哉,佛护,这将会成为你未来灭尽诸有的助缘。就这样,在那个地方,就连畜生道的众生也都与念处的作意相应。因此,世尊为了让这些众生生起念处的智慧,宣说了这部经。巴利
Sādhu sādhu, buddharakkhita, anāgate bhavakkhayassa te paccayo bhavissatīti. Evaṃ tattha tiracchānagatāpi satipaṭṭhānamanasikārayuttā, tasmā nesaṃ bhagavā satipaṭṭhānabuddhimeva janento idaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi.
在这里,「一乘道」就是一条道。因为道的——巴利
Tattha ekāyanoti ekamaggo. Maggassa hi –
道、路、径、途、直道、坦途。
船、渡桥和筏,以及涉水穿越的地方。巴利
‘‘Maggo pantho patho pajjo, añjasaṃ vaṭumāyanaṃ; Nāvā uttarasetū ca, kullo ca bhisisaṅkamo’’ti. (cūḷani. 101) –
它有许多名称。但在这里,它是用“道路”这个名称来说的。因此,对于“比丘们,这是一乘道”这句话,应当这样理解:比丘们,这是一条唯一的道路,不是分成两条的岔路。或者也可以说,“一乘道”就是应当由一个人行走的道路。“由一个人”的意思是:舍弃人群和聚会,独自远离,心也远离尘嚣。“应当行走”的意思是应当去实践。或者,“人们通过它行走”,所以叫“道路”,意思是从轮回走向涅槃。“一乘道”就是“一个人的道路”,“一个人”指的是最殊胜的那一位。一切众生中最殊胜的就是世尊,所以说这就是“世尊的道路”。虽然其他人也走这条路,但即便如此,这条路仍然是世尊的,因为是他开创的。正如经文所说:“婆罗门,正是那位世尊,让尚未生起的道路生起了”等等。或者,“它自己行走”,所以叫“道路”,意思是它运转、进行。“一乘道”就是在“一个”地方行走,意思是它只在这个法和律中运转,不在别处。正如经文所说:“须跋陀罗,只有在这个法和律中,才能找到八支圣道。”这些只是说法上的不同,意义是同一个。此外,还可以理解为:它走向一个地方,所以叫“一乘道”。意思是说,在前期阶段,它虽然以各种不同的方式、各种修行方法而运作,但到了后期阶段,它就只走向一个目标——涅槃。正如娑婆主梵天所说:巴利
Bahūni nāmāni. Svāyaṃ idha ayananāmena vutto. Tasmā ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggoti ettha ekamaggo ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo, na dvedhāpathabhūtoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā ekena ayitabboti ekāyano. Ekenāti gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya vūpakaṭṭhena pavivittacittena. Ayitabboti paṭipajjitabbo. Ayanti vā etenāti ayano, saṃsārato nibbānaṃ gacchantīti attho . Ekassa ayano ekāyano, ekassāti seṭṭhassa. Sabbasattānaṃ seṭṭho ca bhagavā, tasmā bhagavatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiñcāpi hi tena aññepi ayanti, evaṃ santepi bhagavatova so ayano tena uppāditattā. Yathāha ‘‘so hi, brāhmaṇa, bhagavā anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.79). Ayatīti vā ayano, gacchati pavattatīti attho. Ekasmiṃ ayanoti ekāyano, imasmiṃyeva dhammavinaye pavattati, na aññatrāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha ‘‘imasmiṃ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214). Desanābhedoyeva heso, attho paneko. Apica ekaṃ ayatīti ekāyano. Pubbabhāge nānāmukhabhāvanānayappavattopi aparabhāge ekaṃ nibbānameva gacchatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāha brahmā sahampati –
彻见诸有生灭尽、了知这条一乘道的人,
他出于对众生利益的同情,清楚了知这条道。
过去的人们沿着这条道路渡过去了,
未来的人也会渡过,还有那些正在渡过的人,也一样渡过瀑流。巴利
‘‘Ekāyanaṃ jātikhayantadassī, Maggaṃ pajānāti hitānukampī; Etena maggena tariṃsu pubbe, Tarissanti ye ca taranti ogha’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 5.409);
有些人依据“他们不会一再地前往彼岸”这样的偈颂方式,认为它一次就能到达涅槃,因此说它是“一乘道”。这种说法并不成立。因为要表达这个意思,就应该用“一次而行”这个说法。假如把意思理解为“它只有一次行走、一种趣向、一种运作”,这样来组织意义,那么用词上虽然说得通,但意义无论从哪方面看都不成立。为什么呢?因为这里指的是前分道。这里所说的,是以身为所缘、以受为所缘、以心为所缘、以法为所缘这四种所缘而运作的前分念处道,并不是指出世间道。而那个前分道会运作许多次,它的行走也有许多种。巴利
Keci pana ‘‘na pāraṃ diguṇaṃ yantī’’ti gāthānayena yasmā ekavāraṃ nibbānaṃ gacchati. Tasmā ‘‘ekāyano’’ti vadanti, taṃ na yujjati. Imassa hi atthassa sakiṃ ayanoti iminā byañjanena bhavitabbaṃ. Yadi pana ekaṃ ayanamassa ekā gati pavattīti evamatthaṃ yojetvā vucceyya, byañjanaṃ yujjeyya, attho pana ubhayathāpi na yujjati. Kasmā? Idha pubbabhāgamaggassa adhippetattā. Kāyādicatuārammaṇappavatto hi pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggo idha adhippeto, na lokuttaro. So ca anekavārampi ayati, anekañcassa ayanaṃ hoti.
过去,大长老们对这个问题也有过讨论。三藏小护长老说这是“前分念处道”。他的老师三藏小善长老却说这是“混合道”。小护长老说:“尊者,是前分。”小善长老说:“贤友,是混合。”老师一再这样说,小护长老没有反驳,只是沉默。他们没有把问题弄清楚就起身离开了。后来,老师长老去浴室时,一边走一边想:“我说的是混合道,小护却说是前分,这里到底该怎么定论?”于是他从头翻阅经藏,看到“诸比丘,若有任何人这样修习四念处七年”这一段时,他注意到:出世间道生起后能持续七年,这是不可能的。他由此明白:我所说的混合道站不住脚,小护所见的才是前分道。明白之后,在第八天宣布闻法集会时,他就去了。巴利
Pubbepi ca imasmiṃ pade mahātherānaṃ sākacchā ahosiyeva. Tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthero ‘‘pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggo’’ti āha. Ācariyo panassa tipiṭakacūḷasumatthero ‘‘missakamaggo’’ti āha. Pubbabhāgo bhanteti. Missako āvusoti. Ācariye punappunaṃ bhaṇante appaṭibāhitvā tuṇhī ahosi. Pañhaṃ avinicchinitvāva uṭṭhahiṃsu. Athācariyatthero nhānakoṭṭhakaṃ gacchanto ‘‘mayā missakamaggo kathito, cūḷanāgo pubbabhāgoti ādāya voharati , ko nu kho ettha nicchayo’’ti suttantaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya parivattento ‘‘yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṃ bhāveyya satta vassānī’’ti imasmiṃ ṭhāne sallakkhesi, lokuttaramaggo uppajjitvā satta vassāni tiṭṭhamāno nāma natthi, mayā vutto missakamaggo na labbhati, cūḷanāgena diṭṭho pubbabhāgamaggova labbhatīti ñatvā aṭṭhamiyaṃ dhammassavane saṅghuṭṭhe agamāsi.
据说,古长老们特别爱听正法。一听到声音,他们就一下子涌进来,争着说“我先,我先”。那天正好轮到小那伽长老说法。他坐上法座,拿起扇子,诵完前面的偈颂后,站在长老座位后面的那位长老这样想:“我不该躲在背后不说。”因为古长老们没有嫉妒心,不会像举起一捆甘蔗那样,只把自己的见解高高举起到处走;他们只采纳有道理的部分,舍弃没道理的部分。所以那位长老说:“贤友小那伽!”小那伽长老听到那声音像是老师,就停下说法,问道:“尊者,什么事?”长老说:“贤友小那伽,我所说的混合道站不住脚,你所说的前分念处道才站得住脚。”巴利
Porāṇakattherā kira piyadhammassavanā honti. Saddaṃ sutvāva ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ, ahaṃ paṭhama’’nti ekappahāreneva osaranti. Tasmiñca divase cūḷanāgattherassa vāro. Tena dhammāsane nisīditvā vījaniṃ gahetvā pubbagāthāsu vuttāsu therassa āsanapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhitassa etadahosi ‘‘raho nisīditvā na vakkhāmī’’ti. Porāṇakattherā hi anusūyakā honti, na attano rucimeva ucchubhāraṃ viya evaṃ ukkhipitvā vicaranti, kāraṇameva gaṇhanti, akāraṇaṃ vissajjenti. Tasmā thero ‘‘āvuso cūḷanāgā’’ti āha. So ācariyassa viya saddoti dhammaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘kiṃ bhante’’ti āha. Āvuso cūḷanāga mayā vutto missakamaggo na labbhati, tayā vutto pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggova labbhatīti.
长老心想:“我们的老师精通一切教法,是持三藏者,具足闻慧,像这样的比丘居然也会对这个议题感到困惑,将来我的同修们也一定会对这个议题感到困惑。我要依经把这个议题确定下来,使它不再动摇。”于是他从《无碍解道》中引出:“所谓‘一乘道’,就是前行部分的念处之道——巴利
Thero cintesi ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo sabbapariyattiko tepiṭako sutabuddho, evarūpassapi nāma bhikkhuno ayaṃ pañho āluḷeti, anāgate mama bhātikā imaṃ pañhaṃ āluḷessantīti suttaṃ gahetvā imaṃ pañhaṃ niccalaṃ karissāmī’’ti paṭisambhidāmaggato ‘‘ekāyanamaggo vuccati pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggo –
八支道在一切道中最殊胜,四谛在一切谛中最殊胜;
离贪在一切法中最殊胜,具眼者在两足众生中最殊胜。
唯此是道,别无他途,为令见清净;
你们要走上这条路,它能摧毁魔军。
你们依照这条道路去修行,就能终结一切苦。巴利
‘‘Maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko seṭṭho, saccānaṃ caturo padā; Virāgo seṭṭho dhammānaṃ, dvipadānañca cakkhumā. Eseva maggo natthañño, dassanassa visuddhiyā; Etañhi tumhe paṭipajjatha, mārasenappamaddanaṃ; Etañhi tumhe paṭipannā, dukkhassantaṃ karissathā’’ti. (dha. pa. 273-275) –
他引用了经文,然后把它放在那里。巴利
Suttaṃ āharitvā ṭhapesi.
“道”这个说法,是从什么意义上称为道呢?因为它通向涅槃,也因为它是想要涅槃的人应当修行的道路。所谓“为了众生的清净”,是为了让那些被贪等污垢、被贪欲和邪贪等随烦恼弄脏了心的众生得到清净。正是靠着这条道,从十万大劫再加四个无数劫以前开始,在同一劫中出世的那些名为爱作佛、慧作佛、皈依作佛、燃灯佛的佛陀开始,一直到释迦牟尼佛为止,有无数位正自觉者、数百位独觉佛,以及数不清的圣弟子们:所有这些众生都洗掉了心里的污垢,达到了最彻底的清净。不过,就色法方面的污垢来说,根本谈不上什么染污与清净的施设。正如所说:巴利
Maggoti kenaṭṭhena maggo? Nibbānagamanaṭṭhena nibbānatthikehi magganiyaṭṭhena ca. Sattānaṃ visuddhiyāti rāgādīhi malehi abhijjhāvisamalobhādīhi ca upakkilesehi kiliṭṭhacittānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhatthāya. Tathā hi imināva maggena ito satasahassakappādhikānaṃ catunnaṃ asaṅkhyeyyānaṃ upari ekasmiññeva kappe nibbatte taṇhaṅkaramedhaṅkarasaraṇaṅkaradīpaṅkaranāmake buddhe ādiṃ katvā sakyamunipariyosānā aneke sammāsambuddhā anekasatā paccekabuddhā gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā ariyasāvakā cāti ime sattā sabbe cittamalaṃ pavāhetvā paramavisuddhiṃ pattā. Rūpamalavasena pana saṃkilesavodānapaññattiyeva natthi. Tathā hi –
青年们被染污的色所染污;
诸色清净,他们便得清净——这不是大仙所说的。
心被染污了,青年们就跟着染污;
心清净则得清净,这是大仙所说的。巴利
Rūpena saṃkiliṭṭhena, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Rūpe suddhe visujjhanti, anakkhātaṃ mahesinā. Cittena saṃkiliṭṭhena, saṃkilissanti māṇavā; Citte suddhe visujjhanti, iti vuttaṃ mahesinā.
正如经中所说:比丘们,众生因为心的杂染而杂染,因为心的清净而清净。而这种心的清净,是通过这条念处的道路实现的。因此说,为了众生的清净。巴利
Yathāha ‘‘cittasaṃkilesā, bhikkhave, sattā saṃkilissanti, cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.100). Tañca cittavodānaṃ iminā satipaṭṭhānamaggena hoti. Tenāha ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’ti.
“为了超越愁与悲”,意思是:为了超越、断除愁和悲。因为这条道修习之后,能像寂静大臣等人那样带来对愁的超越,也能像波咤左罗等人那样带来对悲的超越。因此说“为了超越愁与悲”。虽然寂静大臣——巴利
Sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyāti sokassa ca paridevassa ca samatikkamāya, pahānāyāti attho. Ayañhi maggo bhāvito santatimahāmattādīnaṃ viya sokasamatikkamāya, paṭācārādīnaṃ viya ca paridevasamatikkamāya ca saṃvattati. Tenāha ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’ti. Kiñcāpi hi santatimahāmatto –
过去的东西,你要把它清理干净;之后,愿你一无所有。
如果你对中间(即现在)不再执取,你就能寂静安详地生活。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ pubbe taṃ visodhehi, pacchā te māhu kiñcanaṃ; Majjhe ce no gahessasi, upasanto carissasī’’ti. (su. ni. 955);
听完这首偈颂后,他当下就与四无碍解一起证得了阿罗汉果。巴利
Imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patto.
子女无法提供庇护,父亲和亲友也做不到;
被死神控制的时候,亲戚里没有谁能当庇护。巴利
‘‘Na santi puttā tāṇāya, na pitā nāpi bandhavā; Antakenādhipannassa, natthi ñātīsu tāṇatā’’ti. (dha. pa. 288);
听完这首偈颂后,她证得了入流果。然而,因为不在身、受、心、法当中执取任何一个法,就根本没有所谓修习,所以应当知道,她们也是依靠这条道,超越了忧愁和悲泣。巴利
Imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitā. Yasmā pana kāyavedanācittadhammesu kañci dhammaṃ anāmasitvā bhāvanā nāma natthi, tasmā tepi imināva maggena sokaparideve samatikkantāti veditabbā.
“苦与忧的止息”,说的是身体上的苦和心里的忧——这两者的止息、灭尽。因为这条道如果修习圆满,就能像底沙长老等人那样让身体的苦止息,也能像帝释等人那样让心里的忧止息。巴利
Dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāyāti kāyikadukkhassa ca cetasikadomanassassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ atthaṅgamāya, nirodhāyāti attho. Ayañhi maggo bhāvito tissattherādīnaṃ viya dukkhassa, sakkādīnaṃ viya ca domanassassa atthaṅgamāya saṃvattati.
这里解释一下它的含义:据说在舍卫城,有个叫底沙的居士之子,舍弃了四亿金币出家,住在没有村庄的山林里。他弟弟的妻子派了五百个强盗,吩咐说:“去把他杀掉。”强盗们去了以后,把长老围住坐下。长老说:“近事男们,你们为什么来?”他们说:“我们要杀你。”长老说:“近事男们,请接受我的担保,让我活过今晚。”他们说:“沙门,在这个地方,谁能给你做担保?”长老拿起一块大石头,砸断了自己的两条大腿骨,说:“近事男们,这样算担保吗?”强盗们退到经行道尽头,生了火,躺下睡了。长老压制住感受,省察自己的戒;因为戒清净,生起了喜悦和欢欣。然后他依次增长观智,整夜修习沙门法,到天亮时证得阿罗汉果,说出这段优陀那:巴利
Tatrāyaṃ atthadīpanā – sāvatthiyaṃ kira tisso nāma kuṭumbikaputto cattālīsa hiraññakoṭiyo pahāya pabbajitvā agāmake araññe viharati. Tassa kaniṭṭhabhātubhariyā ‘‘gacchatha naṃ jīvitā voropethā’’ti pañcasate core pesesi. Te gantvā theraṃ parivāretvā nisīdiṃsu. Thero āha ‘‘kasmā āgatattha upāsakā’’ti? Taṃ jīvitā voropessāmāti. Pāṭibhogaṃ me upāsakā gahetvā ajjekarattiṃ jīvitaṃ dethāti. Ko te, samaṇa, imasmiṃ ṭhāne pāṭibhogo bhavissatīti? Thero mahantaṃ pāsāṇaṃ gahetvā dve ūruṭṭhīni bhinditvā ‘‘vaṭṭati upāsakā pāṭibhogo’’ti āha. Te apakkamitvā caṅkamanasīse aggiṃ katvā nipajjiṃsu. Therassa vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā sīlaṃ paccavekkhato parisuddhaṃ sīlaṃ nissāya pītipāmojjaṃ uppajji . Tato anukkamena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento tiyāmarattiṃ samaṇadhammaṃ katvā aruṇuggamane arahattaṃ patto imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi –
折断双足之后,我将使你们明白。
我厌离、我羞愧,我面对的是带着贪爱的死亡。
我这样思惟之后,就如实地去观照。
天一亮,我就证得了阿罗汉果。巴利
‘‘Ubho pādāni bhinditvā, saññapessāmi vo ahaṃ; Aṭṭiyāmi harāyāmi, sarāgamaraṇaṃ ahaṃ. Evāhaṃ cintayitvāna, yathābhūtaṃ vipassisaṃ; Sampatte aruṇuggamhi, arahattamapāpuṇi’’nti.
此外还有三十位比丘,在世尊身边取得业处后,前往森林住处入雨安居。他们说:“贤友,我们应当三夜只修沙门法,不可互相到对方那里去。”说完就住了下来。他们修沙门法后,在破晓时分打瞌睡时,一只老虎过来,把比丘一个一个叼走。没有人喊出“老虎抓我”这样的话。就这样,五位或十位比丘被吃掉后,到了布萨日,他们问:“贤友,其他人去哪儿了?”知道情况后,便说:“从现在起,被抓住的人应当喊‘我被抓住了’。”说完就继续住下。巴利
Aparepi tiṃsa bhikkhū bhagavato santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā araññavihāre vassaṃ upagantvā ‘‘āvuso, tiyāmarattiṃ samaṇadhammova kātabbo, na aññamaññassa santikaṃ āgantabba’’nti vatvā vihariṃsu. Tesaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ katvā paccūsasamaye pacalāyantānaṃ eko byaggho āgantvā ekekaṃ bhikkhuṃ gahetvā gacchati. Na koci ‘‘maṃ byaggho gaṇhī’’ti vācampi nicchāresi. Evaṃ pañcasu dasasu bhikkhūsu khāditesu uposathadivase ‘‘itare, āvuso, kuhi’’nti pucchitvā ñatvā ca ‘‘idāni gahitena, gahitomhīti vattabba’’nti vatvā vihariṃsu.
这时,老虎又像先前那样抓走了一位年轻比丘。他说:“尊者,老虎!”比丘们拿起木棍和火把,想把他救下来,就一路追了上去。老虎爬上比丘们到不了的悬崖断壁,从那位比丘的脚拇趾开始吃起。其他比丘说:“善士,现在我们也没办法了。比丘的殊胜之处,正是在这种时候才能看出来。”那位比丘躺在老虎嘴里,压制住那种痛受,增长观智:当脚踝被吃掉时,他证得入流果;当膝盖被吃掉时,证得一来果;当肚脐被吃掉时,证得不来果;在心脏肉还没被吃掉时,他就证得阿拉汉果,并具足四无碍解,随后说出这首优陀那:巴利
Atha aññataraṃ daharabhikkhuṃ purimanayeneva byaggho gaṇhi. So ‘‘byaggho, bhante’’ti āha. Bhikkhū kattaradaṇḍe ca ukkāyo ca gahetvā mocessāmāti anubandhiṃsu. Byaggho bhikkhūnaṃ agatiṃ chinnataṭaṭṭhānaṃ āruyha taṃ bhikkhuṃ pādaṅguṭṭhakato paṭṭhāya khādituṃ ārabhi. Itarepi ‘‘idāni , sappurisa, amhehi kattabbaṃ natthi, bhikkhūnaṃ viseso nāma evarūpe ṭhāne paññāyatī’’ti āhaṃsu. So byagghamukhe nipannova taṃ vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento yāva gopphakā khāditasamaye sotāpanno hutvā, yāva jaṇṇukā khāditasamaye sakadāgāmī, yāva nābhiyā khāditasamaye anāgāmī hutvā, hadayarūpe akhāditeyeva saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patvā imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi –
他持戒具足,苦行圆满,有智慧,而且定力很好。
因为片刻的放逸,心就被老虎攫住了。
抓住后放进笼子里,又搁在石板上。
老虎尽管吃了我吧,这身体本来就是怨敌的食物。
一旦得到了业处,死就会是好事。巴利
‘‘Sīlavā vatasampanno, paññavā susamāhito; Muhuttaṃ pamādamanvāya, byagghenoruddhamānaso. Pañjarasmiṃ gahetvāna, silāya uparīkato; Kāmaṃ khādatu maṃ byaggho, bhakkho kāyo amittānaṃ; Paṭiladdhe kammaṭṭhāne, maraṇaṃ hehiti bhaddaka’’nti.
还有一位名叫毕多马喇的长老,他在俗家时,曾手持三国之旗来到铜掌岛,觐见国王,得到国王的护持。有一天,他经过乞郎迦婆那会堂门口时,听到《非汝所应经》的开示:“诸比丘,色不属于你们,应当舍弃它;舍弃它之后,将长久为你们带来利益与安乐。”他听后思惟:“原来色不是自己的,受也不是自己的。”他便以此为策励,离开后前往大精舍祈求出家,出家并受具足戒后,精通了二部戒本,带着三十位比丘前往迦婆罗瓦利场院修习沙门法。当双脚无法行走时,他就用膝盖经行。夜里,一个猎鹿人把他误认为鹿,用矛刺了他。矛穿透身体穿了过去。他让人拔出那支矛,用草絮填满伤口,自己坐在石板上,让出空间,增长观智,最终连同无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果。比丘们听到他咳嗽的声音赶来,他向他们宣告了自己的证悟,然后说出这首感兴偈:巴利
Aparopi pītamallatthero nāma gihikāle tīsu rajjesu paṭākaṃ gahetvā tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ āgamma rājānaṃ disvā raññā katānuggaho ekadivasaṃ kilañjakāpaṇasāladvārena gacchanto ‘‘rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṃ, taṃ pajahatha, taṃ vo pahīnaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya bhavissatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.33-34) natumhākavaggaṃ sutvā cintesi ‘‘neva kira rūpaṃ attano, na vedanā’’ti. So taṃyeva aṅkusaṃ katvā nikkhamitvā mahāvihāraṃ gantvā pabbajjaṃ yācitvā pabbajito upasampanno dvemātikā paguṇaṃ katvā tiṃsa bhikkhū gahetvā gabalavāliyaaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā samaṇadhammamakāsi. Pādesu avahantesu jaṇṇukehi caṅkamati. Tamenaṃ rattiṃ eko migaluddako migoti maññamāno sattiyā pahari. Satti vinivijjhitvā gatā. So taṃ sattiṃ harāpetvā pahāramukhāni tiṇavaṭṭiyā pūrāpetvā pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ attānaṃ nisīdāpetvā okāsaṃ kāretvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patvā ukkāsitasaddena āgatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ byākaritvā imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi –
这是最胜佛陀、一切世间无上论师所说的话:
诸比库,这色不属于你们,你们应当舍弃它。
诸行确实无常,具有生灭的本性;
它们生起之后又灭去,它们的寂止才是快乐。巴利
‘‘Bhāsitaṃ buddhaseṭṭhassa, sabbalokaggavādino; Na tumhākamidaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ jaheyyātha bhikkhavo. Aniccā vata saṅkhārā, uppādavayadhammino; Uppajjitvā nirujjhanti, tesaṃ vūpasamo sukho’’ti.
这时,比丘们对他说:“尊者,如果正自觉者当时没有生病,他一定会伸出手,摸一摸您的头顶。”说到这里,这条道路就像底沙长老等人所走的那样,能够导向苦的彻底止息。巴利
Atha naṃ bhikkhū āhaṃsu ‘‘sace, bhante, sammāsambuddho arogo abhavissā, addhā te muddhamatthake hatthaṃ pasāretvā sīsaṃ parāmaseyyā’’ti. Ettāvatā ayaṃ maggo tissattherādīnaṃ viya dukkhassa atthaṅgamāya saṃvattati.
帝释天见到自己身上出现的五种衰相,被死亡的恐惧吓住了,心里非常忧愁,就来到世尊面前提问。世尊解答完关于舍的问题后,他和八万天神一起证得了入流果。而他原本快要耗尽的寿命,也恢复如初了。巴利
Sakko pana devānamindo attano pañcavidhaṃ pubbanimittaṃ disvā maraṇabhayasantajjito domanassajāto bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchi. So upekkhāpañhavissajjanāvasāne asītisahassāhi devatāhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi. Sā cassa upapatti puna pākatikāva ahosi.
须梵天子也在一千名天女的围绕下享受着天界的福乐。那时,有五百名天女在树上采花,死后都转生到了地狱。他心想:“她们怎么这么久还不回来?”仔细察看后,看见她们转生在地狱中的情形,又想:“我的寿命还有多少?”再进一步观照,发现自己的寿命也快尽了,并且看见自己也将转生到那个地狱。他心生恐惧,极度忧恼,心想:“我这忧恼只有导师才能去除,别人不行。”于是带着剩下的五百名天女,来到世尊面前请问。巴利
Subrahmāpi devaputto accharāsahassaparivāro saggasampattiṃ anubhoti, tattha pañcasatā accharāyo rukkhato pupphāni ocinantiyo cavitvā niraye upapannā. So ‘‘kiṃ imā cirāyantī’’ti upadhārento tāsaṃ niraye nibbattabhāvaṃ disvā ‘‘kittakaṃ nu kho mama āyū’’ti upaparikkhanto attanopi āyuparikkhayaṃ viditvā tattheva niraye nibbattanabhāvaṃ disvā bhīto ativiya domanassajāto hutvā ‘‘imaṃ me domanassaṃ satthā vinayissati na añño’’ti avasesā pañcasatā accharāyo gahetvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchi –
这颗心总是惊恐不安,这个意总是躁动不宁;
在尚未生起的苦难中,以及已经生起的苦难中;
如果有无所畏惧的,请你告诉我,我这是在向你请教。巴利
‘‘Niccaṃ utrastamidaṃ cittaṃ, niccaṃ ubbiggidaṃ mano; Anuppannesu kicchesu, atho uppatitesu ca; Sace atthi anutrastaṃ, taṃ me akkhāhi pucchito’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.98);
于是世尊对他说:巴利
Tato naṃ bhagavā āha –
除了觉支与苦行,除了守护诸根,
除了彻底放下一切,我看不到众生有什么安稳。巴利
‘‘Nāññatra bojjhā tapasā, nāññatrindriyasaṃvarā; Nāññatra sabbanissaggā, sotthiṃ passāmi pāṇina’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.98);
他在开示结束时,和五百位天女一起证入入流果,并使那一成就变得稳固,随后就去了天界。应当知道,这样修习这条道,就像天帝释等人那样,能导向忧的灭尽。巴利
So desanāpariyosāne pañcahi accharāsatehi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya taṃ sampattiṃ thāvaraṃ katvā devalokameva agamāsīti . Evamayaṃ maggo bhāvito sakkādīnaṃ viya domanassassa atthaṅgamāya saṃvattatīti veditabbo.
“为了证得正道”:所谓“正道”,指的就是圣八支道;这句话说的是为了证得它、达到它。因为这条在修行前期阶段的世间念处之道,修习之后能导向出世间道的证得。所以说“为了证得正道”。
“为了作证涅槃”:因为远离了渴爱之林,所以名为涅槃;这句话说的是为了作证那被称为“不死”的涅槃,为了亲自现证它。因为这条道修习之后,能次第成就涅槃的作证。所以说“为了作证涅槃”。巴利
Ñāyassa adhigamāyāti ñāyo vuccati ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, tassa adhigamāya, pattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi pubbabhāge lokiyo satipaṭṭhānamaggo bhāvito lokuttarassa maggassa adhigamāya saṃvattati. Tenāha ‘‘ñāyassa adhigamāyā’’ti. Nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyāti taṇhāvānavirahitattā nibbānanti laddhanāmassa amatassa sacchikiriyāya, attapaccakkhatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi maggo bhāvito anupubbena nibbānasacchikiriyaṃ sādheti. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyā’’ti.
在这里,虽然说到“为了众生的清净”时,超越愁悲等义理其实已经包含在内,但对那些不精通教法义理的人来说,这些义理并不明显。而且,世尊并不是先把人教成精通教法义理的人,然后再为他说法;而是通过一部部经,让人明白一个个义理。所以在这里,为了把一乘道所成就的一个个义理清楚地显示出来,世尊说了“为了超越愁悲”等话。或者说,一乘道所成就的众生清净,是通过超越愁悲来实现的;超越愁悲,是通过苦和忧的灭尽来实现的;苦和忧的灭尽,是通过证得理趣来实现的;证得理趣,是为了作证涅槃。因此,为了显示这个次第,世尊先说了“为了众生的清净”,接着说了“为了超越愁悲”等话。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’ti vutte sokasamatikkamādīni atthato siddhāneva honti, ṭhapetvā pana sāsanayuttikovide aññesaṃ na pākaṭāni, na ca bhagavā paṭhamaṃ sāsanayuttikovidaṃ janaṃ katvā pacchā dhammaṃ deseti. Tena teneva pana suttena taṃ taṃ atthaṃ ñāpeti. Tasmā idha yaṃ yaṃ atthaṃ ekāyanamaggo sādheti, taṃ taṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassento ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’tiādimāha. Yasmā vā yā sattānaṃ visuddhi ekāyanamaggena saṃvattati, sā sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamena hoti, sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamo dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamena, dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamo ñāyassādhigamena, ñāyassādhigamo nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya. Tasmā imampi kamaṃ dassento ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’ti vatvā ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’tiādimāha.
另外,这也是对一乘道的赞叹。就像世尊在讲“六六”时,用八句话来赞叹:“比丘们,我要为你们说法,开头好、中间好、结尾好,有意义又有文句,完全圆满、清净的梵行,也就是六六法。”又像在讲圣种时,用九句话来赞叹:“比丘们,有四种圣种,是最上的、长久以来的、世代相传的、自古就有的、不曾混杂、过去也不曾混杂,现在不混杂,将来也不会混杂,不会被沙门、婆罗门和智者所批评。”同样地,对于这一乘道,世尊也用“为了众生的清净”等七句话来赞叹。巴利
Apica vaṇṇabhaṇanametaṃ ekāyanamaggassa. Yatheva hi bhagavā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsessāmi, yadidaṃ chachakkānī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.420) chachakkadesanāya aṭṭhahi padehi vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, yathā ca ariyavaṃsadesanāya ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, ariyavaṃsā aggaññā rattaññā vaṃsaññā porāṇā asaṃkiṇṇā asaṃkiṇṇapubbā na saṃkīyanti, na saṃkīyissanti, appaṭikuṭṭhā samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhī’’ti (a. ni. 4.28) navahi padehi vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, evaṃ imassapi ekāyanamaggassa sattānaṃ visuddhiyātiādīhi sattahi padehi vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi.
为什么要这样说呢?是为了激发那些比丘的精进心。因为听了赞颂之后,那些比丘就会想:“这条道确实能灭除四种祸患——让人内心灼烧的愁、让人说胡话的悲、让身体不适的苦、让内心不适的忧,还能带来三种殊胜——清净、理趣和涅槃。”于是他们生起精进心,觉得应当学习、通达、受持、诵读这一教法,并且应当修习这条道。就是这样,为了激发那些比丘的精进心,才说了赞颂的话,就像毛毯商人等人夸赞毛毯等货物一样。巴利
Kasmā iti ce? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ. Vaṇṇabhāsanañhi sutvā te bhikkhū ‘‘ayaṃ kira maggo hadayasantāpabhūtaṃ sokaṃ, vācāvippalāpabhūtaṃ paridevaṃ, kāyikaasātabhūtaṃ dukkhaṃ, cetasikaasātabhūtaṃ domanassanti cattāro upaddave hanati, visuddhiṃ ñāyaṃ nibbānanti tayo visese āvahatī’’ti ussāhajātā imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ uggahetabbaṃ pariyāpuṇitabbaṃ dhāretabbaṃ vācetabbaṃ, imañca maggaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ maññissanti. Iti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, kambalavāṇijādayo kambalādīnaṃ vaṇṇaṃ viya.
就像有个商人,手里拿着价值十万的淡色毛毯,吆喝着“来买毛毯啊”,可人们这时还不知道到底是哪种毛毯。因为像人发毛毯、马尾毛毯这些,虽然又臭又扎人,也都叫毛毯。只有当那个商人吆喝说“这是犍陀罗产的红毛毯,又细又亮,摸起来舒服”时,买得起的人才会买,买不起的人也想看一看。同样地,当说“比丘们,这是一条唯一的道路”时,人们一时也还不清楚这到底是什么道路。因为各种各样并不能导向解脱的道路,也都叫“道路”。但当说到“为了让众生清净”等等之后,他们就会想:“听说这条道路能灭除四种祸患,带来三种殊胜。”于是生起干劲,认为应当学习、掌握、受持这部法的开示,也应当修习这条道路。所以,为了赞叹而说了“为了让众生清净”等等。而且,这里不仅应当举出价值十万的淡色毛毯商人这个比喻,还应当举出红赡部金商人、清水宝珠商人、宝石商人、极清净珍珠宝商人、洗净珊瑚商人等比喻。巴利
Yathā hi satasahassagghanikapaṇḍukambalavāṇijena kambalaṃ gaṇhathāti ugghositepi asukakambaloti na tāva manussā jānanti. Kesakambalavālakambalādayopi hi duggandhā kharasamphassā kambalātveva vuccanti. Yadā pana tena gandhārako rattakambalo sukhumo ujjalo sukhasamphassoti ugghositaṃ hoti, tadā ye pahonti, te gaṇhanti. Ye na pahonti, tepi dassanakāmā honti, evamevaṃ ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo’’ti vuttepi asukamaggoti na tāva pākaṭo hoti. Nānappakārakā hi aniyyānamaggāpi maggātveva vuccanti. ‘‘Sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’tiādimhi pana vutte ‘‘ayaṃ kira maggo cattāro upaddave hanati, tayo visese āvahatī’’ti ussāhajātā imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ uggahetabbaṃ pariyāpuṇitabbaṃ dhāretabbaṃ vācetabbaṃ, imañca maggaṃ bhāvetabbaṃ maññissantīti vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanto ‘‘sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’tiādimāha. Yathā ca satasahassagghanikapaṇḍukambalavāṇijopamā, evaṃ rattajambunadasuvaṇṇaudakappasādakamaṇiratanasuvisuddhamuttāratanadhotapavāḷādivāṇijūpamādayopettha āharitabbā.
“即”是虚词,它的意思是“这些”。 “四”是数量限定,借此说明念处的范围:不多于它,也不少于它。 “念处”有三种:念的所行境也叫念处;在三种修行弟子中,导师超越了排斥与贪著,这也叫念处;还有念本身也叫念处。 正如在“比丘们,我要宣说四念处的集起与灭没,你们听……比丘们,什么是身的集起?由食的集起而有身的集起”等经文中,念的所行境被称为念处。 同样,在“身是建立处,不是念;念既是建立处,也是念”等文中也是如此。 它的意思是:依它而安立,所以叫“处”。什么安立?念。念的安立处,就是念处。 或者,“处”指努力用功的场所。念的用功场所就是念处,就像象场、马场等一样。 在“有三个念处,是圣者所修习的,圣者修习时,导师才堪能调御大众”这段经文里,在三种修行弟子中,导师超越了排斥与贪著,这也被称为“念处”。 它的意思是:应当安立,所以叫“处”,也就是应当发起、运行的意思。由什么安立?由念。念的安立处,就是念处。 而在“四念处修习、多修习,能圆满七觉支”等文中,则只是念本身被称为“念处”。 它的意思是:安住,所以叫“处”,也就是现起、进入、投入而运行的意思。念本身就是处,所以叫念处。 或者,以忆持为义是念,以现起为义是处。因此,既是念又是处,所以叫念处。这里所指的就是这个意思。巴利
Yadidanti nipāto, ye imeti ayamassa attho. Cattāroti gaṇanaparicchedo, tena na tato heṭṭhā na uddhanti satipaṭṭhānaparicchedaṃ dīpeti. Satipaṭṭhānāti tayo satipaṭṭhānā satigocaropi, tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭighānunayavītivattatāpi, satipi. ‘‘Catunnaṃ , bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānānaṃ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca desessāmi, taṃ suṇātha…pe…. Ko ca, bhikkhave, kāyassa samudayo? Āhārasamudayā kāyasamudayo’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.408) hi satigocaro satipaṭṭhānanti vuccati. Tathā ‘‘kāyo paṭṭhānaṃ, no sati. Sati paṭṭhānañceva sati cā’’tiādīsupi (paṭi. ma. 3.35). Tassattho – patiṭṭhāti asminti paṭṭhānaṃ. Kā patiṭṭhāti? Sati. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Padhānaṭṭhānanti vā paṭṭhānaṃ. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, hatthiṭṭhānaassaṭṭhānādīni viya. ‘‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā, yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.311) etthāpi tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭighānunayavītivattatā ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttā. Tassattho – paṭṭhapetabbato paṭṭhānaṃ, pavattayitabbatoti attho. Kena paṭṭhapetabbatoti? Satiyā. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānanti. ‘‘Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrentī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.989) pana satiyeva ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Tassattho – patiṭṭhātīti paṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhāti okkantitvā pakkhanditvā pavattatīti attho. Satiyeva paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Atha vā saraṇaṭṭhena sati, upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena paṭṭhānaṃ. Iti sati ca sā paṭṭhānañcātipi satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Idamidha adhippetaṃ.
如果是这样,为什么“念处”用复数?因为念有多种。由于所缘的不同,这些念确实是多种多样的。那么,为什么“道”用单数?因为从道的意义上说是一体的。这四种念,从道的意义上都归为一体。正如经中所说:“道,以什么意义为道?以导向涅槃的意义,以及被希求涅槃者所寻求的意义。”这四者在后来于身等所缘上完成各自的作用而走向涅槃,而且从最初就被希求涅槃者所寻求,所以四者被称为一个“道”。如果这样的话,借由文句的衔接,说法就具有了连贯性。就像“比丘们,我将为你们开示摧破魔军之道,你们要仔细听……比丘们,什么是摧破魔军之道?就是七觉支”等经文那样,其中“摧破魔军”和“七觉支”在意义上是一回事,只是文句不同。同样,“一乘道”和“四念处”在意义上是一回事,只是文句不同。因此,应当理解:由于道义为一而用单数,由于所缘不同、念有多种而用复数。巴利
Yadi evaṃ, kasmā ‘‘satipaṭṭhānā’’ti bahuvacanaṃ? Satibahuttā. Ārammaṇabhedena hi bahukā etā satiyo. Atha maggoti kasmā ekavacanaṃ? Maggaṭṭhena ekattā. Catassopi hi etā satiyo maggaṭṭhena ekattaṃ gacchanti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘maggoti kenaṭṭhena maggo? Nibbānagamanaṭṭhena, nibbānatthikehi magganīyaṭṭhena cā’’ti. Catassopi cetā aparabhāge kāyādīsu ārammaṇesu kiccaṃ sādhayamānā nibbānaṃ gacchanti. Ādito paṭṭhāya ca nibbānatthikehi maggīyanti, tasmā catassopi eko maggoti vuccanti . Evañca sati vacanānusandhinā sānusandhikāva desanā hoti, ‘‘mārasenappamaddanaṃ vo, bhikkhave, maggaṃ desessāmi, taṃ suṇātha…pe… katamo ca, bhikkhave, mārasenappamaddano maggo? Yadidaṃ sattabojjhaṅgā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.224) viya hi yathā mārasenappamaddanoti ca sattabojjhaṅgāti ca atthato ekaṃ, byañjanamevettha nānaṃ. Evaṃ ekāyanamaggoti ca cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti ca atthato ekaṃ, byañjanamevettha nānaṃ. Tasmā maggaṭṭhena ekattā ekavacanaṃ, ārammaṇabhedena satibahuttā bahuvacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
那么,为什么世尊只说四个念处,不多不少呢?是为了适应所教化众生的根机。在爱行者、见行者、止行者、观行者这四类所教化众生中,每一类又按钝根和利根分为两种。对钝根的爱行者来说,粗显的身随观念处是清净之道;对利根的爱行者来说,微细的受随观念处是清净之道。对见行者中的钝根者来说,不太细密分别的心随观念处是清净之道;对利根者来说,极为细密分别的法随观念处是清净之道。对止行者中的钝根者来说,第一个念处——所缘容易获得的——是清净之道;对利根者来说,因为无法安住在粗显的所缘上,所以第二个念处是清净之道。对观行者中的钝根者来说,所缘不太细密分别的第三个念处是清净之道;对利根者来说,所缘极为细密分别的第四个念处是清净之道。因此,只说四个,不多不少。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavatā cattārova satipaṭṭhānā vuttā anūnā anadhikāti? Veneyyahitattā . Taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritasamathayānikavipassanāyānikesu hi mandatikkhavasena dvedhā dvedhā pavattesu veneyyesu mandassa taṇhācaritassa oḷārikaṃ kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa sukhumaṃ vedanānupassanaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Diṭṭhicaritassāpi mandassa nātippabhedagataṃ cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa atippabhedagataṃ dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Samathayānikassa ca mandassa akicchena adhigantabbanimittaṃ paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa oḷārikārammaṇe asaṇṭhahanato dutiyaṃ. Vipassanāyānikassapi mandassa nātippabhedagatārammaṇaṃ tatiyaṃ, tikkhassa atippabhedagatārammaṇaṃ catutthaṃ. Iti cattārova vuttā anūnā anadhikāti.
或者,是为了断除净、乐、常、我这四种颠倒。身体确实是不净的,而众生却在这身体上被“净”的颠倒所迷惑;为了让他们看清身体不净的真相,从而断除这种颠倒,所以先说了身念处。同样,在人们把受等法执为乐、常、我的时候,其实受是苦,心是无常,诸法是无我;众生在这些法上被乐颠倒、常颠倒、我颠倒所迷惑,为了让他们看清这些法苦、无常、无我的真相,从而断除这些颠倒,所以说了其余三个念处。因此应当知道,为了断除净、乐、常、我四种颠倒,佛只说四个念处,不多不少。巴利
Subhasukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsapahānatthaṃ vā. Kāyo hi asubho, tattha ca subhavipallāsavipallatthā sattā, tesaṃ tattha asubhabhāvadassanena tassa vipallāsassa pahānatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Sukhaṃ niccaṃ attāti gahitesupi ca vedanādīsu vedanā dukkhā, cittaṃ aniccaṃ, dhammā anattā, tesu ca sukhaniccaattavipallāsavipallatthā sattā, tesaṃ tattha dukkhādibhāvadassanena tesaṃ vipallāsānaṃ pahānatthaṃ sesāni tīṇi vuttānīti evaṃ subhasukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsapahānatthaṃ vā cattārova vuttā anūnā anadhikāti veditabbā.
不只是为了断除颠倒,实际上也是为了断除四种瀑流、四种轭、四种漏、四种缚、四种取、四种邪行,以及为了遍知四种食,才说只有四个念处,应当这样理解。以上就是论典的义理方法。巴利
Na kevalañca vipallāsapahānatthameva, atha kho caturoghayogāsavaganthaupādānaagatipahānatthampi catubbidhāhārapariññatthañca cattārova vuttāti veditabbā. Ayaṃ tāva pakaraṇanayo.
不过在注释书里,则是从所依和归入一处这两个角度,说念处只有一个;从所缘的角度,才说有四念处。这里说的就是这个意思。就像一座有四座城门的城市:从东边来的人,带着东边出产的货物,从东门进入城里;从南边、西边、北边来的人,带着北边出产的货物,从北门进入城里。应当这样理解这个比喻:涅槃大城就像那座城市,八支圣道就像城门,身等四念处就像东等四个方向。巴利
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana saraṇavasena ceva ekattasamosaraṇavasena ca ekameva satipaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇavasena cattāroti etadeva vuttaṃ. Yathā hi catudvāre nagare pācīnato āgacchantā pācīnadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pācīnadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, dakkhiṇato pacchimato uttarato āgacchantā uttaradisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā uttaradvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nagaraṃ viya hi nibbānamahānagaraṃ . Dvāraṃ viya aṭṭhaṅgiko lokuttaramaggo. Pācīnadisādayo viya kāyādayo.
就像从东方来的人,带着东方出产的货物,从东门进入同一座城;同样,以身随观为门径而来的人,以十四种方式修习身随观,依靠由身随观修习之力所产生的圣道,都汇入同一个涅槃。巴利
Yathā pācīnato āgacchantā pācīnadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pācīnadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ kāyānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā kāyānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti.
就像从南方来的人,带着南方出产的货物,从南门进入同一座城;同样,以受随观为门径而来的人,以九种方式修习受随观,依靠受随观修习之力所生起的圣道,都汇入同一个涅槃。巴利
Yathā dakkhiṇato āgacchantā dakkhiṇadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ vedanānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā navavidhena vedanānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā vedanānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti.
就像从西边来的人,带着西边出产的货物,从西门进入同一座城;同样,以心随观为门径而来的人,以十六种方式修习心随观,依靠心随观修习的力量所生起的圣道,都汇入同一个涅槃。巴利
Yathā pacchimato āgacchantā pacchimadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pacchimadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ cittānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā soḷasavidhena cittānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā cittānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti.
就像从北方来的人,带着北方出产的货物,从北门进入城里一样;同样,以法随观为门径而来的人,以五种方式修习法随观,依靠法随观修习的力量所成就的圣道,最终都汇入同一个涅槃。巴利
Yathā uttarato āgacchantā uttaradisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā uttaradvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ dhammānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā dhammānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti.
应当知道,从忆念的角度来说,念处只有一个;从同归一处来说,也只有一个;而从所缘的角度来说,才说为四种。巴利
Evaṃ saraṇavasena ceva ekattasamosaraṇavasena ca ekameva satipaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇavasena cattārova vuttāti veditabbā.
“哪四种?”这是想要解说而提出的问题。“在此”指在这个教法里。“比丘们”是对接受法的人的称呼。“比丘”是指示实践圆满的人。虽然其他天与人也在实践,但因为实践的殊胜,以及为了显示实践者就是比丘,所以世尊说“比丘们”。因为在领受世尊教法的人当中,比丘最为殊胜,能成为领受一切种类教法的容器,因此基于这种殊胜,说“比丘们”。而一旦提到比丘,其余的人也就都被包含在内了,就像在国王出行等场合,提到国王就包含了其余随行大众一样。再者,凡是实践这条道路的人,就名为比丘,为了显示实践本身就是比丘的身份,所以说“比丘们”。因为无论是天还是人,只要是实践者,确实都可以得到“比丘”这个名称。正如所说:巴利
Katamecattāroti kathetukamyatā pucchā. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Bhikkhaveti dhammapaṭiggāhakapuggalālapanametaṃ. Bhikkhūti paṭipattisampādakapuggalanidassanametaṃ. Aññepi ca devamanussā paṭipattiṃ sampādentiyeva, seṭṭhattā pana paṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanato ca, ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti āha. Bhagavato hi anusāsaniṃ sampaṭicchantesu bhikkhu seṭṭho, sabbappakārāya anusāsaniyā bhājanabhāvato, tasmā seṭṭhattā ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti āha. Tasmiṃ gahite pana sesā gahitāva honti rājagamanādīsu rājaggahaṇena sesaparisā viya. Yo ca imaṃ paṭipattiṃ paṭipajjati, so bhikkhu nāma hotīti paṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanatopi ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti āha . Paṭipannako hi devo vā hotu manusso vā, ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti saṅkhaṃ gacchatiyeva. Yathāha –
即使打扮得漂漂亮亮,也能平稳安详地行走;
已寂静、已调御、决定安住、修梵行的人,
对一切众生都放下棍棒武器,
他就是婆罗门,他就是沙门,他就是比丘。巴利
‘‘Alaṅkato cepi samaṃ careyya, Santo danto niyato brahmacārī; Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ, So brāhmaṇo so samaṇo sa bhikkhū’’ti. (dha. pa. 142);
所谓“身”,就是色身。这里说的色身,是从肢体各部分以及头发等诸法的集合意义上来理解的,就像“象身”“车身”等说法一样。而且,不但有集合的意义,还有“可厌之物的生处”这个意义。对于那些极端可厌、极其污秽的东西,这个身体就是它们的生处。“生处”就是产生的地方。这里的词义可以这样解释:它们从这里生起,所以叫“生处”。什么从这里生起呢?就是那些可厌的头发等。因此,可厌之物的生处,就叫作“身”。“身随观者”,就是指有随观身习惯的人,或者正在随观身的人。巴利
Kāyeti rūpakāye. Rūpakāyo hi idha aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca dhammānaṃ samūhaṭṭhena hatthikāyarathakāyādayo viya kāyoti adhippeto. Yathā ca samūhaṭṭhena, evaṃ kucchitānaṃ āyaṭṭhena. Kucchitānañhi paramajegucchānaṃ so āyotipi kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho, āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo. Iti kucchitānaṃ āyoti kāyo. Kāyānupassīti kāyamanupassanasīlo, kāyaṃ vā anupassamāno.
已经说了“于身”,却又再次提到“身随观”,这第二次对“身”的取用,应当理解为是为了显示不混杂的确定、破除密集等。因此,他不是在身体上作受随观,也不是心随观或法随观,而恰恰只是身随观。通过显示在名为“身”的这个事物上,唯有身随观的行相,就显示了不混杂的确定。同样地,他不是在身体上观察某个脱离了肢体部分的单一事物,也不是观察脱离了头发、体毛等的所谓“女人”或“男人”。对于这个由头发、体毛等构成、由大种及所造色集合而成的身体,他也不是观察某个脱离了大种及所造色的单一事物,而是像观察车辆部件的人那样观察肢体的集合,像观察城市组成部分的人那样观察头发、体毛等的集合,像剥开芭蕉树干的人、像拆开空拳的人那样,只是观察大种及所造色的集合。通过以种种方式显示这个唯以集合形态而被称为“身”的事物,就显示了破除密集。因为在这里,除了上面所说的法的集合之外,完全看不到任何所谓“身”、或“女人”、或“男人”或其他任何事物。众生只是在这些法的集合上,以种种方式生起错误的执取。因此古人说:巴利
‘‘Kāye’’ti ca vatvāpi puna ‘‘kāyānupassī’’ti dutiyaṃ kāyaggahaṇaṃ asammissato vavatthānaghanavinibbhogādidassanatthaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tena na kāye vedanānupassī vā, cittadhammānupassī vā, atha kho kāyānupassīyevāti kāyasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ kāyānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavimuttaekadhammānupassī, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassī. Yopi cettha kesalomādiko bhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhāto kāyo , tatthapi na bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, atha kho rathasambhārānupassako viya aṅgapaccaṅgasamūhānupassī, nagarāvayavānupassako viya kesalomādisamūhānupassī, kadalikkhandhapattavaṭṭivinibbhujanako viya rittamuṭṭhiviniveṭhako viya ca bhūtupādāyasamūhānupassīyevāti nānappakārato samūhavaseneva kāyasaṅkhātassa vatthuno dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dassito hoti. Na hettha yathāvuttasamūhavinimutto kāyo vā itthī vā puriso vā añño vā koci dhammo dissati , yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatteyeva pana tathā tathā sattā micchābhinivesaṃ karonti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
他看见的,并不是被看见的;而被看见的,他却看不见。
愚人因不见真相而被束缚,正在被束缚者则不解脱。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ passati na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passati; Apassaṃ bajjhate mūḷho, bajjhamāno na muccatī’’ti. –
“为了显示破除密集等”这句话已经说了。这里通过“等”这个字,还应当知道这样一层意思:这个人只是在同一个身体上作身随观,而不是随观其他法。这话说的是什么呢?就像在没有水的阳焰中,有人把它随观为水,成了水随观者;但在这个身体上并不是这样——这个身体本身就是无常、苦、无我、不净的,而他并不是随观它为常、乐、我、净,而只是把这个身体随观为无常、苦、无我、不净这些行相的聚合。或者也可以这样理解:后面经文里说“诸比丘,在这里,比丘去了林野……他具念地吸气”等等,以入出息为开端、一直到粉末状骨头为结尾所说的身体,以及《无碍解》中说“在这里,有人随观地界为无常,随观水界、火界、风界、发聚、毛聚、皮聚、肉聚、血聚、筋聚、骨聚、髓聚为无常”所说的身体——对这一切身体,都是在这个身体上作随观,所以“于身作身随观”也应该这样理解其含义。巴利
Ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthanti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddena cettha ayampi attho veditabbo – ayañhi ekasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassīyeva, na aññadhammānupassī. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā anudakabhūtāyapi marīciyā udakānupassino honti, na evaṃ aniccadukkhānattaasubhabhūteyeva imasmiṃ kāye niccasukhaattasubhabhāvānupassī, atha kho kāyānupassī aniccadukkhānattaasubhākārasamūhānupassīyevāti. Atha vā yvāyaṃ parato ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā…pe… so satova assasatī’’tiādinā nayena assāsapassāsādicuṇṇikajātaaṭṭhikapariyosāno kāyo vutto, yo ca ‘‘idhekacco pathavikāyaṃ aniccato anupassati āpokāyaṃ tejokāyaṃ vāyokāyaṃ kesakāyaṃ lomakāyaṃ chavikāyaṃ cammakāyaṃ maṃsakāyaṃ ruhirakāyaṃ nahārukāyaṃ aṭṭhikāyaṃ aṭṭhimiñjakāya’’nti paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 3.35) kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiṃyeva kāye anupassanato ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
或者也可以这样理解:由于不将任何身体执取为“我”或“我所”,而只是随观头发、体毛等种种法的集合,所以“于身随观身”的意思就是:对那个由头发等法集合所构成的身体进行随观。此外,按照《无碍解道》中“于此身中,随观为无常,而非随观为常”等方式,因为是对由无常等特征集合所构成的身体进行随观,所以“于身随观身”也可以这样理解。巴利
Atha vā kāye ahanti vā mamanti vā evaṃ gahetabbassa yassa kassaci ananupassanato tassa tasseva pana kesālomādikassa nānādhammasamūhassa anupassanato kāye kesādidhammasamūhasaṅkhātakāyānupassīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Apica ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye aniccato anupassati, no niccato’’tiādinā nayena paṭisambhidāyaṃ āgatanayassa sabbasseva aniccalakkhaṇādino ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassa kāyassānupassanatopi ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
正因为这样,一位比丘按照身随观的方法修行时,是借助无常随观等七种随观来观察这个身体:他观察它是无常的,而不是常;观察它是苦的,而不是乐;观察它是无我的,而不是我;他厌离,而不是欢喜;他离染,而不是染着;他令它灭尽,而不是令它集起;他彻底放下,而不是执取。应当知道,当他这样观察无常时,就舍断了常想;观察苦时,就舍断了乐想;观察无我时,就舍断了我想;厌离时,就舍断了欢喜;离染时,就舍断了贪染;令灭尽时,就舍断了集起;彻底放下时,就舍断了执取。巴利
Tathā hi ayaṃ kāye kāyānupassanāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno bhikkhu imaṃ kāyaṃ aniccānupassanādīnaṃ sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena aniccato anupassati, no niccato. Dukkhato anupassati, no sukhato. Anattato anupassati, no attato. Nibbindati, no nandati. Virajjati, no rajjati. Nirodheti, no samudeti. Paṭinissajjati, no ādiyati. So taṃ aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahati, dukkhato anupassanto sukhasaññaṃ pajahati, anattato anupassanto attasaññaṃ pajahati, nibbindanto nandiṃ pajahati, virajjanto rāgaṃ pajahati, nirodhento samudayaṃ pajahati, paṭinissajjanto ādānaṃ pajahatīti veditabbo.
“住”就是活动、行动。“热诚”是指在三界中烧尽烦恼,所以叫热诚,这是精进的名称;具有这种热诚,就叫热诚者。“正知”是指具备被称为正知的智慧。“具念”是指具备能把握身体的念。不过,因为要先以念把握所缘,再用慧去观察,离开了念就不可能有观察。所以世尊说:“比丘们,我说念在任何情况下都是需要的。”因此,仅凭“于身随观身而住”这一句,就已经说明了身随观念处这个修行业处。或者也可以这样理解:没有热诚的人,内心退缩,会成为障碍;没有正知的人,在把握正确方法和避开错误方法时会迷惑;失去念的人,在舍弃正确方法和采取错误方法上无能为力。因此,他的这个业处就无法成就。为了显示能让他成就这个业处的那些法,才说了“热诚、正知、具念”这些话。巴利
Viharatīti iriyati. Ātāpīti tīsu bhavesu kilese ātāpetīti ātāpo, vīriyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ātāpo assa atthīti ātāpī. Sampajānoti sampajaññasaṅkhātena ñāṇena samannāgato. Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato. Ayaṃ pana yasmā satiyā ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā paññāya anupassati, na hi sativirahitassa anupassanā nāma atthi. Tenevāha ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Tasmā ettha ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti ettāvatā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānakammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yasmā anātāpino antosaṅkhepo antarāyakaro hoti, asampajāno upāyapariggahe anupāyaparivajjane ca sammuyhati, muṭṭhassati upāyāpariccāge anupāyāpariggahe ca asamattho hoti, tenassa taṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ na sampajjati, tasmā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ānubhāvena taṃ sampajjati. Tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ātāpī sampajāno satimāti idaṃ vutta’’nti veditabbaṃ.
像这样,先说明了身随观念处及其相应要素,现在为了说明断除的要素,所以说了“调伏世间的贪忧”。其中,“调伏”是指通过彼分断除或镇伏断除而调伏。“世间”就是指那个身体。因为身体在这里以毁坏、变灭的含义被称为世间。然而,贪忧并不只是在身体上被断除,在感受等上面也同样被断除,所以《分别论》中说“五取蕴就是世间”。或者,这是以提取义理的方式,就那些法被称为世间而说的。至于所说的“其中,什么是世间?就是这身体,这就是世间”,这里的意思正是如此:应当这样理解其中的关联——“对于那个世间,调伏贪忧”。再者,应当知道:这里用“贪”一词含摄了欲贪,用“忧”一词含摄了嗔恚,因此通过显示这两种属于盖的强有力之法,就说明了诸盖的断除。巴利
Iti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ sampayogaṅgañcassa dassetvā idāni pahānaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti vuttaṃ. Tattha vineyyāti tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā vinayitvā. Loketi tasmiṃyeva kāye. Kāyo hi idha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti adhippeto. Yasmā panassa na kāyamatteyeva abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīyati, vedanādīsupi pahīyatiyeva, tasmā ‘‘pañcapi upādānakkhandhā loko’’ti vibhaṅge (vibha. 362) vuttaṃ. Lokasaṅkhātattā vā tesaṃ dhammānaṃ atthuddhāranayenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yaṃ panāha ‘‘tattha katamo loko? Sveva kāyo loko’’ti. Ayamevettha attho, tasmiṃ loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ vineyyāti evaṃ sambandho daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā panettha abhijjhāgahaṇena kāmacchando , domanassaggahaṇena byāpādo saṅgahaṃ gacchati, tasmā nīvaraṇapariyāpannabalavadhammadvayadassanena nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,特别要通过调伏贪欲,说明断除的是以身体完好为根源的贪著;通过调伏忧,说明断除的是以身体败坏为根源的抗拒。通过调伏贪欲,说明断除对身体的贪爱;通过调伏忧,说明断除对修习身体的不喜。通过调伏贪欲,说明断除把身体上不真实的净相、乐相等强加进去;通过调伏忧,说明断除对身体上真实的不净相、苦相等加以排斥。由此,显示了瑜伽行者的瑜伽力和堪能修瑜伽。因为这就是瑜伽力:脱离贪著与抗拒,能忍受不喜与喜,远离强加不真实和排斥真实。他脱离贪著与抗拒,能忍受不喜与喜,不强加不真实,也不排斥真实,因此就是堪能修瑜伽的人。巴利
Visesena cettha abhijjhāvinayena kāyasampattimūlakassa anurodhassa, domanassavinayena pana kāyavipattimūlakassa virodhassa, abhijjhāvinayena ca kāye abhiratiyā, domanassavinayena kāyabhāvanāya anabhiratiyā, abhijjhāvinayena kāye abhūtānaṃ subhasukhabhāvādīnaṃ pakkhepassa, domanassavinayena ca kāye bhūtānaṃ asubhāsukhabhāvādīnaṃ apanayanassa ca pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena yogāvacarassa yogānubhāvo yogasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti. Yogānubhāvo hi esa, yadidaṃ anurodhavirodhavippamutto aratiratisaho abhūtapakkhepabhūtāpanayanavirahito ca hoti. Anurodhavirodhavippamutto cesa aratiratisaho abhūtaṃ apakkhipanto bhūtañca anapanento yogasamattho hotīti.
还有一种理解方式:在“于身随观身”这一句里,说的是以随观作为业处。在“安住”这一句里,说的是以所说的安住方式,作为业处行者对身体的护持。在“热诚”等句里,应当知道:以热诚说明正勤,以念与正知说明适用于一切处的业处,或者说明护持业处的方法;也可以说,以念说明通过身随观而获得的止,以正知说明观,以调伏贪忧说明修习的成果。巴利
Aparo nayo ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti ettha anupassanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Viharatī’’ti ettha vuttavihārena kammaṭṭhānikassa kāyapariharaṇaṃ. ‘‘Ātāpī’’tiādīsu ātāpena sammappadhānaṃ, satisampajaññena sabbatthikakammaṭṭhānaṃ, kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇūpāyo vā, satiyā vā kāyānupassanāvasena paṭiladdhasamatho, sampajaññena vipassanā, abhijjhādomanassavinayena bhāvanāphalaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
另外,在《分别论》里问到:“随观”——那里,什么是随观?就是慧、了知……略……正见。这叫作随观。他以这种随观而具备、完全具备,达到、完全达到,生起、圆满,具足。因此,称他为“随观者”。巴利
Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘anupassī’’ti tattha katamā anupassanā? Yā paññā pajānanā…pe… sammādiṭṭhi. Ayaṃ vuccati anupassanā. Imāya anupassanāya upeto hoti samupeto upāgato samupāgato upapanno sampanno samannāgato. Tena vuccati anupassīti.
「安住」的意思是:行走、活动、维持、守护、存续、度日、游行、居住。因此,称为「安住」。巴利
Viharatīti iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti carati viharati. Tena vuccati viharatīti.
所谓热忱者,在这里,什么是热忱?就是那种心的精进发起……中略……正精进。这称为热忱。他以这种热忱而具备……中略……具足。因此,称为热忱者。巴利
Ātāpīti tattha katamo ātāpo? Yo cetasiko vīriyārambho…pe… sammāvāyāmo. Ayaṃ vuccati ātāpo. Iminā ātāpena upeto hoti…pe… samannāgato. Tena vuccati ātāpīti.
所谓“具足正知”:这里,什么是正知?就是慧、了知……中略……正见,这称为正知。他以这种正知而具备……中略……具足。因此,称为“具足正知者”。巴利
Sampajānoti tattha katamaṃ sampajaññaṃ? Yā paññā pajānanā…pe… sammādiṭṭhi. Idaṃ vuccati sampajaññaṃ. Iminā sampajaññena upeto hoti…pe… samannāgato. Tena vuccati sampajānoti.
“具念者”:这里,什么是念?就是念、随念……(中略)……正念,这称为念。他具备这种念……(中略)……具足。因此,称为“具念者”。巴利
Satimāti tattha katamā sati? Yā sati anussati…pe… sammāsati. Ayaṃ vuccati sati. Imāya satiyā upeto hoti…pe… samannāgato. Tena vuccati satimāti.
“于世间调伏贪忧”:这里,什么是世间?这个身体就是世间,五取蕴也是世间。这称为世间。这里,什么是贪?凡是贪、染贪、随顺、随悦、欢喜、喜贪、心的染贪,这称为贪。这里,什么是忧?凡是心里的不适、心里的苦、由心触所生的不适……中略……苦受,这称为忧。这样,这贪和这忧在这个世间里已被调伏、已彻底调伏,已寂静、已彻底寂静,已平息、已彻底平息,已灭尽、已彻底灭尽,已舍弃、已遣除,已干涸、已彻底干涸,已消灭殆尽。因此,称为“于世间调伏贪忧”。(《分别论》356)这些词句的含义已经讲完。应当这样理解:这部义注的方法是如何与它相符合的。以上是身随观念处总说部分的释义。巴利
Vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti tattha katamo loko? Sveva kāyo loko, pañcapi upādānakkhandhā loko. Ayaṃ vuccati loko. Tattha katamā abhijjhā? Yo rāgo sārāgo anunayo anurodho nandī nandīrāgo cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati abhijjhā. Tattha katamaṃ domanassaṃ? Yaṃ cetasikaṃ asātaṃ, cetasikaṃ dukkhaṃ, cetosamphassajaṃ asātaṃ…pe… dukkhā vedanā. Idaṃ vuccati domanassaṃ. Iti ayañca abhijjhā idañca domanassaṃ imamhi loke vinītā honti paṭivinītā santā vūpasantā samitā vūpasamitā atthaṅgatā abbhatthaṅgatā appitā byappitā sositā visositā byantīkatā, tena vuccati vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti (vibha. 356) evametesaṃ padānamattho vutto. Tena saha ayaṃ aṭṭhakathānayo yathā saṃsandati, evaṃ veditabbo. Ayaṃ tāva kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānuddesassa atthavaṇṇanā.
在“于受……于心……于法,随观法而住……中略……于世间调伏贪忧”这一段里,关于“随观受者”等再次提到受等,其用意应当依照身随观中所述的方法来理解。在“于受随观受、于心随观心、于法随观法”中,这里的“受”指三种受,而且都只是世间性的;“心”也是世间性的;“法”同样如此。它们的具体区分,将在广解部分变得明确。不过在这里,只应了知:按照应当随观受的方式去随观,就说这位随观者是“于受随观受”。这个道理也适用于心和法。那么,应当如何随观受呢?首先,应观乐受为苦,观苦受为箭,观不苦不乐受为无常。正如所说:巴利
Vedanāsu… citte… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati…pe… vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti ettha pana vedanānupassīti evamādīsu vedanādīnaṃ puna vacane payojanaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī, citte cittānupassī, dhammesu dhammānupassīti ettha pana vedanāti tisso vedanā, tā ca lokiyā eva. Cittampi lokiyaṃ, tathā dhammā. Tesaṃ vibhāgo niddesavāre pākaṭo bhavissati. Kevalaṃ panidha yathā vedanā anupassitabbā, tathā anupassanto vedanāsu vedanānupassīti veditabbo. Esa nayo cittadhammesupi. Kathañca vedanā anupassitabbāti? Sukhā tāva vedanā dukkhato, dukkhā sallato, adukkhamasukhā aniccato. Yathāha –
他把乐看成苦,把苦看成一支刺穿的箭;
他把那寂静的不苦不乐,看成是无常的。
那位真正以正见看清真相的比丘,将平静地生活。巴利
‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, adakkhi naṃ aniccato; Sa ve sammaddaso bhikkhu, upasanto carissatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 4.253);
这一切受都应当观为苦。世尊确实说过:“无论什么感受,我都说它是苦。”(《相应部》4.259)也应当从乐和苦两方面来观。正如世尊所说:“乐受在安住时是乐,在变坏时是苦”(《中部》1.464),这一切都应当详细展开。此外,还应当依照无常等七种随观来观。其余的内容在广解部分自然会清楚。
在心和法这两类里,先说“心”:应当依照所缘、增上、俱生、依处、业、果、作用等种种差别,依照无常等七种随观,并依照广解部分所说的有贪等种种分类来观。“法”则应当依照自相与共相、空法、无常等七种随观,并依照广解部分所说的有恐惧、无恐惧等种种分类来观。其余和前面所说的一样。
在这里,对于某个人来说,如果他在称为身体的世间已经断除了贪欲和忧恼,那么他在受等世间中的贪欲和忧恼也确实已经断除了。不过,这是就不同个人的差别,以及就不同心识刹那的念处修习方式,在一切处都这样说的。或者说,因为在某一处断除了,在其余处也就断除了,所以为了显示他在这方面的断除,才这样说,应当这样理解。巴利
Sabbā eva cetā dukkhātipi anupassitabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃkiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259). Sukhadukkhatopi ca anupassitabbā. Yathāha ‘‘sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.464) sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Apica aniccādisattānupassanāvasenapi anupassitabbā. Sesaṃ niddesavāreyeva pākaṭaṃ bhavissati. Cittadhammesupi cittaṃ tāva ārammaṇādhipatisahajātabhūmikammavipākakiriyādinānattabhedānaṃ aniccādisattānupassanānaṃ niddesavāre āgatasarāgādibhedānañca vasena anupassitabbaṃ. Dhammā salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇānaṃ suññatadhammassa aniccādisattānupassanānaṃ niddesavāre āgatasantāsantādibhedānañca vasena anupassitabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Kāmañcettha yassa kāyasaṅkhāte loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīnaṃ, tassa vedanādilokesupi taṃ pahīnameva. Nānāpuggalavasena pana nānācittakkhaṇikasatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāvasena ca sabbattha vuttaṃ. Yato vā ekattha pahīnaṃ sesesupi pahīnaṃ hoti. Tenevassa tattha pahānadassanatthampi evaṃ vuttanti veditabbanti.
身随观·入出息节释义巴利
Kāyānupassanāānāpānapabbavaṇṇanā
107 107. 现在,就像一位灵巧的竹编匠人,想要制作粗席、细席、竹篮、竹篓、竹盒等器具,拿到一根大竹子后,把它劈成四份,然后拿起每一截竹片,再剖开,用它做出各种器具。同样地,世尊为了让众生通过念处的教导,证得种种不同的殊胜成就,就把同一个正念,依照“有四念处。哪四种?诸比丘,在此,比丘于身随观身而住”这样的方式,从所缘的角度分成四种。然后,他拿起每一个念处,逐一分别,以“诸比丘,如何……”这样的方式,开始宣说详细解说的部分。巴利
107. Idāni seyyathāpi nāma cheko vilīvakārako thūlakilañjasaṇhakilañjacaṅkoṭakapeḷāpuṭādīni upakaraṇāni kattukāmo ekaṃ mahāveṇuṃ labhitvā catudhā bhinditvā tato ekekaṃ veṇukhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā phāletvā taṃ taṃ upakaraṇaṃ kareyya, evameva bhagavā satipaṭṭhānadesanāya sattānaṃ anekappakāravisesādhigamaṃ kattukāmo ekameva sammāsatiṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’tiādinā nayena ārammaṇavasena catudhā bhinditvā tato ekekaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vibhajanto ‘‘kathañca bhikkhave’’tiādinā nayena niddesavāraṃ vattumāraddho.
这里,“云何”等提问,是为了详细展开说明而设的问。对此,简要的含义是:诸比丘,比丘以什么样的方式,于身随观身而住?这个道理适用于所有提问的段落。这里说“诸比丘,于此,比丘”,意思是:诸位比丘,就是在这教法中的比丘。这里的“于此”一词,是为了说明:能生起一切种类身随观的这个人,他所依止的就是这教法,同时也否定了其他教法能有这样的成就。世尊确实这样说过:“诸比丘,只有在这里才有沙门……其他外道所说的沙门都是空洞的。”(《中部》1.139)因此说“在这教法中的比丘”。巴利
Tattha kathañcātiādi vitthāretukamyatā pucchā. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – bhikkhave, kena ca pakārena bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharatīti? Esa nayo sabbapucchāvāresu. Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhūti, bhikkhave, imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Ayañhettha idha-saddo sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano ca. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139). Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti.
“或去到阿兰若……或去到空寂之处”——这句话是在说明,应当选取与修习念处相适合的住处。因为这位比丘的心,长久以来在色等所缘上流散惯了,不肯进入业处的轨道,就像一头被烈牛拉着的车,只往岔路上狂奔。所以,好比有人想驯服一头喝足了母牛奶水养大的烈性牛犊,就把它从母牛身边牵开,在一边挖一根大柱子,用绳子把它拴在柱上。那牛犊虽然东挣西跳,却逃不掉,最后只能靠近那根柱子坐下或躺下。同样,这位比丘想调伏那颗长久以来被色等所缘的滋味滋养得桀骜不驯的心,就应当把心从色等所缘上移开,带进阿兰若、树下或空寂之处,在那里用念的绳子,把心拴在念处所缘的柱子上。这样一来,那颗心即使东挣西跳,因为得不到过去习惯的所缘,又挣不断念的绳子逃不走,就只能以近行和安止的方式,靠近并安住于同一个所缘。因此古德们说:巴利
‘‘Araññagato vā…pe… suññāgāragato vā’’ti idamassa satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpanaṃ. Imassa hi bhikkhuno dīgharattaṃ rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu anuvisaṭaṃ cittaṃ kammaṭṭhānavīthiṃ otarituṃ na icchati, kūṭagoṇayuttaratho viya uppathameva dhāvati, tasmā seyyathāpi nāma gopo kūṭadhenuyā sabbaṃ khīraṃ pivitvā vaḍḍhitaṃ kūṭavacchaṃ dametukāmo dhenuto apanetvā ekamante mahantaṃ thambhaṃ nikhaṇitvā tattha yottena bandheyya. Athassa so vaccho ito cito ca vipphanditvā palāyituṃ asakkonto tameva thambhaṃ upanisīdeyya vā upanipajjeyya vā, evameva imināpi bhikkhunā dīgharattaṃ rūpārammaṇādirasapānavaḍḍhitaṃ duṭṭhacittaṃ dametukāmena rūpādiārammaṇato apanetvā araññaṃ vā rukkhamūlaṃ vā suññāgāraṃ vā pavesetvā tattha satipaṭṭhānārammaṇatthambhe satiyottena bandhitabbaṃ. Evamassa taṃ cittaṃ ito cito ca vipphanditvāpi pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇaṃ alabhamānaṃ satiyottaṃ chinditvā palāyituṃ asakkontaṃ tamevārammaṇaṃ upacārappanāvasena upanisīdati ceva upanipajjati ca. Tenāhu porāṇā –
就像有人为了驯服小牛,在这里把它拴在柱子上;
应当这样把自己的心牢牢绑在念的所缘上。巴利
‘‘Yathā thambhe nibandheyya, vacchaṃ damaṃ naro idha; Bandheyyevaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ, satiyārammaṇe daḷha’’nti.
这样,他的坐卧处就与修习相适应。因此说,这是对他受持适合念处修习的坐卧处的阐明。巴利
Evamassa taṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanānurūpaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idamassa satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpana’’nti.
另外,入出息念这个业处是身随观的顶点,是一切佛陀、独觉佛和佛陀弟子证得殊胜成就、现法乐住的基础。如果不离开夹杂着女人、男人、象、马等声音的村落周边,就很难修成,因为声音是禅那的刺。而在没有村落的森林里,瑜伽行者就容易把握这个业处,修成入出息第四禅,再以那个禅那作为基础,观照诸行,证得最高的果——阿罗汉果。所以,世尊为了给这样的修行者指示合适的坐卧处,才说了“前往森林……”等话。巴利
Apica yasmā idaṃ kāyānupassanāya muddhabhūtaṃ sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ itthipurisahatthiassādisaddasamākulaṃ gāmantaṃ apariccajitvā na sukaraṃ sampādetuṃ, saddakaṇṭakattā jhānassa. Agāmake pana araññe sukaraṃ yogāvacarena idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Tasmāssa anurūpasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
世尊就像一位懂得看地形的风水师。比如风水师看过一块建城的地,仔细考察之后,就指点说:“在这里建城。”等城市顺利建成,他就从王室得到很大的恭敬。同样,世尊观察了适合修行者的住处之后,就指点说:“应该在这里用功修行业处。”然后,那位修行者在那个地方精勤修行业处,逐渐证得阿拉汉果时,世尊就得到很大的恭敬,人们赞叹说:“那位世尊,确实是正自觉者!”巴利
Vatthuvijjācariyo viya hi bhagavā. So yathā vatthuvijjācariyo nagarabhūmiṃ passitvā suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha nagaraṃ māpethā’’ti upadisati, sotthinā ca nagare niṭṭhite rājakulato mahāsakkāraṃ labhati, evameva yogāvacarassa anurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabba’’nti upadisati. Tato tattha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjantena yoginā anukkamena arahatte patte ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ labhati.
这位比丘则被称为“如豹者”。就像大豹王在森林里,靠着草丛、山林或山丛隐藏起来,捕捉野牛、羚羊、野猪等野兽;同样,这位在森林等地精勤修习业处的比丘,也会依次证得四道和四圣果。因此古德们说:巴利
Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu dīpisadisoti vuccati. Yathā hi mahādīpirājā araññe tiṇagahanaṃ vā vanagahanaṃ vā pabbatagahanaṃ vā nissāya nilīyitvā vanamahiṃsagokaṇṇasūkarādayo mige gaṇhāti, evameva ayaṃ araññādīsu kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjanto bhikkhu yathākkamena cattāro magge ceva cattāri ariyaphalāni ca gaṇhāti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
就像一种叫豹的野兽,先潜伏起来,再扑捉猎物;
同样,这位佛陀之子,精勤修习,具备观照。
进入森林后,他摘取最殊胜的果实。巴利
‘‘Yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhatī mige; Tathevāyaṃ buddhaputto, yuttayogo vipassako; Araññaṃ pavisitvāna, gaṇhāti phalamuttama’’nti.
世尊为了向他指出适合精勤修行的阿兰若坐卧处,说了“前往阿兰若”等话。此后,在这个入出息念部分中应当解说的内容,在《清净道论》里已经讲过了。巴利
Tenassa parakkamajavayoggabhūmiṃ araññasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha. Ito paraṃ imasmiṃ tāva ānāpānapabbe yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ visuddhimagge vuttameva.
不过,对于依照“当入息长时,他知道‘我入息长’……(中略)……修习‘我令身行平息,将出息’”这样所说的入出息来修习的人,在入出息这个所缘相上,会生起四种禅那。他从禅那出定之后,或者把握入出息,或者把握禅支。其中,以入出息为业处的人这样把握色法:“这些入出息依靠什么?依靠所依处。所依处就是所生身,所生身就是四大种以及所造色。”然后,他把握以那个为所缘的、以触为第五的法为名法。这样把握了名色之后,他去寻找名色的因缘,见到从无明等开始的缘起,于是疑惑消除:“这仅仅只是因缘和因缘所生的法而已,并没有别的有情或补特伽罗。”他把具有因缘的名色加上三相,增长观,逐渐证得阿罗汉果。这就是一位比丘直到阿罗汉果的解脱门径。巴利
Tassa pana imesaṃ ‘‘dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti…pe… passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ vasena sikkhato assāsapassāsanimitte cattāri jhānāni uppajjanti. So jhānā vuṭṭhahitvā assāsapassāse vā pariggaṇhāti jhānaṅgāni vā. Tattha assāsapassāsakammiko ‘‘ime assāsapassāsā kiṃ nissitā, vatthuṃ nissitā, vatthu nāma karajakāyo, karajakāyo nāma cattāri mahābhūtāni upādārūpañcā’’ti evaṃ rūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, tato tadārammaṇe phassapañcamake nāmanti evaṃ nāmarūpaṃ pariggahetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesanto avijjādipaṭiccasamuppādaṃ disvā ‘‘paccayapaccayuppannadhammamattamevetaṃ, añño satto vā puggalo vā natthī’’ti vitiṇṇakaṅkho sappaccayanāmarūpe tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento anukkamena arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Idaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhaṃ.
以禅那为业处的人也是这样:他先确定名色——“这些禅支依靠什么?依靠所依处。所依处就是所生身,所以禅支是名,所生身是色”——然后去寻找它的缘,看到以无明等为缘的缘起方式,于是疑惑消除:“这只不过是缘和缘所生之法罢了,并没有另一个有情或人。”他把有缘有因的名色加上三相,不断增长观,逐渐证得阿拉汉果。这是一位比丘直到阿拉汉果的出口门径。巴利
Jhānakammikopi ‘‘imāni jhānaṅgāni kiṃ nissitāni, vatthuṃ nissitāni. Vatthu nāma karajakāyoti jhānaṅgāni nāmaṃ, karajakāyo rūpa’’nti nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesanto avijjādipaccayākāraṃ disvā ‘‘paccayapaccayuppannadhammamattamevetaṃ, añño satto vā puggalo vā natthī’’ti vitiṇṇakaṅkho sappaccayanāmarūpe tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento anukkamena arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, idaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhaṃ.
“内”是指:像这样在自己的入出息身上,身随观而住。“外”是指:在别人的入出息身上。“内外”是指:有时在自己的、有时在别人的入出息身上。这是说明他业处已经纯熟之后,反复交替专注的阶段。但在同一个时刻,这两者并不能同时得到。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā assāsapassāsakāye kāyānupassī viharati. Bahiddhā vāti parassa vā assāsapassāsakāye. Ajjhattabahiddhā vāti kālena attano, kālena parassa assāsapassāsakāye. Etenassa paguṇakammaṭṭhānaṃ aṭṭhapetvā aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakālo kathito. Ekasmiṃ kāle panidaṃ ubhayaṃ na labbhati.
随观集法:就像依靠铁匠的风箱、风管和相应的努力,风才一次又一次地流动;同样,依靠比丘的业生身、鼻孔和心,入出息身才一次又一次地流动。身等诸法是集起之法,观察这些,就称为“于身随观集法而住”。
随观灭法:就像风箱被拿走、风管破裂、相应的努力不存在时,那风就不再流动;同样,当身体坏灭、鼻孔毁坏、心识灭尽时,所谓的入出息身就不再流动。因此,身等灭尽故入出息灭尽。这样观察,就称为“于身随观灭法而住”。
随观集灭法:有时观察它的集起,有时观察它的息灭。
“有身”者,即只有身,没有众生,没有人,没有女人,没有男人,没有我,没有我所,没有我,没有我的,没有某人,没有属于某人的——这样他的念就现前了。巴利
Samudayadhammānupassī vāti yathā nāma kammārabhastañca gaggaranāḷiñca tajjañca vāyāmaṃ paṭicca vāto aparāparaṃ sañcarati, evaṃ bhikkhuno karajakāyañca nāsāpuṭañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsakāyo aparāparaṃ sañcarati. Kāyādayo dhammā samudayadhammā, te passanto ‘‘samudayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṃ viharatī’’ti vuccati. Vayadhammānupassī vāti yathā bhastāya apanītāya gaggaranāḷiyā bhinnāya tajje ca vāyāme asati so vāto nappavattati , evameva kāye bhinne nāsāpuṭe viddhaste citte ca niruddhe assāsapassāsakāyo nāma nappavattatīti kāyādinirodhā assāsapassāsanirodhoti evaṃ passanto ‘‘vayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṃ viharatī’’ti vuccati. Samudayavayadhammānupassī vāti kālena samudayaṃ, kālena vayaṃ anupassanto. Atthi kāyoti vā panassāti kāyova atthi, na satto, na puggalo, na itthī, na puriso, na attā, na attaniyaṃ, nāhaṃ, na mama, na koci, na kassacīti evamassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti.
“只是”这个词,是在界定和确定它的用途。这里说的是:那已现前的念,并不是为了别的什么,而只是为了持续不断地增长智慧与正念,使智慧达到极致、使念达到极致,也就是为了增长念与正知。“他住于无所依”是指:他不依止渴爱的依著,也不依止邪见的依著而安住。“于世间不执取任何事物”是指:对于世间中的任何色……乃至识,都不执取为“这是我的我”“这是我的”或“这是我所有的”。“如此亦”中的“亦”字,是用来承接上文并作总结的。世尊就是用这句话结束了对入出息念这一部分的教导,并加以开示。巴利
Yāvadevāti payojanaparicchedavavatthāpanametaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti, sā na aññatthāya. Atha kho yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya aparāparaṃ uttaruttari ñāṇapamāṇatthāya ceva satipamāṇatthāya ca, satisampajaññānaṃ vuḍḍhatthāyāti attho. Anissito ca viharatīti taṇhānissayadiṭṭhinissayānaṃ vasena anissito viharati. Na ca kiñci loke upādiyatīti lokasmiṃ kiñci rūpaṃ vā…pe… viññāṇaṃ vā ‘‘ayaṃ me attā vā attaniyaṃ vā’’ti na gaṇhāti. Evampīti upariatthaṃ upādāya sampiṇḍanattho pikāro. Iminā pana padena bhagavā ānāpānapabbadesanaṃ niyyātetvā dasseti.
在这里,能觉知入出息的那个念,就是苦谛;能生起这个念的先前渴爱,就是集谛;这两者不再生起的状态,就是灭谛;能遍知苦、断除集、以灭为所缘的圣道,就是道谛。这样依四谛逐步精勤修行而证得寂灭,这就是一位专注于入出息念的比丘直到证得阿拉汉果的出路。巴利
Tattha assāsapassāsapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, dukkhaparijānano samudayapajahano nirodhārammaṇo ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavasena ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idamekassa assāsapassāsavasena abhiniviṭṭhassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
威仪部分的解释巴利
Iriyāpathapabbavaṇṇanā
108 108. 像这样,按入出息把身随观分别解说之后,现在为了按威仪来分别解说,又说“再者”等。其中,狗、豺狼等动物在行走时,确实也知道“我们在走”。但这里说的并不是这种知道。因为这样的知道不能舍断对“有情”的执取,不能去除“我”想,既不是业处,也不是念处的修习。而这位比丘的知道,则能舍断对“有情”的执取,去除“我”想,既是业处,也是念处的修习。这里说的是这样的正知:“谁在走?走是谁的?因为什么而走?”在站立等其他威仪中,道理也是这样。巴利
108. Evaṃ assāsapassāsavasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni iriyāpathavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha kāmaṃ soṇasiṅgālādayopi gacchantā ‘‘gacchāmā’’ti jānanti. Na panetaṃ evarūpaṃ jānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evarūpañhi jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ na pajahati , attasaññaṃ na ugghāṭeti , kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā vā na hoti. Imassa pana bhikkhuno jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ pajahati, attasaññaṃ ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānañceva satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā ca hoti. Idañhi ‘‘ko gacchati, kassa gamanaṃ, kiṃ kāraṇā gacchatī’’ti evaṃ sampajānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ṭhānādīsupi eseva nayo.
在这里,“谁在走?”——其实没有任何众生或人在走。“走是谁的?”——并不是任何众生或人的走。“因为什么而走?”——因为心所造作的风界扩散而走。所以,他这样清楚地知道:当“我在走”的心生起时,这个心产生风,风引生身表,由于心所造作的风界推动,整个身体向前移动,这就叫作走。在站立等其他姿势中,道理也是一样。巴利
Tattha ko gacchatīti na koci satto vā puggalo vā gacchati. Kassa gamananti na kassaci sattassa vā puggalassa vā gamanaṃ. Kiṃ kāraṇā gacchatīti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena gacchati. Tasmā esa evaṃ pajānāti ‘‘gacchāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena sakalakāyassa purato abhinīhāro gamananti vuccati. Ṭhānādīsupi eseva nayo.
在这里也一样:当“我站着”这个心生起时,这个心产生风,风引生身表;由于心所造作风界的扩散,整个身体从脚底开始向上挺直的状态,就称为站立。当“我坐着”这个心生起时,这个心产生风,风引生身表;由于心所造作风界的扩散,下身弯曲、上身挺直的状态,就称为坐。当“我躺着”这个心生起时,这个心产生风,风引生身表;由于心所造作风界的扩散,整个身体横向伸展的状态,就称为卧。巴利
Tatrāpi hi ‘‘tiṭṭhāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena sakalakāyassa koṭito paṭṭhāya ussitabhāvo ṭhānanti vuccati. ‘‘Nisīdāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena heṭṭhimakāyassa samiñjanaṃ uparimakāyassa ussitabhāvo nisajjāti vuccati. ‘‘Sayāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, taṃ vāyaṃ janeti, vāyo viññattiṃ janeti, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena sakalasarīrassa tiriyato pasāraṇaṃ sayananti vuccatīti.
对于这样了知的人来说,就会产生这样的说法:“有情在走,有情在站。”但实际上,并没有什么有情在走或在站。就像人们说“车在走,车在站”,可并没有什么叫做“车”的东西在走或在站。那只是把四头牛套上车,由熟练的车夫赶着走时,才在世俗习惯上说“车在走,车在站”,这仅仅是一种说法而已。同样地,从不知真相的角度来说,身体就像车,心生起的风界就像牛,心就像车夫。当“我走”“我站”的心生起时,风界就生起并产生身表;由于心所造作的风界的作用,行走等动作才得以发生。因此,仅仅是在世俗习惯的说法上,才说“有情在走,有情在站,我在走,我在站”。所以(世尊)这样说:巴利
Tassa evaṃ pajānato evaṃ hoti ‘‘satto gacchati satto tiṭṭhatī’’ti vuccati. Atthi pana koci satto gacchanto vā ṭhito vā natthi. Yathā pana ‘‘sakaṭaṃ gacchati sakaṭaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti vuccati, na ca kiñci sakaṭaṃ nāma gacchantaṃ vā tiṭṭhantaṃ vā atthi. Cattāro pana goṇe yojetvā chekamhi sārathimhi pājente ‘‘sakaṭaṃ gacchati sakaṭaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti vohāramattameva hoti, evameva ajānanaṭṭhena sakaṭaṃ viya kāyo. Goṇā viya cittajavātā. Sārathi viya cittaṃ. Gacchāmi tiṭṭhāmīti citte uppanne vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena gamanādīni pavattanti. Tato ‘‘satto gacchati, satto tiṭṭhati, ahaṃ gacchāmi, ahaṃ tiṭṭhāmī’’ti vohāramattaṃ hotīti. Tenāha –
船靠风力前行,箭靠弓弦之力射出;
怎么走,身体就怎么走;这个身体被风吹着走。
就像前面用经的方式讲的那样,这里也用心的经的方式来讲解。
被牵引操纵的身体机关,也能行走、站立、坐下。
这里到底有哪个众生,能离开因和缘而存在呢?
凭他自己的威神力,无论是站立还是行走。巴利
‘‘Nāvā mālutavegena, jiyāvegena tejanaṃ; Yathā yāti tathā kāyo, yāti vātāhato ayaṃ. Yantaṃ suttavaseneva, cittasuttavasenidaṃ; Payuttaṃ kāyayantampi, yāti ṭhāti nisīdati. Ko nāma ettha so satto, yo vinā hetupaccaye; Attano ānubhāvena, tiṭṭhe vā yadi vā vaje’’ti.
因此,当他这样观察行走等动作只是依因果条件而发生时,就能明白:行走时他知道“我在行走”,站立时、坐着时、躺着时,他也知道“我在站着”“我在坐着”“我在躺着”。应当这样理解。巴利
Tasmā evaṃ hetupaccayavaseneva pavattāni gamanādīni sallakkhento esa gacchanto vā gacchāmīti pajānāti, ṭhito vā, nisinno vā, sayāno vā sayānomhīti pajānātīti veditabbo.
无论身体以哪种方式摆好,他都清楚地知道它。这句话是总括性的说法。这里说的是:身体以哪种姿态安住,他就以那种方式清楚地知道它。身体以行走的姿态安住时,他知道自己在行走;身体以站立、坐着、躺卧的姿态安住时,他知道自己在站立、坐着、躺卧。巴利
Yathā yathā vā panassa kāyo paṇihito hoti, tathā tathā naṃ pajānātīti sabbasaṅgāhikavacanametaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yena yena vā ākārena tassa kāyo ṭhito hoti, tena tena naṃ pajānāti. Gamanākārena ṭhitaṃ gacchatīti pajānāti. Ṭhānanisajjāsayanākārena ṭhitaṃ sayānoti pajānātīti.
“于内”这句是说:像这样观察自己的四种威仪,于身随观身而住。“于外”是说:观察他人的四种威仪。“于内外”是说:有时观察自己的四种威仪,有时观察他人的四种威仪,于身随观身而住。至于“或随观集法”等,则应按照“由无明集而有色集”等(《无碍解道》1.49)的方法,以五种方式推求色蕴的集起与灭没。正是针对这一点,这里才说“或随观集法”等。“或者,他现起‘有身’之念”等,解说与前面所说的相同。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā catuiriyāpathapariggaṇhanena kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Bahiddhā vāti parassa vā catuiriyāpathapariggaṇhanena. Ajjhattabahiddhā vāti kālena attano, kālena parassa catuiriyāpathapariggaṇhanena kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vātiādīsu pana ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.49) nayena pañcahākārehi rūpakkhandhassa samudayo ca vayo ca nīharitabbo. Tañhi sandhāya idha ‘‘samudayadhammānupassī vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atthi kāyoti vā panassātiādi vuttasadisameva.
在这里,以把握四种威仪的念为苦谛,令它生起的先前渴爱为集谛,二者不再生起为灭谛,遍知苦、舍断集、以灭为所缘的圣道为道谛。这样依四谛逐步上进,最终证得寂灭——这就是一位把握四种威仪的比丘,直到证得阿拉汉果的出口门。巴利
Idha pana catuiriyāpathapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ , ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, dukkhaparijānano samudayapajahano nirodhārammaṇo ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavasena ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idamekassa catūiriyāpathapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
四正知品的注释巴利
Catusampajaññapabbavaṇṇanā
109 109. 这样按威仪把身随观分开讲完之后,现在要按四种正知来分开讲,所以又说“再者,比丘们……”等话。其中,“在前行时、在返回时”这里,“前行”指的是向前走,“返回”指的是转回来。这两者在四种威仪里都能找到。先说走的时候,身体向前移,就叫前行;转身往回走,就叫返回。站着的时候,就站在原地把身体向前倾,也叫前行;把身体向后仰,就叫返回。坐着的时候,就坐在那里朝座位的前方移动,也叫前行;朝座位的后方移动,就叫返回。躺卧的时候,也是同样的道理。巴利
109. Evaṃ iriyāpathavasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni catusampajaññavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha abhikkante paṭikkanteti ettha tāva abhikkantaṃ vuccati gamanaṃ. Paṭikkantaṃ nivattanaṃ. Tadubhayampi catūsu iriyāpathesu labbhati. Gamane tāva purato kāyaṃ abhiharanto abhikkamati nāma. Paṭinivattento paṭikkamati nāma. Ṭhānepi ṭhitakova kāyaṃ purato onāmento abhikkamati nāma. Pacchato apanāmento paṭikkamati nāma. Nisajjāyapi nisinnakova āsanassa purimaaṅgābhimukho saṃsaranto abhikkamati nāma. Pacchimaaṅgappadesaṃ pacchā saṃsaranto paṭikkamati nāma. Nipajjāyapi eseva nayo.
具足正知而行,意思是:以正知去做一切该做的事,或者说,正知本身就是他的行持。因为他无论在前进等任何动作中,都在运用正知,从来没有哪一刻是缺少正知的。其中,正知有四种:有益正知、适宜正知、行境正知、不痴正知。当想要前进的念头生起时,不是单凭念头就贸然走过去,而是先考量“我到这里去到底有没有利益”,把有没有利益弄清楚之后再行动,这就是有益正知。这里说的“利益”,是指通过瞻仰佛塔、瞻仰菩提树、拜见僧众、拜见长老、观察不净等而得到的法上的增长。因为见到佛塔或菩提树之后,以佛为所缘;或者见到僧众时,以僧众为所缘,生起欢喜心,接着观照它的坏灭,这样修观就能证得阿罗汉果。见到长老之后,依照他们的教导安住;或者见到不净之后,生起初禅,再观照它的坏灭,这样修观也能证得阿罗汉果。所以,这些瞻仰拜见是有利益的。不过有些人说:“从资具方面得到的增长也算是利益,因为那是为了资助梵行而受用的。”巴利
Sampajānakārī hotīti sampajaññena sabbakiccakārī, sampajaññameva vā kārī. So hi abhikkantādīsu sampajaññaṃ karoteva, na katthaci sampajaññavirahito hoti. Tattha sātthakasampajaññaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññanti catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ. Tattha abhikkamanacitte uppanne cittavaseneva agantvā ‘‘kiṃ nu me ettha gatena attho atthi natthī’’ti atthānatthaṃ pariggaṇhitvā atthapariggahaṇaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Tattha ca atthoti cetiyadassanabodhidassanasaṅghadassanatheradassanaasubhadassanādivasena dhammato vaḍḍhi. Cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā disvāpi hi buddhārammaṇaṃ saṅghadassanena saṅghārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ uppādetvā tadeva khayavayato sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. There disvā tesaṃ ovāde patiṭṭhāya asubhaṃ disvā tattha paṭhamajjhānaṃ uppādetvā tadeva khayavayato sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā etesaṃ dassanaṃ sātthakaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘āmisatopi vaḍḍhi atthoyeva, taṃ nissāya brahmacariyānuggahāya paṭipannattā’’ti vadanti.
在行走的时候,要先判断什么是适宜、什么是不适宜,把握适宜的部分,这就是适宜正知。比如,去看佛塔本身是有利益的。但如果佛塔举行大供养时,在十由旬、十二由旬范围内大众聚集起来,男女们都根据自己的财力盛装打扮,像画中的人偶一样到处走动,这时如果他对喜欢的对象生起贪心,对不喜欢的对象生起嗔恨,在不审察时生起愚痴,或者犯下身体接触的戒,或者生命和梵行出现障碍,那么那个地方就是不适宜的。如果没有上面说的这些障碍,就是适宜的。去看菩提树也是同样的道理。去看僧伽也有利益。但如果在村子里搭起大帐篷,让人们整夜听法,同样会出现前面说的大众聚集和障碍,那么那个地方就是不适宜的。没有障碍时,才是适宜的。去拜见有众多眷属围绕的长老,也是同样的道理。巴利
Tasmiṃ pana gamane sappāyāsappāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā sappāyapariggahaṇaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, cetiyadassanaṃ tāva sātthakaṃ. Sace pana cetiyassa mahāpūjāya dasadvādasayojanantare parisā sannipatanti. Attano vibhavānurūpaṃ itthiyopi purisāpi alaṅkatappaṭiyattā cittakammarūpakāni viya sañcaranti. Tatra cassa iṭṭhe ārammaṇe lobho, aniṭṭhe paṭigho, asamapekkhane moho uppajjati, kāyasaṃsaggāpattiṃ vā āpajjati, jīvitabrahmacariyānaṃ vā antarāyo hoti, evaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ asappāyaṃ hoti. Vuttappakāraantarāyābhāve sappāyaṃ. Bodhidassanepi eseva nayo. Saṅghadassanampi sātthaṃ. Sace pana antogāme mahāmaṇḍapaṃ kāretvā sabbarattiṃ dhammassavanaṃ kārentesu manussesu vuttappakāreneva janasannipāto ceva antarāyo ca hoti, evaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ asappāyaṃ. Antarāyābhāve sappāyaṃ. Mahāparisaparivārānaṃ therānaṃ dassanepi eseva nayo.
看见不净也是有好处的。为了说明这个道理,有这样一个故事:据说,有一位年轻的比丘带着一个沙弥去取齿木。沙弥离开道路走在前面,看见一具不净之物,由此生起了初禅。他以这初禅作为基础,观察诸行,证悟了三个果位,然后为了证取更高的道果而把握业处,停在那里。年轻比丘找不到他,就喊了一声:“沙弥!”沙弥心想:“从我出家那天起,还从来没有和比丘说过闲话。改天我再证取更高的殊胜吧。”于是回答说:“什么事,尊者?”比丘说“过来”,他应声就过来了,然后说:“尊者,请您沿着这条路走过去,到我刚才站的地方,朝东站一会儿,看一看。”比丘照做了,也同样证得了沙弥所证得的殊胜。就这样,同一个不净之相为两个人带来了利益。虽然见不净是有好处的,但对男人来说,女人的不净是不适宜的;而对女人来说,男人的不净也是不适宜的,唯有同类才是适宜的。像这样把握适宜,就叫作适宜正知。巴利
Asubhadassanampi sātthaṃ. Tadatthadīpanatthañca idaṃ vatthu – eko kira daharabhikkhu sāmaṇeraṃ gahetvā dantakaṭṭhatthāya gato. Sāmaṇero maggā okkamitvā purato gacchanto asubhaṃ disvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasanto tīṇi phalāni sacchikatvā uparimaggatthāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā aṭṭhāsi. Daharo taṃ apassanto ‘‘sāmaṇerā’’ti pakkosi. So ‘‘mayā pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya bhikkhunā saddhiṃ dve kathā nāma na kathitapubbā. Aññasmimpi divase uparivisesaṃ nibbattessāmī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘kiṃ, bhante’’ti paṭivacanaṃ adāsi. Ehīti ca vutte ekavacaneneva āgantvā ‘‘bhante, iminā tāva maggena gantvā mayā ṭhitokāse muhuttaṃ puratthābhimukho ṭhatvā olokethā’’ti āha. So tathā katvā tena pattavisesameva pāpuṇi. Evaṃ ekaṃ asubhaṃ dvinnaṃ janānaṃ atthāya jāyati. Evaṃ sātthampi panetaṃ purisassa mātugāmāsubhaṃ asappāyaṃ. Mātugāmassa ca purisāsubhaṃ sabhāgameva sappāyanti evaṃ sappāyapariggahaṇaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ nāma.
像这样,已经把握了“有益”和“适宜”之后,在三十八种业处中,选取合自己心意的业处作为行境,然后带着这个业处去托钵,在行走时也一直持着它——这就叫行境正知。为了说明这一点,应当知道有四种情况:有些比丘带出去但不带回来,有些比丘不带出去但带回来,有些比丘既不带出去也不带回来,有些比丘既带出去也带回来。巴利
Evaṃ pariggahitasātthasappāyassa pana aṭṭhatiṃsāya kammaṭṭhānesu attano cittarucitakammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ gocaraṃ uggahetvā bhikkhācāragocare taṃ gahetvā gamanaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ nāma. Tassāvibhāvatthaṃ idaṃ catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idhekacco bhikkhu harati na paccāharati , ekacco na harati paccāharati , ekacco neva harati na paccāharati, ekacco harati ca paccāharati ca.
其中,若有比丘白天通过经行和静坐,从能障碍善法的诸法中净化其心;夜里初夜分也同样以经行、静坐从障碍法中净化其心,中夜分躺下休息,后夜分又以静坐和经行度过;天还没亮就先做好塔院和菩提树院的义务,给菩提树浇水,备好饮用水和洗漱用水,然后受持并践行对阿阇梨、亲教师等的一切犍度义务。他料理好身体之后,进入住处,铺上两三个坐垫让身体暖和起来,专心用功于业处。到了托钵的时候,他起身,以业处为先,拿着钵和袈裟,从住处出来,一边作意业处一边走到塔院。如果修的是佛随念业处,他就不放下这个业处,直接进入塔院。如果修的是别的业处,他就站在台阶最下一级,像把手里拿着的东西先放下一样,把那个业处暂且搁下,然后缘取以佛为所缘生起的喜悦,登上塔院。如果是大塔,就右绕三圈,在四个地方礼拜;如果是小塔,也同样右绕,在八个地方礼拜。礼塔之后,到了菩提树院,即使只是持着钵,也要像佛陀世尊亲自在面前一样,表达最恭敬的礼敬,礼拜菩提树。他这样礼敬塔和菩提树之后,走到之前搁下业处的地方,像取回寄存的东西一样,重新提起原先放下的业处。走近村落时,以业处为先披好袈裟,进入村中乞食。巴利
Tattha yo bhikkhu divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāya āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṃ parisodhetvā tathā rattiyā paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ majjhime yāme seyyaṃ kappetvā pacchimayāmepi nisajjācaṅkamehi vītināmetvā pageva cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ katvā bodhirukkhe udakaṃ abhisiñcitvā pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā ācariyupajjhāyavattādīni sabbāni khandhakavattāni samādāya vattati. So sarīraparikammaṃ katvā senāsanaṃ pavisitvā dve tayo pallaṅke usumaṃ gāhāpento kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitvā bhikkhācāravelāya uṭṭhahitvā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva pattacīvaramādāya senāsanato nikkhamitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontova cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā sace buddhānussatikammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, taṃ avissajjetvāva cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ pavisati. Aññaṃ ce kammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sopānapādamūle ṭhatvā hatthena gahitabhaṇḍaṃ viya taṃ ṭhapetvā buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ gahetvā cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ āruyha mahantaṃ cetiyaṃ ce, tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā catūsu ṭhānesu vanditabbaṃ. Khuddakaṃ cetiyaṃ ce, tatheva padakkhiṇaṃ katvā aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vanditabbaṃ. Cetiyaṃ vanditvā bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ pattenāpi buddhassa bhagavato sammukhā viya nipaccakāraṃ dassetvā bodhi vanditabbo. So evaṃ cetiyañca bodhiñca vanditvā paṭisāmitaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā paṭisāmitabhaṇḍakaṃ hatthena gaṇhanto viya nikkhittakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gāmasamīpe kammaṭṭhānasīseneva cīvaraṃ pārupitvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisati.
这时,人们看见他,说“我们的尊者来了”,就上前迎接,接过钵,请他到食堂或家里坐下,给他粥喝。在饭还没吃完之前,他们一边给他洗脚、涂油,一边坐在他面前,或者问问题,或者想听法。即使他们不请他说法,义注师们也说:为了摄受大众,说法是应该做的。因为离开了业处的说法,根本就不存在。所以他以业处为核心来说法,以业处为核心来受用食物,做完随喜之后,在人们送他回去时,他也跟着众人从村里出来,到了那里就请他们回去,自己上路。这时,那些比他先出村、在村外吃完饭的沙弥和年轻比丘们看见他,就上前迎接,接过他的钵和衣。巴利
Atha naṃ manussā disvā ‘‘ayyo no āgato’’ti paccuggantvā pattaṃ gahetvā āsanasālāyaṃ vā gehe vā nisīdāpetvā yāguṃ datvā yāva bhattaṃ na niṭṭhāti, tāva pāde dhovitvā telena makkhetvā purato nisīditvā pañhaṃ vā pucchanti, dhammaṃ vā sotukāmā honti. Sacepi na kathāpenti, janasaṅgahatthaṃ dhammakathā nāma kātabbāyevāti aṭṭhakathācariyā vadanti. Dhammakathā hi kammaṭṭhānavinimuttā nāma natthi . Tasmā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva dhammaṃ kathetvā kammaṭṭhānasīseneva āhāraṃ paribhuñjitvā anumodanaṃ katvā nivattiyamānehipi manussehi anugatova gāmato nikkhamitvā tattheva nivattetvā maggaṃ paṭipajjati. Atha naṃ puretaraṃ nikkhamitvā bahigāme katabhattakiccā sāmaṇeradaharabhikkhū disvā paccuggantvā pattacīvaramassa gaṇhanti.
据说,古代比丘看着对方的脸说“这不是我们的戒师、不是我们的老师”,却仍然尽义务,他们只按当下实际需要去做。那些比丘就问那个人:“尊者,这些人是您的什么亲属?是母方的亲戚,还是父方的亲戚?”他反问:“你们是看到了什么才这样问?”他们回答:“我们看到他们对您很有亲爱和敬重。”他就说:“贤友,连父母都难以做到的事,他们都为我们做了。我们的钵和衣,也都是他们的东西。靠他们的威德,我们从不曾在恐惧中感到恐惧,也不曾在饥饿中感到饥饿。像这样帮助我们的人,再也找不到别的了。”他这样一边讲说他们的功德,一边往前走。这就叫作“带出去而不带回来”。巴利
Porāṇā bhikkhū kira ‘‘na amhākaṃ upajjhāyo ācariyo’’ti mukhaṃ ulloketvā vattaṃ karonti. Sampattaparicchedeneva karonti. Te taṃ pucchanti ‘‘bhante, ete manussā tumhākaṃ kiṃ honti mātupakkhato sambandhā pitipakkhato’’ti. Kiṃ disvā pucchathāti. Tumhesu etesaṃ pemaṃ bahumānanti. Āvuso, yaṃ mātāpitūhipi dukkaraṃ, taṃ ete amhākaṃ karonti, pattacīvarampi no etesaṃ santakameva, etesaṃ ānubhāvena neva bhaye bhayaṃ, na chātake chātakaṃ jānāma, edisā nāma amhākaṃ upakārino natthīti tesaṃ guṇe kathento gacchati, ayaṃ vuccati harati na paccāharatīti.
如果有人在清晨就按照前面说的方式履行义务,他体内的业生火界却燃烧起来,于是它舍弃无执受的状态,转而执取有执受的状态,汗水从身体流出来,他无法进入业处之道。那么,他就在清晨早早拿起钵和衣,迅速去礼敬佛塔,趁牛群出村的时刻进入村庄乞粥。得到粥后,他到斋堂去喝。这时,只喝下两三口,他体内的业生火界就舍弃有执受的状态,转而执取无执受的状态。就像用一百壶水沐浴一样,火界的灼热平息下来,他便以业处为先喝完粥,洗净钵和脸,在两餐之间的时间里把业处放在心上,再到其余地方乞食,以业处为先进食。从那时起,他让业处一环扣一环地现起,带着业处回来。这就叫作“不带出去而带回来”。这样的比丘,喝了粥之后开始修观,在佛陀的教法中证得阿罗汉果的,数量多到无法计算。仅在斯里兰卡岛上,各个村庄的斋堂里,几乎找不到一个座位,是没有比丘喝了粥之后证得阿罗汉果而坐过的。巴利
Yassa pana pageva vuttappakāraṃ vattapaṭipattiṃ karontassa kammajatejo pajjalati, anupādinnakaṃ muñcitvā upādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti, sarīrato sedā muccanti, kammaṭṭhānavīthiṃ nārohati, so pageva pattacīvaramādāya vegasāva cetiyaṃ vanditvā gorūpānaṃ nikkhamanavelāyameva gāmaṃ yāgubhikkhāya pavisitvā yāguṃ labhitvā āsanasālaṃ gantvā pivati. Athassa dvattikkhattuṃ ajjhoharaṇamatteneva kammajatejo upādinnakaṃ muñcitvā anupādinnakaṃ gaṇhāti. Ghaṭasatena nhāto viya tejodhātupariḷāhanibbāpanaṃ patvā kammaṭṭhānasīsena yāguṃ paribhuñjitvā pattañca mukhañca dhovitvā antarābhatte kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikatvā avasesaṭṭhāne piṇḍāya caritvā kammaṭṭhānasīsena āhāraṃ paribhuñjitvā tato paṭṭhāya poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ upaṭṭhahamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva āgacchati, ayaṃ vuccati na harati paccāharatīti. Edisā ca bhikkhū yāguṃ pivitvā vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā buddhasāsane arahattaṃ pattā nāma gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā, sīhaḷadīpeyeva tesu tesu gāmesu āsanasālāyaṃ na taṃ āsanaṃ atthi, yattha yāguṃ pivitvā arahattappattabhikkhū natthīti.
如果有人放逸而住,放弃自己的责任,破坏一切应做的义务,内心被五种心的荒芜和五种心的系缚缠住,连“有业处这回事”都不作想,就进入村落乞食,与在家人以不适当、不随顺的交往而交往、混在一起,行走、饮食之后,空空地出来,这就叫作既不带出去,也不带回来。巴利
Yo pana pamādavihārī hoti nikkhittadhuro, sabbavattāni bhinditvā pañcavidhacetokhilavinibandhacitto viharanto ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthī’’tipi saññaṃ akatvā gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā ananulomikena gihisaṃsaggena saṃsaṭṭho caritvā ca bhuñjitvā ca tuccho nikkhamati, ayaṃ vuccati neva harati na paccāharatīti.
所谓“带出去又带回来”,应当从去回往返的规矩来理解。确实,那些想为自己求得解脱的善男子,在教法里出家之后,十人、二十人、三十人、四十人、五十人乃至上百人住在一起,共同立下约定而住:“贤友们,你们不是为了躲债、不是因为害怕、也不是为了谋生才出家,你们是为了从苦中解脱才在这里出家。所以,走路时生起的烦恼,就在走路时压伏它;站着时、坐着时、躺着时生起的烦恼,就在站着时、坐着时、躺着时压伏它。”他们这样立下约定后,去托钵的路上,在半牛呼、一牛呼、半牛吼、一牛吼的距离之间,都成了像石头一样的人——也就是说,他们以那个标记为所缘,一边作意业处一边走。如果谁在走路时生起烦恼,他就在那里压伏它。如果压伏不了,他就停下来站着。后面跟上来的人也跟着停下。于是他责备自己:“这位比丘知道我心里生起了念头,我这样太不相称了。”然后增长观照,就在那里证入圣者的境界。如果还是做不到,他就坐下。后面跟上来的人也跟着坐下,道理一样。即使还不能证入圣者境界,他也先镇伏了那个烦恼,一边作意业处一边走,绝不会以与业处分离的心抬起脚来。如果抬起了,他就转身回到刚才走过的地方——就像住在阿林达卡的大富沙天长老那样。巴利
Yo panāyaṃ harati ca paccāharati cāti vutto, so gatapaccāgatikavattavasena veditabbo. Attakāmā hi kulaputtā sāsane pabbajitvā dasapi vīsampi tiṃsampi cattālīsampi paññāsampi satampi ekato vasantā katikavattaṃ katvā viharanti, āvuso, tumhe na iṇaṭṭhā na bhayaṭṭā na jīvikāpakatā pabbajitā, dukkhā muccitukāmā panettha pabbajitā, tasmā gamane uppannakilesaṃ gamaneyeva niggaṇhatha, ṭhāne, nisajjāyaṃ, sayane uppannakilesaṃ sayaneyeva niggaṇhathāti. Te evaṃ katikavattaṃ katvā bhikkhācāraṃ gacchantā aḍḍhausabhausabhaaḍḍhagāvutagāvutantaresu pāsāṇā honti. Tāya saññāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontāva gacchanti. Sace kassaci gamane kileso uppajjati, tattheva naṃ niggaṇhāti. Tathā asakkonto tiṭṭhati. Athassa pacchato āgacchantopi tiṭṭhati. So ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu tuyhaṃ uppannavitakkaṃ jānāti, ananucchavikaṃ te eta’’nti attānaṃ paṭicodetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā tattheva ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati. Tathā asakkonto nisīdati. Athassa pacchato āgacchantopi nisīdatīti soyeva nayo. Ariyabhūmiṃ okkamituṃ asakkontopi taṃ kilesaṃ vikkhambhetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontova gacchati. Na kammaṭṭhānavippayuttena cittena pādaṃ uddharati. Uddharati ce, paṭinivattetvā purimapadesaṃ yeva eti āḷindakavāsī mahāphussadevatthero viya.
据说,他整整十九年都在履行往返行持,就这样安住着。路上的人们在耕地、播种、打谷、做各种活计时,看见长老那样走来走去,就议论说:“这位长老怎么一次次折返又走,是迷路了,还是忘了什么东西?”他对此毫不在意,只是一心以与业处相应的心修习沙门法,在二十年内证得了阿罗汉果。就在证果那天,住在经行道尽头的一位天神用手指点亮了灯,站在那里。四大天王、帝释天,以及娑婆主梵天,都前来随侍。林住的长老摩诃帝须看到那片光明,第二天就问:“昨夜在尊者身边出现了光明,那是什么光明?”长老想遮掩过去,就说:“所谓光明,也可能是灯光,也可能是宝珠之光……”诸如此类。对方于是坚持说:“请您不要隐瞒!”他这才承认说“是的”,然后讲述了经过,就像住在卡拉瓦利曼达巴的玛哈那嘎长老一样。巴利
So kira ekūnavīsativassāni gatapaccāgatikavattaṃ pūrento eva vihāsi. Manussāpi sudaṃ antarāmagge kasantā ca vapantā ca maddantā ca kammāni ca karontā theraṃ tathāgacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ thero punappunaṃ nivattitvā gacchati. Kiṃ nu kho maggamūḷho udāhu kiñci pamuṭṭho’’ti samullapanti. So taṃ anādiyitvā kammaṭṭhānayuttacitteneva samaṇadhammaṃ karonto vīsativassabbhantare arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Arahattappattadivaseyevassa caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ adhivatthā devatā aṅgulīhi dīpaṃ ujjāletvā aṭṭhāsi. Cattāropi mahārājāno sakko ca devānamindo brahmā ca sahampati upaṭṭhānaṃ agamaṃsu. Tañca obhāsaṃ disvā vanavāsīmahātissatthero taṃ dutiyadivase pucchi ‘‘rattibhāge āyasmato santike obhāso ahosi, kiṃ so obhāso’’ti . Thero vikkhepaṃ karonto ‘‘obhāso nāma dīpobhāsopi hoti maṇiobhāsopī’’ti evamādimāha. Tato paṭicchādetha tumheti nibaddho āmāti paṭijānitvā ārocesi kālavallimaṇḍapavāsī mahānāgatthero viya ca.
据说,他为了圆满履行往返行仪,最初这样立誓:我要先礼敬世尊的大精进。于是决定在七年里只做站立和经行。后来,他又用十六年圆满履行往返行仪,证得了阿罗汉果。他抬脚时,心始终与业处相应;如果抬脚时心与业处不相应,他就把脚收回来。走到靠近村子的地方,到了会让人起疑“那是牛还是出家人”的地段,他就停下来,穿好袈裟,从腋下取水洗净钵,然后含一口水在嘴里。为什么要这样做呢?因为怕有人前来布施或礼敬,自己仅仅说一句“愿你们长寿”,就会让业处散乱。如果被人问到“尊者,今天初几”,或者问日期、比丘人数等问题,他就先把水咽下去,然后才回答。如果没有人问日期之类的事,他就在离开村子时,在村门口把水吐掉再走,就像在卡拉巴提塔寺雨安居的五十位比丘一样。巴利
Sopi kira gatapaccāgatikavattaṃ pūrento paṭhamaṃ tāva bhagavato mahāpadhānaṃ pūjessāmīti satta vassāni ṭhānacaṅkamanameva adhiṭṭhāsi. Puna soḷasa vassāni gatapaccāgatikavattaṃ pūretvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. So kammaṭṭhānayutteneva cittena pādaṃ uddharanto viyuttena uddhate paṭinivattanto gāmassa samīpaṃ gantvā ‘‘gāvī nu pabbajito nū’’ti āsaṅkanīyapadese ṭhatvā cīvaraṃ pārupitvā kacchakantarato udakena pattaṃ dhovitvā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ karoti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Mā me bhikkhaṃ dātuṃ vandituṃ vā āgate manusse dīghāyukā hothāti vacanamattenāpi kammaṭṭhānavikkhepo ahosīti. Ajja, bhante, katimīti divasaṃ vā bhikkhugaṇanaṃ vā pañhe vā pucchito pana udakaṃ gilitvā ārocesi. Sace divasādipucchakā na honti, nikkhamanavelāya gāmadvāre niṭṭhubhitvāva yāti kalambatitthavihāre vassūpagatapaññāsabhikkhū viya.
据说,他们在阿沙荼月满月那天立下约定:“没有证得阿罗汉果之前,彼此不交谈。”进村乞食时,他们先含一口水再进去。有人问起日期等事,他们就按前面说的方式应对。村里的人看到他们吐掉的水,就知道:“今天来了一位”“今天来了两位”。于是他们心想:“这些人是不跟我们说话呢,还是彼此之间也不说话?如果彼此都不说话,那肯定是闹了矛盾。走,我们去让他们互相道歉,和好如初。”于是大家一起来到精舍,却发现五十位比丘中,没有两个人待在同一个地方。这时,其中有个眼力好的人说:“诸位,爱吵架的人那里会是这个样子!你看,塔院和菩提树院都扫得干干净净,扫帚摆得整整齐齐,饮用水和洗用水也都准备得妥妥当当。”那些人便从那里回去了。而那些比丘就在雨安居的三个月内证得了阿罗汉果,并在大自恣日举行了清净自恣。巴利
Te kira āsāḷhīpuṇṇamāyaṃ katikavattaṃ akaṃsu ‘‘arahattaṃ appatvā aññamaññaṃ na ālapissāmā’’ti. Gāmañca piṇḍāya pavisantā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ katvā pavisiṃsu. Divasādīsu pucchitesu vuttanayeneva paṭipajjiṃsu. Tattha manussā niṭṭhubhanaṃ disvā jāniṃsu, ‘‘ajjeko āgato, ajja dve’’ti. Evañca cintesuṃ ‘‘kiṃ nu kho ete amhehiyeva saddhiṃ na sallapanti, udāhu aññamaññampi, yadi aññamaññaṃ na sallapanti, addhā vivādajātā bhavissanti, etha ne aññamaññaṃ khamāpessāmā’’ti sabbe vihāraṃ gantvā paññāsāya bhikkhusu dvepi bhikkhū ekokāse nāddasaṃsu. Tato yo tesu cakkhumā puriso, so āha ‘‘na bho kalahakārakānaṃ okāso īdiso hoti, susammaṭṭhaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ bodhiyaṅgaṇaṃ, sunikkhittā sammajjaniyo, sūpaṭṭhapitaṃ pānīyaṃ paribhojanīya’’nti. Te tatova nivattā, tepi bhikkhū antotemāseyeva arahattaṃ patvā mahāpavāraṇāya visuddhipavāraṇaṃ pavāresuṃ.
就像住在咖拉瓦利曼达巴的大那伽长老,以及住在咖兰巴提塔寺雨安居的比丘们那样,他凭着与业处相应的心抬起脚来,走到村子附近,漱了口,观察各条街道,哪条街上没有酒鬼、赌徒之类惹事的人,也没有暴躁的大象、马匹之类,他就走那条街。在那里挨家挨户乞食时,他并不像赶时间的人那样快步走,因为靠快步走并没有什么“乞食头陀支”。走到路面不平的地方,他就像水车一样,稳稳当当地走。每进一家,为了看清对方是想布施还是不想布施,他会等到合适的时机,然后接受食物。之后,不管是在村内、村外,还是回到寺院,他都会找一个舒适合适的地方坐下,把心放在业处上,对食物生起厌逆想,并以“像车轴油”“像涂疮的药”“像自己孩子的肉”等方式来审视它,然后具足八种条件地吃下食物——不是为了玩乐,不是为了骄傲,不是为了打扮,不是为了装饰。吃完饭后,做完喝水、洗手等事,稍微休息一下,消除吃饭后的疲劳。然后,就像午前一样,午后也这样修行;就像初夜一样,后夜也一心专注于业处。这就叫做“持去持回”。巴利
Evaṃ kālavallimaṇḍapavāsī mahānāgatthero viya kalambatitthavihāre vassūpagatabhikkhū viya ca kammaṭṭhānayutteneva cittena pādaṃ uddharanto gāmasamīpaṃ patvā udakagaṇḍūsaṃ katvā vīthiyo sallakkhetvā yattha surāsoṇḍadhuttādayo kalahakārakā caṇḍahatthiassādayo vā natthi, taṃ vīthiṃ paṭipajjati. Tattha ca piṇḍāya caramāno na turitaturito viya javena gacchati. Na hi javena piṇḍapātiyadhutaṅgaṃ nāma kiñci atthi. Visamabhūmibhāgappattaṃ pana udakasakaṭaṃ viya niccalo hutvā gacchati. Anugharaṃ paviṭṭho ca taṃ dātukāmaṃ vā adātukāmaṃ vā sallakkhetuṃ tadanurūpaṃ kālaṃ āgamento bhikkhaṃ gahetvā antogāme vā bahigāme vā vihārameva vā āgantvā yathāphāsuke patirūpe okāse nisīditvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaronto āhāre paṭikūlasaññaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā akkhabbhañjanavaṇalepanaputtamaṃsūpamāvasena naṃ paccavekkhanto aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ āhāraṃ āhāreti, neva davāya na madāya na maṇḍanāya na vibhūsanāya. Bhuttāvī ca udakakiccaṃ katvā muhuttaṃ bhattakilamathaṃ paṭippassambhetvā yathā purebhattaṃ, evaṃ pacchābhattaṃ. Yathā purimayāmaṃ, evaṃ pacchimayāmañca kammaṭṭhānameva manasi karoti, ayaṃ vuccati harati ca paccāharati cāti.
不过,如果他在完成这种被称为“持去持回”的往返修行时,具备了依止条件,那么他会在青年时期就证得阿罗汉果。如果青年时期没有证得,就在中年时期证得。如果中年时期没有证得,就在晚年时期证得。如果晚年时期没有证得,就在临命终时证得。如果临命终时没有证得,就往生为天子后证得。如果往生为天子后也没有证得,就在无佛出世的时代投生,亲证辟支菩提。如果没有亲证辟支菩提,那么在遇到佛陀住世时,他或者成为速疾通达者,就像婆希亚·达鲁吉里亚长老;或者成为大智慧者,就像舍利弗长老;或者成为大神通者,就像大目犍连长老;或者成为持头陀支者,就像大迦叶长老;或者成为具天眼者,就像阿那律长老;或者成为持律者,就像优波离长老;或者成为说法者,就像满慈子长老;或者成为林野住者,就像离婆多长老;或者成为多闻者,就像阿难长老;或者成为乐于修学者,就像佛子罗睺罗长老。这样一来,在这四种分类当中,凡是能持去又能持回的人,他的行境正知就达到了顶点。巴利
Idaṃ pana haraṇapaccāharaṇasaṅkhātaṃ gatapaccāgatikavattaṃ pūrento yadi upanissayasampanno hoti. Paṭhamavaye eva arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. No ce paṭhamavaye pāpuṇāti, atha majjhimavaye. No ce majjhimavaye pāpuṇāti, atha pacchimavaye. No ce pacchimavaye pāpuṇāti, atha maraṇasamaye. No ce maraṇasamaye pāpuṇāti, atha devaputto hutvā. No ce devaputto hutvā pāpuṇāti, anuppanne buddhe nibbatto paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti. No ce paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti, atha buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve khippābhiñño vā hoti seyyathāpi thero bāhiyo dārucīriyo, mahāpañño vā seyyathāpi thero sāriputto, mahiddhiko vā seyyathāpi thero mahāmoggallāno, dhutaṅgadharo vā seyyathāpi thero mahākassapo, dibbacakkhuko vā seyyathāpi thero anuruddho, vinayadharo vā seyyathāpi thero upāli, dhammakathiko vā seyyathāpi thero puṇṇo mantāṇiputto, āraññiko vā seyyathāpi thero revato, bahussuto vā seyyathāpi thero ānando, sikkhākāmo vā seyyathāpi thero rāhulo buddhaputtoti. Iti imasmiṃ catukke yvāyaṃ harati ca paccāharati ca, tassa gocarasampajaññaṃ sikhāpattaṃ hoti.
在前进、后退等动作中不迷惑,就是不痴正知。这应该这样理解:在这里,比丘前进或后退时,不像愚痴的凡夫那样在前进等动作中迷惑,以为“自我在前进,前进是由自我产生的”,或者“我在前进,前进是由我产生的”。他不迷惑:当“我前进”这个心念生起时,与那个心同时生起的、由心生起的风界,正在产生身表。也就是说,由于心所引发的风界的作用,这个被称为身体的骨骼聚合体在前进。当他这样前进时,每抬起一只脚,地界和水界这两界变得微弱、无力,另外两界——火界和风界——则变得强盛、有力。向前移脚、越过脚时也是这样。放下脚时,火界和风界变得微弱、无力,另外两界——地界和水界——则变得强盛、有力。踏脚、压脚时也是这样。其中,抬脚时生起的色法和非色法,到不了向前移脚那个阶段;向前移脚时生起的法,到不了越过脚那个阶段;越过脚时生起的法,到不了放脚那个阶段;放脚时生起的法,到不了踏脚那个阶段;踏脚时生起的法,到不了压脚那个阶段。就在每一个地方,一节一节、一段一段、一部分一部分地,像撒在热锅上的芝麻粒一样,噼噼啪啪地碎裂。那么,到底有哪一个单一的“什么”在前进呢?又是谁的单一前进呢?从究竟意义上说,其实只是诸界的行走、诸界的站立、诸界的坐下、诸界的躺卧。因为在每一个部分中,与色法一起——巴利
Abhikkamādīsu pana asammuyhanaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ. Taṃ evaṃ veditabbaṃ – idha bhikkhu abhikkamanto vā paṭikkamanto vā yathā andhaputhujjanā abhikkamādīsu ‘‘attā abhikkamati, attanā abhikkamo nibbattito’’ti vā ‘‘ahaṃ abhikkamāmi, mayā abhikkamo nibbattito’’ti vā sammuyhanti. Tathā asammuyhanto ‘‘abhikkamāmī’’ti citte uppajjamāne teneva cittena saddhiṃ cittasamuṭṭhānā vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati, iti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasena ayaṃ kāyasammato aṭṭhisaṅghāto abhikkamati, tassevaṃ abhikkamato ekekapāduddharaṇe pathavīdhātu āpodhātūti dve dhātuyo omattā honti mandā, itarā dve adhimattā honti balavatiyo, tathā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesu. Vossajjane tejovāyodhātuyo omattā honti mandā, itarā dve adhimattā honti balavatiyo. Tathā sannikkhepanasannirumbhanesu. Tattha uddharaṇe pavattā rūpārūpadhammā atiharaṇaṃ na pāpuṇanti. Tathā atiharaṇe pavattā vītiharaṇaṃ, vītiharaṇe pavattā vossajjanaṃ, vossajjane pavattā sannikkhepanaṃ, sannikkhepane pavattā sannirumbhanaṃ na pāpuṇanti. Tattha tattheva pabbaṃ pabbaṃ sandhi sandhi odhi odhi hutvā tattakapāle pakkhittatilāni viya paṭapaṭāyantā bhijjanti. Tattha ko eko abhikkamati? Kassa vā ekassa abhikkamanaṃ? Paramatthato hi dhātūnaṃyeva gamanaṃ, dhātūnaṃ ṭhānaṃ, dhātūnaṃ nisajjanaṃ, dhātūnaṃ sayanaṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiñhi koṭṭhāse saddhiṃ rūpena –
一个心识生起,另一个心识灭去;
无间断地相续流转,就像河流的水流一样持续不断。
像这样,在前进等动作中不迷乱,就叫作不迷乱正知。
“前进、后退时都保持正知而行”这一句的含义就讲完了。巴利
Aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ, aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhati; Avīcimanusambandho, nadīsotova vattatīti. Evaṃ abhikkamādīsu asammuyhanaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ nāmāti; Niṭṭhito abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hotīti padassa attho;
在这里,“观看”是指向前方看,“观察”是指向旁边看。另外,还有向下看、向上看、向后看等,按看的方式分别叫下视、上视、后视,但这些在这里没有采用。这里只是按照适宜性选取了这两种;或者说,用这一方式,它们全部也都被涵盖在内了。巴利
Ālokite vilokiteti ettha pana ālokitaṃ nāma purato pekkhanaṃ. Vilokitaṃ nāma anudisāpekkhanaṃ. Aññānipi heṭṭhā upari pacchato pekkhanavasena olokitaullokitāpalokitāni nāma honti, tāni idha na gahitāni. Sāruppavasena pana imāneva dve gahitāni, iminā vā mukhena sabbānipi tāni gahitānevāti.
在这里,当“我要看”这个念头在心里生起时,不单凭心的力量去看,而能把握其中的意义,这就是有义正知。应当以尊者难陀作为身证的例子来理解这一点。世尊确实这样说过:“比丘们,如果难陀要看向东方,他会先以全部的心作意,然后才看向东方。当他这样看向东方时,贪欲和忧恼等恶不善法不会随流渗入——这样,他在其中就是正知者。比丘们,如果难陀要看向西方、北方、南方、上方、下方、隅方,他会先以全部的心作意,然后才看向该方向。当他这样看向时……他也是正知者。”巴利
Tattha ‘‘ālokessāmī’’ti citte uppanne cittavaseneva anoloketvā atthapariggahaṇaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Taṃ āyasmantaṃ nandaṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘sace, bhikkhave, nandassa puratthimā disā āloketabbā hoti, sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā nando puratthimaṃ disaṃ āloketi, evaṃ me puratthimaṃ disaṃ ālokayato na abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyunti iti so tattha sampajāno hoti, sace, bhikkhave, nandassa pacchimā disā, uttarā disā, dakkhiṇā disā, uddhaṃ, adho, anudisā āloketabbā hoti, sabbaṃ cetaso samannāharitvā nando anudisaṃ āloketi. Evaṃ me anudisaṃ ālokayato…pe… sampajāno hotī’’ti (a. ni. 8.9).
另外,在这里也应当依照前面讲过的“瞻仰塔庙”等例子,来理解有益和适宜这两点。至于行境正知,就是不舍离业处。因此,修习蕴、界、处这类业处的人,应当依自己的业处来观察;修习遍业处等的人,则应当以业处为首要来观察。内在并没有一个叫做“观看者”或“观察者”的自我。然而,当“我要看”这个心念生起时,与那个心同时生起、由心所产生的风界,就会引发表色。于是,仅仅依靠心所作的风界的推动,下眼睑向下沉,上眼睑向上抬,并没有任何人用机关把它撑开。接着,眼识就生起,完成“看”的作用。像这样清楚地了知,在这里就叫做不迷乱正知。巴利
Apica idhāpi pubbe vuttacetiyadassanādivaseneva sātthakatā ca sappāyatā ca veditabbā. Kammaṭṭhānassa pana avijahanameva gocarasampajaññaṃ. Tasmā khandhadhātuāyatanakammaṭṭhānikehi attano kammaṭṭhānavaseneva, kasiṇādikammaṭṭhānikehi vā pana kammaṭṭhānasīseneva ālokanavilokanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Abbhantare attā nāma āloketā vā viloketā vā natthi, ālokessāmīti pana citte uppajjamāne teneva cittena saddhiṃ cittasamuṭṭhānā vāyodhātu viññattiṃ janayamānā uppajjati. Iti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravaseneva heṭṭhimaṃ akkhidalaṃ adho sīdati, uparimaṃ uddhaṃ laṅgheti, koci yantakena vivaranto nāma natthi, tato cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ sādhentaṃ uppajjatīti. Evaṃ sampajānanaṃ panettha asammohasampajaññaṃ nāma.
另外,这里的不迷乱正知,还应从根本遍知、外来、暂时这几个方面来理解。先说依根本遍知——巴利
Apica mūlapariññāāgantukatāvakālikabhāvavasenapettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Mūlapariññāvasena tāva –
有分、转向,以及看、领受;
推度、确定,第七是速行。巴利
Bhavaṅgāvajjanañceva, dassanaṃ sampaṭicchanaṃ; Santīraṇaṃ voṭṭhabbanaṃ, javanaṃ bhavati sattamaṃ.
在这里,有分心正在完成投生有的支分作用时持续运转。它被转向之后,唯作意界完成转向作用;它灭去之后,眼识完成看的作用;它灭去之后,异熟意界完成领受作用;它灭去之后,异熟意识界完成推度作用;它灭去之后,唯作意识界完成确定作用;它灭去之后,速行生起七次。在这其中,即使第一速行心,也不会以贪、嗔、痴的方式生起“这是女人”“这是男人”这样的注视与打量。第二速行心也一样……乃至第七速行心也一样。但是,当这些速行心像战场上的士兵一样,因上下胜负而溃散倒下时,才会以贪等的方式生起“这是女人”“这是男人”这样的注视与打量。如此,在这里首先应依根本遍知来了知不迷乱正知。巴利
Tattha bhavaṅgaṃ upapattibhavassa aṅgakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ pavattati, taṃ āvaṭṭetvā kiriyamanodhātu āvajjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, tannirodhā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ , tannirodhā vipākamanodhātu sampaṭicchanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, tannirodhā vipākamanoviññāṇadhātu santīraṇakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, tannirodhā kiriyamanoviññāṇadhātu voṭṭhabbapanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā, tannirodhā sattakkhattuṃ javanaṃ javati. Tattha paṭhamajavanepi ‘‘ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena ālokitavilokitaṃ na hoti. Dutiyajavanepi…pe… sattamajavanepi. Etesu pana yuddhamaṇḍale yodhesu viya heṭṭhupariyavasena bhijjitvā patitesu ‘‘ayaṃ itthī, ayaṃ puriso’’ti rajjanādivasena ālokitavilokitaṃ hoti. Evaṃ tāvettha mūlapariññāvasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在眼门,当色境出现在面前时,有分心开始波动,随后转向等心各自完成自己的作用,生起又灭去,到最后速行心生起。这个速行心就像一位客人,来到以先前生起的转向等心为家人的眼门这个家里做客。好比一个为求取某物而走进别人家的客人,如果家里的主人全都默不作声地坐着,他却发号施令,那是不合适的。同样,在以转向等心为家人的眼门中,即使转向等心都没有染着、没有嗔恨、没有迷乱时,速行心却生起染着、嗔恨、迷乱,也是不合适的。这样,应当从“客人”的角度来理解不迷乱正知。巴利
Cakkhudvāre pana rūpe āpāthagate bhavaṅgacalanato uddhaṃ sakakiccaṃ nipphādanavasena āvajjanādīsu uppajjitvā niruddhesu avasāne javanaṃ uppajjati. Taṃ pubbe uppannānaṃ āvajjanādīnaṃ gehabhūte cakkhudvāre āgantukapuriso viya hoti. Tassa yathā paragehe kiñci yācituṃ paviṭṭhassa āgantukapurisassa gehasāmikesu tuṇhīmāsinesu āṇākaraṇaṃ na yuttaṃ. Evaṃ āvajjanādīnaṃ gehabhūte cakkhudvāre āvajjanādīsupi arajjantesu adussantesu amuyhantesu ca rajjanadussanamuyhanaṃ ayuttanti evaṃ āgantukabhāvavasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在眼门中,那些以确定心为最后阶段而生起的心,连同与它们相应的心所法,就在各自生起的地方坏灭,彼此看不到对方,所以它们是短暂、只维持一刹那的。在这里,就像在一间屋子里,所有人都已经死了,只剩下一个人也注定在那一刹那就死去,那么这个人对歌舞等生起兴趣,显然是不合适的;同样,在同一个眼门中,转向等心连同相应法在各自生起的地方坏灭后,只剩下同样注定在那一刹那就要灭去的速行心,如果这个速行心以贪染、嗔恨、迷乱的方式去耽著,也是不合适的。这样,应当从“只维持一刹那”的角度来理解不迷乱正知。巴利
Yāni pana tāni cakkhudvāre voṭṭhabbapanapariyosānāni cittāni uppajjanti, tāni saddhiṃ sampayuttadhammehi tattha tattheva bhijjanti, aññamaññaṃ na passantīti ittarāni tāvakālikāni honti. Tattha yathā ekasmiṃ ghare sabbesu mānusakesu matesu avasesassa ekassa taṅkhaṇeññeva maraṇadhammassa na yuttā naccagītādīsu abhirati nāma, evameva ekadvāre sasampayuttesu āvajjanādīsu tattha tattheva matesu avasesassa taṅkhaṇeññeva maraṇadhammassa javanassāpi rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena abhirati nāma na yuttāti evaṃ tāvakālikabhāvavasena asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
另外,还可以通过观察蕴、处、界、缘来了知这种不迷乱的正知。
在这里,眼和色是色蕴,看是识蕴,与看相应的受是受蕴,想是想蕴,触等是行蕴。这样,当这五蕴聚合在一起时,才出现看和打量。那么在这里,是谁在单独地看?是谁在单独地打量?
同样,眼是眼处,色是色处,看是意处,受等相应法是法处。这样,当这四处聚合在一起时,才出现看和打量。那么在这里,是谁在单独地看?是谁在单独地打量?
同样,眼是眼界,色是色界,看是眼识界,与看相应的受等是法界。这样,当这四界聚合在一起时,才出现看和打量。那么在这里,是谁在单独地看?是谁在单独地打量?
同样,眼是依止缘,色是所缘缘,转向是无间缘、等无间缘、亲依止缘、无有缘、离去缘,光是亲依止缘,受等是俱生缘。这样,当这些缘聚合在一起时,才出现看和打量。那么在这里,是谁在单独地看?是谁在单独地打量?
如此,通过观察蕴、处、界、缘,在这里也应当了知不迷乱的正知。巴利
Apica khandhāyatanadhātupaccayapaccavekkhaṇavasenapetaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha hi cakkhu ceva rūpañca rūpakkhandho, dassanaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, phassādikā saṅkhārakkhandho. Evametesaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi? Tathā cakkhu cakkhāyatanaṃ, rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ, dassanaṃ manāyatanaṃ, vedanādayo sampayuttadhammā dhammāyatanaṃ. Evametesaṃ catunnaṃ āyatanānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi? Tathā cakkhu cakkhudhātu, rūpaṃ rūpadhātu, dassanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇadhātu, taṃsampayuttā vedanādayo dhammadhātu. Evametāsaṃ catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi? Tathā cakkhu nissayapaccayo, rūpaṃ ārammaṇapaccayo, āvajjanaṃ anantarasamanantarūpanissayanatthivigatapaccayo, āloko upanissayapaccayo vedanādayo sahajātapaccayo. Evametesaṃ paccayānaṃ samavāye ālokanavilokanaṃ paññāyati. Tattha ko eko āloketi, ko viloketīti? Evamettha khandhāyatanadhātupaccayapaccavekkhaṇavasenapi asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“弯曲、伸展时”,指的是身体四肢弯曲和伸展的时候。这里不是只随着心念去弯曲伸展,而是要先判断弯曲伸展手脚是有意义还是没意义,把握有意义的那一面,这就是“有益正知”。在这里,如果手脚弯曲或伸展后保持太久,那么每一个刹那都会生起受,心没办法得定,禅修业处会退失,不能证得殊胜成就。反过来,该弯曲的时候弯曲,该伸展的时候伸展,那些受就不会生起,心能得定,禅修业处会增长,能证得殊胜成就。应当这样理解“把握意义与无意义”。巴利
Samiñjite pasāriteti pabbānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇe. Tattha cittavaseneva samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ akatvā hatthapādānaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇapaccayā atthānatthaṃ pariggahetvā atthapariggahaṇaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Tattha hatthapāde aticiraṃ samiñjetvā pasāretvā eva vā ṭhitassa khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjanti, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ na labhati, kammaṭṭhānaṃ paripatati, visesaṃ nādhigacchati. Kāle samiñjentassa kāle pasārentassa pana tā vedanā na uppajjanti, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gacchati, visesamadhigacchatīti evaṃ atthānatthapariggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
即使有目的,也要进一步观察什么是适合的、什么是不适合的,把握适合的,这就是“适合正知”。这里的例子是这样的:据说在大塔的广场上,年轻比丘们在诵习,他们身后有年轻比丘尼们在听法。其中一位年轻比丘伸手时碰到了女性身体,就因为这件事还俗成了在家人。另一位比丘伸脚时把脚伸进了火里,火烧到了骨头。另一位把脚伸向蚁丘,被毒蛇咬了。还有一位把脚伸向袈裟小屋的竿子上,被宝蛇咬了。所以,应当避开这类不适合的地方,只往适合的地方伸展肢体。这就是这里所说的“适合正知”。巴利
Atthe pana satipi sappāyāsappāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā sappāyapariggahaṇaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ nayo – mahācetiyaṅgaṇe kira daharabhikkhū sajjhāyaṃ gaṇhanti. Tesaṃ piṭṭhipasse daharabhikkhuniyo dhammaṃ suṇanti. Tatreko daharo hatthaṃ pasārento kāyasaṃsaggaṃ patvā teneva kāraṇena gihī jāto. Aparopi bhikkhu pādaṃ pasārento aggimhi pasāresi, aṭṭhiṃ āhacca pādo jhāyi. Aparo vammike pasāresi, so āsīvisena daṭṭho. Aparo cīvarakuṭidaṇḍake pasāresi, taṃ maṇisappo ḍaṃsi. Tasmā evarūpe asappāye apasāretvā sappāye pasāretabbaṃ. Idamettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ.
关于“行境正知”,可以用大长老的故事来说明。据说,大长老坐在日间住处,和弟子们交谈时,忽然快速弯了一下手臂,随即又把手放回原处,然后再慢慢地弯。弟子们问他:“尊者,您为什么先快速弯起手臂,又放回原处,再慢慢地弯呢?”长老回答:“贤友们,从我开始专注修习禅修业处以来,从来没有舍弃业处弯过手。刚才和你们交谈时,我舍弃了业处才弯了手,所以又把手放回原处,再慢慢地弯。”弟子们说:“善哉,尊者!比丘就应当这样。”由此可见,这里说的“行境正知”,就是不舍弃自己的禅修业处。巴利
Gocarasampajaññaṃ pana mahātheravatthunā dīpetabbaṃ – mahāthero kira divāṭṭhāne nisinno antevāsikehi saddhiṃ kathayamāno sahasā hatthaṃ samiñjetvā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā saṇikaṃ samiñjesi. Taṃ antevāsikā pucchiṃsu ‘‘kasmā bhante sahasā hatthaṃ samiñjetvā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā saṇikaṃ samiñjayitthā’’ti. Yato paṭṭhāyāhaṃ, āvuso, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātuṃ āraddho, na me kammaṭṭhānaṃ muñcitvā hattho samiñjitapubbo, idāni pana tumhehi saddhiṃ kathayamānena kammaṭṭhānaṃ muñcitvā samiñjito, tasmā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā samiñjesinti. Sādhu, bhante, bhikkhunā nāma evarūpena bhavitabbanti. Evametthāpi kammaṭṭhānāvijahanameva gocarasampajaññanti veditabbaṃ.
在身体内部,并没有任何一个所谓的“我”在弯曲或伸展。实际上,是由于前面所说的心所造的风界扩散,像拉线操纵木偶一样,才使得手脚弯曲、伸展。所以,在这里能够这样如实了知,就应当理解为“无迷乱正知”。巴利
Abbhantare attā nāma koci samiñjento vā pasārento vā natthi. Vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārena pana suttakaḍḍhanavasena dāruyantassa hatthapādalaḷanaṃ viya samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ hotīti evaṃ parijānanaṃ panettha asammohasampajaññanti veditabbaṃ.
在“受持僧伽梨、钵和衣”这一项里,僧伽梨和衣的受持,是指以穿下衣和披上衣的方式来使用;钵的受持,是指以接受布施的食物等方式来使用。其中,关于僧伽梨和衣的受持,当比丘穿好下衣、披好上衣去乞食时,所获得的食物利益,正是世尊以“为了抵御寒冷”等说法所开示的那种意义,这才是这里所说的“义”。依此,应当了知“有义正知”。巴利
Saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇeti ettha saṅghāṭicīvarānaṃ nivāsanapārupanavasena pattassa bhikkhāpaṭiggahaṇādivasena paribhogo dhāraṇaṃ nāma. Tattha saṅghāṭicīvaradhāraṇe tāva nivāsetvā pārupitvā ca piṇḍāya carato āmisalābho ‘‘sītassa paṭighātāyā’’tiādinā nayena bhagavatā vuttappakāroyeva ca attho attho nāma. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
对于天生怕热又体质虚弱的人来说,细薄的衣是适宜的;对于怕冷的人来说,厚实的双层衣是适宜的;与此相反则不适宜。任何人的破旧衣都是不适宜的,因为为了它去缝补丁等,就会成为障碍。同样,绢丝、细麻布之类让人贪着的衣也不适宜,因为那样的衣在林中,对独居者会成为住所的障碍或生命的障碍。然而,从究竟意义上说,凡是以相、作业等邪命方式生起的衣,以及使用它时不善法增长、善法减退的衣,那是不适宜的;相反的则是适宜的。由此,应知这里的“适宜正知”;并且以不舍弃业处的方式,应知“行境正知”。巴利
Uṇhapakatikassa pana dubbalassa ca cīvaraṃ sukhumaṃ sappāyaṃ. Sītālukassa ghanaṃ dupaṭṭaṃ. Viparītaṃ asappāyaṃ. Yassa kassaci jiṇṇaṃ asappāyameva. Aggaḷādidāne hissa taṃ palibodhakaraṃ hoti. Tathā paṭṭuṇṇadukūlādibhedaṃ lobhanīyacīvaraṃ. Tādisañhi araññe ekakassa nivāsantarāyakaraṃ jīvitantarāyakaraṃ vāpi hoti. Nippariyāyena pana yaṃ nimittakammādimicchājīvavasena uppannaṃ, yañcassa sevamānassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, taṃ asappāyaṃ. Viparītaṃ sappāyaṃ . Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ, kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身体里面并没有什么“我”在披衣。只是前面说的那种由心所生的风界扩散开来,才有披衣这件事。在这里,衣没有心识,身体也没有心识。衣不知道“我盖住了身体”,身体也不知道“我被衣盖住了”。只是诸界在遮盖诸界的聚合,就像用布片盖住稻草人一样。所以,得到好衣不该高兴,得到不好的衣也不该忧愁。比如对蚁丘、塔庙、树木等,有人用花环、香料、烟、布等来供养恭敬,有人用粪、尿、泥、棍棒、刀杖来打砸侮辱,但蚁丘、树木这些并不会因此高兴或忧愁。同样,得到好衣不该高兴,得到不好的衣也不该忧愁。应当以这种反复思择的方式,来理解这里的“不迷正知”。巴利
Abbhantare attā nāma koci cīvaraṃ pārupanto natthi. Vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana cīvarapārupanaṃ hoti. Tattha cīvarampi acetanaṃ, kāyopi acetano. Cīvaraṃ na jānāti ‘‘mayā kāyo pāruto’’ti. Kāyopi na jānāti ‘‘ahaṃ cīvarena pāruto’’ti, dhātuyova dhātusamūhaṃ paṭicchādenti paṭapilotikāya potthakarūpapaṭicchādane viya. Tasmā neva sundaraṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā somanassaṃ kātabbaṃ, na asundaraṃ labhitvā domanassaṃ. Nāgavammikacetiyarukkhādīsu hi keci mālāgandhadhūmavatthādīhi sakkāraṃ karonti, keci gūthamuttakaddamadaṇḍasatthappahārādīhi asakkāraṃ, na te nāgavammikarukkhādayo somanassaṃ vā domanassaṃ vā karonti; evameva neva sundaraṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā somanassaṃ kātabbaṃ, na asundaraṃ labhitvā domanassanti evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasena panettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
即使在持钵的时候,也不应该匆匆忙忙地拿起钵,而应该这样想:“我拿着这个钵去乞食,就能得到食物。”像这样,从拿钵这件事所应获得的意义和利益的角度来理解,这就是有义正知。巴利
Pattadhāraṇepi pattaṃ sahasāva aggahetvā imaṃ gahetvā piṇḍāya caramāno bhikkhaṃ labhissāmīti evaṃ pattagahaṇapaccayā paṭilabhitabbaatthavasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
对于瘦弱虚弱的身体来说,沉重的钵是不适宜的。任何钵如果有四五处裂口损坏,难以清洗干净,也同样不适宜。因为洗不干净的钵不合用,清洗它的时候又会成为障碍。而像宝石一样色泽的钵,会让人贪恋,就像在衣服那部分所说的那样,是不适宜的。如果是通过占相、作法等方式得到的钵,使用它时不善法增长、善法减退,那就绝对不适宜。反过来则是适宜的。据此,应当了知这里的“适宜正知”;同时,以不舍离业处的方式,应当了知“行境正知”。巴利
Kisadubbalasarīrassa pana garu patto asappāyo. Yassa kassaci catupañcagaṇḍikāhato dubbisodhanīyo asappāyova. Duddhotapatto hi na vaṭṭati, taṃ dhovantasseva cassa palibodho hoti. Maṇivaṇṇapatto pana lobhanīyo cīvare vuttanayeneva asappāyo. Nimittakammādivasena laddho pana yañcassa sevamānassa akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, ayaṃ ekantaasappāyova. Viparīto sappāyo. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ, kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身体内部并没有一个叫“我”的东西在拿钵。实际上,只是前面说的那种由心生起的风界在推动,才叫作拿钵。在这里,钵没有心识,手也没有心识。钵不知道“我被手拿住了”,手也不知道“我们拿住了钵”。只是界在拿界的聚合,就像用钳子夹取烧红的钵一样。应当以这种持续观察思择的方式,来了知这里的“无迷正知”。巴利
Abbhantare attā nāma koci pattaṃ gaṇhanto natthi. Vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana pattaggahaṇaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha pattopi acetano, hatthāpi acetanā. Patto na jānāti ‘‘ahaṃ hatthehi gahito’’ti. Hatthāpi na jānanti ‘‘patto amhehi gahito’’ti. Dhātuyova dhātusamūhaṃ gaṇhanti saṇḍāsena aggivaṇṇapattaggahaṇe viyāti evaṃ pavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
再者,就像有人看见那些断了手脚、伤口流着脓血、爬满蛆虫、被青蝇团团围住、躺在无依堂里的可怜人,有怜悯心的人就会拿布片给他们覆盖伤口,又用颅骨之类的容器给他们送药。在这些布片里,有些人的是细软的,有些人的是粗硬的;那些盛药的颅骨容器,有些人的形状好看,有些人的形状难看。但那些病人对这些既不欢喜也不烦恼,因为他们只需要布片覆盖伤口、只需要颅骨容器接受药物就够了。同样地,凡比丘把袈裟看作像伤口布片,把钵看作像盛药的颅骨容器,把钵里得到的食物看作像颅骨容器里的药,如此观想,就应当知道:这位在执持僧伽梨、钵和衣时,是以无迷正知而行最上正知的人。巴利
Apica yathā chinnahatthapāde vaṇamukhehi paggharitapubbalohitakimikule nīlamakkhikasamparikiṇṇe anāthasālāyaṃ nipanne anāthamanusse disvā dayālukā purisā tesaṃ vaṇapaṭṭacoḷakāni ceva kapālādīhi ca bhesajjāni upanāmenti. Tattha coḷakānipi kesañci saṇhāni, kesañci thūlāni pāpuṇanti. Bhesajjakapālakānipi kesañci susaṇṭhānāni, kesañci dussaṇṭhānāni pāpuṇanti, na te tattha sumanā vā dummanā vā honti. Vaṇappaṭicchādanamatteneva hi coḷakena bhesajjapaṭiggahaṇamatteneva ca kapālakena tesamattho, evameva yo bhikkhu vaṇacoḷakaṃ viya cīvaraṃ, bhesajjakapālakaṃ viya pattaṃ, kapāle bhesajjamiva ca patte laddhaṃ bhikkhaṃ sallakkheti. Ayaṃ saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe asammohasampajaññena uttamasampajānakārīti veditabbo.
在“吃”等当中,“吃”是指吃团食;“喝”是指喝粥等饮品;“嚼”是指嚼炒粉等嚼食;“尝”是指尝蜂蜜、糖浆等尝食。在这里,依照“不是为了嬉戏”等说法所讲的八种含义,就是所谓的“义”。依靠这个,应当理解“有义正知”。而在粗糙、精致、苦、甜等食物当中,如果某种食物让某人感到不适,那对那个人来说就是不适宜的。如果是通过相、业等方式获得的,以及某人吃它的时候不善法增长、善法减退,那它就绝对是不适宜的;与此相反的,就是适宜的。依靠这个,在这里应当理解“适宜正知”;并且应当以不舍弃业处的方式,理解“行境正知”。巴利
Asitādīsu asiteti piṇḍapātabhojane. Pīteti yāguādipāne. Khāyiteti piṭṭhakhajjakādikhādane. Sāyiteti madhuphāṇitādisāyane. Tattha ‘‘neva davāyā’’tiādinā nayena vutto aṭṭhavidhopi attho attho nāma. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Lūkhapaṇītatittamadhurādīsu pana yena bhojanena yassa aphāsu hoti, taṃ tassa asappāyaṃ. Yaṃ pana nimittakammādivasena paṭiladdhaṃ, yañcassa bhuñjato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, taṃ ekantaasappāyameva. Viparītaṃ sappāyaṃ. Tassa vasenettha sappāyasampajaññaṃ, kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身体里面并没有一个叫“我”的进食者。只是靠着前面说的那种心生风界的作用,才有接钵这件事。只是靠着心生风界的作用,才有把手伸进钵里的动作。只是靠着心生风界的作用,才有捏团食、拿起团食和张开嘴的动作。并不是有谁用钥匙和机关来打开上下颚,只是靠着心生风界的作用,才把团食放进口中,上牙做杵的工作,下牙做臼的工作,舌头做手的工作。巴利
Abbhantare attā nāma koci bhuñjako natthi, vuttappakāracittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravaseneva pana pattapaṭiggahaṇaṃ nāma hoti. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva hatthassa patte otāraṇaṃ nāma hoti. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva ālopakaraṇaṃ ālopauddharaṇaṃ mukhavivaraṇañca hoti. Na koci kuñcikāya yantakena ca hanukaṭṭhīni vivarati, cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva ālopassa mukhe ṭhapanaṃ, uparidantānaṃ musalakiccasādhanaṃ, heṭṭhādantānaṃ udukkhalakiccasādhanaṃ, jivhāya hatthakiccasādhanañca hoti.
就这样,它在那里,用舌尖的稀薄唾液和舌根的浓稠唾液涂抹。那团食物在下牙这个“臼”里,被舌头这只“手”翻来转去,被唾液浸湿,又被上牙这个“杵”捣碎。并没有谁用勺子或汤匙把它送进去,它只是靠风界进入。进入之后,并没有谁铺上稻草把它托住,它只是靠风界停留。停留之后,并没有谁砌灶点火去煮它,它只是靠火界被消化。消化之后,并没有谁用棍子或木杖把它弄出去,它只是靠风界被排出。巴利
Iti taṃ tattha aggajivhāya tanukakheḷo mūlajivhāya bahalakheḷo makkheti. Taṃ heṭṭhādantaudukkhale jivhāhatthaparivattitaṃ kheḷaudakatemitaṃ uparidantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ koci kaṭacchunā vā dabbiyā vā antopavesento nāma natthi, vāyodhātuyāva pavisati. Paviṭṭhaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ koci palālasantharaṃ katvā dhārento nāma natthi, vāyodhātuvaseneva tiṭṭhati. Ṭhitaṃ ṭhitaṃ koci uddhanaṃ katvā aggiṃ jāletvā pacanto nāma natthi, tejodhātuyāva paccati. Pakkaṃ pakkaṃ koci daṇḍena vā yaṭṭhiyā vā bahi nīhārako nāma natthi, vāyodhātuyeva nīharati.
风界把食物推入、运走、维持、翻转、粉碎、弄干并排出。地界维持、翻转、粉碎并弄干。水界使之湿润并保持潮湿。火界把进入内部的(食物)消化成熟。空界成为通道。识界则随着各处适当的作意而转向。应当这样通过上述的思择,在此了知为无迷乱的正知。巴利
Iti vāyodhātu atiharati ca vītiharati ca dhāreti ca parivatteti ca sañcuṇṇeti visoseti ca nīharati ca. Pathavīdhātu dhāreti ca parivatteti ca sañcuṇṇeti ca visoseti ca. Āpodhātu sineheti ca allattañca anupāleti. Tejodhātu antopaviṭṭhaṃ paripāceti. Ākāsadhātu añjaso hoti. Viññāṇadhātu tattha tattha sammāpayogamanvāya ābhujatīti evaṃpavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
另外,还可以从十个方面来观察食物的厌恶相:行走、寻求、受用、住处、贮藏、未消化、已消化、结果、排泄、涂染。由此应当了知这里的无迷乱正知。而这里详细的解说,应当从《清净道论》中“食厌想”的说明部分来了解。巴利
Apica gamanato pariyesanato paribhogato āsayato nidhānato aparipakkato paripakkato phalato nissandato sammakkhaṇatoti evaṃ dasavidhapaṭikūlabhāvapaccavekkhaṇatopettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vitthārakathā panettha visuddhimagge āhārapaṭikūlasaññāniddesato gahetabbā.
“大小便的行为”是指大便和小便的排泄行为。在这里,如果到了该大小便的时候却不排,全身就会出汗,眼睛发花,心无法专一,还会引发其他疾病。反过来,如果排了,这一切就不会发生——这就是这里的含义。据此,应当理解为有益正知。可是,如果在不恰当的地方大小便,就会犯戒,恶名增长,甚至危及生命。如果在合适的地方做,这一切就不会发生——这就是这里的适宜性。据此,应当理解为适宜正知;同时,从不忘业处这一点来说,也应当理解为行境正知。巴利
Uccārapassāvakammeti uccārassa ca passāvassa ca karaṇe. Tattha pattakāle uccārapassāvaṃ akarontassa sakalasarīrato sedā muccanti, akkhīni bhamanti, cittaṃ na ekaggaṃ hoti, aññe ca rogā uppajjanti. Karontassa pana sabbaṃ taṃ na hotīti ayamettha attho. Tassa vasena sātthakasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aṭṭhāne uccārapassāvaṃ karontassa pana āpatti hoti, ayaso vaḍḍhati, jīvitantarāyo hoti. Patirūpe ṭhāne karontassa sabbaṃ taṃ na hotīti idamettha sappāyaṃ. Tassa vasena sappāyasampajaññaṃ, kammaṭṭhānāvijahanavaseneva ca gocarasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
身体里面并没有什么“我”在大小便。其实,只是心所发动的风界在起作用,才有大小便这件事。就像熟了的疮破了,脓和血不情愿地流出来;又像装得太满的水罐,水不情愿地溢出来;同样,积在直肠和膀胱里的粪便、尿液,被风的力量逼着,就算不情愿也会排出来。这样排出来的粪便、尿液,既不是那位比丘自己的,也不是别人的,只是身体排出来的东西而已。好比什么呢?好比有人把水缸里的陈水倒掉,那水既不是他自己的,也不是别人的,只是需要清理一下罢了。通过这样的反复审察,在这里应当理解为无迷乱正知。巴利
Abbhantare attā nāma koci uccārapassāvaṃ karonto natthi. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva pana uccārapassāvakammaṃ hoti. Yathā pana pakke gaṇḍe gaṇḍabhedena pubbalohitaṃ akāmatāya nikkhamati, yathā ca atibharitā udakabhājanā udakaṃ akāmatāya nikkhamati, evaṃ pakkāsayamuttavatthīsu sannicitā uccārapassāvā vāyuvegasamuppīḷitā akāmatāyapi nikkhamanti. So panāyaṃ evaṃ nikkhamanto uccārapassāvo neva tassa bhikkhuno attano hoti, na parassa. Kevalaṃ sarīranissandova hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā udakakumbhato purāṇaudakaṃ chaḍḍentassa neva taṃ attano hoti, na paresaṃ. Kevalaṃ paṭijagganamattameva hoti. Evaṃpavattapaṭisaṅkhānavasenettha asammohasampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在“行”等词中,“行”指行走,“住”指站立,“坐”指坐着,“卧”指躺卧,“觉”指醒来,“语”指说话,“默然”指不说话。因为在“行走时了知‘我在行走’,站立时了知‘我在站立’,坐着时了知‘我在坐着’,躺卧时了知‘我在躺卧’”这一段里,说的是长途旅行的威仪。在“前进、后退、前看、旁看、屈伸”这一段里,说的是中等程度的威仪。而在这里“行、住、坐、卧、觉”中,说的是微细的威仪。因此,对于这些也应当依照所说的方式,理解为正知而为。巴利
Gatādīsu gateti gamane. Ṭhiteti ṭhāne. Nisinneti nisajjāya. Sutteti sayane. Jāgariteti jāgaraṇe. Bhāsiteti kathane. Tuṇhībhāveti akathane. ‘‘Gacchanto vā gacchāmīti pajānāti, ṭhito vā ṭhitomhīti pajānāti, nisinno vā nisinnomhīti pajānāti, sayāno vā sayānomhīti pajānātī’’ti imasmiñhi ṭhāne addhānairiyāpathā kathitā. ‘‘Abhikkante paṭikkante ālokite vilokite samiñjite pasārite’’ti imasmiṃ majjhimā. ‘‘Gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite’’ti idha pana khuddakacuṇṇikairiyāpathā kathitā. Tasmā etesupi vuttanayeneva sampajānakāritā veditabbā.
三藏大西长老则这样说:如果有人走了很久或经行了很久,之后站着时这样审察:“经行时生起的名色诸法,就在这里灭尽了”,这个人就叫作“于行走中正知而为者”。如果有人诵经、回答问题或作意业处,站了很久之后坐下来时这样审察:“站立时生起的名色诸法,就在这里灭尽了”,这个人就叫作“于站立中正知而为者”。如果有人因为诵经等事坐了很久,之后躺卧时这样审察:“坐着时生起的名色诸法,就在这里灭尽了”,这个人就叫作“于安坐中正知而为者”。如果有人躺着诵经或作意业处,入睡之后过了一段时间醒来,这样审察:“睡眠时生起的名色诸法,就在这里灭尽了”,这个人就叫作“于躺卧与醒寤中正知而为者”。因为对于唯作心来说,没有生起时叫作睡眠,生起时叫作醒寤。如果有人说话时,具念正知地说:“这个声音,是依靠嘴唇、牙齿、舌头、上腭,以及依靠心相应的加行才生起的”;或者长时间诵经、说法、修习业处、回答问题之后,过了一段时间沉默下来时,这样审察:“说话时生起的名色诸法,就在这里灭尽了”,这个人就叫作“于说话中正知而为者”。如果有人沉默时,长时间思惟法或业处之后,这样审察:“沉默时生起的名色诸法,就在这里灭尽了;当所造色还在生起时,就叫作说话;当它不生起时,就叫作沉默”,这个人就叫作“于沉默中正知而为者”。巴利
Tipiṭakamahāsīvatthero panāha – yo ciraṃ gantvā vā caṅkamitvā vā aparabhāge ṭhito iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘caṅkamanakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti, ayaṃ gate sampajānakārī nāma. Yo sajjhāyaṃ vā karonto pañhaṃ vā vissajjento kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikaronto ciraṃ ṭhatvā aparabhāge nisinno iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘ṭhitakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti, ayaṃ ṭhite sampajānakārī nāma. Yo sajjhāyādikaraṇavaseneva ciraṃ nisīditvā aparabhāge nipanno iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘nisinnakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti, ayaṃ nisinne sampajānakārī nāma. Yo pana nipannako sajjhāyaṃ vā karonto kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikaronto niddaṃ okkamitvā aparabhāge vuṭṭhāya iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘sayanakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti, ayaṃ sutte jāgarite ca sampajānakārī nāma. Kiriyamayacittānañhi appavattaṃ suttaṃ nāma, pavattaṃ jāgaritaṃ nāmāti. Yo pana bhāsamāno ‘‘ayaṃ saddo nāma oṭṭhe ca paṭicca dante ca jivhañca tāluñca paṭicca cittassa tadanurūpaṃ payogaṃ paṭicca jāyatī’’ti sato sampajāno bhāsati, ciraṃ vā pana kālaṃ sajjhāyaṃ vā katvā dhammaṃ vā kathetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā parivattetvā pañhaṃ vā vissajjetvā aparabhāge tuṇhībhūto iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘bhāsitakāle uppannā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā’’ti, ayaṃ bhāsite sampajānakārī nāma. Yo tuṇhībhūto ciraṃ dhammaṃ vā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikatvā aparabhāge iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘tuṇhībhūtakāle pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ettheva niruddhā, upādārūpapavattiyā sati bhāsati nāma, asati tuṇhī bhavati nāmā’’ti, ayaṃ tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī nāmāti.
大西长老所说的这个无迷乱,正是这部《念处经》所要表达的。不过在《沙门果经》里,四种正知全都能得到。所以在这里,应当特别依据无迷乱正知来理解正知而为。而在所有文句里说到正知而为,都应当依据与念相应的正知来理解其含义。在《分别论》中,“具念正知而前进,具念正知而后退”这些句子,已经分别解说了。巴利
Tayidaṃ mahāsīvattherena vuttaṃ asammohadhuraṃ imasmiṃ satipaṭṭhānasutte adhippetaṃ. Sāmaññaphale pana sabbampi catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ labbhati. Tasmā visesato ettha asammohasampajaññasseva vasena sampajānakāritā veditabbā. Sampajānakārī sampajānakārīti ca sabbapadesu satisampayuttasseva sampajaññassa vasenattho veditabbo. Vibhaṅgappakaraṇe pana, ‘‘sato sampajāno abhikkamati, sato sampajāno paṭikkamatī’’ti (vibha. 523) evametāni padāni vibhattāneva.
“或于内”这句是说:以这四种正知来摄持,他或在自身之身、或在他身之身、或有时在自身、有时在他身,于身随观身而住。这里“观集灭法”等句中,只应提取色蕴的集与灭。其余内容与前面所说相同。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ catusampajaññapariggahaṇena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Idha samudayavayadhammānupassītiādīsu rūpakkhandhasseva samudayo ca vayo ca nīharitabbo. Sesaṃ vuttasadisameva.
在这里,摄持四种正知的念是苦谛,使它能生起的前爱是集谛,这两者不转起是灭谛,前面所说的圣道是道谛。这样依四谛逐步提升,最终达到寂灭。这是就一位摄持四种正知的比丘而言,直到证得阿拉汉果的导出之门。巴利
Idha catusampajaññapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, vuttappakāro ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavasena ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idamekassa catusampajaññapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno vasena yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
不净作意品的解说巴利
Paṭikūlamanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
110 110. 这样以四种正知分析了身随观之后,现在为了以不净作意来分析,接着说了“再者……”等话。其中,关于“此身”等应当说明的内容,在《清净道论》的“身至念业处”部分已经全面详细地讲过了。“两端开口”是指下面和上面,也就是有两个口。“种种”是指各种各样的。巴利
110. Evaṃ catusampajaññavasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni paṭikūlamanasikāravasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha imameva kāyantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ sabbākārena vitthārato visuddhimagge kāyagatāsatikammaṭṭhāne vuttaṃ. Ubhatomukhāti heṭṭhā ca upari cāti dvīhi mukhehi yuttā. Nānāvihitassāti nānāvidhassa.
这里,譬喻的对应是这样的:四大组成的身体,就像两头开口的袋子;头发等三十二身分,就像袋中混杂装进去的各种谷物;修行者,就像有眼睛的人。当他解开那个袋子来观察时,各种谷物清楚显现的那一刻,就应当知道:修行者三十二身分清晰显现的状态也是如此。巴利
Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – ubhatomukhā putoḷi viya hi cātumahābhūtiko kāyo, tattha missetvā pakkhittanānāvidhadhaññaṃ viya kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā, cakkhumā puriso viya yogāvacaro, tassa taṃ putoḷiṃ muñcitvā paccavekkhato nānāvidhadhaññassa pākaṭakālo viya yogino dvattiṃsākārassa vibhūtākāro veditabbo.
“或于内”这句是说:像这样,通过执取头发等(三十二身分),在自身之身中,或在他身之身中,或有时在自身、有时在他身之身中,于身随观身而住。从此往后,与前面所说方式相同。只是这里应把执取三十二身分的念,连接为“苦圣谛”,由此应知这是导向解脱之门。其余部分与前面相同。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ kesādipariggahaṇena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha dvattiṃsākārapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisamevāti.
界作意品释义巴利
Dhātumanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
111 111. 像这样,用不净作意的方式分析了身随观之后,现在为了用界作意的方式来分析,世尊又说了“再者……”等话。这里,连同比喻的对应关系一起来说明它的含义:就好像某个屠牛的人,或者他雇来干活、以饭食作为报酬的徒弟,把牛杀了、剖开之后,坐在通往四个方向的大路交汇处的中央——也就是叫做“四衢路口”的地方,把牛一块一块地分开。同样地,比丘在四种威仪中的任何一种状态下,因为身体是那样安住的,就按照它安住的样子,按照它摆放的样子,这样观察:“在这个身体里有地界……乃至……风界。”巴利
111. Evaṃ paṭikūlamanasikāravasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni dhātumanasikāravasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ opammasaṃsandanena saddhiṃ atthavaṇṇanā – yathā koci goghātako vā tasseva vā bhattavetanabhato antevāsiko gāviṃ vadhitvā vinivijjhitvā catasso disā gatānaṃ mahāpathānaṃ vemajjhaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte catumahāpathe koṭṭhāsaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā nisinno assa, evameva bhikkhu catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ yena kenaci ākārena ṭhitattā yathāṭhitaṃ, yathāṭhitattā ca yathāpaṇihitaṃ kāyaṃ – ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye pathavīdhātu…pe… vāyodhātū’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhati.
这段话要说明的是:就像屠牛的人,无论是养牛的时候,把牛牵到宰杀场的时候,牵到之后绑在那里放着的时候,正在杀的时候,还是看见牛已经被杀死倒地的时候,只要他还没有把牛剖开、切成一块一块的,他心里“这是牛”的想就一直不会消失。可是,等他切开、一块块分好坐下来之后,“这是牛”的想就消失了,取而代之的是“这是肉”的想。这时他不会想“我在卖牛,这些人在把牛拿走”,而只会想“我在卖肉,这些人在把肉拿走”。同样地,这位比丘以前还是愚痴凡夫的时候,无论是在家人还是出家人,只要他还没有对这个如实安住、如实摆放的身体破除密集后从界的角度去观察,他心里“这是众生”或“这是人”的想就一直不会消失。可是,当他从界的角度观察时,“众生”的想就消失了,心只依于界而安住。所以世尊才说:“他对于这个如实安住、如实摆放的身体,从界的角度观察:‘这个身体里有地界、水界、火界、风界。’就像一位熟练的屠牛者……乃至……风界。”巴利
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā goghātakassa gāviṃ posentassāpi āghātanaṃ āharantassāpi āharitvā tattha bandhitvā ṭhapentassāpi vadhentassāpi vadhitaṃ mataṃ passantassāpi tāvadeva gāvīti saññā na antaradhāyati, yāva naṃ padāletvā bīlaso na vibhajati. Vibhajitvā nisinnassa pana gāvīti saññā antaradhāyati, maṃsasaññā pavattati, nāssa evaṃ hoti ‘‘ahaṃ gāviṃ vikkiṇāmi, ime gāviṃ harantī’’ti. Atha khvassa ‘‘ahaṃ maṃsaṃ vikkiṇāmi, ime maṃsaṃ haranti’’cceva hoti, evameva imassāpi bhikkhuno pubbe bālaputhujjanakāle gihibhūtassāpi pabbajitassāpi tāvadeva sattoti vā puggaloti vā saññā na antaradhāyati, yāva imameva kāyaṃ yathāṭhitaṃ yathāpaṇihitaṃ ghanavinibbhogaṃ katvā dhātuso na paccavekkhati. Dhātuso paccavekkhato panassa sattasaññā antaradhāyati, dhātuvaseneva cittaṃ santiṭṭhati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘imameva kāyaṃ yathāṭhitaṃ yathāpaṇihitaṃ dhātuso paccavekkhati, atthi imasmiṃ kāye pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātūti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho goghātako vā…pe… vāyodhātū’’ti.
就像屠牛者一样,修行者也是;就像“牛”想一样,是“众生”想;就像四衢大道一样,是四种威仪;就像切成碎块后坐着那样,是从界的角度去观察。这就是这里对经文的注释,而关于禅修方法的具体说明,在《清净道论》里已经详细讲过了。巴利
Goghātako viya hi yogī, gāvīti saññā viya sattasaññā, catumahāpatho viya catuiriyāpatho, bīlaso vibhajitvā nisinnabhāvo viya dhātuso paccavekkhaṇanti ayamettha pāḷivaṇṇanā, kammaṭṭhānakathā pana visuddhimagge vitthāritā.
就这样,“或于内”是指:以这样把握四界的方式,或在自己的身体中,或在他人的身体中,或有时在自己的身体中,或有时在他人的身体中,于身随观身而住。从这里往后,都和前面所说的一样。只是在这里,应把把握四界的念连接为“苦圣谛”,这样来理解,就应知道这是导向解脱之门。其余部分与前面相同。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ catudhātupariggahaṇena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva. Kevalañhi idha catudhātupariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisamevāti.
九种墓地品的注释巴利
Navasivathikapabbavaṇṇanā
112 112. 像这样以界作意的方式分析了身随观之后,现在为了以九种墓地品来分别,又说“再者,比丘们”等起始文句。其中,“正如会看到”意思是如同会看到。“身”指死尸。“被弃于墓地”指被丢弃在坟场。“死了一日者的”即一日死的。“死了二日者的”即二日死的。“死了三日者的”即三日死的。命终之后,身体像风箱一样次第膨胀起来,因为膨胀的状态,所以叫“膨胀”。“青瘀”指颜色变异。呈现青瘀的状态本身就是“青瘀的”。又因为不净可厌,所以那令人厌恶的青瘀就叫“青瘀的”。在肉丰满的地方呈红色,在脓积聚的地方呈白色,而大多数地方呈青色,就好像披着青布的死尸一样,这是对这种尸体的称呼。从破裂处或九个疮口流出的脓,叫“流脓”。流脓的状态本身就是“流脓的”,又因为不净可厌,所以那令人厌恶的流脓就叫“流脓的”。已经变成流脓那样的状态,就叫“变成流脓的”。巴利
112. Evaṃ dhātumanasikāravasena kāyānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni navahi sivathikapabbehi vibhajituṃ, puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha seyyathāpi passeyyāti yathā passeyya. Sarīranti matasarīraṃ. Sivathikāya chaḍḍītanti susāne apaviddhaṃ. Ekāhaṃ matassa assāti ekāhamataṃ. Dvīhaṃ matassa assāti dvīhamataṃ. Tīhaṃ matassa assāti tīhamataṃ. Bhastā viya vāyunā uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā yathānukkamaṃ samuggatena sūnabhāvena uddhumātattā uddhumātakaṃ. Vinīlaṃ vuccati viparibhinnavaṇṇaṃ. Vilīnameva vinīlakaṃ. Paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vinīlanti vinīlakaṃ. Maṃsussadaṭṭhānesu rattavaṇṇassa pubbasannicayaṭṭhānesu setavaṇṇassa yebhuyyena ca nīlavaṇṇassa nīlaṭṭhānesu nīlasāṭakapārutasseva chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Paribhinnaṭṭhānehi navahi vā vaṇamukhehi visandamānaṃ pubbaṃ vipubbaṃ. Vipubbameva vipubbakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vipubbanti vipubbakaṃ. Vipubbakaṃ jātaṃ tathābhāvaṃ gatanti vipubbakajātaṃ.
那位比丘把自己这个身体,用智慧与那个身体结合起来、对照起来。怎么结合呢?就是:这个身体也是这样的性质,会变成这样,逃不过这样的结局。这里说的是:因为有寿命、体温、识这三样东西存在,这个身体才能站立、行走等等;一旦这三样东西消失,这个身体也就同样是这种性质,本质上就是会腐烂发臭的,将来会变成膨胀等种种状态,逃不过变成膨胀等样子的结局。巴利
So imameva kāyanti so bhikkhu imaṃ attano kāyaṃ tena kāyena saddhiṃ ñāṇena upasaṃharati upaneti. Kathaṃ? Ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatītoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – āyu, usmā, viññāṇanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ dhammānaṃ atthitāya ayaṃ kāyo ṭhānagamanādikhamo hoti imesaṃ pana vigamā ayampi evaṃdhammo evaṃpūtikasabhāvoyeva, evaṃbhāvī evaṃuddhumātādibhedo bhavissati, evaṃanatīto evaṃuddhumātādibhāvaṃ anatikkantoti.
如是所谓“或于内”,通过执取膨胀相等相,有时于自身,有时于他身,于身随观身而住。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ uddhumātādipariggahaṇena attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
被吃:指落在腹部等处,啄食腹部肉、嘴唇肉、眼眶等,一口一口地吃。有肉有血:还连着残余的肉和血。无肉有血涂:肉虽然已经耗尽,血还没有干,就是针对这个情况说“无肉有血涂”。以其他方向部分:指用别的方向部分。手骨:即使手骨按分类有六十四块,也都各自散落。足骨等也是同样的道理。超过一年:经过了一年以上的时间。腐烂:暴露在露天,受到风、阳光、雨水侵袭,超过一年的骨头就会腐烂;埋在地下的则能保存更久。变成粉末:碎成粉末而散落。在所有这些情形中,都应按照前面所说的方法,依“被吃”等来作组合。巴利
Khajjamānanti udarādīsu nisīditvā udaramaṃsaoṭṭhamaṃsaakkhikūṭādīni luñcitvā luñcitvā khādiyamānaṃ. Samaṃsalohitanti sesāvasesamaṃsalohitayuttaṃ. Nimaṃsalohitamakkhitanti maṃse khīṇepi lohitaṃ na sussati, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘nimaṃsalohitamakkhita’’nti. Aññenāti aññena disābhāgena. Hatthaṭṭhikanti catusaṭṭhibhedampi hatthaṭṭhikaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ vippakiṇṇaṃ. Pādaṭṭhikādīsupi eseva nayo. Terovassikānīti atikkantasaṃvaccharāni. Pūtīnīti abbhokāse ṭhitāni vātātapavuṭṭhisamphassena terovassikāneva pūtīni honti. Antobhūmigatāni pana cirataraṃ tiṭṭhanti. Cuṇṇakajātānīti cuṇṇaṃ cuṇṇaṃ hutvā vippakiṇṇāni. Sabbattha so imamevāti vuttanayena khajjamānādīnaṃ vasena yojanā kātabbā.
就这样,所谓“内”或,如此以把握“被吃”等情形,乃至变成粉末的状态,在自身身体上或他人身体上,有时在自身身体上、有时在他人身体上,于身随观身而住。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ khajjamānādipariggahaṇena yāva cuṇṇakabhāvā attano vā kāye, parassa vā kāye, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
在这里,应当先停下来,把九种墓地观归并起来。按“死了一日”等说法讲到的所有情况,合为一类;“被乌鸦等啄食”等,合为一类;“有肉有血、由筋腱相连的骨架”,合为一类;“没有肉、只剩血污、由筋腱相连”,合为一类;“血肉都已去掉、由筋腱相连”,合为一类;“骨头已经散开”等,合为一类;“骨头变白、像螺壳的颜色”,合为一类;“堆在一起超过三年”,合为一类;“腐烂变成粉末”,合为一类。巴利
Idha pana ṭhatvā navasivathikā samodhānetabbā. ‘‘Ekāhamataṃ vā’’tiādinā nayena vuttā sabbāpi ekā, ‘‘kākehi vā khajjamāna’’ntiādikā ekā, ‘‘aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṃ samaṃsalohitaṃ nhārusambandha’’nti ekā, ‘‘nimaṃsalohitamakkhitaṃ nhārusambandha’’nti ekā, ‘‘apagatamaṃsalohitaṃ nhārusambandha’’nti ekā, ‘‘aṭṭhikāni apagatasambandhānī’’tiādikā ekā, ‘‘aṭṭhikāni setāni saṅkhavaṇṇapaṭibhāgānī’’ti ekā, ‘‘puñjakitāni terovassikānī’’ti ekā, ‘‘pūtīni cuṇṇakajātānī’’ti ekā.
“比丘们,正是如此。”这句话是世尊在开示了九种墓地观之后,为总结身随观而说的。其中,以九种墓地观为所缘的念是苦谛,能生起它的先前渴爱是集谛,这两者不再生起是灭谛,遍知苦、舍断集、以灭为所缘的圣道是道谛。这样,依四谛之力逐步提升,最终证得寂灭。这就是那些以九种墓地观为修行的比丘们,直到证得阿拉汉果的解脱之门。巴利
Evaṃ kho, bhikkhaveti idaṃ navasivathikā dassetvā kāyānupassanaṃ niṭṭhapento āha. Tattha navasivathikapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccaṃ, tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, dukkhaparijānano samudayapajahano nirodhārammaṇo ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Evaṃ catusaccavaseneva ussakkitvā nibbutiṃ pāpuṇātīti idaṃ navasivathikapariggāhakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ yāva arahattā niyyānamukhanti.
到这里,入出息这一节、威仪这一节、四正知这一节、不净作意这一节、界作意这一节,以及九种墓地诸节——这十四节就完成了身随观。巴利
Ettāvatā ca ānāpānapabbaṃ iriyāpathapabbaṃ catusampajaññapabbaṃ paṭikūlamanasikārapabbaṃ dhātumanasikārapabbaṃ navasivathikapabbānīti cuddasapabbā kāyānupassanā niṭṭhitā hoti.
在这其中,入出息节和不净作意节仅此两种是安止业处。而墓地诸节因为是依过患随观来说的,所以其余十二种只是近行业处。巴利
Tattha ānāpānapabbaṃ paṭikūlamanasikārapabbanti imāneva dve appanākammaṭṭhānāni. Sivathikānaṃ pana ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttattā sesāni dvādasāpi upacārakammaṭṭhānānevāti.
受随观的解说巴利
Vedanānupassanāvaṇṇanā
113 113. 世尊这样用十四种方式讲完身随观念处之后,现在要用九种方式讲受随观,于是说“云何,诸比丘”等话。其中,“乐受”——当体验身体的乐受或心理的乐受时,他了知“我体验乐受”,这就是意思所在。在这里,即便是仰卧的婴儿,在吸奶等时候虽然也体验乐受,也知道“我们体验乐受”,但这里说的并不是这种了知。因为这种了知不舍弃对众生的执取,不破除众生想,既不是业处,也不是念处的修习。而这位比丘的了知则舍弃对众生的执取,破除众生想,既是业处,也是念处的修习。这里正是针对这种正知感受而说的:“谁在感受?是谁的受?因为什么原因而有受?”巴利
113. Evaṃ bhagavā cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā idāni navavidhena vedanānupassanaṃ kathetuṃ kathañca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha sukhaṃ vedananti kāyikaṃ vā cetasikaṃ vā sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘‘ahaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānātīti attho. Tattha kāmaṃ uttānaseyyakāpi dārakā thaññapivanādikāle sukhaṃ vedayamānā ‘‘sukhaṃ vedayāmā’’ti pajānanti, na panetaṃ evarūpaṃ jānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evarūpaṃ jānanaṃ hi sattūpaladdhiṃ na jahati, sattasaññaṃ na ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā vā na hoti. Imassa pana bhikkhuno jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ jahati , sattasaññaṃ ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ ceva satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā ca hoti. Idañhi ‘‘ko vedayati, kassa vedanā, kiṃ kāraṇā vedanā’’ti evaṃ sampajānavediyanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
在这里,“谁在感受?”——并不是有某个众生或某个人在感受。“是谁的受?”——也不是某个众生或某个人的受。“以什么为原因而有受?”——其实只是以身为基础、以境为所缘,才有受。因此他这样了知:“以种种乐等为基础、为所缘,只是受在感受。而只是依据这受的生起,才假立了‘我在感受’这样的说法而已。”当他这样观察——“只是受以身为基础、以境为所缘,只是受在感受”——就应当知道,这就是在了知“我感受乐受”。就像住在质多罗山的那位长老一样。据说那位长老在身体不适时,因为强烈的苦受而呻吟,翻来覆去。一个年轻比丘问他:“尊者,您哪个部位疼?”(长老回答:)“贤友,并没有什么单独疼的地方;只是以身为基础、以境为所缘,只是受在感受罢了。”(年轻比丘说:)“尊者,那么从这样了知的时候起,就应该忍耐了吧?”“贤友,我在忍耐。”“尊者,忍耐更好。”长老就忍耐下来。此后,风病一直撕裂到心脏,肠子堆落在床上。长老指给那个年轻比丘看:“贤友,够了,能忍到这个地步就行了。”年轻比丘沉默了。长老调匀精进,连同无碍解一起证得阿罗汉果,成为等首者而入般涅槃。巴利
Tattha ko vedayatīti na koci satto vā puggalo vā vedayati. Kassa vedanāti na kassaci sattassa vā puggalassa vā vedanā. Kiṃ kāraṇā vedanāti vatthuārammaṇāva panassa vedanā. Tasmā esa evaṃ pajānāti – ‘‘taṃ taṃ sukhādīnaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayati. Taṃ pana vedanāpavattiṃ upādāya ‘ahaṃ vedayāmī’ti vohāramattaṃ hotī’’ti. Evaṃ vedanāva vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayatīti sallakkhento esa ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānātīti veditabbo. Cittalapabbate aññataro thero viya. Thero kira aphāsukakāle balavavedanāya nitthunanto aparāparaṃ parivattati. Tameko daharo āha ‘‘kataraṃ vo, bhante, ṭhānaṃ rujjatī’’ti. Āvuso, pāṭiyekkaṃ rujjanaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi, vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayatīti. Evaṃ jānanakālato paṭṭhāya adhivāsetuṃ vaṭṭati no, bhanteti. Adhivāsemi āvusoti. Adhivāsanā, bhante, seyyāti. Thero adhivāsesi. Tato vāto yāva hadayā phālesi, mañcake antāni rāsikatāni ahesuṃ. Thero daharassa dassesi ‘‘vaṭṭatāvuso, ettakā adhivāsanā’’ti. Daharo tuṇhī ahosi. Thero vīriyasamataṃ yojetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇitvā samasīsī hutvā parinibbāyi.
就像对乐受一样,对苦受……乃至当他感受非世俗的不苦不乐受时,他了知“我感受非世俗的不苦不乐受”。这样,世尊说完色业处之后,接着讲无色业处时,是依受来开示的。业处有两种:色业处和无色业处,这也叫做“色把握”和“无色把握”。其中,世尊讲色业处时,无论是以简略作意的方式,还是以详细作意的方式,都教导了四界差别。这两种方式在《清净道论》中都已经完整说明了。巴利
Yathā ca sukhaṃ, evaṃ dukkhaṃ…pe… nirāmisaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘‘nirāmisaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānāti. Iti bhagavā rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena kathesi. Duvidhañhi kammaṭṭhānaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānañca arūpakammaṭṭhānañca. Rūpapariggaho arūpapariggahotipi etadeva vuccati. Tattha bhagavā rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento saṅkhepamanasikāravasena vā vitthāramanasikāravasena vā catudhātuvavatthānaṃ kathesi. Tadubhayampi sabbākārato visuddhimagge dassitameva.
讲到无色业处时,大多数情况下是依受来讲解的。因为在无色业处中,确实有三种契入方式:依触、依受、依心。怎么讲呢?有的人以简略的方式或以详细的方式把握了色业处之后,在那个所缘上,心和心所最初投向所缘、正在触及那个所缘时生起的触,变得明显。有的人则是正在体验那个所缘时生起的受,变得明显。有的人则是正在把握、了知那个所缘时生起的识,变得明显。其中,对于触变得明显的人,他也这样把握:并不是只有触生起,与它一起,体验同一个所缘的受也生起,认取标记的想也生起,思惟造作的思也生起,了别的识也生起。这样,他就在以触为第五的这组法里把握。对于受变得明显的人,他这样把握:并不是只有受生起,与它一起,触及同一个所缘的触也生起,认取标记的想也生起,思惟造作的思也生起,了别的识也生起。这样,他也在以触为第五的这组法里把握。对于识变得明显的人,他这样把握:并不是只有识生起,与它一起,触及同一个所缘的触也生起,体验的受也生起,认取标记的想也生起,思惟造作的思也生起。这样,他也在以触为第五的这组法里把握。巴利
Arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ pana kathento yebhuyyena vedanāvasena katheti. Tividho hi arūpakammaṭṭhāne abhiniveso phassavasena vedanāvasena cittavasenāti. Kathaṃ? Ekaccassa hi saṃkhittena vā vitthārena vā pariggahite rūpakammaṭṭhāne tasmiṃ ārammaṇe cittacetasikānaṃ paṭhamābhinipāto taṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusanto uppajjamāno phasso pākaṭo hoti. Ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ anubhavantī uppajjamānā vedanā pākaṭā hoti. Ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā vijānantaṃ uppajjamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Tattha yassa phasso pākaṭo hoti, sopi ‘‘na kevalaṃ phassova uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ tadeva ārammaṇaṃ anubhavamānā vedanāpi uppajjati, sañjānanamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi, vijānanamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa vedanā pākaṭā hoti. So ‘‘na kevalaṃ vedanāva uppajjati, tāya saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, sañjānanamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi, vijānanamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, so ‘‘na kevalaṃ viññāṇameva uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, anubhavamānā vedanāpi, sañjānanamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi uppajjatī’’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti.
他这样审察:“这些以触为第五的法,是依什么而存在的?”然后知道:“它们是依所依而存在的。”所谓所依,就是业所生的身体,经里就是针对这个而说:“我的这个识依在这里,系在这里。”从实质上说,它既是诸界,也是所造色。因此,他在这里只见到名色,也就是:“所依是色,以触为第五的是名。”这里,色是色蕴,名是四种非色的蕴,这样就成了只是五蕴。因为离开了名色就没有五蕴,离开了五蕴也没有别的名色。巴利
So ‘‘ime phassapañcamakā dhammā kiṃ nissitā’’ti upadhārento ‘‘vatthuṃ nissitā’’ti pajānāti. Vatthu nāma karajakāyo, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘idañca me viññāṇaṃ ettha sitaṃ ettha paṭibaddha’’nti (dī. ni. 1.234,235; ma. ni. 2.252). So atthato bhūtāni ceva upādārūpāni ca. Evamettha ‘‘vatthu rūpaṃ, phassapañcamakā nāma’’nti nāmarūpamattameva passati. Rūpaṃ cettha rūpakkhandho, nāmaṃ cattāro arūpino khandhāti pañcakkhandhamattaṃ hoti. Nāmarūpavinimuttā hi pañcakkhandhā, pañcakkhandhavinimuttañca nāmarūpaṃ natthi.
他这样审察:“这五蕴是以什么为因的?”于是看到:“是以无明等为因的。”由此他明白:这里只有缘以及缘所生之法,并没有另一个众生或人,纯粹只是诸行的堆积而已。这样,他依据有缘的名色而安立三相,顺着观修的次第,反复思惟“无常、苦、无我”而修行。巴利
So ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā kiṃ hetukā’’ti upaparikkhanto ‘‘avijjādihetukā’’ti passati. Tato paccayo ceva paccayuppannañca idaṃ, añño satto vā puggalo vā natthi, suddhasaṅkhārapuñjamattamevāti sappaccayanāmarūpavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti sammasanto vicarati.
他盼着“今天就能证悟,今天就能证悟”,在那样一个时节合适、人合适、饮食合适、闻法合适的日子里,得到这样的条件后,以盘腿坐姿坐下,把观修推到顶点,最终安住在阿拉汉果。这样一来,对这三类人,业处就已经讲到了阿拉汉果为止。巴利
So ‘‘ajja ajjā’’ti paṭivedhaṃ ākaṅkhamāno tathārūpe divase utusappāya puggalasappāya bhojanasappāya dhammassavanasappāyaṃ labhitvā ekapallaṅkena nisinno vipassanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā arahatte patiṭṭhāti. Evaṃ imesampi tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti.
在这里,世尊开示无色业处时,是依受来说的。因为如果依触或依识来说,就不清楚,像一片黑暗。但依受来说就清楚。为什么?因为受的生起很清楚。乐受和苦受的生起确实很明显。当乐生起时,它搅动整个身体,压迫、遍满、灌注全身,就像让人吃下百次提炼的酥油,像涂上百次提炼的油,像用一千罐水浇灭灼热,它生起时让人喊出:“啊,乐啊!啊,乐啊!”当苦生起时,它搅动整个身体,压迫、遍满、灌注全身,像把烧红的铁片插进去,像浇下熔化的铜汁,像在干草枯木的林中扔下燃烧的柴捆,它生起时让人发出“啊,苦啊!啊,苦啊!”的狂乱叫喊。这样,乐受和苦受的生起就很清楚。巴利
Idha pana bhagavā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena kathesi. Phassavasena vā hi viññāṇavasena vā kathīyamānaṃ na pākaṭaṃ hoti, andhakāraṃ viya khāyati. Vedanāvasena pana pākaṭaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Vedanānaṃ uppattipākaṭatāya. Sukhadukkhavedanānañhi uppatti pākaṭā. Yadā sukhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ khobhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ abhisandayamānaṃ satadhotaṃ sappiṃ khādāpayantaṃ viya satapākatelaṃ makkhayamānaṃ viya ghaṭasahassena pariḷāhaṃ nibbāpayamānaṃ viya ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’nti vācaṃ nicchārayamānameva uppajjati. Yadā dukkhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ khobhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ abhisandayamānaṃ tattaphālaṃ pavesentaṃ viya vilīnatambalohena āsiñcantaṃ viya sukkhatiṇavanappatimhi araññe dāruukkākalāpaṃ khipamānaṃ viya ‘‘aho dukkhaṃ aho dukkha’’nti vippalāpayamānameva uppajjati. Iti sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ uppatti pākaṭā hoti.
不苦不乐受则难以显示,像黑暗一样不清楚。当苦与乐消失时,它以排斥乐与不乐、处于中舍状态的方式,被称为不苦不乐受——对于这样依理路来把握它的人来说,它就是清楚的。像什么呢?就像猎人追踪一只爬上平坦岩石后逃走的鹿。他在平坦岩石的这一侧和那一侧都看到了足迹,虽然中间看不到,但他依理路知道:它从这里爬上去,从这里下来,在中间一定是沿着这个区域过去的。同样,就像爬上去处的足迹,乐受的生起是清楚的;就像下来处的足迹,苦受的生起是清楚的;而就像依理路把握在这里爬上去、在这里下来、在中间这样经过,对于在苦与乐消失时以排斥乐与不乐、处于中舍状态的方式依理路把握不苦不乐受的人来说,它就是清楚的。就这样,世尊先讲了色的业处,之后才依受生起无色的业处来显示它。巴利
Adukkhamasukhā pana duddīpanā andhakārāva avibhūtā. Sā sukhadukkhānaṃ apagame sātāsātappaṭikkhepavasena majjhattākārabhūtā adukkhamasukhā vedanāti nayato gaṇhantassa pākaṭā hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā antarā piṭṭhipāsāṇaṃ ārohitvā palātassa migassa anupathaṃ gacchanto migaluddako piṭṭhipāsāṇassa orabhāgepi parabhāgepi padaṃ disvā majjhe apassantopi ‘‘ito āruḷho, ito oruḷho, majjhe piṭṭhipāsāṇe iminā padesena gato bhavissatī’’ti nayato jānāti, evaṃ āruḷhaṭṭhāne padaṃ viya hi sukhavedanāya uppatti pākaṭā hoti. Oruḷhaṭṭhāne padaṃ viya dukkhavedanāya uppatti pākaṭā hoti. ‘‘Ito āruyha ito oruyha majjhe evaṃ gato’’ti nayato gahaṇaṃ viya sukhadukkhānaṃ apagame sātāsātappaṭikkhepavasena majjhattākārabhūtā adukkhamasukhā vedanāti nayato gaṇhantassa pākaṭā hoti. Evaṃ bhagavā paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ vedanāvasena nibbattetvāva dassesi.
世尊并不只是在这里才这样显示。在《小渴爱灭尽经》《大渴爱灭尽经》《小吠陀罗经》《大吠陀罗经》《赖吒和罗经》《摩犍提经》《界分别经》《不动适业经》,以及《长部》的《大因缘经》《帝释问经》《大念处经》,《相应部》的《小因缘经》《树譬喻经》《遍寻求经》,乃至整部《受相应》等许多经典中,世尊都是先讲色业处,然后才让无色业处生起,也就是依着受来显示它。就像在那些经典中一样,在这部《念处经》里,也是先讲色业处,之后让无色业处生起,即依着受来显示它。巴利
Na kevalañca idheva evaṃ dassesi, cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhaye, mahātaṇhāsaṅkhaye, cūḷavedalle, mahāvedalle, raṭṭhapālasutte, māgaṇḍiyasutte, dhātuvibhaṅge, āneñjasappāye, dīghanikāyamhi mahānidāne, sakkapañhe, mahāsatipaṭṭhāne, saṃyuttamhi cūḷanidānasutte, rukkhopame, parivīmaṃsanasutte, sakale vedanāsaṃyutteti evaṃ anekesu suttesu paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ vedanāvasena nibbattetvā dassesi. Yathā ca tesu, evaṃ imasmimpi satipaṭṭhānasutte paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ vedanāvasena nibbattetvā dassesi.
在这里,“乐受”等说法中,还有另一种了知的方式:他感受乐受时,了知“我感受乐受”。也就是说,在乐受生起的那一刻,因为苦受不存在,正在感受乐受的人便了知“我感受乐受”。由于过去曾体验过的苦受如今已不存在,而这个乐受在此之前也还没有生起,所以受就是无常的、不持久的、会变坏的法。这样,他在这件事上就具足正知。巴利
Tattha sukhaṃ vedanantiādīsu ayaṃ aparopi pajānanapariyāyo – sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmīti pajānātīti sukhavedanākkhaṇe dukkhāya vedanāya abhāvato sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānāti. Tena yā pubbe anubhūtapubbā dukkhā vedanā, tassā idāni abhāvato imissā ca sukhāya vedanāya ito paṭhamaṃ abhāvato vedanā nāma aniccā adhuvā vipariṇāmadhammā, itiha tattha sampajāno hoti.
世尊也确实这样说过:巴利
Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
火种,当一个人感受乐受时,那时他既不感受苦受,也不感受不苦不乐受,那时他感受的只是乐受。火种,当他感受苦受……(中略)……当他感受不苦不乐受时,那时他既不感受乐受,也不感受苦受,那时他感受的只是不苦不乐受。火种,乐受也是无常的、有为的、缘生的、灭尽法、衰灭法、离贪法、灭法。苦受也是……(中略)……火种,不苦不乐受也是无常的……(中略)……灭法。火种,这样观察的多闻圣弟子,对乐受、对苦受、对不苦不乐受都厌离;因为厌离而离贪,因为离贪而解脱;在解脱时,生起“已解脱”的智。他了知:“生已尽,梵行已立,应作已作,不再有此后之生。”巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ aggivessana samaye sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, neva tasmiṃ samaye dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, na adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, sukhaṃyeva tasmiṃ samaye vedanaṃ vedeti, yasmiṃ aggivessana samaye dukkhaṃ…pe… adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, neva tasmiṃ samaye sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, na dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, adukkhamasukhaññeva tasmiṃ samaye vedanaṃ vedeti. Sukhāpi kho aggivessana vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā paṭiccasamuppannā khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā. Dukkhāpi kho…pe… adukkhamasukhāpi kho aggivessana vedanā aniccā…pe… nirodhadhammā. Evaṃ passaṃ aggivessana sutavā ariyasāvako sukhāyapi vedanāya dukkhāyapi vedanāya adukkhamasukhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, nibbindaṃ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati, vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hoti. ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ, nāparaṃ itthattāyā’ti pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.205).
在“有染着的乐”等说法中,所谓“有染着的乐”,是指依止于五种欲乐之染的六种与在家相应的悦受。所谓“无染着的乐”,是指六种与出离相应的悦受。所谓“有染着的苦”,是指六种与在家相应的忧受。所谓“无染着的苦”,是指六种与出离相应的忧受。所谓“有染着的不苦不乐”,是指六种与在家相应的舍受。所谓“无染着的不苦不乐”,是指六种与出离相应的舍受。对它们的分别,在《后五十经篇》的经文中已经讲到了。巴利
Sāmisaṃ vā sukhantiādīsu sāmisā sukhā nāma pañcakāmaguṇāmisanissitā cha gehasitasomanassavedanā. Nirāmisā sukhā nāma cha nekkhammasitasomanassavedanā. Sāmisā dukkhā nāma cha gehasitadomanassavedanā. Nirāmisā dukkhā nāma cha nekkhammasitadomanassavedanā. Sāmisā adukkhamasukhā nāma cha gehasitaupekkhā vedanā. Nirāmisā adukkhamasukhā nāma cha nekkhammasitaupekkhā vedanā. Tāsaṃ vibhāgo uparipaṇṇāsake pāḷiyaṃ āgatoyeva.
“于内”这句是说:像这样通过把握乐受等,他要么在自己的诸受上,要么在他人的诸受上,要么有时在自己的诸受上、有时在他人的诸受上,安住于随观诸受。“或随观集法、灭法”这句里则应当知道:通过“以无明集而有受集”等《无碍解道》1.50所说的五种、五种方式,观察诸受的集与灭,他要么安住于在诸受上随观集法,要么安住于在诸受上随观灭法,要么有时安住于在诸受上随观集法、有时安住于在诸受上随观灭法。从这里往后,和身随观里所说的一样。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ sukhavedanādipariggahaṇena attano vā vedanāsu, parassa vā vedanāsu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati. Samudayavayadhammānupassī vāti ettha pana ‘‘avijjāsamudayā vedanāsamudayo’’tiādīhi (paṭi. ma. 1.50) pañcahi pañcahi ākārehi vedanānaṃ samudayañca vayañca passanto samudayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati, kālena samudayadhammānupassī vā, kālena vayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharatīti veditabbo. Ito paraṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayameva.
在这里,仅仅把把握受的正念连结为“苦谛”之后,就应当知道:对这位把握受的比丘来说,这就是出离之门。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Kevalañhi idha vedanāpariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā vedanāpariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
心随观的注释巴利
Cittānupassanāvaṇṇanā
114 114. 这样用九种方式讲完受随观念处之后,现在为了用十六种方式讲心随观,说了“如何,诸比丘”等话。其中,“有贪”指八种与贪俱行的心。“离贪”指世间的善心和无记心。不过,因为这里是思惟观察,不是法的归类,所以在这里,即使一个词里也找不到出世间心。其余四种不善心,既不属于前一句,也不属于后一句。“有嗔”指两种与嗔俱行的心。“离嗔”指世间的善心和无记心。其余十种不善心,既不属于前一句,也不属于后一句。“有痴”指与疑俱行及与掉举俱行的两种心。然而因为痴生起于一切不善心中,所以那些不善心在此也同样适用。正是在这一对之中,十二种不善心被包揽无余。“离痴”指世间善心及无记心。“收缩的心”指被昏沉、睡眠所覆盖之心,因该心是蜷缩的。“散乱的心”指与掉举俱行之心,因该心是散乱的。巴利
114. Evaṃ navavidhena vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā idāni soḷasavidhena cittānupassanaṃ kathetuṃ kathañca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha sarāganti aṭṭhavidhaṃ lobhasahagataṃ. Vītarāganti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Idaṃ pana yasmā sammasanaṃ na dhammasamodhānaṃ, tasmā idha ekapadepi lokuttaraṃ na labbhati. Sesāni cattāri akusalacittāni neva purimapadaṃ, na pacchimapadaṃ bhajanti. Sadosanti duvidhaṃ dosasahagataṃ . Vītadosanti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Sesāni dasākusalacittāni neva purimaṃ padaṃ, na pacchimaṃ padaṃ bhajanti. Samohanti vicikicchāsahagatañceva uddhaccasahagatañcāti duvidhaṃ. Yasmā pana moho sabbākusalesu uppajjati, tasmā tānipi idha vaṭṭantiyeva. Imasmiṃyeva hi duke dvādasākusalacittāni pariyādiṇṇānīti. Vītamohanti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Saṃkhittanti thinamiddhānupatitaṃ, etañhi saṃkuṭitacittaṃ nāma. Vikkhittanti uddhaccasahagataṃ, etañhi pasaṭacittaṃ nāma.
广大心指色界与无色界的心。非广大心指欲界的心。有上指欲界的心。无上指色界与无色界的心。在这两者当中,色界心仍属有上,只有无色界心才是无上。有定心指具有安止定或近行定的心。无定心指两种定都没有的心。解脱心指通过彼分解脱和镇伏解脱而获得解脱的心。未解脱心指不具备这两种解脱的心;至于断解脱、止息解脱和出离解脱,在这里根本没有涉及。巴利
Mahaggatanti rūpārūpāvacaraṃ. Amahaggatanti kāmāvacaraṃ. Sauttaranti kāmāvacaraṃ. Anuttaranti rūpāvacarañca arūpāvacarañca. Tatrāpi sauttaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ, anuttaraṃ arūpāvacarameva. Samāhitanti yassa appanāsamādhi upacārasamādhi vā atthi. Asamāhitanti ubhayasamādhivirahitaṃ. Vimuttanti tadaṅgavikkhambhanavimuttīhi vimuttaṃ. Avimuttanti ubhayavimuttivirahitaṃ, samucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttīnaṃ pana idha okāsova natthi.
“于内”这句是说:像这样,通过把握有贪等状态,对每一个刹那生起的那一颗心都一一观察,他或观察自己的心,或观察他人的心,或有时观察自己的心,或有时观察他人的心,如此随观心而安住。“随观集法与灭法”这里,则应当以各五种方式、共五种方式引出识的集起与灭去,比如“以无明集而有识集”这样。从这里往后,就按前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Itiajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ sarāgādipariggahaṇena yasmiṃ yasmiṃ khaṇe yaṃ yaṃ cittaṃ pavattati, taṃ taṃ sallakkhento attano vā citte, parassa vā citte, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa citte cittānupassī viharati. Samudayavayadhammānupassīti ettha pana ‘‘avijjāsamudayā viññāṇasamudayo’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.50) evaṃ pañcahi pañcahi ākārehi viññāṇassa samudayo ca vayo ca nīharitabbo. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
在这里,仅仅是把能把握心的那个念本身就当成了苦谛。这样联系起来之后,应当知道,对正在把握心的比丘来说,这就是出离之门。其余内容和前面所说的一样。巴利
Kevalañhi idha cittapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā cittapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
法随观的盖部分注释巴利
Dhammānupassanā nīvaraṇapabbavaṇṇanā
115 115. 像这样用十六种方式讲完心随观念处之后,现在为了用五种方式讲法随观,就说了“诸比丘,如何……”等话。另外,世尊通过身随观讲的是把握纯粹色法,通过受随观和心随观讲的是把握纯粹非色法。现在为了讲色法与非色法混合在一起的把握,就说了“诸比丘,如何……”等话。或者也可以说,身随观讲的就是对色蕴的把握,受随观讲的就是对受蕴的把握,心随观讲的就是对识蕴的把握;所以现在为了也讲想蕴和行蕴的把握,就说了“诸比丘,如何……”等话。巴利
115. Evaṃ soḷasavidhena cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā idāni pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ kathetuṃ kathañca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Apica bhagavatā kāyānupassanāya suddharūpapariggaho kathito, vedanācittānupassanāhi suddhaarūpapariggaho. Idāni rūpārūpamissakapariggahaṃ kathetuṃ ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha . Kāyānupassanāya vā rūpakkhandhapariggahova kathito, vedanānupassanāya vedanākkhandhapariggahova, cittānupassanāya viññāṇakkhandhapariggahovāti idāni saññāsaṅkhārakkhandhapariggahampi kathetuṃ ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“存在”是指由于反复现行、习以为常而存在。“不存在”是指由于不现行,或者由于已被断除,所以不存在。“以及怎样”是指欲贪生起的原因。“而且他了知此”是指他了知那个原因。按照这个方法,应当了知一切词句的含义。巴利
Tattha santanti abhiṇhasamudācāravasena saṃvijjamānaṃ. Asantanti asamudācāravasena vā pahīnattā vā avijjamānaṃ. Yathā cāti yena kāraṇena kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti. Tañca pajānātīti tañca kāraṇaṃ pajānāti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
在这里,由于对净相的非理作意,欲贪就生起了。所谓净相,就是净本身是净相,以净为所缘的对象也是净相。所谓非理作意,就是不如理的作意、偏离正道的作意,比如把无常当作常、把苦当作乐、把无我当作我、把不净当作净,这样的作意。如果在那上面反复不断地运作,欲贪就会生起。因此世尊说:诸比丘,有净相,在那里反复多修非理作意,这就是让未生的欲贪生起的食,也是让已生的欲贪变得更多、更广大的食。巴利
Tattha subhanimitte ayonisomanasikārena kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti. Subhanimittaṃ nāma subhampi subhanimittaṃ, subhārammaṇampi subhanimittaṃ. Ayonisomanasikāro nāma anupāyamanasikāro uppathamanasikāro anicce niccanti vā dukkhe sukhanti vā anattani attāti vā asubhe subhanti vā manasikāro, taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato kāmacchando uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, subhanimittaṃ, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro , ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa uppādāya uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
不过,对于不净相,通过如理作意,它就会被断除。所谓不净相,就是不净本身,以及不净所缘。所谓如理作意,就是方便作意、最初作意,即对无常的事物作无常想,对苦的事物作苦想,对无我的事物作无我想,对不净的事物作不净想。如果在那上面反复不断地修习,欲贪就会被断除。因此世尊说:诸比丘,有不净相,在那里多修习如理作意,这就是让未生的欲贪不生的非食,也是让已生的欲贪断除的非食。巴利
Asubhanimitte pana yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Asubhanimittaṃ nāma asubhampi asubhārammaṇampi. Yonisomanasikāro nāma upāyamanasikāro pathamanasikāro anicce aniccanti vā dukkhe dukkhanti vā anattani anattāti vā asubhe asubhanti vā manasikāro, taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato kāmacchando pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, asubhanimittaṃ, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamanāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除欲贪:取不净相、修习不净、守护根门、饮食知量、亲近善知识、说适当的话。因为,取十种不净相的人能断除欲贪,修习不净的人也能,根门紧闭的人也能,当还有容纳四五口食物的余地时,喝水维持而饮食知量的人也能。因此这样说:巴利
Apica cha dhammā kāmacchandassa pahānāya saṃvattanti asubhanimittassa uggaho asubhabhāvanānuyogo indriyesu guttadvāratā bhojane mattaññutā kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Dasavidhañhi asubhanimittaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi kāmacchando pahīyati, bhāventassāpi, indriyesu pihitadvārassāpi, catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ ālopānaṃ okāse sati udakaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlatāya bhojane mattaññunopi. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ –
吃了四五口饭,还没吃完就喝水;
这足以让心志坚定的比丘住得安稳快乐。巴利
‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
亲近像修习不净业处帝须长老那样、乐于修习不净观的善知识,即使只是亲近这样的人,欲贪也会被断除;在站立、坐下等日常活动中,只要谈论与十种不净相关的、有助于修行的适当话题,欲贪也会被断除。因此说:“有六种法能导向欲贪的断除。”而通过这六种法已经断除了欲贪的人,他能清楚地知道:这欲贪在未来将因阿罗汉道而不再生起。巴利
Asubhakammikatissattherasadise asubhabhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi kāmacchando pahīyati, ṭhānanisajjādīsu dasaasubhanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā kāmacchandassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa kāmacchandassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
而对可憎相不如理作意,嗔恨就会生起。这里,可憎的事物本身是可憎相,能引发嗔恨的所缘也是可憎相。不如理作意,在一切情况下都是同一个特征。若对那个相反复不断地发动这种作意,嗔恨就会生起。因此世尊说:诸比丘,有可憎相存在;在那里反复不如理作意,这就是让未生的嗔恨生起、已生的嗔恨增长广大的食。巴利
Paṭighanimitte ayonisomanasikārena pana byāpādassa uppādo hoti. Tattha paṭighampi paṭighanimittaṃ, paṭighārammaṇampi paṭighanimittaṃ. Ayonisomanasikāro sabbattha ekalakkhaṇova. Taṃ tasmiṃ nimitte bahulaṃ pavattayato byāpādo uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, paṭighanimittaṃ, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā byāpādassa uppādāya uppannassa vā byāpādassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
通过慈心解脱的如理作意,嗔恨就被断除。在这里,凡是提到“慈”的时候,近行定和安止定都算数;而“心解脱”则只指安止定。如理作意的特征前面已经说过,是一样的。反复不断地让这种作意运转起来,嗔恨就被断除了。所以世尊说:“比丘们,有慈心解脱;在那里多修习如理作意,这就是让还没生起的嗔恨不生起、已经生起的嗔恨被断除的非食。”巴利
Mettāya pana cetovimuttiyā yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Tattha tattha ‘‘mettā’’ti vutte appanāpi upacāropi vaṭṭati. ‘‘Cetovimuttī’’ti appanāva. Yonisomanasikāro vuttalakkhaṇova. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato byāpādo pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, mettā cetovimutti, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamanāhāro anuppannassa vā byāpādassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā byāpādassa pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除嗔恨:修取慈心的相、投入慈心的修习、反复省察众生各随自己的业、多作如理观察、亲近善知识、说合适的话。因为,一个人不管是通过限定范围、不限定范围,还是遍满各个方向中的某一种方式来修取慈心,嗔恨都会被断除;通过限定范围、不限定范围、遍满各个方向来修习慈心,嗔恨也会被断除。像这样省察自己和别人的业自作:“你对他生气,又能把他怎么样?你能毁掉他的戒行等功德吗?你难道不是随着自己的业而来,也会随着自己的业而去吗?对别人发怒,就像想抓起烧透的火炭、烧红的铁棒、粪便之类的东西去打别人一样。这个对你生气的人,又能把你怎么样?他能毁掉你的戒行等功德吗?他也是随着自己的业而来,也会随着自己的业而去。就像没有被人接受的赠礼,又像逆风撒出去的尘土,他的愤怒只会落回他自己头上。”这样省察自己和别人的业自作;或者省察双方的业自作之后,安住在反复观察中;或者亲近像阿沙古答长老那样乐于修习慈心的善知识——通过这些,嗔恨都会被断除。在站立、坐下等威仪中,借着与慈心相应的合适谈论,嗔恨也会被断除。因此说“有六种法能帮助断除嗔恨”。而对于已经通过这六种法断除了嗔恨的人,他能了知:依靠不来道,这嗔恨在未来不会再产生。巴利
Apica cha dhammā byāpādassa pahānāya saṃvattanti mettānimittassa uggaho mettābhāvanānuyogo kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇā paṭisaṅkhānabahutā kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Odhisakaanodhisakadisāpharaṇānañhi aññataravasena mettaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi byāpādo pahīyati, odhiso anodhiso disāpharaṇavasena mettaṃ bhāventassāpi. ‘‘Tvaṃ etassa kuddho kiṃ karissasi, kimassa sīlādīni nāsetuṃ sakkhissasi, nanu tvaṃ attano kammena āgantvā attano kammeneva gamissasi, parassa kujjhanaṃ nāma vītaccitaṅgāra-tattaayasalāka-gūthādīni gahetvā paraṃ paharitukāmatāsadisaṃ hoti. Esopi tava kuddho kiṃ karissati, kiṃ te sīlādīni vināsetuṃ sakkhissati, esa attano kammeneva āgantvā attano kammena gamissati, appaṭicchitapaheṇakaṃ viya paṭivātaṃ khittarajomuṭṭhi viya ca etassevesa kodho matthake patissatī’’ti evaṃ attano ca parassa ca kammassakataṃ paccavekkhatopi, ubhayakammassakataṃ paccavekkhitvā paṭisaṅkhāne ṭhitassāpi, assaguttattherasadise mettābhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi byāpādo pahīyati. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu mettānissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā byāpādassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa byāpādassa anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
在不乐等状态中,由于不如理作意,昏沉睡眠就会生起。所谓不乐,就是心里厌倦。所谓懈怠,就是身体慵懒无力。所谓伸懒腰,就是身体扭动伸展。所谓饭后困倦,就是饭后昏沉、身体燥热。所谓心的消沉,就是心呈现低沉的状态。如果在这不乐等状态中反复不断地进行不如理作意,昏沉睡眠就会生起。因此说:诸比丘,有不乐、懈怠、伸懒腰、饭后困倦、心的消沉;对此多作不如理作意,这就是让未生起的昏沉睡眠生起、已生起的昏沉睡眠变得更多更广大的食粮。巴利
Aratiādīsu ayonisomanasikārena thinamiddhassa uppādo hoti. Arati nāma ukkaṇṭhitā. Tandī nāma kāyālasiyatā. Vijambhitā nāma kāyavināmanā. Bhattasammado nāma bhattamucchā bhattapariḷāho. Cetaso līnattaṃ nāma cittassa līnākāro. Imesu aratiādīsu ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato thinamiddhaṃ uppajjati. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, arati tandī vijambhitā bhattasammado cetaso līnattaṃ, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā thinamiddhassa uppādāya uppannassa vā thinamiddhassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
至于精进界等,则是靠如理作意来断除的。精进界,指的是最初发起的精进。出离界,因为已经从懈怠中出离,所以比前者更强。勇猛界,因为步步迈向更高的境地,所以又比前者更强。在这三种精进中,如果多修习如理作意,昏沉睡眠就会被断除。因此经中说:诸比丘,有精进界、出离界、勇猛界,对此多修习如理作意,这就是让未生起的昏沉睡眠不生起、已生起的昏沉睡眠得以断除的食粮。巴利
Ārambhadhātuādīsu pana yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Ārambhadhātu nāma paṭhamārambhavīriyaṃ. Nikkamadhātu nāma kosajjato nikkhantatāya tato balavataraṃ. Parakkamadhātu nāma paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavataraṃ. Imasmiṃ tippabhede vīriye yonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ārambhadhātu nikkamadhātu parakkamadhātu, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā thinamiddhassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā thinamiddhassa pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除昏沉睡眠:在过量饮食时执取相、转换姿势、作意光明想、住在露天处、亲近善知识、以及适当的谈话。比如,有人吃了手长者所供的食物、阿拉毗人所供的食物、用衣布包着的食物、乌鸦啄剩的食物,或是吞下又吐出的食物之后,坐在夜间住处或白天住处修习沙门法,昏沉睡眠就会像一头巨象一样笼罩过来。反过来,如果比丘习惯只留四五团饭那么大的空间,喝点水维持着,就不会有这种情况。像这样,即使在过量饮食上执取其相,昏沉睡眠也能被断除。在哪种姿势中昏沉睡眠袭来,就转换到另一种姿势,这样也能断除;夜里作意月光、灯光、火炬光,白天作意日光,也能断除;住在露天处,也能断除;亲近像大迦叶长老那样已断除昏沉睡眠的善知识,也能断除;在站立、坐下等当中,依头陀支作适当的谈话,也能断除。因此说“有六种法能帮助断除昏沉睡眠”。以这六种法断除昏沉睡眠之后,他了知:这昏沉睡眠已由阿罗汉道断除,未来不再生起。巴利
Apica cha dhammā thinamiddhassa pahānāya saṃvattanti, atibhojane nimittaggāho iriyāpathasamparivattanatā ālokasaññāmanasikāro abbhokāsavāso kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Āharahatthakatatravaṭṭakaalaṃsāṭakakākamāsakabhuttavamitakabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā rattiṭṭhāne divāṭṭhāne nisinnassa hi samaṇadhammaṃ karoto thinamiddhaṃ mahāhatthī viya ottharantaṃ āgacchati. Catupañcaālopaokāsaṃ pana ṭhapetvā pānīyaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlassa bhikkhuno taṃ na hotīti evaṃ atibhojane nimittaṃ gaṇhantassāpi thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Yasmiṃ iriyāpathe thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, tato aññaṃ parivattentassāpi, rattiṃ candālokadīpālokaukkāloke divā sūriyālokaṃ manasikarontassāpi, abbhokāse vasantassāpi, mahākassapattherasadise pahīnathinamiddhe kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu dhutaṅganissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā thinamiddhassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti . Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa thinamiddhassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
心里不平静的时候,如果不如理作意,掉举和后悔就会生起。所谓不平静,就是心不安静的状态,实际上说的就是掉举和后悔本身。在这里,如果反复地做不如理作意,掉举和后悔就会生起。所以经中说:“比丘们,有心的不平静,在那里,反复做不如理作意,这就是让还没生起的掉举和后悔生起、已经生起的掉举和后悔变得更多更广大的食粮。”巴利
Cetaso avūpasame ayonisomanasikārena uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādo hoti. Avūpasamo nāma avūpasantākāro. Uddhaccakukkuccamevetaṃ atthato. Tattha ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato uddhaccakukkuccaṃ uppajjati. Tenāha ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, cetaso avūpasamo, tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādāya uppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
而在被称为“定”的心寂静之中,通过如理作意,其寂静得以成就。因此说:“比丘们,存在心的寂静;在那里,反复修习如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的掉举后悔不生起、让已经生起的掉举后悔被断除的食粮。”巴利
Samādhisaṅkhāte pana cetaso vūpasame yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, cetaso vūpasamo, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa anuppādāya uppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除掉举和后悔:多闻、喜欢发问、精通戒律、亲近年长有德的人、亲近善知识、以及有益的谈话。因为多闻的人,即使只是学习一部、两部、三部、四部或五部尼柯耶,无论从经文语句上还是从义理上学习,他的掉举和后悔也会被断除。经常问什么是允许的、什么是不允许的,也会断除;因为对戒律的制定非常熟练自在而精通戒律的人,也会断除;去拜访年长的大长老的人,也会断除;亲近像优波离长老那样持律的善知识的人,也会断除。在站立、坐下等日常活动中,谈论与允许不允许相关且有益的话题,也能断除。因此说:“有六种法能帮助断除掉举和后悔。”当这六种法已经断除了掉举和后悔之后,他了知:掉举在未来不再生起,是通过阿罗汉道断除的;后悔在未来不再生起,是通过不来道断除的。巴利
Apica cha dhammā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattanti bahussutatā paripucchakatā vinaye pakataññutā vuddhasevitā kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Bāhusaccenapi hi ekaṃ vā dve vā tayo vā cattāro vā pañca vā nikāye pāḷivasena ca atthavasena ca uggaṇhantassāpi uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati. Kappiyākappiyaparipucchābahulassāpi, vinayapaññattiyaṃ ciṇṇavasibhāvatāya pakataññunopi, vuddhe mahallakatthere upasaṅkamantassāpi, upālittherasadise vinayadhare kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu kappiyākappiyanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cha dhammā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīne uddhaccakukkucce uddhaccassa arahattamaggena kukkuccassa anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
对于会成为疑的所依的诸法,由于不如理作意,疑就生起。所谓“会成为疑的所依的诸法”,就是那些一再成为疑之因的法,它们就是疑本身。在那里,对于不断使不如理作意大量生起者,疑就会产生。因此说:“诸比丘,有会成为疑的所依的诸法,在那里,不如理作意被反复修习,这就是使未生的疑生起、已生的疑进一步增长广大的食。”巴利
Vicikicchāṭṭhānīyesu dhammesu ayonisomanasikārena vicikicchāya uppādo hoti. Vicikicchāṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma punappunaṃ vicikicchāya kāraṇattā vicikicchāva. Tattha ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato vicikicchā uppajjati. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, vicikicchāṭṭhānīyā dhammā , tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannāya vā vicikicchāya uppādāya uppannāya vā vicikicchāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
在善等诸法中,依靠如理作意,疑惑就会被断除。因此说:“比丘们,有善与不善的法,有有罪与无罪的法,有应亲近与不应亲近的法,有低劣与殊胜的法,有黑与白相对的法;在那里,多修习如理作意,就是让未生起的疑惑不生起、让已生起的疑惑被断除的食物。”巴利
Kusalādīsu dhammesu yonisomanasikārena panassā pahānaṃ hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā sāvajjānavajjā dhammā sevitabbāsevitabbā dhammā hīnappaṇītā dhammā kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro , ayamāhāro anuppannāya vā vicikicchāya anuppādāya uppannāya vā vicikicchāya pahānāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
另外,有六种法能帮助断除疑惑:多闻、喜欢发问、对律精通、决意力强、亲近善知识、谈论合适的话题。因为即使一个人只是多闻,按经文和义理学习一部……乃至五部尼柯耶,疑惑也能被断除。对于经常就三宝发问的人,对于在律中修行纯熟、运用自如的人,对于对三宝具有坚定净信、决意力强的人,对于亲近像婆迦梨长老那样信解坚定的善知识的人,疑惑也能被断除。在站立、坐下等日常行为中,以三宝功德为依托的合适谈话,也能使疑惑断除。因此说:“六种法能帮助断除疑惑。”他清楚地知道,依靠这六种法断除了疑惑之后,通过入流道,未来不会再产生疑惑。巴利
Apica cha dhammā vicikicchāya pahānāya saṃvattanti bahussutatā paripucchakatā vinaye pakataññutā adhimokkhabahulatā kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathāti. Bāhusaccenapi hi ekaṃ vā…pe… pañca vā nikāye pāḷivasena atthavasena ca uggaṇhantassāpi vicikicchā pahīyati. Tīṇi ratanāni ārabbha paripucchābahulassāpi, vinaye ciṇṇavasibhāvassāpi, tīsu ratanesu okappaniyasaddhāsaṅkhātaadhimokkhabahulassāpi, saddhādhimutte vakkalittherasadise kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi vicikicchā pahīyati. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ guṇanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cha dhammā vicikicchāya pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnāya vicikicchāya sotāpattimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
“或于内”这句话的意思是:像这样,通过把握这五种盖,他或是就自己的法、或是就他人的法,或有时就自己的法、有时就他人的法,随观法而安住。在这里,集与灭应当依照前面讲五盖时所说的方式,从净相、不净相等方面的不如理作意与如理作意来导出。从这里往后,都和前面所说的一样。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ pañcanīvaraṇapariggahaṇena attano vā dhammesu, parassa vā dhammesu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha subhanimitta asubhanimittādīsu ayonisomanasikārayonisomanasikāravasena pañcasu nīvaraṇesu vuttanayena nīharitabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
在这里,只要把“把握诸盖的念就是苦圣谛”这样连接起来理解,就应该知道:那位把握诸盖的比丘,其趣向解脱的门径是什么。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Kevalañhi idha nīvaraṇapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā nīvaraṇapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
蕴生起注释巴利
Khandhapabbavaṇṇanā
116 116. 这样以五盖分别法随观之后,现在为了以五蕴来分别,又说了“复次……”等话。其中,“在五取蕴中”的意思是:被取着的蕴就是取蕴,也就是作为取的缘而存在的法聚、法堆。这是这里的简要说明。详细的蕴的讨论则在《清净道论》中说过。他这样以自相了知色:“这是色,只有这么多色,没有超出这个之外的色。”受等也是这样。这是这里的简要说明。详细地说,色等则在《清净道论》的蕴论中已经说过。“色的集起”是指,像这样以无明集起等五种方式而有色的集起。“色的消失”是指,像这样以无明灭等五种方式而有色的消失,受等也是这样。这是这里的简要说明。详细内容则在《清净道论》的生灭智讨论部分说过。巴利
116. Evaṃ pañcanīvaraṇavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni pañcakkhandhavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha pañcasu upādānakkhandhesūti upādānassa khandhā upādānakkhandhā, upādānassa paccayabhūtā dhammapuñjā dhammarāsayoti attho. Ayamettha saṅkhepo . Vitthārato pana khandhakathā visuddhimagge vuttā. Iti rūpanti ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito paraṃ rūpaṃ atthī’’ti sabhāvato rūpaṃ pajānāti. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārena pana rūpādīni visuddhimagge khandhakathāyameva vuttāni. Iti rūpassa samudayoti evaṃ avijjāsamudayādivasena pañcahākārehi rūpassa samudayo. Iti rūpassa atthaṅgamoti evaṃ avijjānirodhādivasena pañcahākārehi rūpassa atthaṅgamo, vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana visuddhimagge udayabbayañāṇakathāyaṃ vutto.
“或于内”等这一句是说:像这样通过把握五蕴,他就在自己的诸法上、或在他人的诸法上,有时在自己的诸法上、有时在他人的诸法上,随观诸法而安住。这里所说的集与灭,应当依据“无明集则色集”等,在五蕴中讲到的五十种相来导出。此后内容,方式就和前面所说的一样。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ pañcakkhandhapariggahaṇena attano vā dhammesu, parassa vā dhammesu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo’’tiādīnaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.50) pañcasu khandhesu vuttānaṃ paññāsāya lakkhaṇānaṃ vasena nīharitabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
这里,只要把能把握诸蕴的念当作苦圣谛来这样连接,就应当知道:那位把握诸蕴的比丘的出离之门。其余部分和前面一样。巴利
Kevalañhi idha khandhapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā khandhapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
处品注释巴利
Āyatanapabbavaṇṇanā
117 像这样,先按五蕴分析了法随观,现在再按处来分析,于是又说“再者……”等话。其中,“在六内处和外处”是指:眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意这六个内处,以及色、声、香、味、触、法这六个外处。“了知眼”,就是依照眼净色真实的特相和作用来了知它。“了知诸色”,就是依照外在的四等起色真实的特相和作用来了知它们。“以及缘于这两者而生起的结”,就是缘于眼和色这两者,生起欲贪结、嗔结、慢结、见结、疑结、戒禁取结、有贪结、嫉结、悭吝结、无明结这十种结,也同样依照它们真实的特相和作用来了知。巴利
117. Evaṃ pañcakkhandhavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni āyatanavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha. Tattha chasu ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesūti cakkhu sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhā kāyo manoti imesu chasu ajjhattikesu rūpaṃ saddo gandho raso phoṭṭhabbo dhammāti imesu chasu bāhiresu. Cakkhuṃ ca pajānātīti cakkhupasādaṃ yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānāti. Rūpe ca pajānātīti bahiddhā catusamuṭṭhānikarūpañca yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānāti. Yañca tadubhayaṃ paṭicca uppajjati saṃyojananti yañca taṃ cakkhuṃ ceva rūpe cāti ubhayaṃ paṭicca kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭigha-māna-diṭṭhi-vicikicchā-sīlabbataparāmāsa-bhavarāga-issā-macchariyāvijjāsaṃyojananti dasavidhaṃ saṃyojanaṃ uppajjati, tañca yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānāti.
那么,这些结是怎么生起的呢?先说在眼门:当一个合意的所缘出现在眼前,人因为贪著欲乐而享受它、欢喜它,欲贪结就生起了。面对不合意的所缘而发怒时,瞋结就生起了。心里想“除了我,没有别人能把这个所缘讲清楚”,慢结就生起了。执取“这个色所缘是恒常的、不变的”,见结就生起了。对这个色所缘犹豫“这是有情吗?是有情所有的吗?”,疑结就生起了。心想“但愿在圆满的存在中,这个色所缘对我们来说变得容易得到”而渴求存在,有贪结就生起了。心想“将来也这样受持戒禁,就能得到它”而受持戒禁,戒禁取结就生起了。心想“但愿别人得不到这个色所缘”而嫉妒,嫉结就生起了。对自己得到的色所缘不肯与他人分享而悭吝,悭吝结就生起了。在这一切当中,由于与它们同时生起的无知,无明结就生起了。巴利
Kathaṃ panetaṃ uppajjatīti? Cakkhudvāre tāva āpāthagataṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ kāmassādavasena assādayato abhinandato kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. Aniṭṭhārammaṇe kujjhato paṭighasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā maṃ na koci añño etaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ samattho atthī’’ti maññato mānasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Etaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ niccaṃ dhuva’’nti gaṇhato diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Etaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ satto nu kho, sattassa nu kho’’ti vicikicchato vicikicchāsaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Sampattibhave vata no idaṃ sulabhaṃ jāta’’nti bhavaṃ patthentassa bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Āyatimpi evarūpaṃ sīlabbataṃ samādiyitvā sakkā laddhu’’nti sīlabbataṃ samādiyantassa sīlabbataparāmāsasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Aho vata etaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ aññe na labheyyu’’nti usūyato issāsaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. Attanā laddhaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ aññassa maccharāyato macchariyasaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati. Sabbeheva sahajātaaññāṇavasena avijjāsaṃyojanaṃ uppajjati.
他怎样了知“未生起的结”?他以什么原因,了知那以尚未现行活动的方式而未生起的十种结将会生起,也了知那个原因。他怎样了知“已生起的结”?对于以尚未断除的状态存在、或者已经现行活动而生起的十种结,他了知它们通过什么原因而被断除。他怎样了知“已断除的结”?对于已经通过部分断除或镇伏断除而断除的十种结,他了知它们通过什么原因在未来不再生起。那么,它们通过什么原因在未来不再生起呢?见结、疑结、戒禁取结、嫉结、悭吝结这五种结,通过入流道在未来不再生起。欲贪结和瞋结这两者中,粗重的部分通过一来道在未来不再生起,细微的部分通过不来道在未来不再生起。慢结、有贪结、无明结这三种结,通过阿拉汉道在未来不再生起。巴利
Yathā ca anuppannassāti yena kāraṇena asamudācāravasena anuppannassa tassa dasavidhassāpi saṃyojanassa uppādo hoti, tañca kāraṇaṃ pajānāti. Yathā ca uppannassāti appahīnaṭṭhena pana samudācāravasena vā uppannassa tassa dasavidhassāpi saṃyojanassa yena kāraṇena pahānaṃ hoti, tañca kāraṇaṃ pajānāti. Yathā ca pahīnassāti tadaṅgavikkhambhanappahānavasena pahīnassāpi tassa dasavidhassa saṃyojanassa yena kāraṇena āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti, tañca pajānāti. Kena kāraṇena panassa āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti? Diṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsaissāmacchariyabhedassa tāva pañcavidhassa saṃyojanassa sotāpattimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti. Kāmarāgapaṭighasaṃyojanadvayassa oḷārikassa sakadāgāmimaggena, aṇusahagatassa anāgāmimaggena, mānabhavarāgāvijjāsaṃyojanattayassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hoti.
他同样了知耳和声等,这里的处理方式也一样。不过在这里,关于处的详细讨论,应当依照《清净道论》中“处分别”部分所讲的方式来了知。巴利
Sotañca pajānāti sadde cā tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Apicettha āyatanakathā vitthārato visuddhimagge āyatananiddese vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
“或于内”的意思是:像这样,通过把握内处,或在自己的诸法上;通过把握外处,或在他人的诸法上;有时在自己的诸法上,有时在他人的诸法上,随观诸法而安住。至于这里的集与灭,应当依照“由无明集故眼集”等所说的方式推演:色处归入色蕴,无色处中意处归入识蕴,法处归入其余诸蕴。出世间法不应取。从此以后,都只是如前所说的方法。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ ajjhattikāyatanapariggahaṇena attano vā dhammesu, bāhirāyatanapariggahaṇena parassa vā dhammesu, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha ‘‘avijjāsamudayā cakkhusamudayo’’ti rūpāyatanassa rūpakkhandhe, arūpāyatanesu manāyatanassa viññāṇakkhandhe, dhammāyatanassa sesakkhandhesu vuttanayena nīharitabbā. Lokuttaradhammā na gahetabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
在这里,只要把能把握诸处的正念连结为“苦谛”来作意,就应当知道:对正在把握诸处的比丘来说,这就是出离之门。其余部分也和前面一样。巴利
Kevalañhi idha āyatanapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā āyatanapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
觉支品的注释巴利
Bojjhaṅgapabbavaṇṇanā
118 118. 这样,按内六处和外六处把法随观分别讲完之后,现在要按觉支来分别,于是又说“再者,比丘们……”等作为开头。其中,“在诸觉支中”是指在能觉悟的有情者的支分中。“存在”是指以已获得的方式而现前。“念觉支”就是名为念的正觉支。这里,从开始修观的行者起就能觉悟,所以叫正觉;或者,他凭借那由念等七种法组成的和合而觉悟、从烦恼的睡眠中醒来,或者通达诸谛,那法的和合就是正觉。那正觉的支分,或者对于那正觉来说的支分,就是正觉支。因此说“名为念的正觉支”。其余的觉支也应当按同样的方式理解词义。巴利
118. Evaṃ cha ajjhattikabāhirāyatanavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni bojjhaṅgavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparanti ādimāha. Tattha bojjhaṅgesūti bujjhanakasattassa aṅgesu. Santanti paṭilābhavasena saṃvijjamānaṃ. Satisambojjhaṅganti satisaṅkhātaṃ sambojjhaṅgaṃ. Ettha hi sambujjhati āraddhavipassakato paṭṭhāya yogāvacaroti sambodhi, yāya vā so satiādikāya sattadhammasāmaggiyā sambujjhati kilesaniddāto uṭṭhāti, saccāni vā paṭivijjhati, sā dhammasāmaggī sambodhi. Tassa sambodhissa, tassā vā sambodhiyā aṅganti sambojjhaṅgaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satisaṅkhātaṃ sambojjhaṅga’’nti. Sesasambojjhaṅgesupi imināva nayena vacanattho veditabbo.
“不存在”是指由于没有得到所以不存在。至于“未生起”等说法中,先拿念觉支来说:“比丘们,有作为念觉支生起基础的法,在那里如理作意并反复修习,这就是让未生起的念觉支得以生起、让已生起的念觉支增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。”像这样,念觉支就生起了。其中,念本身就是作为念觉支生起基础的法。如理作意就是前面说过的那个特征,当人在那里反复修习它时,念觉支就会生起。巴利
Asantanti appaṭilābhavasena avijjamānaṃ. Yathā ca anuppannassātiādīsu pana satisambojjhaṅgassa tāva – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā satisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.183) evaṃ uppādo hoti . Tattha satiyeva satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā. Yonisomanasikāro vuttalakkhaṇoyeva, taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato satisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati.
另外,有四种法能帮助念觉支生起:念与正知、避开失念的人、亲近具念的人、心倾向于念。也就是说,在前进、后退等七种场合中具足念与正知,避开像把食物丢在一边的乌鸦那样失念的人,亲近像帝须达多长老、无畏长老那样具念的人,并且在站立、坐下等场合,为了让念生起而使心倾向于、偏向于、朝向于念,念觉支就会生起。这样,由四种原因生起的念觉支,通过阿罗汉道达到修习圆满,他如实了知。巴利
Apica cattāro dhammā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti satisampajaññaṃ muṭṭhassatipuggalaparivajjanatā upaṭṭhitassatipuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti. Abhikkantādīsu hi sattasu ṭhānesu satisampajaññena bhattanikkhittakākasadise muṭṭhassatipuggale parivajjanena tissadattattheraabhayattherasadise upaṭṭhitassatipuggale sevanena ṭhānanisajjādīsu satisamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatāya ca satisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. Evaṃ catūhi kāraṇehi uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
关于择法觉支,则是这样说的:“比丘们,有善与不善的法……乃至……有黑白相对的法。在那里,反复如理作意,这就是尚未生起的择法觉支得以生起的食,也是已经生起的择法觉支得以增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。”(《相应部》5.232)它就是这样生起的。巴利
Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pana – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā…pe… kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) evaṃ uppādo hoti.
另外,有七种法能帮助择法觉支生起:多提问、使依处清净、平衡诸根、远离愚钝的人、亲近有智慧的人、反复观察甚深智慧的行境、心倾向于它。其中,多提问是指对蕴、界、处、根、力、觉支、道支、禅支、止、观的义理,广泛地提问请教。巴利
Apica satta dhammā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti paripucchakatā vatthuvisadakiriyā indriyasamattapaṭipādanā duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā paññavantapuggalasevanā gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha paripucchakatāti khandhadhātuāyatanaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgajhānaṅgasamathavipassanānaṃ atthasannissitaparipucchābahulatā.
让依处清净,就是让内在的依处和外在的依处都变得清净。当一个人的头发、指甲、体毛长得太长,或者身体积了太多污垢,又被汗水和污秽弄脏,这时候内在的依处就不清净、不干净。当衣服破旧、肮脏、发臭,或者坐卧的地方杂乱不洁,这时候外在的依处就不清净、不干净。所以,应该让人剪掉头发、指甲等,再用催吐、通便等方法让身体变得轻快,还要擦拭身体、沐浴,这样来使内在的依处清净。巴利
Vatthuvisadakiriyāti ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ vatthūnaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Yadā hissa kesanakhalomā atidīghā honti, sarīraṃ vā ussannadosañceva sedamalamakkhitañca, tadā ajjhattikaṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ . Yadā pana cīvaraṃ jiṇṇaṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ duggandhaṃ hoti, senāsanaṃ vā uklāpaṃ, tadā bāhiraṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Tasmā kesādicchedāpanena uddhaṃvirecanaadhovirecanādīhi sarīrasallahukabhāvakaraṇena ucchādananhāpanena ca ajjhattikaṃ vatthu visadaṃ kātabbaṃ.
应当通过缝衣、洗衣、染衣、涂地等行为,使外在的依处变得清净。因为当内在和外在的依处不清净时,生起的心与心所,其智也不清净,就像依靠不干净的灯盏、灯盘、灯芯和油而生起的灯焰,它的光明也不清净。反之,当内在和外在的依处清净时,生起的心与心所,其智也清净,就像依靠干净的灯盏、灯盘、灯芯和油而生起的灯焰,它的光明也清净。因此说:“使依处清净,能促成择法觉支的生起。”巴利
Sūcikammadhovanarajanaparibhaṇḍakaraṇādīhi bāhiraṃ vatthu visadaṃ kātabbaṃ. Etasmiñhi ajjhattikabāhire vatthusmiṃ avisade uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi aparisuddhaṃ hoti, aparisuddhāni dīpakapallakavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Visade pana ajjhattikabāhire vatthumhi uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi visadaṃ hoti, parisuddhāni dīpakapallakavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vatthuvisadakiriyā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattatī’’ti.
所谓“使诸根平衡”,就是让信等诸根达到均等状态。如果他的信根过强,其他诸根就会变弱。这样一来,精进根就无法发挥策励的作用,念根无法发挥安住的作用,定根无法发挥不散乱的作用,慧根无法发挥了见的作用。因此,对于因作意而变得过强的信根,应当通过审察诸法的自性,或者以适当的方式,用不作意来使它减弱。这里可以举婆迦梨长老的事为例。如果精进根变得过强,那么信根就无法发挥决意的作用,其他诸根也无法各自完成各自的作用。因此,应当通过修习轻安等来使它减弱。关于这一点,也应当举首那长老的事为例。同样地,应当了知:在其余诸根中,只要有一根变强,其他诸根就无法圆满完成各自的作用。巴利
Indriyasamattapaṭipādanā nāma saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ samabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Sace hissa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, itarāni mandāni. Tato vīriyindriyaṃ paggahakiccaṃ, satindriyaṃ upaṭṭhānakiccaṃ, samādhindriyaṃ avikkhepakiccaṃ, paññindriyaṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Tasmā taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena vā yathā vā manasikaroto balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena hāpetabbaṃ. Vakkalittherassa vatthu cettha nidassanaṃ. Sace pana vīriyindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, atha neva saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, na itarāni itarakiccabhedaṃ. Tasmā taṃ passaddhādibhāvanāya hāpetabbaṃ. Tatrāpi soṇattherassa vatthu dassetabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi ekassa balavabhāve sati itaresaṃ attano kiccesu asamatthatā veditabbā.
这里特别要赞叹信与慧、定与精进这两对达到平衡。因为信强而慧弱的人,就成了盲目轻信的人,会对不该信的对象生起信心。慧强而信弱的人,则会落入狡诈虚伪那一类,就像由药物引起的疾病一样,难以治愈。他心想“只要生起一念善心就够了”,于是越过本分,不去做布施等善行,结果投生到地狱。两者平衡时,他才只对真正值得信的对象生起信心。再者,定强而精进弱时,因为定属于懈怠那一方,懈怠就会占上风。精进强而定弱时,因为精进属于掉举那一方,掉举就会占上风。但定如果被精进约束住,就不会陷入懈怠;精进如果被定约束住,就不会陷入掉举。所以,这两者应当保持平衡。只有两者平衡,安止才能生起。巴利
Visesato panettha saddhāpaññānaṃ samādhivīriyānaṃ ca samataṃ pasaṃsanti. Balavasaddho hi mandapañño mudhāpasanno hoti, avatthusmiṃ pasīdati. Balavapañño mandasaddho kerāṭikapakkhaṃ bhajati. Bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hoti. Cittuppādamatteneva kusalaṃ hotīti atidhāvitvā dānādīni akaronto niraye uppajjati. Ubhinnaṃ samatāya vatthusmiṃyeva pasīdati . Balavasamādhiṃ pana mandavīriyaṃ samādhissa kosajjapakkhattā kosajjaṃ adhibhavati. Balavavīriyaṃ mandasamādhiṃ vīriyassa uddhaccapakkhattā uddhaccaṃ adhibhavati . Samādhi pana vīriyena saṃyojito kosajje patituṃ na labhati. Vīriyaṃ samādhinā saṃyojitaṃ uddhacce patituṃ na labhati. Tasmā tadubhayaṃ samaṃ kātabbaṃ. Ubhayasamatāya hi appanā hoti.
另外,对修定的人来说,即使信很强,也是合适的。因为他这样深信、确信,就能达到安止。不过在定和慧这两者当中,修定的人以一境性(定)强为合适,这样他才能达到安止;修观的人以慧强为合适,这样他才能通达诸法之相。而两者平衡时,也同样能达到安止。但念在任何情况下都应该强而有力。因为念能保护心:当信、精进、慧这些偏向掉举方面的心所起作用时,念能防止心掉入掉举;当定这种偏向懈怠方面的心所起作用时,念能防止心掉入懈怠。所以,念就像一切味道中的盐,又像国王所有事务中的全能大臣,在一切方面都应当被需要。因此世尊说:念在一切处都是必要的。为什么呢?因为心以念为依靠,念的作用是守护,没有念,就无法对心进行策励和抑制。巴利
Apica samādhikammikassa balavatīpi saddhā vaṭṭati. Evaṃ saddahanto okappento appanaṃ pāpuṇissati. Samādhipaññāsu pana samādhikammikassa ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati, evañhi so appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Vipassanākammikassa paññā balavatī vaṭṭati, evañhi so lakkhaṇappaṭivedhaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ubhinnaṃ pana samatāyapi appanā hotiyeva. Sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭati. Sati hi cittaṃ uddhaccapakkhikānaṃ saddhāvīriyapaññānaṃ vasena uddhaccapātato, kosajjapakkhikena ca samādhinā kosajjapātato rakkhati. Tasmā sā loṇadhūpanaṃ viya sabbabyañjanesu sabbakammikaamacco viya ca sabbarājakiccesu sabbattha icchitabbā. Tenāha – ‘‘sati ca pana sabbatthikā vuttā bhagavatā. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Cittañhi sati paṭisaraṇaṃ, ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā ca sati, na ca vinā satiyā cittassa paggahaniggaho hotī’’ti.
远离愚痴之人,指的是彻底避开那些对蕴等种种差别没有深入通达的愚钝无慧之人。亲近有智慧的人,指的是亲近那些具备能把握五十种相的生灭智之人。观察甚深智慧的行境,指的是对在甚深蕴等处生起的甚深智慧,审察它的种种差别。心倾向于彼,指的是在站、坐等姿势中,为了让择法觉支生起,心倾注、朝向、转向。对于这样生起的择法觉支,他了知:以阿罗汉道,它的修习达到圆满。巴利
Duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā nāma khandhādibhede anogāḷhapaññānaṃ dummedhapuggalānaṃ ārakāva parivajjanaṃ. Paññavantapuggalasevanā nāma samapaññāsalakkhaṇapariggāhikāya udayabbayapaññāya samannāgatapuggalasevanā. Gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā nāma gambhīresu khandhādīsu pavattāya gambhīrapaññāya pabhedapaccavekkhaṇā. Tadadhimuttatā nāma ṭhānanisajjādīsu dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatā. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
精进觉支——“比丘们,有发勤界、勤奋界、勇猛界。在那里,如理作意、反复修习,这就是让尚未生起的精进觉支得以生起的食,也是让已经生起的精进觉支增长、广大、修习圆满的食。”(《相应部》5.232)精进觉支就是这样生起的。巴利
Vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ārabbhadhātu nikkamadhātu parakkamadhātu, tattha yoniso manasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) evaṃ uppādo hoti.
另外,有十一种法能帮助精进觉支生起:省察恶趣的恐怖、看到修行的利益、省察所行之道、恭敬对待钵食、省察传承的伟大、省察导师的伟大、省察出身的伟大、省察同梵行者的伟大、远离懈怠的人、亲近已发起精进的人,以及一心倾向于精进。巴利
Apica ekādasa dhammā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti apāyabhayapaccavekkhaṇatā ānisaṃsadassāvitā gamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇatā piṇḍapātāpacāyanatā dāyajjamahattapaccavekkhaṇatā satthumahattapaccavekkhaṇatā jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇatā sabrahmacārimahattapaccavekkhaṇatā kusītapuggalaparivajjanatā āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti.
在这里,就算是在地狱里,从遭受五种束缚刑罚开始,即便在承受巨大痛苦的时候;在畜生道,被网、钩、笼等捉住的时候,或者被刺棒、荆棘等打伤,被驱使拉车等时候;在饿鬼界,哪怕经过数千年甚至一整佛间隔那么久,被饥渴逼迫的时候;在黑瘦阿修罗中,身体高达六十肘或八十肘,仅剩皮包骨,承受风、热等苦的时候——在这些时候,精进觉支都不可能生起。只有现在才是你该精勤的时候,比丘!像这样省察恶趣的怖畏,精进觉支就会生起。巴利
Tattha nirayesu pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇato paṭṭhāya mahādukkhaṃ anubhavanakālepi, tiracchānayoniyaṃ jālakkhipakumīnādīhi gahitakālepi, pājanakaṇṭakādippahāratunnassa pana sakaṭavāhanādikālepi, pettivisaye anekānipi vassasahassāni ekaṃ buddhantarampi khuppipāsāhi āturitakālepi, kālakañjikaasuresu saṭṭhihatthaasītihatthappamāṇena aṭṭhicammamatteneva attabhāvena vātātapādidukkhānubhavanakālepi na sakkā vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṃ uppādetuṃ. Ayameva te bhikkhu kālo vīriyakaraṇāyāti evaṃ apāyabhayaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi vīriyasambojjhaṅgo uppajjati.
懈怠的人不可能证得九种出世间法,只有真正发起精进的人才能证得,这就是精进带来的利益。像这样看到精进的好处,精进觉支也会生起。他又想:一切佛、独觉佛和大弟子们走过的路,我也必须走;而懈怠的人根本走不了这条路。像这样反复思量所行之道,精进觉支也会生起。他又想:那些用饮食等来供养我的人,既不是我的亲戚,也不是我的奴仆或雇工,更不是想着依靠我活命才布施这些上好的饮食等,他们是希望自己所做的供养能带来大果报才布施的。导师也不是因为看到我受用这些资具后身体强健、安乐而住才允许我接受资具,而是因为看到我受用这些资具后能修习沙门法、从轮回之苦中解脱出来,才允许我接受资具。现在我却懈怠而住,那就辜负了这一钵饭;只有真正发起精进的人,才称得上恭敬对待钵食。像这样反复思量恭敬钵食的道理,精进觉支也会生起,就像大友长老那样。巴利
‘‘Na sakkā kusītena navalokuttaradhammaṃ laddhuṃ, āraddhavīriyeneva sakkā ayamānisaṃso vīriyassā’’ti evaṃ ānisaṃsadassāvinopi uppajjati. ‘‘Sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhamahāsāvakehi te gatamaggo gantabbo, so ca na sakkā kusītena gantu’’nti evaṃ gamanavīthiṃ paccavekkhantassāpi uppajjati. ‘‘Ye taṃ piṇḍapātādīhi upaṭṭhahanti, ime te manussā neva ñātakā, na dāsakammakarā, nāpi ‘taṃ nissāya jīvissāmā’ti te paṇītāni piṇḍapātādīni denti, atha kho attano kārānaṃ mahapphalataṃ paccāsīsamānā denti, satthārāpi ‘ayaṃ ime paccaye paribhuñjitvā kāyadaḷhībahulo sukhaṃ viharissatī’ti na evaṃ sampassatā tuyhaṃ paccayā anuññātā, atha kho ‘ayaṃ ime paribhuñjamāno samaṇadhammaṃ katvā vaṭṭadukkhato muccissatī’ti te paccayā anuññātā, so dāni tvaṃ kusīto viharanto na taṃ piṇḍaṃ apacāyissasi, āraddhavīriyasseva hi piṇḍapātāpacāyanaṃ nāma hotī’’ti evaṃ piṇḍapātāpacāyanaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi uppajjati mahāmittattherassa viya.
据说,长老住在农夫窟。在他托钵的村子里,有一位大近事女把他当作儿子一样照顾。有一天,她要去森林时对女儿说:“女儿,某个地方有旧米,某个地方有牛奶,某个地方有酥油,某个地方有糖蜜。等你那位圣友兄弟来了,就煮饭,配上牛奶、酥油和糖蜜给他,你自己也吃。我昨天是把煮好的别住食拌着酸粥吃了。”“母亲,那你白天吃什么?”“你放点菜叶,用碎米煮点酸粥放着就行,女儿。”巴利
Thero kira kassakaleṇe nāma paṭivasati. Tassa ca gocaragāme ekā mahāupāsikā theraṃ puttaṃ katvā paṭijaggati. Sā ekadivasaṃ araññaṃ gacchantī dhītaraṃ āha – ‘‘amma asukasmiṃ ṭhāne purāṇataṇḍulā, asukasmiṃ khīraṃ, asukasmiṃ sappi, asukasmiṃ phāṇitaṃ, tava bhātikassa ayyamittassa āgatakāle bhattaṃ pacitvā khīrasappiphāṇitehi saddhiṃ dehi, tvaṃ ca bhuñjeyyāsi, ahaṃ pana hiyyo pakkaṃ pārivāsikabhattaṃ kañjikena bhuttāmhī’’ti. Divā kiṃ bhuñjissasi ammāti? Sākapaṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā kaṇataṇḍulehi ambilayāguṃ pacitvā ṭhapehi ammāti.
长老披好袈裟,正要取出钵时听到了那番话,便这样教诫自己:“听说这位大近事女拌着酸粥吃了别住食,白天也将只吃菜叶碎米酸粥。可是为了你,她却吩咐准备旧米等细软食物。她这样做,并不指望田地、房产、饭食或衣服,而是希求三种成就才作布施。你能给她这些成就吗?还是不能?再说,这团托钵食,你绝不能用带着贪、嗔、痴的心去接受。”于是他把钵放回袋中,解开袋口的结,转身回到农夫窟,把钵放在床下,把袈裟搭在衣竿上,下定决心:“不证得阿拉汉果,我绝不起座离开!”便这样发奋精进,坐了下来。这位长久以来不曾放逸的比丘,增修观禅,就在食前证得了阿拉汉果,如同盛开的莲花一般。这位大漏尽者面带微笑,走了出来。住在洞口树上的天神便说:巴利
Thero cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattaṃ nīharantova taṃ saddaṃ sutvā attānaṃ ovadi – ‘‘mahāupāsikā kira kañjiyena pārivāsikabhattaṃ bhuñji, divāpi kaṇapaṇṇambilayāguṃ bhuñjissati, tuyhaṃ atthāya pana purāṇataṇḍulādīni ācikkhati, taṃ nissāya kho panesā neva khettaṃ na vatthuṃ na bhattaṃ na vatthaṃ paccāsīsati, tisso pana sampattiyo patthayamānā deti, tvaṃ etissā tā sampattiyo dātuṃ sakkhissasi na sakkhissasīti, ayaṃ kho pana piṇḍapāto tayā sarāgena sadosena samohena na sakkā gaṇhitunti pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipitvā gaṇṭhikaṃ muñcitvā nivattitvā kassakaleṇameva gantvā pattaṃ heṭṭhāmañce cīvaraṃ cīvaravaṃse ṭhapetvā arahattaṃ apāpuṇitvā na nikkhamissāmī’’ti vīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā nisīdi. Dīgharattaṃ appamatto hutvā nivutthabhikkhu vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā purebhattameva arahattaṃ patvā vikasitaṃ viya padumaṃ mahākhīṇāsavo sitaṃ karontova nikkhami. Leṇadvāre rukkhamhi adhivatthā devatā –
礼敬你,人中良骏!礼敬你,人中最胜者!
你的诸漏已尽,你是值得受人供养的人,贤友。巴利
‘‘Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama; Yassa te āsavā khīṇā, dakkhiṇeyyosi mārisā’’ti. –
说完这段感叹语后,她又说:“尊者,像您这样的阿罗汉进村乞食,老妇人们供养食物给您这样的阿罗汉后,就能从苦中解脱。”巴利
Evaṃ udānaṃ udānetvā ‘‘bhante, piṇḍāya paviṭṭhānaṃ tumhādisānaṃ arahantānaṃ bhikkhaṃ datvā mahallakitthiyo dukkhā muccissantī’’ti āha.
长老起身,打开门看了看时间,知道还是清晨,就拿起钵和袈裟进了村。那个女孩也把饭做好了,坐在那里望着门口,心里想:“现在我的哥哥该来了,现在该来了。”长老来到她家门口时,她接过钵,盛满拌了酥油和糖蜜的乳粥,放在他手里。长老念了随喜祝福:“愿你快乐。”然后就离开了。她也一直望着他离去。那时长老的肤色非常清净,诸根明净,面容就像从束缚中解脱出来的熟棕榈果一样,格外光耀。大近事女从阿兰若回来,问:“女儿,你哥哥来了吗?”女孩就把全部经过告诉了她。近事女知道:“今天我的儿子完成了出家应做的事。”就说:“女儿,你哥哥在佛陀的教法中得到安乐,不会厌倦了。”巴利
Thero uṭṭhahitvā dvāraṃ vivaritvā kālaṃ olokento pātoyevāti ñatvā pattacīvaramādāya gāmaṃ pāvisi. Dārikāpi bhattaṃ sampādetvā ‘‘idāni me bhātā āgamissati , idāni āgamissatī’’ti dvāraṃ olokayamānā nisīdi. Sā there gharadvāraṃ sampatte pattaṃ gahetvā sappiphāṇitayojitassa khīrapiṇḍapātassa pūretvā hatthe ṭhapesi. Thero ‘‘sukhaṃ hotū’’ti anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Sāpi taṃ olokayamānāva aṭṭhāsi. Therassa hi tadā ativiya parisuddho chavivaṇṇo ahosi, vippasannāni indriyāni, mukhaṃ bandhanā pamuttatālapakkaṃ viya ativiya virocittha. Mahāupāsikā araññā āgantvā ‘‘kiṃ amma, bhātiko te āgato’’ti pucchi. Sā sabbaṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Sā upāsikā ‘‘ajja me puttassa pabbajitakiccaṃ matthakaṃ patta’’nti ñatvā ‘‘abhiramati te amma bhātā buddhasāsane na ukkaṇṭhatī’’ti āha.
“导师留下的遗产实在伟大,也就是所谓的七圣财,懈怠的人根本拿不到。就像行为不端的儿子,父母会说‘这不是我们的儿子’,把他赶出去,父母去世后他就得不到遗产;同样,懈怠的人也得不到这份圣财遗产,只有真正精进的人才能得到。”当他这样反复观察这份遗产的伟大时,喜觉支就会生起。
“你的导师实在伟大:导师入母胎、大出离、成正觉、转法轮、显现双神变、从天降下、舍弃寿行、入般涅槃的时候,十千世界都震动了。你在这样一位伟大导师的教法里出家,却还懈怠,这像话吗?”当他这样反复观察导师的伟大时,喜觉支也会生起。巴利
‘‘Mahantaṃ kho panetaṃ satthu dāyajjaṃ, yadidaṃ sattaariyadhanaṃ nāma, taṃ na sakkā kusītena gahetuṃ. Yathā hi vippaṭipannaṃ puttaṃ mātāpitaro ‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ aputto’ti paribāhiraṃ karonti, so tesaṃ accayena dāyajjaṃ na labhati, evaṃ kusītopi idaṃ ariyadhanadāyajjaṃ na labhati, āraddhavīriyova labhatī’’ti dāyajjamahattataṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati. ‘‘Mahā kho pana te satthā, satthuno hi mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇakālepi abhinikkhamanepi abhisambodhiyampi dhammacakkappavattanayamakapāṭihāriyadevorohaṇa-āyusaṅkhāravossajjanesupi parinibbānakālepi dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha, yuttaṃ nu te evarūpassa satthuno sāsane ‘pabbajitvā kusītena bhavitu’’’nti evaṃ satthumahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati.
他也会通过省察自己的出身而让喜觉支生起:“你现在出身并不低贱,你来自没有混杂的大选王统,生于甘蔗王族,是净饭大王和摩诃摩耶夫人的孙子,是罗睺罗跋陀的弟弟。你既然是这样一个胜者之子,却懈怠度日,这并不合适。”当他这样省察出身的尊贵时,喜觉支也会生起。他也会通过省察同梵行者的伟大而让喜觉支生起:“舍利弗、目犍连以及八十位大弟子,都是靠精进才证悟出世间法的。你作为他们的同梵行者,是要走上这条路,还是不走呢?”当他这样省察同梵行者的伟大时,喜觉支也会生起。他远离那些像吃饱了的蟒蛇一样身心懈怠放逸的懈怠者,亲近那些已发起精进、心志坚定的人,并且在站立、坐着等各种姿势中,其心为发起精进而倾向于、朝向、斜向于彼,喜觉支也会生起。对于这样生起的喜觉支,他了知:通过阿拉汉道,修习就达到圆满了。巴利
Jātiyāpi – ‘‘tvaṃ idāni na lāmakajātiko, asambhinnāya mahāsammatapaveṇiyā āgato, ukkākarājavaṃse jātosi, suddhodhanamahārājassa mahāmāyādeviyā ca nattā, rāhulabhaddassa kaniṭṭho, tayā nāma evarūpena jinaputtena hutvā na yuttaṃ kusītena viharitu’’nti evaṃ jātimahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati. ‘‘Sāriputtamoggallānā ceva asīti ca mahāsāvakā vīriyeneva lokuttaradhammaṃ paṭivijjhiṃsu, tvaṃ etesaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ maggaṃ paṭipajjissasi na paṭipajjissasī’’ti evaṃ sabrahmacārimahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati. Kucchiṃ pūretvā ṭhitaajagarasadise vissaṭṭhakāyikacetasikavīriye kusītapuggale parivajjantassāpi, āraddhavīriye pahitatte puggale sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu vīriyuppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
关于喜觉支,经文里说:“比丘们,有一些法能作为喜觉支生起的基础。对它们反复进行如理作意,这就是让尚未生起的喜觉支得以生起的食,也是让已经生起的喜觉支进一步增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。”(《相应部》5.232)喜觉支就是这样生起的。其中,喜本身就是所谓“能作为喜觉支生起基础的法”;而能令它生起的作意,就叫如理作意。巴利
Pītisambojjhaṅgassa – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha pītiyeva pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma, tassa uppādakamanasikāro yonisomanasikāro nāma.
另外,有十一种法能帮助喜觉支生起:佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、施随念、天随念、寂止随念、避开粗野的人、亲近柔和的人、省察能让人生起净信的经典,以及把心倾向于此。巴利
Apica ekādasa dhammā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti buddhānussati dhammasaṅghasīlacāgadevatānussati upasamānussati lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā siniddhapuggalasevanatā pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇatā tadadhimuttatāti.
随念佛的功德时,喜觉支会生起,遍满全身,一直到近行定。随念法、僧的功德时也是这样;长时间毫无缺损地守护四遍清净戒,回顾自己的戒行时也是这样;在家人回顾自己所持的十戒或五戒时也是这样;遇到饥荒等怖畏时,把上好的饮食布施给同梵行者,然后回顾“我们做了这样的布施”这份舍德时也是这样;在家人那时回顾对持戒者所作的布施时也是这样;回顾“那些天神具备怎样的功德而得以生为天神,那样的功德在我身上也存在”时也是这样;回顾“被等至镇伏的烦恼,六十年、七十年都不再现行”时也是这样;避开那些粗劣的人——他们礼敬塔庙、菩提树、长老时做得不恭敬,显出粗劣的样子,对佛等没有净信与敬爱,像驴背上的尘土一样粗涩——避开这种人时,喜觉支也会生起;亲近那些对佛等净信深厚、心柔软温润的人时,也会生起;回顾那些阐明三宝功德、令人净信的经典时,也会生起;在站立、坐下等威仪中,为了让喜生起,把心倾向、朝向、投向它时,也会生起。当它这样生起之后,他就了知:这个喜觉支依阿罗汉道而达到修习圆满。巴利
Buddhaguṇe anussarantassāpi hi yāva upacārā sakalasarīraṃ pharamāno pītisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. Dhammasaṅghaguṇe anussarantassāpi, dīgharattaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā rakkhitaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, gihino dasasīlapañcasīlaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, dubbhikkhabhayādīsu paṇītaṃ bhojanaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ datvā ‘‘evaṃ nāma adamhā’’ti cāgaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, gihinopi evarūpe kāle sīlavantānaṃ dinnadānaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, yehi guṇehi samannāgatā devatā devattaṃ pattā, tathārūpānaṃ guṇānaṃ attani atthitaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, ‘‘samāpattiyā vikkhambhitā kilesā saṭṭhipi, sattatipi vassāni na samudācarantī’’ti paccavekkhantassāpi, cetiyadassanabodhidassanatheradassanesu asakkaccakiriyāya saṃsūcitalūkhabhāve buddhādīsu pasādasinehābhāvena gadrabhapiṭṭhe rajasadise lūkhapuggale parivajjantassāpi, buddhādīsu pasādabahule muducitte siniddhapuggale sevantassāpi, ratanattayaguṇaparidīpake pasādanīye suttante paccavekkhantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu pītiuppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
关于轻安觉支,它的生起是这样的:比丘们,有身轻安和心轻安。在那里,反复如理作意,就是尚未生起的轻安觉支得以生起的食,也是已经生起的轻安觉支得以增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。巴利
Passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kāyapassaddhi cittapassaddhi, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti evaṃ uppādo hoti.
另外,有七种法能帮助生起轻安觉支:吃好的食物、处在舒适的气候里、采用舒服的姿势动作、保持中舍的用功、避开身体躁动的人、亲近身体轻安的人,以及内心倾向于轻安。巴利
Apica satta dhammā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti paṇītabhojanasevanatā utusukhasevanatā iriyāpathasukhasevanatā majjhattapayogatā sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanatā passaddhakāyapuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti.
吃下殊胜、柔滑、合宜的食物时,或者在寒冷、炎热等气候中,在站立、行走等姿势中,采用适合的气候和姿势时,轻安也会生起。不过,这话不是针对那种大人物种性、对一切气候和一切姿势都能忍受的人来说的。对于在气候和姿势上有适应与不适应之分的人,只要他避开不适应的气候和姿势,采用适应的,轻安也会生起。所谓中舍的加行,就是省察自己和他人都是业的所有者,依靠这种中舍的加行,轻安也会生起。有人拿着土块、棍棒等伤害别人而行,远离这种身体躁动的人,亲近那些手脚收摄、身体轻安的人,为了让心在站立、坐下等姿势中倾向于、朝向、倾斜于生起轻安,轻安也会生起。对于这样生起的轻安,他了知:通过阿罗汉道,它的修习达到圆满。巴利
Paṇītañhi siniddhaṃ sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjantassāpi, sītuṇhesu utūsu ṭhānādīsu iriyāpathesu sappāyaṃ utuṃ ca iriyāpathaṃ ca sevantassāpi passaddhi uppajjati. Yo pana mahāpurisajātiko sabbautuiriyāpathakkhamova hoti, na taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yassa sabhāgavisabhāgatā atthi, tasseva visabhāge utuiriyāpathe vajjetvā sabhāge sevantassāpi uppajjati. Majjhattapayogo vuccati attano ca parassa ca kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇā, iminā majjhattapayogena uppajjati. Yo leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi paraṃ viheṭhayamānova vicarati. Evarūpaṃ sāraddhakāyaṃ puggalaṃ parivajjantassāpi, saṃyatapādapāṇiṃ passaddhakāyaṃ puggalaṃ sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu passaddhiuppādanatthāya ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
定觉支的生起是这样的:正如经中所说:“比丘们,有止相,有不散乱相。在那里,反复地如理作意,这就是尚未生起的定觉支得以生起的食,也是已经生起的定觉支得以增长、广大、修习、圆满的食。”(《相应部》5.232)在这里,止本身就是止相;从“不散乱”这个含义来说,它也是不散乱相。巴利
Samādhisambojjhaṅgassa – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, samathanimittaṃ abyagganimittaṃ, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha samathova samathanimittaṃ, avikkhepaṭṭhena ca abyagganimittanti.
另外,有十一种法能帮助定觉支生起:依处清净、诸根平衡、善巧于相、适时策励心、适时抑制心、适时令心喜悦、适时令心舍置、远离未得定的人、亲近已得定的人、省察禅那与解脱、心倾向于定。其中,依处清净和诸根平衡,应当依照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Apica ekādasa dhammā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti vatthuvisadakiriyatā indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā nimittakusalatā samaye cittassa paggahaṇatā samaye cittassa niggahaṇatā samaye sampahaṃsanatā samaye ajjhupekkhanatā asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā samāhitapuggalasevanatā jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇatā tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha vatthuvisadakiriyatā ca indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā ca vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
善巧于相,就是指善于把握遍相的取相。适时策励心,是指当心因为精进太过松弛等原因而变得消沉时,就在那个时候通过发起择法觉支和精进觉支来策励那颗心。适时抑制心,是指当心因为精进太过紧绷等原因而变得掉举时,就在那个时候通过发起轻安觉支、定觉支和舍觉支来抑制那颗心。适时令心喜悦,是指当心因为运用智慧的力度薄弱,或者因为还没有证得寂静之乐而变得没有滋味时,就在那个时候通过省察八种悚惧事来令它生起悚惧。八种悚惧事就是:生、老、病、死这四种,恶趣之苦是第五,过去以轮回为根源的苦,未来以轮回为根源的苦,现在以寻觅食物为根源的苦。再通过随念三宝的功德来让净信生起。这就叫作适时令心喜悦。巴利
Nimittakusalatā nāma kasiṇanimittassa uggahaṇakusalatā. Samaye cittassa paggahaṇatāti yasmiṃ samaye atisithilavīriyatādīhi līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayavīriyasambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanena tassa paggahaṇaṃ. Samaye cittassa niggahaṇatāti yasmiṃ samaye accāraddhavīriyatādīhi uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanena tassa niggahaṇaṃ. Samaye sampahaṃsanatāti yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paññāpayogamandatāya vā upasamasukhānadhigamena vā nirassādaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye aṭṭhasaṃvegavatthupaccavekkhaṇena saṃvejeti. Aṭṭha saṃvegavatthūni nāma jātijarābyādhimaraṇāni cattāri, apāyadukkhaṃ pañcamaṃ, atīte vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, anāgate vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, paccuppanne āhārapariyeṭṭhimūlakaṃ dukkhanti. Ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena ca pasādaṃ janeti. Ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘samaye sampahaṃsanatā’’ti.
所谓“适时舍置”,是指当心依靠正行道,不昏沉、不掉举、不枯燥,在所缘上平稳运转,进入奢摩他的轨道时,那时心对策励、抑制和令喜悦不再起作用,就像御者对于已经平稳奔跑的马一样。这就叫作“适时舍置”。所谓“远离未得定的人”,是指远远避开那些还没有达到近行定或安止定、心散乱的人。所谓“亲近得定的人”,是指依靠近行定或安止定,去亲近、结交、侍奉那些心得定的人。所谓“心倾向于那一点”,是指在行、立、坐、卧等处,心只为了生起定而朝向定、倾向定、偏向定。这样修行的人,定觉支就会生起。对于已经这样生起的定觉支,他了知:通过阿拉汉道,它的修习已经圆满。巴利
Samaye ajjhupekkhanatā nāma yasmiṃ samaye sammāpaṭipattiṃ āgamma alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ anirassādaṃ ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ samathavīthipaṭipannaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadāssa paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu na byāpāraṃ āpajjati sārathi viya samappavattesu. Assesu. Ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘samaye ajjhupekkhanatā’’ti. Asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā nāma upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā appattānaṃ vikkhittacittānaṃ puggalānaṃ ārakā parivajjanaṃ. Samāhitapuggalasevanatā nāma upacārena vā appanāya vā samāhitacittānaṃ sevanā bhajanā payirupāsanā. Tadadhimuttatā nāma ṭhānanisajjādīsu samādhiuppādanatthaṃyeva ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatā. Evañhi paṭipajjato esa uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
舍觉支的生起是这样的:“比丘们,有能作为舍觉支生起基础的法。对这些法如理作意并反复修习,就是尚未生起的舍觉支得以生起的食,也是已经生起的舍觉支得以增长、扩大、修习、圆满的食。”(《相应部》5.232)在这里,所谓“能作为舍觉支生起基础的法”,指的就是舍本身。巴利
Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha upekkhāyeva upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma.
另外,有五种法能帮助舍觉支生起:对众生的中舍、对诸行的中舍、避开偏爱众生与诸行的人、亲近对众生与诸行保持中舍的人,以及内心倾向于舍。巴利
Apica pañca dhammā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti sattamajjhattatā saṅkhāramajjhattatā sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatā sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti.
在这里,通过两种方式生起对有情的中舍:一是省察业为自己的所有——“你是依自己的业而来,也将依自己的业而去;这个人也是依自己的业而来,将依自己的业而去,你贪恋他做什么?”二是省察没有有情——“从究竟真理来看,根本没有有情,你贪恋他做什么?”通过这两种方式生起对有情的中舍。通过两种方式生起对诸行的中舍:一是省察无主——“这件袈裟会逐渐变色、变旧,最终成为擦脚布,被扔在棍子尖上丢弃;如果它有主人,就不会让它这样毁坏。”二是省察暂时性——“这是不持久的,只是暂时的。”通过这两种方式生起对诸行的中舍。对袈裟如此,对钵等物品也应当这样套用。巴利
Tattha dvīhākārehi sattamajjhattataṃ samuṭṭhāpeti – ‘‘tvaṃ attano kammena āgantvā attano kammena gamissasi, esopi attano kammena āgantvā attano kammena gamissati, tvaṃ kaṃ kelāyasī’’ti evaṃ kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇena ca, ‘‘paramatthato sattoyeva natthi, so tvaṃ kaṃ kelāyasī’’ti evaṃ nissattapaccavekkhaṇena ca. Dvīhevākārehi saṅkhāramajjhattataṃ samuṭṭhāpeti – ‘‘idaṃ cīvaraṃ anupubbena vaṇṇavikāraṃ ceva jiṇṇabhāvaṃ ca upagantvā pādapuñchanacoḷakaṃ hutvā yaṭṭhikoṭiyā chaḍḍanīyaṃ bhavissati, sace panassa sāmiko bhaveyya, nāssa evaṃ vinassituṃ dadeyyā’’ti evaṃ asāmikabhāvaṃ paccavekkhaṇena, ‘‘anaddhaniyaṃ idaṃ tāvakālika’’nti evaṃ tāvakālikatāpaccavekkhaṇena ca. Yathā ca cīvare, evaṃ pattādīsupi yojanā kātabbā.
远离贪恋有情和贪恋诸行的人:这里,如果一个人——不管是在家人贪爱自己的儿女等,还是出家人贪爱自己的弟子、同参、亲教师等——亲手给他们剃头发、缝衣服、洗袈裟、染袈裟、煮钵等,片刻不见就四处张望:“某某沙弥在哪里?某某小比丘在哪里?”像迷路的鹿一样东看西看;别人为了剃发等事求他“请暂时让某某来一下”,他也不放人,说:“我们自己都舍不得让他做自己的事,你们把他带去只会让他受累。”这种人就叫贪恋有情的人。如果有人贪爱自己的钵、袈裟、铜碗、游方杖等物,连别人用手碰一下都不让,别人临时借用时,他说:“我自己爱惜这东西都舍不得用,凭什么给你们?”这种人就叫贪恋诸行的人。如果有人对这两类事物都保持中立、无所谓,就叫对有情和诸行保持中舍的人。如此,舍觉支会在这样的人身上生起:他远离贪恋有情和诸行的人,亲近对有情和诸行保持中舍的人,并且在行、住、坐、卧等一切姿势中,让心倾向于生起舍觉支。当它这样生起之后,他清楚地知道:通过阿罗汉道,它的修习就圆满了。巴利
Sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatāti ettha yo puggalo gihi vā attano puttadhītādike, pabbajito vā attano antevāsikasamānupajjhāyakādike mamāyati, sahattheneva nesaṃ kesacchedanasūcikammacīvaradhovanarajanapattapacanādīni karoti, muhuttampi apassanto ‘‘asuko sāmaṇero kuhiṃ, asuko daharo kuhi’’nti bhantamigo viya ito cito ca āloketi , aññena kesacchedanādīnaṃ atthāya ‘‘muhuttaṃ tāva asukaṃ pesethā’’ti yācīyamānopi ‘‘amhepi taṃ attano kammaṃ na kārema, tumhe taṃ gahetvā kilamessathā’’ti na deti. Ayaṃ sattakelāyano nāma. Yo pana pattacīvarathālakakattarayaṭṭhiādīni mamāyati, aññassa hatthena parāmasitumpi na deti, tāvakālikaṃ yācito ‘‘mayampi idaṃ mamāyantā na paribhuñjāma, tumhākaṃ kiṃ dassāmā’’ti vadati. Ayaṃ saṅkhārakelāyano nāma. Yo pana tesu dvīsupi vatthūsu majjhatto udāsino. Ayaṃ sattasaṅkhāramajjhatto nāma. Iti ayaṃ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo evarūpaṃ sattasaṅkhārakelāyanaṃ puggalaṃ ārakā parivajjantassāpi, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalaṃ sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu taduppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotīti pajānāti.
如是或于内这句是说:像这样,先执持自己身上的七觉支,或者执持别人身上的;有时执持自己的觉支,有时执持别人的觉支,然后就在诸法之中,随观诸法而安住。这里觉支的生起与灭去,应当从它们生起和坏灭的角度来理解。从这里往后,所说的方式和前面一样。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā satta sambojjhaṅge pariggaṇhitvā, parassa vā, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa bojjhaṅge pariggaṇhitvā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha bojjhaṅgānaṃ nibbattinirodhavasena veditabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
在这里,只要把把握觉支的念和“苦圣谛”这样连接起来理解,就应该知道:这位把握觉支的比丘的解脱门。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Kevalañhi idha bojjhaṅgapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā bojjhaṅgapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
四谛部分的注释巴利
Catusaccapabbavaṇṇanā
119 119. 这样,按七觉支把法随观分析完之后,现在为了按四圣谛来分析,又接着说了“再者,诸比丘……”等话。巴利
119. Evaṃ sattabojjhaṅgavasena dhammānupassanaṃ vibhajitvā idāni catusaccavasena vibhajituṃ puna caparantiādimāha.
在这里,“如实了知此是苦”的意思是:除了渴爱之外,对三界中的诸法,按照它们各自的真实本性了知“这是苦”;对于能产生、能生起这苦的先前渴爱,了知“这是苦集”;对于两者都不再生起的涅槃,了知“这是苦灭”;对于遍知苦、舍断集、证悟灭的圣道,了知“这是导向苦灭之道”,按照它们的真实本性了知。这就是这段话的含义。其余关于圣谛的讨论,在《清净道论》中已经详细说明了。巴利
Tattha idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti ṭhapetvā taṇhaṃ tebhūmake dhamme ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti yathāsabhāvato pajānāti, tasseva kho pana dukkhassa janikaṃ samuṭṭhāpikaṃ purimataṇhaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti, ubhinnaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’’ti, dukkhaparijānanaṃ samudayapajahanaṃ nirodhasacchikaraṇaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti yathāsabhāvato pajānātīti attho. Avasesā ariyasaccakathā visuddhimagge vitthāritāyeva.
就这样,或者把握自己身上的四圣谛,或者把握他人身上的四圣谛,或者有时把握自己身上的、有时把握他人身上的四圣谛,然后在诸法上随观诸法而安住。这里四圣谛的“生灭”,则应当根据四种圣谛各自的情况,从生起和止息的角度来理解。从这里往后,解说方式都和前面所说的一样。巴利
Iti ajjhattaṃ vāti evaṃ attano vā cattāri saccāni pariggaṇhitvā, parassa vā, kālena vā attano, kālena vā parassa cattāri saccāni pariggaṇhitvā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayavayā panettha catunnaṃ saccānaṃ yathāsambhavato uppattinivattivasena veditabbā. Ito paraṃ vuttanayameva.
在这里,只要把把握四圣谛的念和“苦圣谛”这样连接起来理解,就能知道那位把握圣谛的比丘的出离之门。其余部分和前面一样。巴利
Kevalañhi idha catusaccapariggāhikā sati dukkhasaccanti evaṃ yojanaṃ katvā saccapariggāhakassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
到这里为止,一共讲了二十一种业处,也就是:入出息念、四威仪、四正知、三十二身分、四界差别、九种墓墟观、受随观、心随观、盖的把握、蕴的把握、处的把握、觉支的把握、谛的把握。其中,入出息念、三十二身分和九种墓墟观,这十一种属于安止业处。不过,长部诵者大西瓦长老说:“九种墓墟观是作为过患随观来说的。”所以按照他的看法,安止业处只有两种,其余的都是近行业处。那么,在所有这些业处当中,都会生起倾向吗?不会。因为在威仪、正知、盖和觉支当中,倾向不会生起,在其余的业处当中才会生起。可是大西瓦长老说:“在这些当中也会生起倾向。因为他是这样把握的:我有四威仪吗?还是没有?我有四正知吗?还是没有?我有五盖吗?还是没有?我有七觉支吗?还是没有?所以,在一切处都会生起倾向。”巴利
Ettāvatā ānāpānaṃ catuiriyāpathaṃ catusampajaññaṃ dvattiṃsākāraṃ catudhātuvavatthānaṃ navasivathikā vedanānupassanā cittānupassanā nīvaraṇapariggaho khandhapariggaho āyatanapariggaho bojjhaṅgapariggaho saccapariggahoti ekavīsati kammaṭṭhānāni vuttāni. Tesu ānāpānaṃ dvattiṃsākāro navasivathikāti ekādasa appanākammaṭṭhānāni honti. Dīghabhāṇakamahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘navasivathikā ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttā’’ti āha. Tasmā tassa matena dveyeva appanākammaṭṭhānāni, sesāni upacārakammaṭṭhānāni. Kiṃ panetesu sabbesu abhiniveso jāyatīti? Na jāyati. Iriyāpathasampajaññanīvaraṇabojjhaṅgesu hi abhiniveso na jāyati, sesesu jāyatīti. Mahāsīvatthero panāha – ‘‘etesupi abhiniveso jāyati, ayañhi atthi nu kho me cattāro iriyāpathā, udāhu natthi, atthi nu kho me catusampajaññaṃ, udāhu natthi, atthi nu kho me pañcanīvaraṇā, udāhu natthi, atthi nu kho me sattabojjhaṅgā, udāhu natthīti evaṃ pariggaṇhāti, tasmā sabbattha abhiniveso jāyatī’’ti.
137 “诸比丘,无论何人”:就是指比丘、比丘尼、近事男或近事女。“应如此修习”:就是按照开头所说的修习次第来修习。“可预期”:意思是应当预期,必定会发生。“证知”:指阿罗汉果。“若还有余取”:就是如果执取的残余还在、还没有完全断尽。“不来”:就是不来果的状态。巴利
137.Yo hi koci, bhikkhaveti yo hi koci bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā upāsako vā upāsikā vā. Evaṃ bhāveyyāti ādito paṭṭhāya vuttena bhāvanānukkamena bhāveyya. Pāṭikaṅkhanti paṭikaṅkhitabbaṃ, avassaṃ bhāvīti attho. Aññāti arahattaṃ. Sati vā upādiseseti upādānasese vā sati aparikkhīṇe. Anāgāmitāti anāgāmibhāvo.
像这样,用七年时间说明了教法能引导人走向解脱之后,为了再显示在比那更短的时间里也能做到,又说了“诸比丘,且停下……”等话。这一切都是针对中等根器、可以引导的人说的。至于利根的人,则是这样说的:“早上受到教导,傍晚就能证得殊胜;傍晚受到教导,早上就能证得殊胜。”巴利
Evaṃ sattannaṃ vassānaṃ vasena sāsanassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ dassetvā puna tato appatarepi kāle dassento ‘‘tiṭṭhantu, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Sabbampi cetaṃ majjhimasseva neyyapuggalassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tikkhapaññaṃ pana sandhāya – ‘‘pāto anusiṭṭho sāyaṃ visesaṃ adhigamissati, sāyaṃ anusiṭṭho pāto visesaṃ adhigamissatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.345) vuttaṃ.
世尊这样开示“比丘们,我的教法是如此导向出离的”,然后为了把在二十一处以阿罗汉果为顶点所说的教法作个总结,说道:“比丘们,这是一条唯一的道路……前面所说的那段话,正是针对这个而说的。”其余的内容意思都很浅显易懂。巴利
Iti bhagavā ‘‘evaṃniyyānikaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāsana’’nti dassetvā ekavīsatiyāpi ṭhānesu arahattanikūṭena desitaṃ desanaṃ niyyātento ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo…pe… iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti āha. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti.